Link-Belt Crane 298HSL Crane Workshop Manual with Mitsubishi 6M70 6M70-TL Workshop Manual

Page 1

MODEL LINK-BELT 298 HSL BOOK No. 1113 SERIAL No.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Workshop Manual begins on page 1057 Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts Contact: Email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 2696731638

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER The crane serial number is on the crane rating manual which is located inside the operator's cab. The serial number should always be furnished when ordering parts for the crane or when corresponding with the distributor or factory concerning the crane. Providing the serial number is the only way of ensuring the correct parts and/or information can be furnished. In the event the serial number plate is not readable, a number is stamped on the upper revolving frame which can be used to identify the crane. This number is located on the front face of the upper frame, between the boom foot mounting lugs.

Link-Belt Construction Equipment Company

F00056


Engine part numbers reference Link-Belt Crane Mitsubishi 6M70 engine 4648534 Hose, intercooler, air to air, 4411793 Hose, intercooler, air to air, 4648374 Hose, water, upper radiator hose 3107011 Hose, water, lower radiator hose ME352818 Hose, water cooling line to thermostat bypass 4641344-907 Water Pump 4665181 Belt Set ( three belts ) 4640773 Fan, engine cooling fan, ME355788 Injector tube with seal ME356331 Coolant pipe to air compressor ME356327 Coolant pipe to air compressor ME354629 Oil filter head assembly, oil filter base ME356765 > 4641344-907 Water Pump ME443076 Fan Drive Assembly, engine cooling ME443528 Belt tensioner assembly, water pump drive ME443421 Thermostat Case ME180616 Thermostat cover ME994310 Thermostat set, two thermostats with gasket ME053975 Boot, hose connector turbocharger to air intake pipe Email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com www.HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com


General Information and Manual Layout This manual is divided into 3 Sections separated Tabs. The front Section is the Workshop Instruction portion of the manual. It contains the removal/installation (R&I) and the assembly/disassembly (Recondition) instructions for major crane components. These pages are coded with a “W” in front of the Section/Group/Page numbers. Example, the pages coded/numbered W2-4-1 through W24-94, contain the instructions for R&I and Recondition of the main pump. (Code W2-4-1 identifies a page in the Workshop Instruction Manual, Section 2, Group 4, and Page 1.) There are “Contents” pages at the beginning of each sub-section, in front of pages W1-1-1, W2-1-1, and W3-1-1. The 2nd and 3rd Sections are the Principles of Operation/Specifications and Troubleshooting portions of the manual. These pages are coded with a “T” in front of the Section/Group/Page numbers. Example, the pages coded/numbered T1-3-1 through T1-3-10, contain the specifications for the engine and engine accessories.The Section behind Tab 1 contains the specifications and how main components operate to perform their intended functions. (Code T1-3-1 identifies a page in the Principles of Operation/Specifications/Troubleshooting Manual, Section 1, Group 3, and Page 1.) There are “Contents” pages at the beginning of each sub-section, in front of pages T1-2-1, T2-1-1, and T3-1-1. The Section behind Tab 2 contains Performance Tests/Standards and Troubleshooting for major components. There are “Contents” pages at the beginning of each sub-section, in front of pages T4-1-1 and T5-1-1.

BOOK1113 P3091410

Page 1 of 4


Terms/Terminology, Nomenclature, and Abbreviations The following terms/terminology, nomenclature, and abbreviations are given to help identify common terms/terminology, nomenclature, and abbreviations used in this manual that, due to language translations, may not be easily understood. Auxiliary Hoisting Mechanism Boom Pendant Rope Center Joint Crawler Shoe Derricking Derricking Drum Derricking Mechanism Derricking Motor Drive Tumbler Hoisting Drum Hoisting Drum Control Valve Hoisting Mechanism Hoisting Motor Pump Mechanism Screwed-In Connection Slewing Slewing Frame Slewing Mechanism Slewing Motor Slewing Pump Slewing Ring Stopper Take-Up Tumbler Travel Mechanism Upperstructure

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Auxiliary Winch Assembly / Winch Drum Boom Pendants Rotating Joint Track Shoe Boom Hoist Boom Hoist Drum Boom Hoist System Boom Hoist Motor Travel Drive Sprocket Winch Drum Winch Drum Control Valve Winch Assembly / Winch Drum Winch Motor Pump Assembly Threaded Connection Swing Upper Revolving Frame Swing Reduction Unit Swing Motor Swing Pump Turntable Bearing Plug Track Take-Up Idler Travel Motor and Reduction Gears Crane Upper

Page 2 of 4


Conversion Tables Length Conversion Table millimeter, mm 1 10 1000 25.40 304.8

centimeter, cm 0.1 1 100 2.540 30.48

mile, mi 1 0.6214

kilometer, km 1.6093 1

meter, m 0.001 0.01 1 0.0254 0.3048

inch, in., " 0.03937 0.3937 39.37 1 12

foot, ft., ' 0.00328 0.03281 3.281 0.08333 1

square meter, m2

square inch, in2

square foot, ft2

0.000001 0.0001 1 0.000645 0.09290

0.00155 0.155 1550 1 144

0.001076 10.764 0.006944 1

Area Conversion Table square millimeter, mm2 1 100 1 000 000 645.2 92903.0

square centimeter, cm2 0.01 1 1 0000 6.452 929.03

Volume Conversion Table cubic centimeter, cm3, cc 1 1 000 000 16.39 28320

cubic meter, m3

cubic inch, in3

cubic foot, ft3

0.000001 1 0.0000164 0.02832

0.0610 61024 1 1728

0.0000353 35.31 0.000579 1

gallon, gal. 1 0.004329 0.2642

cubic inch, in3 231 1 61.02

liter, lit., l 3.785 0.01639 1

Page 3 of 4


Conversion Tables – (continued) Weight Conversion Table gram, g 1 1000 28.349 453.592 1 000 000 907185

kilogram, kg 0.001 1 0.02835 0.4536 1 000 907.2

ounce, oz 0.03527 35.27 1 16 35274 32 000

pound, lb. 0.0022 2.205 0.0625 1 2205 2000

metric ton, t

short ton, s.t.

0.001 0.00002835 0.0004536 1 0.9072

0.001102 0.00003125 0.0005 1.102 1

Pressure Conversion Table kg/cm3 1.0197 1 0.07031

bar 1 0.9807 0.06895

lb./in2, PSI 14.50 14.22 1

Work, Energy Conversion Table kg.cm 1 100 13.83 1.1525

kg.m 0.01 1 0.1383 0.01153

foot-pound, ft.-lb. 0.0723 7.233 1 0.08333

inch-pound,.in-lb. 0.8681 86.81 12 1

Centigrade-Fahrenheit Conversion Table °F -450 -400 -350 -300 -250

°C -267.78 -240.00 -212.22 -184.44 -156.67

°F -200 -150 -100 -50 0

°C -128.89 -101.11 -73.33 -45.56 -17.78

°F 5 10 15 20 25

°C -15.00 -12.22 -9.44 -6.67 -3.89

°F 30 35 40 45 50

°C -1.11 1.67 4.44 7.22 10.00

°F 55 60 65 70 75

°C 12.78 15.56 18.33 21.11 23.89

°F 80 85 90 95 100

°C 26.67 29.44 32.22 35.00 37.78

°F 150 200 250 300 350

°C 65.56 93.33 121.11 148.89 176.67

°F 400 450 500 550 600

°C 204.44 232.22 260.00 287.78 315.56

Page 4 of 4


INTRODUCTION TO THE READER x This manual is written for an experienced technician to provide technical information needed to maintain and repair this machine.

• If you have any questions or comments, or if you find any errors regarding the contents of this manual, please contact a Link-Belt Distributor.

• Be sure to thoroughly read this manual for correct product information and service procedures.

ADDITIONAL REFERENCES x Please refer to the materials listed below in addition to this manual.

• Operation Manual of the Engine • Parts Catalog of the Engine

• The Operator’s Manual • The Parts Catalog

PAGE NUMBER x Each page has a number, located on the center lower part of the page, and each number contains the following information: Example : T 1-3-5

Consecutive Page Number for Each Group Group Number Section Number T: Technical Manual

W: Workshop Manual

IN-01


INTRODUCTION SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL AND HEADLINE NOTATIONS In this manual, the following safety alert symbol and signal words are used to alert the reader to the potential for personal injury of machine damage. This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Never fail to follow the safety instructions prescribed along with the safety alert symbol. The safety alert symbol is also used to draw attention to component/part weights. To avoid injury and damage, be sure to use appropriate lifting techniques and equipment when lifting heavy parts.

x

CAUTION: Indicated potentially hazardous situation which could, if not avoided, result in personal injury or death.

x IMPORTANT: Indicates a situation which, if not conformed to the instructions, could result in damage to the machine.

x

NOTE: Indicates supplementary technical information or know-how.

UNITS USED Example : 24.5 MPa (250 kgf/cm2, 3560 psi)

x SI Units (International System of Units) are used in this manual. MKSA system units and English units are also indicated in parenthheses just behind SI units.

Quantity Length Volume

Weight Force Torque

To Convert From mm mm L L m3 kg N N N m N m

Into in ft US gal US qt yd3 lb kgf lbf kgf m lbf ft

A table for conversion from SI units to other system units is shown below for reference purposees.

Multiply By 0.03937 0.003281 0.2642 1.057 1.308 2.205 0.10197 0.2248 1.0197 0.7375

Quantity Pressure Power Temperature Velocity Flow rate

IN-02

To Convert From MPa MPa kW kW qC km/h min-1 L/min mL/rev

Into

Multiply By 2

kgf/cm psi PS HP qF mph rpm US gpm cc/rev

10.197 145.0 1.360 1.341 qCu1.8+32 0.6214 1.0 0.2642 1.0


SAFETY RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION x This is the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL. • When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential for personal injury.

• Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices.

001-E01A-0001-2

SA-001

UNDERSTAND SIGNAL WORDS x On machine safety signs, signal words designating the degree or level of hazard - DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION - are used with the safety alert symbol.

• DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

• WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

• CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

• DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near specific hazards. General precautions are listed on CAUTION safety signs.

x CAUTION also calls attention to safety messages in this manual.

x To avoid confusing machine protection with personal safety messages, a signal word IMPORTANT indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage to the machine.

x NOTE indicates an additional explanation for an element of information. 002-E01A-0461-6

S-1

SA-1223


SAFETY FOLLOW SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS x Carefully read and follow all safety signs on the machine and all safety messages in this manual.

x Safety signs should be installed, maintained and replaced when necessary.

• If a safety sign or this manual is damaged or missing, order a replacement from your authorized dealer in the same way you order other replacement parts (be sure to state machine model and serial number when ordering).

SA-003

x Learn how to operate the machine and its controls correctly and safely.

x Allow only trained, qualified, authorized personnel to operate the machine.

x Keep your machine in proper working condition. • Unauthorized modifications of the machine may impair its function and/or safety and affect machine life.

x The safety messages in this SAFETY chapter are intended to illustrate basic safety procedures of machines. However it is impossible for these safety messages to cover every hazardous situation you may encounter. If you have any questions, you should first consult your supervisor and/or your authorized dealer before operating or performing maintenance work on the machine. 003-E01B-0003-5

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES x Be prepared if a fire starts or if an accident occurs. • Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher on hand. • Thoroughly read and understand the label attached on the fire extinguisher to use it properly.

• Establish emergency procedure guidelines to cope with fires and accidents.

• Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospital, and fire department posted near your telephone.

SA-437

004-E01A-0437-3

S-2


SAFETY WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING x Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job. You may need: A hard hat Safety shoes Safety glasses, goggles, or face shield Heavy gloves Hearing protection Reflective clothing Wet weather gear Respirator or filter mask. Be sure to wear the correct equipment and clothing for the job. Do not take any chances.

SA-438

• Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or other items that can catch on control levers or other parts of the machine.

x Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating the machine. 005-E01A-0438-4

PROTECT AGAINST NOISE x Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing.

• Wear a suitable hearing protective mechanism such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortably loud noises.

SA-434 006-E01A-0434-2

INSPECT MACHINE x Inspect your machine carefully each day or shift by walking around it before you start it to avoid personal injury.

• In the walk-around inspection, be sure to cover all points described in the “PRE-START INSPECTION” chapter.

SA-435

007-E01A-0435-2

S-3


SAFETY USE HANDHOLDS AND STEPS x Falling is one of the major causes of personal injury. • When you get on and off the machine, always face the machine and maintain a three-point contact with the steps and handrails.

• Do not use any controls as handholds. • Never jump on or off the machine. Never mount or dismount a moving machine.

• Be careful of slippery conditions on platforms, steps,

SA-439

and handrails when leaving the machine.

008-E01A-0439-3

ADJUST THE OPERATOR’S SEAT x A poorly adjusted seat for either the operator or for the work at hand may quickly fatigue the operator leading to misoperations.

• The seat should be adjusted whenever changing the operator for the machine.

• The operator should be able to fully depress the pedals and to correctly operate the control levers with his back against the seat back.

• If not, move the seat forward or backward, and check again.

009-E01A-0464-3

S-4

SA-464


SAFETY FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT (IF EQUIPPED) x If the machine should overturn, the operator may become injured and/or thrown from the cab. Additionally the operator may be crushed by the overturning machine, resulting in serious injury or death.

• Prior to operating the machine, thoroughly examine webbing, buckle and attaching hardware. If any item is damaged or worn, replace the seat belt or component before operating the machine.

• Be sure to remain seated with the seat belt securely

SA-237

fastened at all times when the machine is in operation to minimize the chance of injury from an accident.

• We recommend that the seat belt be replaced every three years regardless of its apparent condition.

010-E02B-0237-3

OPERATE ONLY FROM OPERATOR’S SEAT x Inappropriate engine starting procedures may cause the machine to runaway, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

• Start the engine only from the operator’s seat. • NEVER start the engine while standing on the crawler shoe or on ground.

• Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.

• Before starting the engine, confirm that all control levers are in neutral.

012-E01B-0444-3

S-5

SA-444


SAFETY JUMP STARTING x Battery gas can explode, resulting in serious injury.

• If the engine must be jump-started, be sure to follow the instructions shown in the “OPERATING THE ENGINE” chapter.

• The operator must be in the operator’s seat so that the machine will be under control when the engine starts. Jump-starting is a two-person operation.

• Never use a frozen battery. SA-032

• Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine.

013-E01A-0032-3

S-6


SAFETY PROTECT AGAINST FLYING DEBRIS x If flying debris hit eyes or any other part of the body, serious injury may result.

• Guard against injury from flying pieces of metal or debris; wear goggles or safety glasses.

• Keep bystanders away from the working area before striking any object.

SA-432

031-E01A-0432-2

S-7


SAFETY PARK MACHINE SAFELY

•Engage all brake and drum locks. Shutdown the engine.

To avoid accidents:

•Remove the key from the key switch. Lock the cab and all access doors.

• Park machine on a firm, level ground. • Lower the boom to the ground. • In a work site where the boom cannot be lowered to

033-E04A-0470-3

the ground, secure the boom using guy ropes so as to minimize the wind effect on the boom,

• Run the engine at slow idle for five (5) minutes to cool the engine down.

HANDLE FLUIDS SAFELY᧩AVOID FIRES x Handle fuel with care; it is highly flammable. If fuel ignites, an explosion and/or a fire may occur, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

• Do not refuel the machine while smoking or when near open flame or sparks.

• Always shutdown the engine before refueling the machine.

• Fill the fuel tank outdoors. x All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolants are flam-

SA-018

mable.

• Store flammable fluids well away from fire hazards. • Do not incinerate or puncture pressurized containers. • Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn spontaneously.

SA-019

034-E01A-0496-4

S-8


SAFETY SAFE TRANSPORTATION x The danger of tipping is present when loading/unloading machine onto/from a truck or trailer bed.

• Be sure to observe local regulations when transporting the machine on public roads.

• Be sure to have a signal person when loading/unloading the machine.

• Provide an appropriate trailer for transporting the machine. Take the following precautions when loading/unloading the machine: 1) Select firm, level ground. 2)

Be sure to use a loading dock or ramp.

3)

When using a loading ramp, use one which has antislip bands on the surface.

4)

Drive the machine at very slow speed.

5)

Avoid steering while driving up or down the ramp as it is extremely dangerous. If steering is unavoidable, first move back to the ground or flatbed, modify traveling direction, and begin to drive again.

6)

Do not operate any levers besides the travel levers when driving up or down the ramp.

7)

The top of the ramp where it meets the flatbed is a sudden bump. Take care when traveling over it.

8)

Securely fasten chains or cables to the machine frame.

Less than 15q

SA-475A

035-E03A-0475-᧲

TOWING MACHINE x When towing the machine, be sure to attach tow wire ropes around the lower frames as illustrated. To prevent the wire ropes from being damaged, place protective material between the lower frames and the wire ropes. Pulling Rope

SA-605 061-E01A-0605-2

S-9


SAFETY PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE To avoid accidents:

• Understand service procedures before starting work. Keep the work area clean and dry. Do not spray water or steam inside cab.

• Never lubricate or service the machine while it is moving.

• Keep hands, feet and clothing away from power-driven parts.

• Before servicing the machine: 1)

Park machine on a solid, level surface.

2)

Lower the boom to the ground. If the boom cannot be fully lowered, secure the boom with guy ropes to prevent the boom from being blown by wind.

3)

Run the engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.

4)

Apply all brakes and locks.

5)

Turn the key switch to OFF to shutdown engine.

6)

Remove the key from the switch.

7)

Move the pilot shut-off lever to the LOCK position.

8)

Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag on the cab door.

SA-028

• If a maintenance procedure must be performed with the engine running, do not leave machine unattended.

• Securely support any machine elements that must be raised for service work. If the machine must be raised, place supporting blocks under the frame.

• Inspect certain parts periodically and repair or replace as necessary. Refer to the section discussing that part in the “MAINTENANCE” chapter of this manual.

• Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts. Remove any buildup of grease, oil or debris.

• Disconnect battery ground cable (–) before making adjustments to electrical systems or before performing welding on the machine.

500-E07A-0497-8

S-10

SA-527


SAFETY WARN OTHERS OF SERVICE WORK x Unexpected machine movement can cause serious injury.

• Before performing any work on the machine, attach a “Do Not Operate” tag on the control lever. This tag is available from your authorized dealer.

501-E01A-0287-2

SA-287

SUPPORT MACHINE PROPERLY x Never attempt to work on the machine without securing the machine first.

• Always lower the attachment to the ground before you work on the machine.

• If you must work on a lifted machine or attachment, securely support the machine or attachment. Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tires, or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.

SA-527

519-E01A-0527-3

STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS x Entanglement in moving parts can cause serious injury. • To prevent accidents, care should be taken to ensure that hands, feet, clothing, jewelry and hair do not become entangled when working around rotating parts.

SA-026

502-E01A-0026-2

S-11


SAFETY PREVENT BURNS Hot spraying fluids:

x After operation, engine coolant is hot and under pressure. Hot water or steam is contained in the engine, radiator and heater lines. Skin contact with escaping hot water or steam can cause severe burns.

• To avoid possible injury from hot spraying water. DO NOT remove the radiator cap until the engine is cool. When opening, turn the cap slowly to the stop. Allow all pressure to be release before removing the cap.

SA-039

• The hydraulic oil tank is pressurized. Again, be sure to release all pressure before removing the cap. Hot fluids and surfaces:

x Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic oil also become hot during operation. The engine, hoses, lines and other parts become hot as well.

SA-225

• Wait for the oil and components to cool before starting any maintenance or inspection work.

505-E01B-0498-5

REPLACE RUBBER HOSES PERIODICALLY x Rubber hoses that contain flammable fluids under pressure may break due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion. It is very difficult to gauge the extent of deterioration due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion of rubber hoses by inspection alone.

• Periodically replace the rubber hoses. x Failure to periodically replace rubber hoses may cause a fire, fluid injection into skin, or the front attachment to fall on a person nearby, which may result in severe burns, gangrene, or otherwise serious injury or death. 506-E01A-0019-3

S-12

SA-019


SAFETY AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS x Fluids such as diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin or eyes causing serious injury, blindness or death.

• Avoid this hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines.

• Relieve the pressure by moving the control levers several times. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.

• Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard; take care

SA-031

to protect hands and body from high-pressure fluids. Wear a face shield or goggles for eye protection.

• If an accident occurs, see a doctor familiar with this type of injury immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may result.

SA-292

SA-044

507-E01A-0499-5

NEVER ATTEMPT TO MODIFY SAFETY MECHANISM, HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS, OR ELECTRICAL WIRING x Incorrect modification or adjustment may cause accident.

• Do not modify or adjust the preadjusted parts of hydraulic components or safety mechanism. If readjustment or modification is required, consult your authorized dealer. SA-019

x Alternation on electrical wiring may cause fire. • If modification or alternation of electrical wiring is required, consult your authorized dealer.

520-E01A-0019-3

S-13


SAFETY PREVENT FIRES Check for Oil Leaks:

Check Heat Shields:

x Fuel, hydraulic oil and lubricant leaks can lead to fires. • Check for oil leaks due to missing or loose clamps, kinked hoses, lines or hoses that rub against each other, damage to the oil-cooler, and loose oil-cooler flange bolts.

• Tighten, repair or replace any missing, loose or dam-

x Damaged or missing heat shields may load to fires.

• Damaged or missing heat shields must be repaired or replaced before operating the machine. 508-E02B-0019-9

aged clamps, lines, hoses, oil-cooler and oil-cooler flange bolts.

• Do not bend or strike high-pressure lines. • Never install bent or damaged lines, pipes or hoses. Check for Shorts:

x Short circuits can cause fires. • Clean and tighten all electrical connections. • Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for loose, kinked, hardened or frayed electrical cables and wires.

• Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for missing or damaged terminal caps.

• DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE if cable or wires are loose, kinked, etc. Clean up Flammables:

x Spilled fuel and oil, and trash, grease, debris, accumulated coal dust, and other flammables may cause fires.

• Prevent fires by inspecting and cleaning the machine daily, and by removing spilled or accumulated flammables immediately. Check Key Switch:

x If a fire breaks out, failure to shutdown the engine will escalate the fire, hampering fire fighting.

• Always check key switch function before operating the machine every day: 1. Start the engine and run it at slow idle. 2. Turn the key switch to the OFF position to confirm that the engine stops.

• If any abnormalities are found, be sure to repair them before operating the machine. 508-E02B-0019-9

S-14

SA-019


SAFETY EVACUATING IN CASE OF FIRE x If a fire breaks out, evacuate the machine in the following way:

• Shutdown the engine with turning the key switch to the OFF position if there is time.

• Use a fire extinguisher if there is time. • Exit the machine. SA-393 518-E02A-0393-2

BEWARE OF EXHAUST FUMES x Prevent asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death.

• If you must operate in a building, be sure there is adequate ventilation. Either use an exhaust pipe extension to remove the exhaust fumes or open doors and windows to bring enough outside air into the area.

• Be aware of California Proposition 65 Warning which reads “Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm”. 509-E01A-0016-2

S-15

SA-016


SAFETY AVOID HEATING NEAR PRESSURIZED FLUID LINES x Flammable spray can be generated by heating near pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to you and bystanders.

• Do not heat by welding, soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other flammable materials.

• Pressurized lines can be accidentally cut when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area. Install temporary fire-resistant guards to protect hoses or other materials before engaging in welding, soldering, etc.

SA-030

AVOID APPLYING HEAT TO LINES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE FLUIDS • Do not weld or flame cut pipes or tubes that contain flammable fluids.

• Clean them thoroughly with nonflammable solvent before welding or flame cutting them.

510-E01B-0030-4

REMOVE PAINT BEFORE WELDING OR HEATING x Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch. If inhaled, these fumes may cause sickness.

• Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust. • Do all such work outside or in a well-ventilated area. Dispose of paint and solvent properly.

SA-029

• Remove paint before welding or heating: 1)

If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust. Wear an approved respirator.

2)

If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or heating.

511-E01A-0029-4

S-16


SAFETY PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS x Battery gas can explode, resulting in serious injury. • Keep sparks, lighted matches, and flame away from the top of battery.

• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.

• Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm the battery to 16 qC (60 qF) first.

• Do not continue to use or charge the battery when electrolyte level is lower than specified. Explosion of the battery may result

• Loose terminals may produce sparks. Securely tighten all terminals.

x Battery electrolyte is poisonous. If the battery should explode battery electrolyte may be splashed into eyes, possibly resulting in blindness. If splashed in eyes, flush with water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention immediately.

• Be sure to wear eye protection when checking electrolyte specific gravity.

512-E01B-0032-4

S-17

SA-032


SAFETY HANDLE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS SAFELY x Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with your machine include such items as lubricants, coolants, paints, and adhesives.

• A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific details on chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.

• Check the MSDS before you start any job using a hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow procedures and use recommended equipment.

• See your authorized dealer for MSDS’s on chemical products used with your machine.

515-E01A-0309-4

DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY x Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used with equipment includes such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

• Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers that may mislead someone into drinking from them.

• Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.

• Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste from your local environmental or recycling center, or from your authorized dealer.

516-E01A-0226-4

S-18

SA-309


SECTION 1

GENERAL

CONTENTS Group 1 Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling ............................................ W1-1-1

Group 2 Tightening Torque Tightening Torque Specifications ............. W1-2-1 Standard Torque Specifications ............... W1-2-2 Piping Joint.............................................. W1-2-5

2CNW-1-1


(Blank)

2CNW-1-2


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling PRECAUTIONS FOR AND ASSEMBLING

DISASSEMBLING

• Store common parts, such as bolts and nuts with reference to where they are to be used and in a manner that will prevent loss. • Inspect the contact or sliding surfaces of disassembled parts for abnormal wear, sticking, or other damage. • Measure and record the degree of wear and clearances.

Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling

x Clean the Machine Thoroughly wash the machine before bringing it into the shop. Bringing a dirty machine into the shop may cause machine components to be contaminated during disassembling/assembling, resulting in damage to machine components, as well as decreased efficiency in service work.

x Precautions for Assembling

x Inspect the Machine Be sure to thoroughly read and understand all disassembling/assembling procedures before starting any repair work. Understanding these procedures will help avoid incorrect disassembling of components as well as the purchasing of unnecessary service parts. • The machine model, machine serial number, and hour meter reading. • Reason for disassembly (symptoms, failed parts, and causes). • Clogging of filters and oil, water or air leaks, if any. • Capacities and condition of lubricants. • Loose or damaged parts.

x Prepare and Clean Tools and Disassembly Area Prepare the necessary tools to be used and the area for disassembling work.

x Precautions for Disassembling • To prevent dirt from entering, cap or plug the removed pipes. • Before disassembling, clean the exterior of the components and place it on a work bench. • Before disassembling, drain gear oil from the reduction gear. • Be sure to provide appropriate containers for draining fluids. • Use matching marks for easier reassembling. • Be sure to use the specified special tools, when instructed. • If a part or component cannot be removed after removing its securing nuts and bolts, do not attempt to remove it forcibly. Find the cause(s), then take the appropriate measures to remove it. • Orderly arrange disassembled parts. Mark and tag them as necessary.

W1-1-1

• Be sure to clean all parts and inspect them for any damage. If any damage is found, repair or replace it. • Dirt or debris on the contact or sliding surfaces may shorten the service life of the machine. Take care not to contaminate any contact or sliding surfaces. • Before assembling, coat all inner parts with clean hydraulic oil or gear oil. Especially coat the sliding surfaces with clean hydraulic oil or gear oil. • Be sure to replace O-rings, backup rings, and oil seals with new ones once they are disassembled. Apply a film of grease before installing. • Be sure that liquid-gasket-applied surfaces are clean and dry. • If an anti-corrosive agent has been used on a new part, be sure to thoroughly clean the part to remove the agent. • Utilize matching marks when assembling. • Be sure to use the designated tools to assemble bearings, bushings and oil seals. • Keep a record of the number of tools used for disassembly/assembly. After assembling is complete, count the number of tools, so as to make sure that no tools are missing.


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Bleeding Air from Hydraulic System

When hydraulic oil is drained, the suction filter or the suction lines are replaced, or the removal and installation of the pump, swing motor, travel motor or cylinder is done, bleed air from the hydraulic system in the following procedures: IMPORTANT: If the engine is started with air trapped in the hydraulic pump housing, damage to the pump may result. If the hydraulic motor is operated with air trapped in the hydraulic motor housing, damage to the motor may result. If the cylinder is operated with air trapped in the cylinder tube, damage to the cylinder may result. Be sure to bleed air before starting the engine. x Bleeding Air from Hydraulic Pump • Remove the air bleeding plug from the top of the pump and fill the pump housing with hydraulic oil. • After the pump housing is filled with hydraulic oil, temporarily tighten the plug. Then, start the engine and run at slow idle speed. • Slightly loosen the plug to bleed air from the pump housing until hydraulic oil oozes out. • After bleeding all the air, securely tighten the plug. x Bleeding Air from Travel Motor / Swing Motor • With the drain plug / hose on travel motor / swing motor removed, fill the motor case with hydraulic oil. x Bleeding Air from Hydraulic Circuit • After refilling hydraulic oil, start the engine. While operating each cylinder, swing motor and travel motor evenly, operate the machine under light loads for 10 to 15 minutes. Slowly start each operation (never fully stroke the cylinders during initial operation stage). As the pilot oil circuit has an air bleed device, air trapped in the pilot oil circuit will be bled while performing the above operation for approx. 5 minutes. • Reposition the front attachment to check hydraulic oil level. • Stop the engine. Recheck hydraulic oil level. Replenish oil as necessary.

W328-01-01-001

W1-1-2


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Floating Seal Precautions

A

1. In general, replace the floating seal with a new one. If the floating is to be reused, follow these procedures: (1) Keep seal rings together as a matched set with seal ring faces together. Insert a piece of cardboard to protect surfaces.

(2) Check the seal ring face (A) for scuffing, scoring, corrosion, deformation or uneven wear. (3) Check O-ring (B) for deformation or hardening.

tears,

W105-03-05-019

B

breaks,

2. If incorrectly assembled, oil leakage or damage will occur. Be sure to do the following, to prevent trouble. (1) Clean the floating seal and seal mounting bores with cleaning solvent. Use a wire brush to remove mud, rust or dirt. After cleaning, thoroughly dry parts with compressed air. (2) Clean the floating seal and seal mounting bores, as dust on them tends to enter the floating seal when installing it. (3) Check that the O-ring is not twisted, and that it is installed correctly on the seal ring.

Correct

Incorrect

D

(4) After installing the floating seal, check that seal surface (C) is parallel with the seal mounting bore end face (D) and O-ring (B) as illustrated.

W105-03-05-020

C Incorrect

Correct a

a

B

b

a=b

b

aำ b

W110-03-05-004

W1-1-3


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Precautions for Using Nylon Sling

1. Follow the precautions below to use nylon slings safely. • Attach protectors (soft material) on the corners of the load so that the nylon sling does not directly contact the corners. This will prevent the nylon sling from damage and the lifted load from slipping. • Lower the temperature of the lifted load to lower than 100 qC (212 qF). If unavoidably lifting a load with a temperature of 100 qC (212 qF) or more, reduce the load weight. • Do not lift acid or alkali chemicals. • Take care not to allow the sling to become wet. The load may slip. • When required to use more than one sling, use slings with the same width and length to keep the lifted load balanced. • When lifting a load using an eyehole, be sure to eliminate any gaps between the sling and load. (Refer to the right illustration.) Reduce the load weight so that it is less than 80 % of the sling breaking force. • Avoid using twisted, bound, connected, or hitched slings. • Do not place any object on twisted or bent slings. (Refer to the right illustration.) • When removing the slings from under the load, take care not to damage the nylon slings. Avoid contact with protrusions. • Avoid dragging slings on the ground, throwing slings or pushing slings with a metal piece. • When using with other types of slings (wire rope) or accessories (shackle), protect the joint so that the nylon sling is not damaged. • Store the nylon slings indoors so they won’t deteriorate with heat, sun light, or chemicals.

Correct Eyehole Lifting Method

W102-04-02-016

Incorrect Eyehole Lifting Method

W105-04-01-008

Bent Sling

W1-1-4

W162-01-01-009


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling CAUTION: If a load is lifted with a damaged nylon sling, serious personal injury may result. Be sure to visually check the nylon sling for any damage before using.

Damaged Appearance

Broken Sewing Thread

2. Before using a nylon sling, visually check the nylon sling for any damage corresponding to examples shown to the right. If any damage is found, cut and discard the sling. Even if no damage is found, do not use slings older than 7-years.

W162-01-01-002

Scuffing

W162-01-01-003

Fuzz

Broken Sewing Thread

W162-01-01-004

Broken Sewing Thread

W162-01-01-005

Broken Sewing Thread

Scoring

Separation of Belt

W162-01-01-006

Fuzz

Scuffing

W162-01-01-007

Broken Warp

W162-01-01-008

W1-1-5


GENERAL INFORMATION / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Maintenance Standard Terminology “Standard” 1. Dimension for parts on a new machine. 2. Dimension of components or assemblies adjusted to specification. Tolerances are indicated as necessary. “Allowable Limit” 1. Machine cannot operate normally with the parts exceeding this dimension installed. 2. Repair or adjustment is impossible if this dimension is exceeded. 3. To maintain high machine availability and to save the repair expense, the machine parts should be repaired or replaced before reaching the “Allowable Limit.”

W1-1-6


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Bolts and Nuts of Machine: Standard Tightening Torque Chart

No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

68

Wrench Size mm 50

14 14 20 16 20 20 12 16 24

4 4 14 8 14 8 24 8 88

22 22 30 24 30 30 19 24 36

33

88

50

33 12

30 24

Hex.24 Hex.10

1640 to 1770 60 to 85 60 to 85 392 68 to 79 392 359 to 379 60 to 64 68 to 79 498 to 539 1640 to 1770 1950 106 to 120

22

104

32

540

55

12

32

19

60 to 64

6.1 to 6.6

20

8

30

539

55

22

30

32

550

56

10

9

17

34 to 37

3.5 to 3.8

16 20 16 10 20 16 10 10 20 16 12 10 -

4 36 8 8 4 4 4 2 4

Hex.14 30 24 17 Hex.17 Hex.14 Hex.12 Hex.8 30 24 19 17

750 350 to 379 235 41 to 45 400 240 33 41 to 45 400 148 to 160 60 to 64 41 to 45

76.5 35.7 to 38.7 24 4.2 to 4.6 41 24 3.4 4.2 to 4.6 41 15.0 to 16.3 6.1 to 6.6 4.2 to 4.6

Bolt Dia. mm 33

Descriptions Turntable Mounting Bolt Engine Mounting Bolt Front and Nut Rear R.H. Platform Mounting Bolt Cab Mounting Bolt L.H. Platform Mounting Bolt Live Mast Flip Cylinder Mounting Bolt Carrier Roller (Front/Rear) Mounting Bolt Carrier Roller (Center) Mounting Bolt Carrier Roller (To Machine No. 5) Mounting Bolt Carrier Roller (From Machine No. 6 and after) Mounting Bolt Travel Mechanism Mounting Bolt (Right/Left) Travel Motor Mounting Bolt (Right/Left) Hoisting Mechanism Mounting Bolt (Front/Rear Drum) Hoist Drum Cover Mounting Bolt (Front/Rear Drum) Hoist Motor Mounting Bolt (Front/Rear Drum) Boom Raising/Lowering Mechanism Mounting Bolt Boom Raising/Lowering Drum Cover Mounting Bolt Boom Raising/Lowering Motor Mounting Bolt Swing Mechanism Mounting Bolt Swing Motor Mounting Bolt Pump Mechanism Mounting Bolt Main Pump Mounting Bolt Swing Pump Mounting Bolt Reduction Gear Mounting Bolt Gear Pump Mounting Bolt Hydraulic Oil Tank Mounting Bolt Fuel Tank Mounting Bolt Radiator Mounting Bolt Radiator Stay Mounting Bolt Hydraulic Hose

NOTE: (1) Apply lubricant (i.e. white zinc B dissolved into spindle oil) to reduce their friction coefficients. (2) Remove rust, dirt, and dust before installing fasteners.

Q’ty

2 4 4

Torque N m

kgf m 167 to 181 6 to 9 6 to 9 40 7 to 8 40 35.7 to 38.7 6.1 to 6.6 7 to 8 50.8 to 55.0 167 to 181 200 10.8 to 13.2

(3) Apply LOCTITE onto the boom derricking mechanism mounting bolt, boom derricking motor mounting bolt, pump mechanism mounting bolt, main pump mounting bolt and gear pump mounting bolt.

W1-2-1


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque STANDART TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION: Use tools appropriate for the work to be done. Makeshift tools and procedures can create safety hazards. For loosening and tightening nuts and bolts, use the correct tools. Avoid bodily injury caused by slipping wrenches. Bolt Types Tighten nuts or bolts correctly to torque specifications. Four kinds of bolts, hexagon bolts T, H, M and socket bolts, each made of different material, are used. Make sure to employ the correct bolts and tighten them to specification when assembling the machine or components.

Hexagon T Bolt

SA-040

Hexagon H Bolt

Hexagon M Bolt

Socket Bolt

W157-01-01-001

Specified Tightening Torque Chart T Bolt, Socket Bolt Bolt Wrench Hexagon Wrench Dia. Size N m kgf m lbf ft Size M 8 13 6 30 3.1 22 M 10 17 8 65 6.6 48 M 12 19 10 110 11.0 81 M 14 22 12 180 18.5 133 M 16 24 14 270 27.5 199 M 18 27 14 400 41.0 295 M 20 30 17 550 56.0 406 M 22 32 750 76.5 553 M 24 36 950 97.0 701 M 27 41 1400 143 1033 M 30 46 1950 200 1438 M 33 50 2600 265 1918 M 36 55 3200 325 2360

H Bolt N m 20 50 90 140 210 300 400 550 700 1050 1450 1950 2450

W1-2-2

kgf m 2.0 5.1 9.2 14.0 21.5 30.5 41.0 56.0 71.5 107 148 200 250

M Bolt lbf ft 15 37 66 103 155 221 295 406 516 774 1069 1438 1807

N m 10 20 35 55 80 120 170 220 280 400 550 750 950

kgf m 1.0 2.0 3.6 5.6 8.2 12.0 17.0 22.5 28.5 41.0 56.0 76.5 97.0

lbf ft 7.4 15 26 41 59 89 125 162 207 295 406 553 701


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque IMPORTANT: (1) Apply lubricant (i. e. white zinc B dissolved into spindle oil) to nuts and bolts to stabilize their friction coefficients. (2) Torque tolerance is s10 %. (3) Be sure to use bolts of correct length. Bolts that are too long cannot be tightened, as the bolt tip comes into contact with the bottom of the bolt hole. Bolts that are too short cannot develop sufficient tightening force. (4) The torques given in the chart are for general use only. Do not use these torques if a different torque is given for a specific application. (5) Make sure that the nut and bolt threads are clean before installing. Remove dirt or corrosion, if any.

Bolt Tightening Order When tightening two or more bolts, tighten them alternately, as shown, to ensure even tightening.

Equally tighten upper and lower alternately

Tighten from center and diagonally

Tighten diagonally

1

1,4

12

9

4

1

6

7

14

13

8

5

2

3

10

11

3

6 4

5 2

2,3

W105-01-01-003

W1-2-3


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque Service Recommendations for Split Flange IMPORTANT: (1) Be sure to clean and inspect sealing surfaces. Scratches / roughness cause leaks and seal wear. Unevenness causes seal extrusion. If defects cannot be removed, replace the component. (2) Be sure to use only specified O-rings. Inspect O-rings for any damage. Take care not to file O-ring surfaces. When installing an O-ring into a groove, use grease to hold it in place. (3) Loosely assemble split flange halves. Make sure that the split is centrally located and perpendicular to the port. Hand-tighten the bolts to hold the parts in place. Take care not to pinch the O-ring. (4) Tighten bolts alternately and diagonally, as shown, to ensure even tightening. (5) Do not use air wrenches. Using an air wrench often causes tightening of one bolt fully before tighten the others, resulting in damage to O-rings or uneven tightening of bolts.

W105-01-01-015

WRONG

W105-01-01-016

W105-01-01-008

RIGHT

WRONG

RIGHT

Nut and Bolt Lockings

Do not bend it round

Bend along edge sharply

RIGHT

WRONG

x Lock Plate IMPORTANT: Do not reuse lock plates. Do not try to bend the same point twice.

Bend along edge sharply

W105-01-01-009

RIGHT

x Cotter Pin IMPORTANT: Do not reuse cotter pins. Match the holes in the bolt and nut while tightening, not while loosening.

RIGHT

RIGHT

WRONG

Loosen

WRONG

Tighten

x Lock Wire IMPORTANT: Apply wire to bolts in the bolt-tightening direction, not in the bolt-loosening direction.

W1-2-4

W105-01-01-010


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque PIPING JOINT Pipe Thread Connection / Union Joint Tightening Torque Specifications

1

4

3

5

2

Union Joint Metal sealing faces (4) and (5) of adaptor (1) and hose (2) fit together to seal pressure oil. Union joints are used to join small-diameter lines.

IMPORTANT: (1) Do not over-tighten union nut (3). Excessive force will be applied to metal sealing surfaces (4) and (5), possibly cracking adaptor (1). Be sure to tighten union nut (3) to specifications.

Joint Body M202-07-051

37q 30q

(2) Scratches or other damage to sealing surfaces (4) or (5) will cause oil leakage at the joint. Take care not to damage them when connecting /disconnecting.

Type 30q Male Union Joint

37q Female Union Joint

Wrench Size Union Nut Joint Body 17 17 19 19 22 22 27 27 32 32 36 36 41 41 17 14 19 17 22 19 27 22 32 27 36 32 41 36

W1-2-5

Male Union Joint

Female Union Joint

W105-01-01-017

N m 24.5 29.5 39 93 137 175 205 24.5 29.5 39 93 137 175 205

Tightening Torque kgf m 2.5 3.0 4.0 9.5 14.0 18.0 21.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 9.5 14.0 18.0 21.0

Ibf ft 18 22 29 69 101 129 151 18 22 29 69 101 129 151


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque O-Ring Seal Joint

7

6

9

O-ring (6) seats against the end face of adaptor (7) to seal pressure oil. IMPORTANT: (1) Be sure to replace O-ring (6) with a new one when reconnecting. (2) Before tightening union nut (9), confirm that O-ring (6) is seated correctly in O-ring groove (8). Tightening union nut (9) with O-ring (6) displaced will damage O-ring (6), resulting in oil leakage.

Joint Body

8

10 M104-07-033

Wrench Size Union Nut Joint Body

(3) Take care not to damage O-ring groove (8) or sealing face (10). Damage to O-ring (6) will cause oil leakage. (4) If union nut (9) is found to be loose, causing oil leakage, do not tighten it to stop the leak. Instead, replace O-ring (6) with a new one, then tighten union nut (9) after confirming that O-ring (6) is securely seated in place.

W1-2-6

19 22 27 32 36 41 46

17 19 22 27 30, 32 36 41

Tightening Torque N m kgf m Ibf ft 29.5 69 93 137 175 205 205

3.0 7.0 9.5 14.0 18.0 21.0 21.0

22 51 69 101 129 151 151


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque Screwed-In Connection

PF

PT

IMPORTANT: Many types of screwed-in connec-tions are used for hose connections. Be sure to confirm that the thread pitch and thread type (tapered or straight) are the correct type before using any screw-in connection.

30q

Male Straight Thread

Male Tapered Thread

W105-01-01-018

Wrench Joint Body 17, 19 19, 22 27, 22 36, 32 41 50 60 70 Seal Tape Application

Male Tapered Thread Tightening Torque N m kgf m 59 6 98 10 118 12 235 24 295 30 490 50 670 68 980 100

Ibf ft 43 72 87 134 215 360 490 720

Internal Thread

Seal tape is used to seal clearances between male and female threads, so as to prevent any leakage between threads. Be sure to apply just enough seal tape to fill up thread clearances. Do not overwrap.

External Thread

Clearance

W105-01-01-019

Leave one to two pitch threads uncovered

x Application Procedure Confirm that the thread surface is clean, free of dirt or damage. Apply seal tape around threads as shown. Wrap seal tape in the same direction as the threads.

M114-07-041

Low-Pressure-Hose Clamp Tightening Torque T-Bolt Type

Worm Gear Type

Low-pressure-hose clamp tightening torque differs depending on the type of clamp. See below for correct tightening torque of each type of low-pressure-hose clamp. T-Bolt Type Band Clamp: 4.4 N m (0.45 kgf m, 3.25 lbf ft ) Worm Gear Type Band Clamp: 5.9 to 6.9 N m (0.6 to 0.7 kgf m, 4.3 to 5.1 lbf ft ) M114-07-042

W1-2-7

M114-07-043


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque Connecting Hose WRONG CAUTION: (1) When replacing hoses, be sure to use genuine manufacture parts. Using hoses other than genuine manufacture parts may cause oil leakage, hose rupture or separation of fitting, possibly resulting in a fire on the machine. (2) Do not install hoses kinked. Application of high oil pressure, vibration, or an impact to a kinked hose may result in oil leakage, hose rupture or separation of fitting. Utilize print marks on hoses when installing hoses to prevent hose from being installed kinked. (3) If hoses rub against each other, wear to the hoses will result, leading to hose rupture. Take necessary measures to protect hoses from rubbing against each other. Take care that hoses do not come into contact with moving parts or sharp objects.

RIGHT

W105-01-01-011

WRONG

RIGHT Rubbing Against Each Other

W105-01-01-012

WRONG

Clamp

RIGHT Clamp

Rubbing

W105-01-01-013

WRONG

RIGHT

Rubbing

Clamp

W105-01-01-014

W1-2-8


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque REFERENCE: Major Parts to Be Replaced at Regular Intervals. The parts listed below deteriorate as the machine ages and are worn out or fatigued by repeated loads, resulting in possible severe personal injury and/or machine trouble. The service life of these parts can not be detected through machine operation or visual inspection.

Part Location

Therefore, these parts should be replaced at regular intervals even if no abnormalities are noticed. In case any abnormalities are found on a part at any time regardless of its specified replacement interval, immediately replace the part.

Part to be Replaced

Q’ty

Pendant rope Front Attachment Winch Engine

Ball bearing (oil less bearing in the hook sheave) Ball bearing (boom hoist winch pedestal) Fuel hose (between the fuel tank and filter) Fuel hose (between the fuel tank and injection pump)

IMPORTANT: Each hose has an individual service life. If any abnormalities are found during the regular interval check and/or maintenance service, be sure to replace with a new one.

W1-2-9

1 -

Interval (Hours or Period) Crane: 400 hrs /2 years Bucket, Lifting Magnet (Heavy Duty Work) : 2000 hrs / 2 years 2000 hrs / 2 years 2000 hrs / 2 years 2000 hrs / 2 years 2000 hrs / 2 years


GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Torque (Blank)

W1-2-10


SECTION 2

SWING MACHINERY CONTENTS Group 1 Cab Remove and Install Cab .......................... W2-1-1

Remove and Install Gear Pump

Dimensions of The Cab Glass ................. W2-1-7

(For Reeving Winch) .......................... W2-4-85 Disassemble Gear Pump

Group 2 Counterweight Remove and Install Counterweight............ W2-2-1

(For Reeving Winch) .......................... W2-4-88 Assemble Gear Pump (For Reeving Winch) .......................... W2-4-90

Group 3 Revolving Frame Remove and Install Revolving Frame ...... W2-3-1

Group 5 Control Valve Remove and Install 4-Unit Control Valve

Group 4 Pump Mechanism

for Front Drum, Rear Drum, Travel,

Remove and Install Main Pump ............... W2-4-1

Boom Raising/Lowering Drum and

Disassemble Main Pump ......................... W2-4-4 Assemble Main Pump............................ W2-4-10 Maintenance Standard........................... W2-4-16 Disassemble Front Regulator ................ W2-4-18 Assemble Front Regulator ..................... W2-4-24

Quick Draw .......................................... W2-5-1 Disassemble 4-Unit Control Valve............ W2-5-4 Assemble 4-Unit Control Valve .............. W2-5-10 Remove and Install 4-Uint Control Valve for Boom Foot and Lower

Disassemble Rear Regulator................. W2-4-28 Assemble Rear Regulator...................... W2-4-34 Remove and Install Swing Pump ........... W2-4-41 Disassemble Swing Pump ..................... W2-4-44 Assemble Swing Pump.......................... W2-4-48

Hydraulic Source................................ W2-5-16 Disassemble 4-Unit Control Valve.......... W2-5-18 Assemble 4-Unit Control Valve .............. W2-5-22 Remove and Install 3-Unit Control Valve for Counterweight Removal/Installation

Maintenance Standard ......................... W2-4-50 Disassemble Regulator ......................... W2-4-52 Assemble Regulator .............................. W2-4-58 Remove and Install Gear Pump (For Oil Cooler) .................................. W2-4-65 Disassemble Gear Pump (For Oil Cooler) .................................. W2-4-68 Assemble Gear Pump (For Oil Cooler) .. W2-4-70

and Live Mast Flip .............................. W2-5-26 Disassemble 3-Unit Control Valve.......... W2-5-28 Assemble 3-Unit Control Valve .............. W2-5-32 Remove and Install 2-Unit Control Valve for Swing ............................................ W2-5-36 Disassemble 2-Unit Control Valve.......... W2-5-38 Assemble 2-Unit Control Valve .............. W2-5-40

Remove and Install 2-Unit Gear Pump .. W2-4-75 Disassemble 2-Unit Gear Pump ............ W2-4-78 Assemble 2-Unit Gear Pump ................. W2-4-80

2CNW-2-1


Group 6 Swing Mechanism

(For Machine No.6 and after)

Remove and Install Swing Mechanism .... W2-6-1

Remove and Install Raising/Lowering

Disassemble Swing Mechanism .............. W2-6-4 Assemble Swing Mechanism ................... W2-6-8

Mechanism......................................... W2-8-31 Disassemble

Raising/Lowering

Disassemble Swing Motor ..................... W2-6-12

Mechanism......................................... W2-8-34

Assemble Slewing Motor ....................... W2-6-16

Assemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism W2-8-38

Maintenance Standard ......................... W2-6-20

Disassemble Raising/Lowering Motor .... W2-8-42 Assemble Raising/Lowering Motor ....... W2-8-46

Group 7 Hoisting Mechanism

Maintenance Standard ......................... W2-8-50

Remove and Install Hoisting Mechanism .......................................... W2-7-1 Disassemble Hoisting Mechanism ........... W2-7-6 Assemble Hoisting Mechanism.............. W2-7-10 Disassemble Hoisting Motor .................. W2-7-16 Assemble Hoisting Motor....................... W2-7-20 Maintenance Standard ......................... W2-7-24

Disassemble Regulator.......................... W2-8-52 Assemble Regulator............................... W2-8-54 Disassemble Counterbalance Valve....... W2-8-56 Assemble Counterbalance Valve ........... W2-8-58

Group 9 Remote Control Valve Remove

and

Install

Boom

Disassemble Regulator ......................... W2-7-26

Raising/Lowering Drums and Travel

Assemble Regulator .............................. W2-7-28

Remote Control Valves......................... W2-9-1

Disassemble Counterbalance Valve ...... W2-7-30

Remove and Install Swing Remote

Assemble Counterbalance Valve ........... W2-7-32

Control Valve........................................ W2-9-5

Disassemble Reeving Winch ...................W2-734

Disassemble Remote Control Valve ......... W2-9-8

Assemble Reeving Winch...................... W2-7-36

Assemble Remote Control Valve............ W2-9-14

Disassemble Reeving Winch Motor ....... W2-7-38 Assemble Reeving Winch Motor..............W2-740

Group 8 Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No.5)

Remove and Install Solenoid Valve Block .................................................. W2-10-1 Disassemble Solenoid Valve Block ........ W2-10-2 Assemble Solenoid Valve Block ............. W2-10-4

Remove and Install Raising/Lowering Mechanism .......................................... W2-8-1 Disassemble

Group 10 Solenoid Valve

Raising/Lowering

Group 11 Cylinder Remove and Install Flip Cylinder ........... W2-11-1

Mechanism .......................................... W2-8-4 Assemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism . W2-8-8 Disassemble Raising/Lowering Motor.... W2-8-12

Disassemble Flip Cylinder ..................... W2-11-4 Assemble Flip Cylinder .......................... W2-11-6 Remove and Install Counterweight

Assemble Raising/Lowering Motor ...... W2-8-16 Maintenance Standard ......................... W2-8-20 Disassemble Regulator ......................... W2-8-22 Assemble Regulator .............................. W2-8-24

Cylinder.............................................. W2-11-9 Disassemble Counterweight Cylinder .. W2-11-12 Assemble Counterweight Cylinder ....... W2-11-14 Remove and Install Boom Foot

Disassemble Counterbalance Valve ...... W2-8-26 Assemble Counterbalance Valve ........... W2-8-28

Cylinder............................................ W2-11-17 Disassemble Boom Foot Cylinder ........ W2-11-18 Assemble Boom Foot Cylinder............. W2-11-20

2CNW-2-2


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab REMOVE AND INSTALL CAB 2

1

Removal 1. Remove the seat bracket installing bolts (1) (4 used) and remove the seat (2). : 13 mm

W24X-02-01-001

8 8

2. Loosen the screws (8) (19 used) and bolts (9) (4 used) and remove the covers (3 to 7) behind the seat. : 17 mm

5

3

8

8 7

6 4 9

8

9

M2CN-02-01-001

3. Remove the screws (18) (4 used) and bolts (19) (4 used) and remove the covers (16) and (17) on the lower part of the front display. : 17 mm

16 14 18

12

14

4. Remove the screws (14) (14 used) and socket bolts (15) (2 used) and remove the covers (11) to (13) from the left stand (10). : 4 mm

13 14 19

5. Loosen the bolts (20) (4 used) of the left stand (10). (In order to move the left stand) : 13 mm

20

6. Move the left stand (10) approx. 20 mm to the inside.

10

11

14 15

17

W24X-02-01-003

W2-1-1


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab 7. Remove the screws (25) (14 used) and socket bolts (26) (2 used) and remove the covers (22) to (24) from the right stand (21). : 4 mm 8. Loosen the bolts (27) (4 used) of the right stand (21). (In order to move the right stand) : 13 mm

25 23 26 27

25

24

26

25

9. Move the right stand (21) approx. 20 mm to the inside.

25

21 27

22 W2CG-02-01-001

10. Loosen the bolts (33) (22 used) and remove the under covers (28) to (32) at front of the right bed. : 17 mm

28

32 29 31 30 33

11. Disconnect all connectors (34) of the electric wiring for each equipment installed on the cab.

35

33

33

M2CN-02-01-002

34

12. Loosen the hose clamp (36) and remove the air conditioner hoses (35) (2 used).

36

34

34

34

W24X-02-01-006

W2-1-2


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab

13. Remove the bolt (37) and nuts (38) (8 used). : 24 mm

38

37

M2CN-02-01-002

14. Attach a wire rope on the lifting position (M12) (4 places) on the top of cab (39) and support it with the crane. 39

CAUTION: Cab weight: 228 kg 15. Carefully lift the cab (39) in order not to touch the rear stand, left stand, right stand and other equipments on the floor plate.

M2CN-02-01-003

W2-1-3


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab Installation CAUTION: Cab weight: 228 kg 1. Attach a wire rope on the lifting position (12) (4 places) on the top of cab (39) and lift it with the crane.

39

2. Carefully lower the cab (39) in order not to touch the rear stand, left stand, right stand and other equipments on the floor plate.

3. Install the bolt (37) and nuts (38) (8 used). : 24 mm : 68.1 to 79.4 N m (6.9 to 8.1 kgf m)

M2CN-02-01-003

38

37

M2CN-02-01-002

4. Tighten and install the air conditioner hoses (35) (2 used) to the air conditioner with hose clamp (36).

35

34

5. Install all connectors (34) of the electric wiring for each equipment installed on the cab.

36 34

34

34

W24X-02-01-006

W2-1-4


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab 6. Install the under covers (28) to (32) at front of the right platform with the bolts (33) (25 used). : 17 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m)

28

32

31

30

33

29 33

M2CN-02-01-002

33

7. Push the right stand (21) on the wall in the cab.

25 23

8. Tighten the bolts (27) (4 used) of the right stand (21). : 13 mm : 10 N m (1.0 kgf m)

26 27

24

25

26 25

9. Install the covers (22) to (24) on the right stand with the screws (25) (14 used) and socket bolts (26) (2 used). : 4 mm

25

21 27

22

W2CG-02-01-001

10. Push the left stand (10) on the wall in the cab.

16

11. Tighten the bolts (20) (4 used) of the left stand (10). : 13 mm : 10 N m (1.0 kgf m)

14 18

12

14

13

12. Install the covers (11) to (13) on the left stand (10) with the screws (14) (14 used) and socket bolts (15) (2 used). : 4 mm 13. Install the covers (16) and (17) on the bottom of the front display with the screws (18) (14 used) and socket bolts (19) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m)

14 19

20 10

11

14 15

17

W24X-02-01-003

W2-1-5


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab 14. Install the covers (3) to (7) on the rear stand with the screw (8) and bolt (9). : 17 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m)

8 8 5

3

8

8 7

6 4 9

8

9

M2CN-02-01-001

15. Install the seat (2) with the bolt (1). : 13 mm : 10 N m (1.0 kgf m)

1

2

W24X-02-01-001

W2-1-6


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab DIMENSIONS OF THE CAB GLASS Unit: mm

NOTE: JIS R3211, 3212 or equivalent 565.2 25

25

R30 R55

810

Thickness : 6.8 mm

517.7

776 26 22.5

25 466

469.8

R5

22

166

R53

276.5

(134.7)

R75.9

Thickness : 4 mm

53

42.5

Thickness : 4 mm

I11

64 32 88

897.5

122.5

Thickness: 5 mm

763 763 40

22.5

25

57.5

R75.9 I12.2

857.5

26 22

40

39.5 312.4

39.5 312.4

R5

R5

604.5

768 R5

376.6 Thickness: 5 mm R61 758

Thickness : 4 mm

558.5 R40

497.7 65.8

498

186.4

R61 R2519 Thickness : 4 mm

372.6

371.2

650.8 802.9 R61 233.5

123.2

735.9

406.8

Thickness : 4 mm 264.3

R61

251.6

Thickness : 4 mm

148.3

R61

648 623

667.7

Thickness : 4 mm 840

530 172.3

W2BC-02-01-001

W2-1-7


SWING MACHINERY/ Cab (Blank)

W2-1-8


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight REMOVE AND INSTALL COUNTERWEIGHT

1

CAUTION: Never allow the workers enter under and/or between the base machine and counterweight. Removal 1. Lower the boom and remove the hook. After removing the wire rope of the front and rear drum, remove the pendant rope, extension and top section. (As for the removal of the pendant rope, extension and top section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) A

2. Place the power switch on the control box in “ON” and slightly retract the right and left removal/installation cylinder (1) with operating the removal/installation cylinder switch.

M2CN-02-02-001

3. Draw the lever (3) installed on the base counterweight assembly (2). (Right and left: Each 2 places)

3

2

Detail A

IMPORTANT: Carefully operate the switch with adjusting so that the counterweight does not tilt to the right and left. 4. Extend the right and left removal/installation cylinder (1) with operating the removal/installation cylinder switch and lower the counterweight on the ground.

1

M2CN-02-02-002

B

M2CN-02-02-003

W2-2-1


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight 5

5. Pull the lever (4) and draw the pin (5).

4

6. Retract the right and left removal/installation cylinder (1) with operating the removal/installation cylinder switch and lower the removal/installation frame (6).

Detail B

M2CN-02-02-004

C

1

9

D 2

IMPORTANT: Attach a cap so that the dust and foreign matter does not enter after disconnecting the quick couplers. If the quick couplers come in contact with other objects, it may be damaged. Handle with care.

M2CN-02-02-005

7 9

7. Remove the hose (7) for the removal/installation cylinder from the piping (9) installed on the revolving frame (8).

8

Detail C

8. Push the lever (4) and push the pin (5) into the removal/installation frame.

5

4

W2-2-2

M2CN-02-02-006

Detail B

M2CN-02-02-007


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight 9. Push in the lever (3) of the base counterweight assembly (2). (Right and left: Each 2 places)

2

3

Detail D

M2CN-02-02-008

IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the cable of the control box with riding or pinching it when moving the machine forward.

Counterweight Center

Approx. 6.1m to Rotation Center

10. Move the base machine forward and keep it from the counterweight.

NOTE: Move the base machine forward so that the distance between the center of the counterweight and the rotation center of the base machine is approx. 6m.

M2CN-02-02-009

W2-2-3


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight Installation

IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the cable of the control box with riding or pinching it when moving the machine backward. 1. Move the base machine backward to the direction of the counterweight at the status that the base section is supported with the quick draw.

NOTE: Move the base machine backward with aligning the removal/installation frame (6) and the revolving frame (8). Align the removal/installation (6) at the poison of 5m from the revolving frame (8) and stop moving the base machine.

M2CN-02-02-009

8 B

6

Center of Rotating Platform

M2CN-02-02-010

H

8

6 G

F

M2CN-02-02-005

W2-2-4


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight 2. Move the lock lever (13) to “LOCK” side. UNLOCK LOCK

NOTE: When the lock lever (13) is moved to “UNLOCK” position, the counterweight can not be removed and installed.

13

3. Draw the lever (3) installed on the base counterweight assembly (2). (Right and left: Each 2 places)

W2CG-02-02-012

3

2

4. Pull the lever (4) and draw the pin (5).

Detail F

M2CN-02-02-002

5

4

Detail G

M2CN-02-02-007

7 9

IMPORTANT: Wipe off the dust and foreign from the quick couplers before connecting and clean it. If the quick couplers come in contact with other objects, it may be damaged. Handle with care. Securely connect the hydraulic hoses. 5. Connect the hose (7) for the removal/installation cylinder to the piping (9) installed on the revolving frame (8).

W2-2-5

8

Detail H M2CN-02-02-006


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight 6. Place the power switch on the control box in “ON” and extend the right and left removal/installation cylinder (1) with operating the removal/installation cylinder switch.

J 1

I

NOTE: At this time, make sure that the hook (14) of the removal/installation frame (6) is set to the pin (15) of the revolving frame (8) side.

M2CN-02-02-003

15

7. Push the lever (4) and push the pin (5) into the removal/installation frame.

14

8 Detail I

M2CN-02-02-011

5

4 Detail J

W2-2-6

M2CN-02-02-004


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight IMPORTANT: Carefully operate the switch with adjusting so that the counterweight does not tilt to the right and left.

1

L

8. Retract the right and left removal/installation cylinder (1) with operating the removal/installation cylinder switch on the control box and lift the counterweight.

K

9. Push in the lever (3) of the base counterweight assembly (2) and lock the counterweight. (Right and left: Each 2 places)

M2CN-02-02-001

3

2

NOTE: Slightly extend the removal/installation cylinder (1) so that the load is not applied to the removal/installation cylinder (1).

Detail K

M2CN-02-02-008

12

10. Install the extension, top section and pendant rope. (As for the installation of the extension, top section and pendant rope, refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

1

Detail L

M2CN-02-02-012

W2-2-7


SWING MACHINERY / Counterweight (Blank)

W2-2-8


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame REMOVE FRAME

AND

INSTALL

REVOLVING

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Lower the boom and remove the hook. After removing the wire rope of the front/rear drum, remove the pendant rope, extension and boom top section. (As for the removal of the pendant rope, extension and boom top section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

2. Remove the counterweight. (As for the removal of the counterweight, refer to W2-2 in this section.)

3. Remove the boom base section, crawler and lower weight. (As for the removal of the boom base section, crawler and lower weight, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 4. Remove the boom raising/lowering drum wire rope.

W2-3-1


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame 5. Remove the hose of the center joint of only the swing machinery side.

1

1

6. Attach the wire rope on the shackle (1). Install the shackle (1) on the live mast mounting portion of the revolving frame and counterweight mounting portion.

M2CN-02-03-001

1

1

M2CN-02-03-002

W2-3-2


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame CAUTION: Swing machinery weight: Approx. 20 t 7.

Balance the swing machinery with using the wire rope and chain block and support it with the crane.

8.

Put the matching marks on the outer race side of the swing ring and revolving frame side.

M2CN-02-03-003

9.

Loosen the bolt (2) 10 mm of the outer race of the swing ring in both side frames to the direction of the center in order. Carry out the same procedures for the rear side. (The illustration is viewed from the front.) : 50 mm

Center

10. Lift the swing machinery 10 mm with the crane and balance the whole.

2

11. Remove the bolt (2) from the outer race of the swing ring in both side frames to the direction of the center in order. : 50 mm

2

W324-02-03-006

12. Lift the swing machinery with the crane and remove it.

W2-3-3


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame Installation

CAUTION: Swing machinery weight: Approx. 20 t 1. Balance the swing machinery and lift it with the crane. 2. Align the matching marks on the outer race of the swing ring and revolving frame. Lower the swing machinery slowly and support it at the height of 10 mm with the crane.

M2CN-02-03-003

3. Insert the bolt (2) from the outer race side of the swing ring and tighten the bolt temporarily.

Center

4. Tighten all the bolts temporarily and lower the swing machinery completely. 5. Tighten the nuts diagonally and alternately. : 50 mm : 1640 to 1770 N m (167.0 to 181.0 kgf m) 6. Install all hoses on the center joint. (Refer to W3-3 in the following section.)

2

2

W324-02-03-006

W2-3-4


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame 7. Install the lower weight, crawler and boom base section. (As for the installation of the lower weight, crawler and boom base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

8. Install the counterweight. (Refer to W2-2 in this section.)

9. Install the extension, boom top section and pendant rope. (As for the installation of the extension, boom top section and pendant rope, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 10. Wind the wire rope on the front/rear drum and reeve the wire rope through the hook. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

W2-3-5


SWING MACHINERY/ Revolving Frame (Blank)

W2-3-6


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism REMOVE AND INSTALL MAIN PUMP

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Before draining hydraulic oil, lower the boom and apply each brake and drum lock.

Preparation

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain off the hydraulic oil with using a container (500 L). After draining, install the plug (1). : 19mm

1

W2CG-02-04-010

Removal

2

1. Remove all hoses, pipings and wire harness from the pump device. Cap the removed hoses. : 22 mm, 27 mm, 36 mm : 8 mm, 10 mm, 14 mm 2. Attach a wire rope on the main pump and support the main pump with the crane. CAUTION: Main pump weight: Approx. 304 kg 3. Remove the bolts (2) and (3). Lift the main pump with the crane and remove it. : 17mm : 30 mm

3

M2CN-02-04-001

W2-4-1


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: Main pump weight: Approx. 304 kg 2

1. Lift the main pump with the crane and install it to the coupling and bracket.

4

2. Apply LOCTITE on the bolts (2) and (3) and install them. : 17 mm : 400 N m (41.0 kgf m) : 30 mm : 350 to 379 N m (35.7 to 38.7 kgf m) 3. Install all hoses, pipings, and wire harness on the main pump. ᧶22 mm ᧶39 N m (4.0 kgf m) ᧶27 mm ᧶93 N m (9.5 kgf m) ᧶36 mm ᧶175 N m (18.0 kgf m) ᧶8 mm ᧶48 to 50 N m (4.9 to 5.1 kgf m) ᧶10 mm ᧶90 N m (9.2 kgf m) ᧶14 mm ᧶210 N m (21.5 kgf m)

3

M2CN-02-04-001

4. Remove the filler port cover of the hydraulic oil tank. Apply the hydraulic oil to the specified position of the level gauge. 5. Remove the air bleed plug (4) from the top of main pump and fill the hydraulic oil. Install the air bleed plug (4). Start the engine and run at low idling speed. : 36 mm : 170 N m (17.0 kgf m) 6. Loosen the air bleed plug (4) and release the air in the pump. : 36 mm 7. Tighten the air bleed plug (4) after releasing the air. Do the work at low idling speed. Check the hydraulic oil level and any oil leaks. : 36 mm : 170 N m (17.0 kgf m)

W2-4-2


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-3


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE MAIN PUMP

17

18

16 19 14, 15

8

9

10

11

12

13

22

21

20

23 24 25

7 4

5

6

5

8

26

3

28

45

67 27 44

27

2 29

63

43

57 10 58

42

1 41

62 66

40 39 38 37 35 30

31

32

36

46 10

33,34

61

47 48

64

65

59 60

17

18

54

55

53 52 56 50 42 49 40

46

51

W2CG-02-04-002

W2-4-4


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 -

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Plate O-Ring Retaining Ring (2 Used) Spacer (3 Used) Bearing (2 Used) Shaft Nut (2 Used) Screw (2 Used) Spring Pin (6 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Backup Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Feedback Pin (2 Used) Tilt Pin (2 Used) Regulator Socket Bolt (4 Used)

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 -

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Backup Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Servo Piston (2 Used) O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (4 Used) Pump Casing (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (26 Used) Support (2 Used) Socket Bolt (8 Used) Plate (2 Used) Bushing (2 Used) Plate (2 Used) Piston (18 Used) Shoe (18 Used)

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 -

W2-4-5

Spring (18 Used) Cylinder Block (2 Used) Spring (18 Used) Cylinder Block (2 Used) Valve Plate Bearing (2 Used) Gear O-Ring Block Screw (2 Used) Eyebolt (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (2 Used) Valve Plate O-Ring (16 Used) Shaft

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

O-Ring Oil Seal Cover Socket Bolt (4 Used) Regulator Plug(᧮Used) O-Ring Reduction Gear Flange Socket (4 Used) O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Block Socket Bolt (4 Used) Block (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 17

18

16

24 25

28 29

43

41

38 37 35

36 59

33,34

60

30

17

18

54

55

53 56

51

W2CG-02-04-002

W2-4-6


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Main Pump

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

IMPORTANT: Place the rubber plate or cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts.

IMPORTANT: Place the rubber plate on the workbench not to damage the regulator mounting surface when placing it down.

1. Select the place to disassemble. NOTE: Select a clean place. 2. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of pump with using washing oil.

6. Place the pump on the workbench horizontally with the regulator mounting surface with placing downward. Separate the pump casing (25) from the block (43). NOTE: Remove the gear (41) at the same time when separating the pump casing (25) from the block (43).

3. Remove the plug (24) and drain the oil from the pump casing (25). : 36 mm NOTE: Drain the oil from the plug in front pump and rear pump respectively.

IMPORTANT: Do not damage the sliding surfaces of the cylinder block (38), bushing (36), shoe (34) and plate (30).

4. Remove the socket bolts (17), (18) and flange socket (60). Remove the regulators (16), (56) and reduction gear (59). : 6 mm, 12 mm

7. Remove the cylinder block (38) from the pump casing (25) straightly to the shaft. At the same time, remove the piston (33), plate (35), bushing (36), and spring (37).

NOTE: As for disassembly of the regulators (16) and (56), refer to the corresponding section.

IMPORTANT: Do not damage the oil seal (53) when removing the cover (54).

5. Remove the socket bolt (29) that tightens the support (28), pump casing (25) and block (43).

8. Remove the socket bolt (55) and remove the cover (54). : 6 mm

᧶ 17mm NOTE: In case the pump is installed behind the pump, carry out this working after removing the pump first.

W2-4-7

NOTE: If inserting the bolt in the hole (M6) on the cover (54), the cover (54) can be removed easily.


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

19 15

22

11 8

25

7

8

67 28 2 43 1 40 39

32 30

49

51

W2CG-02-04-002

W2-4-8


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 9. Remove the socket bolt (1) and block (67). Remove the plate (2). : 14 mm 10. Tap the mounting flange part of the support (28) from the pump casing (25) side and separate the support (28) from the pump casing (25). 11. Remove the plates (32) and (30) from the pump casing (25). 12. Tap the ends of the shafts (51) and (7) with using a plastic hammer and remove the shafts (51) and (7) from the support (28). 13. Remove the valve plates (39) and (49) from the block (43). NOTE: The valve plates (39) and (49) may be removed at step 6. IMPORTANT: When removing the tilt pin (15), use a special tool not to damage the head of tilt pin (15). As LOCTITE is applied on the fitting part between the tilt pin (15) and servo piston (22), do not damage the servo piston (22). Do not remove the bearing (40) except replacement. As the setting of flow rate changes, do not loosen the lock nut (8) of the block (43) and support (28). 14. If necessary, remove the stoppers (19), (11), servo piston (22) and tilt pin (15) from the pump casing (25). Remove the bearing (40) from the block (43).

W2-4-9


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE MAIN PUMP 56

16

18

17

9

13

12

22 31 14 15

21

20

17

18

19 50

45

57

8

44

42

23,24

33

34

11

8

67

10 26 54 55 4 51

1

53 5 52 6 30 28

27

32 35

36

37

10 29

40 49

47,48 43

46

41 65

39

38

25

7

3

2

64 59

66 62 63

68 67

60

61 58

66 65 69

W2CG-02-04-011

W2-4-10


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Plate O-Ring Retaining Ring (2 Used) Spacer (3 Used) Bearing (2 Used) Shaft Nut (2 Used) Screw ᧤2 Used᧥ Spring Pin (6 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Backup Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Feedback Pin (2 Used) Tilt Pin (2 Used) Regulator Socket Bolt (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 -

Stopper (2 Used) Backup Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Servo Piston (2 Used) O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (4 Used) Pump Casing ᧤2 Used᧥ O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (26 Used) Support (2 Used) Socket Bolt (8 Used) Plate (2 Used) Bushing (2 Used) Plate (2 Used) Piston (18 Used) Shoe (18 Used) Plate (2 Used) Bushing (2 Used)

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 -

Spring (18 Used) Cylinder Block (2 Used) Valve Plate Bearing (2 Used) Gear O-Ring (2 Used) Block Screw (2 Used) Eyebolt (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (2 Used) Valve Plate O-Ring (16 Used) Shaft O-Ring (2 Used) Oil Seal Cover

W2-4-11

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 -

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Regulator Plug (12 Used) O-Ring Reduction Gear Flange Socket (4 Used) O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Block Socket Bolt (4 Used) Block (4 Used) Seat (4 Used) Steel Ball (4 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Reducing Valve


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

22 31 14 15

19

33

34

11 67 1

54 55 4 51

53 5 6 30 28

35

36

37

49

43

46

38

25

7

2

W2CG-02-04-011

W2-4-12


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Main Pump IMPORTANT: When tightening the servo piston (22) and tilt pin (15), use a special tool not to damage the head of tilt pin (15) and feedback pin (14). Apply LOCTITE (medium intensity) on the thread part. 1. Install the support (28) on the pump casing (25) while tapping with using a hammer. NOTE: When the servo piston (22), the tilt pin (15), the stoppers (19) and (11) are removed, install them on the pump casing (25) first. 2. Place the pump casing (25) with directing the regulator mounting surface downward. Insert the bushing (31) of the plate (30) in the tilt pin (15). Install the plate (30) on the support (28) correctly. NOTE: Check if the plate (30) can move smoothly by fingers. If the grease is applied on the plate (30), support (28) and moving part, the shaft (7) and (51) can be installed easily. IMPORTANT: Do not tap the shaft (51) with using a hammer.

IMPORTANT: Do not damage the oil seal (53) when installing.

4. Secure the cover (54) on the pump casing (25) with the socket bolt (55). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m) NOTE: Slightly apply grease on the oil seal (53) in the cover (54). 5. Secure the plate (2) on the pump casing (25) with the socket bolt (1) and block (67). : 14 mm : 430 N m (44.0 kgf m) 6. Assemble the piston cylinder sub assembly (cylinder block (38), piston (33), shoe (34), plate (35), bushing (36) and spring (37)). As aligning the spline of the bushing (36) and cylinder block (38), insert the piston cylinder sub assembly into the pump casing (25). IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the suction and delivery of the valve plate (49). 7. Align with pin (46) and install the valve plate (49) on the block (42).

3. Install the shaft with the bearing (6), spacer (5) and retaining ring (4) set on the support (28). NOTE: Install the outer ring of the bearing (6) while tapping with using a plastic hammer and install) the outer ring with using a steel bar completely.

W2-4-13


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

56

16

18

17

17

18

14 15

24

51

29

43

41

25

7

59

60

W2CG-02-04-011

W2-4-14


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the block (42). (Install the block (42) with the regulator (56) positioned upward and the suction flange positioned to the right.) 8. Install the block (43) on the pump casing (25) and tighten the socket bolt (29). : 17mm : 430 N m (44.0 kgf m) NOTE: If assembling the pump at rear side first, the assembling procedures are easy. Insert the gear (41) into the block (43) first and connect to the joint spline of shafts (7) and (51). IMPORTANT: Check the regulators (16) and (56) for the front and rear. 9. Insert the feedback pin (14) of the tilt pin (15) into the feedback lever of the regulators (16) and (56). Install the regulators (16), (56) and reduction gear (59). Tighten the socket bolts (17), (18) and flange socket (58). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m) : 12 mm : 33 N m (3.4 kgf m) 10. Install the plug (24). : 36 mm : 170 N m (17.3 kgf m)

W2-4-15


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism MAINTENANCE STANDARD

1. Clearance between piston outer diameter and cylinder inner bore.

Standard

Allowable Limit

D-d

0.035 mm

0.062 mm

d

D

W25N-02-04-005

2. Clearance between piston and shoe calking portion

ˡ

Standard

Allowable Limit

0 to 0.1 mm

0.3 mm

ˡ t

3. Shoe thickness

W25N-02-04-006

t

Standard

Allowable Limit

4.9 mm

4.7 mm

4. Free length of cylinder spring

L

Standard

Allowable Limit

39.5 mm

38.7 mm L

W25N-02-04-007

5. Combining height of plate and spherical bushing

H-h

Standard

Allowable Limit

23.0 mm

22.0 mm H h

W25N-02-04-008

W2-4-16


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-17


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE FRONT REGULATOR 3 11 10 9 8 21

7

20

6 5 1

2

3

12

19

16

13

17

4

14

22

15

23 16

24 25 26

18

29 30

27 28

44 41

43 42 40 36

45

41

39

37 38

31 32

30

46

47 47

33

30

48

35 34

49

50

56 54 55 58

54

53

52 51

57

49

50

W2CG-02-04-003

W2-4-18


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Pin (2 Used) Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (10 Used)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

Cover O-Ring O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring Plug (5 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut

W2-4-19

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

Screw Casing Pin (2 Used) Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (9 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

11 10 9 8

13 14 15

23 24 25 26

30

27 28

44 41

43 45 40 36

37

39

30

48 30

50

54 51

54 58

57

50

W2CG-02-04-003

W2-4-20


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Front Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

IMPORTANT: Put the rubber plate or cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts. As the parts are small, take care not to lose the parts.

5. After removing the cover (43) sub assembly, take out the springs (9), (10) and spring seat (8) from the compensating part. Pull out the adjusting rod (13), spring (14) and spring seat (15) from the pilot part. NOTE: The adjusting rod (13) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M4).

1. Select the place to disassemble. NOTE: Select a clean place. 2. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of regulator with using washing oil. IMPORTANT: Take care not to lose the O-ring (54). 3. Remove the socket bolts (36) and (37). Remove the regulator from the pump. : 6 mm IMPORTANT: The adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) are installed on the cover (43). As the pressure-flow rate setting is changed, do not loosen these screws and nuts. 4. Remove the socket bolt (30) and remove the cover (43). : 5 mm

6. Remove the socket bolts (58) and (30). Remove the cover (57). After removing the cover (57), remove the set spring (25) from the pilot part. : 5 mm IMPORTANT: When removing the retaining ring (28), the return spring (26) flies out. Take care not to lose the return spring (26). 7. Remove the retaining ring (28) and remove the spring seat (27), return spring (26) and sleeve (23). NOTE: The retaining ring (24) is installed on the sleeve (23). 8. Remove the retaining ring (50) and remove the plugs (48) and (51). NOTE: The plugs (48) and (51) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M6).

W2-4-21


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

21

7

20

6

19

16

5

17

22 16

29

W2CG-02-04-003

W2-4-22


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Do not remove the pin (16). 9. Remove the lever (17). NOTE: The lever (17) can be removed easily with using a pair of tweezers.

10. Remove the pin (19) and remove the feedback lever (20). NOTE: Push out the pin (19) (pin dia. I4) from the top with using a thin steel bar not to touch with the lever (21). IMPORTANT: Do not remove the pin (16). 11. Remove the lever (21). 12. Pull out the piston (29) and spool (22). 13. Pull out the casing (5), piston (6) and rod (7). NOTE: When pushing out the rod (7) from the opposite side of the casing (5), the casing (5) can be removed.

W2-4-23


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE FRONT REGULATOR

30

32 36

30

14

30

31

45 33

35

54

54

55

58

25 37 21

18

47 19

49

50 48

57 28

51

3

17

1

56

29 53

34

27 26

13

15

24

23

22

46

8

43

44 39 41 40

11

16

3

2

38

4

20

41

12

42

5

6

7

9

10

52

W2CG-02-04-004

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Pin (2 Used) Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (10 Used)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

Cover O-Ring O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring Plug (5 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut

W2-4-24

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

Screw Casing Pin (2 Used) Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (9 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Front Regulator 1. Insert the rod (7) into the compensating hole of the casing (46).

5. Insert the piston (29) into the hole for the negative control on the casing (46).

2. Install the pin (16) on the lever (21). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the rod (7). Install the pin (47) on the casing (46). Install the lever (21) into the pin (47).

NOTE: Check if the piston (29) moves smoothly.

IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (22) and sleeve (23) can move in the casing (46) smoothly. Check the direction of the spool (22).

6. Install the pin (16) on the lever (17). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the piston (29). Install the lever (17). 7. Install the pin (47) to plug (48). Align the pin (47) with the pin hole on the lever (17) and install the plug (48). Install the retaining ring (50). IMPORTANT: Check the inserting holes for the plugs (48) and (51). 8. Insert the plug (51) and install the retaining ring (50).

22

20 W25N-02-04-011

3. Insert the spool (22) and sleeve (23) into the spool hole on the casing (46).

NOTE: Check if the feedback lever (20) has not too big play or moves smoothly. 9. Insert the return spring (26) and spring seat (27) into the spool hole and install retaining ring (28).

4. Install the feedback lever (20). Align the pin hole on the feedback lever (20) and insert the pin (19). NOTE: If the pin (19) is inserted into the feedback lever (20) first, the inserting procedure is easy. IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the feedback lever (20). Lever (21) Side

Lever (17) Side (Plugs (48, 51) Side)

W25N-02-04-012

W2-4-25


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 14

30

30

45 41

13

15

58

25

8

43

44 39 41 40

57

11

5

6

9

10

W2CG-02-04-004

W2-4-26


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 10. Insert the set spring (25) into the spool hole and insert the piston (6) and casing (5) into the compensating hole. Tighten the cover (57) with the socket bolts (58) and (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm (1.2kgfᨿm) IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the spring seat. 11. Insert the spring seat (15), spring (14) and adjusting rod (13) into the pilot hole. Insert the spring seat (8) and springs (10) and (9) into the compensating hole. 12. Install the adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) on the cover (43). Install the cover (43) and tighten socket bolt (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm (1.2kgfᨿm)

W2-4-27


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE REAR REGULATOR

61

33

59

60

32

33

35

35

14

30

36

30

45

31

35

54

54

55

13

15

29 53

56

41

12

58

34 25 37

18 21

47 19

49

50 48

27 26

28 3

17

1

22

46

8

24

57

51

23

11 3

2

38

4 5

44 39 41 40

16

20

43

42 6

7

9

10

52

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-28


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat Pin (2 Used)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (6 Used) Valve Casing O-Ring

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Plug (7 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut Screw Casing Pin (2 Used)

W2-4-29

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (9 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) O-Ring Reducing Valve


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

14

30

36

30

45 13

15 54

54

58

25 37

50 48

57

27 26

23

8

24

43

44 39 41 40

28

51

11

9

10

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-30


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Rear Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

IMPORTANT: Put the rubber plate or cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts. As the parts are small, take care not to lose the parts. 1. Select the place to disassemble. NOTE: Select a clean place.

2. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of regulator with using washing oil. IMPORTANT: Take care not to lose the O-ring (54). 3. Remove the socket bolts (36) and (37). Remove the regulator from the pump. : 6 mm IMPORTANT: The adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) are installed on the cover (43). As the pressure-flow rate setting is changed, do not loosen these screws and nuts. 4. Remove the socket bolt (30) and remove the cover (43). : 5 mm

5. After removing the cover (43) sub assembly, take out the springs (9), (10) and spring seat (8) from the compensating part. Pull out the adjusting rod (13), spring (14) and spring seat (15) from the pilot part. NOTE: The adjusting rod (13) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M4). 6. Remove the socket bolts (58) and (30). Remove the cover (57). After removing the cover (57), remove the set spring (25) from the pilot part. : 5 mm IMPORTANT: When removing the retaining ring (28), the return spring (26) flies out. Take care not to lose the return spring (26). 7. Remove the retaining ring (28) and remove the spring seat (27), return spring (26) and sleeve (23). NOTE: The retaining ring (24) is installed on the sleeve (23). 8. Remove the retaining ring (50) and remove the plugs (48) and (51). NOTE: The plugs (48) and (51) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M6).

W2-4-31


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

29

22 19 21

17 16

20 5

6

7

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-32


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Do not remove pin (16). 9. Remove lever (17). NOTE: The lever (17) can be removed easily with using a pair of tweezers. 10. Remove the pin (19) and remove the feedback lever (20). NOTE: Push out the pin (19) (pin dia. I 4) from the top with using a thin steel bar not to touch with the lever (21).

IMPORTANT: Do not remove pin (16). 11. Remove the lever (21). 12. Pull out the piston (29) and spool (22). 13. Pull out the casing (5), piston (6) and rod (7). NOTE: When pushing out the rod (7) from the opposite side of the casing (5), the casing (5) can be remove.

W2-4-33


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE REAR REGULATOR

61

33

59

60

32

33

35

35

14

30

36

30

45

31

35

54

54

55

13

15

29 53

56

41

12

58

34 25 37

18 21

47 19

49

50 48

27 26

28 3

17

1

22

46

8

24

57

51

23

11 3

2

38

4 5

44 39 41 40

16

20

43

42 6

7

9

10

52

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-34


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat Pin (2 Used)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (6 Used) Valve Casing O-Ring

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Plug (7 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut Screw Casing Pin (2 Used)

W2-4-35

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (9 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) O-Ring Reducing Valve


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

29

27 26 47 19 21

23

22

46

50 48

28

51

17 16

20 7

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-36


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Rear Regulator 1. Insert the rod (7) into the compensating hole of the casing (46).

5. Inert the piston (29) into the hole for the negative control on the casing (46).

2. Install the pin (16) on the lever (21). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the rod (7). Install the pin (47) on the casing (46). Install the lever (21) into the pin (47).

NOTE: Check if the piston (29) moves smoothly. 6. Install the pin (16) on the lever (17). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the piston (29). Install the lever (17).

IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (22) and sleeve (23) can move in the casing (46) smoothly. Check the direction of the spool (22).

7. Install the pin (47) to plug (48). Align the pin (47) with the pin hole on the lever (17) and install the plug (48). Install the retaining ring (50). IMPORTANT: Check the inserting holes for the plugs (48) and (51). 8. Insert the plug (51) and nstall the retaining ring (50).

22

20

NOTE: Check if the feedback lever (20) has not too big play or moves smoothly. W25N-02-04-011

9. Insert the return spring (26) and spring seat (27) into the spool hole and install retaining ring (28).

3. Insert the spool (22) and sleeve (23) into the spool hole on the casing (46). 4. Install the feedback lever (20). Align the pin holes of the feedback lever (20) and insert the pin (19).

NOTE: If the pin (19) is inserted into the feedback lever (20) first, the inserting procedure is easy.

IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the feedback lever (20). Lever (21) Side

Lever (17) Side (Plugs (48, 51) Side)

W25N-02-04-012

W2-4-37


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

14

30

30

45 13

15 58

25

8

43

44 39 41 40

57

11

5

6

9

10

W2CG-02-04-005

W2-4-38


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 10. Insert the set spring (25) into the spool hole and insert the piston (6) and casing (5) into the compensating hole. Tighten the cover (57) with the socket bolts (58) and (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm(1.2kgfᨿm)

IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the spring seat. 11. Insert the spring seat (15), spring (14) and adjusting rod (13) into the pilot hole. Insert the spring seat (8) and springs (10) and (9) into the compensating hole. 12. Install the adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) on the cover (43). Install the cover (43) and tighten socket bolt (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm(1.2kgfᨿm)

W2-4-39


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-40


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism REMOVE AND INSTALL SWING PUMP

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Before draining hydraulic oil, lower the boom and apply each brake and drum lock.

Preparation

1. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain off the hydraulic oil with using a container (500 L). : 19mm

1

W2CG-02-04-010

Removal 1. Remove all hoses, pipings and wire harness from the swing pump. Cap the removed hoses. : 10 mm : 22 mm, 27 mm

2

2. Attach a wire rope on the swing pump and support the swing pump with the crane.

CAUTION: Swing pump weight: 45 kg 3. Remove the bolt (2). Lift the swing pump with the crane and remove it. : 14 mm M2CN-02-04-002

W2-4-41


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: Swing pump weight: 45 kg

1. Lift the swing pump with the crane and install it on the main pump.

2. Install the bolt (2). : 14 mm : 240 N m (24.0 kgf m) 2

3. Install all hoses, pipings and wire harness on the swing pump. Fill the hydraulic oil in the swing pump. : 10 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m) : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) 4. Remove the filler port cover of the hydraulic oil. Apply the hydraulic oil to a specified position of the level gauge. 5. Start the engine and run at low idling speed. Release the air in the swing pump. 6. Do the work at low idling speed after releasing the air. Check the hydraulic oil level and any oil leaks.

W2-4-42

M2CN-02-04-002


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-43


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE SWING PUMP 51

52

4

53

6

10

17 18 45 44 43

39

38 37

35

34

33

32

27

31

26

W2CG-02-04-007

1 - Stopper

15 - O-Ring

28 - O-Ring (2 Used)

41 - Bearing

2 - Backup Ring

16 - Screw

29 - Nut

42 - Spacer (2 Used)

3 - O-Ring

17 - Valve Plate

30 - Eye Bolt

43 - Shaft

4 - Cylinder Block

18 - Cover

31 - Pump Casing

44 - Oil Seal

5 - Servo Piston

19 - Socket Bolt (2 Used)

32 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

45 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

6 - Shoe (9 Used)

20 - Cover

33 - Bushing

46 - O-Ring

7 - Bushing

21 - O-Ring (2 Used)

34 - Plate

47 - Spring Pin (2 Used)

8 - Tilt Pin

22 - Bearing

35 - Plate

48 - Lock Nut (2 Used) 49 - Screw

23 - Plug

36 - Plug (7 Used)

10 - Piston (9 Used)

9 - Feedback Pin

24 - O-Ring

37 - Support

50 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

11 - O-Ring

25 - Pin

38 - Plate

51 - Regulator

12 - Backup Ring

26 - Spring (9 Used)

39 - Cover

52 - Socket Bolt (2 Used)

13 - Stopper

27 - Plug (2 Used)

40 - Retaining Ring

53 - Socket Bolt (2 Used)

14 - O-Ring (9 Used)

W2-4-44


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Swing Pump

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” before disassembling.

IMPORTANT: Put the rubber plate and cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts.

IMPORTANT: Do not damage the sliding surfaces of the cylinder block (4), bushing (34), shoe (6) and plate (38).

1. Select the place to disassemble. NOTE: Select a clean place. 2. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of the pump with using washing oil. 3. Remove the plug (27) and drain the oil from the pump casing (31). : 27 mm 4. Remove the socket bolts (52) (2 used) and (53) (2 used). Remove the regulator (51). : 6 mm NOTE: As for disassembly of the regulator (51), refer to the corresponding section. 5. Loosen the socket bolts (32) (4 used) that connect the support (37), pump casing (31) and cover (18). : 14 mm IMPORTANT: Put the rubber plate or cloth on the workbench not to damage the mounting surface of the regulator when positioning the regulator mounting surface downward.

7. Pull out the cylinder block (4) from the pump casing (31) straightly to the shaft (43). At the same time, remove the piston (10) (9 used), plate (34), bushing (33) and spring (26) (9 used). IMPORTANT: As the oil seal (44) is installed on the cover (39), take care not to damage the oil seal (44) when removing. 8. Remove the socket bolt (45) (4 used) and remove the cover (39). : 5 mm 9. Tap the mounting flange part of the support (37) from the pump casing (31) side and separate the support (37) from the pump casing (31). 10. Remove the plates (35) and (38) from the pump casing (31). 11. As tapping the shaft end part of shaft (43) with using a plastic hammer, remove the shaft (43) from the support (37). 12. Remove the valve plate (17) from the cover (18). NOTE: The valve plate (17) may be removed at the step 6.

6. Place the pump onto the workbench horizontally with positioning the mounting surface downward. Separate the cover (18) from pump casing (31).

W2-4-45


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

1

5

8

13

48 18

37

31

22

W2CG-02-04-007

W2-4-46


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: When removing the tilt pin (8), use a special tool not to damage the head of the tilt pin (8). As LOCTITE is applied on the fitting part between the tilt pin (8) and the servo piston (5), take care not to damage the servo piton (5). Do not remove the bearing (22) except replacement. As the setting of flow rate changes, do not loosen the lock nut (48) of the cover (18) and support (37). 13. If necessary, remove the stoppers (13), (1), servo piston (5) and tilt pin (8) from the pump casing (31) and remove the bearing (22) from the cover (18).

W2-4-47


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE SWING PUMP 51

52

1

4

5

6

53

8,9

7

10

13

17 18 45 44 42 43

41 40 39

38 37

34

33

32

31

27

26

25

W2CG-02-04-007

12345678910 11 12 13 14 -

Stopper Backup Ring O-Ring Cylinder Block Servo Piston Shoe (9 Used) Bushing Tilt Pin Feedback Pin Piston (9 Used) O-Ring Backup Ring Stopper O-Ring (9 Used)

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

O-Ring Screw Valve Plate Cover Socket Bolt (2 Used) Cover O-Ring (2 Used) Bearing Plug O-Ring Pin Spring (9 Used) Plug (2 Used)

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

O-Ring (2 Used) Nut Eye Bolt Pump Casing Socket Bolt (4 Used) Bushing Plate Plate Plug (7 Used) Support Plate Cover Retaining Ring

W2-4-48

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

Bearing Spacer (2 Used) Shaft Oil Seal Socket Bolt (4 Used) O-Ring Spring Pin (2 Used) Lock Nut (2 Used) Screw Socket Bolt (4 Used) Regulator Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Swing Pump IMPORTANT: When tightening the servo piston (5) and tilt pin (8), use a special tool not to damage the head of the tilt pin (8) and feedback pin (9). Apply LOCTITE (medium intensity) on the thread part. 1. Install the support (37) on the pump casing (31) while tapping with using a hammer. NOTE: When the servo piston (5), tilt pin (8), stoppers (1) and (13) are removed, install them on the pump casing (31) first. 2. Place the pump casing (31) with positioning the mounting surface for regulator downward. Insert the bushing (7) of the plate (38) into the tilt pin (8). Install the plate (38) on the support (37) correctly. NOTE: Check if the plate (38) can move smoothly by fingers. If the grease is applied on the plate (38) and support (37) and moving portion, the shaft (43) can be installed easily. IMPORTANT: Do not hit the shaft (43) with using a hammer. 3. Install the shaft (43) with the bearing (41), spacer (42) (2 used) and retaining ring (40) set on the support (37). NOTE: Tap the outer ring of the bearing (41) with using a plastic hammer and insert the bearing (41) with using a steel bar completely.

IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage oil seal (44) when installing. 4. Install the cover (39) on the pump casing (31) and secure with the socket bolts (45) (4 used). : 5 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) NOTE: Slightly apply the grease on the oil seal (44) in the cover (39). 5. Assemble the piston cylinder sub assembly (cylinder block (4), pistons (10) (9 used), shoe (6) (9 used), plate (34), bushing (33) and springs (26) (9 used)). Align the splines of bushing (33) and cylinder block (4) and insert the piston cylinder sub assembly in the pump casing (31). IMPORTANT: Check the direction of suction and delivery of the valve plate (17). 6. As aligning with pin (25), install the valve plate (17) on the cover (18). 7. Install the cover (18) on the pump casing (31). Tighten the socket bolts (32) (4 used). : 14 mm : 240 N m (24.0 kgf m) 8. Insert the feedback pin (9) of the tilt pin (8) in the feedback lever of the regulator (51) and install the regulator (51). Tighten the socket bolts (52) (2 used) and (53) (2 used). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m) 9. Install the plug (27). : 27 mm : 110 N m (11.0 kgf m)

W2-4-49


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism MAINTENANCE STANDARD

1. Clearance between piston outer diameter and cylinder inner bore.

D-d

Standard

Allowable Limit

0.028 mm

0.056 mm

d

D

W25N-02-04-005

2. Clearance between piston and shoe calking portion

ˡ

Standard

Allowable Limit

0 to 0.1 mm

0.3 mm ˡ t

3. Shoe thickness

W25N-02-04-006

t

Standard

Allowable Limit

3.9 mm

3.7 mm

4. Free length of cylinder spring

L

Standard

Allowable Limit

31.3 mm

30.5 mm L

W25N-02-04-007

5. Combining height of plate and spherical bushing

H-h

Standard

Allowable Limit

19.0 mm

18.3 mm

H h

W25N-02-04-008

W2-4-50


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-51


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE REGULATOR

58

49

62

60 61

30

31

36

32

35

14

30

57

49 33

45

4

54

55

56

49,59

25 37

21

18

47

19

49

34

27

26

24

13

15

53

29

23

22

46

8

50 51

17 16 20

3

1

44

11 3

2

38

4 5

43

41

39 41 40

28 48

12

42 6

7

9

10

52

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-52


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat Pin (2 Used)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover Socket Bolt (5 Used)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 -

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Plug (8 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut Screw Casing Pin (2 Used) Plug

W2-4-53

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

O-Ring (5 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (12 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Reducing Valve Plug Seat (2 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Ball (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

36

32

14

30

57

45

25 37

13

15

4

27

26

24

23

8

50

43

44 39 41 40

28 51 48

11

9

10

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-54


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

IMPORTANT: Put the rubber plate or cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts. As the parts are small, take care not to lose the parts. 1. Select the place to disassemble. NOTE: Select a clean place. 2. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of regulator with using washing oil. IMPORTANT: Take care not to lose the O-ring (4). 3. Remove the socket bolts (36) and (37). Remove the regulator from the pump. : 6 mm IMPORTANT: The adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) are installed on the cover (43). As the pressure-flow rate setting is changed, do not loosen these screws and nuts. 4. Remove the socket bolt (30) and remove the cover (43). : 5 mm

5. After removing the cover (43) sub assembly, take out the springs (9), (10) and spring seat (8) from the compensating part. Pull out the adjusting rod (13), spring (14) and spring seat (15) from the pilot part. NOTE: The adjusting rod (13) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M4). 6. Remove the socket bolt (32) and remove the cover (57). After removing the cover (57), remove the set spring (25) from the pilot part. : 5 mm IMPORTANT: When removing the retaining ring (28), the return spring (26) flies out. Take care not to lose the return spring (26). 7. Remove the retaining ring (28) and remove the spring seat (27), return spring (26) and sleeve (23). NOTE: The retaining ring (24) is installed on the sleeve (23). 8. Remove the retaining ring (50) and remove the plugs (48) and (51). NOTE: The plugs (48) and (51) can be removed easily with using the bolt (M6).

W2-4-55


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

29

22 21

19

17 16 20 5

6

7

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-56


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Do not remove pin (16). 9. Remove lever (17). NOTE: The lever (17) can be removed easily with using a pair of tweezers. 10. Remove the pin (19) and remove the feedback lever (20). NOTE: Push out the pin (19) (pin dia. I 4) from the top with using a thin steel bar not to touch with the lever (21).

IMPORTANT: Do not remove pin (16). 11. Remove the lever (21). 12. Pull out the piston (29) and spool (22). 13. Pull out the casing (5), piston (6) and rod (7). NOTE: When pushing out the rod (7) from the opposite side of the casing (5), the casing (5) can be remove.

W2-4-57


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE REGULATOR

58

49

62

60 61

30

31

36

32

35

14

30

57

49 33

45

4

54

55

56

49,59

25 37

21

18

47

19

49

34

27

26

24

13

15

53

29

23

22

46

8

50 51

17 16 20

3

1

44

11 3

2

38

4 5

43

41

39 41 40

28 48

12

42 6

7

9

10

52

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-58


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Pin Sleeve O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Piston Rod Spring Seat Spring Spring Adjusting Rod O-Ring Adjusting Rod Spring Spring Seat Pin (2 Used)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Lever Pin Pin Feedback Lever Lever Spool Sleeve Retaining Ring Set Spring Return Spring Spring Seat Retaining Ring Piston Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover Socket Bolt (5 Used)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring Plug (8 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Adjusting Screw Adjusting Screw Nut (2 Used) O-Ring Cover Lock Nut Screw Casing Pin (2 Used)

W2-4-59

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Plug O-Ring (5 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Plug Pin O-Ring O-Ring (12 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Cover Reducing Valve Plug Seat (2 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Ball (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

29

27 21

47

19

26

23

22

46

50 28 51 48

17 16 20 7

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-60


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Regulator 1. Insert the rod (7) into the compensating hole of the casing (46).

5. Inert the piston (29) into the hole for the negative control on the casing (46).

2. Install the pin (16) on the lever (21). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the rod (7). Install the pin (47) on the casing (46). Install the lever (21) into the pin (47).

NOTE: Check if the piston (29) moves smoothly.

IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (22) and sleeve (23) can move in the casing (46) smoothly. Check the direction of the spool (22).

6. Install the pin (16) on the lever (17). Insert the pin (16) into the groove of the piston (29). Install the lever (17). 7. Install the pin (47) to plug (48). Align the pin (47) with the pin hole on the lever (17) and install the plug (48). Install the retaining ring (50). IMPORTANT: Check the inserting holes for the plugs (48) and (51). 8. Insert the plug (51) and install the retaining ring (50).

22

20

NOTE: Check if the feedback lever (20) has not too big play or moves smoothly. W25N-02-04-011

3. Insert the spool (22) and sleeve (23) into the spool hole on the casing (46).

9. Insert the return spring (26) and spring seat (27) into the spool hole and install retaining ring (28).

4. Install the feedback lever (20). Align the pin holes of the feedback lever (20) and insert the pin (19). NOTE: If the pin (19) is inserted into the feedback lever (20) first, the inserting procedure is easy. IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the feedback lever (20). Lever (21) Side

Lever (17) Side (Plugs (48, 51) Side)

W25N-02-04-012

W2-4-61


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

32

14

30

57

45 41

13

15

25

8

43

44 39 40

11

5

6

9

10

W2CG-02-04-008

W2-4-62


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 10. Insert the set spring (25) into the spool hole and insert the piston (6) and casing (5) into the compensating hole. Tighten the cover (57) with the socket bolts (58) and (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm (1.2 kgfᨿm) IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the spring seat. 11. Insert the spring seat (15), spring (14) and adjusting rod (13) into the pilot hole. Insert the spring seat (8) and springs (10) and (9) into the compensating hole. 12. Install the adjusting screws (39), (40), adjusting rod (11), lock nut (44), nut (41) and screw (45) on the cover (43). Install the cover (43) and tighten socket bolt (30). : 5 mm : 12 Nᨿm (1.2 kgfᨿm)

W2-4-63


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-64


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism REMOVE AND INSTALL GEAR PUMP (FOR OIL COOLER) CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Before draining hydraulic oil, lower the boom and apply each brake and drum lock.

Preparation 1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain off the hydraulic oil with using the container (500 L). : 19mm

1

W2CG-02-04-010

Removal 1. Remove all hoses and pipings from the gear pump (for oil cooler). Cap the removed hoses. : 32 mm

2

2. Support the gear pump (for oil cooler).

CAUTION: Gear pump (for oil cooler) weight: 4.2 kg 3. Remove the bolt (2) and remove the gear pump (for oil cooler). : 17 mm

M2CN-02-04-003

W2-4-65


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: Gear pump (for oil cooler) weight: 4.2 kg

1. Connect the gear pimp (for oil cooler) to the swing pump.

2. Apply LOCTITE on the bolt (2) and install. : 17 mm : 41 to 45 N m (4.2 to 4.6 kgf m)

3. Install all hoses and pipings on the gear pump (for oil cooler). Fill the hydraulic oil in the gear pump (for oil cooler). : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) : 32 mm : 137 N m (14.0 kgf m)

2

4. Remove the filler port cover of the hydraulic oil tank. Fill the hydraulic oil to a specified position of the level gauge. 5. Start the engine and run at low idling speed. Release the air in the gear pump (for oil cooler). 6. After releasing the air, do the work at low idling speed. Check the hydraulic oil level and any oil leaks.

M2CN-02-04-003

W2-4-66


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-67


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE GEAR PUMP (FOR OIL COOLER)

6

13

3

4

5

4

3

2

1

11

12

14

7

8

10

9

M2CN-02-04-004

1234-

Drive Gear Front Cover Gasket (2 Used) Side Plate (2 Used)

5678-

Body Rear Cover Socket Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used)

910 11 12 -

Bushing (4 Used) Driven Gear Oil Seal Retaining Ring

W2-4-68

13 - Gasket (2 Used) 14 - Backup Ring (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Gear Pump (For Oil Cooler)

Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-11-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and backup ring (14). 11. Remove the bushing (9) from the front cover (2).

NOTE: Although the gaskets (3,13), side plate (4) and backup ring (14) are the same type, the directions to install are different. Put a tag on part for reassembly when disassembling. The driven gear (10) is symmetrical with respect to the front/rear. Put an identification mark (front or rear) on the shaft when disassembling.

12. Remove the front cover (2) from the vise. 13. Remove the retaining ring (12). 14. Remove the oil seal (11).

1. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of the pump with using washing oil.

11

2. Turn the rear cover (6) side upward. Clamp the mounting part of front cover (2) in a vise. 3. Put the matching marks on the matching part in the drive side of front cover (2), body (5), and rear cover (6). 4. Remove the socket bolt (7). : 10 mm

2

M2CN-02-04-005

5. Remove the rear cover (6). 6. Remove the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and Backup Ring (14). 7. Remove the bushing (9) from the rear cover (6). 8. Remove the drive gear (1) and driven gear (10). 9. Remove the body (5).

W2-4-69


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE GEAR PUMP (FOR OIL COOLER)

6

13

3

4

5

4

3

2

1

11

12

14

7

8

10

9

M2CN-02-04-004

1 - Drive Gear 2 - Front Cover 3 - Gasket (2 Used) 4 - Side Plate (2 Used)

5678-

Body Rear Cover Socket Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used)

910 11 12 -

Bushing (4 Used) Driven Gear Oil Seal Retaining Ring

W2-4-70

13 - Gasket (2 Used) 14 - Backup Ring (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Gear Pump (For Oil Cooler)

• Replace all oil seals and gaskets with the new ones. Before assembling, clean each part with using clean washing oil and dry. Apply the clean hydraulic oil on the inner parts. Specially, apply the hydraulic oil on the sliding to prevent it from seizing. IMPORTANT: Assemble the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and backup ring (14) correctly with taking care about the used places and installing directions as referring to the tag marked when disassembling. Assemble the gears (1) and (10) so that they mesh each other. NOTE: Secure the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and Backup Ring (14) on the groove with using grease and they are not bitten. Align the matching marks of each drive side when assembling the front cover (2), body (5) and rear cover (6). Check the direction of the matching mark on the shaft when installing the driven gears (10). 1. Secure the front cover (2) with turning the mounting surface for body (5) upward in a vise. 2. Install the bushing (9) on the front cover (2). 3. Install the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and backup ring (14) on the front cover (2). 4. Install the body (5) on the front cover (2).

W2-4-71


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

6

13

3

4

5

4

3

2

1

11

12

14

7

8

10

9

M2CN-02-04-004

1234-

Drive Gear Front Cover Gasket (2 Used) Side Plate (2 Used)

5678-

Body Rear Cover Socket Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used)

910 11 12 -

Bushing (4 Used) Driven Gear Oil Seal Retaining Ring

W2-4-72

13 - Gasket (2 Used) 14 - Backup Ring (2 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 5. Install the drive gear (1) and driven gear (10) on the body (5). 6. Install the bushing (9) on the front cover (2). 7. Install the gaskets (3), (13), side plate (4) and backup ring (14) on the rear cover (2). 8. Install the rear cover (6) on the body (5). 9. Install the socket bolt (7). : 10 mm

11

10. Turn over the pump with so that the oil seal (11) installing side faces upward. Clamp the pump in a vise. 11. Fill the grease between the main lip and the dust lip of the oil seal (11).

Dust Lip Fill grease. Main Lip

W25N-02-04-021

W2-4-73


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the oil seal (11). 14. Install the oil seal (11) on the front cover (2) with using a guide and pipe.

Pipe

Guide

11 2

M2CN-02-04-006

15. Install the retaining ring (12).

12

M2CN-02-04-007

W2-4-74


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism REMOVE AND INSTALL 2-UNIT GEAR PUMP CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Before draining hydraulic oil, lower the boom and apply each brake and drum lock.

Preparation 1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain off the hydraulic oil with using the container (500 L). : 19mm

1

W2CG-02-04-010

Removal 2

1. Remove all hoses and pipings from the 2-unit gear pump. Cap the removed hoses. : 8 mm : 27 mm 2. Support the 2-unit gear pump.

CAUTION: 2-unit gear pump weight: 7.6 kg 3. Remove the bolt (2) and remove the 2-unit gear pump. : 8 mm

M2CN-02-04-008

W2-4-75


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: 2-unit gear pump weight: 7.6 kg

1. Connect the gear pump to the reduction gear of the main pump.

2. Apply LOCTITE on the bolt (2) and install. : 8 mm : 25 to 25.6 N m (2.5 to 2.6 kgf m)

3. Install all hoses and pipings on the 2-unit gear pump. Fill the hydraulic oil in the gear pump. : 8 mm : 48 to 50 N m (4.9 to 5.1 kgf m) : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m)

2

4. Remove the filler port cover of the hydraulic oil tank. Fill the hydraulic oil to a specified position of the level gauge. 5. Start the engine and run at low idling speed. Release the air in the gear pump. 6. After releasing the air, do the work at low idling speed. Check the hydraulic oil level and any oil leaks.

M2CN-02-04-008

W2-4-76


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-77


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE 2-UNIT GEAR PUMP

9

8 6 5 13

4 3 2 1 7

12 6

5 4

10

11

4 5 6

16

4

15

5 6

14

W25N-02-04-017

1234-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Gasket (4 Used)

5678-

Gasket (4 Used) Side Plate (4 Used) Driven Gear Drive Gear

910 11 12 -

Body Adapter Plate Driven Gear Drive Gear

W2-4-78

13 14 15 16 -

Body Rear Cover Washer (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble 2-Unit Gear Pump

Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-11-1) before disassembling.

NOTE: Although the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6) are the same type, the directions to install are different. Put a tag on each block for reassembly when disassembling. The driven gears (7) and (11) are symmetrical with respect to the front/rear. Put an identification mark (front or rear) on the shaft when disassembling. 1. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of the pump with using washing oil. 2. Turn the rear cover (14) side upward. Clamp the mounting part of front cover (3) in a vise.

9. Remove the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6). 10. Remove the adapter plate (10). 11. Remove the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6). 12. Remove the body (9). 13. Remove the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6). 14. Remove the drive gear (8) and driven gear (7). 15. Remove the front cover (3) from the vise. 16. Remove the retaining ring (1). 17. Remove the oil seal (2).

3. Put the matching marks on the matching part in the drive side of front cover (3), body (9), adapter plate (10), body (13) and rear cover (14).

2

4. Remove the socket bolt (16). : 10 mm 5. Remove the rear cover (14). 3

6. Remove the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6). 7. Remove the drive gear (12) and driven gear (11).

W25N-02-04-018

8. Remove the body (13).

W2-4-79


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE 2-UNIT GEAR PUMP

8

1

2

3

9

4

6

7

10

5

13

17

12

15

11

14

18

16

19

W25N-02-04-024

12345-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Gasket (4 Used) Gasket (4 Used)

678910 -

Side Plate (4 Used) Driven Gear Drive Gear Body Adapter Plate

11 12 13 14 15 -

Driven Gear Drive Gear Body Rear Cover Washer (4 Used)

W2-4-80

16 17 18 19

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Bushing (8 Used) Plug O-Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble 2-Unit Gear Pump

• Replace all oil seals and gaskets with the new ones. Before assembling, clean each part with using clean washing oil and dry. Apply the clean hydraulic oil on the inner parts. Specially, apply the hydraulic oil on the sliding to prevent it from seizing. IMPORTANT: Install the gasket (5) so that the flat surface is located at the bottom of groove. Assemble the side plate (6) so that the yellow surface faces the gear side and the long pulling-out hole faces the suction side. The teeth of the gears (7), (8), (11) and (12) are asymmetrical. Mesh the gears with the small notch each other and assemble them.

Delivery Side

Short Pulling-Out Hole

Suction Side Long Pulling-Out Hole

W25N-02-04-022

NOTE: Secure the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6) on the groove with using grease and they are not bitten. Align the matching marks of each drive side when assembling the front cover (3), body (9), adapter plate (10), body (13) and rear cover (14). Check the direction of the matching mark on each shaft when installing the driven gears (7) and (11).

Rotating Direction of Drive Gear Large Notch (No Bound Side)

1. Secure the front cover (3) with turning the mounting surface for body (9) upward in a vise.

Delivery Side

Small Notch (Bound Side)

Suction Side

Rotating Direction of Driven Gear W25N-02-04-023

2. Install the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6) on the front cover (3). 3. Install the body (9) on the front cover (3).

W2-4-81


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism

8

1

2

3

9

4

6

7

10

5

13

17

12

15

11

14

18

16

19

W25N-02-04-024

12345-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Gasket (4 Used) Gasket (4 Used)

678910 -

Side Plate (4 Used) Driven Gear Drive Gear Body Adapter Plate

11 12 13 14 15 -

Driven Gear Drive Gear Body Rear Cover Washer (4 Used)

W2-4-82

16 17 18 19

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Bushing (8 Used) Plug O-Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 4. Install the drive gear (8) and driven gear (7) on the body (9). 5. Install the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6) at the front and rear surfaces of the adapter plate (10). 6. Install the adapter plate (10) on the body (9). 7. Install the body (13) on the adapter plate (10). 8. Install the drive gear (12) and driven gear (11) on the body (13). 9. Install the gaskets (4), (5) and side plate (6) on the rear cover (14). 10. Install the rear cover (14) on the body (13). 11. Install the socket bolt (16). : 10 mm : 88.2 to 93.1 N m (9.0 to 9.5 kgf m) 12. Turn over the pump with so that the oil seal (2) installing side faces upward. Clamp the pump in a vise. 13. Fill the grease between the main lip and the dust lip of the oil seal (2).

2 Dust Lip Fill grease. Main Lip

W25N-02-04-021

W2-4-83


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the oil seal (2). 14. Install the oil seal (2) on the front cover (3) with using a guide and pipe.

Pipe

Guide

2 3

W25N-02-04-019

15. Install the retaining ring (1).

1

W25N-02-04-020

W2-4-84


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism REMOVE AND INSTALL GEAR PUMP (FOR REEVING WINCH) CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Before draining hydraulic oil, lower the boom and apply each brake and drum lock.

Preparation 1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain off the hydraulic oil with using the container (500 L). : 19mm

1

W2CG-02-04-010

2

Removal 1. Remove all hoses and pipings from the great pump (for reeving winch). Cap the removed hoses. : 27.36mm 2. Support the gear pump (for reeving winch).

CAUTION: Gear pump (for reeving winch) weight: 2.3 kg 3. Remove the bolt (2) and remove the gear pump (for reeving winch). : 8 mm M2CN-02-04-009

W2-4-85


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: Gear pump (for reeving winch) weight: 2.3 kg

1. Connect the gear pump (for reeving winch) to the reduction gear of the main pump.

2. Install the gear pump (for reeving winch) mounting bolt (2). : 8 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m)

2

3. Install all hoses and pipings on the gear pump. Fill the hydraulic oil in the gear pump. : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) : 36 mm : 175 N m (18.0 kgf m) 4. Remove the filler port cover of the hydraulic oil tank. Fill the hydraulic oil to a specified position of the level gauge. 5. Start the engine and run at low idling speed. Release the air in the gear pump (for reeving winch). 6. After releasing the air, do the work at low idling speed. Check the hydraulic oil level and any oil leaks.

M2CN-02-04-009

W2-4-86


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism (Blank)

W2-4-87


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism DISASSEMBLE GEAR PUMP (FOR REEVING WINCH)

9

7 6 5 4

8

3 2 1

14

13 12

11 10 6 7

W23F-02-04-012

1234-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Bush (2 Used)

5678-

Gasket Gasket (2 Used) Side Plate (4 Used) Driven Gear

9 - Drive Gear 10 - Bush (2 Used) 11 - Ball (2 Used)

W2-4-88

12 - Rear Cover 13 - Washer (4 Used) 14 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Disassemble Gear Pump (For Reeving Winch)

Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-11-1) before disassembling.

NOTE: Although the gaskets (5), (6) and side plate (7) are the same type, the directions to install are different. Put a tag on each block for reassembly when disassembling. The driven gears are symmetrical with respect to the front/rear. Put an identification mark (front or rear) on the shaft when disassembling.

10. Remove the front cover (3) from the vise. 11. Remove the retaining ring (1). 12. Remove the oil seal (2).

2

1. Remove the dust and rust on the surface of the pump with using washing oil. 2. Turn the rear cover (12) side upward. Clamp the mounting part of front cover (3) in a vise. 3. Put the matching marks on the matching part in the drive side of front cover (3) and rear cover (12). 4. Remove the socket bolt (14). : 10 mm 5. Remove the rear cover (12). 6. Remove the Bush (10), gaskets (6) and side plate (7). 7. Remove the drive gear (9) and driven gear (8). 8. Remove the gasket (5), (6) and side plate (7). 9. Remove the ball (11) and bushing (4).

W2-4-89

3

W23F-02-04-013


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism ASSEMBLE GEAR PUMP (FOR REEVING WINCH) 9

3

4

11

7

10

10

1 6 2

4 6

7

5

12

8

13

14

W23F-02-04-014

1234-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Bushing (2 Used)

5678-

Gasket Gasket (2 Used) Side Plate (2 Used) Driven Gear

9 - Drive Gear 10 - Bushing (2 Used) 11 - %DOO 8VHG

W2-4-90

12 - Rear Cover 13 - Washer (4 Used) 14 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism Assemble Gear Pump (For Reeving Winch)

• Replace all oil seals and gaskets with the new ones. Before assembling, clean each part with using clean washing oil and dry. Apply the clean hydraulic oil on the inner parts. Specially, apply the hydraulic oil on the sliding to prevent it from seizing. IMPORTANT: Install the gasket (6) so that the flat surface is located at the front cover (3) and rear cover (12) side. Assemble the side plate (7) so that the opposite side against the gasket (6) mounting surface faces the gear side and the pulling-out hole faces the delivery side. The teeth of the gears (7) and (8) are asymmetrical. Mesh the gears with the small notch each other and assemble them. NOTE: Secure the gaskets (5), (6) and side plate (7) on the groove with using grease and they are not bitten. Align the matching marks of each drive side when assembling the front cover (3) and rear cover (12). Check the direction of the matching mark on each shaft when installing the driven gears (8).

Delivery Side

Suction Side

Short Pulling-Out Hole

W23F-02-04-015

Rotating Direction of Drive Gear Large Notch (No Bound Side)

1. Secure the front cover (3) with turning the mounting surface for rear cover (12) upward in a vise. 2. Install the bushing (4) on the front cover (3). 3. Install the gasket (5), (6) and side plate (7) on the front cover (3).

W2-4-91

Delivery Side

Small Notch (Bound Side)

Suction Side

Rotating Direction of Driven Gear W25N-02-04-023


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 9

3

4

11

7

10

10

1 6 2

4 6

7

5

12

8

13

14

W23F-02-04-014

1234-

Retaining Ring Oil Seal Front Cover Bushing (2 Used)

5678-

Gasket Gasket (2 Used) Side Plate (2 Used) Driven Gear

9 - Drive Gear 10 - Bushing (2 Used) 11 - %DOO 8VHG

W2-4-92

12 - Rear Cover 13 - Washer (4 Used) 14 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 4. Install the drive gear (9) and driven gear (8) on the front cover (3). 5. Install the ball (11) on the front cover (3). 6. Install the bushing (10) on the rear cover (12). 7. Install the gaskets (6) and side plate (7) on the rear cover (12). 8. Install the rear cover (14) on the front cover (3). 9. Install the socket bolt (14) with washer (13). : 10 mm : 88.2 to 93.1 N m (9.0 to 9.5 kgf m) 10. Turn over the pump with so that the oil seal (2) installing side faces upward. Clamp the pump in a vise. 2

11. Fill the grease between the main lip and the dust lip of the oil seal (2).

Dust Lip Fill grease. Main Lip

W25N-02-04-021

IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the oil seal (2).

Pipe

12. Install the oil seal (2) on the front cover (3) with using a guide and pipe. Guide

2 3

W23F-02-04-016

W2-4-93


SWING MACHINERY / Pump Mechanism 13. Install the retaining ring (1).

1

W23F-02-04-017

W2-4-94


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE FOR FRONT DRUM, REAR DRUM, TRAVEL, BOOM RAISING/LOWERING DRUM AND QUICK DRAW

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal 1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2. Remove all hoses and pipings from the control valves (1) and (2). : 22 mm : 8 mm, 10 mm NOTE: Attach a cap and an identification tag on the removed hoses and pipings for reassembling. 3. Remove the bolt (3). : 19 mm CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 80 kg Control valve (2) weight: Approx. 107 kg

4. Lift the control valves (1) and (2) and remove them.

1

3

2 3

W2-5-1

M2CN-02-05-001


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Installation

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 80 kg Control valve (2) weight: Approx. 107 kg

1. Install the control valves (1) and (2) and tighten with the bolt (3). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 Nᨿm (6.1 to 6.6 kgfᨿm) 2. Install all hoses and pipings on the control valves (1) and (2). : 22 mm : 39 Nᨿm (4.0 kgfᨿm) : 8 mm : 50 Nᨿm (5.1 kgfᨿm) : 10 mm : 90 Nᨿm (9.2 kgfᨿm)

1

3

IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Check for any oil leaks.

W2-5-2

2 3

M2CN-02-05-001


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve (Blank)

W2-5-3


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 50

49

38

47 28

29

49

50

45

25 39

46 48

53 52 55

5

61 1

51 26 39

53

36

56 2

59

18

20 11

17

E

19

60

15 24

85

16

E

83

37

10 84

30

35

43 36

21

6

3

4

25

50

53

63

47

14

48

33 41

32

42 46 40 50 49

64 52 27

7

35

53

40 44

31

12

44 54

13

27

34

26 51 45

9 62 80

67

69

87 77 74 81

65 68 79

57 59

88

58 23

60

75 66

73

86

59

22

37

70 60

71

36

78

72

82

30

76 8 41

32 35

34

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-4


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 1 - Inlet Section

23 - O-Ring

45 - Spring (2 Used)

67 - Spool (2 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

24 - O-Ring (16 Used)

46 - Spring (2 Used)

68 - Spring (2 Used)

3 - Valve Section

25 - End Cover (2 Used)

47 - Spring (2 Used)

69 - Spring (2 Used)

4 - Valve Section

26 - End Cover (2 Used)

48 - Spring (2 Used)

70 - Spring (2 Used)

5 - Valve Section

27 - End Cover (2 Used)

49 - Spring (4 Used)

71 - Plug (4 Used)

6 - Valve Section

28 - End Cover

50 - Spring (4 Used)

72 - Plug (4 Used)

7 - Plug

29 - End Cover

51 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

73 - Plug (2 Used)

8 - Plug

30 - Plate (2 Used)

52 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

74 - Plug (2 Used)

31 - Valve Seat (6 Used)

53 - Spring Seat (4 Used)

75 - Orifice (2 Used)

32 - Plug (6 Used)

54 - Plug (2 Used)

76 - Steel Ball (2 Used)

9 - Plug 10 - Plug 11 - Plug

33 - Air Bleed Valve ᧤6 Used᧥ 55 - Plug (2 Used)

77 - O-Ring (4 Used)

12 - Plug (7 Used)

34 - Plug (16 Used)

78 - O-Ring (4 Used)

13 - O-Ring

35 - O-Ring (12 Used)

57 - Poppet

79 - O-Ring (2 Used)

14 - O-Ring

36 - O-Ring (10 Used)

58 - Spring

80 - Socket %ROW 8VHG

15 - O-Ring

37 - O-Ring (16 Used)

59 - Cap (4 Used)

81 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

16 - O-Ring

38 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

60 - O-ring (4 Used)

82 - Filter (2 Used)

56 - Valve

17 - O-Ring (7 Used)

39 - Socket Bolt (16 Used)

61 - Relief Valve

83 - Bolt (4 Used)

18 - O-Ring (14 Used)

40 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

62 - Relief Valve

84 - Nut ᧤8 Used᧥

19 - O-Ring (7 Used)

41 - Solenoid Valve (4 Used)

63 - Casing

85 - Spring Washer (8 Used)

20 - O-Ring

42 - Spool

64 - Casing

86 - Cover

21 - O-Ring (4 Used)

43 - Spool

65 - Cover (2 Used)

87 - O-Ring

22 - O-Ring

44 - Spool (2 Used)

66 - Cover (2 Used)

88 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

W2-5-5


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 50

38

49

47 28

29

49

50

46 51 26 39

25 39

53 52 55

61 1

45

48 53

36

E 37

E

30 43 36

6

41

44 54 25

4 50

53

63

53

40 44 47

42

52 27

48

27

46 40 50 49

26 51 45

36 80

67

77

69 65 68 37 30

41

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-6


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Disassemble 4-Unit Control Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

• The disassembling and assembling procedures of 4-unit control valve for travel (right), boom raising/lowering, rear drum (low speed) and front drum (high speed) are explained here. As the construction is similar, refer to this section when disassembling and assembling the 4-unit control valve for travel (left), quick draw, rear drum (high speed) and front drum (low speed).

CAUTION: Control valve weight for (travel (left), quick draw, rear drum (high speed) and front drum (low speed)): 80 kg Control valve weight for (travel (right), boom raising/lowering, rear drum (low speed) and front drum (high speed)): Approx. 107 kg 1. Place the control valve assembly on a clean workbench. IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (41).

8. Remove the socket bolt (40) and remove the end cover (27) and plate (30) from the valve sections (4) and (6). : 5 mm 9. Remove the spring seats (52), (53), springs (47) to (50), O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) from the end covers (27) (2 used). 10. Remove the O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) from the plates (30) (2 used).

CAUTION: Do not damage the holes on the spool and valve section. 11. Remove the spools (42) to (44) from each valve section. NOTE: Do not remove the plugs (54) and (55) from the spools (43) and (44) unnecessarily.

12. Remove the socket bolt (80) and remove the cover (65), springs (68), (69) and O-ring (77) from the casings (63) (2 used). : 8 mm

2. Remove the solenoid valve (41) from the end covers (27) (2 used), (28) and (29). : 32 mm 3. Remove the socket bolts (38) and (39) and remove the end covers (25) (2 used), (26) (2 used), (28) and (29) from each valve section.

CAUTION: Do not damage the holes on the spool and casing. 13. Remove the spool (67) from the casing (63) (2 used).

᧶ 5 mm 4. Remove the spring seat (53), spring (49), (50) and O-ring (36) from the end covers (25) (2 used).

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (61).

5. Remove the spring seat (51), springs (45), (46), O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) from the end covers (26) (2 used).

14. Remove the relief valve (61) from the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (2 used).

6. Remove the spring seat (52), springs (48), (47), O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) from the end cover (28). 7. Remove the spring seat (53), springs (49), (50), O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) from the end cover (29).

W2-5-7

᧶ 30 mm


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve

5

56

1 2

59

18 17 19

E

60

15 24

83

16

E

10 84

6

3

4 63

64

62 57 59 58 23

60

22 59 60 8

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-8


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (62). 15. Remove the relief valve (62) from the valve section (6) and remove the O-ring. : 30 mm 16. Remove the valve (56) from the valve section (4) and remove the O-ring. 17. Remove the plugs (8) and (10) from the valve sections (4) and (6). : 30 mm 18. Remove the O-rings (15), (16), (22) and (23) from the plugs (8) and (10). 19. Turn over the control valve and remove the caps (59) (4 used). : 41 mm 20. Remove the poppet (57) and spring (58) from the valve section (3). 21. Remove the O-ring (60) from the caps (59) (4 used). 22. Turn over the control valve. 23. Remove the nut (84) and remove the bolts (83) (4 used). : 24 mm 24. Divide each section into the inlet section (1), valve sections (3) to (6), casing (63), (64) and outlet section (2). 25. Remove the O-rings (17), (18) (2 used) and (19) from each section and casings (63) and (64). 26. Remove the O-rings (24) (4 used) from the casing (64), valve sections (3), (6) and outlet section (2).

W2-5-9


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve ASSEMBLE 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE

63

50 25 39 5

38

49

47 28

53 52 55

1

29

49

50

45 46 51 26 39

48 53

36

56 2

59

18

20 11

17

E

19

60

15 24

85

16

E

83

37

10 84

30

35

43 36

21

6

3

4

25

40

53

63

47

14

48

33 41

32

42

64 52 27

7

35

53

40 44

31

12

44 54

13

27

46 40 50 49

34

26 51 45

9 62 80

67

69

87 77 74 81

65 68 79

57 59

88

58 23

60

75 66

73

86

22

37

59

70 60

71

36

78

72

82

30

76 8 41

32 35

34

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-10


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 1 - Inlet Section

23 - O-Ring

45 - Spring (2 Used)

67 - Spool (2 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

24 - O-Ring (16 Used)

46 - Spring (2 Used)

68 - Spring (2 Used)

3 - Valve Section

25 - End Cover (2 Used)

47 - Spring (2 Used)

69 - Spring (2 Used)

4 - Valve Section

26 - End Cover (2 Used)

48 - Spring (2 Used)

70 - Spring (2 Used)

5 - Valve Section

27 - End Cover (2 Used)

49 - Spring (4 Used)

71 - Plug (4 Used)

6 - Valve Section

28 - End Cover

50 - Spring (4 Used)

72 - Plug (4 Used)

7 - Plug

29 - End Cover

51 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

73 - Plug (2 Used)

8 - Plug

30 - Plate (2 Used)

52 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

74 - Plug (2 Used)

31 - Valve Seat (6 Used)

53 - Spring Seat (4 Used)

75 - Orifice (2 Used)

32 - Plug (6 Used)

54 - Plug (2 Used)

76 - Steel Ball (2 Used)

9 - Plug 10 - Plug 11 - Plug

33 - Air Bleed Valve ᧤6 Used᧥ 55 - Plug (2 Used)

77 - O-Ring (4 Used)

12 - Plug (7 Used)

34 - Plug (16 Used)

78 - O-Ring (4 Used)

13 - O-Ring

35 - O-Ring (12 Used)

57 - Poppet

79 - O-Ring (2 Used)

14 - O-Ring

36 - O-Ring (10 Used)

58 - Spring

80 - Socket %ROW 8VHG

15 - O-Ring

37 - O-Ring (16 Used)

59 - Cap (4 Used)

81 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

16 - O-Ring

38 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

60 - O-ring (4 Used)

82 - Filter (2 Used)

56 - Valve

17 - O-Ring (7 Used)

39 - Socket Bolt (16 Used)

61 - Relief Valve

83 - Bolt (4 Used)

18 - O-Ring (14 Used)

40 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

62 - Relief Valve

84 - Nut ᧤8 Used᧥

19 - O-Ring (7 Used)

41 - Solenoid Valve (4 Used)

63 - Casing

85 - Spring Washer (8 Used)

20 - O-Ring

42 - Spool

64 - Casing

86 - Cover

21 - O-Ring (4 Used)

43 - Spool

65 - Cover (2 Used)

87 - O-Ring

22 - O-Ring

44 - Spool (2 Used)

66 - Cover (2 Used)

88 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

W2-5-11


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 25

50

49

5 53 36

1 2

59

18 17

E

19

60

15 24

85

16

E

83

10 84 43 36

6

3

44 4 25

50

53

42

63

64 44

36 80

67

57

77

59

69

58

65 68

23

60

22 59 60 8

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-12


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Assemble 4-Unit Control Valve 1. Install the O-rings (17), (18) (2 used) and (19) on each section and casings (63) and (64). 2. Install the O-rings (24) (4 used) on the casing (64), valve sections (3), (6) and outlet section (2). 3. As for each section and casings (63) and (64), arrange the inlet section (1), valve section (5), casing (63), valve section (4), casing (64), valve sections (6), (3) and outlet section (2) in order. 4. Install the bolts (83) (4 used) on each section and casings (63) and (64). Install the spring washer (85) and tighten with the nut (84). : 24 mm : 100 to 120 N m (10.0 to 12.0 kgf m) 5. Turn over the control valve. Install the poppet (57) and spring (58) on the valve section (3).

9. Install the plug (8) on the valve section (6). : 30 mm : 70 to 80 N m (7.1 to 8.2 kgf m) 10. Install the plug (10) on the valve section (4). : 30 mm : 100 to 120 N m (10.0 to 12.0 kgf m)

CAUTION: Do not damage the holes on the spool and valve section. IMPORTANT: Check the positions to insert the spool (42) to (44). 11. Insert the spool (44) into the valve sections (4) and (6). Insert the spool (43) into the valve section (5). Insert the spool (42) into the valve section (3).

6. Install the O-ring (60) on the caps (59) (4 used) and install the cap (59) on the valve sections (3) to (6). : 41 mm : 190 to 210 N m (19.0 to 21.0 kgf m)

CAUTION: Do not damage the holes on the spool (67) and casing (63). 12. Insert the spool (67) into the casings (63) (2 used) and install the springs (68) and (69) on the spool (67).

7. Turn over the control valve. 8. Install the O-rings (15), (16), (22) and (23) on the plugs (8) and (10).

13. Install the O-ring (77) on the casings (63) (2 used). Install the cover (65) on the casings (63) (2 used) and tighten with the socket bolt (80). : 8 mm : 51 to 63 N m (5.2 to 6.4 kgf m) 14. Install the O-ring (36), spring (49), (50) and spring seat (53) on the end covers (25) (2 used).

W2-5-13


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 25 39 5

38

47 28

29

49

50

45 46 51 26 39

48

61

52

36

56

1

E 37

E

30

36

4 25

41

6

3

53

40 52 47

27

48

27

46 40 50 49

26 52 45

62

36

37 30

41

W2CG-02-05-006

W2-5-14


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 15. Install the end cover (25) assemblies (2 used) on the valve section (5) and tighten with the socket bolt (39). : 5 mm : 11 to 13 N m (1.1 to 1.3 kgf m) 16. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used), springs (48), (47) and spring seat (52) on the end cover (28). 17. Install the end cover (28) assembly on the valve section (4) and tighten with the socket bolt (38). : 5 mm : 15 to 17 N m (1.5 to 1.7 kgf m) 18. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used) on the plate (30).

24. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used), springs (49), (50) and spring seat (53) on the end cover (27). 25. Install the end cover (27) assembly and plate (30) on the valve section (6) and tighten with the socket bolt (40). : 5 mm : 11 to 13 N m (1.1 to 1.3 kgf m) 26. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used), springs (45), (46) and spring seat (51) and (52) on the end covers (26) (2 used).

19. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used), springs (47), (48) and spring seat (52) on the end cover (27).

27. Install the end cover (26) assemblies (2 used) on the valve section (3) and tighten with the socket bolt (39). : 5 mm : 11 to 13 N m(1.1 to 1.3 kgf m)

20. Install the end cover (27) assembly and plate (30) on the valve section (4) and tighten with the socket bolt (40). : 5 mm : 11 to 13 N m (1.1 to 1.3 kgf m)

28. Install the O-rings (2 used) on the relief valve (61) and install the relief valve (61) on the inlet section (1). : 30 mm : 69 to 79 N m (7.0 to 8.1 kgf m)

21. Install the O-rings (36), (37) (2 used), springs (49), (50) and spring seat (53) on the end cover (29).

29. Install the O-ring on the relief valve (62) and install the relief valve (62) on the valve section (6). : 30 mm : 69 to 79 N m (7.0 to 8.1 kgf m)

22. Install the end cover (29) assembly on the valve section (6) and tighten with the socket bolt (38). : 5 mm : 15 to 17 N m (1.5 to 1.7 kgf m) 23. Install the O-rings (36) and (37) (2 used) on the plates (30) (2 used).

30. Install the O-ring on the valve (56) and install the valve (56) on the valve section (4). : 30 mm : 100 to 120 N m (10.0 to 12.0 kgf m) 31. Install the solenoid valve (41) on the end covers (27) (2 used), (28) and (29). : 32 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m)

W2-5-15


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE FOR BOOM FOOT AND LOWER HYDRAULIC SOURCE

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2. Remove all hoses and pipings from the control valve (1). : 22 mm, 27 mm NOTE: Attach a cap and an identification tag on the removed hoses and pipings for reassembling.

3. Remove the bolt (2). : 17 mm 2

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 22 kg 4. Lift the control valves (1) with the crane and remove it.

1

M2CN-02-05-002

W2-5-16


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Installation

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 22 kg

1. Install the control valve (1) and tighten with the bolt (2). : 17mm : 34 to 37 Nᨿm (3.5 to 3.8 kgfᨿm) 2. Install all hoses and pipings on the control valve (1). : 22 mm : 39 Nᨿm (4.0 kgfᨿm) : 27 mm : 93 Nᨿm (9.5 kgfᨿm) 2

IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Check for any oil leaks.

1

M2CN-02-05-002

W2-5-17


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 13 13

21 22

21

16 5 31

40 39

4 24 25

41

33

17

1 11 2

6

27

19

23

14

5

29 3 20

20 36

38

37

18

15

26 34 28

12

7

35 32

26

9 28 30 8 10

M2CN-02-05-003

1 - Inlet Section

12 - O-Ring

23 - Plunger (4 Used)

34 - Plug (4 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

13 - End Cover (8 Used)

24 - Spring (4 Used)

35 - O-Ring (4 Used)

3 - Casing (4 Used)

14 - Plug (24 Used)

25 - Plug (4 Used)

36 - Solenoid Valve (8 Used)

4 - Plug (8 Used)

15 - Plug (8 Used)

26 - Plug (2 Used)

37 - Spool (8 Used)

5 - Plug (10 Used)

16 - O-Ring (8 Used)

27 - O-Ring (4 Used)

38 - Spring (8 Used)

6 - Plug

17 - O-Ring (16 Used)

28 - O-Ring (2 Used)

39 - Bolt (4 Used)

7 - Plug

18 - O-Ring (8 Used)

29 - Relief Valve

40 - Nut (4 Used)

8 - O-Ring (5 Used)

19 - Socket Bolt (32 Used)

30 - Spool

41 - Spring Washer (4 Used)

9 - O-Ring (15 Used) 10 - O-Ring (20 Used) 11 - O-Ring

20 - Spool (4 Used) 21 - Spring (8 Used) 22 - Spring Seat (8 Used)

31 - Spool 32 - Spring 33 - Spring

W2-5-18


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Disassemble 4-Unit Control Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

7. Remove the spring seat (22), spring (21), O-ring (17) (2 used) and (16) from the end cover (13) (8 used).

CAUTION: Control valve weight: Approx. 22 kg 1. Place the control valve assembly on a clean workbench.

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (36). 2. Remove the solenoid valve (36) from the end covers (13) (8 used) and remove the O-ring. : 32 mm

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the end cover (13). 3. Remove the spools (37) and spring (38) from the end covers (13) (8 used).

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the casing (3). 8. Pull out the spool (20) from the casing (3). 9. Remove the plug (25) from the casing (3) and removing the O-ring (27). : 24 mm 10. Remove the spring (24) and plunger (23) from the casing (3). 11. Remove the plug (26) from the casing (3) and remove the O-ring (28). : 10 mm 12. Remove the plugs (4) (2 used) from the casing (3). : 6 mm

4. Remove the plug (15) from the end covers (13) (8 used) and remove the O-ring (18). : 4 mm

13. Remove the plugs (34) (2 used) from the upper surface of the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (35) (2 used). : 8 mm

5. Remove the plug (14) (3 used) from the end covers (13) (8 used). : 5 mm

14. Remove the spring (32) and (33) from the inlet section (1).

6. Remove the socket bolt (19) and remove the end cover (13) from the casing (3). : 4 mm

15. Remove the plugs (34) (2 used) from the under surface of the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (35) (2 used). : 8 mm

W2-5-19


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve

39

6

38

30

1 11 7

2

28

3

4

9

29 8 10

W2CG-02-05-007

W2-5-20


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the inlet section (1). 16. Pull out the spools (30) and (31) from the inlet section (1)

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (29). Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (29). 17. Remove the relief valve (29) from the inlet section (1). : 22 mm 18. Remove the plug (6) from the inlet section (1) and remove the O-ring (11). : 6 mm 19. Remove the plug (5) (6 used) from the inlet section (1). : 4 mm 20. Remove the plug (26) (2 used) from the outlet section (2) and remove the O-ring (28) (2 used). : 10 mm 21. Remove the plug (7) from the outlet section (2) and remove the O-ring (12). :10 mm 22. Remove the plug (5) (4 used) from the outlet section (2). :4 mm 23. Remove the nuts (40) (4 used) and pull out the outlet section (2) and casing (3) from the bolt (39) in order. : 13 mm 24. Remove the O-rings (8), (9) and (10) from the inlet section (1) and casing (3).

W2-5-21


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve ASSEMBLE 4-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 13 13

21 22

21

16 5 31

40 39

4 24 25

41

33

17

1 11 2

6

27

19

23

14

5

29 3 20

20 36

38

37

18

15

26 34 28

12

7

35 32

26

9 28 30 8 10

W2CG-02-05-007

1 - Inlet Section

12 - O-Ring

23 - Plunger (4 Used)

34 - Plug (4 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

13 - End Cover (8 Used)

24 - Spring (4 Used)

35 - O-Ring (4 Used)

3 - Casing (4 Used)

14 - Plug (24 Used)

25 - Plug (4 Used)

36 - Solenoid Valve (8 Used)

4 - Plug (8 Used)

15 - Plug (8 Used)

26 - Plug (2 Used)

37 - Spool (8 Used)

5 - Plug (10 Used)

16 - O-Ring (8 Used)

27 - O-Ring (4 Used)

38 - Spring (8 Used)

6 - Plug

17 - O-Ring (16 Used)

28 - O-Ring (2 Used)

39 - Bolt (4 Used)

7 - Plug

18 - O-Ring (8 Used)

29 - Relief Valve

40 - Nut (4 Used)

8 - O-Ring (5 Used)

19 - Socket Bolt (32 Used)

30 - Spool

41 - Spring Washer (4 Used)

9 - O-Ring (15 Used)

20 - Spool (4 Used)

31 - Spool

10 - O-Ring (20 Used)

21 - Spring (8 Used

32 - Spring

11 - O-Ring

22 - Spring Seat (8 Used)

33 - Spring

W2-5-22


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Assemble 4-Unit Control Valve 1. Install the O-rings (8), (9) and (10) on the inlet section (1) and casing (3).

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (29).

2. Install the casing (3) and outlet section (2) on the bolt (39) (4 used) attached on the inlet section (1) in order. Install the spring washer (41) on the bolt (39) (4 used) and tighten the bolt with the nut (40). : 13 mm : 20 to 25 N m (2.0 to 2.5 kgf m)

8. Install the relief valve (29) on the inlet section (1). : 22 mm : 41 to 47 N m (4.2 to 4.8 kgf m)

3. Install the plugs (5) (4 used) on the outlet section (2).

9. Install the O-rings (35) on the plugs (34) (2 used) and install the plug (34) on the under surface of the inlet section (1). : 8 mm : 69 to 78 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m)

NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (5). : 4 mm : 7.8 to 9.8 N m (0.8 to 1.0 kgf m) 4. Install the O-ring (12) on the plug (7) and install the plug (7) on the outlet section (2). : 10 mm : 98 to 118 N m (10 to 12 kgf m) 5. Install the O-ring (28) on the plug (26) and install the plug (26) on the outlet section (2). : 10 mm : 98 to 118 N m (10 to 12 kgf m) 6. Install the plugs (5) (6 used) on the inlet section (1).

IMPORTANT: Check the position to insert the spools (30) and (31) and the direction of the upside and downside. 10. Install the spools (30), (31), springs (32) and (33) from the upper surface of the inlet section (1). 11. Install the O-ring (35) on the plugs (34) (2 used) and install the plug (34) on the upper surface of the inlet section (1). : 8 mm : 69 to 78 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m) 12. Install the plugs (4) (2 used) on the casing (3). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (4).

NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (5). : 4 mm : 7.8 to 9.8 N m (0.8 to 1.0 kgf m)

: 6 mm : 20 to 24 N m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf m)

7. Install the O-ring (11) on the plug (6) (6 used) and install the plug (6) on the inlet section (1). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

13. Install the O-ring (28) on the plug (26) and install the plug (26) on the casing (3). : 10 mm : 98 to 118 N m (10.0 to 12.0 kgf m)

W2-5-23


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 12 20 21 15

12 20

23

24 16 18

26

13

22

3

19

35

37

36

17

14

W2CG-02-05-007

W2-5-24


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 14. Install the plunger (23) and spring (24) on the casing (3).

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (36).

15. Install the O-rings (27) on the plug (25) and install the plug (25) on the casing (3). : 24 mm : 49 to 59 N m (5.0 to 6.0 kgf m)

22. Install the O-ring on the solenoid valve (36) and install the solenoid valve (36) on the end covers (13) (8 used). : 32 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m)

IMPORTANT: Check the direction to insert spool (20). 16. Install the spool (20) on the casing (3). 17. Install the spring (21), spring seat (22), O-rings (17) (2 used) and (16) on the end covers (13) (8 used). 18. Install the end cover (13) assembly on the casing (3) and tighten with the socket bolt (19). : 4 mm : 5.9 to 7.8 N m (0.6 to 0.8 kgf m) 19. Install the plugs (14) (3 used) on the end covers (13) (8 used). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (14). : 5 mm : 8.3 to 11.0 N m (0.8 to 1.1 kgf m) 20. Install the O-ring (18) on the plug (15) and install the plug (15) on the end covers (13) (8 used). : 4 mm : 13 to 17 N m (1.3 to 1.7 kgf m) 21. Install the spool (37) and spring (38) on the end covers (13) (8 used).

W2-5-25


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 3-UNIT CONTROL VALVE FOR COUNTERWEIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLTION AND LIVE MAST FLIP

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal 1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2. Remove all hoses and pipings from the control valve (1) : 22 mm, 27 mm, 36 mm NOTE: Attach a cap and an identification tag on the removed hoses and pipings for reassembling. 2

3. Remove the bolt (2). : 17 mm

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 24.4 kg 4. Lift the control valve (1) and remove it. 1

M2CN-02-05-004

W2-5-26


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Installation

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 24.4 kg

1. Install the control valve (1) and tighten with the bolt (2). : 17 mm : 34 to 37 Nᨿm (3.5 to 3.8 kgfᨿm) 2. Install all hoses and pipings on the control valve (1). : 22 mm : 39 Nᨿm (4.0 kgfᨿm) : 27 mm : 93 Nᨿm (9.5 kgfᨿm) : 36 mm : 175 Nᨿm (18.0 kgfᨿm)

2

IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Check for any oil leaks. 1

M2CN-02-05-004

W2-5-27


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE 3-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 15 24 25

43

18 6

42 41

33

8 12 13 27 28 19

35 29 26 1 31

2

21 16

30

7

14

38 3

22

23

4

23

40

39

20

17

4

36 37 34 10

32 9 11

5

W2CG-02-05-008

1 - Inlet Section

12 - O-Ring (2 Used)

23 - Spool (2 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

13 - O-Ring (2 Used)

24 - Spring (6 Used)

34 - Spring 35 - Spring

3 - Casing

14 - O-Ring

25 - Spring (6 Used)

36 - Plug (4 Used)

4 - Casing (2 Used)

15 - End Cover (6 Used)

26 - Plunger (3 Used)

37 - O-Ring (4 Used)

5 - Plug (2 Used)

16 - Plug (18 Used)

27 - Spring (3 Used)

38 - Solenoid Valve (6 Used) 39 - Spool (6 Used)

6 - Plug (10 Used)

17 - Plug (6 Used)

28 - Plug (3 Used)

7 - Plug

18 - O-Ring (6 Used)

29 - O-Ring (3 Used)

40 - Spring (6 Used)

8 - Plug (2 Used)

19 - O-Ring (12 Used)

30 - Relief Valve

41 - Bolt (4 Used)

20 - O-Ring (6 Used)

31 - Relief Valve (2 Used)

42 - Nut (4 Used)

10 - O-Ring (12 Used)

9 - O-Ring (4 Used)

21 - Bolt (24 Used)

32 - Spool

43 - Spring Washer (4 Used)

11 - O-Ring (16 Used)

22 - Spool

33 - Spool

W2-5-28


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Disassemble 3-Unit Control Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Control valve weight: Approx. 20 kg

1. Place the control valve assembly on a clean workbench.

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (38). 2. Remove the solenoid valve (38) from the end covers (15) (6 used) and remove the O-ring. : 32 mm

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the end cover (15). 3. Remove the spools (39) and spring (40) from the end cover (15) (6 used).

9. Remove the spool (23) from the casing (4). 10. Remove the plug (28) from the casings (3) and (4) and remove the O-ring (21). : 24 mm 11. Remove the spring (27) and plunger (29) from the casings (3) and (4). 12. Remove the plugs (5) (2 used) from the casing (3). : 6 mm

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (31). Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (31). 13. Remove the relief valve (31) from the casing (4). : 24 mm 14. Remove the plug (8) from the casing (4) and remove the O-rings (12) and (13). : 24 mm

4. Remove the plug (17) from the end covers (15) (6 used) and remove the O-ring (20). : 4 mm

15. Remove the plugs (36) (2 used) from the upper surface of the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (37) (2 used). : 8 mm

5. Remove the plugs (16) (18 used) from the end covers (15) (6 used). : 5 mm

16. Remove the spring (34) and (35) from the inlet section (1).

6. Remove the socket bolt (21) and remove the end cover (15) from the casing (3) and (4). : 4 mm

17. Remove the plugs (36) (2 used) from the under surface of the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (37) (2 used). : 8 mm

7. Remove the spring seat (25), spring (24), O-rings (18) and (19) (2 used) from the end cover (15) (6 used).

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the casing (3) and (4). 8. Pull out the spool (22) from the casing (3).

W2-5-29


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve

6

42 41

33

1 2

30

7

14 3

4

4

10

32 9 11

W2CG-02-05-008

W2-5-30


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve CAUTION: Take care not to damage the hole of the inlet section (1). 18. Pull out the spools (32) and (33) from the inlet section (1)

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (30). Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (30). 19. Remove the relief valve (30) from the inlet section (1). : 22 mm 20. Remove the plug (7) from the inlet section (1) and remove the O-ring (14). : 6 mm 21. Remove the plugs (6) (6 used) from the inlet section (1). : 4 mm 22. Remove the plugs (6) (4 used) from the outlet section (2). : 4 mm 23. Remove the nuts (42) (4 used) and pull out the outlet section (2), casings (4) (2 used) and casing (3) from the bolt (41) in order. : 13 mm 24. Remove the O-rings (9), (10) and (11) from the inlet section (1), casings (3) and (4) (2 used).

W2-5-31


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve ASSEMBLE 3-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 15 24 25

43

18 6

42 41

33

8 12 13 27 28 19

35 29 26 1 31

2

21 16

30

7

14

38 3

22

23

4

23

40

39

20

17

4

36 37 34 10

32 9 11

5

W2CG-02-05-008

1 - Inlet Section

12 - O-Ring (2 Used)

23 - Spool (2 Used)

34 - Spring

2 - Outlet Section

13 - O-Ring (2 Used)

24 - Spring (6 Used)

35 - Spring

3 - Casing

14 - O-Ring

25 - Spring (6 Used)

36 - Plug (4 Used)

4 - Casing (2 Used)

15 - End Cover (6 Used)

26 - Plunger (3 Used)

37 - O-Ring (4 Used)

5 - Plug (2 Used)

16 - Plug (18 Used)

27 - Spring (3 Used)

38 - Solenoid Valve (6 Used)

6 - Plug (10 Used)

17 - Plug (6 Used)

28 - Plug (3 Used)

39 - Spool (6 Used)

7 - Plug

18 - O-Ring (6 Used)

29 - O-Ring (3 Used)

40 - Spring (6 Used)

8 - Plug (2 Used)

19 - O-Ring (12 Used)

30 - Relief Valve

41 - Bolt (4 Used)

9 - O-Ring (4 Used)

20 - O-Ring (6 Used)

31 - Relief Valve (2 Used)

42 - Nut (4 Used)

10 - O-Ring (12 Used)

21 - Bolt (24 Used)

32 - Spool

43 - Spring Washer (4 Used)

11 - O-Ring (16 Used)

22 - Spool

33 - Spool

W2-5-32


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Assemble 3-Unit Control Valve 1. Install the O-rings (9), (10) and (11) on the inlet section (1), casings (3) and (4) (2 used). 2. Install the casing (3), casings (4) (2 used) and outlet section (2) on the bolts (41) (4 used) attached on the inlet section (1) in order. Tighten with the bolts (41) (4 used) and spring washer (42). : 13 mm : 20 to 25 N m (2.0 to 2.5 kgf m) 3. Install the plugs (6) (4 used) on the outlet section (2). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (6). : 4 mm : 7.8 to 9.8 N m (0.8 to 1.0 kgf m) 4. Install the plugs (6) (6 used) on the inlet section (1). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (6). : 4 mm : 7.8 to 9.8 N m (0.8 to 1.0 kgf m) 5. Install the O-ring (14) on the plug (7) and install the plug (7) on the inlet section (1). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (30).

7. Install the O-rings (37) on the plugs (36) (2 used) and install the plug (36) on the under surface of the inlet section (1). : 8 mm : 69 to 78 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m)

IMPORTANT: Check the position to insert the spools (32) and (33) and the direction of the upside and downside. 8. Install the spools (32), (33), springs (34) and (35) from the upper surface of the inlet section (1). 9. Install the O-ring (37) on the plugs (36) (2 used) and install the plug (36) on the upper surface of the inlet section (1). : 8 mm : 69 to 78 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m) 10. Install the O-rings (12) and (13) on the plug (8) and install the plug (8) on the casing (4). : 24 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m)

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (31). 11. Install the relief valve (31) on the casing (4). : 24 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m) 12. Install the plugs (5) (2 used) on the casing (3). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (5).

6. Install the relief valve (30) on the inlet section (1). : 22 mm : 41 to 47 N m (4.2 to 4.8 kgf m)

: 6 mm : 20 to 24 N m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf m) 13. Install the plunger (29) and spring (27) on the casings (3) and (4).

W2-5-33


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 15 24 25 18

28 19

29

21 16 38 3

22

23

4

23

40

39

20

17

4

W2CG-02-05-008

W2-5-34


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve 14. Install the O-ring (29) on the plug (28) and install the plug (28) on the casings (3) and (4). : 24 mm : 49 to 59 N m (5.0 to 6.0 kgf m)

IMPORTANT: Check the direction to insert spool (22), (23).

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (38). 21. Install the O-ring on the solenoid valve (38) and install the solenoid valve (38) on the end covers (15) (6 used). : 32 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m)

15. Install the spool (22) on the casing (3) and install the spool (23) on the casing (4). 16. Install the spring (25), spring seat (24), O-rings (18) and (19) (2 used) on the end covers (15) (6 used). 17. Install the end cover (15) assembly on the casings (3) and (4) and tighten with the socket bolt (21). : 4 mm : 5.9 to 7.8 N m (0.6 to 0.8 kgf m) 18. Install the plugs (16) (18 used) on the end covers (15) (6 used). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (16). : 5 mm : 8.3 to 11.0 N m (0.8 to 1.1 kgf m) 19. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (17) and install the plug (17) on the end covers (15) (6 used). : 4 mm : 13 to 17 N m (1.3 to 1.7 kgf m) 20. Install the spool (39) and spring (40) on the end covers (15) (6 used).

W2-5-35


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 2-UNIT CONTROL VALVE FOR SWING CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2. Remove all hoses and pipings from the control valve (1). : 8 mm, 10 mm : 22 mm

1

NOTE: Attach a cap and an identification tag on the removed hoses and pipings for reassembling. 2

3. Remove the bolt (2). : 19 mm

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 51 kg

4. Lift the control valve (1) and remove it.

M2CN-02-05-005

W2-5-36


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Installation

CAUTION: Control valve (1) weight: Approx. 51 kg

1. Install the control valve (1) and tighten with the bolt (2). : 19mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

2. Install all hoses and pipings on the control valve (1). : 8 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m) : 10 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m) : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m)

1

2

IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Check for any oil leaks.

M2CN-02-05-005

W2-5-37


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE 2-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 10

18

21 13

12

27

26

20

2

34 1 9 11

33

37

30

30 31 32

36 33

17 35

17

15

15

22

19

4

14

23

17

28 16 25

29

24

3

5 7 8 6

W2CG-02-05-009

1 - Inlet Section

11 - O-Ring (3 Used)

21 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

12 - End Cover (2 Used)

22 - Solenoid Valve (2 Used)

31 - Spring 32 - Cap (2 Used)

3 - Valve Section

13 - End Cover (2 Used)

23 - Spool

33 - O-Ring (2 Used)

4 - Valve Section

14 - Air Bleed Valve (6 Used)

24 - Spool

34 - Relief Valve

5 - Plug

15 - Valve (6 Used)

25 - Spring (2 Used)

35 - Bolt (4 Used)

6 - Plug

16 - Plug (8 Used)

26 - Spring (2 Used)

36 - Nut (8 Used)

7 - O-Ring

17 - O-Ring (4 Used)

27 - Spring (2 Used)

37 - Spring Washer (8 Used)

8 - O-Ring

18 - O-Ring (4 Used)

28 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

9 - O-Ring (3 Used)

19 - O-Ring (4 Used)

29 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

20 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

30 - Poppet

10 - O-Ring (6 Used)

W2-5-38


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Disassemble 2-Unit Control Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Control valve weight: Approx. 51 kg

1. Place the control valve assembly on a clean workbench.

8. Turn over the control valve and remove the caps (32) (2 used). : 41 mm 9. Remove the poppet (30) and spring (31) from the valve section (4). 10. Remove the O-ring (33) from the caps (32) (2 used). 11. Turn over the control valve.

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (22). 2. Remove the solenoid valve (22) from the end covers (13) (2 used). : 32 mm 3. Remove the socket bolts (20) and (21) and remove the end covers (12) (2 used) and (13) (2 used) from each valve section : 5 mm

12. Remove the nut (36) (2 used) and remove the bolts (35) (4 used). : 24 mm 13. Separate each section into the inlet section (1), valve sections (3), (4) and outlet section (2).

14. Remove the O-rings (9), (10) (2 used) and (11) from each section.

4. Remove the spring seat (28), spring (25), O-rings (18) and (19) (2 used) from the end covers (13) (2 used). 5. Remove the spring seat (29), springs (26), (27) and O-ring (18) from the end covers (12) (2 used).

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the holes of the spool and valve section. 6. Pull out the spools (23) and (24) from each valve section.

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the relief valve (34). 7. Remove the relief valve (34) from the inlet section (1) and remove the O-rings (2 used) : 30 mm

W2-5-39


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve ASSEMBLE 2-UNIT CONTROL VALVE 10

18

21 13

12

27

26

20

2

34 1 9 11

33

37

30

30 31 32

36 33

17 35

17

15

15

22

19

4

14

23

17

28 16 25

29

24

3

5 7 8 6

W2CG-02-05-009

1 - Inlet Section

11 - O-Ring (3 Used)

21 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

2 - Outlet Section

12 - End Cover (2 Used)

22 - Solenoid Valve (2 Used)

31 - Spring 32 - Cap (2 Used)

3 - Valve Section

13 - End Cover (2 Used)

23 - Spool

33 - O-Ring (2 Used)

4 - Valve Section

14 - Air Bleed Valve (6 Used)

24 - Spool

34 - Relief Valve

5 - Plug

15 - Valve (6 Used)

25 - Spring (2 Used)

35 - Bolt (4 Used)

6 - Plug

16 - Plug (8 Used)

26 - Spring (2 Used)

36 - Nut (8 Used)

7 - O-Ring

17 - O-Ring (4 Used)

27 - Spring (2 Used)

37 - Spring Washer (8 Used)

8 - O-Ring

18 - O-Ring (4 Used)

28 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

9 - O-Ring (3 Used)

19 - O-Ring (4 Used)

29 - Spring Seat (2 Used)

20 - Socket Bolt (8 Used)

30 - Poppet

10 - O-Ring (6 Used)

W2-5-40


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve Assemble 2-Unit Control Valve 1. Install the O-rings (9), (10) (2 used) and (11) on each section. 2. Install each section with the inlet section (1), valve section (4), valve section (3) and outlet section (2) in order. 3. Install the bolts (35) (4 used) and spring washer (37) on each section and tighten with the nut (36). : 24 mm : 100 to 120 N m (10.0 to 12.0 kgf m) 4. Turn over the control valve and install the poppet (30) and spring (31) on the valve sections (3) and (4). 5. Install the O-ring (33) on the caps (32) (2 used) and install the caps (32) on the inlet section (1). : 41 mm : 190 to 210 N m (19.0 to 21.0 kgf m) 6. Turn over the control valve.

9. Install the end cover (13) assemblies (2 used) on the valve section (4) and tighten with the socket bolt (21). : 5 mm : 15 to 17 N m (1.5 to 1.7 kgf m) 10. Install the O-ring (18) springs (26), (27) and spring seat (29) on the end cover (12). 11. Install the end cover (12) assembly on the valve section (3) and tighten with the socket bolt (20). : 5 mm : 11 to 13 N m (1.1 to 1.3 kgf m) 12. Install the O-rings (2 used) on the relief valve (34) and install it on the inlet section (1). : 30 mm : 120 to 140 N m (12.0 to 14.0 kgf m) 13. Install the end covers (13) (2 used) on the solenoid valve (22). : 32 mm : 39 to 49 N m (4.0 to 5.0 kgf m)

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the holes of the spool and valve section. IMPORTANT: Check the inserting position of the spools (23) and (24). 7. Insert the spool (23) into the valve section (4) and insert the spool (24) into the valve section (3). 8. Install the O-rings (18), (19), spring (25) and spring seat (28) on the end covers (13) (2 used).

W2-5-41


SWING MACHINERY / Control Valve (Blank)

W2-5-42


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism REMOVE AND MECHANISM

INSTALL

SWING

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Preparation

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

Removal

1. Remove all hoses (1 to 11) from the swing mechanism. Cap the removed hoses. : 22, 27, 36, 41 mm

1

2

4

3

5

12

2. Remove the bolts (12) (36 used). ᧶ 30 mm 6

CAUTION: Swing mechanism weight: 714 kg

7

assembly 8 11

3. Lift the swing mechanism with the crane and remove it.

10

9

M2CN-02-06-001

W2-6-1


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism Installation

CAUTION: Swing mechanism weight: 714 kg

assembly

1. Lift the swing mechanism with the crane and install it on the revolving frame.

1

2

4

3

5

12

IMPORTANT: When installing the swing mechanism, apply the liquid packing on the mounting surfaces of the reduction gear and revolving frame. 2. Install the bolts (12) (36 used). : 30 mm : 350 to 379 N m (35.7 to 38.7 kgf m)

6

3. Install all hoses (1 to 11) on the swing mechanism. : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) : 36 mm : 175 N m (18.0 kgf m) : 41 mm : 205 N m (21.0 kgf m)

7 8 11

10

9

M2CN-02-06-001

W2-6-2


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism (Blank)

W2-6-3


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism DISASSEMBLE SWING MECHANISM

33

34

32

1

2

3

35

4

5

6

36

7

8

10

9

37

11

31

30

29

12 13 14

28

26

27

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

40

39

W2CD-02-06-002

38

1 - Ring Gear

11 - Motor

21 - Planetary Gear (3 Used)

2 - Shim

12 - O-Ring

22 - Thrust Washer (6 Used)

31 - Sun Gear 32 - Retaining Ring

3 - Bearing

13 - Retaining Ring

23 - Pin (8 Used)

33 - Plug (2 Used)

4 - Socket bolt

14 - Cover

24 - Bearing

34 - Plug

5 - Bearing (2 Used)

15 - Socket Bolt (3 Used)

25 - Casing

35 - Socket Bolt (10 Used)

6 - Casing

16 - Casing

26 - Cover

36 - Pipe

7 - Pinion

17 - Carrier

27 - Bolt (8 Used)

37 - Level Gauge

8 - Pin

18 - Bearing

28 - Shaft

38 - Plug

9 - O-Ring 10 - Bolt (4 Used)

19 - Spring Pin (3 Used)

29 - Thrust Button

39 - Bolt (6 Used)

20 - Knock Pin (2 Used)

30 - Oil Seal

40 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

W2-6-4


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism Disassemble Swing Mechanism • Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Swing mechanism weight: 714 kg

11. Remove the pinion (7) from the casing (6).

Amount of Gear Oil: Approx. 9.2 L : 8 mm

12. Remove the bearing (5) from the pinion (7).

NOTE: Drain the gear oil in the clean container and check the metal powder due to wearing. 2. Put the matching mark on the casing (6), (16), (25), ring gear (1) and motor (11). 3. Remove the bolts (10) (4 used) from the swing motor (11). : 24 mm

(11)

from

13. Remove the bearing (3) and shim (2) from the carrier (17). 14. Remove the socket bolt (4) and bolts (39) (6 used) from the casing (16) and remove the casing (16). : 17 mm : 30 mm 15. Remove the sun gear (31) from the planetary gear (21). 16. Remove the shaft (28) assembly from the casing (25).

CAUTION: Motor weight: 49 kg motor

NOTE: Install the eye bolt (M10) (2 places) on the carrier (17). Slowly lift and remove the carrier (17) by hands or with a crane.

assembly

1. Remove the plug (33) and drain off the gear oil.

4. Remove the mechanism.

10. Remove the carrier (17) assembly from the casing (16).

the

swing

NOTE: Lift the motor (11) slightly and tap the swing mechanism lightly with using a plastic hammer to remove the motor (11).

NOTE: Remove the shaft (28) assembly with using the screw (M12) (3 places) on the end of shaft (28). 17. Remove the ring gear (1) from the casing (25).

5. After removing the level gauge (37) from the pipe (36), remove the pipe (36) from the casing (16).

NOTE: Remove the ring gear (1) with using the pulling-out screw (M8) (2 places) of the ring gear (1).

6. Remove the O-ring (9) from the casing (16). 7. Remove the socket bolts (40) (4 used), (35) (10 used) and (15) (3 used) from the casing (16) and remove the casing (16). : 10 mm

18. Remove the bearing (18) and thrust button (29) from the shaft (28).

8. Remove the retaining ring (13), cover (14) and O-ring (12) from the casing (16). 9. Remove the pin (8) from the casing (16).

W2-6-5


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

19

W2CD-02-06-002

W2-6-6


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism 19. Remove the pins (23) (3 used) from the planetary gears (21) (3 used) with using a special tool (A). Remove the spring pins (19) (3 used) from the shaft (28).

Special Tool (A)

˓35 mm

20. Remove the planetary gears (21) (3 used) and thrust washers (22) (6 used) from the shaft (28). 21. Remove the bearing (24) from the casing (25). 22. Remove the bolts (27) (8 used) from the cover (26) and remove the cover (26) from the casing (25). : 13 mm

˓238 mm

Press

23. Remove the oil seal (30) from the cover (26).

Pillar with semicircular section (3 Places)

284 mm Special Tool for Pin Pulling-Out

W2-6-7

W2CD-02-06-004


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism ASSEMBLE SWING MECHANISM

33

34

32

1

2

3

35

4

5

6

36

7

8

10

9

37

11

31

30

29

12 13 14

28

26

27

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

40

39

W2CD-02-06-002

38

1 - Ring Gear

11 - Motor

21 - Planetary Gear (3 Used)

2 - Shim

12 - O-Ring

22 - Thrust Washer (6 Used)

31 - Sun Gear 32 - Retaining Ring

3 - Bearing

13 - Retaining Ring

23 - Pin (8 Used)

33 - Plug (2 Used)

4 - Socket bolt

14 - Cover

24 - Bearing

34 - Plug

5 - Bearing (2 Used)

15 - Socket Bolt (3 Used)

25 - Casing

35 - Socket Bolt (10 Used)

6 - Casing

16 - Casing

26 - Cover

36 - Pipe

7 - Pinion

17 - Carrier

27 - Bolt (8 Used)

37 - Level Gauge

8 - Pin

18 - Bearing

28 - Shaft

38 - Plug

9 - O-Ring 10 - Bolt (4 Used)

19 - Spring Pin (3 Used)

29 - Thrust Button

39 - Bolt (6 Used)

20 - Knock Pin (2 Used)

30 - Oil Seal

40 - Socket Bolt (4 Used)

W2-6-8


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism Assemble Swing Mechanism 1. Install the bearing (24) on the shaft (28). 2. Install the thrust button (29) on the shaft (28). 3. Install the thrust washers (22) (6 used) and planetary gears (21) (3 used) on the shaft (28) with the pins (23) (3 used) and lock with the spring pins (19) (3 used). NOTE: Caulk the edge (2 places) with using a punch and lock with the spring pins (19) (3 used). Align the no-semicircular part of the thrust washer (22) with the periphery direction of the shaft (28) when installing. Lightly tap and insert the pin (23) with using a plastic hammer so that the holes of pin (23) and shaft (28) can be aligned. The spring pin (19) can be easily inserted with using a special tool (B).

2.5mm

ዘSpecial Tool (B)

5mm

15mm

4. Install the shaft (28) assembly on the casing (25). 5. Install the bearing (18) on the shaft (28). ˓5.5mm

6. Install the oil seal (30) inside of the cover (26).

Special Tool for Inserting Spring Pin

NOTE: Insert the oil seal (30) with using a special tool (C). 7. Install the cover (26) on the casing (25) with the bolts (27) (8 used). : 13 mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m)

W2CD-02-06-005

ዘSpecial Tool (C) ˓11mm

NOTE: Apply ThreeBond #1104 or #1215 on the mating surfaces of the cover (26) and casing (25).

˓154mm

˓170mm

Special Tool for Inserting Oil Seal

W2-6-9

W2CD-02-06-006


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism

33

35

1

2

3

4

5

6

36

7

8

10

37

11

31

30

12 13 14

25

28

24

20

17

16

15

W2CD-02-06-002

40

W2-6-10


SWING MACHINERY / Swing Mechanism IMPORTANT: Wrap a vinyl tape on the spline part of the shaft (28) assembly not to damage the lip of the oil seal (30). 8. Install the knock pins (20) (2 used) on the ring gear (1). Install it on the casing (25). NOTE: Align the matching marks on the casing (25) and ring gear (1) when installing. Apply ThreeBond #1104 or #1215 on the mating surfaces of the casing (25) and ring gear (1). 9. Install the casing (6) on the ring gear (1) with the socket bolt (4). : 17 mm : 430 N m (44.0 kgf m) : 30 mm : 430 N m (44.0 kgf m) NOTE: Align the matching marks on the ring gear (1) and casing (6) when installing. Apply ThreeBond #1104 or #1215 on the mating surfaces of the ring gear (1) and casing (6).

17. Install the casing (16) on the casing (6) with the socket bolts (40) (4 used), (35) (10 used) and (15) (3 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) NOTE: Align the matching marks on the casing (6) with (16) when installing. Apply ThreeBond #1104 or #1215 on the mating surfaces of the casing (6) and (16). 18. Install the O-ring on the casing (16). 19. Lift the swing motor (11) vertically. Install the swing motor (11) on the pinion (7) and tighten with the bolts (10) (4 used). : 24 mm : 235 N m (24.0 kgf m) 20. Install the plug (33) on the casing (25). : 8 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (33).

10. Install the sun gear (31) on the shaft (28). 11. Install the shim (2) and bearing (3) on the carrier (17). 12. Install the bearings (5) (2 used) on the pinion (7). 13. Install the bearing (24) on the casing (16). 14. Install the carrier (17) and pinion (7) on the sun gear (31). 15. Install the pin (8) on the casing (6).

16. Install the O-ring (12), cover (14) and retaining ring (13) on the casing (16).

21. Add the gear oil through the oil filler. Amount of Gear Oil: Approx. 9.2 L NOTE: Temporarily install the pipe (36) and level gauge (37) and check the gear oil level. After installing the swing mechanism on the machine, install the pipe (36) and level gauge (37). At this time, completely remove the seal tape from the screwthread and wrap the new seal tape when installing after removing grease.

W2-6-11


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism DISASSEMBLE SWING MOTOR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

27 26

28

25

29

24

30

31 32 23

22

21

20

19

18

17

15, 16

33

W2CD-02-06-003

123456789-

Shoe Retainer Piston (9 Used) Cylinder O-Ring Plug O-Ring Brake Piston O-Ring

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 -

Spring (24 Used) Valve Casing Valve Plate Plug Plug Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Bearing

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 -

Pin (2 Used) Separator Plate (4 Used) Friction Plate (3 Used) Spring Casing Shaft Oil Seal Bearing

W2-6-12

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

Shoe Plate Plunger (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve (2 Used)


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism Disassemble Swing Motor

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Motor weight: 49 kg

1. Put the matching marks on the valve casing (11) and casing (22). 2. Remove the plug (13) from the valve casing (11). Drain the hydraulic oil. : 6 mm 3. Place the shaft end of the shaft (23) downward and secure the shaft (23) on the workbench to disassemble easily. NOTE: Place the rubber plate and cloth on the workbench not to damage the parts. 4. Remove the relief valves (33) (2 used) from the valve casing (11) and remove the O-rings (32) (2 used). : 41 mm

IMPORTANT: Do not fall off valve plate (12) from the valve casing (11). (The valve plate (12) may be attached at the cylinder (4) side.) Do not damage the mating surfaces when separating the valve casing (11) from the casing (22) with using a screwdriver. 6. Loosen the socket bolts (31) (4 used) and remove the valve casing (11) from the casing (22). : 17 mm NOTE: When loosening the socket bolt (31), the valve casing (11) is floated by the spring (10). 7. Remove the O-ring (9), valve plate (12) and pins (18) (2 used) from the valve casing (11). 8. Remove the spring (10) from the brake piston (8).

NOTE: When loosening the relief valve (33), the O-ring (32) is damaged. Be sure to replace the O-ring (32). IMPORTANT: Do not damage the seat part of plunger (27). 5. Remove the plug (30) from the valve casing (11) and remove the O-ring (29), spring (28) and plunger (27). : 14 mm

W2-6-13


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

11

26 25 24

23

22

21

20

19

17

W2CD-02-06-003

W2-6-14


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism 9. Remove the brake piston (8) from the casing (22).

ዘSpecial Tool (A)

NOTE: Attach the claw of a special tool (A) to the brake piston (8) and pull the brake piston (8) upward straightly.

Special Tool

10. Re-place the motor horizontally. 8

IMPORTANT: Do not damage the sliding surfaces of the cylinder (4) and shoe (1).

22

11. Remove the cylinder (4), piston (3), retainer (2), shoe (1) and spring (21) from the shaft (23). 12. Remove the friction plate (20) and separator plate (19) from the casing (22). 13. Remove the shaft (23) assembly and shoe plate (26) from the casing (22). NOTE: When removing the shaft (23) assembly, the oil seal (24) is damaged by the spline. Wrap the vinyl tape on the spline of the shaft (23) assembly.

W25N-02-06-009

14 85 75 30 15

14. Remove the oil seal (24) from the casing (22). 35

• If necessary, do the following procedures. Do not use the removed bearings (17) and (25) again.

R12.5

30 14

100 8

NOTE: Evenly tap and remove the inner ring of bearing (25) with using a steel bar.

M16 Penetration

44

15. Remove the inner ring of bearing (25) from the shaft (23).

M16

4

16. Remove the outer ring of bearing (25) from the casing (22).

˳8

Special Tool for Brake Piston (8)

NOTE: Evenly tap and remove the outer ring of bearing (25) with using a steel bar. 17. Remove the O-rings (5) and (7) from the casing (22). 18. Remove the bearing (17) from the valve casing (11).

W2-6-15

W25N-02-06-010


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism ASSEMBLE SWING MOTOR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

27 26

28

25

29

24

30

31 32 23

22

21

20

19

18

17

15, 16

33

W2CD-02-06-003

123456789-

Shoe Retainer Piston (9 Used) Cylinder O-Ring Plug O-Ring Brake Piston O-Ring

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 -

Spring (24 Used) Valve Casing Valve Plate Plug Plug Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Bearing

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 -

Pin (2 Used) Separator Plate (4 Used) Friction Plate (3 Used) Spring Casing Shaft Oil Seal Bearing

W2-6-16

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

Shoe Plate Plunger (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve (2 Used)


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism Assemble Swing Motor 1. Place the casing (22) on the workbench with placing the valve casing (11) side upward.

8. Install the piston (3) with the shoe (1) installed on the retainer (2) on the cylinder (4).

IMPORTANT: Check the direction of flange of the inner ring of the bearing (25).

9. Align the splines of the cylinder (4) and shaft (23). Install the cylinder (4) assembly on the shaft (23).

2. Install the bearing (25) on the shaft (23).

10. Re-place the casing (22) with placing the oil seal (24) side downward.

NOTE: Shrink the inner ring. IMPORTANT: Check the installing direction of the oil seal (24). When tapping the oil seal (24), do not damage the outer surface of the oil seal. 3. Insert the oil seal (24) into the casing (22).

11. Install the separator plate (19) and friction plate (20) on the casing (22) in order alternately. NOTE: Install the separator plates (19) (4 used) and friction plates (20) (3 used). 12. Install the O-rings (5) and (7) on the casing (22).

NOTE: Apply grease on the lip part of the oil seal (24) thinly. Use a special tool. IMPORTANT: Wrap a vinyl tape on the spline part of the shaft (23) assembly not to damage the lip of the oil seal (24). 4. Install the shaft (23) assembly on the casing (22). 5. Re-place the casing (22) horizontally. 6. Insert the shoe plate (26) into the casing (22). NOTE: Direct the larger-chamfered side of the shoe plate (26) inside of the casing (22). Apply grease on the mating surface to prevent from falling off.

NOTE: Apply grease on the O-rings (5) and (7) thinly. 13. Install the brake piston (8) on the casing (22). 14. Install the spring (10) on the brake piston (8). 15. With tapping the outer ring of the bearing (17) with using a steel bar lightly, insert the bearing (17) into the valve casing (11). NOTE: Evenly tap and insert the outer ring of the bearing (17) until the outer ring stops at the step part of the valve casing (11).

7. Install the retainer (2) and spring (21). Install the piston (3) with the shoe (1).

W2-6-17


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism

9

10

11

12

13

27 28 29 30

31 32 22

33

W2CD-02-06-003

W2-6-18


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism 16. Apply grease on the valve casing (11) mounting surfaces of the valve plate (12) and install the valve plate (12) on the valve casing (11). IMPORTANT: Check the installing direction of the valve casing (11). Do not fall off the valve plate (12). Do not fall the spring (10). 17. After installing the O-ring (9) on the valve casing (11), install the valve casing (11) on the casing (22) and tighten the socket bolt (31). : 17 mm : 430 N m (44.0 kgf m) 18. Insert the plunger (27) and spring (28) into the valve casing (11). NOTE: Check if the plunger (27) moves smoothly. 19. Install the O-ring (29) on the plug (30) and tighten the plug (30) to the casing (11). : 14 mm : 334 N m (34.0 kgf m) 20. Install the O-ring (32) on the relief valve (33) and install the relief valve (33) on the valve casing (11). : 41 mm : 177 N m (18.0 kgf m) 21. Add the hydraulic oil into the motor. Wrap the seal tape on the plug (13) and install the plug (13) to the valve casing (11). Amount of Hydraulic Oil: Approx. 0.8 L : 6 mm : 36 N m (3.7 kgf m)

W2-6-19


SWING MECHANISM / Swing Mechanism MAINTENANCE STANDARD Swing Mechanism

• Replacement Standard for Gear Replace the parts when the pitting (1 mm or more a pit, 5% or more on the rate of area) occurs on the tooth of the sun gear (31), planetary gears (21) and ring gear (1). When the damage on the appearance is found even if the pitting does not occur, replace the parts.

Swing Motor 1. Clearance between piston outer diameter and cylinder inner bore. Unit: mm

D-d

Standard

Allowable Limit

0.027

0.052 d

D

2. Clearance between piston and shoe shrinking portion

W25N-02-04-005

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0

0.3

ˡ

ˡ

3. Shoe thickness Unit: mm

t

Standard

Allowable Limit

5.5

5.3

t

W25N-02-04-006

4. Friction plate thickness Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

2.0

1.8

W2-6-20


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism REMOVE AND MECHANISM

INSTALL

HOISTING

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Lower the boom and remove the hook. After removing the wire rope of the front and rear drum, remove the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section. (As for the removal of the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

1

2

2. Remove the counterweight. (As for the removal of the counterweight, refer to W2-2 in this section.) 3. Loosen the bolt (3) for the left houses (1) and (2) on the hoisting motors of the front and rear drums. Lift the left houses (1) and (2) with the crane and remove them. : 17mm

3

3

M2CN-02-07-001

4. Pull out the boom raising/lowering wire rope.

5. Remove the live mast. (As for the removal of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

W2-7-1


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 6. Remove the bolt (12) and remove the drum covers (4 to 7) and brackets (8 to 11). : 19 mm

6 10

7. Move the front and rear drum lock switches in the operator’s cab to the “UNLOCK” position (lock disengaged) and disengage the drum lock.

4

12 8

NOTE: In case the pawl is not disengaged, the pawl is disengaged when placing the hoisting lever in “hoisting” position slightly with the drum lock switch kept in the “UNLOCK” position (lock disengaged).

7

10

8 5 9 9

11 10

M2CN-02-07-002

8. Remove the wire harness and all hoses from the hoisting motor (13). Attach a plug on the removed hoses. : 22 mm : 36 mm : 10 mm

15

14 15

14

13

9. Remove the bolt (14) and remove the bracket (15) from the drum rotation sensor. : 19 mm

13

M2CN-02-07-003

W2-7-2


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism CAUTION: Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg

(front)

(rear)

IMPORTANT: When lifting the hoisting mechanism with the crane, do not attach a wire rope on the motor.

10. Attach a wire rope on the drum of the hoisting mechanism and support it with the crane.

11. Remove the nut (16) and bolt (17). : 24 mm

12. Remove the bolt (18) and remove the lock plate (19). Pull out the pin (20) and remove the hoisting mechanism with the crane. : 19 mm

Installation CAUTION: Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg

(front) (rear)

18 19

IMPORTANT: When lifting the hoisting mechanism with the crane, do not attach a wire rope on the motor.

17

16

20

17 16

18

16

17

19

1. Attach a wire rope on the hoisting mechanism. Lift it with the crane and align the hoisting mechanism with the rotating platform.

20

20

19 18

2. Install the hoisting mechanism on the rotating platform and lock it with the pin (20). Install the lock plate (19) with the bolt (18). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

20 18

3. Adjust the right left position of the hoisting mechanism so that the drum flange meshes with the pawl of the drum lock. Tighten the nut (16). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

19 16

17 M2CN-02-07-004

W2-7-3


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism

14

15

4. Install the bracket (15) of the drum rotation sensor. : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

15

14

13

13

M2CN-02-07-003

6 10

5. Install the wire harness and all hoses on the hoisting motor (13). ᧶22 mm ᧶ 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) ᧶36 mm ᧶ 175 N m (18.0 kgf m) ᧶10 mm ᧶ 90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

4

12 8

7

6. Install the drum covers (4 to 7) and brackets (8 to 11) on the revolving frame with the bolt (12). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

10

8 5 9 9

11 10

M2CN-02-07-002

W2-7-4


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 7. Install the live mast. (As for the installation of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

8. Wind the wire rope on the boom raising/lowering mechanism. 9. Lift the left houses (1) and (2) with the crane and tighten the bolt (3). : 17mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m)

1

2

10. Install the counterweight. (Refer to W2-2 in this section.) 3

11. Wind the wire rope on the front and rear drum and reeve the wire rope through the hook. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 3

M2CN-02-07-001

W2-7-5


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE HOISTING MECHANISM 3,4

5

6

7

8

9

12 13 14 15 16

10 11

17

18 19

20 21

2

1

65 22

64 63 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

36 35 34 33

44

32 31 30

45

46

47

27 28 29

48

26

23 24 25

49

62 61 50

60

54

59

55

58

57

51

56

53

52

M2CN-02-07-005

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 -

Drum Cover Bolt (16 Used) Washer (16 Used) Retainer Ring Gear Spacer Sun Gear Spacer Spacer Spline Shaft O-Ring Pedestal Plug Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Casing

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 -

Bracket Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Level Gauge Motor Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) O-Ring Plug Bolt (28 Used) Washer (28 Used) Plug Carrier Pin (5 Used) Spacer (5 Used) Thrust Plate (5 Used) Planetary Gear (5 Used)

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 -

W2-7-6

Needle Bearing (15 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Thrust Plate (3 Used) Needle Bearing (6 Used) Retaining Ring (3 Used) Carrier Planetary Gear (3 Used) Bearing Shaft Bolt (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Retainer Bearing Bearing Sleeve Oil Seal Retainer

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

Bolt (12 Used) Washer (12 Used) Sleeve Oil Seal Bearing Bracket Washer (6 Used) Bolt (6 Used) 1LSSOH Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) Retainer Plug Retainer


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Hoisting Mechanism CAUTION: Hoisting motor weight: Approx. 270 kg

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg

1. Lift the hoisting mechanism with the crane and remove put it on a workbench. After removing the plugs (26) and (29), drain off the gear oil. Gear oil : 12 L

10. Loosen the bolts (23) (4 used) of the hoisting motor (22). Lift the motor (22) assembly with the crane and remove it. ᧶ 30mm 11. Remove the O-ring (25) from the reduction gear. 12. Loosen the bolts (20) (24 used). Lift the bracket (18) with the crane and remove it. ᧶30mm

NOTE: Drain off the gear oil in the clean container and check the metal powder due to wearing. 2. Remove the bolts (61) (4 used) and remove the retainer (63). : 30 mm 3. Remove the bolts (59) (6 used) and remove the retainer (65). : 30 mm 4. Remove the oil seal (55) from the retainer (65). 5. Remove the sleeve (54) from the drum (1). 6. Lift the bracket (57) with the crane and remove it from the drum (1).

CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 580 kg 13. Loosen the bolts (27) (28 used). Lift the reduction gear with the crane and remove it from the drum (1). ᧶30mm 14. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the hoisting motor (22) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the hoisting motor (22) mounting surface and stabilize the reduction gear. 15. Remove the bolts (3) (16 used) and remove the cover (2).

7. Remove the bearing (56) and oil seal (55) from the bracket (57).

᧶19 mm 16. Remove the retainer (5) from the cover (2).

8. Remove the sleeve (54) from the drum (1). 9. Lift the hoisting mechanism with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the bracket (57) side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (300 mm square) under the drum (1) and stabilize the hoisting mechanism.

17. Remove the bearing (42) from the cover (2). 18. Pull out the shaft (43). 19. Take out the carrier (40) assembly. 20. Remove the retaining ring (39) (3 used) from the carrier (40). 21. Remove the planetary gears (41) (3 used), thrust plates (37) (3 used) and needle bearings (38) (6 used) from the carrier (40).

W2-7-7


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

17 16

1

36 35 34 33

44

32 31 30

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

M2CN-02-07-005

W2-7-8


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 22. Remove the spacer (7) from the sun gear (8). 23. Remove the sun gear (8) and spacer (9). 24. Loosen the bolts (16) (24 used). Remove the ring gear (6) from the pedestal (13). : 36 mm 25. Take out the carrier (30) assembly. 26. Remove the retaining ring (36) (5 used) from the carrier (30). 27. Remove the pin (31) (5 used) from the carrier (30). 28. Remove the planetary gears (34) (5 used), thrust plates (33) (5 used) and needle bearings (35) (15 used) from the carrier (30). 29. Remove the spacer (10),(32) (5 used) from the carrier (30). 30. Remove the spline shaft (11) from the casing (17). 31. Remove the O-ring (12) from the pedestal (13). 32. Loosen the bolts (44) (8 used). Remove the retainer (46) from the casing (17). : 24 mm 33. Lift the pedestal (13), bearings (47) and (48), retainer (51) and oil seal (50) assembled with the crane and remove it from the casing (17). 34. Remove the bearing (47) from the pedestal (13). 35. Lift the pedestal (13) with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the drum (1) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (1) mounting surface. 36. Loosen the bolts (52) (12 used). Remove the retainer (51) from the pedestal (13). : 17 mm 37. Remove the oil seal (50) from the retainer (51). 38. Remove the bearing (48) from the pedestal (13). 39. Remove the sleeve (49) from the casing (17).

W2-7-9


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE HOISTING MECHANISM 3,4

5

6

7

8

9

12 13 14 15 16

10 11

17

18 19

20 21

2

1

65 22

64 63 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

36 35 34 33

44

32 31 30

45

46

47

27 28 29

48

26

23 24 25

49

62 61 50

60

54

59

55

58

57

51

56

53

52

M2CN-02-07-005

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 -

Drum Cover Bolt (16 Used) Washer (16 Used) Retainer Ring Gear Spacer Sun Gear Spacer Spacer Spline Shaft O-Ring Pedestal Plug Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Casing

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 -

Bracket Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Level Gauge Motor Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) O-Ring Plug Bolt (28 Used) Washer (28 Used) Plug Carrier Pin (5 Used) Spacer (5 Used) Thrust Plate (5 Used) Planetary Gear (5 Used)

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 -

Needle Bearing (15 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Thrust Plate (3 Used) Needle Bearing (6 Used) Retaining Ring (3 Used) Carrier Planetary Gear (3 Used) Bearing Shaft Bolt (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Retainer Bearing Bearing Sleeve Oil Seal Retainer

W2-7-10

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

Bolt (12 Used) Washer (12 Used) Sleeve Oil Seal Bearing Bracket Washer (6 Used) Bolt (6 Used) 1LSSOH Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) Retainer Plug Retainer


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Hoisting Mechanism 1. Lift the pedestal (13) with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the drum (1) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (1) mounting surface.

12. Install the spacer (10) and (32) (5 used) on the carrier (30). 13. Install the the planetary gears (34) (5 used), thrust plates (33) (5 used) and needle bearings (35) (15 used) on the carrier (30).

2. Install the bearing (48) on the pedestal (13). 14. Install the pins (31) (5 used) on the carrier (30) and install the retaining ring (36).

3. Install the oil seal (50) on the retainer (51). 4. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1215) on the mating surface with the retainer (51) of the pedestal (13). 5. Install the retainer (51) on the pedestal (13) and install the washer (53). Tighten it with the bolts (52) (12 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied. : 17mm : 41 to 45 N m (4.2 to 4.6 kgf m) 6. Lift the casing (17) with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the hoisting motor (22) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the hoisting motor (22) mounting surface. 7. Install the sleeve (49) on the casing (17).

15. Install the carrier (30) assembly on the casing (17). 16. Install the sun gear (8) and spacer (9) on the carrier (30) assembly. 17. Install the spacer (7) on the sun gear (8). 18. Install the ring gear (6) on the pedestal (13) and install the washer (15). Tighten it with the bolts (44) (8 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied. : 36mm : 605 to 655 N m (61.7 to 66.8 kgf m) 19. Install the planetary gears (41) (3 used), thrust plates (37) (3 used) and needle bearings (38) (6 used) on the carrier (40) . 20. Install the retaining ring (39) (3 used) on the carrier (40).

8. Install the pedestal (13) on the casing (17). 9. Install the bearing (47) on the casing (17). 10. Install the retainer (46) on the casing (17) and install the washer (45). Tighten it with the bolts (44) (8 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied. : 24mm : 179 to 194 N m (18.3 to 19.8 kgf m) 11. Install the spline shaft (11) on the casing (17).

21. Install the carrier (40) assembly on the ring gear (6) and sun gear (8). 22. Install the shaft (43) on the carrier (40) assembly. At this time, make sure that the shaft (43) rotates by hands. 23. Install the bearing (42) on the shaft (43).

W2-7-11


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 3,4

17

6

18 19

20

2

1

65 22

64 63 43

23 24 27 28

62 61

60

54

59

55

58

57

56

M2CN-02-07-005

W2-7-12


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 24. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1215) on the mating surface with the cover (2) of the ring gear (6).

CAUTION: Hoisting motor weight: Approx. 270 kg

25. Install the cover (2) on the ring gear (6) and tighten with the bolts (3) (16 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and washer (4). : 19 mm : 72 to 78 N m (7.4 to 8.0 kgf m)

31. Lift the motor (22) assembly with the crane and install it on the casing (17). Tighten with the bolts (23) (4 used) and washer (24). : 30mm : 540 N m (55.0 kgf m)

26. Lift the drum (1) with the crane and place it on the workbench with positioning the bracket (57) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (300 mm square) under the drum (1) and stabilize the drum (1).

CAUTION: Hoisting mechanism weight: 1770 kg

CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 580kg 27. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and install it on the drum (1). Tighten with the bolt (27) (28 used) and washer (28). : 30 mm : 540 N m (55.0 kgf m) 28. Hammer in the shaft (43) end surface several times with a plastic hammer. Make sure that the dimension “L” between the casing (17) end surface and the shaft (43) end is 50 mm. 29. Lift the bracket (18) with the crane and tighten with the bolts (20) (24 used) and washer (19) to the casing (17). : 30 mm : 750 N m (76.5 kgf m) 30. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389) on the mating surface with the motor (22) of the casing (17).

32. Lift the hoisting mechanism with the crane and place it on the workbench horizontally. 33. Install the sleeve (54) on the drum (1). 34. Install the oil seal (55) and bearing (56) on the bracket (57). 35. Lift the bracket (57) with the crane and install it on the drum (1). 36. Install the sleeve (54) on the drum (1). 37. Install the oil seal (55) on the retainer (65). 38. Install the retainer (65) on the bracket (57) and tighten with the bolts (59) (6 used) and washer (58). : 30 mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m) 39. Tighten the retainer (63) on the sleeve (54) end surface with the bolts (61) (4 used) and washer (62). : 30 mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m) 40. Remove the plug (64) and grease through the nipple (60) until the grease (Shell Alvania EP2) comes out from the hole removed. : 7 mm

W2-7-13


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 13 14 21

64

M2CN-02-07-005

W2-7-14


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 41. Install the plug (64). : 7 mm 42. Add the gear oil to the center of the level gauge (21) through the filler port of the pedestal (13). Gear oil : 12 L 43. Install the plug (14) on the filler port of the pedestal (13). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (14).

W2-7-15


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE HOISTING MOTOR 14

13

32

20

12

10

11

9

19

8

38 27 40

39

44

42

15 8 50 16 51 19 55 18

56

1 54 4

30

6

46 46 57

34

5 3 2 17

33 31

7

53

35

47

36

21

29

28

33

34

23

22

24

25

43

37

26

41

45

52

48

49

M2CN-02-07-006

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Bolt (4 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring Stopper

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Cover Bearing Spacer O-Ring O-Ring (4 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate Shoe Plate Retaining Ring

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -

Socket Bolt (12 Used) Casing O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring Pin Valve Cover Socket bolt Shim (1 Unit) O-Ring Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling Plate (9 Used)

W2-7-16

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

Retaining Ring (2 Used) Casing Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (8 Used) Piston Spring (22 Used) O-Ring Cover Plug


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Hoisting Motor

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. • The procedure starts on the premise that the regulator, counterbalance valve and solenoid valve have already been removed. CAUTION: Hoisting motor weight: 268 kg 1. Place the hoisting motor on a workbench and remove the plug (34) from the casing (32). Drain off the hydraulic oil. : 36 mm 2. Put the matching marks on the front casing (35), casing (32), valve cover (39), casing (47) and cover (56). 3. Loosen the socket bolts (31) (12 used) evenly and remove the cover (56) from the casing (47). : 10 mm 4. Remove the O-ring (55) from the cover (56). 5. Remove the springs (54) (22 used) and piston (53) from the casing (47).

IMPORTANT: When removing the valve cover (39), the valve plate (26) may be removed together. Do not fall off the valve plate (26). 10. Remove the socket bolts (40) and (43) (9 used) and remove the valve cover (39) from the casing (32). : 17 mm 11. Remove the O-rings (19) (2 used) from the casing (32). 12. Remove the valve plate (26) and O-ring (37) from the valve cover (39). NOTE: Do not remove the needle bearing (27) unnecessarily. 13. Remove the rotor (25), plungers (22) (9 used), springs (24) (9 used), holder (23) and plate (28) from the casing (32). 14. Remove the socket bolts (8) (8 used) and remove the covers (9) and (16) from the casing (32). : 14 mm 15. Pull out the stoppers (10), (15), pistons (12) and (13) from the casing (32).

6. Remove the casing (47) from the valve cover (39) and remove the O-rings (50) and (51) from the casing (47).

NOTE: Remove the stoppers (10) and (15) with using a screw (M6).

7. Remove the retaining ring (46), coupling (44) and retaining ring (46) from the output shaft (5).

16. Remove the O-rings (11) and (14) from the stoppers (10) and (15).

8. Remove the plates (45) (9 used), friction plates (52) (8 used), shim (41) and O-ring (42) from the valve cover (39).

17. Remove the bolts (1) (4 used) and remove the front cover (2) from the front casing (35). : 17 mm

9. Remove the retaining ring (30) from the output shaft (5).

18. Remove the oil seal (3) and O-ring (4) from the front cover (2). 19. Remove the socket bolts (36) (14 used) and remove the front casing (35) from the casing (32). : 12 mm

W2-7-17


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 32

19 18

6

5

17

7 35

21

29

M2CN-02-07-006

W2-7-18


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 20. Remove the O-rings (19) (2 used) from the casing (32) and O-ring (18) from the front casing (35) respectively. 21. Pull out the output shaft (5) from the front casing (35). 22. Remove the retaining ring (7) and bearing spacer (17) from the output shaft (5) and remove the bearing (5) with using a press. 23. Remove the swash plate (21) from the casing (32) and remove the shoe plate (29) from the swash plate (21).

W2-7-19


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE HOISTING MOTOR 14

13

32

20

12

10

11

9

19

8

38 27 40

39

44

42

15 8 50 16 51 19 55 18

56

1 54 4

30

6

46 46 57

34

5 3 2 17

33 31

7

53

35

47

36

21

29

28

33

34

23

22

24

25

43

37

26

41

45

52

48

49

M2CN-02-07-006

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Bolt (4 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring Stopper

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Cover Bearing Spacer O-Ring O-Ring (4 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate Shoe Plate Retaining Ring

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 -

Socket Bolt (12 Used) Casing O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring Pin Valve Cover Socket bolt Shim (1 Unit) O-Ring Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling

W2-7-20

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

Plate (9 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Casing Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (8 Used) Piston Spring (22 Used) O-Ring Cover Plug


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Hoisting Motor 1. Install the shoe plate (29) on the swash plate (21) and install the swash plate (21) on the casing (32).

10. Install the O-ring (14) on the stopper (15) and the o-ring (11) on the stopper (10) respectively. Install the stoppers (10) and (15) on the end of the casing (32).

NOTE: Turn the larger chamfered side of the shoe plate (29) to the swash plate (21) side.

NOTE: Install the stoppers (15) and (10) to the end surface of the casing (32).

2. Install the bearing (6) on the output shaft (5) with using a press and install the bearing spacer (17) and retaining ring (7).

11. Install the cover (9) on the casing (32) with the socket bolts (8) (4 used). : 14 mm : 235 N m (24.0 kgf m)

3. Tap the outer race of the bearing (6) with using a copper bar and install the output shaft (5) ton the front casing (35). 4. Install the O-ring (18) on the front casing (35) and O-rings (19) (4 used) on the casing (32) respectively. 5. Install the front casing (35) and output shaft (5) on the casing (32). IMPORTANT: Check that swash plate (21) moves smoothly. 6. Tighten the socket bolts (36) (14 used). : 12 mm : 160 N m (16.3 kgf m) 7. Install the oil seal (3) on the front cover (2) with using a press and install the O-ring (4). 8. Install the front cover (2) on the front casing (35) and tighten the bolts (1) (4 used). : 17mm : 57 N m (5.8 kgf m) 9. Insert the piston (13) into the front casing (35) side of the casing (32) and the piston (12) into the valve cover (39) side.

12. Install the cover (16) on the casing (32) with the socket bolts (8) (4 used). : 14 mm : 235 N m (24.0 kgf m) 13. Install the springs (24) (9 used) on the rotor (25) and install the holder (23). 14. Install the plungers (22) (9 used) on the plate (28) and insert the plunger (22) into the rotor (25). 15. Align the spline of the output shaft (5), rotor (25) and holder (23). Install the rotor (25) assembly on the output shaft (5). 16. Apply the grease on the valve plate (26). Align with the pin (38) and install the valve plate (26) on the valve cover (39). Install the O-ring (37) on the valve cover (39). 17. Install the O-rings (19) (2 used) on the casing (32). 18. Place the casing (32) on the workbench vertically. 19. Install the valve cover (39) on the casing (32) with the socket bolts (40) and (43) (9 used). : 17 mm : 430 N m (43.8 kgf m)

W2-7-21


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 27

32

39

44

42

50 51 55 56 54 30 46 46

34

5

33 31 53 47

33

34

41

45

52

M2CN-02-07-006

W2-7-22


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 20. Install the retaining ring (30) on the output shaft (5) and fix the needle bearing (27). 21. Install the retaining ring (46) on the output shaft (5). 22. Install the coupling (44) on the output shaft (5) and install the retaining ring (46). IMPORTANT: Align the notches on the plate (45) and friction plate (52). Adjust with the shims (41) so that the dimension between the end of the valve cover (39) and the plate (45) is 3.1 mm. 23. Install the shim (41), plates (45) (9 used) and friction plates (52) (8 used) on the valve cover (39) and coupling (44). 24. Install the O-ring (42) on the valve cover (39). 25. Install the O-rings (50) and (51) on the casing (47) and install the piston (53). 26. Install the springs (54) (22 used) on the piston (53). 27. Install the O-ring (55) on the cover (56) and install the cover (56) on the casing (47) with the socket bolts (31) (12 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) 28. Install the O-ring (33) on the plug (34) and install the plug (34) on the casing (32). : 36 mm : 167 N m (17.0 kgf m)

W2-7-23


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism MAINTENANCE STANDARD Dial Gauge

1. Secure the plunger with the shoe attached in a vise. Install the dial gauge on the shoe. Move the shoe upward and downward and measure the clearance between the shoe and the spherical part of plunger. In case the measurement value is beyond the allowable limit, replace the plunger and shoe assembly.

Clearance

Guide

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0 to 0.1

0.3

Vise

Soft Liner

W309-04-05-002

Remedy: Replace the shoe and the plunger as an assembly.

2. Measure the plunger diameter at upper, middle, lower positions (2 places for each) with using a micrometer. Measure the diameter at the second position 90 degrees away from the first position. Measure the rotor bore inner diameter at positions A and B (2 places for each) with using a cylinder gauge.

W309-04-05-003

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0.039

0.078

Remedy: Replace the plunger or the rotor.

3. Measure the shoe thickness B with using a micrometer. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

8.8

8.6 W309-04-05-004

B W309-04-05-005

W2-7-24


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism 4. Measure the heights of H and h. Plate

C=H-h

Holder

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.2

31.6

H h

Remedy: Replace the holder and the plate as an assembly. W309-04-05-006

5. Measure the dimension A. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

3.1

3.6 A

Remedy: Adjust with the shims.

6. Measure the brake spring length. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

54

53.2

W309-04-05-007

Remedy: Replace the spring.

7. Measure the thickness of the plate and friction plate. (17 used) Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.4

31.7

Remedy: Replace the plate.

W2-7-25


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42

10 13

37 39

12

38

11

35

25

3 33 34

36

22 23 19 21

14

31

20

28

18

24

30

27

26

32

5

M2CN-02-07-007

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-7-26

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (4). : 8 mm 11. Remove the O-ring (33) from the plug (32).

1. Remove the solenoid valve (6) from the casing (4). : 32 mm 2. Remove the socket bolts (5) (4 used) and remove the casing from the hoisting motor (4). : 6 mm

12. Remove the lever (42) from the sleeve (17). 13. Remove the spring seat (9), spring (7), spring seat (15), spool (16) and sleeve (17) from the casing (4). 14. Remove the O-ring (8) from the spring seat (9).

3. Remove the O-rings (28) and (30) from the casing (4). 4. Remove the orifice (31) from the casing (4). : 4 mm

15. Remove the plug (21) from the casing (4) and remove the spring (19) and lock pin (18). : 13 mm 16. Remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21).

5. Remove the socket bolts (37) (6 used) and remove the cover (38) from the casing (4). : 5 mm 6. Remove the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) from the casing.

17. Remove the spring seat (25), spring (27), spring seat (24), spool (23) and sleeve (22) from the casing (4). 18. Remove the O-ring (26) from the spring seat (25).

7. Remove the pin (35) and piston (34) from the cover (38). 8. Remove the piston (41) and sleeve (40) from the cover (38). 9. Remove the socket bolt (11) and remove the covers (10) (2 used) from the casing (4). : 5 mm IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the adjusting nut (13) and nut (12).

W2-7-27


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42

10 13

37 39

12

38

11

35

25

3 33 34

36

22 23 19 21

14

31

20

28

18

24

30

27

26

32

5

M2CN-02-07-007

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-7-28

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Regulator 1. Install the sleeve (22), spool (23), spring seat (24) and spring (27) on the casing (4).

10. Install the O-ring (8) on the spring seat (9) and install it on the casing (4).

2. Install the O-ring (26) on the spring seat (25) and install it on the casing (4).

11. Install the cover (10) on the casing with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

3. Install the cover (10) on the casing (4) with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m) 4. Install the lock pin (18) and spring (19) on the casing (4).

12. Install the piston (34) on the casing (4). 13. Install the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) on the casing (4). 14. Install the pin (35) on the cover (38).

5. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install it on the casing (4). : 13mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m)

15. Install the sleeve (40) and piston (41) on the cover (38).

6. Install the sleeve (17) and spool (16) on the casing (4).

16. Install the cover (38) on the casing with the bolts (37) (6 used). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

7. Install the lever (42) on the sleeve (17). 8. Install the O-ring (33) on the plug (32) and install it on the casing (4). : 8 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) 9. Install the spring seat (15) and spring (7) on the casing (4).

17. Install the orifice (31) on the casing (4) and install the O-rings (28) and (30). : 4 mm : 9 N m (0.9 kgf m) 18. Install the casing (4) on the hoisting motor with the socket bolts (5) (4 used). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0kgf m) 19. Install the solenoid valve (6) on the casing (4). : 32mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m)

W2-7-29


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE

9

8

19 21

15 20

7 6 35

24

3

5 17

16

2

4

1

12

18

13 14

22 23 25 26

12 13

27 28

10 11

29 30 31 32

33 33

34

M2CN-02-07-008

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-7-30

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Counterbalance Valve

11. Remove the spring (29) and plunger (28) from the casing (14).

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Remove the O-rings (33) (2 used) from the casing (14). 2. Remove the socket bolts (1) and (22) (4 used for each) and remove the covers (3) and (24) from the casing (14). : 10 mm

NOTE: Do not remove the seat (27) except when replacing the seat. 12. Remove the relief valve (34) from the casing (14) and remove the O-ring and backup ring from the relief valve (34). : 50 mm

3. Remove the plug (21) from the cover (24) and remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21). : 6 mm 4. Remove the plug (10) from the cover (3) and remove the O-ring (11) from the plug (11). : 6 mm 5. Remove the spring (26) and O-rings (4) and (25) from the casing (14). 6. Pull out the spool (6) assembly from the casing (14). 7. Remove the plug (5) from the spool (6) and remove the filter (35) from the plug (5). 8. Remove the orifice (9), spring (8) and steel ball (7) from the spool (6). 9. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (14). : 50 mm 10. Remove the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) from the plug (32).

W2-7-31


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE 22

23

24

25

26

9

8

7

14

6

13

12

35

5

4

3 11

20

10

21 1 2

27

28

29

32 17

19

31

30

34

18

15 16

33

M2CN-02-07-009

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-7-32

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Counterbalance Valve 1. Install the O-ring and backup ring on the relief valve (34). 2. Install the relief valve (34) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 166 to 186 N m (17.0 to 19.0 kgf m) 3. Install the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) on the plug (32).

12. Install the cover (24) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (22) and spring washers (23) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m) 13. Install the O-ring (11) on the plug (10) and install the plug (10) on the cover (3). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

4. Insert the spring (29) into the plunger (28) and install the plunger (28) on the plug (32).

14. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install the plug (21) on the cover (24). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

5. Install the plug (32) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 181 to 211 N m (18.5 to 21.5 kgf m)

15. Install the O-rings (33) (2 used) on the casing (14).

6. Insert the filter (35) into the plug (5) and install the plug (5) on the spool (6). 7. Install the steel ball (7), spring (8) and orifice (9) on the spool (6). 8. Insert the spool (6) into the casing (14). IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (6) moves smoothly with pushing the spool. 9. Install the spring (26) on the casing (14). 10. Install O-rings (4) and (25) on the casing (14). 11. Install the cover (3) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (1) and spring washers (2) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m)

W2-7-33


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE REEVING WINCH 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13,14 15 16 17 18

19

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

W2CG-02-07-011

12345678-

Drum Spacer Spacer Ring Gear Carrier Assembly Spacer Pin (4 Used) Thrust Plate (8 Used)

910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Planetary Gear (4 Used) Needle Bearing (8 Used) Spring Pin (4 Used) Carrier Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Motor Retaining Ring

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Oil Seal Sleeve Retaining Ring Bearing O-Ring Thrust Plate Sun Gear

W2-7-34

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Coupling Spring Shaft O-Ring End Cover Plug (2 Used) Socket Bolt (12 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Reeving Winch 11. Take out the carrier (12) assembly.

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Reeving winch weight: Approx. 93 kg

1. Remove the plug (13) and drain off the gear oil. Gear oil: 0.5 L NOTE: Drain the gear oil in the clean container and check the metal powder due to wearing. 2. Lift the reeving winch with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the motor (15) downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the motor (15) mounting surface to stabilize the reduction gear.

12. Remove the spacer (6) from the Carrier (12). 13. Remove the spring pin (11) and pull out the pins (7) (4 used) from the carrier (12). 14. Remove the planetary gears (9) (4 used), thrust plates (8) (8 used) and needle bearings (10) (8 used) from the carrier (12). 15. Remove the sun gear (23), coupling (24) and thrust plate (22) from the motor (15). 16. Remove the retaining ring (19) from the motor (15) and remove the bearing (20) and sleeve (18). 17. Remove the oil seal (17) from the motor (15).

3. Remove the bolts (30) (12 used). Lift the drum (1) with the crane and remove it. : 10 mm 4. Remove the retaining ring (16) from the drum (1). 5. Remove the spacers (2) and (3) from the ring gear (4). 6. Remove the end cover (28) and ring gear (4) from the reduction gear. 7. Remove the O-ring (27) from the end cover (28). 8. Remove the O-ring (21) from the ring gear (4). 9. Remove the carrier (5) assembly from the shaft. 10. Remove the shaft (26) and spring (25) from the coupling (24).

W2-7-35


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE REEVING WINCH 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13,14 15 16 17 18

19

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

W2CG-02-07-011

12345678-

Drum Spacer Spacer Ring Gear Carrier Assembly Spacer Pin (4 Used) Thrust Plate (8 Used)

910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Planetary Gear (4 Used) Needle Bearing (8 Used) Spring Pin (4 Used) Carrier Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Motor Retaining Ring

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Oil Seal Sleeve Retaining Ring Bearing O-Ring Thrust Plate Sun Gear

W2-7-36

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Coupling Spring Shaft O-Ring End Cover Plug (2 Used) Socket Bolt (12 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Reeving Winch 12. Install the O-ring on the end cover (28) and install the end cover (28) on the ring gear (4).

1. Lift the motor (15) with the crane and place it on the workbench. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the motor (15).

13. Install the spacers (2) and (3) on the ring gear (4).

2. Install the oil seal (17) on the motor (15).

14. Install the retaining ring (16) on the drum (1).

3. Install the sleeve (18) and bearing (20) on the motor (15) and install the retaining ring (19).

15. Install the Install the drum (1) on the ring gear (4) with the bolts (30) (12 used). : 10 mm : 140 Nዘm (140. Kgfዘm)

4. Install the thrust plate (22), coupling (24) and sun gear (23) on the motor (15).

16. Add the gear oil through the plug (13) hole of the drum (1). Gear oil: 0.5 L

5. Install the planetary gears (9) (4 used), thrust plates (8) (8 used) and needle bearings (10) (8 used) on the carrier (12).

17. Install the O-ring (14) on the plug (13) and install it on the drum (1).

6. Install the pins (7) (4 used) on the carrier (12) and insert the spring pin (11). At this time, turn the slit portion of the spring pin (11) to the motor side. 7. Install the carrier (12) assembly on the sun gear (23) and motor (15). 8. Place the spacer (6) on the carrier (12). 9. Install the spring (25) and shaft (26) on the coupling (24). 10. Install the carrier (5) assembly on the shaft (26). 11. Install the O-ring (21) on the ring rear (4) and install the ring gear (4) on the carrier (12) assembly and carrier (5) assembly.

W2-7-37


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism DISASSEMBLE REEVING WINCH MOTOR

7

8

9

10

11,46

12

13

14

32

33

34

35 36

37

5 6 4 3 2 1

38 15

39

16

40

17

41

18

42

19 31 30

21

29

22

28

43

20

27

26

25

23

24

23

45

44

W2CG-02-07-012

12345678910 11 12 -

Cylinder Inner Ring Oil Seal Bearing Shoe Plate Collar Plate Auxiliary Spring Plunger (7 Used) Expander O-Ring Plug

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -

Expander Plug (2 Used) Disk Spring (4 Used) Teflon Ring (4 Used) Bushing (4 Used) Bearing Retaining Ring Piston (2 Used) Teflon Ring (2 Used) Balance Plate O-Ring (2 Used) Teflon Ring

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 -

Spring (8 Used) Housing O-Ring Teflon Ring Piston Plate (3 Used) Friction Plate (3 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover Plunger Spacer (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used)

W2-7-38

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

Spring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) Teflon Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Disassemble Reeving Winch Motor 12. Remove the oil seal (3) from the housing (26).

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Place the reeving winch motor on a workbench and remove the plug (14) from the casing (33). Drain off the hydraulic oil. : 6 mm 2. Loosen the socket bolts (32) (4 used) evenly and remove the cover (33) assembly from the housing (26). : 8 mm 3. Remove the springs (25) (8 used) from the piston (29). 4. Remove the piston (29) from the housing (26). 5. Remove the Teflon ring (24) and O-ring (23) from the piston (29).

13. Remove the O-ring (23), Teflon ring (46) and O-ring (11) from the cover (33). 14. Remove the retaining ring (19) from the shaft of the cover (33) and pull out the bearing (18) with using a press. 15. Remove the balance plate (22) from the shaft of the cover (33). 16. Remove the pistons (20) (2 used) and Teflon rings (21) (2 used) from the balance plate (22). 17. Remove the bushings (17) (4 used), Teflon rings (16) (4 used) and disk springs (15) (4 used) from the cover (33). 18. Remove the plugs (39) (2 used), pistons (38) (2 used), spacers (40) (2 used) and O-rings (36) (2 used) from the cover (33). : 41 mm

6. Remove the Teflon ring (28) and O-ring (27) from the housing (26).

19. Remove the springs (37) (2 used) and spacers (35) (2 used) from the cover (33).

7. Remove the Remove the cylinder (1) assembly from the housing.

20. Remove the O-rings (36) (2 used), spacers (40) (2 used) and pistons (38) (2 used) from the plug (39).

8. Remove the inner ring (2) from the cylinder (1) and pull out the bearing (4) with using a press.

21. Pull out the plunger (34) from the cover (33).

9. Remove the collar (6) from the cylinder (1). 10. Remove the shoe plate (5), plungers (9) (7 used), plate (7) and auxiliary spring (8) from the cylinder (1). 11. Remove the plates (30) (3 used) and friction plates (31) (3 used) from the housing (26).

22. Remove the plugs (41) (2 used) from the cover (33). : 12 mm 23. Remove the springs (42) (2 used) and pistons (44) (2 used) from cover (33). 24. Remove the O-rings (43) (2 used) from the plug (41).

W2-7-39


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism ASSEMBLE REEVING WINCH MOTOR

7

8

9

10

11,46

12

13

14

32

33

34

35 36

37

5 6 4 3 2 1

38 15

39

16

40

17

41

18

42

19 31 30

21

29

22

28

43

20

27

26

25

23

24

23

45

44

W2CG-02-07-012

12345678910 11 12 -

Cylinder Inner Ring Oil Seal Bearing Shoe Plate Collar Plate Auxiliary Spring Plunger (7 Used) Expander O-Ring Plug

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -

Expander Plug (2 Used) Disk Spring (4 Used) Teflon Ring (4 Used) Bushing (4 Used) Bearing Retaining Ring Piston (2 Used) Teflon Ring (2 Used) Balance Plate O-Ring (2 Used) Teflon Ring

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 -

Spring (8 Used) Housing O-Ring Teflon Ring Piston Plate (3 Used) Friction Plate (3 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover Plunger Spacer (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used)

W2-7-40

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

Spring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) Teflon Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism Assemble Reeving Winch Motor 1. Install the O-rings (43) (2 used) on the plugs (41) (2 used). 2. Install the pistons (44) (2 used) and springs (42) (2 used) on the cover (33).

13. Install the plungers (9) (7 used) on the plate (7) and insert the auxiliary spring (8) and plunger (9) into the cylinder (1). 14. Insert the shoe plate (5) into the cylinder (1). 15. Insert the collar (6) into the cylinder (1).

3. Install the plugs (41) (2 used) on the cover (33). : 12 mm 4. Insert the plunger (34) into the cover (33).

16. Insert the bearing (4) into the output shaft of the cylinder (1) with using a press and install the inner ring (2).

5. Install the spacers (35) (2 used) and springs (37) (2 used) on the cover (33).

17. Insert the cylinder (1) assembly into the housing (26).

6. Install the pistons (38) (2 used), spacers (40) (2 used) and O-rings (36) (2 used) on the plugs (39) (2 used) and install the plugs (39) (2 used) on the cover (33). : 41mm

18. Install the O-ring (23) and Teflon ring (28) on the housing (26).

7. Install the disk springs (15) (4 used), Teflon rings (16) (4 used) and bushings (17) (4 used) on the cover (33).

20. Install the springs (25) (8 used) on the piston (29).

8. Install the Teflon rings (21) (2 used) and pistons (20) (2 used) on the balance plate (22) and insert the balance plate (22) into the shaft of the cover (33). 9. Insert the bearing (18) into the shaft of the cover (33) with using a press and install the retaining ring (19).

19. Install the O-ring (23) and Teflon ring (24) on the piston (29) and install the piston (29) on the housing (26).

21. Install the cover (33) assembly on the housing (26) with the socket bolts (32) (4 used). : 8 mm : 50 N m (5.1 kgf m) 22. Install the plug (14) on the cover (33). : 6 mm

10. Install the O-ring (11), Teflon ring (46) and O-ring (23) on the cover (33). 11. Insert the oil seal (3) into the housing (26) with using a press. 12. Install the friction plates (31) (3 used) and plates (30) (3 used) on the housing (26).

W2-7-41


SWING MACHINERY / Hoisting Mechanism (Blank)

W2-7-42


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) REMOVE AND MECHANISM

INSTALL RAISING/LOWERING

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal 1. Lower the boom and remove the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section. (As for removal of the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 2. Remove the counterweight. (As for removal of the counterweight, refer to W2-2 in this section.) 2

1

3. Remove the boom raising/lowering wire rope. 4. Loosen the bolts (2) that installs the left house (1) on the raising/lowering motor and remove the house with lifting it with the crane. : 17 mm

M2CN-02-08-001

10

5

6

4

11

5. Remove the live mast. (As for removal of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

11 11 7

6. Remove the bolts (8), (9), (10) and (11). Remove the drum covers (3), (4), (5), bracket (6) and plate (7). : 19 mm : 17 mm

9 8

10

8 9 8 10 10

3 6 10 6 10

M2CN-02-08-002

W2-8-1


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 7. Remove all hoses from the raising/lowering motor (12). Attach a plug on the removed hoses. : 27 mm : 10 mm

12 13

8. Remove the bolt (13) and remove the bracket (14) of the drum speed sensor. : 19 mm CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: 1670 kg 9. Attach a wire rope on the raising/lowering mechanism and support the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane.

14

W2CG-02-08-003

10. Remove the nut (15) and remove the bolt (16). : 24 mm 11. Remove the bolts (17) and remove the lock plate (18). After removing the pin (19), lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and remove it. : 19 mm

17

19

16

15

18

Installation

17

CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: 1670 kg 1. Attach a wire rope on the raising/lowering mechanism. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and align the raising/lowering mechanism with the revolving frame. 2. Install the raising/lowering mechanism on the revolving frame. Install the lock plate (18) with the bolt (18). :19 mm :60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

18

19 19 17 18

16

15

19

17

18

15

16

15

16

M2CN-02-08-003

3. Adjust the raising/lowering mechanism with using the bolt (16) so that the flange of the drum can be aligned with the pawl of the drum lock and tighten it with the nut (15). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

4. Install the bracket (14) of the drum speed sensor on the raising/lowering mechanism with the bolt (13). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) 5. Install all hoses on the raising/lowering motor (12). : 27 mm :93 N m (9.5 kgf m) : 10 mm :90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

W2-8-2

12 13

14

W2CG-02-08-003


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 6. Install drum covers (3, 4, 5), bracket (6) and plate (7) to the revolving frame with bolts (8, 9, 10, 11). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m)

10

5

6

4

11

11 11 7 9

8

10

8 9

3 6

8

10

10

6

10

10

M2CN-02-08-002

7. Install the live mast. (As for installation of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

8. Wind the boom raising/lowering wire rope. 9. Lift the left house (1) with the crane. Install the right house with the bolt (2). : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m) 10. Install the counterweight. (Refer to W2-2 in this section.) 11. Install the base section. (As for installation of the base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 12. Install the extension and top section on the base section and install the pendant rope. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 13. Start the engine. After raising/lowering the boom, check raising/lowering mechanism for any oil leaks.

W2-8-3

2

1

M2CN-02-08-001


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) DISASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MECHANISM 19 18

14

1

2

7 5,6 3 4

8

9

13 12 11 10

20

16,17 15

24 23

25 26

22 21

27

32

37

28

33

29

34

38

30 31

35 36

39

40

41

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

83

51

82 81 80 79

78

77

72

76

71

75

70

74

54 55 56

73

69

53

52

57 68

67

66

65 64

63

62

61

60

59

58

M2CN-02-08-004

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 -

Motor Socket Bolt (4Used) O-Ring Sleeve Bolt (12 Used) Washer (12 Used) Bolt (32 Used) Washer (32 Used) Bracket Pedestal Bolt (30 Used) Washer (30 Used) Bolt (30 Used) Washer (30 Used) Lock Plate Bolt Washer Spacer O-Ring Carrier Spacer

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 -

Ring Gear Sun Gear Bearing Bolt (24 Used) Washer (24 Used) Bracket Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Retaining Ring Carrier Ring Gear Spacer Sun Gear Carrier Spacer Washer (16 Used) Bolt (16 Used) Bearing Sleeve (2 Used) Bracket Bearing

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 -

W2-8-4

Retainer Nipple Oil seal (2 Used) Bolt (4 Used) Washer(4 Used) Retainer Nipple Bolt (6 Used) Washer (6 Used) Drum Cover Retaining Ring (3 Used) Needle Bearing (6 Used) Retainer Planetary Gear (5 Used) Thrust Plate (3 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Planetary Gear (5 Used) Needle Bearing (15 Used) Spacer (5 Used) Thrust Plate (5 Used)

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 -

Spacer Pin (5 Used) Spacer Retaining Ring Retaining Ring (5 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Planetary Gear (5 Used) Needle Bearing (10 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Sleeve (5 Used) Plug Pin (5 Used) Nut Spline Shaft Case Bearing (2 Used) Retainer Oil seal Plug Shaft


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Disassemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism CAUTION: Motor (1) weight: Approx. 103 kg

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: Approx. 2000 kg

1. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench. Remove the plug (74) and drain off the gear oil. Gear oil : 17 L NOTE: Drain the gear oil in the clean container and check the metal powder due to wearing. 2. Loosen the bolts (46) (4 used) and remove the retainer (48). : 19mm 3. Remove the bolts (50) (6 used) and remove the retainer (43). : 19mm 4. Remove the oil seal (45) from the retainer (43). 5. Remove the sleeve (40) from the drum (52). 6. Lift the bracket (41) with the crane and remove it from the drum (52). 7. Remove the bearing (42) and oil seal (45) from the bracket (41). 8. Remove the sleeve (40) from the drum (52). 9. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the bracket (41) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (52) to stabilize the raising/lowering mechanism.

10. Remove the bolts (2) (4 used). Lift the motor (1) with the crane and remove it from the case (78). : 14 mm 11. Remove the bolts (58) (4 used). Lift the bracket (3) with the crane and remove it from the pedestal (9). : 14 mm 12. Remove the O-ring (3) from the case (78). 13. Put the mark on the head of the case (78) and bracket (9) and remove the bolts (7) (32 used). Lift the bracket (9) with the crane and remove it from the case (78). : 36 mm CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 1060 kg 14. Remove the bolts (13) (30 used). Lift the reduction gear with the crane and remove it from the drum (52). : 32 mm 15. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the raising/lowering motor (1) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the bracket (9) mounting surface of the case (78) to stabilize the reduction gear. 16. Remove the bolts (38) (20 used) and remove the cover (53). : 19 mm 17. Remove the retainer (56) from the cover (53). 18. Remove the bearing (39) from the cover (53). 19. Remove the shaft (83).

W2-8-5


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 19 18

20

16,17 15

11 10

24 23

27

25

32 33

22 21

5,6 4

29

34

30 31

35 36

81 80 79

78

77

54 55

72

76 75

57

70 73

69

68

67

66

65 64

63

62

61

60

59

58

M2CN-02-08-004

W2-8-6


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 20. Remove the carrier (35) assembly.

35. Remove the carrier (20) assembly.

21. Remove the retaining rings (54) (3 used) from the carrier (35).

36. Remove the retaining rings (69) (5 used) from the carrier (20).

22. Remove the planetary gears (57) (3 used), thrust plates (58) (3 used) and needle bearings (55) (6 used) from the carrier (35).

37. Remove the planetary gears (70) (5 used), sleeves (73) (5 used), pins (75) (5 used) and spacer (21) from the carrier (20).

23. Remove the spacer (36) from the carrier (35).

38. Remove the retaining rings (68) (5 used), and (72) (5used) from the planetary gears (70) (5 used). Remove the needle bearings (70) (10 used).

24. Remove the sun gear (34). 25. Remove the carrier (31) assembly.

39. Remove the spacer (18) and spline shaft (77) from the case (78).

26. Remove the retaining rings (59) (5 used) from the carrier (31). 27. Remove the planetary gears (60) (5 used) and thrust plates (63) (5 used), needle bearings (61) (15 used) and pins (65) (5 used) from the carrier (31). 28. Remove the spacer (33) and (62) from the carrier (31).

40. Remove the bolt (16) and remove the lock plate (15). : 13 mm 41. Remove the nut (76) from the case (78). 42. Remove the pedestal (10) and sleeve (4) from the case (78). 43. Remove the bearing (79) from the pedestal (10).

29. Remove the spacer (64) and (66) from the sun gear (23). 30. Remove the retaining rings (30) from the bracket (27).

44. Remove the bolts (5) (12 used) and remove the retainer (80). : 19 mm 45. Remove the oil seal (81) from the retainer (80).

31. Remove the sun gear (23) from the bracket (27). 46. Remove the bearing (79) from the pedestal (10). 32. Remove the retaining rings (67) from the sun gear (23). Remove the bearing (24) 33. Remove the bolts (29) (24 used) and remove the bracket (24). : 24 mm

47. Remove the bolts (11) (30 used) and remove the ring gear (22). : 36 mm 48. Remove the O-ring (19) from the pedestal (10).

34. Remove the bolts (25) (24 used) and remove the retaining ring (32). : 30 mm

W2-8-7


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) ASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MECHANISM 19 18

14

1

2

7 5,6 3 4

8

9

13 12 11 10

20

16,17 15

24 23

25 26

22 21

27

32

37

28

33

29

34

38

30 31

35 36

39

40

41

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

83

51

82 81 80 79

78

77

72

76

71

75

70

74

54 55 56

73

69

53

52

57 68

67

66

65 64

63

62

61

60

59

58

M2CN-02-08-004

22 - Motor 23 - Socket Bolt (4Used) 24 - O-Ring 25 - Sleeve 26 - Bolt (12 Used) 27 - Washer (12 Used) 28 - Bolt (32 Used) 29 - Washer (32 Used) 30 - Bracket 31 - Pedestal 32 - Bolt (30 Used) 33 - Washer (30 Used) 34 - Bolt (30 Used) 35 - Washer (30 Used) 36 - Lock Plate 37 - Bolt 38 - Washer 39 - Spacer 40 - O-Ring 41 - Carrier 42 - Spacer

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 -

Ring Gear Sun Gear Bearing Bolt (24 Used) Washer (24 Used) Bracket Washer (24 Used) Bolt (24 Used) Retaining Ring Carrier Ring Gear Spacer Sun Gear Carrier Spacer Washer (16 Used) Bolt (16 Used) Bearing Sleeve (2 Used) Bracket Bearing

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 -

W2-8-8

Retainer Nipple Oil seal (2 Used) Bolt (4 Used) Washer(4 Used) Retainer Nipple Bolt (6 Used) Washer (6 Used) Drum Cover Retaining Ring (3 Used) Needle Bearing (6 Used) Retainer Planetary Gear (5 Used) Thrust Plate (3 Used) Retaining Ring (5 Used) Planetary Gear (5 Used) Needle Bearing (15 Used) Spacer (5 Used) Thrust Plate (5 Used)

84 - Spacer 85 - Pin (5 Used) 86 - Spacer 87 - Retaining Ring 88 - Retaining Ring (5 Used) 89 - Retaining Ring (5 Used) 90 - Planetary Gear (5 Used) 91 - Needle Bearing (10 Used) 92 - Retaining Ring (5 Used) 93 - Sleeve (5 Used) 94 - Plug 95 - Pin (5 Used) 96 - Nut 97 - Spline Shaft 98 - Case 99 - Bearing (2 Used) 100 Retainer 101 Oil seal 102 Plug 103 Shaft


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Assemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism

17. Install the spline shaft (77) on the carrier (20) assembly.

1. Lift the case (78) with the crane and place it on a workbench. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the bracket (9) mounting surface of the case (78). 2. Install the sleeve (4) on the case (78). 3. Install the O-ring (19) on the pedestal (10). 4. Install the ring gear (12) on the pedestal (10) with the bolts (11) (30 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (12). : 36 mm : 1079 N m (105 kgf m) 5. Install the bearing (79) on the pedestal (10). 6. Install the oil seal (81) on the retainer (80). 7. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1398B) on the mating surface on the retainer (80) of the pedestal (10). 8. Install the retainer (80) on the pedestal (10) with the bolts (5) (12 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (6). : 19 mm : 68 N m (6.9 kgf m) 9. Install the pedestal (10) on the case (78).

18. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the ring gear (32) of the bracket (27). 19. Install the ring gear (32) on the bracket (27) with the bolts (25) (24 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (26). : 30 mm : 628 N m (64 kgf m) 20. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the bracket (27) of the ring gear (20). 21. Install the bracket (27) on the ring gear (20) with the bolts (29) (24 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (28). : 24 mm : 230 N m (23.5 kgf m) 22. Install the sun gear (23) on the carrier (20) assembly. 23. Install the bearing (24) on the sun gear (23) and install the retaining rings (30) and (67). 24. Install the spacer (66) on the sun gear (23). 25. Install the spacer (33), (62) (5 used) and thrust plates (63) (5 used) on the carrier (31) and install the planetary gears (60) (5 used) and needle bearing (61) (15 used).

10. Install the bearing (79) on the case (78). 11. Install the nut (76) on the case (78). 12. Install the lock plate (15) on the nut (76) with the bolt (16) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (17). : 13 mm : 20 N m (2.0 kgf m) 13. Install the spline shaft (77) and spacer (18) on the case (78).

26. Install the pins (65) (5 used) on the carrier (31) and install retaining rings (59) (5 used). 27. Install the carrier (31) assembly on the ring gear (32) and sun gear (23). 28. Install the spacer (64) and sun gear (34) on the carrier (31) assembly.

14. Install the needle bearings (71) (10 used), retaining rings (72) (5 used) and (68) (5 used) on the planetary gears (70) (5 used).

29. Install the spacer (36) on the carrier (35) and install the planetary gears (57) (3 used), thrust plates (58) (3 used) and needle bearings (55) (6 used).

15. Install the spacer (21), sleeves (73) (5 usd) and planetary gears (70) (5 used) on the carrier (20).

30. Install the retaining rings (54) (3 used) on the carrier (35).

16. Install the pins (75) (5 used) on the carrier (20) and insert the retaining rings (69) (5 used).

31. Install the carrier (35) assembly on the ring gear (32) and sun gear (34).

W2-8-9


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 32

14

37

13 38 7 1

2

8

35

9

3

39

40

41

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

83

51

82 53

52

78 56

M2CN-02-08-004

W2-8-10


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 32. Install the shaft (83) on the carrier (35) assembly. At this time, Make sure that the shaft (83) rotates with turning it by hands.

43. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench horizontally. 44. Install the sleeve (40) on the drum (52).

33. Install the bearing (39) on the cover (53). 45. Install the oil seal (45) and bearing (42) on the bracket (41).

34. Install the retainer (56) on the cover (53). 35. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the cover (53) of the ring gear (32).

46. Lift the bracket (41) with the crane and Install it on the drum (52). 47. Install the sleeve (40) on the drum (52).

36. Install the cover (53) on the ring gear (32) with the bolts (38) (16 used) with LOCTITE #242 applied and the washer (37). : 19 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

48. Install the oil seal (45) on the retainer (43). 49. Install the retainer (43) on the bracket (41) with the bolts (50) (6 used) and the washer (51). : 19mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m)

37. Lift the drum (52) with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the bracket (41) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (52) to stabilize the raising/lowering mechanism.

50. Install the retainer (48) on the end surface of the sleeve (40) with the bolts (46) (4 used) and the washer (47). : 19mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m)

CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 1060 kg

51. Remove the nipple (44) and apply grease through the nipple (49) until the grease (Shell Alvania EP2) comes out

38. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and install it on the drum (52) with the bolts (13) (30 used) with LOCTITE #262 applied and the washer (14). : 32 mm : 735 N m (75.0 kgf m) 39. Install the bracket (9) on the case (78) with the bolts (7) (32 used) with LOCTITE #262 applied and the washer (8). At this time, align the marking of the case (78) and bracket (9). : 36 mm : 935 N m (95.0 kgf m)

52. Remove the plug (82) (level port) from pedstal and apply the gear oil to the level port. Oil amount : 17 L 53. Install the plug (82) (level port). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (82).

40. Install the O-ring (3) on the case (78). 41. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the motor (1) of the case (78). CAUTION: Motor (1) weight: Approx. 103 kg 42. Lift the motor (1) with the crane and install it on the case (78) with the socket bolts (2) (4 used). : 14 mm : 235 N m (24.0 kgf m)

W2-8-11


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) DISASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MOTOR

35

18

36

29

28

34

33

23

22

24

25 26

37 27

30

39

50

51

2

37

4

40

6

46

3 33

5

34

41 53

7

44

1

54

19 21

31

33,34 9

52

45

15

9

8

8

14

13

32

20

49 16

17

48

47

12

11

38

10

42

43 M2CN-02-08-005

12345678910 11 12 13 14 -

Bolt (3 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover (2 Used) Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 -

Stopper Plug (6 Used) O-Ring (6 Used) O-Ring O-Ring (4 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 -

Shoe Plate Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (5 Used) Casing O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Pin Valve Cover Socket Bolt (7 Used) Cover

W2-8-12

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 -

Spring Washer (9 Used) Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling Plate (9 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Seat (2 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Steel Ball (2 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (8 Used) Piston Spring (16 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Disassemble Raising/Lowering Motor

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Raising/lowering motor weight: 103 kg

1. Place the raising/lowering motor on a workbench. Remove the plug (34) attached on the casing (32) and drain off the hydraulic oil. : 10 mm 2. Put the mating mark on the front casing (35), casing (32), valve cover (39) and cover (41). 3. Remove the socket bolts (31) (5 used) and socket bolt (40) (7 used). Remove the cover (41) from the valve cover (39). : 10mm

IMPORTANT: Since the valve plate (26) may be removed together, remove the valve cover (39) with care. Take care not to drop the valve plate (26). 10. Remove the socket bolts (43) (9 used) and spring washers (42) (9 used) and remove the valve cover (39) from the casing (32). : 10 mm 11. Remove the valve plate (26) and O-ring (37) from the valve cover (39). NOTE: Do not remove the needle bearing (27) unnecessarily. 12. Remove the rotor (25), plungers (22) (9 used), springs (24) (9 used), holder and plate (28) from the casing (32).

4. Remove the O-ring (6) from the cover (41).

13. Remove the socket bolts (8) (8 used) and remove the cover (9) (2 used) from the casing (32). : 10 mm

5. Remove the springs (54) (16 used) and piston (53) from the valve cover (39).

14. Pull out the stopper (10), (15), piston (12) and (13) from the casing (32).

6. Remove the O-ring (50) and (51) from the valve cover (39). 7. Remove the retaining ring (46), coupling (44) and retaining ring (46) from the output shaft (5). 8. Remove the plates (45) (9 used) and friction plates (52) (8 used) from the valve cover (39). 9. Remove the retaining ring (30) from the output shaft (5).

NOTE: Pull out the stopper (10) and (15) with using the screw (M6). 15. Remove the O-ring (11) and (14) from the stopper (10) and (15). 16. Remove the bolts (1) (3 used) and remove the front cover (2) from the front casing (35). : 17 mm 17. Remove the oil seal (3) and O-ring (4) from the front cover (2). 18. Remove the socket bolts (36) (14 used) and remove the front casing from the casing (32). : 10 mm

W2-8-13


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5)

35

18

29

6 5

7

19 21

32

M2CN-02-08-005

W2-8-14


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 19. Remove the O-rings (19) (4 used) from the casing (32) and remove the O-ring (18) from the front casing (35). 20. Pull out the output shaft (5) from the front casing (35). 21. Remove the retaining ring (7) from the output shaft (5) and pull out the bearing (6) with using a press. 22. Remove the swash plate (21) from the casing (32) and remove the shoe plate (29) from the swash plate (21).

W2-8-15


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) ASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MOTOR

35

18

36

29

28

34

33

23

22

24

25 26

37 27

30

39

50

51

2

37

4

40

6

46

3 33

5

34

41 53

7

44

1

54

19 21

31

33,34 9

52

45

15

9

8

8

14

13

32

20

49 16

17

48

47

12

11

38

10

42

43

M2CN-02-08-005

12345678910 11 12 13 14 -

Bolt (3 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (8 Used) Cover (2 Used) Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 -

Stopper Plug (6 Used) O-Ring (6 Used) O-Ring O-Ring (4 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 -

Shoe Plate Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (5 Used) Casing O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Pin Valve Cover Socket Bolt (7 Used) Cover

W2-8-16

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 -

Spring Washer (9 Used) Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling Plate (9 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Seat (2 Used) Stopper (2 Used) Steel Ball (2 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (8 Used) Piston Spring (16 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Assemble Raising/Lowering Motor 1. Install the shoe plate (29) on the swash plate (21) and install the swash plate (21) on the casing (32). NOTE: Turn the larger chamfered side of the shoe plate (29) to the swash plate (21) side.

10. Install the O-ring (14) on the stopper (15) and the O-ring (11) on the stopper (10). Install the stopper (15) and (10) on the casing (32). NOTE: Install the stopper (15) and (10) to the end surface of the casing (32).

2. Install the bearing (6) on the output shaft (5) with using a press.

11. Install the cover (9) (2 used) on the casing (32) with the socket bolts (8) (8 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m)

3. With lightly tapping the outer race of the bearing (6) with using the copper bar, install the output shaft (5) on the front casing (35).

12. Install the springs (24) (9 used) on the rotor (25) and install the holder (23).

4. Install the O-ring (18) on the front casing (35) and install the O-rings (19) (4 used) on the casing (32).

13. Install the plungers (22) (9 used) on the plate (28) and insert the plunger (22) in the rotor (25).

5. Install the front casing (35) with the output shaft (5) on the casing (32).

14. Install the rotor (25) assembly on the output shaft (5) with aligning the spline of the output shaft (5) with the spline of the rotor (25) and holder (23).

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the swash plate (21) moves smoothly.

15. Apply grease on the valve plate (26) install it on the valve cover (39) as mating with the pin (38). 16. Set up the casing (32) and place it on a workbench.

6. Tighten the socket bolts (36) (14 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) 7. Install the oil seal (3) on the front cover (2) with using a press and install the O-ring (4). 8. Install the front cover (2) on the front casing (35) with the bolts (1) (3 used). : 17 mm : 57 N m (5.8 kgf m) 9. Insert the piston (13) in the front casing (35) side of the casing (32) and insert the piston (12) in the valve cover (39) side.

17. Install the valve cover (39) on the casing (32) with the socket bolts (43) (9 used) and spring washers (42) (9 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) 18. Install the retaining ring (30) on the output shaft (5) and fix the needle bearing (27). 19. Install the retaining ring (46) on the output shaft (5).

W2-8-17


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5)

34

33

39

50

51 37 40 46 33

5

34

41 53 44 54

31 52

33,34

45

32 M2CN-02-08-005

W2-8-18


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 20. Installing the coupling (44) on the output shaft (5) and install the retaining ring (46). IMPORTANT: Align the notch of the plate (45) and friction plate (52). 21. Install plate (45) (9 used) and friction plate (52) (8 used) in order on the valve cover (39) and coupling (44). 22. Install the O-ring (50) and (51) on the valve cover (39) and install the piston (53). 23. Install the springs (54) (16 used) on the piston (53). 24. Install the O-ring (37) on the cover (41) and install the cover (41) on the valve cover (39) with the socket bolts (31) (5 used) and (40) (7 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) 25. Install the O-ring (33) on the plug (34) and install it on the casing (32). : 10 mm : 108 N m (11.0 kgf m)

W2-8-19


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) MAINTENANCE STANDARD Dial Gauge

1. Secure the plunger with the shoe attached in a vise. Install the dial gauge on the shoe. Move the shoe upward and downward and measure the clearance between the shoe and the spherical part of plunger. In case the measurement value is beyond the allowable limit, replace the plunger and shoe assembly.

Clearance

Guide

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0 to 0.1

0.3

Vise

Soft Liner

W309-04-05-002

Remedy: Replace the shoe and the plunger as an assembly.

2. Measure the plunger diameter at upper, middle, lower positions (2 places for each) with using a micrometer. Measure the diameter at the second position 90 raway from the first position. Measure the rotor bore inner diameter at positions A and B (2 places for each) with using a cylinder gauge.

W309-04-05-003

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0.039

0.078

Remedy: Replace the plunger or the rotor.

3. Measure the shoe thickness B with using a micrometer. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

8.8

8.6 W309-04-05-004

B W309-04-05-005

W2-8-20


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) 4. Measure the heights of H and h. Plate

C=H-h

Holder

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.2

31.6

H h

Remedy: Replace the holder and the plate as an assembly. W309-04-05-006

5. Measure the dimension A. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

3.1

3.6 A

Remedy: Adjust with the shims.

6. Measure the brake spring length. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

54

53.2

W309-04-05-007

Remedy: Replace the spring.

7. Measure the thickness of the plate and friction plate. (15 used) Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.4

31.7

Remedy: Replace the plate.

W2-8-21


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) DISASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42 10 13

37 39

12

38

11 25

35 3

34

36 22 23 19 21

20

18

24

27

33

26

32

14

31

28

30

5

M2CN-02-08-006

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-8-22

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Disassemble Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (4). : 8 mm 11. Remove the O-ring (33) from the plug (32).

1. Remove the solenoid valve (6) from the casing (4). : 32 mm 2. Remove the socket bolts (5) (4 used) and remove the casing (4) from the raising/lowering motor. : 6 mm

12. Remove the lever (42) from the sleeve (17). 13. Remove the spring seat (9), spring (7), spring seat (15), spool (16) and sleeve (17) from the casing (4). 14. Remove the O-ring (8) from the spring seat (9).

3. Remove the O-rings (28) and (30) from the casing (4). 4. Remove the orifice (31) from the casing (4). : 4 mm

15. Remove the plug (21) from the casing (4) and remove the spring (19) and lock pin (18). : 13 mm 16. Remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21).

5. Remove the socket bolts (37) (6 used) and remove the cover (38) from the casing (4). : 5 mm 6. Remove the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) from the casing.

17. Remove the spring seat (25), spring (27), spring seat (24), spool (23) and sleeve (22) from the casing (4). 18. Remove the O-ring (26) from the spring seat (25).

7. Remove the pin (35) and piston (34) from the cover (38). 8. Remove the piston (41) and sleeve (40) from the cover (38). 9. Remove the socket bolt (11) and remove the covers (10) (2 used) from the casing (4). : 5 mm IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the adjusting nut (13) and nut (12).

W2-8-23


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) ASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42 10 13

37 39

12

38

11 25

35 3

34

36 22 23 19 21

20

18

24

27

33

26

32

14

31

28

30

5

M2CN-02-08-006

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-8-24

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Assemble Regulator 1. Install the sleeve (22), spool (23), spring seat (24) and spring (27) on the casing (4).

10. Install the O-ring (8) on the spring seat (9) and install it on the casing (4).

2. Install the O-ring (26) on the spring seat (25) and install it on the casing (4).

11. Install the cover (10) on the casing with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

3. Install the cover (10) on the casing (4) with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m) 4. Install the lock pin (18) and spring (19) on the casing (4).

12. Install the piston (34) on the casing (4). 13. Install the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) on the casing (4). 14. Install the pin (35) on the cover (38).

5. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install it on the casing (4). : 13mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m)

15. Install the sleeve (40) and piston (41) on the cover (38).

6. Install the sleeve (17) and spool (16) on the casing (4).

16. Install the cover (38) on the casing with the bolts (37) (6 used). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

7. Install the lever (42) on the sleeve (17). 8. Install the O-ring (33) on the plug (32) and install it on the casing (4). : 8 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) 9. Install the spring seat (15) and spring (7) on the casing (4).

17. Install the orifice (31) on the casing (4) and install the O-rings (28) and (30). : 4 mm : 9 N m (0.9 kgf m) 18. Install the casing (4) on the raising/lowering motor with the socket bolts (5) (4 used). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0kgf m) 19. Install the solenoid valve (6) on the casing (4). : 32mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m)

W2-8-25


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) DISASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE

9

21

8

15 20

7 6 35

24

3

5 17

16

2

4

1

12

18

13 14

22 23 19

25 26 12 13

27 28

10 11

29 30 31 32

33 33

34

W2CG-02-07-008

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-8-26

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Disassemble Counterbalance Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Remove the O-rings (33) (2 used) from the casing (14). 2. Loosen the socket bolts (1) and (22) (4 used for each) and remove the covers (3) and (24) from the casing (14). : 10 mm

11. Remove the spring (29) and plunger (28) from the casing (14). NOTE: Do not remove the seat (27) except when replacing it. 12. Remove the relief valve (34) from the casing (14) and remove the O-ring and backup ring from the relief valve (34). : 50 mm

3. Remove the plug (21) from the cover (24) and remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21). : 6 mm 4. Remove the plug (10) from the cover (3) and remove the O-ring (11) from the plug (10). : 6 mm 5. Remove the springs (26) and the O-rings (4, 25) from the casing (14). 6. Remove the spool (6) assembly from the casing (14). 7. Remove the plug (5) from the spool (6) and remove the filter (35) from the plug (5). 8. Remove the orifice (9), spring (8) and steel ball (7) from the spool (6). 9. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (14). : 50 mm 10. Remove the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) from the plug (32).

W2-8-27


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) ASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE 22

23

24

25

26

9

8

7

14

6

13

12

35

5

4

3 11

20

10

21 1 2

27

28

32

29

31

34

30 15

18

17

16

19

33

M2CN-02-08-007

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-8-28

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) Assemble Counterbalance Valve 1. Install the O-ring and backup ring on the relief valve (34). 2. Install the relief valve (34) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 166 to 186 N m (17.0 to 19.0 kgf m) 3. Install the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) on the plug (32). 4. Insert the spring (29) into the plunger (28) and install the plunger (28) on the plug (32). 5. Install the plug (32) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 181 to 211 N m (18.5 to 21.5 kgf m) 6. Insert the filter (35) into the plug (5) and install the plug (5) on the spool (6).

12. Install the cover (24) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (22) and spring washers (23) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m) 13. Install the O-ring (11) on the plug (10) and install the plug (10) on the cover (3). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) 14. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install the plug (21) on the cover (24). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) 15. Install the O-rings (33) (2 used) on the casing (14).

7. Install the steel ball (7), spring (8) and orifice (9) on the spool (6). 8. Insert the spool (6) into the casing (14). IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (6) moves smoothly with pushing the spool. 9. Install the spring (26) on the casing (14). 10. Install the O-rings (4) and (25) on the casing (14). 11. Install the cover (3) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (1) and spring washers (2) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m)

W2-8-29


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (To Machine No. 5) (Blank)

W2-8-30


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) REMOVE AND MECHANISM

INSTALL RAISING/LOWERING

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal 1. Lower the boom and remove the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section. (As for removal of the pendant rope, extension, top section and base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 2. Remove the counterweight. (As for removal of the counterweight, refer to W2-2 in this section.)

2

1

3. Remove the boom raising/lowering wire rope. 4. Loosen the bolts (2) that installs the left house (1) on the raising/lowering motor and remove the house with lifting it with the crane. : 17 mm

M2CN-02-08-001

10

5

6

4

11

5. Remove the live mast. (As for removal of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

11 11 7

6. Remove the bolts (8), (9), (10) and (11). Remove the drum covers (3), (4), (5), bracket (6) and plate (7). : 19 mm : 17 mm

9 8

10

8 9 8 10 10

3 6 10 6 10

M2CN-02-08-008

W2-8-31


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 7. Remove all hoses from the raising/lowering motor (12). Attach a plug on the removed hoses. : 36 mm : 10 mm

12 13

8. Remove the bolt (13) and remove the bracket (14) of the drum speed sensor. : 19 mm CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: 1670 kg 9. Attach a wire rope on the raising/lowering mechanism and support the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane.

14

M2CN-02-08-009

10. Remove the nut (15) and remove the bolt (16). : 24 mm

11. Remove the bolt (17) and remove the lock plate (18). After removing the pin (19), lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and remove it.

17

19

16

15

Installation 18

CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: 1670 kg 1. Attach a wire rope on the raising/lowering mechanism. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and align the raising/lowering mechanism with the revolving frame.

17

18

19 19 17 18

2. Install the raising/lowering mechanism on the revolving frame with the pin (19). Install the lock plate (18) with the bolt (17). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) 3. Adjust the raising/lowering mechanism with using the bolt (16) so that the flange of the drum can be aligned with the pawl of the drum lock and tighten it with the nut (15). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

16

15

19

17

18

15

16

15

16

M2CN-02-08-010

12

4. Install the bracket (14) of the drum speed sensor on the raising/lowering mechanism with the bolt (13). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) 5. Install all hoses on the raising/lowering motor (12). : 36 mm :175 N m (18.0 kgf m) : 10 mm :90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

W2-8-32

13

14

M2CN-02-08-009


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

6. Install drum covers (3, 4, 5), bracket (6) and plate (7) to the revolving frame with bolts (8, 9, 10, 11). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m)

10

5

6

4

11

11 11 7 9

8

10

8 9

3 6

8

10

10

6

10

10

M2CN-02-08-008

7. Install the live mast. (As for installation of the live mast, refer to W2-3 in this section.)

8. Wind the boom raising/lowering wire rope. 9. Lift the left house (1) with the crane. Install the right house with the bolt (2). : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m) 10. Install the counterweight. (Refer to W2-2 in this section.) 11. Install the base section. (As for installation of the base section, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 12. Install the extension and top section on the base section and install the pendant rope. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 13. Start the engine. After raising/lowering the boom, check raising/lowering mechanism for any oil leaks.

W2-8-33

2

1

M2CN-02-08-001


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

DISASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MECHANISM 1

2

3

5

4

8

11

13 14

7

10

12

6

9

15

16

17

21

18

22

23

24

25

26 27

19

28

20

29

30 31 32 33 34 31 32

36 37 54 53 48 49 56

50

55

51

52

47

46

44 42 43 45

38 39 40 35

41

M2CN-02-08-011

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Motor Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) Plug Bolt (32 Used) Washer (32 Used) Bracket Pedestal Bolt (30 Used) Washer (30 Used) Drum Bolt (18 Used) Retainer Ring Geaᨮ Sun Gear

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Spacer Sun Gear Washer (20 Used) Bolt (20 Used) Spacer Shaft Cover Bearing Pin Sleeve (2 Used) Bracket Bearing Retainer Nipple Oil Seal

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -

Bolt (10 Used) Washer (10 Used) Retainer Nipple Drum Pin (3 Used) Carrier Thrust Plate (6 Used) Needle Bearing (3 Used) Planetary Gear (3 Used) Spring Pin (3 Used) Carrier Thrust Plate (8 Used) Pin (4 Used) Planetary Gear (4 Used)

W2-8-34

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 -

Spring Pin (4 Used) Pin (5 Used) Carrier Spring Pin (4 Used) Thrust Plate (8 Used) Pin (4 Used) Planetary Gear (4 Used) Bearing (2 Used) Floating Seal Plug Plug


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Disassemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism CAUTION: Motor᧤1᧥ weight: Approx. 180 kg

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Raising/lowering mechanism weight: Approx. 1670 kg

1. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench. Remove the plug (55) and drain off the gear oil. Gear oil : 34 L : 10 mm

10. Remove the bolts (2) (4 used). Lift the motor (1) with the crane and remove it from the pedestal (8). : 30 mm 11. Put the mark on the head of the pedestal (8) and bracket (7) and remove the bolts (5) (32 used). Lift the bracket (7) with the crane and remove it from the pedestal (8). : 36 mm CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 735 kg

NOTE: Drain the gear oil in the clean container and check the metal powder due to wearing. 2. Loosen the bolts (31) (4 used) and remove the retainer (33). : 19mm 3. Remove the bolts (31) (6 used) and remove the retainer (28). : 19mm 4. Remove the oil seal (30) from the retainer (28).

12. Remove the bolts (9) (30 used). Lift the reduction gear with the crane and remove it from the drum (35). : 32 mm 13. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the raising/lowering motor (1) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the bracket (7) mounting surface of the pedestal (8) to stabilize the reduction gear.

5. Remove the sleeve (25) from the drum (35). 6. Lift the bracket (26) with the crane and remove it from the drum (35). 7. Remove the bearing (27) and oil seal (30) from the bracket (26).

14. Remove the bolts (19) (20 used) and remove the cover (22). : 22 mm 15. Remove the pin (24) from the cover (22). 16. Remove the bearing (23) from the cover (22).

8. Remove the sleeve (25) from the drum (35). 17. Remove the shaft (21). 9. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the bracket (26) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (35) to stabilize the raising/lowering mechanism.

W2-8-35


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

8

11

13 14

15

17

16

12 20

36 37 54 53 48 49 50

51

52

47

46

44 42 43 45

38 39 40 41

M2CN-02-08-011

W2-8-36


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 18. Remove the carrier (37) assembly.

33. Remove the drum (11) from the pedestal (8).

19. Remove the spring pin (41) and remove the pins (36) (3 used) from the carrier (37).

34. Remove the bearing (53) from the drum (11).

20. Remove the planetary gears (40) (3 used), thrust plates (38) (6 used) and needle bearings (39) (3 used) from the carrier (37).

35. Remove the bearing (11) and floating seal (54) from the pedestal (8).

21. Remove the spacer (20) from the carrier (37). 22. Remove the sun gear (17). 23. Remove the carrier (42) assembly. 24. Remove the spring pin (46) and remove the pins (44) (4 used) from the carrier (42). 25. Remove the planetary gears (45) (4 used) and thrust plates (43) (8 used) from the carrier (42). 26. Remove the spacer (16) from the carrier (42). 27. Remove the sun gear (15). 28. Remove the pins (47) (5 used) and remove the inner gear (14) from the drum (11). 29. Remove the carrier (48) assembly. 30. Remove the spring pin (49) and remove the pins (51) (4 used) from the carrier (48). 31. Remove the planetary gears (52) (4 used) and thrust plates (50) (8 used) from the carrier (48). 32. Loosen the bolts (12) (18 used) and remove the retainer (13). : 12 mm

W2-8-37


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

ASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MECHANISM 1

2

3

5

4

8

11

13 14

7

10

12

6

9

15

16

17

21

18

22

23

24

25

26 27

19

28

20

29

30 31 32 33 34 31 32

36 37 54 53 48 49 56

50

55

51

52

47

46

44 42 43 45

38 39 40 35

41

M2CN-02-08-011

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Motor Bolt (4 Used) Washer (4 Used) Plug Bolt (32 Used) Washer (32 Used) Bracket Pedestal Bolt (30 Used) Washer (30 Used) Drum Bolt (18 Used) Retainer Ring Geaᨮ Sun Gear

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Spacer Sun Gear Washer (20 Used) Bolt (20 Used) Spacer Shaft Cover Bearing Pin Sleeve (2 Used) Bracket Bearing Retainer Nipple Oil Seal

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -

Bolt (10 Used) Washer (10 Used) Retainer Nipple Drum Pin (3 Used) Carrier Thrust Plate (6 Used) Needle Bearing (3 Used) Planetary Gear (3 Used) Spring Pin (3 Used) Carrier Thrust Plate (8 Used) Pin (4 Used) Planetary Gear (4 Used)

W2-8-38

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 -

Spring Pin (4 Used) Pin (5 Used) Carrier Spring Pin (4 Used) Thrust Plate (8 Used) Pin (4 Used) Planetary Gear (4 Used) Bearing (2 Used) Floating Seal Plug Plug


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Assemble Raising/Lowering Mechanism 1. Lift the pedestal (8) with the crane and place it on a workbench. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the bracket (7) mounting surface of the pedestal (8). 2. Install the bearing (53) and floating seal (54) with grease applied on the pedestal (8).

12. Install the pins (44) (4 used) on the carrier (42) and insert the spring pin (46). At this time, turn the slit portion of the spring pin (46) toward the cover (22) side. 13. Install the carrier (42) assembly on the inner gear (14) and sun gear (15). 14. Install the sun gear (17) on the carrier (42) assembly.

3. Install the drum (11) on the pedestal (8). 4. Install the bearing (53) on the drum (11). 5. Install the retainer (13) on the pedestal (8) with the bolts (12) (18 used) with LOCTITE #262 applied. : 12 mm : 169 N m (17.0 kgf m) 6. Install the planetary gears (52) (4 used) and thrust plates (50) (8 used) on the carrier (48). 7. Install the pins (51) (4 used) on the carrier (48) and insert the spring pin (49). At this time, turn the slit portion of the spring pin (49) toward the cover (22) side. 8. Install the carrier (48) assembly on the pedestal (8). 9. Install the inner gear (14) on the drum (11) and install the pins (47) (5 used). 10. Install the sun gear (15) on the carrier (48). 11. Install the spacer (16) on the carrier (42) and install the planetary gears (45) (4 used) and thrust plates (43) (8 used).

15. Install the spacer (20) on the carrier (37) and install the planetary gears (40) (3 used), thrust plates (38) (6 used) and needle bearings (39) (3 used). 16. Install the pins (36) (3 used) on the carrier (37) and insert the spring pin (41). At this time, turn the slit portion of the spring pin (41) toward the cover (22) side. 17. Install the carrier (37) assembly on the ring gear (14) and sun gear (17). 18. Install the shaft (21) on the carrier (37) assembly. At this time, Make sure that the shaft (21) rotates with turning it by hands. 19. Install the bearing (23) on the cover (22). 20. Install the pin (24) on the cover (22). 21. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the cover (22) of the drum (11). 22. Install the cover (22) on the drum (11) with the bolts (19) (20 used) with LOCTITE #262 applied and the washer (18). : 22 mm : 176.5 N m (18.0 kgf m)

W2-8-39


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

7 1

2

3

4

5

98 7

10

26 26 27

6

9

28

25

29

30 31 32 33 34 31 32

56

35

M2CN-02-08-011

W2-8-40


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 23. Lift the drum (35) with the crane and place it on a workbench with placing the bracket (26) mounting side downward. At this time, place the wooden block (200 mm square) under the drum (35) to stabilize the raising/lowering mechanism. CAUTION: Reduction gear weight: Approx. 735 kg 24. Lift the reduction gear with the crane and install it on the drum (35) with the bolts (9) (30 used) with the washer (10). : 32 mm : 735 N m (75.0 kgf m) 25. Install the bracket (7) on the pedestal (8) with the bolts (5) (32 used) with the washer (6) attached. At this time, align the marking of the pedestal (8) with the bracket (7). : 36 mm : 935 N m (95.0 kgf m) 26. Apply the liquid packing (ThreeBond #1389B) on the mating surface on the motor (1) of the pedestal (8). CAUTION: Motor (1) weight: Approx. 180 kg 27. Lift the motor (1) with the crane and install it on the pedestal (8) with the bolts (2) (4 used) and the washer (3). : 30 mm : 235 N m (24.0 kgf m)

28. Lift the raising/lowering mechanism with the crane and place it on a workbench horizontally. 29. Install the sleeve (25) on the drum (35). 30. Install the oil seal (30) and bearing (27) on the bracket (26). 31. Lift the bracket (26) with the crane and Install it on the drum (35). 32. Install the sleeve (25) on the drum (35). 33. Install the oil seal (30) on the retainer (28). 34. Install the retainer (28) on the bracket (26) with the bolts (31) (6 used) and the washer (32). : 19mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m) 35. Install the retainer (33) on the end surface of the sleeve (25) with the bolts (31) (4 used) and the washer (32). : 19mm : 88 N m (9.0 kgf m) 36. Remove the nipple (29) and apply grease through the nipple (34) until the grease (Shell Alvania EP2) comes out. 37. Remove the plug (4) (oil filler port) and plug (56) (level port) from the pedestal (8) and add the gear oil to the level port. Oil amount : 34 L 38. Install the plug (4) (oil filler port) and plug (56) (level port).

W2-8-41


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

DISASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MOTOR 14

13

30

19

12

10

11

9

36

37

8

38 39

43

50

40 48

56

49 15

53

16

51

18 17

52

1

54 55

4

5 44 3

42

7 29 6 2

33

45 34

20

28

27

32

31

22

21

23

24

35

25

41

26

47

46

M2CN-02-08-012

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Bolt (4 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring Stopper

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Cover O-Ring O-Ring (2 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate Shoe Plate Socket Bolt (12 Used) Casing

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -

O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring Pin Valve Cover Socket bolt Shim (1 Unit) O-Ring Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling Plate (8 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Casing

W2-8-42

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (7 Used) Piston Spring (16 Used) O-Ring Cover Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Disassemble raising/Lowering Motor

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. • The procedure starts on the premise that the regulator, counterbalance valve and solenoid valve have already been removed. CAUTION: Raising/lowering motor weight: 180 kg 1. Place the raising/lowering motor on a workbench and remove the plug (35) from the casing (30). Drain off the hydraulic oil. : 36 mm 2. Put the matching marks on the front casing (33), casing (30), valve cover (37), casing (45) and cover (54). 3. Loosen the socket bolts (29) (12 used) evenly and remove the cover (54) from the casing (45). : 10 mm 4. Remove the O-ring (53) from the cover (54). 5. Remove the springs (52) (16 used) and piston (51) from the casing (45). 6. Remove the casing (45) from the valve cover (37) and remove the O-rings (48) and (49) from the casing (45). 7. Remove the retaining ring (44), coupling (42) from the output shaft (5). 8. Remove the plates (45) (8 used), friction plates (50) (7 used), shim (39) and O-ring (40) from the valve cover (37).

IMPORTANT: When removing the valve cover (37), the valve plate (25) may be removed together. Do not fall off the valve plate (25). 9. Remove the socket bolts (38) and (41) (9 used) and remove the valve cover (37) from the casing (30). : 14 mm 10. Remove the valve plate (25) and O-ring (35) from the valve cover (37). NOTE: Do not remove the needle bearing (26) unnecessarily. 11. Remove the rotor (24), plungers (21) (9 used), springs (23) (9 used), holder (22) and plate (27) from the casing (30). 12. Remove the socket bolts (8) (4 used), (55) (4 used) and remove the covers (9) and (16) from the casing (30). : 10 mm : 12 mm 13. Pull out the stoppers (10), (15), pistons (12) and (13) from the casing (30). NOTE: Remove the stoppers (10) and (15) with using a screw (M6). 14. Remove the O-rings (11) and (14) from the stoppers (10) and (15). 15. Remove the bolts (1) (4 used) and remove the front cover (2) from the front casing (33). : 17 mm 16. Remove the oil seal (3) and O-ring (4) from the front cover (2). 17. Remove the socket bolts (34) (14 used) and remove the front casing (33) from the casing (30). : 10 mm

W2-8-43


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

30

18 17

5

7

6

33

20

28

M2CN-02-08-012

W2-8-44


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 18. Remove the O-rings (18) (2 used) from the casing (30) and O-ring (17) from the front casing (33) respectively. 19. Pull out the output shaft (5) from the front casing (33). 20. Remove the retaining ring (7) and from the output shaft (5) and remove the bearing (6) with using a press. 21. Remove the swash plate (20) from the casing (30) and remove the shoe plate (28) from the swash plate (20).

W2-8-45


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

ASSEMBLE RAISING/LOWERING MOTOR 14

13

30

19

12

10

11

9

36

37

8

38 39

43

50

40 48

56

49 15

53

16

51

18 17

52

1

54 55

4

5 44 3

42

7 29 6 2

33

45 34

20

28

27

32

31

22

21

23

24

35

25

41

26

47

46

M2CN-02-08-012

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

Bolt (4 Used) Front Cover Oil Seal O-Ring Output Shaft Bearing Retaining Ring Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover Stopper O-Ring Piston Piston O-Ring Stopper

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 -

Cover O-Ring O-Ring (2 Used) Pin Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Holder Spring (9 Used) Rotor Valve Plate Needle Bearing Plate Shoe Plate Socket Bolt (12 Used) Casing

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -

O-Ring (5 Used) Plug (5 Used) Front Casing Socket Bolt (14 Used) O-Ring Pin Valve Cover Socket bolt Shim (1 Unit) O-Ring Socket Bolt (9 Used) Coupling Plate (8 Used) Retaining Ring (2 Used) Casing

W2-8-46

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 -

Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Friction Plate (7 Used) Piston Spring (16 Used) O-Ring Cover Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used)


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Assemble Raising/Lowering Motor 1. Install the shoe plate (28) on the swash plate (20) and install the swash plate (20) on the casing (30).

10. Install the O-ring (14) on the stopper (15) and the o-ring (11) on the stopper (10) respectively. Install the stoppers (10) and (15) on the end of the casing (30).

NOTE: Turn the larger chamfered side of the shoe plate (28) to the swash plate (20) side.

NOTE: Install the stoppers (15) and (10) to the end surface of the casing (30).

2. Install the bearing (6) on the output shaft (5) with using a press and install the retaining ring (7).

11. Install the cover (9) on the casing (30) with the socket bolts (8) (4 used). : 12 mm : 160 N m (16.3 kgf m)

3. Tap the outer race of the bearing (6) with using a copper bar and install the output shaft (5) ton the front casing (33). 4. Install the O-ring (17) on the front casing (33) and O-rings (18) (4 used) on the casing (30) respectively. 5. Install the front casing (33) and output shaft (5) on the casing (30). IMPORTANT: Check that swash plate (20) moves smoothly.

12. Install the cover (16) on the casing (30) with the socket bolts (8) (4 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (9.9 kgf m) 13. Install the springs (23) (9 used) on the rotor (24) and install the holder (22). 14. Install the plungers (21) (9 used) on the plate (27) and insert the plunger (21) into the rotor (24). 15. Align the spline of the output shaft (5), rotor (24) and holder (22). Install the rotor (24) assembly on the output shaft (5).

6. Tighten the socket bolts (34) (14 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (9.9 kgf m) 7. Install the oil seal (3) on the front cover (2) with using a press and install the O-ring (4). 8. Install the front cover (2) on the front casing (33) and tighten the bolts (1) (4 used). : 17mm : 57 N m (5.8 kgf m) 9. Insert the piston (13) into the front casing (33) side of the casing (30) and the piston (12) into the valve cover (37) side.

16. Apply the grease on the valve plate (25). Align with the pin (36) and install the valve plate (26) on the valve cover (37). Install the O-ring (35) on the valve cover (37). 17. Place the casing (30) on the workbench vertically. 18. Install the valve cover (37) on the casing (30) with the socket bolts (38) and (41) (9 used). : 14 mm : 333 N m (33.9 kgf m)

W2-8-47


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 37

30

39

43

50

40 48

49 53 51

52

54

5 44 42

29

45

32

31

M2CN-02-08-012

W2-8-48


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

19. Install the retaining ring (44) on the output shaft (5). 20. Install the coupling (42) on the output shaft (5). IMPORTANT: Align the notches on the plate (43) and friction plate (50). Adjust with the shims (39) so that the dimension between the end of the valve cover (37) and the plate (43) is 3.1 mm. 21. Install the shim (39), plates (43) (8 used) and friction plates (50) (7 used) on the valve cover (37) and coupling (42). 22. Install the O-ring (40) on the valve cover (37). 23. Install the O-rings (48) and (49) on the casing (45) and install the piston (51). 24. Install the springs (52) (16 used) on the piston (51). 25. Install the O-ring (53) on the cover (54) and install the cover (54) on the casing (45) with the socket bolts (29) (12 used). : 10 mm : 98 N m (10.0 kgf m) 26. Install the O-ring (31) on the plug (32) and install the plug (32) on the casing (30). : 36 mm : 167 N m (17.0 kgf m)

W2-8-49


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

MAINTENANCE STANDARD Dial Gauge

1. Secure the plunger with the shoe attached in a vise. Install the dial gauge on the shoe. Move the shoe upward and downward and measure the clearance between the shoe and the spherical part of plunger. In case the measurement value is beyond the allowable limit, replace the plunger and shoe assembly.

Clearance

Guide

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0 to 0.1

0.3

Vise

Soft Liner

W309-04-05-002

Remedy: Replace the shoe and the plunger as an assembly.

2. Measure the plunger diameter at upper, middle, lower positions (2 places for each) with using a micrometer. Measure the diameter at the second position 90 raway from the first position. Measure the rotor bore inner diameter at positions A and B (2 places for each) with using a cylinder gauge.

W309-04-05-003

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

0.039

0.078

Remedy: Replace the plunger or the rotor.

3. Measure the shoe thickness B with using a micrometer. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

8.8

8.6 W309-04-05-004

B W309-04-05-005

W2-8-50


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) 4. Measure the heights of H and h. Plate

C=H-h

Holder

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.2

31.6

H h

Remedy: Replace the holder and the plate as an assembly. W309-04-05-006

5. Measure the dimension A. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

3.1

3.6 A

Remedy: Adjust with the shims.

6. Measure the brake spring length. Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

54

53.2

W309-04-05-007

Remedy: Replace the spring.

7. Measure the thickness of the plate and friction plate. (15 used) Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

32.4

31.7

Remedy: Replace the plate.

W2-8-51


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

DISASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42 10 13

37 39

12

38

11 25

35 3

34

36 22 23 19 21

20

18

24

27

33

26

32

14

31

28

30

5

M2CN-02-08-006

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-8-52

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Disassemble Regulator

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (4). : 8 mm 11. Remove the O-ring (33) from the plug (32).

1. Remove the solenoid valve (6) from the casing (4). : 32 mm 2. Remove the socket bolts (5) (4 used) and remove the casing (4) from the raising/lowering motor. : 6 mm

12. Remove the lever (42) from the sleeve (17). 13. Remove the spring seat (9), spring (7), spring seat (15), spool (16) and sleeve (17) from the casing (4). 14. Remove the O-ring (8) from the spring seat (9).

3. Remove the O-rings (28) and (30) from the casing (4). 4. Remove the orifice (31) from the casing (4). : 4 mm

15. Remove the plug (21) from the casing (4) and remove the spring (19) and lock pin (18). : 13 mm 16. Remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21).

5. Remove the socket bolts (37) (6 used) and remove the cover (38) from the casing (4). : 5 mm 6. Remove the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) from the casing.

17. Remove the spring seat (25), spring (27), spring seat (24), spool (23) and sleeve (22) from the casing (4). 18. Remove the O-ring (26) from the spring seat (25).

7. Remove the pin (35) and piston (34) from the cover (38). 8. Remove the piston (41) and sleeve (40) from the cover (38). 9. Remove the socket bolt (11) and remove the covers (10) (2 used) from the casing (4). : 5 mm IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the adjusting nut (13) and nut (12).

W2-8-53


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

ASSEMBLE REGULATOR 29

2

1

3

4

6

17

16 15 17

7

40

8

41

43

9

42 10 13

37 39

12

38

11 25

35 3

34

36 22 23 19 21

20

18

24

27

33

26

32

14

31

28

30

5

M2CN-02-08-006

12345678910 11 -

Plug (2 Used) O-ring (2 Used) Plug Casing Socket bolt (2 used) Spacer (2 Used) Solenoid Valve Spring O-ring Cover (2 Used) Socket bolt (4 Used)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 -

Nut (2 Used) Adjusting Screw (2 Used) Pin 6SULQJ VHDW Spool Sleeve Lock pin Spring O-ring Plug Sleeve

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 -

W2-8-54

Spool Spring seat Spring seat O-ring Spring O-ring O-ring O-ring Orifice Plug O-ring

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 -

3LVWRQ Pin O-ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover O-ring Sleeve Piston Lever Pin


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Assemble Regulator 1. Install the sleeve (22), spool (23), spring seat (24) and spring (27) on the casing (4).

10. Install the O-ring (8) on the spring seat (9) and install it on the casing (4).

2. Install the O-ring (26) on the spring seat (25) and install it on the casing (4).

11. Install the cover (10) on the casing with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

3. Install the cover (10) on the casing (4) with the socket bolt (11). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m) 4. Install the lock pin (18) and spring (19) on the casing (4).

12. Install the piston (34) on the casing (4). 13. Install the O-rings (29), (36) and (39) on the casing (4). 14. Install the pin (35) on the cover (38).

5. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install it on the casing (4). : 13mm : 29 N m (3.0 kgf m)

15. Install the sleeve (40) and piston (41) on the cover (38).

6. Install the sleeve (17) and spool (16) on the casing (4).

16. Install the cover (38) on the casing with the bolts (37) (6 used). : 5 mm : 12 N m (1.2 kgf m)

7. Install the lever (42) on the sleeve (17). 8. Install the O-ring (33) on the plug (32) and install it on the casing (4). : 8 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) 9. Install the spring seat (15) and spring (7) on the casing (4).

17. Install the orifice (31) on the casing (4) and install the O-rings (28) and (30). : 4 mm : 9 N m (0.9 kgf m) 18. Install the casing (4) on the raising/lowering motor with the socket bolts (5) (4 used). : 6 mm : 29 N m (3.0kgf m) 19. Install the solenoid valve (6) on the casing (4). : 32mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m)

W2-8-55


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

DISASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE

9

21

8

15 20

7 6 35

24

3

5 17

16

2

4

1

12

18

13 14

22 23 19

25 26 12 13

27 28

10 11

29 30 31 32

33 33

34

W2CG-02-07-008

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-8-56

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Disassemble Counterbalance Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Remove the O-rings (33) (2 used) from the casing (14). 2. Loosen the socket bolts (1) and (22) (4 used for each) and remove the covers (3) and (24) from the casing (14). : 10 mm

11. Remove the spring (29) and plunger (28) from the casing (14). NOTE: Do not remove the seat (27) except when replacing it. 12. Remove the relief valve (34) from the casing (14) and remove the O-ring and backup ring from the relief valve (34). : 50 mm

3. Remove the plug (21) from the cover (24) and remove the O-ring (20) from the plug (21). : 6 mm 4. Remove the plug (10) from the cover (3) and remove the O-ring (11) from the plug (10). : 6 mm 5. Remove the springs (26) and the O-rings (4, 25) from the casing (14). 6. Remove the spool (6) assembly from the casing (14). 7. Remove the plug (5) from the spool (6) and remove the filter (35) from the plug (5). 8. Remove the orifice (9), spring (8) and steel ball (7) from the spool (6). 9. Remove the plug (32) from the casing (14). : 50 mm 10. Remove the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) from the plug (32).

W2-8-57


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after)

ASSEMBLE COUNTERBALANCE VALVE 22

23

24

25

26

9

8

7

14

6

13

12

35

5

4

3 11

20

10

21 1 2

27

28

29

32 17

31

30

34

18

15 16

33 19

M2CN-02-08-013

123456789-

Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Plug Spool Steel Ball Spring Orifice

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -

Plug O-Ring Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Socket Bolt (6 Used) Spring Washer (6 Used) Plug O-Ring

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -

Air Bleed Valve O-Ring Plug Socket Bolt (4 Used) Spring Washer (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Spring Seat

W2-8-58

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -

Plunger Spring O-Ring Backup Ring Plug O-Ring (2 Used) Relief Valve Filter


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) Assemble Counterbalance Valve 1. Install the O-ring and backup ring on the relief valve (34). 2. Install the relief valve (34) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 166 to 186 N m (17.0 to 19.0 kgf m) 3. Install the O-ring (30) and backup ring (31) on the plug (32). 4. Insert the spring (29) into the plunger (28) and install the plunger (28) on the plug (32). 5. Install the plug (32) on the casing (14). : 50 mm : 181 to 211 N m (18.5 to 21.5 kgf m) 6. Insert the filter (35) into the plug (5) and install the plug (5) on the spool (6).

12. Install the cover (24) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (22) and spring washers (23) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m) 13. Install the O-ring (11) on the plug (10) and install the plug (10) on the cover (3). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) 14. Install the O-ring (20) on the plug (21) and install the plug (21) on the cover (24). : 6 mm : 34 to 38 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) 15. Install the O-rings (33) (2 used) on the casing (14).

7. Install the steel ball (7), spring (8) and orifice (9) on the spool (6). 8. Insert the spool (6) into the casing (14). IMPORTANT: Check if the spool (6) moves smoothly with pushing the spool. 9. Install the spring (26) on the casing (14). 10. Install the O-rings (4) and (25) on the casing (14). 11. Install the cover (3) on the casing (14) and tighten with the socket bolts (1) and spring washers (2) (4 used for each). : 10 mm : 88 to 108 N m (9.0 to 11.0 kgf m)

W2-8-59


SWING MACHINERY / Raising/Lowering Mechanism (From Machine No. 6 and after) (Blank)

W2-8-60


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL BOOM RAISING/LOWERING DRUMS AND TRAVEL REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2 1

2. Remove the bolts (1) (4 used) and remove the seat (2). : 13 mm

W24X-02-01-001

7 5

3. Remove the screws (7) (14 used) and socket bolts (9) (2 used). Remove the covers (4 to 6) from the right stand. : 4 mm

10

13 13

16

11 12

17

13 7

4. Remove the lever (10 to 12) assemblies, pressure sensors (23) (2 used) and the harness connector of the panel.

14 9

8 3

5. Remove the screws (7) (2 used) and bolts (8) (2 used). Remove the cover (3) from the right stand. : 10 mm 6. Remove the nuts (13) (2 used for each). Remove the lever (10 to 12) assemblies from the remote control valve (14). Remove the lever (16 to 18) assemblies from the remote control valve (15). : 19 mm

9

4 15 7

6

7

M2CN-02-09-001

W2-9-1


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 7. Remove the hoses (21) (10 used) from the elbows (19) and (20) attached on the remote control valve (14). : 22 mm

15

25

25

14

25

20

25

8. Remove the elbows (19) (8 used) and (20) (2 used) from the remote control valve (14). : 19 mm

26 21

9. Remove the hoses (24) (10 used) from the elbow (20) and adapter (22) attached on the remote control valve (15). : 22 mm

20 19

10. Remove the elbows (20) (3 used), adapters (22) (7 used) and pressure sensors (23) (2 used) from the remote control valve (15). : 19 mm : 24 mm 11. Remove the socket bolts (25) (14 used). Remove the remote control valves (14), (15) and plate (26) from the right stand. : 6 mm

20 22 23

21

24

M2CN-02-09-002

W2-9-2


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve Installation

1. Install the remote control valves (14), (15) and plate (26) on the right stand with the socket bolts (25) (14 used). : 6 mm : 20 N m (2 kgf m)

15

25

25

14

25

20

25

2. Install the elbows (20) (3 used), adapters (22) (7 used) and pressure sensors (23) (2 used) on the remote control valve (15). : 19 mm : 34.3 to 38.3 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) : 24 mm : 34.3 to 38.3 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

26

3. Install the hoses (24) (10 used) on the elbow (20) and adapter (22) attached on the remote control valve (15). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4 kgf m)

20

4. Install the elbows (19) (8 used) and (20) (2 used) on the remote control valve (14). : 19 mm : 34.3 to 38.3 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

24

21

20 19

22 23

21

M2CN-02-09-002

5. Install the hoses (21) (10 used) on the elbows (19) and (20) attached on the remote control valve (14) attached. : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m)

W2-9-3


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 6. Install the lever (10 to 12) assemblies on the remote control valve (14). Install the lever (16) and (17) assemblies on the remote control valve (15) and tighten the nuts (13) (2 used for each). : 19 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

7 5

10

13 13

16

11 12

17

13 7

7. Install the cover (3) on the right stand with the screws (7) (2 used) and bolts (8) (2 used). : 10 mm : 3.3 to4.2 N m (0.3 to 0.4 kgf m)

14 8

9

3 9

8. Connect the lever (10 to 12) assemblies, pressure sensors (23) (2 used) and the harness connector of the panel.

4 15

9. Install the covers (4) to (6) on the right stand with the screws (7) (14 used) and bolts (9) (2 used). : 4 mm

7

6

7

M2CN-02-09-001

2

10. Install the seat (2) with the bolts (1) (4 used). : 13 mm : 10 N m (1.0 kgf m)

1

W24X-02-01-001

W2-9-4


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL SWING REMOTE CONTROL VALVE CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

2

Removal 1

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 2. Remove the bolts (1) (4 used) and remove the seat (2). : 13 mm

W24X-02-01-001

3. Remove the screws (9) (14 used) and socket bolts (10) (2 used) and remove the covers (4) to (6) from the left stand. : 4 mm

6

4. Remove the harness connector of the panel in the left stand.

9

8

3

9

13

11

7

9

12 4 9

5. Remove the screws (9) (6 used) and bolts (8) (2 used) and remove the cover (3) and panel (7) from the left stand. : 10 mm

9

6. Remove the nut (11) and remove the lever (13) assembly from the remote control valve (12). : 19 mm

10

9

5

W24X-02-09-003

W2-9-5


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 7. Remove the hoses (16) (4 used) from the elbow (14) and adapters (15) attached on the remote control valve (12). : 22 mm

18 14 12

8. Remove the elbows (14) (2 used), adapters (15) (2 used) and plug (17) from the remote control valve (12). : 6 mm : 19 mm

14

17

9. Remove the socket bolts (18) (2 used) and remove the remote control valve (12) from the left stand. : 6 mm

16

15 16

W24X-02-09-004

W2-9-6


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve Installation 18 14

1. Install the remote control valve (12) on the left stand with the socket bolts (18) (2 used). : 6 mm : 20 N m (2 kgf m)

12 14

17

2. Install the elbows (14) (2 used), adapters (15) (2 used) and plug (17) on the remote control valve (12). : 6 mm : 34.3 to 38.3 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m) : 19 mm : 34.3 to 38.3 N m (3.5 to 3.9 kgf m)

16

15 16

3. Install the hoses (16) (4 used) on the elbow (14) and adapter (15) attached on the remote control valve (12). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) 4. Install the lever part of the lever (13) assembly on the remote control valve (12) through the panel (7) and tighten the nut (11). : 19 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

W24X-02-09-004

6

8

3

9

13

11

7

9

12 4 9

9

9

5. Install the cover (3) and panel (7) on the left stand with the screws (9) (6 used) and bolts (8) (2 used). : 10 mm : 3.3 to 4.2 N m (0.3 to 0.4 kgf m)

9 10

6. Connect the harness connector of the panel in the left stand. 5

7. Install the covers (4) to (6) on the left stand with the screws (9) (14 used) and socket bolts (10) (2 used) : 4 mm

W24X-02-09-003

2 1

8. Install the seat (2) with the bolts (1) (4 used). : 13 mm : 10 N m (1.0 kgf m)

W24X-02-01-001

W2-9-7


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve DISASSEMBLE REMOTE CONTROL VALVE 38 36 37 35 8

33ᇬ49

7 6 5

31 31

1

9 3

4

1 2

2

44 30ᇬ48 44 29 11 12 32 13 25

9

34

14 17 16 4

4

3

5

6

7

8

18

19 39

26

10 22 45 15 21

18

20 24 27 28 15 46

47

41 40 43 42

23

W25N-02-09-004

W2-9-8


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve

12345678910 11 12 13 -

Steel Ball Holder O-Ring Washer Detent Plug Spring Lock Nut Adjusting Nut Bushing Spring Pin Plug O-Ring Washer

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 -

Spring Seat Bolt Spring Spring Nut Spool Plug O-Ring Casing O-Ring Plate O-Ring

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -

W2-9-9

Casing Socket Bolt Bushing Seal Cover Socket Bolt Push Rod Disk Camshaft Setscrew Socket Bolt Lever

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 -

Boot Casing Seat Steel Ball Plug O-Ring Setscrew Plug Plate Socket bolt Cover Disk


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve Disassemble Remote Control Valve

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. • As the structure of the remote control valve is same as for the front drum, rear drum, boom raising/lowering drum, travel and slewing, the remote control valve for the rear drum is explained here. As the spring seat (14), springs (16), (17), spool (19), cover (30) and disk (33) are different respectively, indicate each remote control valve not to confuse the disassembled parts. • As the parts are made precisely, handle them carefully. • Clean the outer surface before disassembling.

38

1. Remove the lower end of the boot (38) from the covers (30) and (48) upward.

48 26ᇬ25

2. Loosen the nut (18) and remove the bolt (15). Separate the remote control valve into one unit. : 13 mm

15ᇬ18 30

3. Remove the O-ring (25) from the casings (26) and (39).

39ᇬ25

W25N-02-09-005

31

30

4. Remove the socket bolt (31). Separate the cover (30) assembly from the casing (39) assembly. : 5 mm

39

W25N-02-09-006

W2-9-10


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve CAUTION: The plug (11) may fly out due to the spring (17) force.

5. Pull out the plug (11) from the casing (39) and remove the push rod (32) from the plug (11).

32 11 39

W25N-02-09-007

19 17

6. Pull out the spool (19) assembly and spring (17) from the casing (39).

39

IMPORTANT: Put the matching mark for the hole position on the spool (19) assembly, spring (17) and casing (39).

W25N-02-09-008

39 23

7. Remove the socket bolt (27) and remove the plate (24). : 6 mm

24 28

8. Remove the O-ring (23) and bushing (28) from the casing (39). 27

W25N-02-09-009

W2-9-11


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 9. Place the spool (19) assembly on the workbench vertically. Push the spring seat (14) downward and push out the washers (13) (2 used) with using a screwdriver.

13 14

19

W324-02-09-011

10. Remove the spring seat (14), spring (16) and washer (4) from the spool (19).

14

IMPORTANT: Handle the parts as an assembly each port. The washer (4) is used when adjusting the spring (16) for the setting of secondary pressure and the thickness is different according to the spool (19) assembly.

4

16

19

W333-02-09-001

29

11. Remove the O-ring (12) and seal (29) from the plug (11).

11

IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the inner surface of the plug (11).

12

W324-02-09-013

30

12. Remove the detent plug (5) assembly from the cover (30). : 24 mm

1

NOTE: Slowly remove the detent plug (5) assembly so that the steel ball (1), holder (2) and spring (6) does not fly out.

2

4

3

5 6 7 8

W324-02-09-014

W2-9-12


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 13. Remove the socket bolt (36) and remove the lever (37) from the disk (33). : 6 mm

36 37

33

W324-02-09-015

14. Remove the setscrew (35) from the disk (33). : 4 mm

35

15. Attach a round bar on the end of the camshaft (34). Tap and remove the camshaft (34) with using a hammer. Remove the disk (33).

33

34

W324-02-09-016

16. Remove the plug (42) from the plate (24) and remove the steel ball (41) and seat (40). : 10 mm

24 41 40 43 42

17. Remove the O-ring (43) from the plug (42).

W25N-02-09-010

W2-9-13


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve ASSEMBLE REMOTE CONTROL VALVE 49

48

47

46

38 37 36 35 34 31 33

1

2

4

3

5

7

8

6 9

44

11 10 12

32

13

30

14

29

45

4

16 15 17 18 19 20 21 23

28

42 43

27

41

40

24 22

25

39

26

W25N-02-09-011

W2-9-14


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 12345678910 11 12 13 -

Steel Ball Holder O-Ring Washer Detent Plug Spring Lock Nut Adjusting Nut Bushing Spring Pin Plug O-Ring Washer

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 -

Spring Seat Bolt Spring Spring Nut Spool Plug O-Ring Casing O-Ring Plate O-Ring

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -

Casing Socket Bolt Bushing Seal Cover Socket Bolt Push Rod Disk Camshaft Setscrew Socket Bolt Lever

W2-9-15

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 -

Boot Casing Seat Steel Ball Plug O-Ring Setscrew Plug Plate Socket Bolt Cover Disk


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve Assemble Remote Control Valve

1. Install the steel ball (41) and seat (40) on the plate (24).

24 41 40

2. Install the O-ring (43) on the plug (42) and install the plug (42) on the plate (24). : 10 mm : 24.5 to 29.4 N m (2.5 to 3.0 kgf m)

43 42

W25N-02-09-010

3. Install the bushing (28) and O-ring (23) on the casing (39). Tighten the plate (24) with the socket bolt (27). : 6 mm : 27.4 to 31.4 N m (2.8 to 3.2 kgf m)

39 23 24 28

27

W25N-02-09-009

14

4. Install the washer (4), spring (16) and spring seat (14) on the spool (19) in order.

16 4 19

W333-02-09-001

13

5. Place the spool (19) on the workbench vertically. Push the spring seat (14) upward and install the washers (13) (2 used) on the spring seat (14).

14

19

W324-02-09-011

W2-9-16


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 6. Install the washer (13) with the sharp edge side with turning upward so that the washer (13) can mesh with the head of spool (19).

19

13

Sharp Edge Side

W324-02-09-018

7. Insert the spring (17) and spool (19) assembly into the casing (39).

19 17

IMPORTANT: When inserting the spool (19) assembly, do not attach the lower end of the spool on the corner of the casing (39) strongly.

39

W25N-02-09-008

29

8. Install the seal (29) and O-ring (12) on the plug (11).

11

NOTE: Slightly apply the grease before installing the seal (29).

12

W324-02-09-013

11

9. Apply the hydraulic oil on the surface of the push rod (32) and insert the push rod (32) into the plug (11).

32

W324-02-09-019

W2-9-17


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 10. Install the push rod (32) assembly on the casing (39).

32

39

W25N-02-09-007

11. Install the disk (33) on the cover (30) and insert the camshaft (34).

33

30

34

W324-02-09-020

35 33

12. Apply LOCTITE #241 on the setscrew (35). Tighten the setscrew (35) to the disk (33). : 4 mm : 15.7 to 17.7 N m (1.6 to 1.8 kgf m) NOTE: Check if the end of the setscrew (35) is inserted into the groove of the camshaft (34).

W324-02-09-021

36

13. Install the lever (37) on the disk (33) and tighten with the socket bolt (36). : 6 mm : 27.4 to 31.4 N m (2.8 to 3.2 kgf m)

37 33

W324-02-09-015

W2-9-18


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve 14. Apply much grease on the holder (2). Secure and insert the steel ball (1) into the detent plug (5).

30 1

15. Install the O-ring (3) on the detent plug (5). Tighten the detent plug (5) to the cover (30). : 24 mm : 38.3 to 44.1 N m (3.9 to 4.5 kgf m)

2

4

3

5 6 7 8

16. Insert the washer (4) and spring (6) into the detent plug (5). Install the lock nut (7) and adjusting nut (8). : 24 mm : 38.3 to 44.1 N m (3.9 to 4.5 kgf m)

W324-02-09-014

17. Install the cover (30) assembly on the casing (39) and tighten with the socket bolt (31). : 5 mm : 10.8 to 12.8 N m (1.1 to 1.3 kgf m)

31

30 39

18. Install the boot (38) on the covers (30) and (48).

W25N-02-09-012

19. Install the O-ring (25) on the casing (39) of the remote control valve for rear drum and casing (26) of the remote control valve for front drum. Place the remote control valve assembly (3 unit) on the flat workbench. Align the spring pin (10) with the pin hole. Install the bolts (15) (2 used) and tighten with the nut (18). : 13 mm : 15.7 to 17.7 N m (1.6 to 1.8 kgf m)

38

30 48 26ᇬ25 15ᇬ18 22 39ᇬ25

W25N-02-09-005

W2-9-19


SWING MACHINERY / Remote Control Valve (Blank)

W2-9-20


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL SOLENOID VALVE BLOCK

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

2. Remove each harness of the solenoid valve from the connector.

3. Remove all hoses from the solenoid valve block (1) and remove the adapter and elbow. : 19, 22, 27 mm

4. Remove the bolts (2) (2 used) and remove the solenoid valve block (1). : 13 mm

2

Installation

1

1. Install the solenoid valve block (1) with the bolts (2) (2 used). : 13 mm : 30 N m (3.1 kgf m) 2. Install the adapter and elbow on the solenoid valve block (1). : 19 mm : 27 to 33 N m (2.8 to 3.4 kgf m) : 27 mm : 86 to 105 N m (8.7 to 10.7 kgf m)

3. Install all hoses. : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m)

M2CN-02-10-001

4. Connect each harness of the solenoid valve to the connector.

W2-10-1


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve DISASSEMBLE SOLENOID VALVE BLOCK

13 11

12 10 9 5

1

6

3 2

17 18 19

4

20 16

14

15

7

8

W2CG-02-10-002

12345-

Body Plug O-Ring Plug Sleeve

678910 -

O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring Nut Adjusting Screw

11 12 13 14 15 -

Solenoid Valve Nut Adjusting Screw Sleeve Spool

W2-10-2

16 17 18 19 20 -

Spring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve Disassemble Solenoid Valve Block

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

7. Remove the O-ring (17) from the solenoid valve (11). 8. Remove the O-rings (18), (19) and (20) from the sleeve (14).

1. Remove the plug (2) from the body (1). : 5 mm

9. Remove the sleeve (14) from the solenoid valve (11).

2. Remove the O-ring (3) from the plug (2). 3. Remove the plugs (4) (3 used) from the body (1). : 4 mm

10. Remove the spool (15) and spring (16) from the sleeve (14).

IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the sleeve (5) assembly (reducing valve pilot portion). As the reducing set pressure changes, do not loosen the nut (9). In case the reducing valve pilot portion has something wrong, replace the reducing valve pilot portion with the sleeve (5) assembly. 4. Remove the sleeve (5) from the body (1). : 22 mm 5. Remove the O-rings (6), (7) and (8) from the sleeve (5). IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the solenoid valve (11) assembly (selecting valve pilot portion). As the selecting set pressure changes, do not loosen the nut (12). In case the selecting valve pilot portion has something wrong, replace the selecting valve pilot portion with the solenoid valve (11) assembly. 6. Remove the solenoid valves (11) (5 used) from the body (1). : 32 mm

W2-10-3


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve ASSEMBLE SOLENOID VALVE BLOCK

13 11

12 10 9 5

1

6

3 2

17 18 19

4

20 16

14

15

7

8

W2CG-02-10-002

12345

Body Plug O-Ring Plug Sleeve

678910

O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring Nut Adjusting Screw

11 12 13 14 15

Solenoid Valve Nut Adjusting Screw Sleeve Spool

W2-10-4

16 17 18 19 20

Spring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve Assemble Solenoid Valve Block 1. Apply the grease on the O-rings (18), (19) and (20) and install the O-rings on the sleeve (14). 2. Install the spool (15) and spring (16) on the sleeve (14) and install the solenoid valve (11). 3. Apply the grease on the O-ring (17) and install the O-ring (17) on the solenoid valve (11). IMPORTANT: As the selecting set pressure changes, do not loosen the nut (12). 4. Install the solenoid valves (11) (5 used) on the body (1). : 32 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) 5. Apply the grease on the O-ring (6), (7) and (8) and install the O-rings on the sleeve (5). IMPORTANT: As the reducing set pressure changes, do not loosen the nut (9). 6. Install the sleeve (5) on the body (1). : 22 mm : 44 N m (4.5 kgf m) 7. Install the plugs (4) (3 used) on the body (1). : 4 mm : 8.8 N m (0.9 kgf m) 8. Apply the grease on the O-ring (3) and install the O-ring (3) on the plug (2). 9. Install the plug (2) on the body (1). : 6 mm : 36 N m (3.67 kgf m)

W2-10-5


SWING MACHINERY / Solenoid Valve (Blank)

W2-10-6


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL FLIP CYLINDER

CAUTION: Remove and install the cylinder on the level, solid ground. Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Retract the cylinder (1) fully.

1

7

4

2. Remove the hose (2) (4 used) from the cylinder (1). : 22 mm

6

5

5

6

2

4

7 1

3. Remove the bolt (4), washer (5), lock plate (6) and pin (7) from the lever (3). : 24 mm

2 10

9

8

2 12

CAUTION: Cylinder (1) weight: 87 kg

2 12

4. Remove the bolt (8), washer (9), plate (10), spacer (11) and pin (12). Remove the cylinder (1) with lifting it with the crane. : 24 mm

9 11

11 10

8

3

M2CN-02-11-001

W2-11-1


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Installation

CAUTION: Cylinder (1) weight: 87 kg

1

7

4

1. Lift the cylinder (1) with the crane and install it on the revolving frame with the pin (12), spacer (11), plate (10), washer (9) and bolt (8). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

6

5

5

6

2

4

7 1

2 10

2. Install the cylinder (1) on the lever (3) with the pin (7), lock plate (6), washer (5) and bolt (4). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

9

8

2 12 2 12

3. Install the hose (2) (4 used) on the cylinder (1). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m)

9 11

11 10

8

3

M2CN-02-11-001

W2-11-2


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W2-11-3


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE FLIP CYLINDER 16 15 22 14 13

11 19 21 20 18 17 10 9 8 5 4 7 6 3 2

12

1

M2CN-02-11-002

123456-

Bushing Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Backup Ring

78910 11 12 -

Packing Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring Cylinder Tube Piston Rod

13 14 15 16 17 -

W2-11-4

Valve Valve Valve Cover %ROW O-Ring

18 19 20 21 22 -

Piston Seal Wear Ring Piston Setscrew Bushing


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Flip Cylinder

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the retaining ring (2), dust seal (3), packing (7), backup ring (6) and bushing (8) from the inside of the cylinder head (4). 11. Remove the O-rings (5), (10) and backup ring (9) from the outside of the cylinder head (4).

CAUTION: Cylinder weight: 87 kg 1. Lift the cylinder with the crane and secure it horizontally. Drain off the hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 2. Remove the bolts (16) (4 used) and remove the valve cover (15), valves (14) and (13) from the cylinder tube (11). : 5 mm

12. Remove the bushing (1) from the piston rod (12). 13. Remove the bushing (22) from the cylinder tube (11).

3. Remove the cylinder head (4) assembly from the cylinder tube (11). CAUTION: Pull out the piston rod (12) straightly not to damage the sliding surface. 4. Pull out the piston rod (12) from the cylinder tube (11). 5. Secure the piston rod (12) horizontally and remove the setscrew (21) from the piston (20). : 8 mm 6. Remove the piston (20) assembly from the piston rod (12). 7. Remove the wear ring (19) and piston seal (18) from the outside of the piston (20). 8. Remove the O-ring (17) from the piston rod (12). 9. Pull out the cylinder head (4) assembly from the piston rod (12).

W2-11-5


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE FLIP CYLINDER

16 15 14 22

21

20

19

18 17

12

13

11

10

9

7

6

5

4 2

8

1

3

M2CN-02-11-003

123456-

Bushing Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Backup Ring

78910 11 12 -

Packing Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring Cylinder Tube Piston Rod

13 14 15 16 17 -

W2-11-6

Valve Valve Valve Cover %ROW O-Ring

18 19 20 21 22 -

Piston Seal Wear Ring Piston Setscrew Bushing


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Assemble Flip Cylinder 1. Install the bushing (22) on the cylinder tube (11).

10. Clamp the cylinder tube (11) with a vise. Support one side with the rest and secure the cylinder tube (11).

2. Install the bushing (1) on the piston rod (12). 3. Install the dust seal (3), retaining ring (2), bushing (8), packing (7) and backup ring (6) on the inside of the cylinder head (4) in order.

IMPORTANT: Insert the piston rod (12) straightly with aligning with the center of the cylinder tube (11) not to damage the rings.

NOTE: Apply ThreeBond #1102 on the outer surface of the dust seal (3) and apply the grease (Thickness: 0.2 or less) (Shin-Nisseki PowerKnock WB2 or equivalent) on the inside and between the spaces of the packing (7) and dust seal (3).

11. Insert the piston rod (12) assembly into the cylinder tube (11). 12. Tighten the cylinder head (4) to the cylinder tube (11). : 1062 to 1298 N m (108.0 to 132.0 kgf m)

4. Install the backup ring (9), O-ring (10) and (5) on the outside of the cylinder head (4) in order.

13. Install the valves (13), (14) and valve cover (15) on the cylinder tube (11) and install the bolt (16) (4 used). : 5 mm : 9.72 to 11.88 N m (0.99 to1.21 kgf m)

5. Install the piston seal (18) and wear ring (19) on the outside of the piston (20) in order. 6. Install the cylinder head (4) assembly on the piston rod (12).

NOTE: Enclose anticorrosive oil and knuckle oil #110 with I ml at the extend side and 4 ml at retract side.

7. Install the O-ring (17) on the piston rod (12). 8. Secure the piston rod (12) assembly vertically and install the piston (20) assembly on the piston rod (12). : 1674 to 2046 N m (171 to 209 kgf m) 9. Apply LOCTITE #242 on the setscrew (21) and install the setscrew (21) on the piston (20). Lock the setscrew (21) (2 places) with a punch. : 8 mm : 33.57 to 41.03 N m (3.42 to4.18 kgf m)

W2-11-7


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W2-11-8


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL COUNTERWEIGHT CYLINDER

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Retract the base counterweight assembly. (As for the removal of the base counterweight assembly, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) 2. Disassemble the counterweight. (As for the counterweight disassembling, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) CAUTION: Weight removal/installation device weight: 4340 kg

2

3. Attach the wire rope on the weight removal/installation device and support the weight removal/installation device with the crane.

2

1

4. Draw the lever (1) of the base counterweight. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

1

2

2

5. Pull out the lock pin (3) from the pin (2) that secures the weight removal/installation device and base counterweight. 3

6. Pull out the pin. Lift the weight removal/installation device with the crane and remove it.

3 1

1 M2CN-02-11-004

W2-11-9


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder

CAUTION: Counterweight cylinder assembly weight: 1540 kg 7. Attach the wire rope on the top of the counterweight cylinder (4) and support the counterweight cylinder assembly with the crane.

7

7

7

4

7

6

8. Pull out the bolt (6) from the pin (5) that secures the counterweight cylinder (4).

5

6

7

7

7

7

9. Remove the pin and remove the counterweight cylinder assembly with the crane. : 17 mm

4

10. Remove the hoses (8) and (9) from the counterweight cylinder (4). : 22 mm

5

11. Remove the lock pin (11) from the pin (10) of the plate that secures the counterweight cylinder (4). 12. Remove the pin (10). After removing the bracket (12), remove the counterweight cylinder (4) from the bracket (13).

M2CN-02-11-005

4 8 9

Installation 1. Install the counterweight cylinder (4) on the bracket (13) and lock the bracket (12) with the pin (10).

10 10

2. Install the lock pin (11) on the pin (10) to lock the plate (12). 3. Install the hoses (8) and (9) on the counterweight cylinder (4). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m)

11 11 12

12 13

M2CN-02-11-006

W2-11-10


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder

CAUTION: Counterweight cylinder assembly weight: 1540 kg 4. Lift the counterweight assembly with the crane and install it on the weight removal/installation device.

7

7 7

4

7

6

5. Lock the counterweight cylinder (4) on the weight removal/installation device with the pin (5).

5

6

7

7

7

7

6. Install the bolt (6) on the pin (5) that locks the counterweight cylinder (4). : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m)

4

5

CAUTION: Weight removal/installation device weight: 16140 kg

M2CN-02-11-005

7. Lift the weight removal/installation device with the crane and install it on the base counterweight. 8. Lock the weight removal/installation device on the base counterweight with the pin (2). 9. Install the lock pin (3) on the pin (2) that locks the weight removal/installation device. 2

10. Push in the lever (1) of the base counterweight. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual.)

2

1

1

2

3

3 1

2

1 M2CN-02-11-004

W2-11-11


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE COUNTERWEIGHT CYLINDER

21 22 23

15

19 20 16 17

18 13 12 11 10 5 9 8 7 6 4

1 3 2 14

M2CN-02-11-007

123456-

Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Bushing Dust Seal Cylinder Head Bushing

78910 11 12 -

Backup Ring Packing Packing Bushing O-Ring Backup Ring

13 14 15 16 17 18 -

O-Ring Piston Rod Cylinder Tube Piston O-Ring Piston Seal

W2-11-12

19 20 21 22 23

Wear Ring Setscrew Bolt Manifold Valve


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Counterweight Cylinder

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the dust seal (4), bushing (6) packing (8), backup ring (7), packing (9) and bushing (10) from the inside of the cylinder head (5). 11. Remove the O-rings (11), (13) and backup ring (12) from the outside of the cylinder head (5).

CAUTION: Cylinder weight: 323 kg 1. Lift the cylinder with the crane and secure it horizontally. Drain off the hydraulic oil from the cylinder.

12. Remove the retaining rings (1), (2) and bushing (3) from the piston rod (14).

2. Remove the bolts (21) (4 used) and remove the manifold (22), valve (23) from the cylinder tube (15). : 5 mm 3. Remove the cylinder head (5) assembly from the cylinder tube (15). CAUTION: Pull out the piston rod (14) straightly not to damage the sliding surface. 4. Pull out the piston rod (14) from the cylinder tube (15). 5. Secure the piston rod (14) horizontally and remove the setscrew (20) from the piston (16). : 8 mm 6. Remove the piston (16) assembly from the piston rod (14). 7. Remove the wear ring (19) and piston seal (18) from the outside of the piston (16). 8. Remove the O-ring (17) from the piston rod (14). 9. Pull out the cylinder head (5) assembly from the piston rod (14).

W2-11-13


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE COUNTERWEIGHT CYLINDER

18 19

16

22

21

23

11 15

14

13

12

8

3

5

20

4

17

10

9

7

1

6

2

M2CN-02-11-008

123456-

Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Bushing Dust Seal Cylinder Head Bushing

78910 11 12 -

Backup Ring Packing Packing Bushing O-Ring Backup Ring

13 14 15 16 17 18 -

O-Ring Piston Rod Cylinder Tube Piston O-Ring Piston Seal

W2-11-14

19 20 21 22 23

Wear Ring Setscrew %ROW Manifold Valve


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Assemble Counterweight Cylinder 1. Install the bushing (3) and retaining rings (1) and (2) on the piston rod (14). 2. Install the dust seal (4), bushings (6), (10), packing (8), backup ring (7) and packing (9) on the inside of the cylinder head (5) in order. NOTE: Apply ThreeBond #1102 on the outer surface of the dust seal (4) and apply the grease (Thickness: 0.2 or less) (Shin-Nisseki PowerKnock WB2 or equivalent) on the inside and between the spaces of the packing (9) and dust seal (4).

IMPORTANT: Insert the piston rod (14) straightly with aligning with the center of the cylinder tube (15) not to damage the rings. 10. Insert the piston rod (14) assembly into the cylinder tube (15). 11. Tighten the cylinder head (5) to the cylinder tube (15). : 1323 to 1617 N m (135.0 to 165.0 kgf m) 12. Install the valve (23) and manifold (22) on the

3. Install the backup ring (12), O-rings (13) and (11) on the outside of the cylinder head (5) in order.

cylinder tube (15) and install the bolts (21) (4 used). : 5 mm : 9.72 to 11.88 N m (0.99 to 1.21 kgf m)

4. Install the piston seal (18) and wear ring (19) on the outside of the piston (16) in order. 5. Install the cylinder head (5) assembly on the piston rod (14).

NOTE: Enclose anticorrosive oil and knuckle oil #110 with I ml at the extend side and 26 ml at retract side.

6. Install the O-ring (17) on the piston rod (14). 7. Secure the piston rod (14) assembly vertically and install the piston (16) assembly on the piston rod (14). : 3528 to 4312 N m (360 to 440 kgf m) 8. Apply LOCTITE #242 on the setscrew (20) and install the setscrew (20) on the piston (16). Lock the setscrew (20) (2 places) with a punch. : 8 mm : 33.57 to 41.03 N m (3.42 to 4.18 kgf m) 9. Clamp the cylinder tube (15) with a vise. Support one side with the rest and secure the cylinder tube (15) horizontally.

W2-11-15


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W2-11-16


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL BOOM FOOT CYLINDER CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Remove the hoses (2) (4 used) from the boom foot cylinder (1). Attach the plug on the hoses removed. : 19 mm 2. Turn the rod of the boom foot cylinder (1) and remove the rod from the boom foot pin. : 21 mm

3. Remove the bolt (3) (8 used) of the boom foot cylinder (1) and remove the boom foot cylinder (1) from the bracket of the boom foot pin. : 24 mm

3

4

Installation 1

1. Install the boom foot cylinder (1) on the bracket of the boom foot pin with the bolt (3) (8 used) and washer (4). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m) 2. Turn the rod of the boom foot cylinder (1) and install the rod on the boom foot pin. : 21 mm

3

1

W2-11-17

2

4 2

3. Install the hoses (2) (4 used) on the boom foot cylinder (1). : 19 mm : 29.5 N m (3.0 kgf m)

2

2

M2CN-02-11-009


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE BOOM FOOT CYLINDER

2

4 5 6 3 8 7

10 12 9 11 13

1

W2CG-02-11-017

1234-

Cylinder Tube Piston Rod Cylinder Head Dust Seal

5 - Bushing 6 - Packing 7 - O-Ring

8 - O-Ring 9 - Piston 10 - Piston Seal

W2-11-18

11 - Wear Ring 12 - O-Ring 13 - Nylon Nut


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Boom Foot Cylinder

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Lift the cylinder with the crane and secure it horizontally. Drain off the hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 2. Remove the cylinder head (3) assembly from the cylinder tube (1).

CAUTION: Pull out the piston rod (2) straightly not to damage the sliding surface. 3. Pull out the piston rod (2) from the cylinder tube (1). 4. Secure the piston rod (2) horizontally and remove the nylon nut (13) from the piston rod (2). : 27 mm 5. Remove the piston (9) assembly from the piston rod (2). 6. Remove the O-ring (12) from the inside of the piston (9). 7. Remove the wear ring (11) and piston seal (10) from the outside of the piston (9). 8. Pull out the cylinder head (3) assembly from the piston rod (2). 9. Remove the dust seal (4), bushing (5) and packing (6) from the inside of the cylinder head (3). 10. Remove the O-rings (8) and (7) from the outside of the cylinder head (3).

W2-11-19


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE BOOM FOOT CYLINDER

4

3

8

5

6

7

1

2 9

12

10

11

13

M2CN-02-11-010

1234-

Cylinder Tube Piston Rod Cylinder Head Dust Seal

5 - Bushing 6 - Packing 7 - O-Ring

8 - O-Ring 9 - Piston 10 - Piston Seal

W2-11-20

11 - Wear Ring 12 - O-Ring 13 - Nylon Nut


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder Assemble Boom Foot Cylinder 1. Install the dust seal (4), bushing (5) and packing (6) on the inside of the cylinder head (3) in order. 2. Install the O-rings (7) and (8) on the outside of the cylinder head (3) in order. 3. Install the piston seal (10) and wear ring (11) on the outside of the piston (9) in order. 4. Install the O-ring (12) on the inside of the piston (9). 5. Install the cylinder head (3) assembly on the piston rod (2). 6. Secure the piston rod (2) assembly vertically and install the piston (9) assembly on the piston rod (2) with using a special tool. 7. Install the nylon nut (13) on the piston rod (2). : 27 mm : 274.5 to 335.5 N m (29.0 to 35.0 kgf m) 8. Clamp the cylinder tube (1) with a vise. Support one side with the rest and secure the cylinder tube (1) horizontally. IMPORTANT: Insert the piston rod (2) straightly with aligning with the center of the cylinder tube (1) not to damage the rings.

9. Insert the piston rod (2) assembly into the cylinder tube (1). 10. Tighten the cylinder head (3) to the cylinder tube (1). : 351 to 429 N m (36.0 to 44.0 kgf m)

W2-11-21


SWING MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W2-11-22


SECTION 3

LOWER MACHINERY CONTENTS Group 1 Swing Ring

Group 5 Carrier and Track Rollers

Remove and Install Swing Ring ............... W3-1-1 Disassemble Swing Ring ....................... W3-1-4 Assemble Swing Ring ............................ W3-1-6

Remove and Install Carrier Roller (Front and Rear) .................................. W3-5-1 Disassemble Carrier Roller (Front and Rear) .................................. W3-5-4

Group 2 Travel Mechanism

Assemble Carrier Roller

Remove and Install Travel Mechanism .. W3-2-1

(Front and Rear) .................................. W3-5-6 Maintenance Standard ............................. W3-5-8

Disassemble Travel Mechanism (Reduction Gear) ................................. W3-2-4

Remove and Install Carrier Roller (Center)................................................ W3-5-9

Assemble Travel Mechanism (Reduction Gear) ............................... W3-2-12

Disassemble Carrier Roller (Center) ...... W3-5-12 Assemble Carrier Roller (Center)........... W3-5-14

Group 3 Rotating Joint

Maintenance Standard ........................... W3-5-16

Remove and Install Rotating Joint ........... W3-3-1

Remove and Install Track Roller ............ W3-5-17

Disassemble Rotating Joint ..................... W3-3-4

Disassemble Track Roller ...................... W3-5-22

Assemble Rotating Joint .......................... W3-3-6

Assemble Track Roller ........................... W3-5-24

Maintenance Standard............................. W3-3-8

Maintenance Standard ........................... W3-5-26 Remove and Install Track Roller ............ W3-5-27

Group 4 Take-Up Tumbler

Disassemble Track Roller ...................... W3-5-32

Remove and Install Take-Up Tumbler ...... W3-4-1

Assemble Track Roller ........................... W3-5-34

Disassemble Take-Up Tumbler .............. W3-4-2

Maintenance Standard ........................... W3-5-36

Assemble Take-Up Tumbler..................... W3-4-4 Maintenance Standard............................. W3-4-6

2CNW-3-1


Group 6 Track Shoe Remove and Install Track Shoe ............... W3-6-1 Maintenance Standard............................. W3-6-4

Group 7 Cylinder Remove and Install Side Frame Connecting Cylinder ............................ W3-7-1 Disassemble Side Frame Connecting Cylinder ............................................... W3-7-4 Assemble Side Frame Connecting Cylinder ............................................... W3-7-6 Remove and Install Jack-Up Cylinder...... W3-7-9 Disassemble Jack-Up Cylinder.............. W3-7-14 Assemble Jack-Up Cylinder................... W3-7-16 Remove and Install Track Shoe Tension Cylinder ................................ W3-7-19 Disassemble Track Shoe Tension Cylinder ............................................. W3-7-20 Assemble Track Shoe Tension Cylinder ............................................. W3-7-22

Group 8 Control Valve Remove and Install 6-Unit Control Valve .................................................. W3-8-1 Disassemble 6-Unit Control Valve ........... W3-8-2 Assemble 6-Unit Control Valve ................ W3-8-4

2CNW-3-2


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring REMOVE AND INSTALL SWING RING

Before removing/installing the swing ring, the swing upper structure must be removed and/or installed first. For removal and installation of the swing upper structure, refer to the section “Remove and Install Revolving Frame”. In this section, the procedure starts at the status with the swing upper structure removed.

3

2

4

1

Removal

2

1. Remove the elbows (2) (4 used), clamps (3) (4 used), hoses (4) (4 used) and block (5) from the outer race (1).

4

NOTE: Remove the bolt (6) and remove the blocks (5) (2 used). : 17mm : 30mm

6

2

2

3 5

4

5

2 6

4

3

M2CN-03-01-001

2. Put a matching mark on the inner race (7) and lower frame (8).

7

Matching Mark

8

M2CN-03-01-002

9

3. Remove the inner race mounting bolts (9) (68 used). : 50 mm

M2CN-03-01-003

W3-1-1


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring CAUTION: Swing ring weight: Approx. 1500 kg

4. Attach the sling tools on the outer race (1) and lift it.

1

M2CN-03-01-004

W3-1-2


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring Installation

Clean the mounting surfaces of the lower frame and slewing ring. Apply ThreeBond #1102.

CAUTION: Swing ring weight: Approx. 1500 kg

Matching Mark

9 7

1. Lift the swing ring with the crane and align the matching mark on the lower frame (8) with the inner race (7).

8

NOTE: If the matching marks do not align, the position of the soft zone of the inner race (7) will be dislocated. 2. Tighten the inner race mounting bolts (9) (68 used). : 50 mm : 1640 to 1770 Nᨿm (167 to 181 kgfᨿm)

M2CN-03-01-005

3. Install the elbows (2) (4 used), clamps (3) (4 used), hoses (4) (4 used) and blocks (5) (2 used).

3

2

4

1

NOTE: Install the block (5) with the bolt (6). : 17mm : 34 to 37 Nᨿm (3.5 to 3.8 kgfᨿm) : 30mm : 288 to 312 Nᨿm (29.4 to 31.8 kgfᨿm)

2

2

2

4

3

6 5

4

5

2 6

4

3

M2CN-03-01-001

W3-1-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring DISASSEMBLE SWING RING

2

8

6

2

3

1

4

7

5

6

M2CN-03-01-006

1-

Pin

3-

Inner Race

5-

Outer Race

7-

Support (89 Used)

2-

Seal

4-

Ball (89 Used)

6-

Seal

8-

Plug

W3-1-4


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring Disassemble Swing Ring

Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1

2. Drive out the pin (1) from under the plug (8). 8

NOTE: After installing the pin (1), grind the punch portion.

W25N-03-01-007

2. Remove the plug (8).

NOTE: Screw the bolt at the pulling-out screw (M10) portion of the plug (8). Pull or pull out the plug with tapping the bolt from the inside.

8

W25N-03-01-008

CAUTION: Swing ring 1500kg

weight:

Approx. 5

3. Slightly lift the outer race (5) of the turntable bearing horizontally and remove the seal (2) and (6).

2

4

3 A

6

W25N-03-01-009

4. Remove the ball (4) and support (7) from the plug as rotating the inner race (3). Use a stick-shaped magnet (A) when removing the ball (4). Take out the support (7) with the wire (B) bent as hanging. B

7

W105-03-01-010

W3-1-5


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring ASSEMBLE SWING RING

1

2

3

8

2

4

7

5

6

W25N-03-01-006

12-

Pin Seal

34-

Inner Race Ball (105 Used)

56-

Outer Race Seal

W3-1-6

78-

Support (105 Used) Plug


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring Assemble Swing Ring

CAUTION: Swing ring 1500kg

weight:

Approx.

1. Before assembling the inner race and the outer race of the swing ring, completely remove the oil from the groove that the seals (2) and (6) are inserted. Apply ThreeBond #1735 and install the seals (2) and (6).

2 4

IMPORTANT: Grease the ball (4) and support (7).

6

W25N-03-01-011

2. Install the balls (4) (89 used) and supports (7) (89 used) and from the plug side in order.

7

W25N-03-01-012

3. Drive the plug (8) into the outer race (5) and drive in the pin (1).Calk the pin (1) head with the punch. Fully apply grease (Albania EP2 or equivalent) on the turntable bearing.

5

1

8

W25N-03-01-007

W3-1-7


LOWER MACHINERY / Swing Ring (Blank)

W3-1-8


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism REMOVE AND MECHANISM

INSTALL

TRAVEL

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

The procedure starts on the premise that the crawler shoe has already been removed. As for the removal and installation of crawler shoe, refer to W3-6-1.

IMPORTANT: After shutting down the engine, remove and install the quick coupling. When the engine is not shutdown, the quick coupling can not be inserted or the O-ring in the quick coupling may be damaged due to the remaining pressure in the circuit. Before connecting the coupling, remove the dusts and clean the quick coupling. The quick coupling may be damaged if the quick coupling is hit. Handle the quick coupling carefully.

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. Disconnect the quick couplings (4 places in one side, 8 places in total) of the travel hydraulic hose.

1

2. Remove all pipings and covers. : 19 mm, 36 mm NOTE: Cap the removed pipings.

3

W3-2-1

2

M2CN-03-02-001


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism CAUTION: Travel mechanism weight: Approx. 2025 kg 3. Lift the travel mechanism (4) with the crane. Remove the bolts (5) (30 used) and remove the travel mechanism (4) from the side frame (7). : 24 mm

4

8 10 9

CAUTION: Drive tumbler weight: Approx. 312 kg 4. Lift the drive tumbler (8) with the crane. Remove the socket bolts (9) (34 used) and remove the drive tumbler (8) from the travel mechanism (4). : 19 mm

7

6

Installation

5

M2CN-03-02-002

CAUTION: Drive tumbler weight: Approx. 312 kg

1. Lift the drive tumbler (8) with the crane and install it on the travel mechanism (4) with the socket bolts (9) (34 used) and washers (10) (34 used). : 19 mm

CAUTION: Travel mechanism weight: Approx. 2025kg

2. Lift the travel mechanism (4) with the crane and install it on the side frame (7) with the bolts (5) (30 used) and washers (6) (30 used). : 24 mm

3. Install all the pipings. : 19 mm : 29.5 N m (3.0 kgf m) : 36 mm : 175 N m (18.0 kgf m) : 10 mm : 90 N m (9.2 kgf m)

1

4. Install the cover with the socket bolt (2) and washer (3). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.5 kgf m)

3

W3-2-2

2

M2CN-03-02-001


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism IMPORTANT: After shutting down the engine, remove and install the quick coupling. When the engine is not shutdown, the quick coupling can not be inserted or the O-ring in the quick coupling may be damaged due to the remaining pressure in the circuit. Before connecting the coupling, remove the dusts and clean the quick coupling. The quick coupling may be damaged if the quick coupling is hit. Handle the quick coupling carefully. 5. Connect the travel hydraulic hose to the pipings of the travel motor side with using the quick couplings (4 places in one side, 8 places in total). IMPORTANT: After installing the travel motor, fill the hydraulic oil in the travel motor. After installing the travel motor or travel mechanism, perform the break-in operation to prevent the travel motor from initial seizing. Check for any oil leaks.

W3-2-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism DISASSEMBLE TRAVEL MECHANISM (REDUCTION GEAR) 12

29,30,31 18 35

32

38 37 36

39

34

41

46

54

47

50

42

52,53

48

55

51

60

49

61

9 5 3 1 14 16 27 2 6 4

62 19 15 23 21 25 13

59

56,57

10,11

58 7,8

24

26

22

28

33

17

20

46

45

40

44

43

W2CG-03-02-003

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Cover Sun Gear Ring Bearing O-ring Plug Bolt Washer Carrier Pin Socket Bolt Washer Casing Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Sun Gear

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Spacer Bearing Bearing Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Plug Bolt Washer Setscrew O-Ring

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 -

W3-2-4

Plug Sun Gear Ring Retaining Ring Bearing Retaining Ring Casing Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Spacer Bearing Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Bearing

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -

Casing Casing Holder Seal Cover Bolt Washer Socket Bolt O-Ring Socket Bolt Washer O-Ring Bearing Floating Seal Motor Spacer


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism Disassemble Travel Mechanism (Reduction Gear)

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

CAUTION: Travel mechanism weight: Approx. 1670 kg There may be pressure accumulated inside of the travel mechanism. Loosen the plug slowly and release any remaining pressure completely. As the plug or gear oil may gush out, do not loosen the plug suddenly. Keep away from the plug. 1. Lift the travel mechanism with the crane so that the plug (28) positions downward. Loosen the plug (6) to the half (2 to 3) turns and release the remaining pressure in the reduction gear. : 32 mm

6

Horizontal

2. Remove the plug (28) and drain off the gear oil. : 30 mm 28

3. Put the matching marks on the outside on each mating surface.

W2CG-03-02-004

4. Place the travel mechanism on the workbench with positioning the cover (1) downward.

CAUTION: Motor weight: 134 kg

5. Install the eyebolt (M12) at the center of the motor (61). Remove the socket bolts (10) (4 used) and remove the motor (61) with the crane.

Matching Mark

Matching Mark

Matching Mark

Matching Mark Matching Mark

6. Install the eyebolts (M33) (4 used) on the casing (4). Remove the socket bolts (54) (2 used) and remove the casings (49) and (48) from the casing (39) with the crane. : 19 mm 7. Remove the O-ring (58) from the casing (49).

W2CG-03-02-003

W3-2-5


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 12

18 35

32

39

41

50

48

51

60

49

14 16 2

62

52

59

56

W2CG-03-02-003

W3-2-6


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 8. After turning over the casings (49) and (48), place them on the workbench.

17. Remove the inner race of the bearing (59) from the casing (48).

9. Remove the bolts (52) (16 used) and remove the holder (50). : 30 mm

18. Install the eyebolt on the casing (39). Remove the bolts (29) (29 used) and remove the casing (39) from the casing (12) with the crane. : 30 mm

10. Lift the casing (48) with the crane and remove it from the casing (49). IMPORTANT: As the outer race of the bearing (59) is inserted with a press, the outer race can not be removed easily. Do not disassemble unless the replacement of the bearing (59) is required. 11. Remove the inner race of the bearing (59) from the casing (48). 12. After turning over the casing (48), place it on the workbench with positioning the seal cover (51) upward. IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the sliding surface of the floating seal (60). Do not disassemble unless the replacement of the floating seal (60) is required. 13. Remove the floating seal (60) of the casing (49) side. 14. Remove the floating seal (60) of the seal cover (51) side.

NOTE: Lift the casing (39) slightly. Put the metal pad on the casing (12) and remove the casing (39) with tapping the casing diagonally upward with using a hammer. 19. Remove the O-ring (32) from the casing (12). 20. Install the eyebolt on the carrier (41) and remove the third stage carrier (41) assembly with the crane. 21. Remove the ring (35) from the casing (12). 22. Install the eyebolt on the carrier (18) and remove the second stage carrier (18) assembly with the crane. 23. Remove the sun gear (16). 24. Remove the sun gear (2) and pull out the spacer (62). 25. Install the eyebolt on the carrier (14) and remove the first stage carrier (14) assembly with the crane.

15. Remove the socket bolts (56) (24 used) of the seal cover (51) and remove the seal cover (51) from the casing (48). : 10 mm 16. Remove the O-ring (55) from the seal cover (51).

W3-2-7


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 18

12

38 37 36

34

5 3 1 14 16 27

4

19 15 23 21 25 13

7

24

22

17

20

W2CG03-02-003

W3-2-8


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 26. Turn over the casing (12) and cover (1) and place them on the workbench. 27. Remove the bolts (7) (20 used) from the cover (1) and remove the cover (1). : 24 mm

IMPORTANT: Replace the carrier pin (19) or the planetary gear (17) as 4 units. Put the mark to use the carrier pin (19) again so that the carrier pin (19) can be installed in the former hole on the carrier (18) before disassembling.

NOTE: Put the metal pad on the cover (1) and remove the cover (1) with tapping the cover diagonally upward with using a hammer.

35. Remove the retaining ring (24) from the carrier pin (19) of the second stage carrier (18) assembly and remove the planetary gear (17).

28. Remove the O-ring (5) from the cover (1).

36. Remove the spacer (20) from the carrier pin (19).

29. Remove the bearing (4) from the cover (1).

37. Remove the retaining ring (24) from the planetary gear (17) and remove the bearing (22).

30. Remove the ring (3) from the cover (1). IMPORTANT: Replace the carrier pin (15) or the planetary gear (13) as 3 units. Put the mark to use the carrier pin (15) again so that the carrier pin (15) can be installed in the former hole on the carrier (14) before disassembling. 31. Remove the retaining ring (23) from the carrier pin (15) of the first stage carrier (14) assembly and remove the planetary gear (13).

38. Remove the retaining ring (36) from the sun gear (34) and remove the carrier (18). 39. Remove the carrier pins (19) (4 used) from the carrier (18). 40. Remove the retaining ring (36) from the sun gear (34) and remove the carrier (18). 41. Remove the retaining ring (38) from the sun gear (34) and remove the bearing (37).

32. Remove the retaining ring (25) from the planetary gear (13) and remove the bearing (21). 33. Remove the carrier pins (15) (3 used) from the carrier (14). 34. Remove the retaining ring (27) from the sun gear (16).

W3-2-9


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 41

46

47

42

45

40

44

43

W2CG-03-02-003

W3-2-10


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism IMPORTANT: Replace the carrier pin (42) or the planetary gear (40) as 5 units. Put the mark to use the carrier pin (42) again so that the carrier pin (42) can be installed in the former hole on the carrier (41) before disassembling. 42. Remove the retaining ring (45) from the carrier pin (42) of the third stage carrier (41) assembly and remove the planetary gear (40). 43. Remove the spacer (43) from the carrier pin (42). 44. Remove the retaining ring (46) from the planetary gear (40) and remove the bearings (44) (2 used). 45. Remove the carrier pins (42) (5 used) from the carrier (41). 46. Remove the retaining ring (46) from the carrier (41) and remove the bearing (47).

W3-2-11


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism ASSEMBLE TRAVEL MECHANISM (REDUCTION GEAR) 12

29,30,31 18 35

32

38 37 36

39

34

41

46

54

47

50

42

52,53

48

55

51

60

49

61

9 5 3 1 14 16 27 2 6 4

62 19 15 23 21 25 13

59

56,57

10,11

58 7,8

24

26

22

28

33

17

20

46

45

40

44

43

W2CG-03-02-003

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Cover Sun Gear Ring Bearing O-ring Plug Bolt Washer Carrier Pin Socket Bolt Washer Casing Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Sun Gear

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -

Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Spacer Bearing Bearing Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Plug Bolt Washer Setscrew O-Ring

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 -

Plug Sun Gear Ring Retaining Ring Bearing Retaining Ring Casing Planetary Gear Carrier Carrier Pin Spacer Bearing Retaining Ring Retaining Ring Bearing

W3-2-12

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -

Casing Casing Holder Seal Cover Bolt Washer Socket Bolt O-Ring Socket Bolt Washer O-Ring Bearing Floating Seal Motor Spacer


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism Assemble Travel Mechanism (Reduction Gear) 1. Install the bearing (47) on the third stage carrier (41) and install the retaining ring (46).

13. Install the retaining ring (26) on the planetary gear (17) and secure the bearing (22).

2. Insert the carrier pins (42) (5 used) into the third stage carrier (41).

14. Install the planetary gear (17) on the carrier pin (19) and install the retaining ring (24).

3. Install the retaining ring (46) on the planetary gear (40) and install the bearings (44) (2 used).

15. Insert the carrier pins (15) (3 used) on the first stage carrier (14).

4. Install the retaining ring (46) on the planetary gear (40) and secure the bearing (44).

16. Install the retaining ring (25) on the planetary gear (13) and install the bearing (21).

5. Install the spacer (5) on the carrier pin (42).

17. Install the retaining ring (25) on the planetary gear (13) and secure the bearing (21).

6. Install the planetary gear (40) on the carrier (42) and install the retaining ring (45).

7. Install the bearing (37) on the sun gear (34) and install the retaining ring (38).

8. Install the retaining ring (36) on the sun gear (34) and install the second stage carrier (18).

18. Install the planetary gear (13) on the carrier pin (15) and install the retaining ring (23). 19. Install the inner race of the bearing (59) at the seal cover (51) of the casing (48). 20. Install the O-ring (55) on the seal cover (51).

9. Install the retaining ring (36) on the sun gear (34) and secure the second stage carrier (18). 10. Insert the carrier pins (19) (4 used) on the second stage carrier (19). 11. Install the spacer (20) on the carrier pin (19).

21. Install the seal cover (51) of the casing (48) with aligning the matching mark. Apply LOCTITE #242 on the socket bolts (56) (24 used) and tighten the seal cover with the bolts and washers (57) (24 used). : 10 mm : 122 to 128 N m (12.4 to 13.0 kgf m)

12. Install the retaining ring (26) on the planetary gear (17) and install the bearing (22).

NOTE: Apply LOCTITE #515 on the mating surfaces of the casing (48) and seal cover (51). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (60), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3.

W3-2-13


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 12

18 35

32

39

34

41

50

48

51

60

49

5 3 1 14 16 27 2 4

62

52,53

7,8

59

40

W2CG-03-02-003

W3-2-14


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 22. Install the one side of the floating seal (60) on the seal cover (51) with using a bamboo spatula.

32. Lift the first stage carrier (14) assembly with the crane. Mesh the first stage carrier (14) assembly with the casing (12) and install.

23. Install the other side of the floating seal (60) on the casing (49).

33. Install the retaining ring (27) on the second stage sun gear (16) and mesh the second stage sun gear (16) with the first stage carrier (14) and install.

NOTE: Apply the oil on the sliding surface of the floating seal (60) slightly. 24. Lift the casing (48) with the crane and turn over it. Install the casing (48) on the casing (49).

34. Lift the third stage carrier (18) assembly with the crane. Mesh the second stage sun gear (16) with the casing (12) and install.

25. Install the inner race of the bearing (59) on the casing (48).

35. Install the ring (35) on the casing (12).

26. Install the holder (50) on the housing (49). Apply LOCTITE #242 on the bolts (52) (16 used) and tighten the holder with the bolts and washers (53) (16 used). : 30 mm : 597 to 628 N m (60.8 to 64.0 kgf m)

36. Lift the third stage carrier (41) assembly with the crane. Mesh the third stage carrier (41) assembly with the second stage sun gear (34) and install. NOTE: Insert the third stage carrier (41) assembly into the second stage sun gear (34) so that the position to install the planetary gear (40) is located as the illustrated to align the oil level position of the planetary bearing.

NOTE: Apply LOCTITE #515 on the mating surfaces of the holder (50) and housing (49).

Third Stage Planetary Gear

27. Install the ring (3) on the cover (1).

Carrier Pin

28. Install the bearing (4) on the cover (1). 29. 29. Install the O-ring (5) on the cover (1). 30. Install the cover (1) on the casing (12). Apply LOCTITE #242 on the bolts (7) (20 used) and tighten the casing with the bolts and washers (8). : 24 mm : 219 to 230 N m (22.3 to 23.4 kgf m)

Horizontal

NOTE: Apply LOCTITE #515 on the mating surfaces of the casing (39) and casing (48). 31. Lift the casing (12) with the crane and turn over it. Install the spacer (62) on the first stage sun gear (2) and install the bearing (4). Vertical

W2CG-03-02-005

37. Install the O-ring (32) on the casing (12).

W3-2-15


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 12

29,30

39

41

54

48

49

61

1

4

10,11 58 28

W2CG-03-02-003

W3-2-16


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism 38. Lift the casing (39) with the crane. Mesh the casing (39) with the planetary gear (4). Align the matching mark of the casing (39) with the casing (12). Mesh the casing (39) with the planetary gear (4) and install. 39. Apply LOCTITE #242 on the holders (29) (29 used) and tighten it with the washer (30). : 30 mm : 597 to 628 N m (60.8 to 64.0 kgf m) NOTE: Apply LOCTITE #515 on the mating surfaces of the casing (12) and casing (39).

40. Install the O-ring (58) on the casing (48).

41. Lift the casing (48) and casing (49) with the crane. Align the matching mark of the casing (48) with the casing (39). Mesh the casing (48) with the third stage carrier (41) and install.

42. Apply LOCTITE #242 on the socket bolts (54) (2 used) and tighten. : 19 mm : 1629 to 1715 N m (166.0 to 174.0 kgf m)

NOTE: Apply LOCTITE #515 on the mating surfaces of the casing (39) and casing (48).

6 1

43. Lift the motor with the crane and install it with matching mark with the casing (49). Apply LOCTITE #242 on the socket bolts (10) (4 used) and tighten with the washer (11). : 14 mm : 371 to 390 N m (37.7 to 39.7 kgf m) Horizontal

44. Install the plug (28) on the cover (1) and add the gear oil through the oil filler port. Wrap the seal tape on the plug (6) and install the plug (6) on the cover (1). Amount of gear oil: 35 L : 30 mm, 32 mm 28

W2CG-03-02-004

W3-2-17


LOWER MACHINERY / Travel Mechanism (Blank)

W3-2-18


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint REMOVE AND INSTALL ROTATING JOINT

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

2

Removal

3 4

1

1. Shutdown the engine. Operate the control lever several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit.

5

19

18

2. Remove the hoses (1 to 19). : 19, 22, 27, 36, 41, 50 mm

6 8

7

17 16

NOTE: Cap the hoses. 14 9

10 15

13 12

11

M2CN-03-03-001

3. Remove the bolt (20) (2 used) and remove the plate (24). : 24mm

23 22

4. Remove the bolt (21) (2 used) and remove the plate (25). : 24mm

21

20

24

25

CAUTION: Rotating joint (23) weight: Approx. 70 kg 5. Lift the rotating joint (23) with the crane and hold it.

M2CN-03-03-002

6. Remove the bolt (22) (4 used) and remove the rotating joint (23) with hoisting the crane. : 19 mm

W3-3-1


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint Installation

CAUTION: Rotating joint (23) weight: Approx. 70 kg

21

23

1. Lift the rotating joint (23) with the crane and install it with the bolt (22) (4 used). : 19 mm : 72.0 to 78.0 N m (6.4 to 8.0 kgf m)

20

22

24

25

2. Install the plate (24) on the revolving frame with the bolt (20) (2 used). : 24 mm : 179.0 to 194.0 N m (18.3 to 19.8 kgf m)

M2CN-03-03-002

3. Install the hoses (1 to 19). : 19 mm : 29.5 N m (3.0 kgf m) : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) : 27 mm : 93 N m (9.5 kgf m) : 36 mm : 175 N m (18.0 kgf m) : 41 mm : 205 N m (21.0 kgf m) : 50 mm

2

3 4

1

5

19

18

6 7

17

8

16 14 9

10 15

13 12

11

M2CN-03-03-001

W3-3-2


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint (Blank)

W3-3-3


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint DISASSEMBLE ROTATING JOINT 9

1 3

2

4 10

11

5

6 12

7

8

13

14

15

W25N-03-03-003

1234-

Scraper O-Ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover

5678-

O-Ring Socket bolt (4 Used) Thrust Plate Body

910 11 12 -

Seal (8 Used) O-Ring V-Ring Shaft

W3-3-4

13 - Flange 14 - Plug 15 - Plug (4 Used)


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint Disassemble Rotating Joint

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling. CAUTION: Rotating joint weight: Approx. 70 kg

1. Remove the socket bolts (3) (2 used) from the cover (4) diagonally. Lift the rotating joint with using the eyebolt (M10) and set it on the vise. : 8 mm 2. Remove the remained socket bolts (3) (4 used) and remove the cover (4). : 8 mm 3. Remove the socket bolts (6) (4 used) and remove the thrust plate (7). : 8 mm IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the seal sliding surface of the shaft (12).

2-I12Hole M20 350 M20 Tap

4. Completely remove the shaft (12) from the body (8) with using the special tool (A).

2-M10u100

(180) 151

30

5. Remove the V-ring (11) from the shaft (12).

40

57

6. Remove the seals (9) (8 used) and O-ring (10) from the body (8). I25

NOTE: The seal (9) can be removed easily with using two pins.

12

Spacer

7. Remove the scraper (1), O-ring (2) and (5) from the cover (4).

Protection Plate

8

Special Tool (A) W25N-03-03-004

W3-3-5


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint ASSEMBLE ROTATING JOINT

2

1

3

4

7 5 6 9 8 10 11 13

12 14

15

W25N-03-03-005

1234-

Scraper O-Ring Socket bolt (6 Used) Cover

5678-

O-Ring Socket bolt (4 Used) Thrust Plate Body

910 11 12 -

W3-3-6

Seal (8 Used) O-Ring V-Ring Shaft

13 - Flange 14 - Plug 15 - Plug (4 Used)


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint Assemble Rotating Joint IMPORTANT: When installing the seals, apply grease or hydraulic oil slightly and install on each groove. After inserting, apply grease to the inside (lip portion) of the scraper (1), O-ring (1), (2) and seal (9). 1. Install the O-ring (2), (5) and scraper (1) on the cover (4). Apply grease onto the lip part of O-ring (11), dust seal (10) and seal (9). NOTE: With using the special tool (B), install the scraper (1) with using a press. 2. Install the O-ring (10) and seal (9) (8 used) on the body (8).

I70 or More I56 Press

7

20

IMPORTANT: After installing the V-ring (11), apply grease on the lip. 3. Install the V-ring (11) on the shaft (12).

1

4. Install the body (8) on the shaft (12) with using a press. 5. Install the thrust plate (7) with the socket bolt (6) (4 used). : 8 mm : 52.0 to 56.8 N m (5.3 to 5.8 kgf m) 6. Install the cover (4) and tighten with the socket bolt (3) (6 used). : 8 mm : 52.0 to 56.8 N m (5.3 to 5.8 kgf m)

W3-3-7

Special Tool (B) W25N-03-03-006


LOWER MACINERY / Rotating Joint MAINTENANCE STANDARD Item Body / Shaft

Allowable limit (Criterion for judgment)

Sliding surface and

Seizure or serious damage due to

sealed part

foreign material biting

Sliding surface of

1) Seizure or abnormal wear due to

body

and

shaft

except sealed part

Remedy Replace Replace

foreign material biting and damage with 0.1mm or more in depth 2) Damage within 0.1mm in depth

Repair and finish

1) Wear 0.5mm or more and abnormal

Replace

with oil stone Sliding

surface

with thrust plate

wear 2) Wear 0.5mm or less

Repair and finish

3) Seizure or damage due to foreign

Repair and finish

material biting is within wear limit (0.5mm) and repairable Cover

Sliding

surface

with thrust plate

1) Wear 0.5mm or more

Replace

2) Wear 0.5mm or less

Repair and finish

3) Seizure or damage due to foreign

Repair and finish

material biting is within wear limit (0.5mm) and repairable

W3-3-8


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler REMOVE AND TUMBLER

INSTALL

TAKE-UP

• In this section, the procedure starts on the premise that the track shoe has already been removed. As for the removal and installation of the crawler shoe, refer to the “REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK SHOE” on W3-6.

Removal CAUTION: Take-up tumbler weight: 770 kg 1. Prize the take-up tumbler with using a bar and remove the tumbler together with the bearing from the side frame.

M2CN-03-04-001

Take-Up Tumbler

2. Attach the wire rope on the take-up tumbler. Lift the take-up tumbler assembly with the crane and remove it from the side frame.

Bearing

W2CG-03-04-001

3. When storing the take-up tumbler temporarily, place the take-up tumbler horizontally on the wooden blocks as illustrated.

Installation CAUTION: Take-up tumbler weight: 770 kg IMPORTANT: Check the direction (front/rear) of the bearing. Clean and apply grease on the sliding portion of the side frame and the bearing. 1. Lift the take-up tumbler assembly and install it on the side frame.

W3-4-1

W2CG-03-04-002


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler DISASSEMBLE TAKE-UP TUMBLER

5 4 3

6

2

8

7 1

W2CG-03-04-003

1 - Take-Up Tumbler 2 - Bushing (2 Used)

3 - Shaft 4 - Floating Seal (2 Used)

5 - O-Ring (2 Used) 6 - Pin (2 Used)

W3-4-2

7 - Bearing (2 Used) 8 - Plug (4 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler Disassemble Take-Up Tumbler

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Loosen the plug (8) and drain off the engine oil. : 6 mm 2. Pull out the pin (6) from the bearing (7) and shaft (3) with using a bar. 3. Pull out the shaft (3) from the bearing (7) with using a press. At this time, the shaft (3) and the bearing (7) are removed from the take-up tumbler (1). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (4), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions ” on page W1-1-3. 4. Remove the floating seal (4) from the take-up tumbler (1) and bearing (7). 5. Pull out the shaft (3) from the bearing (7) with using a press. 6. Remove the O-ring (5) from the shaft (3). 7. Remove the bushing (2) from the take-up tumbler (1).

W3-4-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler ASSEMBLE TAKE-UP TUMBLER

5 4 3

6

2

8

7 1

W2CG-03-04-003

1 - Take-Up Tumbler 2 - Bushing (2 Used)

3 - Shaft 4 - Floating Seal (2 Used)

5 - O-Ring (2 Used) 6 - Pin (2 Used)

W3-4-4

7 - Bearing (2 Used) 8 - Plug (4 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler Assemble Take-Up Tumbler 1. Insert the bushing (2) into the take-up tumbler (1) with using a press.

10. Apply LOCTITE #503 on the plug (8). Install the plug (8) on the bearing (7). : 6 mm

2. Install the O-ring (5) on the shaft (3). Align the pin (6) holes and install the shaft (3) on the bearing (7). 3. Drive the pin (6) in the bearing (7) and shaft (3). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (4), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 4. Install a pair of floating seals (4) on the take-up tumbler (1) and bearing (7). 5. Insert the shaft (3) into the take-up tumbler (1) from the side that the floating seal (4) was installed. Install the O-ring (5) on the shaft (3). 6. Install the other floating seals (4) on the take-up tumbler (1) and bearing (7). 7. Align the pin (6) holes and install the bearing (7) on the shaft (3). 8. Drive the pin (6) in the bearing (7) and shaft (3). 9. Add the engine oil through the plug (8) hole of the bearing (7). Engine oil: Class CD, SAE 30

W3-4-5


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler MAINTENANCE STANDARD Take-Up Tumbler E

C

B

A

B

W2CG-03-04-004

Unit : mm Standard

Allowable Limit

A

110

B

60

C

24

D

912

902

E

270

Remedy

Padding and finishing

(Shaft/Bushing) Unit : mm Shaft Bushing

Standard

Allowable Limit

Outer Dia.

180

179.2

Inner Dia.

180

181

10

Flange Thickness

W3-4-6

Remedy

Replace


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler Drive Tumbler

D

A

B

C

W2CG-03-04-005

Unit : mm Standard

Allowable Limit

Remedy

A

52.2

B

105.6

Padding and

C

210

finishing

D

915.6

• If the meshing condition of the drive tumbler and track shoe is faulty, pad and finish to the specified dimension.

W3-4-7


LOWER MACHINERY / Take-Up Tumbler (Blank)

W3-4-8


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers REMOVE AND INSTALL ROLLER (FRONT AND REAR)

CARRIER

1

2

• Remove the carrier roller on the level, solid ground.

• Before removing the carrier roller, slightly travel the machine forward. In case the slack of the track shoe is located at the top of the drive tumbler, the removing working is easy.

Removal 1. Remove the bolt (1) and remove the cover (2) from the side frame. : 19 mm

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

4

2. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe. When extending jack

3 When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

3. Remove the bolt (5) from the side frame and remove the plate (6). Remove all shims (7). : 24 mm

5

6

7

6 5

7

M2CN-03-06-003

W3-5-1


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers 4. Remove the jack (4) and lift the track shoe until the carrier roller (8) keeps away from the track shoe.

Track Shoe

8

5. Remove the bolt (9). : 19 mm

W2CG-03-05-001

CAUTION: Carrier roller (8) weight: 29.4 kg

8

9

6. Remove the carrier roller (8) from the side frame.

Installation 1. Install the carrier roller (8) on the side frame with the bolt (9). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m) NOTE: Install the carrier roller (8) with positioning the plug side at the outside. 2. Lower the track shoe lifted with the crane and adjust the tension of the track shoe.

M2CN-03-05-002

NOTE: As for the tension adjustment of the track shoe, refer to the “Install Track Roller”.

W3-5-2


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Blank)

W3-5-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers DISASSEMBLE CARRIER ROLLER (FRONT AND REAR)

1

2

11 10

12

7 5

4

9

8 5 7

10 4 3 12

11

6

W2CG-03-05-008

1 - Key Plate 2 - Collar 3 - Roller

4 - Bushing (2 Used) 5 - O-Ring (2 Used) 6 - Collar

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug 9 - Shaft

W3-5-4

10 - Knock Pin (8 Used) 11 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 12 - Thrust Plate (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers Disassemble Carrier Roller (Front and Rear)

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Loosen the plug (8) and drain off the engine oil. : 8 mm 2. Remove the wires (7) (2 used) from the collars (2), (6) and shaft (9) with using a bar. 3. Pull out the shaft (9) from the collars (2) and (6) with using a press. At this time, the shaft (9) and the collar (6) are pulled out from the roller (3). 4. Remove the thrust plates (12) (2 used) and knock pin (10) (8 used) from the roller (3). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (11), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 5. Remove two pairs of floating seal (11) from the roller (3), collars (2) and (6). 6. Pull out the shaft (9) from the collar (6) with using a press. 7. Remove the O-rings (5) (2 used) from the shaft (9). 8. Remove the bushings (4) (2 used) from the roller (3).

W3-5-5


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers ASSEMBLE CARRIER ROLLER (FRONT AND REAR)

12 1

11 10

9 8

7 6 4

2

5 3

W2CG-03-05-009

1 - Key Plate 2 - Collar 3 - Roller

4 - Bushing (2 Used) 5 - O-Ring (2 Used) 6 - Collar

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug 9 - Shaft

W3-5-6

10 - Knock Pin (8 Used) 11 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 12 - Thrust Plate (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers Assemble Carrier Roller (Front and Rear) 1. Install the O-ring (5) on the shaft (9) and install the shaft (9) on the collar (6). 2. Install the bushings (4) (2 used) on the roller (3).

IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (11), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 3. Install a pair of floating seal (11) on the roller (3) and collar (6). 4. Install the thrust plate (12) and knock pins (10) (4 used) at the side that the floating seal (11) of the roller (3) was installed. 5. Insert the shaft (9) on the roller (3) with a press from the side that the floating seal (11) was installed and install the other O-ring (5) o the shaft (9). 6. Install the other floating seal (11) on the roller (3) and collar (2). 7. Install the thrust plate (12) and knock pins (10) (4 used) on the roller (3). 8. Install the collar (2) on the shaft (9). 9. Drive the wire (7) in the collars (2), (6) and shaft (9). 10. Add the engine oil through the plug (8) hole of the shaft (9). Engine oil: Class CD, SAE 30 Engine oil amount: 30 to 40 cc 11. Apply LOCTITE #503 on the plug (8) and install the plug (8) on the shaft (9). : 8 mm

W3-5-7


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers MAINTENANCE STANDARD Carrier Roller (Front and Rear) B

A

B

C

W2CG-03-05-010

Unit : mm Allowable

Standard

Limit

A

152

B

32

C

241

231

Remedy Padding and finish or replace

(Shaft/Bushing) Unit : mm Standard Shaft Bushing

Allowable Limit

Outer Dia.

45

44.2

Inner Dia.

45

46

Flange Thickness

W3-5-8

Remedy

Replace


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers REMOVE AND INSTALL ROLLER (CENTER)

CARRIER

1

2

• Remove the carrier roller on the level, solid ground.

• Before removing the carrier roller, slightly travel the machine forward. In case the slack of track shoe is located at the top of the drive tumbler, the removing working is easy. Removal 1. Remove the bolt (1) and remove the cover (2) from the side frame. : 19 mm

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

4

2. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe (8).

When extending jack

3

When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

3. Remove the bolt (5) from the side frame and remove the plate (6). Remove all shims (7). : 24 mm

5

6

7

6 5

7

M2CN-03-06-003

W3-5-9


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers 4. Remove the jack (4) and lift the track shoe so that the carrier roller (8) keeps away from the track shoe.

Track Shoe

8

M2CN-03-05-003

5. Remove the bolt (9). : 24 mm

8

9

CAUTION: Carrier roller (8) weight: 18.4 kg 6. Remove the carrier roller (8) from the side frame.

Installation 1. Install the carrier roller (8) on the side frame with the bolt (9). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

M2CN-03-05-004

2. Lower the track shoe lifted with the crane and adjust the tension of the track shoe.

NOTE: As for the tension adjustment of the track shoe, refer to the “Install Track Roller”.

W3-5-10


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Blank)

W3-5-11


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers DISASSEMBLE CARRIER ROLLER (CENTER)

1

5

3

7

4

6 8

9

2 10

11

W2CG-03-05-011

1 - Retaining Ring 2 - Roller 3 - Plug

4 - Socket Bolt (3 Used) 5 - Cover 6 - Thrust Plate

7 - O-Ring 8 - Bushing 9 - Shaft

W3-5-12

10 - Floating Seal 11 - Collar


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers Disassemble Carrier Roller (Center)

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Loosen the plug (3). Drain off the engine oil. : 6 mm 2. Remove the retaining ring (1) and cover (5) from the roller (2). 3. Remove the O-ring (7) from the cover (5). 4. Remove the socket bolts (4) (3 used) and remove the thrust plate (6) from the shaft (9). : 6 mm 5. Pull out the shaft (9) from the collar (11) with using a press. At this time, the shaft (9) and the collar (11) are removed from the roller (2). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (10), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 6. Remove the floating seal (10) from the roller (2) and collar (11). 7. Pull out the shaft (9) from the collar (11) with using a press. 8. Remove the bushing (8) from the roller (2).

W3-5-13


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers ASSEMBLE CARRIER ROLLER (CENTER)

2 1

3

4

5

6 7

8

9

10

11

W2CG-03-05-012

1 - Retaining Ring 2 - Roller 3 - Plug

4 - Socket Bolt (3 Used) 5 - Cover 6 - Thrust Plate

7 - O-Ring 8 - Bushing 9 - Shaft

W3-5-14

10 - Floating Seal 11 - Collar


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers Assemble Carrier Roller (Center) 1. Insert the bushing (8) into the roller (2) with using a press.

IMPORTANT: Assemble so that the drill hole (6 mm) of the thrust plate (6) aligns with the groove of the shaft (9). Drill Hole (6 mm)

IMPORTANT: Assemble the shaft (9) and collar (11) with using a press. The dimension between the shaft (9) and the collar (11) is 86.2 s 0.2 mm. When inserting with using a press, take care not to damage the seal housing of the collar (11).

Thrust Plate (6)

Collar (11)

86.2s0.2 mm

Shaft (9)

W2CG-03-05-014

Shaft (9)

W2CG-03-05-013

5. Install the thrust plate (6) on the shaft (9). Apply LOCTITE #262 on the socket bolts (4) (3 used) and tighten. : 6 mm : 20 N m (2.0 kgf m) 6. Install the O-ring (7) on the cover (5).

2. Insert the shaft (9) into the collar (11) with using a press.

7. Install the cover (5) on the roller (2) and install the retaining ring (1).

IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (10), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3.

8. Add the engine oil through the plug (3) hole of the cover (5) Engine oil: Class CD, SAE 30 Engine oil amount: Approx. 50 cc

3. Install the floating seal (10) on the roller (2) and collar (11). 4. Insert the shaft (9) into the roller (2) with using a press.

9. Apply LOCTITE #503 on the plug (3) and install the plug (3) on the cover (5). : 6 mm

W3-5-15


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers MAINTENANCE STANDARD Carrier Roller (Center) A

B

W2CG-03-05-015

Unit : mm Allowable

Standard

Limit

Remedy

A

65.5

Padding and finish

B

150

or replace

(Shaft/Bushing) Unit : mm Standard Shaft Bushing

Allowable Limit

Outer Dia.

60

Inner Dia.

60

Flange Thickness

W3-5-16

Remedy

Replace


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK ROLLER

1

• Remove the track roller on the level, solid ground.

2

Remove the track roller with the swing machinery parallel to the track shoe. • Before removing the track roller, slightly travel the machine forward. In case the slack of the track shoe is located at the top of the drive tumbler, the removing working is easy.

Removal 1. Remove the bolt (1). Remove the cover (2) from the side frame. : 19 mm

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

2. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe.

4

When extending jack

3 When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

3. Remove the bolt (5) from the side frame and remove the plate (6). Remove all shims (7). : 24 mm

5

6

7

4. Remove the jack (4) and loosen the track shoe with carrying out the travel operation. 6 5

7

M2CN-03-06-003

W3-5-17


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) 5. Remove the bolt (8). : 36 mm

6. Extend the jack-up cylinder (9). Jack up until the track roller (10) keeps away from the track shoe.

10 9

8

M2CN-03-05-005

CAUTION: Track roller (10) weight: 133.4 kg

7. Remove the track roller (10) from the track shoe with using a bar. Lift it with the crane and remove the track roller (10).

10

W2CG-03-05-006

W3-5-18


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) Installation

CAUTION: Track roller (10) weight: 133.4 kg 1. Lift the track roller (10) and install the track roller (10) on the bottom of the side frame.

10

2. Retract the jack-up cylinder (9). Track the machine to the extent that the collar of track roller (10) may keeps a little away from the side frame. 3. Align the bolt holes. Apply the grease containing molybdenum disulfide on the bolt (8) and tighten the bolt (8). : 36 mm : 605 to 655 N m (61.7 to 66.8 kgf m)

W2CG-03-05-006

4. When removing the bolts except the bolt (8) mounting holes (8 places) of the side frame, waterproof the mounting holes with pouring the silicon sealant from the upside.

8

M2CN-03-05-006

W3-5-19


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) 5. Retract the jack-up cylinder (9) completely.

Group “B”

IMPORTANT: Tense the track shoe to the specified dimension.

4

6

5

7

8

6. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe. IMPORTANT: Adjust so that the shaft of the take-up tumbler becomes parallel.

When extending jack

7. Install the shim (7) on the side frame. Insert the shim selected from the group “B” into the clearance if there is any clearance. 8. Install the plate (6) on the side frame with the bolt (5) and secure the shim (7). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

3

When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

9. Remove the jack (4).

10. Install the cover (2) on the side frame with the bolt (1). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

1

2

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

W3-5-20


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) (Blank)

W3-5-21


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) DISASSEMBLE TRACK ROLLER

6

4 3

1

7 2

5

7

1

3 4

W2CG-03-05-016

6

1 - Bushing (2 Used) 2 - Roller

3 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 4 - O-Ring (2 Used)

5 - Shaft 6 - Collar (2 Used)

W3-5-22

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) Disassemble Track Roller

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Loosen the plug (8). Drain off the engine oil. : 6 mm 2. Remove the wire (7) from the collar (6) and shaft (5) with using a bar. 3. Pull out the shaft (5) from the collar (6) with using a press. At this time, the shaft (5) and collar (6) are removed from the roller (2). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (3), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 4. Remove two pairs of floating seal (3) from the roller (2) and collar (6). 5. Pull out the shaft (5) from the collar (6) with using a press. 6. Remove the O-rings (4) (2 used) from the shaft (5). 7. Remove the bushings (1) (2 used) from the roller (2).

W3-5-23


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) ASSEMBLE TRACK ROLLER 8

7

6

4 3

1

5

2

W2CG-03-05-017

1 - Bushing (2 Used) 2 - Roller

3 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 4 - O-Ring (2 Used)

5 - Shaft 6 - Collar (2 Used)

W3-5-24

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) Assemble Track Roller 1. Insert the bushings (1) (2 used) into the roller (2). 2. Install the O-ring (4) on the shaft (5) and install the shaft (5) on the collar (6). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (3), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 3. Install a pair of floating seal (3) on the roller (2) and collar (6). 4. Insert the shaft (5) into the roller (2) from the side that the floating seal (3) was installed and install the other O-ring (4) ton the shaft (5). 5. Install the other pair of floating seal (3) on the roller (2) and collar (6). 6. Install the collar (6) on the shaft (5). 7. Install the wire (7) on the collar (6) and shaft (5). 8. Add the engine oil through the plug (8) hole of the collar (6). Engine oil: Class CD, SAE 30 Engine oil amount: 340 to 350 cc 9. Apply LOCTITE #503 on the plug (8) and install the plug (8) on the collar (6). : 6 mm

W3-5-25


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (To Machine No. 5) MAINTENANCE STANDARD Track Roller

B

A

B

C

D

W2CG-03-05-018

Unit : mm Allowable

Standard

Limit

Remedy

A

100

B

82.5

Padding and finish

C

25

or replace

D

330

320

(Shaft/Bushing) Unit : mm Standard Shaft Bushing

Allowable Limit

Outer Dia.

100

99.2

Inner Dia.

100

101

Flange Thickness

W3-5-26

Remedy

Replace


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK ROLLER

1

• Remove the track roller on the level, solid ground.

2

Remove the track roller with the swing machinery parallel to the track shoe. • Before removing the track roller, slightly travel the machine forward. In case the slack of the track shoe is located at the top of the drive tumbler, the removing working is easy.

Removal 1. Remove the bolt (1). Remove the cover (2) from the side frame. : 19 mm

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

2. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe.

4

When extending jack

3 When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

3. Remove the bolt (5) from the side frame and remove the plate (6). Remove all shims (7). : 24 mm

5

6

7

4. Remove the jack (4) and loosen the track shoe with carrying out the travel operation. 6 5

7

M2CN-03-06-003

W3-5-27


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) 5. Remove the bolt (8). : 50 mm

6. Extend the jack-up cylinder (9). Jack up until the track roller (10) keeps away from the track shoe.

10 9

8

M2CN-03-05-005

CAUTION: Track roller (10) weight: 138 kg 7. Remove the track roller (10) from the track shoe with using a bar. Lift it with the crane and remove the track roller (10).

10

W2CG-03-05-006

W3-5-28


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after)

Installation

CAUTION: Track roller (10) weight: 138 kg 10

1. Lift the track roller (10) and install the track roller (10) on the bottom of the side frame. 2. Retract the jack-up cylinder (9). Lower the machine to the extent that the collar of track roller (10) may keeps a little away from the side frame. 3. Align the bolt holes. Apply the grease containing molybdenum disulfide on the bolt (8) and tighten the bolt (8). : 50 mm : 1640 to 1770 N m (167.0 to 181.0 kgf m) 4. When removing the bolts except the bolt (8) mounting holes (8 places) of the side frame, waterproof the mounting holes with pouring the silicon sealant from the upside.

W2CG-03-05-006

8

M2CN-03-05-007

W3-5-29


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) 5. Retract the jack-up cylinder (9) completely.

Group “B”

IMPORTANT: Tense the track shoe to the specified dimension.

4

6

5

7

8

6. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe. IMPORTANT: Adjust so that the shaft of the take-up tumbler becomes parallel.

When extending jack

7. Install the shim (7) on the side frame. Insert the shim selected from the group “B” into the clearance if there is any clearance. 8. Install the plate (6) on the side frame with the bolt (5) and secure the shim (7). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

3

When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

9. Remove the jack (4).

10. Install the cover (2) on the side frame with the bolt (1). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

1

2

2

1

M2CN-03-06-001

W3-5-30


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) (Blank)

W3-5-31


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) DISASSEMBLE TRACK ROLLER

6

4 3

1

7 8 2

5

8 7

1

3 4

M2CN-03-05-008

6

1 - Bushing (2 Used) 2 - Roller

3 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 4 - O-Ring (2 Used)

5 - Shaft 6 - Collar (2 Used)

W3-5-32

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) Disassemble Track Roller

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

1. Loosen the plug (8). Drain off the engine oil. : 6 mm 2. Remove the wire (7) from the collar (6) and shaft (5) with using a bar. 3. Pull out the shaft (5) from the collar (6) with using a press. At this time, the shaft (5) and collar (6) are removed from the roller (2). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (3), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 4. Remove two pairs of floating seal (3) from the roller (2) and collar (6). 5. Pull out the shaft (5) from the collar (6) with using a press. 6. Remove the O-rings (4) (2 used) from the shaft (5). 7. Remove the bushings (1) (2 used) from the roller (2).

W3-5-33


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) ASSEMBLE TRACK ROLLER 8

7

6

4 3

1

5

2

M2CN-03-05-009

1 - Bushing (2 Used) 2 - Roller

3 - Floating Seal (2 Used) 4 - O-Ring (2 Used)

5 - Shaft 6 - Collar (2 Used)

W3-5-34

7 - Wire (2 Used) 8 - Plug (2 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) Assemble Track Roller 1. Insert the bushings (1) (2 used) into the roller (2). 2. Install the O-ring (4) on the shaft (5) and install the shaft (5) on the collar (6). IMPORTANT: For handling the floating seal (3), refer to the section “Floating Seal Precautions” on page W1-1-3. 3. Install a pair of floating seal (3) on the roller (2) and collar (6). 4. Insert the shaft (5) into the roller (2) from the side that the floating seal (3) was installed and install the other O-ring (4) ton the shaft (5). 5. Install the other pair of floating seal (3) on the roller (2) and collar (6). 6. Install the collar (6) on the shaft (5). 7. Install the wire (7) on the collar (6) and shaft (5). 8. Add the engine oil through the plug (8) hole of the collar (6). Engine oil: Class CD, SAE 30 Engine oil amount: 340 to 350 cc 9. Apply LOCTITE #503 on the plug (8) and install the plug (8) on the collar (6). : 6 mm

W3-5-35


LOWER MACHINERY / Carrier and Track Rollers (Machine No. 6 and after) MAINTENANCE STANDARD Track Roller B

A

B

C

D

M2CN-03-05-010

Unit : mm Allowable

Standard

Limit

Remedy

A

100

B

82.5

Padding and finish

C

25

or replace

D

330

320

(Shaft/Bushing) Unit : mm Standard Shaft Bushing

Allowable Limit

Outer Dia.

100

99.2

Inner Dia.

100

101

Flange Thickness

W3-5-36

Remedy

Replace


LOWER MACHINERY / Track Shoe REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK SHOE

1

2

• Remove and install the track shoe with the right procedures safely to prevent an unexpected serious accident. • Remove the track shoe on the level, solid ground. Remove and install the cylinder with the swing machinery with parallel to the track shoe. • Before removing the track shoe, slightly travel the machine forward. In case the slack of the track shoe is located at the top of the drive tumbler, the removing working can be done easily. 1

2

Removal 1. Remove the bolt (1) and remove the cover (2) from the side frame. : 19 mm 2. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe (8).

M2CN-03-06-001

4

When extending jack

3

When releasing jack

M2CN-03-06-002

5

3. Remove the bolt (5) from the side frame and remove the plate (6). Remove all shims (7). : 24 mm

6

7

4. Remove the jack (4).

6

5 7

M2CN-03-06-003

5. Remove the bolt (9) and nut (10) from the track shoe (8). : 30 mm

8 9

CAUTION: Place the wooden block under the track shoe (8) and pull out the joint pin (11) after securing the track shoe (8). 6. Pull out the joint pin (11) from the track shoe (8) with using a bar.

10 11

W333-03-07-001

W3-6-1


LOWER MACHINERY / Track Shoe 7. Operate the travel lever backward slowly. Extend the track shoe (8). 8

CAUTION: Track shoe weight: 3830 kg 8. Jack up the machine with extending the jack-up cylinder (12) and extend the track shoe (8).

M2CN-03-06-004

Installation CAUTION: Track shoe weight: 3830 kg IMPORTANT: Check the direction of the track shoe. 1. Jack up the machine with extending the jack-up cylinder (12). Place the track shoe (8) under the machine so that the drive tumbler can mesh with the end of track shoe (8).

12

M2CN-03-06-005

2. Lift the track shoe (8) with the crane and mesh the track shoe (8) with the drive tumbler. 3. With the machine jacked up, slowly operate the travel lever that the track shoe (8) is installed forward. Install the track shoe (8) with turning the drive tumbler.

Drive Tumbler Side

Take-Up Tumbler Side

M2CN -03-06-006

4. When the connecting part of the track shoe (8) reaches the take-up tumbler side, lower the machine. Insert the wooden blocks under the track shoe (8).

Wooden Block

W3-6-2

M2CN -03-06-007


LOWER MACHINERY / Track Shoe CAUTION: When aligning the joint pin (11) hole of the track shoe, do not insert the fingers into the hole.

5. Align the joint pin (11) hole on the track shoe (8) and drive in the joint pin (11).

8 9

6. Install the bolt (9) and nut (10) on the joint pin (11). : 30 mm : 288 to 312 N m (29.4 to 31.8 kgf m)

10 11

7. Spot-weld the bolt (9) and nut (10). W333-03-07-001

Group “B”

IMPORTANT: Tense the track shoe (8) to the specified dimension. 8. Install the jack (4) on the bracket (3) of the side frame. Tense the track shoe (8). IMPORTANT: Adjust the shaft of the take-up tumbler parallel. 9. Install the shim (7) on the side frame. If there is any clearance, insert the shim selected from group “B” into the clearance. 10. Install the plate (6) on the side frame with the bolt (5) and secure the shim (7). : 24 mm : 148 to 160 N m (15.0 to 16.3 kgf m)

4

6

5

7

8

When extending jack

3

When releasing jack

M2CN -03-06-002

11. Remove the jack (4).

1

2

12. Install the cover (2) on the side frame with the bolt (1). : 19 mm : 60 to 64 N m (6.1 to 6.6 kgf m)

2

1

M2CN -03-06-001

W3-6-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Track Shoe MAINTENANCE STANDARD Shoe F G

C B I

E A H D

M2CN -03-06-008

Unit: mm Standard

Allowable Limit

A

110

B

70

C

100

D

15

E

70

F

158

G

58

H

56.5

Remedy

Padding and finishing or replace

I 26.75 ᧩ ዘIf the meshing condition of the drive tumbler and track shoe is faulty, pad and finish to the specified value or sreplace. Joint Pin

A

B

W324-03-07-004

Unit: mm

Standard

Allowable Limit

A

55

B

370

Remedy Replace

W3-6-4


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL SIDE FRAME CONNECTING CYLINDER CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

2 3

Removal 1. Remove the crawler. (As for the removal of the crawler, refer to the Operator’s Manual.) CAUTION: Side frame connecting cylinder weight: 431 kg 2. Attach the wire rope on the side frame connecting cylinder (1) and support it with the crane. 3. Remove the hoses (2) (2 used) from the side frame connecting cylinder (1). Attach the plug on the removed hoses. : 22 mm

5 4 1 4

4. Remove the bolt (4) (10 used) and remove the side frame connecting cylinder (1). : 30 mm

5

M2CN-03-07-001

8

5. Remove the bolt (6) (10 used) and remove the covers (8) and (9). : 17 mm

7

6

13

6. Remove the split pin (10) and remove the washer (17).

11 1

7. Remove the pin (12) and separate the pin (13) from the cylinder (1).

15

7

11 9

12

11 10

10 10

11 10

14

M2CN-03-07-002

W3-7-1

6


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder Installation

1. Insert the pin (13) into the brackets (14) and (15). Connect the cylinder (1) to the pin (13) and insert the pin (12).

8

7

13

2. Install the washer (11) on the pin (12) and insert the split pin (10). 3. Install the covers (8) and (9) on the brackets (14) and (15) with the bolt (6) (10 used) and washer (7). : 17 mm : 34.0 to 37.0 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m)

11 1 15

7

11 9

12

11

10

10

CAUTION: Side frame connecting cylinder weight: 431 kg 4. Lift the side frame connecting cylinder (1) with the crane and install it on the side frame with the bolt (4) (10 used) and washer (5). : 30 mm : 288.0 to 312.0 N m (29.4 to 31.8 kgf m)

6

10

11 10

14

M2CN-03-07-002

5. Connect the hose (2) (2 used) to side frame connecting cylinder (1). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m)

2 3

5 4 1 4 5

M2CN-03-07-001

W3-7-2

6


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W3-7-3


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE SIDE FRAME CONNECTING CYLINDER

1 2 5 6 3 7 4 8 9 12 14

16 17 13 15

11

W2CG-03-07-003

12345-

Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Backup Ring

6789-

Packing Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring

10 11 12 13 -

Piston Rod Cylinder Tube O-Ring Piston

W3-7-4

14 15 16 17 -

Piston Seal Wear Ring Setscrew Steel Ball


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Side Frame Connecting Cylinder

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

10. Remove the O-rings (4), (9) and backup ring (8) from the outside of the cylinder head (3).

1. Lift the cylinder with the crane and secure it horizontally. Drain off the hydraulic oil in the cylinder. 2. Remove the cylinder head (3) assembly from the cylinder tube (11). CAUTION: Pull out the piston rod (10) straightly not to damage the sliding surface. 3. Pull out the piston rod (10) from the cylinder tube (11). 4. Secure the piston rod (10) horizontally. Remove the setscrew (16) and steel ball (17) from the piston (13). : 17 mm 5. Remove the piston (13) assembly from the piston rod (10). 6. Remove the wear ring (15) and piston seal (14) from the outside of the piston (13). 7. Remove the O-ring (12) from the inside of the piston (13). 8. Pull out the cylinder head (3) assembly from the piston rod (10). 9. Remove the retaining ring (1), dust seal (2), backup ring (5), packing (6) and bushing (7) from the inside of the cylinder head (3).

W3-7-5


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE SIDE FRAME CONNECTING CYLINDER

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

16

14 15

17

W2CG-03-07-004

12345-

Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Backup Ring

6789-

Packing Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring

10 11 12 13 -

Piston Rod Cylinder Tube O-Ring Piston

W3-7-6

14 15 16 17 -

Piston Seal Wear Ring Setscrew Steel Ball


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder Assemble Side Frame Connecting Cylinder 1. Install the dust wiper (2), retaining ring (1), bushing (7), packing (6) and backup ring (6) on the inside of the cylinder head (3) in order.

10. Tighten the cylinder head (3) to the cylinder tube (11). : 750 to 916 N m (76.5 to 93.5 kgf m)

2. Install the backup ring (8) and O-rings (9) and (10) on the outside of the cylinder head (3) in order. 3. Install the wear ring (15) and piston seal (14) on the outside of the piston (13) in order. 4. Install the O-ring (12) on the inside of the piston (13). 5. Install the cylinder head (3) assembly on the piston rod (10). 6. Secure the piston rod (10) assembly horizontally and install the piston (13) assembly on the piston rod (16). : 970 to 1186 N m (99.0 to 121.0 kgf m) 7. Install the steel ball (17) and setscrew (16) on the piston (13). : 17 mm : 22 to 27 N m (2.3 to 2.8 kgf m) 8. Clamp the cylinder tube (11) in a vise. Support one side on the workbench and secure the cylinder tube (11) horizontally. IMPORTANT: Insert the piston rod (10) straightly with aligning with the center of cylinder tube (11) not to damage the rings. 9. Insert the piston rod (10) assembly into the cylinder tube (11).

W3-7-7


LOWER MACINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W3-7-8


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND CYLINDER

INSTALL

JACK-UP

CAUTION: Remove and install the cylinder on the level, solid ground. Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

4

5 3

Removal

2

1. Place the wooden block under the lower frame and lower the lower frame on the wooden block. 2. Operate the jack switch and retract the jack cylinder to the stroke end. 3. Shutdown the engine. Operate the jack switch on the switch box several times and release the remaining pressure in the circuit. 6

4. Remove the wing bolt (4) (2 used) and washer (5) that secures the jack beam (1) and cylinder cover (3). IMPORTANT: Hitting the quick coupling may be damaged. Handle carefully.

6

1

5. Remove the hoses (6) (2 used) from the cylinder (2). : 22 mm NOTE: Cap the removed hoses. Attach identification tag for assembling.

an

W3-7-9

M2CN-03-07-003


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder CAUTION: Jack-up cylinder (7) weight: 365 kg 6. Support the jack-up cylinder (7) with tan assist crane. Remove the split pin (8), bolts (9), pins (10) and (11) and remove jack-up cylinder (7). : 17 mm

10

7

8

9 11

M2CN-03-07-004

CAUTION: Cylinder (2) weight: 190 kg 7. Place the jack-up cylinder (7) horizontally and remove the bolts (12) (4 used) and washer (13) (4 used). Remove the cylinder (2) from the jack beam (1). : 14 mm 1

8. Drain off the hydraulic oil in the cylinder (2).

2

9. Remove the other jack-up cylinder (3 places) with the same manners.

13

12

M2CN-03-07-005

W3-7-10


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder Installation

CAUTION: Cylinder (2) weight: 190 kg 1. Insert the valve side of the cylinder (2) into the bottom of the jack beam (1) and install it with the washer (13) (4 used) and bolts (12) (4 used). : 14 mm : 210 N m (21.5 kgf m) 1 2

13

12

M2CN-03-07-005

CAUTION: Jack-up cylinder (7) weight: 365 kg 2. Lift the jack-up cylinder (7) with an assist crane. Install it on the lower frame (14) with the pins (10) and (11) and secure with the split pin (8) , bolts (9). : 17 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m) NOTE: The numbers (1 to 4) are indicated on the jack-up cylinder (7) and lower frame (14). Install the jack-up cylinder (7) at the position that the number is matched. The position to secure the jack-up cylinder (7) is the follows (3 places). “When retracting the side frame”, “When disassembling/assembling the side frame while working” and “When transporting”.

W3-7-11

14

10

7

8

9 11

M2CN-03-07-004


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Remove the dust attached on the coupling and clean before connecting the quick coupling. Hitting the quick coupling may be damaged. Handle carefully. Securely connect the hydraulic hose.

4 5

3

2

3. Connect hoses (6) (2 used) to the cylinder (2). : 22 mm : 39 N m (4.0 kgf m) 4. Install the cylinder cover (3) on the jack beam (1) with the washer (5) and wing bolt (4) (2 used). 6

5. Install the other jack-up cylinder (3 places) with the same manners.

6

1

M2CN-03-07-003

W3-7-12


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W3-7-13


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE JACK-UP CYLINDER

12

23

24

27 25 19

28 26

20

18

17

29 31

16 15

30 14 21

7 6

22

4 11 10 9 8 5 3 2 1

13

M2CN-03-07-006

12345678-

Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring Backup Ring

9 - Rod Packing 10 - Plate 11 - Retaining Ring 12 - Cylinder Tube 13 - Piston Rod 14 - O-Ring 15 - Bearing Plane 16 - Backup Ring

17 - Piston Packing 18 - Piston 19 - Setscrew 20 - Steel Ball 21 - Steel Ball 22 - Setscrew 23 - Roll Pin 24 - Plug

W3-7-14

25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Double Pilot Check Valve Manifold O-Ring Plug Bolt Piston Packing Backup Ring


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Jack-Up Cylinder

• Thoroughly

read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling

10. Remove the piston packings (17), (30), backup rings (16), (31) and bearing plane (15) from the outside of the piston (18). 11. Remove the O-ring (14) from the inside of the piston (18).

CAUTION: Cylinder weight: 190 kg 1. Remove the bolts (29) (4 used) and remove the manifold (26) and double pilot check valve (25) from the cylinder tube (12). : 5 mm 2. Remove the O-rings (27) (2 used) from the manifold (26). 3. Remove the roll pin (23) from the cylinder tube (12). 4. Remove the cylinder head (3) assembly from the cylinder tube (12). 5. Remove the O-rings (4), (7) and backup ring (6). 6. Remove the dust seal (2), retaining ring (1), rod packing (9), backup ring (8), retaining ring (11), plate (10) and bushing (5) from the inside of the cylinder head (3).

CAUTION: Remove piston rod (13) from cylinder tube (14) straightly in order not to damage the sliding surface. 7. Pull out the piston rod (13) from the cylinder tube (12). 8. Secure the piston rod (13) horizontally and remove the setscrews (19), (22), steel balls (20) and (21) from the piston (18). : 17 mm 9. Remove the piston (18) assembly from the piston rod (13).

W3-7-15


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE JACK-UP CYLINDER 18

17

16

15

14

13

12 11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

19

3 2

20

1

21

22 30 31 29

23

28 24

25

26

27

M2CN-03-07-007

12345678-

Retaining Ring Dust Seal Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing Backup Ring O-Ring Backup Ring

9 - Rod Packing 10 - Plate 11 - Retaining Ring 12 - Cylinder Tube 13 - Piston Rod 14 - O-Ring 15 - Bearing Plane 16 - Backup Ring

17 - Piston Packing 18 - Piston 19 - Setscrew 20 - Steel Ball 21 - Steel Ball 22 - Setscrew 23 - Roll Pin 24 - Plug

W3-7-16

25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Double Pilot Check Valve Manifold O-Ring Plug Bolt Piston Packing Backup Ring


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder Assemble Jack-Up Cylinder 1. Install the O-ring (14) on the inside of the piston (18). 2. Install the bearing plane (15), piston packings (17), (30), backup rings (16) and (31) on the outside of the piston (18). 3. Install the piston (18) assembly on the piston rod (13). : 735 to 784 N m (75.0 to 80.0 kgf m)

9. Install the roll pin (23) on the cylinder tube (12). 10. Install the O-rings (27) (2 used) on the manifold (26). 11. Install the double pilot check valve (25) and manifold (26) on the cylinder tube (12) and install the bolts (29) (4 used). : 5 mm

4. Apply ThreeBond #1305 on the setscrews (19) and (22) and install the steel balls (20), (21), setscrews (19) and (22). Caulk the setscrews (19) and (22) (2 places) with using a punch. : 17 mm : 17.6 to 21.6 N m (1.8 to 2.2 kgf m) IMPORTANT: Insert the piston rod (13) straightly with aligning with the center of the cylinder tube (12) not to damage the rings. 5. Secure the cylinder tube (12) horizontally and insert the piston rod (13) assembly. 6. Install the bushing (5), plate (10), retaining ring (11), rod packing (9), backup ring (8), retaining ring (1) and dust seal (2) on the inside of the cylinder head (3). 7. Install the backup ring (6), O-rings (7) and (4) on the outside of the cylinder head (3). 8. Install the cylinder head (3) assembly on the cylinder tube (12). : 637 to 686 N m (65.0 to 70.0 kgf m)

W3-7-17


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W3-7-18


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK SHOE TENSION CYLINDER CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing the hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work.

Removal

1. Remove the take-up tumbler. (As for the removal of the take-up tumbler, refer to W3-4 in this section.)

2. Remove the bolt (3) and remove the front cover (2) from the side frame (1). : 19 mm

2 4

3. Remove the hose (6) from the tension cylinder (5). Attach the plug on the removed hose. : 19 mm

3 8 1

9 7

4. Remove the bolt (8) of the plate (7) and remove the tension cylinder (5) from the side frame (1). : 24 mm

Installation 6

1. Install the tension cylinder (5) on the side frame (1) and install the plate (7) with the bolt (8) and washer (9). : 24 mm : 179 to 194 N m (18.3 to 19.8 kgf m)

9

5 7

2. Connect the hose (6) to the tension cylinder (5). : 19 mm :29.5 N m (3.0 kgf m)

8

M2CN-03-07-008

3. Install the front cover (2) on the side frame (1) with the bolt (3) and washer (4). : 19 mm : 72 to 78 N m (7.4 to 8.0 kgf m)

W3-7-19


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE TRACK SHOE TENSION CYLINDER

2 1 3

5 6 7 8

4

9

M2CN-03-07-009

1 - Washer 2 - Bolt 3 - Cylinder Head

4 - Piston 5 - Retaining Ring

6 - Dust Seal 7 - Backup Ring

W3-7-20

8 - O-Ring 9 - Cylinder Tube


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder Disassemble Track Shoe Tension Cylinder • Thoroughly read “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

CAUTION: Cylinder weight: 71 kg 1. Lift the cylinder with the crane and secure it horizontally. Drain off the hydraulic oil in the cylinder. 2. Remove the bolts (2) (4 used) and washers (1) (4 used) and remove the cylinder head (3) assembly from the cylinder tube (9). : 13 mm 3. Remove the retaining ring (5) from the inside of the cylinder head (3). CAUTION: Pull out the piston (4) straightly not to damage the sliding surface. 4. Pull out the piston (4) from the cylinder tube (9). 5. Remove the dust seal (6), O-ring (8) and backup ring (7) from the inside of the cylinder tube (9).

W3-7-21


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder ASSEMBLE TRACK SHOE TENSION CYLINDER

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

2 1

M2CN-03-07-010

1 - Washer 2 - Bolt 3 - Cylinder Head

4 - Piston 5 - Retaining Ring

6 - Dust Seal 7 - Backup Ring

W3-7-22

8 - O-Ring 9 - Cylinder Tube


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder Assemble Track Shoe Tension Cylinder 1. Apply Veseline on the O-ring (8) and dust seal (6) and install the O-ring (8), backup ring (7) and dust seal (6) on the cylinder tube (9). IMPORTANT: Insert the piston (4) straightly with aligning with the center of the cylinder tube (9) not to damage the rings. 2. Apply Veseline on the outer surface of the piston (4) and insert the piston (4) into the cylinder tube (9). 3. Install the retaining ring (5) on the inside of the cylinder head (3). 4. Install the cylinder head (3) on the cylinder tube (9). 5. Install the washers (1) (4 used) and bolts (2) (4 used) on the cylinder head (3) assembly. : 13 mm : 15.7 to 17.7 N m (1.6 to 1.8 kgf m)

W3-7-23


LOWER MACHINERY / Cylinder (Blank)

W3-7-24


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 6-UNIT CONTROL VALVE

Removal 1. Remove all hoses and wiring connectors from the control valve (1). : 22 mm, 27 mm NOTE: Cap the removed hoses. Attach identification tag for assembling.

an 1

2. Remove the bolt (2) from the control valve (1) and remove the control valve (1). : 17mm

Installation

2

1. Install the control valve (1) and tighten with the bolt (2). : 17mm : 34.0 to 37.0 Nᨿm (3.5 to 3.8 kgfᨿm)

M2CN-03-08-001

2. Install all hoses and wiring connectors on the control valve (1). : 22 mm : 39 Nᨿm (4.0 kgfᨿm) : 27 mm : 93 Nᨿm (9.5 kgfᨿm) IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Check for any oil leaks.

W3-8-1


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE 6-UNIT CONTROL VALVE

12,13

1,25,26

14,15,16,17

18,19,20,21

2,25,26

3,25,26 4,25,26

24

11

10

8

6

5

9

22

23

7

W25N-03-08-002

1234567-

Block Block (4 Used) Block Block Plate Foot (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used)

8910 11 12 13 14 -

Bolt (2 Used) Bolt (2 Used) Nut (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Plug Filter Relief Valve

15 16 17 18 19 20

W3-8-2

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Reducing Valve O-Ring O-Ring

21 22 23 24 25 26

O-Ring Solenoid Valve (12 Used) Plate (6 Used) Socket Bolt (36 Used) O-Ring (14 Used) O-Ring (7 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve Disassemble 6-Unit Control Valve

• Thoroughly

rear “PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING” (W1-1-1) before disassembling.

7. Divide the blocks into (1), (2) (4 used), (3) and (4). 8. Remove the O-rings (25) (14 used) and (26) (7 used) from each block.

CAUTION: Control valve weight: 25 kg 1. Place the control valve assembly on a clean workbench. IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (14). 2. Remove the relief valve (14) from the block (1) and remove the O-rings (15) (2 used), (16) and (17). : 27 mm IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the reducing valve (18). 3. Remove the reducing valve (18) from the block (1) and remove the O-rings (19), (20) and (21). : 27 mm 4. Remove the plug (12) from the block (1) and remove the filter (13). : 8 mm IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (22). 5. Remove the socket bolt (24) and remove the plate (23) and solenoid valves (22) (2 used) from the blocks (2) (4 used), (3) and (4). : 3 mm 6. Remove the nut (10) and remove the bolts (8) (2 used), (9) (2 used), foots (6) (2 used), plate (5) and spacers (7) (2 used). : 13 mm

W3-8-3


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve ASSEMBLE 6-UNIT CONTROL VALVE

12,13

1,25,26

14,15,16,17

18,19,20,21

2,25,26

3,25,26 4,25,26

24

11

10

8

6

5

9

22

23

7

W25N-03-08-002

1234567-

Block Block (4 Used) Block Block Plate Foot (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used)

8910 11 12 13 14 -

Bolt (2 Used) Bolt (2 Used) Nut (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Plug Filter Relief Valve

15 16 17 18 19 20

W3-8-4

O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring O-Ring Reducing Valve O-Ring O-Ring

21 22 23 24 25 26

O-Ring Solenoid Valve (12 Used) Plate (6 Used) Socket Bolt (36 Used) O-Ring (14 Used) O-Ring (7 Used)


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve Assemble 6-Unit Control Valve 1. Install the O-rings (25) (2 used) and (26) on the blocks (1), (2) (4 used), (3) and (4).

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the relief valve (14).

2. Arrange the foot (6), block (1), blocks (2) (4 used), block (3), block (4), plate (5), spacers (7) (2 used) and foot (6) in this order. Pass the bolts (8) (2 used) and (9) (2 used).

8. Install the O-rings (15) (2 used), (16) and (17) on the relief valve (14) and install the relief valve (14) on the block (1). : 27 mm : 68.6 to 78.5 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m)

3. Install the washer (11) on the bolts (8) (2 used) and (9) (2 used) with the nut (10). : 13 mm : 21.6 to 23.5 N m (2.2 to 2.4 kgf m) IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the solenoid valve (22). 4. Install the solenoid valves (22) (2 used) and plate (23) on the blocks (2) (4 used) with the socket bolt (24). : 3 mm : 3.92 to 4.9 N m (0.4 to 0.5 kgf m) 5. Install the filter (13) on the block (1). 6. Install the plug (12) on the block (1). NOTE: Wrap the seal tape on the plug (12). : 8 mm : 34 to 37 N m (3.5 to 3.8 kgf m) IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the adjusting screw of the reducing valve (18). 7. Install the O-rings (19), (20) and (21) on the reducing valve (18) and install the reducing valve (18) on the block (1). : 27 mm : 68.6 to 78.5 N m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf m)

W3-8-5


LOWER MACHINERY / Control Valve (Blank)

W3-8-6


SECTION 1

GENERAL —CONTENTS— Group 1 Specifications Specifications (Refer to Link-Belt Technical Data Manual)

Group 2 Component Layout Main Component Layout .............................. T1-2-1 In Cab ........................................................... T1-2-3 Around Engine.............................................. T1-2-5 Electrical Parts.............................................. T1-2-7 Hydraulic Equipment .................................. T1-2-16

Group 3 Component Specifications Engine .......................................................... T1-3-1 Engine Accessories ...................................... T1-3-4 Hydraulic Equipment .................................... T1-3-5 Filter............................................................ T1-3-10

2CNT-1-1


(Blank)

2CNT-1-2


GENERAL / Component Layout MAIN COMPONENTS : LAYOUT

13

14

15

16

Crane Upper 12 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30

17 18 19

31

20 21 23 29

22 24

29 25 26 27

28

28

T2CN-01-02-001

1-

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve

9-

Engine

17 - Fuel Tank

23-

Hydraulic Oil Tank Pilot Filter

10 - Front Drum 11 - EGR Cooler

4-

Drain Filter

12 - Rear Drum*

567-

Air Cleaner Flip Cylinder Pump Assembly

13 - Reserve Tank 14 - Radiator, Intercooler 1 15 - Boom Hoist Drum*

8-

Muffler

16 - Boom Hoist Sheave Bearings

2

18 - Rear Control Valve 19 - 3-Spool Solenoid Valve (under Rear Drum) (Counterweight, Flip) 20 - 2-Spool Control Valve (under Rear Drum) (Swing, Counterweight, Flip) 21 - Front Control Valve 22 - Accumulator 23 - 4-Spool Solenoid Valve (under Rear Drum) (Foot Cylinder, Lower Hydraulic Source) 24 - Hydraulic Oil Cooler

*1: The tower boom hoist drum is provided for the tower. *2: The tower jib boom hoist drum is provided for the tower.

T1-2-1

25 - Hydraulic Oil Cooler Solenoid Valve (under Boom Hoist Drum) 26 - Turntable Bearing 27 - Rotating Joint

28 - Battery

29 - Swing Reduction Unit 30 - Upper Revolving Frame 31 - Foot Pin Removal/Installation Mechanism


GENERAL / Component Layout Base Carrier

2

3 4

1

6 5 14

13 7

12 15 11 8 10 9

T2CN-01-02-002

12-

Lower Frame Turntable Bearing

34-

Track Shoe Rotating Joint

5 - Side Frame Joint Mechanism 6 - Jack-Up / Side Frame Joint Control Valve 7 - Jack-Up Mechanism 8 - Lower Weight

9 - Track Take-Up Idler 10 - Upper Roller

13 - Travel Mechanism 14 - Connector Box

11 - Lower Roller 12 - Side Frame

15 - Terminal Box

T1-2-2


GENERAL / Component Layout IN CAB 1

2 12 3

4

5

14

6 13 7

11 10 9 8 T2CN-01-02-003

1-

Rear Overhead Panel

5-

Switch Panel

9-

234-

Side Overhead Panel Left Stand Moment Limiter

678-

Monitor Panel Swing Lock Pedal Level Gauge

10 - Pilot Shut-Off Lever 11 - Right Stand

T1-2-3

Accelerator Pedal

12 - Air Conditioner Control Panel 13 - Fuse Box 14 - Controller Box


GENERAL / Component Layout • Armchair Lever

1

7

1234567-

2

6

3

5

4

T2CN-01-02-004

Front Drum Lever (with Speed Sensing) Rear Drum Lever (with Speed Sensing) Boom Hoist Lever (with Speed Sensing) Travel Lever (Right) Travel Lever (Left) Third / Quick Draw Lever Swing Lever (with Accelerator Grip, Swing Brake Switch, Horn Switch)

NOTE: In case of the tower, Rear Drum ψ Tower Jib Boom Hoist Boom Hoist ψ Tower Boom Hoist

T1-2-4


GENERAL / Component Layout AROUND ENGINE Left Side 1

2

3

T2CG-01-02-011

8

7

6

Machine Front

5

4

Machine Rear

11

12-

Radiator PCV Valve

4 - Injection Pump 5 - Engine Oil Restriction Switch

3-

Muffler

6 - Engine Oil Filter

10

7 - Engine Oil Pressure Switch 8 - Air Drier (in front of Radiator) 9 - Water Separator

T1-2-5

T2CG-01-02-012

9

10 - Fuel Filter 11 - Air Tank


GENERAL / Component Layout Right Side 12

13

14

15

16

T2CG-01-02-010

20

19

18

17 Machine Rear

12 - Muffler 13 - Air Cleaner Restriction Sensor 14 - Air Cleaner

15 - Coolant Temperature Sensor 16 - Overheat Switch

Machine Front

17 - Alternator

19 - Starter Motor

18 - Turbocharger

20 - Air Compressor

T1-2-6


GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL PARTS In Cab

• Left Stand 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

8

8 T2CN-01-02-005

1 - Master Control Override Key Switch 2 - Boom Hoist Limit Override Switch 3 - Hoist Drum Function Limit Override Switches

4-

Brake Free Mode Disable/Enable Key Switch 5 - Pilot Control Oil Pressure Override Switch 6 - Live Mast Flip Cylinder Switch

7-

Reeving Winch Switch

8-

Drum Speed Control Dials

9-

Swing Speed Control Dial

• Right Stand

1

1-

Throttle Lock Switch

2

2-

T1-2-7

Drum Pawl Switches

T2CN-01-02-006


GENERAL / Component Layout • Rear Overhead Panel 1

2

T2CN-01-02-007

1-

AM / FM Radio

2-

Accessory

• Side Overhead Panel 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

T2CN-01-02-008

1-

Emergency Engine Stop Button

5-

Drum Rotation Indicator Switch

9-

Roof Wiper Switch

2-

Boom Foot Pin Control Switches

6-

Travel High Speed Switch

10 - Front Wiper Switch

3-

Low Drum Speed Lock Switch

7-

Drum Light Switch

11 - Air Conditioning Controls

4-

HYD.Tagline Switch (If Equipped)

8-

Working Light Switch

T1-2-8


GENERAL / Component Layout • Inside Rear Cover 1

Fuse Box

2

3

4

5

6

Relay Panel

9

8

7 T2CN-01-02-009

1-

ECU

4 - Memory Clear Switch

6 - ECU Lamp (Orange)

8 - MC2 / A

2-

Accelerator Lock Switch

5 - ECU Lamp (Red)

7 - MC2 / B

9 - IDU

3-

Troubleshooting Switch

• Relay Panel The relay layout is not fixed. Check the wiring tag and the electrical circuit diagram.

T2CN-01-02-010

NOTE: Wiring Tag Name R1 Mast Cylinder Extend/Retract Relay R2 Engine Oil Pressure Relay R3 Engine Starting Relay R4 Mast Cylinder shrink Relay R5 Extra Components Power Source Relay

T1-2-9

R6 ............. (Unused) R7 ............. Swing Brake Relay 1 R8 ............. Swing Brake Relay 2 R9 ............. Glow Lamp Relay R10 .......... Oil Cooler Fan Relay


GENERAL / Component Layout • Fuse Box 1

2

T2CN-01-02-0011

1

Fuse Box 1 1-

Preheat Indicator ..........5A 11 - Air conditioner power . 15A

2-

Rear drum

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 1617 18 1920 Fuse Box 1

12 - Swing alarm power..... 10A

pawl switch ..............10A 3-

Optional ........................3A 13 - Audio alarm power ....... 5A

4-

Dome light.....................5A 14 - Radio............................ 5A

5-

IDU................................5A 15 - Pilot control shutoff

6-

MCB..............................5A 16 - Glow timer .................... 5A

7-

MCA..............................5A 17 - ECU............................ 10A

8-

Horn ............................10A 18 - Controller key switch .. 5A

9-

Backup power ...............3A 19 - Monitor panel ............... 5A

2

21 22 2324 25 2627 28 29 30 31 3233 34 353637 3839 40

lever deactivation ...... 5A

10 - Fuel pump...................10A 20 - Battery relay ............... 10A

Fuse Box 2

M25N-07-078

Fuse Box 2 21 - Engine start signal ......10A 31 - Air conditioner .............. 3A 22 - Front drum pawl

32 - Optional...................... 10A

switch........................10A 23 - Travel mode

33 - Microphone

/ HYD.Tagline

/ Speaker amplifier

/ Reeving winch ...........5A

/ anemometer............ 5A

24 - Air conditioner...............3A 34 - Oil cooler Fan............... 5A 25 - Work light....................20A 35 - Roof wiper .................... 5A 26 - Side light (Optional). ...10A 36 - Swing brake ................. 5A 27 - Solenoid (MCB) ..........15A 37 - Front wiper ................... 5A 28 - Solenoid (MCA) ..........15A 38 - Lighter ........................ 20A 29 - PWM(MCB).................15A 39 - Live mast / jacks......... 10A 30 - PWM(MCA).................15A 40 - ECU Main................... 20A

T1-2-10


GENERAL / Component Layout • Monitor Panel 4 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

3 5

6 2

7 8 9 10 11

1

12 13

T2CN-01-02-012

14

15

T1-2-11

Hour Meter Engine Fuel Level Gauge Engine Water Temperature Gauge Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Hydraulic Oil Pressure Engine Start Protocol Violation Indicator Engine Coolant Level Indicator Low Battery Indicator Engine Oil Filter Restriction Indicator Engine Preheater Indicator Air Filter Restriction Indicator Controller Malfunction Indicator Engine Overheat Indicator Cigarette Lighter Engine Starter Key Switch


GENERAL / Component Layout Lower Frame Electrical Parts

Connector Box

Front Terminal Box

Remote Control Box (Crawler Joint Cylinder/Counterweight)

T2CN-01-02-013

T1-2-12


GENERAL / Component Layout Electrical Components (Right Stand) 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

13 14

Reserve Tank

15

16

10 11 12

Machine Front Machine Front Receiver Tank

T2CN-01-02-014

T2CN-01-02-015

1234-

Safety Relay EDU Relay Swing Lamp Relay Horn Relay

5678-

Heater Instruction Relay 3-Color Light (Green) Relay 3-Color Light (Yellow) Relay 3-Color Light (Red) Relay

910 11 12 -

3-Color Light Buzzer Relay Flasher Relay Off Delay Relay Charge Relay

13 14 15 16 -

Fusible Link (45 A) Fusible Link (60 A) Coolant Level Switch Refrigerant Pressure Switch

Electrical Components (Left Stand)

Machine Front

Machine Front

3 1

2 T2CN-01-02-016

1 - Horn 2 - Battery (12V)

T2CN-01-02-017

3-

T1-2-13

Fuel Sensor


GENERAL / Component Layout Crane Upper Electrical Parts

• Around Winch

Boom Hoist Drum

Rear Drum

2

Front Drum

3

1

4

5

T2CN-01-02-018

1-

Boom Hoist Drum Speed Sensor 2 - Rear Drum Speed Sensor

3 - Front Drum Speed Sensor

4 - Rear Drum Lock Motor

T1-2-14

5 - Front Drum Lock Motor


GENERAL / Component Layout • Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor Left Bed

Accumulator

Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor

Machine Front T2CN-01-02-019

T1-2-15


GENERAL / Component Layout HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT Pump Assembly

1 2 3 4

5

11

6 10

9 8

T2CG-01-02-025

7

1-

Reeving Winch Pump (Optional)

4 - Pilot Pump (P6)

2-

PTO Gear Box

5 - Swing Pump (P3)

3-

Boom Foot / Lower Hydraulic Power Source Pump (P5)

6 - Oil Cooler Pump (P4)

7 - Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (For Swing Pump) 8 - Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (For Main Pump) 9 - Main Pump 2 (P2)

T1-2-16

10 - Power Increase Solenoid Valve (For Main Pump) 11 - Main Pump 1 (P1)


GENERAL / Component Layout Control Valves (Front, Rear) Front Control Valve

5 1

4 Machine Front

2 Machine Rear

3

Rear Control Valve 14

13

12 6 7 11 8 Machine Front

Machine Rear

10

9

T2CN-01-02-020

1-

Main Relief Valve

5-

Front Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

9-

2-

Front Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve

6-

Main Relief Valve

7-

Boom Hoist Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve

8-

Boom Hoist Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor

10 - Rear Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor 11 - Rear Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor 12 - Rear Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

3-

Front Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor 4 - Front Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor

T1-2-17

Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve

13 - Boom Hoist Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor 14 - Boom Hoist Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve


GENERAL / Component Layout 4-Spool Solenoid Valve (Boom Foot Pin Removal / Installation, Lower Control Hydraulic Source)

Swing Control Valve 6

18 19

1

20 21

5 4 2 22

26 25 24

T2CG-01-02-027

3

1-

56-

Hydraulic Oil Source Solenoid Valve in 3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Left Swing Pilot Pressure Sensor Right Swing Pilot Pressure Sensor Hydraulic Oil Source Solenoid Valve in 3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Right Swing Spool Left Swing Spool

7-

Slow Return Valve

8-

Flip Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Extend)

9-

Counterweight Cylinder Left Solenoid Valve (Retract) Counterweight Cylinder Right Solenoid Valve (Retract) Port Relief Valve (Counterweight Cylinder Right) Port Relief Valve (Counterweight Cylinder Left) Counterweight Cylinder Right Solenoid Valve (Extend)

2-

3-Spool Solenoid Valve (Counterweight/ Flip Cylinder)

34-

7 17

8 9 10

16 10 -

11 -

15 14

12 -

13 12

T2CG-01-02-029

23

11

T2CG-01-02-028

13 -

T1-2-18

14 - Counterweight Cylinder Left Solenoid Valve (Extend) 15 - Flip Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Retract) 16 - Relief valve 17 - Slow Return Valve

18 - (Unused) 19 - Lower Hydraulic Supply Solenoid Valve 20 - Left Boom Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Retracting) 21 - Right Boom Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Retracting) 22 - Relief valve

23 - Right Boom Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Extending) 24 - Left Boom Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Extending) 25 - (Unused)

26 - (Unused)


GENERAL / Component Layout 6-Spool Solenoid Valve (Lower Control Valve) (Jack-Up, Side Frame Joint)

1 14

2 13 3 2 4 11 5 10 6 9 7 8

T2CG-01-02-030

1-

2-

Pressure-Reducing Valve

Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Front Right) Retract) 3 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Front Left) Retract) 4 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Rear Right) Retract)

5-

Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Rear Left) Retract) 6 - Solenoid Valve (Side Frame Joint Cylinder (Right) Retract) 7 - Solenoid Valve (Side Frame Joint Cylinder (Left) Retract) 8 - Solenoid Valve (Side Frame Joint Cylinder (Left) Extend)

9-

Solenoid Valve (Side Frame Joint Cylinder (Right) Extend) 10 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Rear Left) Extend) 11 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Rear Right) Extend)

T1-2-19

12 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Front Left) Extend) 13 - Solenoid Valve (Jack-Up Cylinder (Front Right) Extend) 14 - Relief valve:


GENERAL / Component Layout (Blank)

T1-2-20


GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE Manufacturer................................................................. MITSUBISHI FUSO TRUCK & BUS CORPORATION Model ............................................................................ 6M70-TL Type .............................................................................. 4-Cycle Water-Cooled In-Line Direct Injection, with Turbo for Air-Cooling I / C Application Cyl. No. Bore u Stroke .................................................. 6-135 x 150 mm (5.3 x 5.9 in) Piston Displacement..................................................... 12.88 L (786 in3) Rated Output ................................................................ 272 kW / 2000 min-1 (370 PS / 2000 rpm) Compression Ratio ....................................................... 17.5 Dry Weight .................................................................... 1155 kg excluding accessories Firing Order................................................................... 1-5-3-6-2-4 Rotational Direction ...................................................... Clockwise, Viewed from Fan Length × Width × Height............................................... 1473 x 869 x 1259 mm (58 x 34 x 50 in) Cooling System Cooling Fan .................................................................. Dia. 850 6-Blade Suction Type Fan / Pulley Ratio (Flank / Fan).................................... 0.825 Thermostat.................................................................... Cracking Temperature at Atmospheric Pressure: 76.5qC (169.7 qF) Full-Open Temperature: 90qC (194 qF) Water Pump .................................................................. Centrifugal Swirl Pump, V Belt Drive Lubricating System Lubrication Pump Type ................................................ Gear Pump Oil Filter........................................................................ Full-Flow / Paper Element Type with Bypass Oil Cooler..................................................................... Built-In Water-Cooled Flat Tube Type Oil Capacity ................................................................. Max.27 L (7.1 US gal), Min.24 L (6.3 US gal) Oil pan Capacity .......................................................... Max.23 L (6.1 US gal), Min.20 L (5.3 US gal) Starting System Electric Motor............................................................... Solenoid Depressing Type Speed Reduction Voltage / Output ........................................................... 24 V / 5.5 kW Engine Stop System Method ......................................................................... Fuel Shut-Off Method (Stop Solenoid Method) Alternator Method ......................................................................... Alternating Current Type (With Built-In IC Regulator) Voltage / Output ........................................................... 24 V / 50 A

T1-3-1


GENERAL / Component Specifications Supercharging System Type .............................................................................. Exhaust Gas Turbo Type TF08L Fuel System Type .............................................................................. Common Rail Type Injector .......................................................................... Electric Control Injection Control Adjuster.............................................. Electronic Control Performance IMPORTANT: This list shows design specifications, which are not servicing standards. Lubricant Consumption................................................. 100 ml or Less (at Rating Using New Lubricant) Fuel Consumption Ratio ............................................... 220 g / kW·h (162 g / PS·h) or Less (At Rating Using New Lubricant) Maximum Output Torque .............................................. 1510 N·m (154 kgf·m, 1114 lbf ft) or more / 1600 min-1 Unloaded Speed ........................................................... Min.: 800r25 min-1 Max.: 2100r25 min-1

T1-3-2


GENERAL / Component Specifications Engine Performance Curve (6M70-TL) Test conditions 1. JIS D 0006 (Specifications for Diesel Engine for Construction Machinery and Performance Test Method) under standard atmospheric conditions 2. Fan, and exhaust silencer are not provided.

Torque

kW

Torque N m

(kgf m)

(lbf ft)

1600

(163)

(1180)

1400

(143)

(1033)

1200

(122)

(885)

1000

(102)

(738)

280 260 240 220

Output Power

200 Output Power

180 160 140 120 100 80 Fuel Consumption Rate

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

-1

Engine Speed min (rpm)

T1-3-3

Fuel Consumption Rate g / (kWh) (g / PS h) 220

(162)

200

(147)

100

(74)

T2CG-01-03-001


GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE ACCESSORIES Radiator Assembly Type ................................................Radiator / Intercooler Parallel Type Radiator Intercooler Core Row .......................................4 1 Fin Pitch..........................................4.5 4.0 Fin Shape .......................................Corrugated Louver Corrugated Wave Radiating Area................................41.43m2 21.76m2 Heat Exchange Capacity................133730 kcal/h 35690 kcal/h Cap Opening Pressure...................49 kPa (0.5 kgf / cm2, 7.1 psi) Battery Model ..............................................195G51-MF(Hybrid Type) Capacity ..........................................170 Ah (20- Hour Rating) Voltage ............................................12 V Discharging Time ............................500 A (-15˚C) Duration ..........................................4.8 min. or longer 30-Second Voltage .........................9.4 V or more Height x Width x Length..................257 x 222 x 508 mm (10 x 8.7 x 20 in) Weight.............................................41 kg (91 lb)

T1-3-4


GENERAL / Component Specifications HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT Pumps Drive Gear Ratio ........................................................... Main Pumps (P1, P2) Swing / A-Frame Raise/Lower Pump (P3) Oil Cooler Pump (P4) Boom Foot / Lower Hydraulic Pump (P5) Pilot Pump (P6)

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Main Pumps (1, 2) Type .............................................................................. Swash Plate Type Variable Displacement Plunger Pump Model ............................................................................ K3V140DTP Theoretical Displacement ............................................. 28 to 140 cm3 (1.7 to 8.5 in3) / rev Maximum Oil Flow Rate (Theoretical Valve) ................ 279 L / min (74 GPM) Dry Weight .................................................................... 185 kg (408 lb) (P1+P2+P3) Swing Pump (P3) Type .............................................................................. Swash Plate Type Variable Displacement Plunger Pump Model ............................................................................ K5V80S Theoretical Displacement ............................................. 48 to 80 cm3 (2.9 to 4.9 in3) / rev Maximum Oil Flow Rate (Theoretical Valve) ................ 160 L / min (42 GPM) Main Pumps (1, 2) And Swing Pump Wight ................. 185 kg (408 lb) Total Oil Cooler Pump (P4) Type .............................................................................. Constant Capacity Type Gear Pump Model ............................................................................ PHB22RA33 Theoretical Displacement ............................................. 22.2 cm3 (1.4 in3) / rev Dry Weight .................................................................... 4.2 kg (9.3 lb)

Pilot Pump (P6), Boom Foot / Lower Hydraulic Pump (P5) Type .............................................................................. Constant Capacity Type Gear Pump Model ............................................................................ SD1A3020 Theoretical Displacement ............................................. 29.9 cm3 (1.8 in3) / rev (Pilot Pump) 20.4 cm3 (1.2 in3) / rev (Boom Foot / Lower Hydraulic Pump) Maximum Oil Flow Rate (Theoretical Valve) ................ 59.8 L / min (15.8 GPM) (Pilot Pump) 40.8 L / min (10.8 GPM) (Boom Foot / Lower, Hydraulic Pump) Front Control Valve Type .............................................................................. 4-Spool Hydraulic Pilot Type Model ............................................................................ MWP4253SC773 Main Relief Set-Pressure.............................................. 31.4 MPa (320 kgf / cm2, 4551 psi) @275 L / min (73 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 80 kg (177 lb) Rear Control Valve Type .............................................................................. 4-Spool Hydraulic Pilot Type Model ............................................................................ MWP425S2CT764A Main Relief Set-Pressure.............................................. 31.4 MPa (320 kgf / cm2, 4551 psi) @ 275 L / min (73 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 107 kg (236 lb) Swing Control Valve Type .............................................................................. 4-Spool Hydraulic Pilot Type Model ............................................................................ MW2252P7209A Main Relief Set-Pressure.............................................. 31.9 MPa (325 kgf / cm2, 4623 psi) @155 L / min (41 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 38 kg (84 lb)

T1-3-5


GENERAL / Component Specifications Boom Foot / Lower Hydraulic / Control Valve Type .............................................................................. Solenoid Select Type Model ............................................................................ KMC10-4082 Relief Set-Pressure ...................................................... 20.6 MPa (210 kgf / cm2, 2987 psi) @70 L / min (18 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 22 kg (49 lb) Flip / Counterweight Control Valve Type .............................................................................. 3-Spool Solenoid Select Type Model ............................................................................ KMC10-3059 Relief Set-Pressure ...................................................... 29.4 MPa (300 kgf / cm2, 4267 psi) @70 L / min (18 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 20 kg (45 lb) Jack-Up / Side Frame Control Valve Type .............................................................................. 6-Spool Solenoid Select Type Relief Set-Pressure ...................................................... 20.6 MPa (210 kgf / cm2, 2987 psi) @60 L / min (16 GPM) Weight........................................................................... 25 kg (56 lb)

T1-3-6


GENERAL / Component Specifications Boom Hoist System (Machine No.5 or earlier) Weight........................................................................... 2000 kg (4410 lb) Reduction Gear Type ...................................................................... 3-Stage Planetary Reduction Gear Model .................................................................... MRP1703W-500 Reduction Gear Ratio ........................................... 134.6 Boom Hoist Motor Type ...................................................................... Swash Plate Type Variable Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Model .................................................................... M3B280BP / 136-XV030A Theoretical Displacement ..................................... 136 to 280 cm3 (8.4 to 17 in3) / rev Overload Relief Set-Pressure ............................... 34.3 MPa (350 kgf / cm2, 4978 psi) @30 L / min (7.9 GPM) Brake Release Pressure....................................... 2.6 MPa (26.5 kgf / cm2, 377 psi) Weight ................................................................... 131 kg (289 lb) Boom Hoist System (Machine No.6 or later) Weight........................................................................... 1670 kg (3683 lb) Reduction Gear Type ...................................................................... 3-Stage Planetary Reduction Gear Model .................................................................... WT17DS Reduction Gear Ratio ........................................... 97.8 Boom Hoist Motor Type ...................................................................... Swash Plate Type Variable Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Model .................................................................... M3B530BP / 178-XV138A Theoretical Displacement ..................................... 178 to 350 cm3 (11 to 21 in3) / rev Overload Relief Set-Pressure ............................... 34.3 MPa (350 kgf / cm2, 4978 psi) @30 L / min (7.9 GPM) Brake Release Pressure....................................... 2.7 MPa (27.5 kgf / cm2, 391 psi) Weight ................................................................... 209 kg (491 lb) Swing Reduction Unit Type .............................................................................. M5X130CHB-10A-RG23C34B-T Weight........................................................................... 325 kg (717 lb) Reduction Gear Type ...................................................................... 1-Stage Spur Gear + 1-Stage Planetary Reduction Gear Reduction Ratio .................................................... 33.88 Swing Motor Type ...................................................................... Swash Plate Type Constant Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Theoretical Displacement ..................................... 129.7 cm3 (7.9 in3) / rev Brake Release Pressure....................................... 3.4 MPa (34.7 kgf / cm2, 494 psi) Winch Assembly (Front / Rear) Weight (Front / Rear) .................................................... 1770 kg (3903 lb) Reduction Gear Type ...................................................................... 2-Stage Planetary Reduction Gear Reduction Gear Ratio ........................................... 23.0 Winch Motor Type ...................................................................... Swash Plate Type Variable Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Model .................................................................... M3B800BP-800 / 400-XV079B Theoretical Displacement ..................................... 400 to 800 cm3 (24 to 49 in3) / rev Overload Relief Set-Pressure ............................... 34.3 MPa (350 kgf / cm2, 4978 psi) @30 L / min (7.9 GPM) Brake Release Pressure....................................... 3.8 MPa (39 kgf / cm2, 555 psi) Weight ................................................................... 303 kg (669 lb)

T1-3-7


GENERAL / Component Specifications Travel Mechanism Weight........................................................................... 1670 kg (3683 lb) Reduction Gear Type ...................................................................... 3-Stage Planetary Reduction Gear Model .................................................................... MRP1703W-630 Reduction Gear Ratio ........................................... 290.6 Weight ................................................................... 1550 kg (3418 lb) Travel Motor Type ...................................................................... Swash Plate Type Constant Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Model .................................................................... MSF-340VP-FL Theoretical Displacement ..................................... 165.3 to 337.2 cm3 (10.1 to 20.6 in3) / rev Overload Relief Set-Pressure ............................... 31.4 MPa (320 kgf / cm2, 4551 psi) @275 L / min (73 GPM) Parking Brake Release ......................................... Self-Pressure Release Method Weight ................................................................... 125 kg (276 lb)

Cylinder

Boom Foot

Cylinder Bore Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Cylinder Outer Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Rod Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Stroke (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Fully Retracted Length (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Weight (kg, lb) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯

50, 2.0 60, 2.4 25, 1.0 176, 7.0 379, 15 50, 111

Cylinder Bore Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Cylinder Outer Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Rod Dia. (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Stroke (mm, in) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Fully Retracted Length (mm, in) ······················ Weight (kg, lb) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯

Side Frame Joint 110, 4.4 130, 5.2 65, 2.6 865, 35 1255, 50 125, 276

T1-3-8

Counterweigh t 160, 6.3 210, 8.3 80, 3.2 1665, 66 2150, 85 323, 713

100, 4.0 120, 4.8 70, 2.8 890, 36 1280, 51 87, 192

Take-Up

Jack-Up

120, 4.8 165, 6.5 120, 4.8 200, 7.9 407, 17 71, 157

180, 7.1 220, 8.7 120, 4.8 750, 30 1070, 43 190, 419

Flip


GENERAL / Component Specifications Remote Control Valve For Hoisting / Boom Hoist (3-Spool) Model .................................................................... TH40PC3068 Stroke (mm)㧙Secondary Pilot Pressure (MPa) ... Hoisting 0.6-0.29 1-Stage 3.5-1.96 2-Stage 6.5-3.73 Stroke (in)㧙Secondary Pilot Pressure (kgf / cm2, psi) Hoisting 0.02-3.0, 42 1-Stage 0.14-20, 284 2-Stage 0.26-38, 541

Boom Hoist 0.6-0.39 6.5-3.73 Boom Hoist 0.02-4.0, 57 0.26-38, 541 -

For Travel / Third (3-Spool) Model 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 TH40PC3077A Stroke (mm)㧙Secondary Pilot Pressure (MPa) Travel 0.6-0.39 1-Stage 3.5-1.96 2-Stage Stroke (in)㧙Secondary Pilot Pressure (kgf / cm2, psi) Travel 0.02-4.0, 57 1-Stage 0.14-20, 284 2-Stage -

Fourth 0.6-0.29 3.5-1.96 6.5-3.73 Fourth 0.02-3.0, 42 0.14-20, 284 0.26-38, 541

For Swing Model 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 TH40PC1042 Stroke (mm)-Secondary Pilot Pressure (MPa) 0.6-0.39 1-Stage 7.0-2.99 Stroke (in)-Secondary Pilot Pressure (kgf / cm2, psi) 1-Stage 0.28-30, 434

0.02-4.0, 57

Oil Cooler Type 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Corrugated Wave Model 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 1382-636-8010 Outside Dimension (H x W x T) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 1130 x 506.5 x 188 mm (44 x 20 x 7.4 in) Core Dimension (H x W x T) 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 1040 x 419.4 x 31 mm (41 x 17 x 1.2 in) Core No. 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 3 Fin Pitch 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 3.5 mm (0.14 in) Radiating Area 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 13.11 m2 (1 Core) Heat Exchange Capacity········································ 82130 kcal / h

T1-3-9


GENERAL / Component Specifications Oil Cooler Fan Motor Type 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Constant Displacement Axial Plunger Motor Model 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 MSF-18-16 Theoretical Displacement㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 16.4 cm3 / (1.0 in3)rev Oil Cooler Bypass Check Valve Model 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 VA1C007A001A Cracking Pressure ....................................................... 294 to 392 kPa (3.0 to 4.0 kgf / cm2, 43 to 57 psi) @40 L / min (11 GPM) Accumulator Type 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Bladder Type Delivery Flow Rate 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 700 cm3 Maximum Set-Pressure 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 3.9 MPa (40 kgf / cm2, 569 psi)

FILTER Filtration 10 Pm 10 Pm 177 Pm (80 mesh) Drain Filter 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 10 Pm

Return Filter 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Pilot Filter 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯 Suction Filter 㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯

T1-3-10

Remarks (Yamashin Y-467500) (Yamashin GT04L-30-15) (Yamashin SFB32S-177-1220) (Yamashin SP10-10-10)


SECTION 2

SYSTEM —CONTENTS— Group 1 Control System Outline.......................................................... T2-1-1 Engine Control ............................................. T2-1-2 Pump Control ............................................... T2-1-8 Other Controls ........................................... T2-1-16

Group 2 Hydraulic System Outline.......................................................... T2-2-1 Pilot Circuit................................................... T2-2-3 Main Circuit .................................................. T2-2-6 Neutral Circuit .............................................. T2-2-8 Hoisting Circuit(Rear, Front) ...................... T2-2-10 Hoisting Circuit........................................... T2-2-22 Boom Hoist Circuit ..................................... T2-2-25 Quick Draw / Third (Optional) Circuit......... T2-2-27 Travel Circuit.............................................. T2-2-28 Swing Circuit .............................................. T2-2-32 Weight Remove and Install / Flip Circuit .............................................. T2-2-35 Boom Foot Remove and Install Circuit ...... T2-2-38 Side Frame Connection / Jack-Up Circuit....................................... T2-2-40 Take-Up Circuit (Optional) ......................... T2-2-42 Reeving Winch Circuit (Optional) .............. T2-2-43 Oil Cooler Circuit........................................ T2-2-44

Group 3 Electric System Outline.......................................................... T2-3-1 Power Source Circuit ................................... T2-3-2 Preheating Circuit ........................................ T2-3-3 Engine Starting Circuit ............................... T2-3-6 Charging Circuit ........................................... T2-3-8 Engine Stop Circuit .................................... T2-3-10 Surge Voltage Prevention Circuit............... T2-3-12 Accessory Circuit ....................................... T2-3-14 Swing Brake Release Circuit ..................... T2-3-15 Drum Lock Circuit ...................................... T2-3-16

2CNT-2-1


(Blank)

2CNT-2-2


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 OUTLINE㩷 MC (Main Controllers); (2/A and 2/B each incorporated with a microcomputer), IDU (Information Display Unit), and ECU (Engine Control Unit) are used to control the machine. MC2/A, MC2/B or ECU receives signals from the engine control accelerator, engine speed sensor and various switches, computes them, drives the solenoid valve and controls the engine and pumps. Engine Control • Engine Speed Control㩷 • Fuel Injection Control㩷 • Operation of Injection Nozzle㩷 • ECU Failure Diagnosis Control㩷 Pump Control • Main Pump Displacement Angle Control㩷 • Main Pump Power Increase Control㩷 • Calibration of Main Pump Power Increase Pressure㩷 • Swing Pump Displacement Angle Control㩷

Other Controls • Swing Alarm Control㩷 • Drum Rotation Sensing Control㩷 • Pilot Pressure Drop Alarm Indicator Control㩷 • Winch Brake Mode Control㩷 • Boom Hoist Lock Control㩷 • Engine Start Interlock Control㩷 • Motor Cut-Off Pressure Control㩷 • Front/Rear/Boom Hoist Motor Speed Control㩷 • Emergency Operation Control㩷 • Boom Hoist Drum Auto Stop Control㩷 • Front Drum Auto Stop Control㩷 • Rear Drum Auto Stop Control㩷 • Tower Jib Boom Hoist Auto Stop Control (Optional)㩷 • Second Overhoist Auto Stop Control㩷 • Front Drum Surge Pressure Reduction Control㩷 • 2-Speed Tower Jib Boom Hoist Flow Combining Control㩷 • External Indication Lamps Control (Optional)㩷 • Audible Output Control㩷

T2-1-1


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 ENGINE CONTROL㩷 Engine Speed Control Purpose:㩷 Controls the engine speed by turning the accelerator grip, depressing the accelerator pedal and operating the accelerator lock switch.㩷 Operation: 1. When turning the accelerator grip, depressing the accelerator pedal or setting the accelerator lock switch to the accelerator lock position, the voltage signals are sent to MC2/A from the accelerator grip, accelerator pedal or accelerator lock switch.㩷 2. When the accelerator lock switch is OFF, the voltage signal from accelerator lock switch becomes ineffective and the voltage signals from accelerator grip and accelerator pedal become effective.㩷 3. When the accelerator lock switch is in the accelerator lock position, the voltage signals from accelerator pedal and accelerator lock switch become effective and the voltage signal from accelerator grip becomes ineffective.㩷 4. MC2/A converts the maximum effective voltage signal to a command speed signal and sends to ECU.㩷 5. When the voltage signals from accelerator grip, accelerator pedal and accelerator lock switch become ineffective, MC2/A sets the engine speed to low idle.㩷 6. Engine speed with an accelerator at lock position is set by the following procedure.㩷 • Turn the accelerator lock switch OFF.㩷 • Adjust the engine speed by the accelerator grip or accelerator pedal㩷 • Turn the accelerator lock switch to the accelerator preset position.㩷

Accelerator Grip Accelerator Pedal Accelerator Lock Switch ON SET

T2CG-02-01-003

T2-1-2


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Fuel Injection Control Operation: ECU receives the signals from various sensors as shown below. According to these signals, ECU operates the TCV ADV solenoid valve or TCV RTD solenoid valve in order to regulate engine oil pressure which is transmitted to an electronic timer for control of fuel injection timing. Then, ECU computes these signals, determines the injected fuel amount and fuel injection timing and sends a command to the injector. The injector injects optimum fuel amount according to this command.

Purpose:㩷 ECU sets optimum injected fuel amount and fuel injection timing by detecting accelerator position, coolant temperature, intake-air temperature, boost pressure and engine speed by using the various sensors.㩷

㩷 Injector㩷

Setting the target fuel injected amount

Coolant Temperature Sensor

Intake-Air Temperature Sensor

Boost Pressure Sensor

Accelerator Position

Engine Speed Sensor

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪋㩷

T2-1-3


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Operation of Injection Nozzle㩷

No Injection Operation • When the magnet is not energized, the armature plate is pushed downward by the valve spring and the ball seat is closed.㩷 • High-pressure fuel from the Z-orifice is applied to the control chamber and the same pressure is applied to the nozzle needle side as well. 㩷 • As fuel at the nozzle needle cannot overcome the valve piston and nozzle piston, the nozzle needle is pushed downward and no injection will be made.㩷 Start Injection • When the magnet is energized, the armature plate moves upward by magnetic force and the ball seat opens.㩷 • Fuel in the control chamber is routed to the fuel tank through the A-orifice and ball seat.㩷 • As pressure in the control chamber decreases, fuel pressure at the nozzle needle overcomes the valve piston and nozzle piston and pushes the nozzle needle upward so that fuel injection starts.㩷 • If the magnet is energized continuously, the maximum injection rate is kept.㩷 End of Injection • When the magnet stops energizing, the armature plate is pushed downward by the valve spring and the ball seat is closed.㩷 • Fuel flows into the control chamber through the Z-orifice, the valve piston and nozzle needle are pushed upward and fuel injection stops.㩷

Valve Spring

Magnet Armature Plate

Control Chamber

Ball Seat Z-Orifice

Valve Piston

㪝㫌㪼㫃 (from Common Rail)

Nozzle Spring Nozzle Needle

Nozzle Sheet

Magnet Armature Plate

Ball A-Orifice Control Chamber

Valve Piston

㪝㫌㪼㫃 (from Common Rail)

Nozzle Spring Nozzle Needle High-Pressure Fuel

Valve Spring

Magnet Armature Plate

Control Chamber

Ball Seat Z-Orifice

Valve Piston

㪝㫌㪼㫃 (from Common Rail)

Nozzle Needle

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪌㩷

T2-1-4


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 ECU Failure Diagnosis Control㩷

Purpose: Detects failure of the engine through the various sensors connected to ECU and displays failure information by blinking the indicator.

㩷 㩷

Information input to ECU

Operation: 1. ECU receives the signals from various sensors. ECU computes input data and detects failures when the data is beyond the specified range.㩷 2. When ECU detects a failure, ECU lights the ECU lamp (orange or red).㩷 3. At this time, when the troubleshooting switch is set to the ON position, ECU inputs a signal, which corresponds to failure location, to MC2/A and makes ECU lamp (red) blink at the same time.㩷 4. MC2/A sends error information to IDU corresponding to the signal.㩷 5. IDU displays the error code on the connected display.㩷 NOTE: The red ECU lamp indicates a failure status that the engine cannot start, and the orange ECU lamp indicates a failure status that the engine can start.

Troubleshooting Unit (Optional) Troubleshooting Switch Red

NOTE: When the troubleshooting switch is in the ON position, blinking pattern of the red indicator indicates an error code.

Orange

ECU Lamp

Display

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪍㩷

T2-1-5


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 x Blinking Pattern of the ECU lamp㩷

Blinking pattern of the ECU lamp indicates an error code. The following example indicates error code "1.2". 㩷 Tens Digit

Ones Digit

Turn ON

Turn OFF 5GE

5GE

5GE

5GE

5GE

5GE

5GE

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪎㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

x Display Items㩷

Two-digit error codes of ECU are displayed on the right side of page 6/6. 㩷

/% # && .%- 4'. (/ $4- 4'. 4/ $4- 4'. / $4- 4'. (& $4- 4'. '0) +06.%4& $4- 4'. & $4- 4'. 㪤㫆㫍㪼

/% # 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1((

2+.16 .2 (& $4- .2 4& $4- .2 +06.%- .2 6*416 / # 6*416 / 0# 6*416 / $ 6*416 / 0$

1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1(( 1((

㪩㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅

/% # '%7

㪍㪆㪍

'%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414 '%7 '4414

Error codes are displayed at this column.

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪏㩷

T2-1-6


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 x Error Codes㩷 Error Codes 07 08 11 12 14 15 16 19 21 22 23 24 26 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 41 44 46 47 48 58 63 67 68 69

Error Codes 81 82 84 89 95

Error Item Engine overrun Injector #6 Common rail pressure sensor Segment sensor Speed sensor Increment sensor Accelerator sensor 2 Atmospheric pressure sensor Coolant temperature sensor㩷 Injection pump no-pressure feeding Injection pump over-pressure feeding Accelerator sensor 1 Air heater relay Boost pressure sensor ECU Q resistance Faulty injection pump pressure feeding, Limiter valve open Injector #1 Injector #5 Injector #3 Fuel temperature sensor Intake-air temperature sensor Injector #2 Injector #4 Starter relay 2 Accelerator interdependent diagnosis Fuel supply pump EGR M/V1 EGR M/V2 EGR M/V3

T2-1-7

Error Item Sensor supply voltage Injector Bank 1, 2 EDU relay Air heater lamp CAN 2 communication


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 PUMP CONTROL㩷

㩷 㩷

Main Pump Displacement Angle Control

㩷 Purpose: Controls delivery flow rate of the main pump according to rotation of the accelerator grip, and slowdown value and control direction of the winch motor through M/L (Moment Limiter). Operation: 1. MC2/A receives the voltage signal from the accelerator grip.㩷 2. MC2/A sends a signal that delivery flow rate is controlled from minimum to maximum according to rotation (0 to 35%) of the accelerator grip when the accelerator lock switch is in the OFF position and delivery flow rate is controlled from minimum to maximum according to rotation (0 to 100%) of the accelerator grip when the accelerator is in the lock position to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. 㩷 3. The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve supplies pilot pressure oil to the regulator in main pump according to these signals in order to change the pump displacement angle.㩷 4. As a result, delivery flow rate of the main pump becomes proportional to rotation of the accelerator grip.㩷 5. MC2/A sends a signal to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve according to slowdown value and control direction of each winch motor that is sent from M/L to MC2/A through CAN circuit. (Slow Stop Function)㩷 6. The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve controls pilot pressure oil to the regulator according to this signal, so that the main pump delivery flow rate is reduced to 20% of the accelerator grip delivery flow rate.㩷 7. When operation of the winch motor is completed or when slowdown value is returned to 100% through M/L, MC2/A sends a signal to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve for five seconds (maximum) so that the main pump delivery flow rate is returned to the accelerator grip delivery flow rate.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-8

8. The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve adjusts pilot pressure oil supplied to the regulator according to this signal, so that the main pump delivery flow rate is returned to the accelerator grip delivery flow rate for five seconds (maximum).㩷As a result, a rapid speed increase is prevented.㩷 9. Even if returning the accelerator grip rapidly, MC2/A executes the primary time lag processing for rotating the accelerator grip and cavitations in the winch motor is prevented.㩷(Response time to rapid returning: About two seconds)㩷 㩷


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 Accelerator Grip

ECU Accelerator Lock Switch

CAN IDU (M/L)

MC2/A

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve

Engine Main Pump 1

Pilot Pump

Main Pump 2

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

T2-1-9


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Main Pump Power Increase Control㩷

Purpose: Regulates pump delivery flow rate according to the engine speed and load in order to use the engine horsepower effectively. Operation: 1. The engine speed sensor sends the engine speed signal to ECU.㩷 2. ECU sends the engine load and engine speed signal to MC2/A.㩷 3. MC2/A sends the signal according to engine speed and load to the power increase solenoid valve.㩷 4. The power increase solenoid valve supplies pilot pressure oil to the regulator in main pump according to this signal and increases the pump absorption horsepower.㩷 5. As a result, pump delivery flow rate increases and working speed of the actuator increases.㩷 㩷

T2-1-10


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷

ECU

IDU

MC2/A

Power Increase Solenoid Valve

㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷 㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷1㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷 㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷㪉

Pilot Pump

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

Engine Speed Sensor

㩷 㩷

T2-1-11


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Calibration of Main Pump Power Increase Pressure㩷

Purpose: Stores the power increase output calibration data into MC2/A memory Operation: 1. Start the engine after completion of basic calibration operation.㩷 2. When the auto stop release front drum switch and auto stop release rear drum switch are turned ON, MC2/B sends a signal to MC2/A.㩷 3. MC2/A lights or blinks the pilot pressure drop alarm indicator.㩷 4. If the pilot pressure drop alarm indicator blinks other than the specified cycle of 0.5-second ON and 0.5-second OFF, turn the auto stop release front drum switch and auto stop release rear drum switch OFF.㩷 5. Calibration can be carried out by setting the accelerator lock switch to the set position and then turning it OFF.㩷 6. When selecting the power increase pressure calibration mode, MC2/A changes the power increase solenoid valve current at the rate of + 7 mA/3 sec.㩷 7. When the power increase pressure becomes the set pressure [0.3 MPa], MC2/A stores the power increase output pressure current as a calibration value by setting the accelerator lock switch to the set position. (Set positionψOFF)㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-12


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Accelerator Lock Switch

Auto Stop Release Front Drum Switch Pilot Pressure Drop Alarm Indicator

ECU

Auto Stop Release Rear Drum Switch

MC2/B

MC2/A

Power Increase Solenoid Valve

Main Pump 1㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Main Pump 2 Pilot Pump

Engine Speed Sensor

T2-1-13

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Swing Pump Displacement Angle Control㩷

Purpose: Controls the swing operating speed to make Swing operation with long boom such as tower smooth.

x Swing Speed Control㩷 Operation: 1. MC2/A receives the voltage signal from the swing speed dial. 2. MC2/A sends a signal in proportion to the position of swing speed dial to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. 3. The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve delivers pilot pressure oil to the regulator in swing pump according to this signal in order to change the pump displacement angle. 4. As a result, delivery flow rate of the swing pump becomes delivery flow rate in proportion to the rotation of swing speed dial. 㩷

T2-1-14


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Swing Speed Dial

MC2/A

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve

Swing pump

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Pilot Pump

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-1-15


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 OTHER CONTROLS㩷

Swing Alarm Control㩷 Purpose: Lights the swing alarm indicator when the swing lever is operated. Operation: 1. When the swing control lever is operated, MC2/A receives the voltage signal from the swing remote control pressure sensor in the operated side.㩷 2. MC2/A excites the swing alarm indicator relay.㩷 3. As a result, current from the battery passes through the battery relay, swing alarm indicator relay and flasher relay and lights the swing alarm indicator.㩷 㩷

T2-1-16


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 Swing Motor MC2/A

From Battery

Swing Control Valve

Battery Relay

Swing Alarm Indicator Relay

Swing Alarm Indicator (Left) Swing Pump Swing Control Lever Flash Relay Swing Alarm Indicator (Right) 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Pilot Pump

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-17


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Drum Rotation Sensing Control㩷

Purpose: Detects the rotation of a drum. This function is useful when a drum rotation cannot be detected visually during feathering hoisting or lowering operation such as alignment. Operation: 1. When a drum rotates while the drum rotation sensing switch is in the ON position, MC2/A receives a signal from the drum rotation detection sensor.㩷 2. MC2/A sends electrical current to the rotation sensing solenoid for a specific period of time. [30 ms (0.03 sec.)]㩷 3. The rotation sensing solenoid notifies drum rotation to the operator by vibrating the rod of control lever.㩷 4. When MC2/A receives a signal of specified frequency of (4 Hz) or less, MC2/A lets 100% current flow into the rotation sensing solenoid.㩷 5. When MC2/A receives a signal of specified frequency or higher, MC2/A reduces current flowing into the rotation sensing solenoid inversely proportional to the frequency.㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-18


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 NOTE: The following figure shows front drum rotation sensing situation. Control Lever Rod

Rod Front

Front Rotation Detection Sensor B

Rear Rotation Detection Sensor A

Rear Drum

Boom Hoist

Vibration

Front Rotation Detection Sensor A

Front㩷 Drum

Rod Rear

Front Rotation Sensing Solenoid

Rear Rotation Sensing Solenoid

Boom Hoist Rotation Sensing Solenoid

Rear Rotation Detection Sensor B

Boom Hoist Rotation Detection Sensor A MC2/A

Boom Hoist Drum

Drum Rotation Sensing Switch

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪇㩷

T2-1-19


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Pilot Pressure Drop Alarm Indicator Control㩷

Purpose: Notifies the operator the pilot pressure drop by lighting the pilot pressure drop alarm indicator. Operation: 1. MC2/A receives a voltage signal from the primary pilot pressure sensor.㩷 2. When the pilot pressure reaches the set pressure of 3 MPa or lower, MC2/A lights the pilot pressure drop alarm indicator.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 Accumulator

Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor

MC2/A

Pilot Pump Pilot Pressure Drop Alarm Indicator

From Battery

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

T2-1-20


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 (Blank)

T2-1-21


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Winch Brake Mode Control㩷

Purpose: Controls the brakes for the front motor and rear motor.

x Motor Brake Control㩷 Operation: 1. When hoisting or lowering operation is carried out by using front or rear motor, MC2/A receives a voltage signal from the remote control pressure sensor of the corresponding pilot circuit.㩷 2. MC2/A actuates the brake release solenoid valve for the corresponding motor.㩷 3. Therefore, as pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the motor brake through the 5-spool solenoid valve, the motor brake is released.㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-22


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷

Brake Release Solenoid Valve㩷

Brake㩷 Brake Mode Selection Key Switch㩷

Front Drum㩷

MC2/A

Release Brake Solenoid Valve

Brake㩷 Remote Control Pressure Sensor

Rear Drum㩷

Front㩷

Rear㩷

Remote Control Valve

Pilot Pump㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

T2CG-02-01-008

T2-1-23


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Boom Hoist Lock Control㩷

Purpose: Locks the boom hoist drum and releases the brake. Operation 1. When boom hoist hoisting or lowering operation is made, MC2/A receives a voltage signal from the corresponding remote control pressure sensor.㩷 2. MC2/A actuates the boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve.㩷 3. Therefore, as pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the boom hoist drum lock and boom hoist motor bake through the pressure reducing valve and boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve, the lock and brake of boom hoist motor are released.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-1-24


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 Boom Hoist Drum Boom Hoist Motor Brake

Boom Hoist Drum Lock

Boom Hoist Motor㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

From Boom Hoist Pedal㩷

Main Pump 1㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Remote Control Pressure Sensor㩷

From Boom Hoist Pedal㩷

Boom Hoist㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Valve㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

T2-1-25


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Engine Start Interlock Control㩷

Purpose: Prevents the engine from starting when engine start involves a potential hazard. Front Drum Brake Mode Selection Switch㩷

Operation: 1. MC2/A activates the engine starting relay when MC2/A receives an auto brake position signal from front and rear drums brake mode selection switch while the swing brake switch is set in the brake position.㩷 2. When the key switch is set to the start position, the voltage signal passes through the engine starting relay, the starter relay operates, the starter motor starts turning and the engine starts.㩷 3. MC2/A lights the brake unapplied indicator for five seconds when the key switch is turned to the start position while the engine starting relay is OFF.㩷

Rear Drum Brake Mode Selection Switch㩷 MC2/A Swing Brake Switch

Key Switch

Brake Unapplied Indicator㩷

Engine Starting Relay㩷

Starter Relay㩷

Starter Motor 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷

T2-1-26


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Motor Cut-Off Pressure Control㩷

Purpose: Regulates the lowering speed by reducing cut-off pressures of the front or rear motors.

Front Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor

Rear Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor㩷

Operation: 1. MC2/A sends a signal to either front or rear motor output torque limit solenoid valve when MC2/A receives a voltage signal that represents operating pressure of the front or rear lowering remote control pressure sensor is 0.3 MPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 43.6 psi) or higher.㩷 2. Therefore, either front or rear motor output torque limit solenoid valve operates, motor cut-off pressure is reduced and the lowering speed is regulated.㩷 㩷

Rear Drum

Rear Motor Output Torque Limit Solenoid Valve㩷

Front Drum

Front Motor Output Torque Limit Solenoid Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

T2-1-27


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Front, Rear and Boom Hoist Motor Speed Control㩷

Purpose: Controls the speed of front, rear and boom hoist motors by changing the displacement angle of motors according to the position of speed control dial. Operation: 1. The speed control dial sends a voltage signal to MC2/B when operating the speed control dial of the front, rear or boom hoist motor while the low speed lock switch is in the OFF position.㩷 2. MC2/B sends a signal in proportion to the position of speed control dial to the front, rear or boom hoist motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve.㩷 3. The front, rear or boom hoist motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve delivers pilot pressure oil according to the signal to each motor regulator.㩷 4. Therefore, the displacement angle of front, rear or boom hoist motor is changed and each motor speed is regulated.㩷 㩷

T2-1-28


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 NOTE: The following figure shows front motor speed control.㩷 The rear and boom hoist motors use the same control method. 㩷

Slow Speed Lock Switch㩷

Speed Control Front Dial㩷

Front Drum㩷 Front Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve 㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Main Pump 1㩷

Rear

Boom Hoist㩷

Front㩷 Remote Control Valve㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷 Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚䌎㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

T2-1-29


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Emergency Operation Control㩷

Purpose: The brake release solenoid valve releases the drum motor brake by turning an emergency operation switch ON even if a failure of MC2/A occurs. Operation: 1. If a signal between MC2/A and the brake release solenoid valve is blocked due to the internal logic circuit failure of MC2/A, the brake release solenoid valve is switched and pilot pressure oil acting on the drum motor brake flows to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 2. As a result, the drum motor brake is operated suddenly despite of hoisting, boom hoisting or swing operation.㩷 3. At this time, when the emergency operation switch is set to the ON position, electric current flows from terminal D4 to terminal A23 of MC2/A.㩷 4. Electric current from terminal A23 flows through the logic circuit of MC2/A and flows to the swing brake release solenoid valve, boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve and front/rear motor brake release solenoid valves through terminals E4, E18, E5 and E17.㩷 Terminal E4:㩷Boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve (5-spool solenoid valve unit) Terminal E18:㩷Front motor brake release solenoid valve Terminal E5:㩷 Rear motor brake release solenoid valve Terminal E17:㩷Swing brake release solenoid valve (5-spool solenoid valve unit)㩷 5. Therefore, when each㩷 motor brake release solenoid valve of front/rear drums, boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve and swing brake release solenoid valve are switched, pressure oil from the pilot pump acts on the drum motor brake.㩷 6. Therefore, the drum motor brake is released. Then the hoisting, boom hoisting and swing operations can be done even if a failure of the logic circuit in MC2/A occurs.㩷 㩷

T2-1-30


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Front Motor Brake Release Solenoid Valve

Front Motor㩷 Rear Motor Brake Release Solenoid Valve

Emergency Operation Switch㩷

Rear Motor㩷

Boom Hoist Motor㩷

Swing Motor㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪈㪊㩷

T2-1-31


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Boom Hoist Drum Auto Stop Control㩷

Purpose: Controls pilot pressure by actuating the boom hoist drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve according to a limit switch signal, IDU data and a cancellation switch signal. Operation: 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal from the limit switch, IDU and the cancellation switch.㩷 2. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the boom hoist drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 3. Therefore, the boom hoist drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve operates and blocks pilot pressure oil flowing through the boom hoist spool in rear control valve.㩷 4. As the boom hoist spool returns to the neutral position and pressure oil from main pump 1 does not flow, the boom hoist motor stops.㩷 㩷

T2-1-32


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lowering Proportional SOL㩷

Auto Stop Release Boom Hoist SW Auto Stop Override Key SW

Boom Anti-Two Block Tower Upper Limiter Boom Secondary Anti-Two Block

Crane Terminal Box㩷

Main Hook Anti-Two Block

Boom Hoist Drum Hoisting Stop㩷

Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block

Boom Hoist Drum Lowering Stop㩷 Support Prevention Tower Breakage Prevention㩷

Tower Terminal Box㩷 Tower Jib Anti-Two Block

Tower Jib Back Stop Alignment

Main Hook Anti-Two Block Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block Tower Jib Secondary Anti-Two Block

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T2-1-33


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Front Drum Auto Stop Control㩷

Purpose: Controls pilot pressure by actuating the front drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve according to a limit switch signal, IDU data and a cancellation switch signal. Operation: 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal from the limit switch, IDU and the cancellation switch.㩷 2. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the front drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 3. Therefore, the front drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve operates and blocks pilot pressure oil flowing through the front spool (low) in rear control valve.㩷 4. As the front spool (low) returns to the neutral position and pressure oil from main pump 2 does not flow, the front motor stops.㩷 㩷

T2-1-34


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷

Front Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL㩷

Front Drum Lowering Proportional SOL㩷

Auto Stop Release Front SW Auto Stop Override Key SW

Boom Secondary Anti-Two Block

Crane Terminal Box㩷

Main Hook Anti-Two Block

Front Drum Hoisting Stop㩷

Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block

Front Drum Lowering Stop Support Prevention Tower Terminal Box㩷

Main Hook Anti-Two Block Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block Tower Jib Secondary Anti-Two Block

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

T2-1-35


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Rear Drum Auto Stop Control㩷

Purpose: Controls pilot pressure by actuating the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve according to a limit switch signal, IDU data and a cancellation switch signal. Operation: 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal from the limit switch, IDU and the cancellation switch.㩷 2. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 3. Therefore, the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve operates and blocks pilot pressure oil flowing through the rear spool (low) in rear control valve.㩷 4. As the rear spool (low) returns to the neutral position, pressure oil from main pump 1 does not flow, the rear motor stops.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-36


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷

Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL㩷

Rear Drum Lowering Proportional SOL㩷

Auto Stop Release Front SW Auto Stop Override Key SW

Boom Anti-Two Block Tower Upper Anti-Two Block

Crane Terminal Box㩷

Rear Drum Hoisting Stop㩷

Main Hook Anti-Two Block

Rear Drum Lowering Stop㩷

Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block

Support Prevention㩷 Tower Breakage Prevention

Crane Terminal Box㩷 Tower Jib Anti-Two Block

Tower Jib Back Stop Alignment

Main Hook Anti-Two Block Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block Tower Jib Secondary Anti-Two Block

㩷 T2CN-02-01-005

T2-1-37


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Tower Jib Boom Hoist Auto Stop Control (Optional)㩷

Purpose: Controls pilot pressure by actuating the tower jib hoisting or lowering solenoid valve according to a limit switch signal, IDU data and a cancellation switch signal. Operation:㩷 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal from the limit switch, IDU and the cancellation switch.㩷 2. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the tower jib hoisting or lowering solenoid valve.㩷 3. Therefore, the tower jib hoisting or lowering solenoid valve operates and blocks pilot pressure oil flowing through the spool in front control valve.㩷 4. As the spool returns to the neutral position and pressure oil from main pump 2 does not flow, the tower jib boom hoist motor stops.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-38


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Tower Jib Hoisting SOL

Tower Jib Lowering SOL

Clamshell Lower Anti-Two Block Boom Secondary Anti-Two Block

Crane Terminal Box㩷

Main Hook Anti-Two Block

Tower Jib Hoisting Stop㩷

Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block

Tower Jib Lowering Stop㩷 Support Prevention Tower Terminal Box

Main Hook Anti-Two Block

Aux. Hook Anti-Two Block Tower Jib Second Anti-Two Block

T2CN-02-01-006㩷

T2-1-39


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Second Overhoist Auto Stop Control㩷

Purpose: Controls primary pilot pressure for the front, rear, third and boom hoist by switching the second overhoist solenoid valve ON/OFF according to a limit switch signal and a remote control pressure restoration switch signal. Operation: 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal from the limit switch when overhoisting, circuit breaking or short-circuit occurs.㩷 2. MC2/B turns the second overhoist solenoid valve OFF and blocks pilot pressure oil flowing through the front, rear, third and boom hoist pilot valves.㩷 3. Therefore, the corresponding spools in front or rear control valve return to the neutral position, the motors operated at front, rear, third and boom hoist stop.㩷 4. MC2/B receives a signal from the remote control pressure restoration switch by turning the remote control pressure restoration switch ON.㩷 5. MC2/B turns the second overhoist solenoid valve ON and delivers pressure oil from the pilot pump to the front, rear, third and boom hoist pilot valves.㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-40


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Second Overhoist SOL

Boom Secondary Anti-Two Block

Tower Terminal Box㩷

Tower Jib Second Anti-Two Block㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

T2-1-41


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Front Drum Surge Pressure Reduction Control㩷

Purpose: Slowly reduces pilot pressure applied to the front spool (low) in front control valve by controlling the front drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve in order to reduce a surge pressure caused at auto stop of the front drum. Operation: 1. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the front drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 2. At auto stop of the front drum, the front drum hoisting or lowering solenoid valve delivers pressure oil from the front pilot valve to the hydraulic oil tank according to this voltage signal. This reduces the surge pressure.㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-1-42


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Front Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL㩷

Front Drum Lowering Proportional SOL㩷

Support Prevention㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪇㩷

T2-1-43


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 2-Speed Tower Jib Boom Hoist Flow Combining Limit Control㩷

㩷 㩷

Purpose: When the attachment is a tower and the jib boom hoist is a rear drum, the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve prevents 2-speed flow combining from the rear spool. Also, this control slowly reduces pilot pressure applied to the rear spool (low) in front control valve by controlling the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve in order to reduce a surge pressure caused at auto stop of rear drum. Operation:

x 2-Speed Flow Combining Prevention㩷 1. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 2. The rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve delivers pressure oil from the rear pilot valve to the hydraulic oil tank according to this voltage signal. This prevents 2-speed flow combining from the rear spool.㩷 㩷

x Surge Pressure Reduction㩷 1. MC2/B sends a voltage signal to the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve.㩷 2. At auto stop of the rear drum, the rear drum hoisting or lowering proportional solenoid valve delivers pressure oil from the rear pilot valve to the hydraulic oil tank according to this voltage signal. This reduces the surge pressure.㩷 㩷

T2-1-44


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL㩷

Rear Drum Lowering Proportional SOL㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪈㩷

T2-1-45


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 External Indication Lamps Control(Optional)㩷

Purpose: Turns ON and OFF the external indication lamp according to IDU data and a signal from the auto stop override key switch. Operation: 1. MC2/B and the auto stop override key switch send a voltage signal to IDU.㩷 2. IDU turns the moment limiter release indicator ON and OFF according to the voltage signal.㩷 㩷 IDU data (CAN communication data) Auto stop override key Assembly and Digging mode Overload Pre-indication switch disassembly Release -㩷 -㩷 -㩷 -㩷 Assembly and No release -㩷 -㩷 -㩷 disassembly No release Crane Overload -㩷 -㩷 No release Crane No overload Pre-indication -㩷 No assembly No No release Crane No overload and pre-indication disassembly No assembly No release Digging -㩷 and disassembly 㩷

T2-1-46

Moment limiter release indicator Red Red Red Yellow Green

Turn OFF


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Buzzer

3-Color Light Relay (Green)㩷

Auto Stop Override Key Switch 3-Color Light (Green)㩷

3-Color Light (Yellow)㩷

3-Color Light Relay (Yellow)

3-Color Light Relay (Red)

3-Color Light (Red)㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-1-47


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 Audible Output Control㩷 Purpose: Outputs the audio signal from each speaker by writing audio-codes into the audio unit according to IDU data and operational status. Operation: 1. MC2/B receives a voltage signal according to IDU data and operational status.㩷 2. MC2/B writes the audio-codes according to the voltage signal to the audio unit.㩷 3. The audio unit operates each speaker and outputs the audio signal.㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-1-48


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

T2-1-49


SYSTEM / Control System㩷 (Blank) 㩷

T2-1-50


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 OUTLINE㩷

The hydraulic system is classified broadly into pilot circuit and main circuit, and it consists of the following components. Pilot Circuit㩷 Hydraulic System㩷

Main Circuit㩷

Hoisting Circuit (Rear, Front)㩷 Hoisting Brake Circuit (Optional)㩷 Boom Hoist Circuit㩷 Quick Draw / Third (Optional) Circuit㩷 Travel Circuit㩷 Swing Circuit㩷 Counterweight / Flip Circuit㩷 Reeving Winch Circuit (Optional)㩷 Boom Foot Remove and Install Circuit㩷 Side Frame Connect / Jack-Up Circuit㩷 Take-Up Circuit (Optional) Oil Cooler Circuit㩷

㩷 Pilot Circuit:㩷 The pilot circuit carries out selection of spool in the control valve as well as control of pump, valve, motor and parking brake release by using pressure oil from the pilot pump.㩷 㩷 Main Circuit:㩷 The main circuit drives each actuator by using pressure oil from main pumps (pump 1 and pump 2), swing pump, oil cooler pump, boom foot / lower control hydraulic source pump, reeving pump, etc.㩷 • Hoisting Circuit (Rear, Front) The hoisting circuit raises or lowers the lifting load by driving the front and rear drums by using pressure oil from pumps 1 and 2.㩷 • Hoisting Brake Circuit (Optional) When the brake mode selection key switch is operated, the front and rear hoisting brakes are shifted to “AUTO” or FREE”.㩷 • Boom Hoist Circuit The boom hoist circuit hoists and lowers the boom by driving the boom hoist drum by using pressure oil from pump 1.

T2-2-1

• Quick Draw / Third (Optional) Circuit

The quick draw / third (optional) circuit extends or retracts the quick draw cylinder and drives the jib boom hoist motor (optional) by using pressure oil from main pump 2.㩷 Travel Circuit The travel circuit drives the machine by driving travel mechanism by using pressure oil from pumps 1 and 2.㩷 Swing Circuit The swing circuit slews the crane upper by driving the swing reduction unit by using pressure oil from the swing pump.㩷 Counterweight / Flip Circuit The counterweight /flip circuit removes / installs the counterweight or raises / lowers the live mast by driving the counterweight cylinder or flip cylinder by using pressure oil from the swing pump.㩷 Reeving Winch Circuit (Optional) The reeving winch circuit (optional) drives the reeving winch by using pressure oil from the reeving pump (optional).


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 㩷

• Boom Foot Circuit The boom foot circuit is driven by pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump. This circuit extends or retracts the boom foot cylinder in order to remove and install the boom foot.㩷 • Side Frame / Jack-Up Circuit The side frame / jack-up circuit extends or retracts the side frame cylinder and jack-up cylinder by using pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump.㩷 • Take-Up Circuit (Optional) The take-up circuit applies fixed tension to the track shoe by pushing out the front idler by using pressure of the travel circuit.㩷 • Oil Cooler Circuit The oil cooler circuit cools hydraulic oil by driving the oil cooler motor by using pressure oil from the oil cooler pump.㩷

T2-2-2


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 PILOT CIRCUIT㩷

㩷 㩷 The pilot circuit carries out delivery flow rate control of pumps (1, 2) and swing pumps, selection of the control valve spool, displacement angle control of the motors and brake control of the winch drum.㩷 NOTE: The item with mark* is optional.

Outline㩷 The pilot circuit is operated by pressure oil from the pilot pump, which consists of the following components. 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 Accumulator㩷

Pilot Filter㩷 Gate Lock Valve㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

Front Motor Brake Release Solenoid Valve㩷

Front Motor

Rear Motor Brake Release Solenoid Valve㩷

Rear Motor

Regulator Swing Pump㩷 Swing Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Relief Valve㩷

Regulator (Pump 1)

Regulator (Pump 2)

Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷 Power Increase Solenoid Valve㩷 Swing Remote Control Valve㩷

Swing Control Valve

Right Travel Remote Control Valve Left Travel Remote Control Valve Rear Control Valve Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Front Control Valve

Front Remote Control Valve㩷

Front Drum Hoisting and Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

Front Control Valve

Rear Control Valve

Rear Remote Control Valve㩷

Rear Drum Hoisting and Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

Rear Control Valve

Front Control Valve

Boom hoist Remote Control Valve㩷

Boom hoist Drum Hoisting and Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

Rear Control Valve

*Third Remote Control Valve㩷

*Third Drum Hoisting and Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

Front Control Valve

High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve

Travel Speed Control Valve

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve㩷

Swing Brake Valve

Boom hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve

Boom hoist Drum Lock

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

T2-2-3


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Gate Lock Circuit

x Gate Lock ON

x Gate Lock OFF

The gate lock solenoid valve receives no signal while the gate lock lever is set in the lower position (ON).㩷 The passage from the pilot pump to the pilot circuit is blocked and pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the hydraulic oil tank through the pilot relief valve.㩷 Therefore, as no pressure oil is applied to the pilot circuit, each actuator cannot operate.㩷 㩷

The gate lock solenoid valve receives a signal while the gate lock lever is set in the upper position (OFF).㩷 The passage from the pilot pump to the hydraulic oil tank is blocked by the gate lock solenoid valve and the pilot circuit is kept at the set pressure of pilot relief valve.㩷 Consequently, each actuator can operate.㩷 㩷 㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 Pilot Filter㩷

Pilot Relief Valve 㩷

To Pilot㩷 Circuit㩷

Pilot Filter㩷

Pilot Relief Valve 㩷

To Pilot㩷 Circuit㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪌㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-2-4


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Remote Control Valve Circuit

The following explains the front drum hoisting.㩷 㩷 When the gate lock is turned OFF, pressure oil from the pilot pump flows from port P1 in the gate lock valve to port P in the 5-spool solenoid valve unit.㩷 When front hoisting operation is carried out, pressure oil reduced by the pressure reducing valve flows to the end of front drum spool in front control valve through the second overhoist solenoid valve and front drum remote control valve.㩷 As a result, pressure oil from the main pump flows to the front drum motor and the front drum starts hoisting.㩷

㩷 㩷

To Front from Front Control Valve Control Valve

㩷 㩷

Front Drum Remote Control Valve

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Pressure Reducing Valve㩷 Pilot Pump㩷 Gate Lock Valve㩷

㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Relief Valve 㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-2-5

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 MAIN CIRCUIT㩷 Pressure oil from pump 1 flows to the right travel motor, boom hoist motor, rear and front drum motors through the rear control valve. Pressure oil from pump 2 flows to the left travel motor, quick draw cylinder or third motor (optional), rear and front drum motors through the front control valve. Pressure oil from both main pumps 1 and 2 flows to the rear and front drum motors. Pressure oil to the quick draw cylinder is switched by changing coupling connection and used for the third motor (optional). Pressure oil from the swing pump flows to the swing motor. When the flip / counterweight spool in swing control valve activates, pressure oil from the swing pump also flows to the flip cylinder and counterweight cylinder. Return oil from the rear and front control valves, 3-spool and 4-spool solenoid valve units as well as oil cooler returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the oil cooler. If oil temperature is low (viscosity high), as resistance flowing through the oil cooler is large, the cooler relief valve opens and return oil flows back directly to the hydraulic oil tank. Return oil from the swing and lower control valves flows back directly to the hydraulic oil tank.

Pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump flows to the 4-spool solenoid valve unit. Pressure oil is used for driving pressure of the left and right boom foot cylinders as well as hydraulic oil source of the lower actuator. Pressure oil from the lower control section in 4-spool solenoid valve unit flows to the lower control valve for driving the side frame joint cylinder and jack cylinder. Pressure oil from the oil cooler pump drives the oil cooler motor. 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-2-6


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 㩷 Pump 1㩷

㩷 Rear Control Valve㩷 Right Travel㩷

Right Travel motor

Pump 2㩷 Boom Hoist㩷 Suction Filter 㩷

Boom Hoist Motor㩷 Swing Pump㩷 Rear (Low Speed)㩷 Rear Drum Motor㩷 Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump㩷

Front (High Speed)

Front Drum Motor㩷 Front Control Valve㩷 Left Travel㩷

Oil Cooler Pump㩷

Quick Draw / Third motor㩷

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

Left Travel Motor

Quick Draw Cylinder/ Third motor㩷

Rear (High Speed) Rear Drum Motor㩷

Cooler Relief Valve㩷

Front (Low Speed)

Return Filter㩷 Front Drum Motor㩷 Swing Control Valve㩷

Oil Cooler㩷

Swing㩷 Oil Cooler Motor㩷

Flip / Counterweight

4-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Left Boom Foot㩷

Left Side Frame Connecting Cylinder㩷 Right Side Frame Connecting Cylinder㩷

Right Boom Foot㩷

Right Rear Jack Cylinder㩷 Left Front Jack Cylinder㩷

3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Flip㩷

Left Counterweight

Right Counterweight

Lower Control Valve Left Side Frame Connecting㩷

Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Right Counterweight Cylinder㩷

Right Side Frame Connecting㩷 Right Front Jack Cylinder㩷

Swing Motor㩷

Left Counterweight Cylinder㩷

Right Front Jack㩷 Right Rear Jack㩷

Right Boom Foot Cylinder㩷 Right Flip Cylinder

Left Front Jack㩷

Left Boom Foot Cylinder㩷

Left Rear Jack㩷

Left Flip Cylinder㩷

Left Rear Jack Cylinder㩷

T2-2-7


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 NEUTRAL CIRCUIT㩷

When all the control levers are set to the neutral position, signal pressure from the remote control valve does not act on the each spool end in control valve. Therefore, pressure oil from pump 1 flows through the rear control valve and pressure oil from pump 2 flows through the front control valve. Both oil returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the oil cooler. Pressure oil from the swing pump returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the swing control valve. 㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

Swing Control Valve㩷 Oil Cooler

Pump 1㩷

Pump 2㩷

Swing pump㩷

㩷 Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

T2-2-8

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 (Blank)

T2-2-9


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 HOISTING CIRCUIT(REAR, FRONT)㩷

Single Operation㩷 x Low Speed (First Speed) Operation The following explains front low speed. Rear low speed also works in the same manner.㩷 When the front and rear remote control valves equipped with the detent stop at the low speed (first detent) position, low pressure arises at the secondary side of remote control valve and acts on the front (low speed) and front (high speed) spool ends. As output pressure is not high enough, only the front (low speed) spool moves.㩷 As a result, only pressure oil from pump 2 flows to the front motor. Pressure oil from pump 1 does not flow to the front motor, but returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the neutral passage of front (high speed) spool. Return oil from the front motor returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the front (low speed) spool.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 NOTE: The remote control valve is a PPC valve. Even if primary pressure is constant, secondary pressure arises in proportion to the lever stroke.㩷 "PPC" stands for "Pressure Proportional Control". 㩷

T2-2-10


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Low Speed Operation㩷

Front Motor

Rear Motor

Front Drum

Rear Drum

Front Control Valve㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Front (High Speed)

Front (Low Speed)㩷

Pump 2㩷 Pump 1㩷 Front Remote Control Valve (1st Detent Position of Lever)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

T2-2-11

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 x High Speed (Second Speed) Operation㩷 When the front remote control valve is set in high (second detent) position, secondary pressure of the remote control valve increases further and moves the front (high speed) spool. Pressure oil from pumps 1 and 2 are combined after flowing through the front (high speed) and (low speed) spools and flows to the front motor. Consequently, the front motor rotes at high speed. The rear motor works in the same manner.

T2-2-12


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 High Speed Operation㩷

㩷 Rear Motor㩷

Front Motor㩷

Rear Drum

Front Drum

Front Control Valve㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Front (Low Speed)㩷

Front (High Speed)

Pump 2㩷 Pump 1㩷 Front Remote Control Valve (2nd Detent Position of Lever)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

T2-2-13

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Combined Operation Circuit The following explains the combined operation of front and rear motors.㩷 㩷 NOTE: In case of combined operation of the front low speed (first speed) and rear high speed (second speed), as pressure oil is not supplied to the front motor, the front motor does not rotate. (Refer to the pages for combined operation of the front low speed (first speed) and rear high speed (second speed).) 㩷

x Front Low Speed (First Speed) + Rear Low Speed (First Speed) The front and rear remote control valves are at the first detent position. Therefore, as secondary pressure of each remote control valve is low, only the front and rear low speed spools in the control valve move. (Refer to the pages for hoisting single operation.) Pressure oil from main pump 2 flows to the front motor through the front low speed spool in front control valve and the front drum rotates. Pressure oil from pump 1 flows to the rear motor through the rear low speed spool in rear control valve and the rear drum rotates.㩷 Therefore the front drum rotates by pressure oil from pump 2 and the rear drum rotates by pressure oil from pump 1.㩷

T2-2-14


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Front Low Speed Operation + Rear Low Speed Operation㩷

㩷 Front Motor㩷

Rear Motor㩷 Rear Drum

Front Drum

Front (Low Speed)㩷 Rear (Low Speed)㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷 Rear (High Speed)㩷

Front (High Speed)

Pump 2㩷 Pump 1㩷 Rear Remote Control Valve (1st Detent Position of Lever)㩷

Front Remote Control Valve (1st Detent Position of Lever)㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T2-2-15


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 x Front High Speed (Second Speed) + Rear High Speed (Second Speed) Pressure oil from pumps 1 and 2 is combined and rotates the front and rear motors at high speed.㩷 㩷 The front and rear remote control valves are at the second detent position. Therefore, as secondary pressure of each remote control valve is high, both low speed and high speed front and rear spools in control valve move. (Refer to the pages for hoisting single operation.) 㩷 Pressure oil from pump 2 flows to the rear motor through the rear high speed spool in front control valve. Return oil from the rear motor is divided into two. One flows through the rear high speed and front low speed spools and the other flows through the rear low speed and front high speed spools, which are later combined and flows to the front motor. Return oil from the front motor is divided into two. One flows through the front low speed spool and the other flows through the front high speed spool so that each oil flows back the hydraulic oil tank. (Refer to the figure in the right.) 㩷 Pressure oil from pump 1 flows to the rear motor through the rear low speed spool in rear control valve. Return oil from the rear motor is divided into two. One flows through the rear high speed and front low speed spools and the other flows through the rear low speed and front high speed spools, which are later combined and flows to the front motor. Return oil from the front motor is divided into two. One flows through the front low speed spool and the other flows through the front high speed spool so that each oil flows back to the hydraulic oil tank. (Refer to the figure in the right.)㩷

㩷 㩷

Pump 2㩷

㩷 㩷

Rear (H) Spool㩷

㩷 Rear Motor㩷

Rear (L) Spool㩷

Rear (H) Spool㩷

Front (H) Spool㩷

Front (L) Spool㩷

Front Motor㩷

Front (H) Spool㩷

Front (L) Spool㩷

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

Pump 1㩷

Rear (L) Spool

Rear Motor

㩷 㩷 Rear (L) Spool

Rear (H) Spool

Front (H) Spool

Front (L) Spool

Front Motor

Front (H) Spool

Front (L) Spool

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

T2-2-16


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Front High Speed Operation + Rear High Speed Operation㩷

㩷 Rear Motor

Front Motor㩷

Rear Drum

Front Drum

Rear (High Speed)

Rear (Low Speed)㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷 Front (High Speed)

Front (Low Speed)㩷

Pump 2㩷 Pump 1㩷 Rear Remote Control Valve (2nd Detent Position)㩷

Front Remote Control Valve (2nd Detent Position)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

T2-2-17


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 x Front Low Speed (First Speed) + Rear High Speed (Second Speed) In this case, the rear drum rotates at high speed, but the front drum does not rotate.㩷 The front remote control valve is set in the first detent position. Therefore, only the low speed spool in control valve moves. 㩷 The rear remote control valve is set in the second detent position. Therefore, both the low speed and high speed rear spools in control valve move. 㩷 Pressure oil from pumps 1 and 2 is combined after passing through the front or rear control valve respectively and flows to the rear motor so that the rear drum rotates at high speed.㩷 As the front high speed spool is set in the neutral position, return oil from the rear motor flows into the tank through the rear low speed and front high speed spools. Therefore, return oil from the rear motor flows back to the hydraulic oil tank and the front drum cannot rotate.㩷

T2-2-18


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Front Low Speed Operation + Rear High Speed Operation㩷

㩷 Rear Motor

Front Motor㩷 Front Drum

Rear Drum

Front (Low Speed)㩷 Rear (Low Speed) Rear (High Speed)㩷 Front Control Valve㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷 Front (High Speed)㩷

Pump 2㩷

Pump 1㩷 Rear Remote Control Valve (2nd Detent Position)㩷

Front Remote Control Valve (1st Detent Position)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

T2-2-19


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 x Front High Speed (Second Speed) + Rear Low Speed (First Speed) The front remote control valve is set in the second detent position and the rear remote control valve is set in the first detent position. Therefore, as secondary pressure in the front remote control valve is high, both the low speed and high speed front and rear spools in control valve move. (Refer to the pages for hoisting single operation.) On the other hand, as secondary pressure in the rear remote control valve is low, only the low speed rear spools in control valve move. (Refer to the pages for hoisting single operation.) 㩷 Pressure oil from pump 2 flows to the front motor through the front low speed spool in front control valve.㩷 Pressure oil from pump 1 flows to the rear motor through the rear low speed spool in rear control valve. Return oil from the rear motor flows from the front high speed spool to the front motor.㩷 Consequently, the front drum rotates at high speed and the rear drum rotates at low speed. 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-2-20


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Front High Speed Operation + Rear Low Speed Operation㩷 㩷

㩷 Rear motor

Front Motor Front Drum

Rear Drum

Front (Low Speed) Rear (Low Speed)

Rear (High Speed)

Front Control Valve

Rear Control Valve Front (High Speed)

Pump 2

Pump 1 Rear Remote Control Valve㩷 (First Detent Position)

Front Remote Control Valve㩷 (Second Detent Position)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve

Pilot Pump

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪍

T2-2-21


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System HOISTING CIRCUIT

Auto Stop Control

The auto stop control stops the hoisting / lowering operation automatically when overhoist or overload arises on the front or rear motor.㩷 The following explains front hoisting operation, The rear motor also works in the same manner.㩷 㩷 When overhoist or overload arises during front hoisting operation, MC2/B receives a signal from the overhoist switch or IDU. MC2/B stops operation of the hoisting proportional solenoid valve provided in the circuit located between remote control valve spool and control valve spool. The hoisting proportional solenoid valve blocks secondary pressure from the remote control valve and returns the control valve spool to the neutral position so that the hoisting operation stops.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-2-22


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Normal Operation State㩷 Rear Drum

Front Drum

Front (Low Speed)

Front Control Valve

Rear Control Valve

Pump 2

From Front Remote Overhoist Control Valve Switch Front Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Rear Drum

Pump 1

Front (High Speed)

Front Drum

Auto-Stop State

Front (Low Speed)

Front Control Valve

Rear Control Valve Pump 2

Overhoist Front Drum Hoisting From Front Remote Switch Control Valve Proportional Solenoid Valve

T2-2-23

Pump 1 Front (High Speed)

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Lowering Operation During lowering operation, the motor is likely to be rotated forcibly by the inertial force and self weight of the lifting load. The counterbalance valve prevents coasting by controlling the lowering speed due to the oil feed quantity.㩷 The lowering circuit equips a serge relief valve, which prevents serge pressure caused by the counterbalance valve at lowering stop.㩷 Pressure oil from the control valve, flows to the motor through Port B in the counterbalance valve.㩷 The check valve and counterbalance valve block return oil from the motor. (Fig. 1)㩷 When oil feed pressure rises, the counterbalance valve spool moves and opens the return oil passage routed from the motor so that return oil flows to the hydraulic oil tank through the control valve. As a result, the motor rotates and a lifting load starts lowering. (Fig. 2)㩷

㩷 If a lifting load lowering speed is faster than fed oil amount, pressure at the port B side reduces, the counterbalance valve is closed and the lifting load stops lowering. At this time, as pressure at the port B side increases suddenly, the surge relief valve absorbs and releases serge pressure to the return circuit. (Fig. 3)㩷 When pressure at the port B side increases, the counterbalance valve opens and the lifting load starts lowering.㩷 㩷 Thus, a lifting load lowers according to fed oil amount from the control valve.㩷 During the hoisting operation, as pressure oil flows from port A to the motor through the check valve, the hoisting speed is not limited by the counterbalance valve.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Function of Counterbalance Valve

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Counterbalance Valve

Serge Relief Valve

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪍㩷

T2-2-24


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System BOOM HOIST CIRCUIT㩷

Hoisting Operation When the boom hoist remote control valve is set to hoisting operation, secondary pressure in the remote control valve moves the boom hoist spool in rear control valve. Pressure oil from the pilot pump flows through the boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve and releases the boom hoist drum lock and boom hoist motor brake. Pressure oil from pump 1 flows to the boom hoist motor through the boom hoist spool so that the boom hoist drum rotates.㩷 As a result, the boom starts hoisting. 㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lock

Boom Hoist Drum

Boom Hoist Motor Brake Boom Hoist Motor

Boom Hoist Spool

Rear Control Valve

Boom Hoist Pedal

Pump 1

From Boom Hoist Pedal

Boom Hoist Remote Control Valve

Second Overhoist SOL㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lock SOL

Pilot Pump 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

㩷 T2CN-02-02-008

T2-2-25


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Auto Stop Control When the boom hoist is overhoisted or overloaded, MC2/B receives a signal from the overhoist switch or IDU. MC2/B stops operation of the boom hoist drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve provided in the circuit located between boom hoist remote control valve spool and the front control valve spool. The boom hoist drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve blocks remote control pressure applying to the rear control valve spool, returns the boom hoist spool in rear control valve to the neutral position and the hoisting operation stops.㩷

NOTE: When the boom hoist auto-stop is operated, MC2/A cuts the signal flowing to the boom hoist drum lock solenoid valve and the boom hoist drum is locked. 㩷 㩷

㩷 Boom Hoist Drum Lock

Boom Hoist Drum

Boom Hoist Motor Brake Boom Hoist Motor

Boom Hoist Spool Rear Control Valve

From Boom Hoist Pedal Boom Hoist Drum Hoisting Proportional SOL Pump 1

From Boom Hoist Pedal

Boom Hoist Remote Control Valve

Second Overhoist SOL㩷

Pilot Pump 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

㩷 T2CN-02-02-009

T2-2-26


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System QUICK DRAW / THIRD (OPTIONAL) CIRCUIT㩷 When the quick draw / third remote control valve is operated, secondary pressure in the remote control valve moves the quick draw / third spool in rear control valve. Pressure oil from pump 2 flows to the quick draw cylinder circuit or third drum circuit through the quick draw / third spool.

Each circuit provides a quick coupler, which selects the operation.

㩷 㩷 㩷

Quick Coupler Third Drum㩷

Quick Draw Cylinder

Quick Draw / Third Spool㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

Pump 2㩷

Quick Draw / Third Remote Control Valve㩷

Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

㩷 T2CN-02-02-010

T2-2-27


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System TRAVEL CIRCUIT㩷

Delivery pressure oil from pump 1 drives the travel motor (left), delivery pressure oil from pump 2 drives the travel motor (right) and both pressure oil releases the parking brake. The travel motor is a variable displacement type. High/Low speed is selected by switching the high/low travel speed selection switch.

x Low Travel Speed When the high/low travel speed selection switch is at the low speed position, electric current does not flow through the travel high speed solenoid valve of 5-spool solenoid valve unit. The pilot valve in travel motor is not selected as the travel high speed solenoid valve is not selected. As pressure oil from the travel circuit in control valve is not supplied to the tilt piston, the displacement angle of travel motor becomes larger and the travel motor rotates at low speed.㩷 㩷

T2-2-28


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Low Travel Speed㩷 㩷 㩷

Tilt Piston㩷

Pilot Valve

Pilot Valve㩷

Tilt Piston㩷

Parking Brake㩷

Travel Motor (Right)㩷 Parking Brake㩷

Travel Motor (Left)㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

From Boom Hoist Pedal

From Boom Hoist Pedal

Left Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

Pump 2㩷

From Travel Pedal

From Travel Pedal

Right Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

Pump 1㩷

Travel High Speed SOL㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

T2-2-29

㩷 T2CN-02-02-011㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System x High Travel Speed When the high/low travel speed selection switch is at the high speed position, electric current flows through the travel high speed solenoid valve in 5-spool solenoid valve unit. The travel high speed solenoid valve is selected and the pilot valve in travel motor is selected by pressure oil from the pilot pump. Pressure oil from the travel circuit is supplied to the tilt piston and the displacement angle of travel motor becomes smaller.㩷 Consequently, the travel motor rotates at high speed.㩷

T2-2-30


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System High Travel Speed㩷 㩷 㩷

Tilt Piston㩷

Pilot Valve

Pilot Valve㩷

Tilt Piston㩷

Parking Brake㩷

Travel Motor (Right)㩷

Travel Motor (Left)㩷

Parking Brake㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷

Front Control Valve㩷

From Boom Hoist Pedal

From Boom Hoist Pedal

Left Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

From Travel Pedal

From Travel Pedal Right Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

Pump 2㩷

Pump 1㩷

Travel High Speed SOL㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

T2-2-31

㩷 T2CN-02-02-012㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System SWING CIRCUIT㩷

When the swing remote control valve is operated, the swing control valve spool moves and delivery pressure oil from the swing pump flows to the swing motor through the swing control valve. Return oil from the swing motor flows directly to the hydraulic oil tank. When a force such as an inertial force of the swing frame drives the swing motor during the swing operation, cavitation occurs in the motor due to motor's rotation speed exceeding the amount of oil fed from the pump. In order to avoid this, a make-up valve is provided, draws oil from the return circuit and compensates lack of oil feed. The swing brake solenoid valve activates and releases the swing brake by switching the swing brake switch. 㩷

T2-2-32


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System 㩷 㩷

Make-Up Valve㩷

Make-Up Valve㩷

Swing Brake㩷

Swing Brake㩷

Swing Motor

Swing Control Valve㩷

Swing Remote Control Valve㩷

Swing Pump㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㩷

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪈㩷

T2-2-33


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System (Blank) 㩷

T2-2-34


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System 㪚㪦㪬㪥㪫㪜㪩WEIGHT / FLIP CIRCUIT㩷

The counterweight cylinder and the flip cylinder use pressure oil from the swing pump. The cylinders switch over to the swing circuit and counterweight / flip circuit in the swing control valve.

Un-operated state㩷 When the counterweight / flip cylinders are not used, the counterweight / flip solenoid valve in swing control valve does not receive a signal.㩷 Therefore, the counterweight / flip spool keeps the neutral position.㩷 Pressure oil from the swing pump flows to the hydraulic oil tank through the neutral passage in counterweight / flip spool.㩷 㩷 㩷 To Weight Remove To Flip and Install Cylinder Cylinder㩷

㩷 㩷

3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Swing Spool (To Swing Circuit)㩷

Swing Control Valve㩷

Weight Remove and Install / Flip Spool㩷

Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump Weight Remove and Install / Flip SOL㩷

Swing Pump㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪊㩷

T2-2-35


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Operated state When either the counterweight switch or the flip switch is operated, the counterweight / flip solenoid valve in swing control valve operates.㩷 As the counterweight / flip spool switches, pressure oil from the swing pump flows to the 3-spool solenoid valve unit.㩷 㩷 The following explains with operating the counterweight cylinder (right) in the extending direction.㩷 When the counterweight switch (right) is operated in the extending direction, the counterweight solenoid valve (right) in 3-spool solenoid valve unit operates in the extending direction. As a result, pressure oil from the 3-spool solenoid valve unit flows to the bottom side of counterweight cylinder (right) through the sequence valve from the spool in counterweight solenoid valve (right). The counterbalance valve is operated by this pressure oil and the return circuit opens. Consequently, the counterweight cylinder (right) extends.㩷

NOTE: Pressure reducing valve (3-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve reduces inlet pressure to the 3-spool solenoid valve unit and delivers pressure oil to each spool end of the solenoid valve for operating the spools. NOTE: Sequence valve (3-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve ensures pressure at the primary side (pressure reducing circuit) in sequence valve. NOTE: Relief valve (3-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve limits maximum pressure of the counterweight / flip cylinder. NOTE: Port relief valve (3-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve protects a circuit by limiting the bottom side circuit pressure in the cylinder while the counterweight solenoid valve is in the neutral position. NOTE: Slow return valve:㩷 This valve cushions cylinder start by restricting inlet pressure oil to the flip cylinder. NOTE: Overload relief valve (flip cylinder):㩷 This valve protects a circuit by limiting the bottom side circuit pressure in the cylinder while the flip solenoid valve is in the neutral position. NOTE: Counterbalance valve (counterweight cylinder, flip cylinder):㩷 This valve prevents cylinder from extending and retracting due to a load applied to the cylinder.

㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-2-36


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Counterweight Cylinder (R)㩷

Port Relief Valve 3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Counterweight SOL (R)㩷

Counterweight Cylinder (L)㩷

Counterbalance Valve㩷

Quick Coupler Counterweight SOL (L)㩷

Slow Return Valve㩷

Flip Cylinder (L)㩷

Flip SOL㩷 Overload Relief Valve㩷 Counterbalance Valve㩷

Relief Valve㩷 Flip Cylinder (R)㩷 Sequence Valve㩷

Overload Relief Valve (To Swing Circuit)

Swing Valve㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

Control Counterbalance Valve㩷 Counterweight / Flip Spool㩷

Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump㩷 Counterweight / Flip SOL

Swing Pump㩷

T2CN-02-02-013

㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-2-37


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 BOOM FOOT CIRCUIT㩷

The boom foot circuit drives the boom foot cylinder. This circuit is controlled by the 4-spool solenoid valve unit. The following explains the circuit in left boom foot cylinder circuit. When the left boom foot cylinder is operated in the extending direction, the spool of 4-spool solenoid valve unit is switched. Pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump flows to the 4-spool solenoid valve unit, and flows to the rod side of left boom foot cylinder through the sequence valve and left boom foot solenoid valve spool. This extends the cylinder. NOTE: Pressure reducing valve (4-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve reduces inlet pressure to the 4-spool solenoid valve unit and delivers pressure oil to each spool end of the solenoid valve for operating the spools. NOTE: Sequence valve (4-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve ensures pressure at the primary side (pressure reducing circuit) in sequence valve. NOTE: Relief valve (4-spool solenoid valve unit):㩷 This valve limits maximum pressure of the boom foot cylinder and lower control circuit.

㩷 㩷

4-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Lower Oil Pressure Control SOL㩷

To Lower Control Circuit

Quick Coupler㩷 Left Boom Foot SOL㩷 Boom Foot Cylinder (Left)㩷 Right Boom Foot SOL

Boom Foot Cylinder (Right)㩷

Relief Valve㩷 Sequence Valve㩷 Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

㩷 Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump㩷

㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

T2-2-38


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 (Blank) 㩷

T2-2-39


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 SIDE FRAME CONNECTING / JACK-UP CIRCUIT㩷 The lower control valve controls the jack-up cylinder and the side frame connecting cylinder. Pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump flows into the lower control valve through the lower control hydraulic oil source solenoid valve spool in 4-spool solenoid valve unit.

NOTE: Pressure reducing valve:㩷 This valve reduces inlet pressure to the lower control valve and delivers pressure oil to each spool end through each solenoid valve for operating the spools. NOTE: Sequence valve:㩷 This valve ensures pressure at the primary side (pressure reducing circuit) in sequence valve. NOTE: Relief valve:㩷 This valve limits maximum pressure of the jack-up cylinder and side frame connecting cylinder circuit. NOTE: Double check valve:㩷 This valve blocks the jack-up cylinder circuit in order to prevent the machine from lowering during jack-up operation.

The following explains hydraulic oil flow when operating the jack-up cylinder (front right) in the retracting direction. When the lower control switch in cab is turned ON, the lower control hydraulic oil source solenoid valve in 4-spool solenoid valve unit activates. Pressure oil from the boom foot / lower control hydraulic oil source pump flows to the lower control valve through the 4-spool solenoid valve unit. When the jack-up (front right) is operated in the retracting direction, the jack retract (front right) solenoid valve in lower control valve activates. Then, some pressure oil flowing to the lower control valve is reduced its pressure by the pressure reducing valve and is routed to the spool end in jack-up cylinder (front right). When the spool moves, pressure oil flows to the rod side in jack-up cylinder (front right) through the sequence valve. This time, a passage at cylinder bottom side in double check valve is open by its pressure. As a result, the jack-up cylinder (front right) retracts.

㩷 㩷

T2-2-40


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 Jack-Up (Right Front) Retracting Operation㩷 㩷

Left Side Frame Connecting Cylinder (L)㩷

Right Side Frame Connecting Cylinder (R) Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (L) Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (L)㩷

Lower Control Valve㩷

Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (R)㩷 Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (R)㩷

Jack-Up Cylinder (Left Rear)㩷

Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)㩷 Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)㩷 Jack-Up Cylinder (Right Rear)㩷 Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)㩷 Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)㩷 Jack-Up Cylinder (Left Front)㩷 Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Front)㩷 Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Front)㩷 Jack-Up Cylinder (Right Front)㩷 Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Front)㩷 Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Front)㩷 Double Check Valve㩷

Slow Return Valve㩷

Relief Valve㩷

Sequence Valve㩷

Filter㩷 Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump㩷

㩷 4-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

T2-2-41

Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Solenoid Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪌㩷


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 TAKE-UP CIRCUIT (OPTIONAL)㩷

The take-up mechanism applies fixed tension to the truck shoe by pushing out the both left and right front idlers by using travel circuit pressure. This circuit directs pressure oil in the travel circuit to the bottom side in both left and right take-up cylinders through the shuttle valve. Consequently, the front idlers are pushed out and fixed tension is applied to the both left and right track shoes. If the front idler has a heavy load, the return check valve opens and absorbs pressure at bottom side in take-up cylinder.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Return Check Valve㩷

Return Check Valve

Take-Up Cylinder (L)㩷

Front Idler (L)㩷

Travel Mechanism (L)㩷

Take-Up Mechanism㩷

Shuttle Valve㩷

Take-Up Cylinder (R)㩷

Front Idler (R)㩷

Travel Mechanism (R)㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪍㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-2-42


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 㪩㪜㪜㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪥㪚㪟㩷㪚㪠㪩㪚㪬㪠㪫㩷㩿㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥㪘㪣㪀㩷

When the reeving winch hoisting switch is turned ON, the reeving winch hoisting solenoid valve is shifted by current from the reeving winch hoisting switch. Therefore, pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through the reeving winch hoisting solenoid valve and shifts the spool in the reeving winch control valve. Pressure oil from the reeving winch pump flows to the reeving winch, through the reeving winch control valve. Then, Pressure oil shifts the spool in the reeving winch, releases the reeving winch brake and drives the reeving winch motor. The returning oil from the reeving winch passes through the reeving winch control valve, and returns to the hydraulic oil tank .

Reeving Winch㩷

Reeving Winch Brake㩷

Reeving Winch Motor㩷

Spool㩷 From Reeving Winch Hoisting Switch㩷

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷 Reeving Winch Pump

㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪌㩷

T2-2-43


SYSTEM / Hydraulic System㩷 㪦㪠㪣㩷㪚㪦㪦㪣㪜㪩㩷㪚㪠㪩㪚㪬㪠㪫㩷 The hydraulic oil from each actuator will be cooled by the oil cooler installed in the return circuit before returning to the tank. The fan of the oil cooler, which is driven by the piston motor, is turned on and off by the temperature sensor installed in the hydraulic oil tank. The oil cooler fan will stop revolving when the solenoid valve detects that the temperature of the hydraulic oil is less than 35ºC and guides the oil from the excited gear pump through the slip stream to the fan motor. When the oil temperature increases to 40ºC, the solenoid valve switches, and the oil cooler fan begins revolving again. When ON

When OFF

Return Circuit

Return Circuit

Oil Cooler

Solenoid Valve㩷

Solenoid Valve Switches in response to temperature sensor signal

Piston Motor㩷 Oil Cooler Fan

Hydraulic Oil Tank (with temperature sensor)㩷

Gear Pump㩷

Gear Pump

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪍㩷 㩷 㩷

T2-2-44

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪎


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The electric system is divided roughly into the main circuit, the control circuit, the monitor circuit, the brake control circuit, the moment limiter and the auto stop circuit.

Major functions and constructions of the main circuit is explained below.

x Main circuit:㩷

x Power circuit:㩷 An electric power source for the

Engine-related circuit and accessories-related circuit.㩷 x Control circuit Engine and pump control circuit consisting of actuators such as solenoid valves, controllers (MC and ECU), switch boxes, sensors and switches.㩷 x Monitor circuit Circuit that displays operating status of the machine (consisting of monitor display, sensors and switches.)㩷 x Moment limiter and auto stop circuit The circuit that warns of overloading and overhoisting, and makes auto stop of hoisting and boom hoist (consisting of the moment limiter that displays loading condition during crane operation and detects overloading, the micro switch that detects boom and hook overhoisting, controller (MC) that performs auto stop, and the solenoid valve).㩷

electric system on the machine.㩷

x Preheating circuit:㩷 The circuit that assists engine starting in cold weather.㩷

x Starting circuit:㩷The circuit that starts the engine.㩷 x Charging circuit:㩷 The circuit that charges batteries and supplies electricity in order to compensate power consumption.㩷 x Engine stop circuit: The circuit that stops the engine by ECU.㩷 x Surge voltage prevention circuit: The circuit that prevents occurrence of serge voltage when the engine is stopped.㩷 x Accessories-related circuit: The circuit that is activated when the key switch is turned ON.㩷 x Swing brake release circuit: The circuit that releases the swing motor brake by delivering pilot pressure oil to the brake while the swing brake release solenoid valve ON.㩷 x Drum lock circuit: The circuit that locks and unlocks the front lock and rear drum lock.㩷 㩷

T2-3-1


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT㩷

The negative terminal of battery is connected to the machine, When the battery serves backup power for the radio and air conditioner while the key switch is in the OFF position. Also, the battery serves as a main power supply for MC2/A, MC2/B, IDU, key switch, fuel feed pump switch and horn relay.

㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

To 12V Power Source

Batteries㩷

Fuel Feed Pump Switch㩷

Horn Switch Horn㩷 Horn Relay

Radio㩷 Air Conditioner Key Switch㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

T2-3-2


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 PREHEATING CIRCUIT x Preheating operation㩷 When the key switch is turned ON, terminal B is connected to terminal ACC in the key switch. Current from terminal ACC flows to terminals #158 and #127 of ECU through Z-line and ECU recognizes that the key switch is ON. In addition, current from terminal ACC excites the battery relay. Then, current from the battery flows to the contact point of the heater relay through the battery relay while preparing for excitation of the heater relay coil.㩷 ECU sets preheating period by monitoring coolant and intake-air temperature. Moreover, ECU turns terminals #96 and #70 ON during time according to coolant and intake-air temperature.

As a result, current from terminal #96 flows through the R-line and excites heater relay 1. Current from terminal ACC in the key switch flows through the coil of heater relay 2 while heater relay 1 is excited, and turns heater relay 2 ON. The air heater is heated by current from the battery relay.㩷 When terminal #70 in ECU is turned ON, current from terminal ACC in the key switch excites the preheat indicator relay and the preheat indicator lights.㩷 㩷

Batteries㩷

Key Switch

Battery Relay㩷

Heater Relay 2㩷

Heater Relay 1

Air Heater

Starter Motor㩷

Preheat Indicator Relay

Preheat Indicator㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

T2-3-3


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 x After-heating operation When preheating is finished and the engine is not yet heated sufficiently, the engine start may cause incomplete combustion.㩷 In order to prevent this, after-heating is carried out following to preheating.㩷 㩷 Current flows from terminal ACC in the key switch even after the engine starts.㩷 This current flows to terminals #158, #127, #144, #129 and #101 in ECU in a similar way of preheating operation.㩷 As ECU continuously monitors coolant temperature, air heater is heated in a similar way of preheating operation if coolant and intake-air is not sufficiently heated.㩷 (Refer to the pages for Preheating.)㩷 㩷

T2-3-4


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 (Blank) 㩷

T2-3-5


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 ENGINE STARTING CIRCUIT㩷 1. When the key switch is turned ON, current from terminal ACC in the key switch excites the battery relay.㩷 2. As the battery relay is excited, current from the battery flows to terminal B in the starter motor through the contact point in battery relay.㩷 3. In addition, current from terminal ACC in the key switch flows to terminals #158 and #127 in ECU through Z-line. Then, ECU begins engine starting procedure.㩷 4. Current from terminal C in the key switch flows to terminal #A5 in MCA/2 and MCA/2 recognizes that the key switch is in the START position.㩷 5. MC2/A checks that the swing brake switch is in the brake position and the mode switches of front and rear drum are in the auto-brake position. MC2/A excites the engine start relay by using terminal #E20.㩷 6. Thus, the engine start relay turns ON and current from terminal C in the key switch flows to terminal #143 in ECU and terminal #3 in starter relay 2.㩷 7. ECU monitors coolant temperature, fuel temperature, intake-air temperature, boost pressure, fuel pressure and engine oil temperature. If the condition is ready for starting, ECU outputs a signal from terminal #88. This excites starter relay 2 and the contact point is closed.㩷 8. Current flowing from terminal C in the key switch through W-line flows to terminal SW in the starter relay through the contact point in starter relay 2 and F-line.㩷 9. Terminals B and S in the starter relay are connected inside the relay. Current from the battery flows to terminal S in the starter. The pinion in starter engages into the ring gear. At the same time, large-current from the battery flows to the motor from terminal B in the starter and the motor rotates.㩷

10. At the same time, ECU sends current to the injector and feeds fuel to the engine. Thus, the engine starts running.㩷 11. When the engine starts running, ECU blocks current from terminal #88 and opens the contact point in starter relay 2. This blocks current flowing through W-line and terminal SW of the starter relay and the starter motor stops.㩷 12. While the engine is running, the starter does not rotates even if the key switch is turned in the START position as ECU does not send current from terminal #88.㩷 㩷

T2-3-6


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 㩷 㩷

Batteries㩷

Swing Brake Switch Front Drum Brake Mode Selection Switch㩷 Rear Drum Brake Mode Selection Switch㩷

Key Switch Engine Start Relay㩷 Emergency Stop Relay㩷

Battery Relay㩷

Starter Relay㩷 Alternator㩷 Starter Relay 2

Starter

Coolant Temp. Sensor㩷 Fuel Temp. Sensor㩷 Intake-Air Temp. Sensor㩷

Injector㩷

Boost Pressure Sensor㩷

Fuel Pressure Sensor㩷 Engine Oil Temp. Sensor㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T2-3-7


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 CHARGING CIRCUIT㩷

After the engine starts, the key switch is turned to the ON position. The battery relay keeps the excitation condition by current from terminal ACC in the key switch. As the engine starts running, the alternator starts rotating. As current generated by the alternator flows to a coil in the battery relay through the contact point in OFF delay relay, the battery relay is kept in ON condition. In addition, current from terminal B in the alternator flows to terminal "+" in the battery through the battery relay. This charges the batteries. At the same time, current from terminal B in the alternator flows through the battery relay and fusible link (#30) and supplies current in these circuits. When generated voltage of the alternator reaches the specified value, as current flowing from terminal #4 in charge relay to terminal L in the alternator is blocked, the charge relay turns unexcited condition. As a result, the charge relay turns OFF and the charge indicator turns OFF.

T2-3-8


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 㩷 Batteries

Key Switch㩷 OFF Delay Relay㩷

Emergency Stop Relay㩷

Battery Relay㩷 Alternator㩷

Charge Relay㩷

Charge Indicator㩷

Monitor Lamp Unit

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 㶎The above diagram shows a condition that voltage generated by the alternator does not reach the specified value and the charge indicator lights.㩷

T2-3-9


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT㩷

When the key switch is turned OFF, current from terminal ACC in the key switch to terminals #158 and #127 in ECU is blocked. Then, ECU blocks current to the injector and stops fuel supply to the engine. This stops the engine. After that, as the contact point in OFF delay relay turns OFF and current flowing from alternator to a coil in the battery relay is blocked, the battery relay turns OFF. (Refer to the pages for Surge voltage prevention circuit.)

T2-3-10


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 The illustration shows a condition that the engine runs.

Batteries㩷

Key Switch㩷 OFF Delay Relay㩷

Battery Relay㩷 Alternator㩷

Injector㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

T2-3-11


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 SURGE VOLTAGE PREVENTION CIRCUIT㩷

When the engine is stopped by turning the key switch OFF, current from terminal ACC in the key switch stops and the battery relay turns OFF. Even if turning the key switch OFF, the engine does not stop at once and rotates by the inertia, so that the alternator keeps generating power. Therefore, as the generated power current does not flow to the battery; surge voltage occurs in the circuit that may cause damage to the electronic equipment such as controller and components. In order to prevent this, the serge voltage prevention circuit is provided. The battery relay is excited by the OFF delay relay until the engine stops. As a result, the generated power current from terminal B in the alternator flows to the battery through battery relay and prevents occurrence of serge voltage. Current from terminal B in the alternator flows through the contact point in OFF delay relay and continuously excites the battery relay. The contact point in battery relay keeps closed condition and the generated power current of alternator flows to the battery through the contact point in battery relay. Thus, the generated power current of alternator flows to the battery. This condition will be kept until the engine is stopped. NOTE: As the OFF delay relay equips timer function, it keeps exciting condition for a specific period even no current flows through the coil side in order to keep the contact point ON.

T2-3-12


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 㩷 㩷

Batteries

Key Switch㩷

OFF Delay Relay

Battery Relay㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-3-13


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 ACCESSORY CIRCUIT㩷

When the key switch is turned ON, terminals B and ACC are connected in the key switch. Current from terminal ACC excites the battery relay. As the battery relay is excited, current from the battery flows to the radio, interior light, working light, drum light (optional) and cigarette lighter through the battery relay. Power supply for the horn is not routed through the key switch but connects directly from the battery.

㩷 Batteries Radio㩷 Horn Relay㩷

Horn Switch

Horn

Key Switch㩷 Interior Light㩷

Working Light㩷 Battery Relay㩷 Drum Light (Optional)㩷

Cigarette Lighter㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T2-3-14


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 SWING BRAKE RELEASE CIRCUIT㩷

1. When the swing brake switch is in the OFF position, the swing brake indicator lights and the swing brake is applied.㩷 2. When the swing brake switch is turned ON, current flows from the battery to MC2/A.㩷 3. MC2/A turns the swing brake indicator off.㩷 4. At the same time, MC2/A flows current to the swing brake release solenoid valve in order to switch the swing brake release solenoid valve. Therefore, pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the swing break through the swing brake release solenoid valve and releases the brake.㩷

The illustration shows a condition that the swing brake switch is in the ON position. 㩷 Swing Brake Indicator㩷

㩷 㩷

Swing Brake Switch: ON㩷

To Swing Brake㩷

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

Pilot Pump㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㩷 㩷

T2-3-15


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 DRUM LOCK CIRCUIT㩷

When the key switch is turned ON, terminals B and ACC are connected in the key switch. Current from terminal ACC excites the battery relay. When the battery relay is excited, current from the battery flows to terminals B of the front, and rear drum locks through the battery relay. Under this condition, when the front or rear drum lock switch is turned OFF, current flows from terminal B in the corresponding drum lock. This current flows to terminal P2, the operated lock switch and terminal A, and unlocks the drum. Similarly, when the front or rear drum lock switch is turned ON, current from terminal B in the corresponding drum lock. This current flows to terminal A through terminal P1 and the operated lock switch, and locks the drum.

T2-3-16


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 NOTE: The following figure shows a condition that the lock switch unlocks. 㩷 㩷

Batteries

Key Switch㩷

Battery Relay

Front Drum Lock㩷

Front Drum Lock Switch㩷

Rear Drum Lock㩷

Rear Drum Lock Switch㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

T2-3-17


SYSTEM / Electric System㩷 (Blank) 㩷

T2-3-18


SECTION 3 㩷

COMPONENT OPERATION㩷 㩷 㩷

—CONTENTS—㩷 Group 1 Pump Assembly

Group 4 Boom Hoist System㩷

Outline .......................................................... T3-1-1 Main Pump ................................................... T3-1-2 Swing Pump ................................................. T3-1-3 Regulator ...................................................... T3-1-5 Solenoid Valve............................................ T3-1-26 Pilot Pump, Boom Foot / Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump, Reeving Winch Driving Pump (Optional).............. T3-1-28

Group 2 Swing Reduction Unit㩷 Outline .......................................................... T3-2-1 Swing Reduction Gear ................................. T3-2-2 Swing Motor.................................................. T3-2-3 Swing Parking Brake .................................... T3-2-4 Valve Unit...................................................... T3-2-6

Group 3 Winch Assembly㩷 Outline .......................................................... T3-3-1 Motor............................................................. T3-3-2 Regulator ...................................................... T3-3-5 Counterbalance Valve ................................ T3-3-10 Brake .......................................................... T3-3-15 Winch Drum................................................ T3-3-16 Reduction Gear .......................................... T3-3-17

Outline........................................................... T3-4-1 Boom Hoist Motor ......................................... T3-4-2 Reduction Gear............................................. T3-4-3 Boom Hoist Brake ......................................... T3-4-4 Counterbalance Valve................................... T3-4-6 Relief Valve ................................................. T3-4-10

Group 5 Front and Rear Control Valve㩷 Outline........................................................... T3-5-1 Configuration................................................. T3-5-2 Internal Circuit ............................................... T3-5-6 Spool ............................................................. T3-5-8 Main Relief Valve ........................................ T3-5-10 Port Relief Valve (with Make-Up Function) . T3-5-12 Make-Up Valve............................................ T3-5-14 Holding Valve .............................................. T3-5-15 Pressure Compensation Valve ................... T3-5-16

Group 6 Swing Control Valve㩷 Outline........................................................... T3-6-1 External View ................................................ T3-6-1 Internal Circuit ............................................... T3-6-1 Configuration................................................. T3-6-2

Group 7 Lower Control Valve㩷 Outline........................................................... T3-7-1 Configuration................................................. T3-7-2 Internal Circuit ............................................... T3-7-4 Function Block .............................................. T3-7-5 Relief Valve ................................................... T3-7-6 Pressure Reducing Valve.............................. T3-7-8 Sequence Valve .......................................... T3-7-10 Solenoid Valve 㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅㪅 T3-7-11

2CNT-3-1


Group 8 Remote Control Valve㩷 Outline .......................................................... T3-8-1 Configuration ................................................ T3-8-4 Detent Function ............................................ T3-8-8 Operation.................................................... T3-8-10

Group 9 Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit ......................... T3-9-1 4-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit ......................... T3-9-5 3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit ........................T3-9-11

Group 10 Travel Mechanism㩷 Outline ........................................................ T3-10-1 Travel Motor................................................ T3-10-2 Parking Brake ............................................. T3-10-4 Travel Reduction Gear ............................... T3-10-6 Travel Brake Valve...................................... T3-10-7 Travel Speed Selection............................. T3-10-10㩷

Group 11 Others (Crane Upper)㩷 Gate Lock Valve ..........................................T3-11-1 Drum Brake Release Solenoid Valve (Optional) ................................................T3-11-5 Counterweight Cylinder ...............................T3-11-6 Flip Cylinder.................................................T3-11-7 Boom Foot Cylinder.....................................T3-11-8 Accumulator.................................................T3-11-9

Group 12 Others (Base Carrier)㩷 Outline ........................................................ T3-12-1 Turntable Bearing ....................................... T3-12-2 Rotating Joint.............................................. T3-12-3 Slip Ring ..................................................... T3-12-4 Side Frame Connecting Cylinder ............... T3-12-5 Jack-Up Cylinder ........................................ T3-12-6 Take-Up Cylinder (Optional) ....................... T3-12-9 㩷

2CNT-3-2


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly OUTLINE㩷

㩷 㩷 Pilot pump (4), boom foot / control hydraulic oil source pump (3), reeving winch pump (1) and oil cooler pump (6) are the gear pumps.㩷 In addition, PTO gearbox (2) is provided between pump 1 (11) and pump 2 (9).㩷

The pump assembly consists of main pump (pump 1 (11) and pump 2 (9)), swing pump (5), oil cooler pump (6), pilot pump (4), boom foot / control hydraulic oil source pump (3), reeving winch pump (1) and PTO gearbox (2).㩷 The main pump is a dual swash plate type variable displacement plunger pump, and the swing pump is a single swash plate type variable displacement plunger pump. These pumps deliver high pressure oil to the main circuit for operation.㩷 1 2

3 4

5

6

11

10 9

8

7

1 - Reeving Winch Pump (Optional) 2 - PTO Gearbox

4 - Pilot Pump

3 - Boom Foot / Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pump

6 - Oil Cooler Pump (P4)

5 - Swing Pump

T2CG-01-02-025

7 - Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (For Swing Pump) 8 - Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (For Main Pump) 9 - Main Pump 2 (P2)

T3-1-1

10 - Power Increase Solenoid Valve 11 - Main Pump 1 (P1)


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly MAIN PUMP㩷 The main pump is a dual swash plate type plunger pump. Two shafts (1) are connected by gear (6). Each shaft (1) provides a same type of pump.㩷 Cylinder block (5) is splined on shaft (1). Plunger (4) is inserted into cylinder block (5).㩷 The rotation of engine is transmitted to shaft (1) through the coupling. When shaft (1) rotates, plunger (4) rotates with cylinder block (5) together. Plunger (4) slides over shoe plate (3) and reciprocates in the bore of cylinder block (5) according to the inclination angle of swash plate (2). This reciprocating motion suctions and deliveries hydraulic oil.㩷

Pump 2 (P2䋩㩷

Pump 1 (P1)㩷

1

㩷 2

3

4

4 5

6

1

5

4

3

2

㩷 T1F3-03-01-003

T3-1-2


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly SWING PUMP㩷 The swing pump is a single swash plate type plunger pump. Shaft (1) is splined to shaft (1) of pump 2. Shaft (1) is provided with a pump whose type is the same as the main pump. Cylinder block (5) is splined on shaft (1). Plunger (4) is inserted into cylinder block (5). The rotation of engine is transmitted to shaft (1) through pump 2. When shaft (1) rotates, plunger (4) rotates with cylinder block (5) together. Plunger (4) slides over shoe plate (3) and it reciprocates in the bore of cylinder block (5) according to the inclination angle of swash plate (2). This reciprocating motion suctions and deliveries hydraulic oil.

Splined to Pump 2㩷

㩷 1

2

3

4

T3-1-3

5

T25N-03-01-005


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Delivery Flow Rate Adjustment㩷 㩷 The pump delivery flow rate is adjusted by changing the inclination angle of swash plate (2) in order to change the stroke of plunger (4).㩷 Pressure oil from the regulator moves the servo piston. As swash plate (2) is connected to the servo piston, thus the inclination angle of swash plate (2) is changed according to the movement of servo piston. This changes the pump delivery flow rate.㩷

Servo Piston㩷

1

Valve Plate㩷

5 4 2

㩷 T117-02-01-003

T3-1-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly REGULATOR㩷 The regulator receives the various pressure signals and controls the flow rate of the main pump and the swing pump in order to prevent from exceeding the engine horsepower. Each of pump 1, pump 2 and swing pump provides one regulator.㩷

The pump 2 regulator and swing pump regulator provides a displacement angle proportional solenoid valve.㩷 In addition, the PTO gearbox provides a power increase solenoid valve.㩷

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

PTO Gearbox㩷

㩷 Pump 1 Regulator㩷

Power Increase Solenoid Valve

Pump 2 Regulator㩷

Swing Pump Regulator㩷

T2CG-03-01-001

Layout㩷 Power Increase Solenoid Valve

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Pump 2 Regulator㩷

Pump 1 Regulator㩷

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Swing Pump Regulator㩷

㩷 㩷

PTO Gearbox㩷

T3-1-5

T2CG-03-01-002


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Sectional View (Main Pump Regulator)㩷

Pump 1㩷

Pump 2㩷

B

B

A

B

A

A

B

A

T25N-03-01-006

Section A-A㩷

1

2

3

T25N-03-01-007

4

6

5

7 8

㩷 T25N-03-01-011

T3-1-6


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Section B-B㩷

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

㩷 21

123456-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin Pin Pilot Spring

20

19

78910 11 -

17

18

Feedback Lever Pin Return Spring Sleeve Spool

12 13 14 15 16 -

T3-1-7

Pin Lever 1 Pin Outer Spring Inner Spring

T1F3-03-01-008

17 18 19 20 21 -

Servo Piston Pin Compensating Rod Compensating Piston Pistons


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Sectional View (Swing Pump Regulator)㩷 B A

B

A

㩷 T25N-03-01-014

Section A-A㩷 1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

㩷 T25N-03-01-012

T3-1-8


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Section B-B㩷

9

21

123456-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin Pin Pilot Spring

10

20

78910 11 -

11

19

Feedback Lever Pin Return Spring Sleeve Spool

12

13

18

14

15

16

17

12 13 14 15 16 -

T3-1-9

Pin Lever 1 Pin Outer Spring Inner Spring

T25N-03-01-013

17 18 19 20 21 -

Servo Piston Pin Compensating Rod Compensating Piston Piston


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Linkage Mechanism (Main Pump)㩷 㩷 The movement of pilot piston (1) is transmitted to lever 2 (3) through pin (2). Lever 2 (3) turns about pin (5) which is fixed to the axial plug.㩷 The movement of compensating rod (19) is transmitted to lever 1 (13) through pin (18). Lever 1(13) turns about pin (12) which is fixed to the casing.㩷 Pin (4) is attached to feedback lever (7). Both ends of pin (4) are inserted into the holes of lever 1 (13) and lever 2 (3).㩷 12

18 13

Casing

Therefore, when lever 1 (13) or lever 2 (3) turns, pin (4) contacts the hole of the turned lever. Feedback lever (7) rotates around pin (8) attached to servo piston (17). In addition, when servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) is moved through pin (8). At this time, as neither lever 1 (13) nor lever 2 (3) move, feedback lever (7) turns around pin (4) and spool (11) moves.

NOTE: Displacement angle decrease Displacement angle increase

Hole

7

19

14 4 3 Hole

5 2

Axial Plug㩷

11

8 1

17

1234-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin

57811 -

Pin Feedback Lever Pin Spool

T142-02-01-005

12 - Pin 13 - Lever 1 14 - Pin

T3-1-10

17 - Servo Piston 18 - Pin 19 - Compensating Rod


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Linkage Mechanism (Swing Pump)㩷 Therefore, when lever 1 (13) or lever 2 (3) turns, pin (4) contacts the hole of the turned lever. Feedback lever (7) rotates around pin (8) attached to servo piston (17). In addition, when servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) is moved through pin (8). At this time, as neither lever 1 (13) nor lever 2 (3) move, feedback lever (7) turns around pin (4) and spool (11) moves.㩷

The movement of pilot piston (1) is transmitted to lever 2 (3) through pin (2). Lever 2 (3) is turns about pin (5) which is fixed to the axial plug.㩷 The movement of compensating rod (19) is transmitted to lever 1 (13) through pin (18). Lever 1 (13) turns about pin (12) which is fixed to the casing.㩷 Pin (4) is attached to feedback lever (7). Both ends of pin (4) are inserted into the holes of lever 1 (13) and lever 2 (3).㩷 12

18

NOTE:

13

Casing㩷

Hole

Displacement angle decrease Displacement angle increase

7

19㩷

14 4㩷 3㩷

Hole

5㩷 2 11㩷

Axial Plug

8 1㩷

17㩷

T117-02-01-009

1234-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin

5 - Pin 7 - Feedback Lever 8 - Pin 11 - Spool

12 - Pin 13 - Lever 1 14 - Pin

T3-1-11

17 - Servo Piston 18 - Pin 19 - Compensating Rod


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Regulator Control Functions The regulator has following three pieces of control functions.㩷 㩷

x Control by self pump pressure or companion pump pressure Self pump pressure P1 and companion pump pressure P2 are applied to the regulator. (The swing pump uses only self pump pressure P3.) When the mean pressure of these two pump pressures exceed the preset P-Q curve, both pump delivery flow rates of both pumps are reduced in order to follow the P-Q curve. This operation prevents overload of the engine. In addition, as the P-Q curve is preset by using the mean pressure of both pumps, both pump delivery flow rates become almost equal. Therefore, the higher pressure pump carries out larger load, while the lower pressure pump carries out smaller load. Thus, the total load of pumps is equal to the engine horsepower. (Summation control)

x Control by pilot pressure from the power increase solenoid valve.㩷 (only for the main pump)㩷 MC2/A sends a signal in proportion to the engine speed and load to the power increase solenoid valve.㩷 The power increase solenoid valve operates according to this signal and returns the pressure oil which acts on the compensation piston of regulator to the hydraulic oil tank. As a result, the delivery flow rate is increased. (Main pump power increase control) (Refer to the Control System group.)㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

Pressure Increase㩷 Flow Decrease

0

Pressure (P)

Flow Rate (Q)㩷

T3-1-12

0

Pilot Pressure (Pi)


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly x Control by Pilot Pressure from Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

Main Pump:㩷 MC2/A sends a signal in proportional to the rotation of the acceleration grip, to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve.㩷 The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve sends pilot pressure according to this signal to the regulator in order to increase or decrease the pump delivery flow rate. (Main pump displacement angle control) (Refer to the Control System group.) Swing Pump:㩷 MC2/A sends a signal in proportional to a position of the slew speed dial and sends a signal of the initial setting of pump displacement angle to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve.㩷 The displacement angle proportional solenoid valve sends pilot pressure according to on this signal to the regulator in order to increase or decrease the pump delivery flow rate. (Swing pump displacement angle control) (Refer to the Control System group.)㩷

㩷 㩷

Pr1

Main Pump Regulator

0

Pilot Pressure (Pi)

Flow Rate (Q)

0

Pilot Pressure (Pi)

Swing Pump Regulator

Psv

Pr1

Psv

Pz P3 P2 P1

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

T25N-03-01-009

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

T25N-03-01-008

P1 - Pump 1 Delivery Pressure

P2 - Pump 2 Delivery Pressure

Pz - Power Increase Control Pressure (From Power Increase Solenoid Valve) Psv - Pilot Pressure

Pr1 - Displacement Angle Proportional Pressure (From Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve)

T3-1-13

P3 - Swing Pump Delivery Pressure


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly (Blank)

T3-1-14


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Operation of Regulator㩷 Pr1

Psv

16 Main Pump Regulator

10

11

13 Pz P2

20

P1

9 7 8 17

㩷 Increase Decrease Displacement Angle

1

3

6

Pr1

Swing Pump Regulator

T25N-03-01-008

Psv

13

16

10 11

9

20

5

P3

7 8

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle

1

3

17㩷 T25N-03-01-009

6

1 - Pilot Piston 3 - Lever 2 5 - Pin 6 - Pilot Spring

7 - Feedback Lever 8 - Pin 9 - Return Spring

10 - Sleeve 11 - Spool 13 - Lever 1

16 - Inner Spring 17 - Servo Piston 20 - Compensating Piston

P1 - Pump 1 Delivery Pressure

Pz -

Pr1 - Displacement Angle Proportional Pressure (From Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve)

P3 - Swing Pump Delivery Pressure

P2 - Pump 2 Delivery Pressure

Power Increase Control Pressure (From Power Increase Solenoid Valve) Psv - Pilot Pressure

T3-1-15


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Control by Self Pump Pressure and Companion Pump Pressure㩷 NOTE: Control by self pump pressure and companion pump pressure is divided into the following two functions.㩷 Flow rate decrease function (overload prevention) When the load (pressure), the increases, the pump delivery flow rate is decreased and controlled so that the load not to exceed the engine horsepower.㩷 Flow rate increase function (flow rate restoration) When the load (pressure) decreases, the pump delivery flow rate is increased and controlled in order to efficiently use the engine horsepower.㩷

6. When servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) moves through pin (8). As neither compensating rod (19) nor lever 1 (13) moves, feedback lever (7) turns counterclockwise about pin (4) and spool (11) moves to the left. The cutouts of spool (11) and sleeve (10) are closed completely, so self pump delivery pressure P1 does not act on the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17), and the movement of servo piston (17) stops.㩷 7. These movements decrease the pump delivery flow rate and reduce the load to the pump.㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

• Flow rate decrease function (overload prevention)㩷 1. When self pump delivery pressure P1 and companion pump delivery pressure P2 (self pump delivery pressure P3 in case of the swing pump) increase, compensating piston (20) moves compensating rod (19) to the position where outer spring (15) force and inner spring (16) forces are balanced.㩷 2. Compensating rod (19) moves lever 1 (13) through pin (18). Lever 1 (13) turns counterclockwise about pin (12) which is fixed to the casing.㩷 3. Pin (4), which is attached to feedback lever (7), is inserted into the hole of lever 1 (13). Therefore, feedback lever (7) turns clockwise about pin (8) by turning lever 1 (13) and spool (11) moves to the right.㩷 4. When spool (11) moves, self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) through spool (11). Although self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the small diameter chamber side, servo piston (17) moves to the right due to the difference in area.㩷 5. The pump displacement angle is reduced according to the movement of servo piston (17) and the pump delivery flow rate decreases.㩷

0

Pressure (P)㩷

Main Pump

P2 P1

20 11 7

13

17

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

T25N-03-01-023

NOTE: The figure shows the main pump.㩷

T3-1-16


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly 10

11

12

13

4

15

16

P1 P2

20

19

18

8

7

17

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

10

20

11

12

19

13

18

4

8

7

15

17

16

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

47810 -

Pin Feedback Lever Pin Sleeve

11 - Spool 12 - Pin 13 - Lever 1

15 - Outer Spring 16 - Inner Spring 17 - Servo Piston

T3-1-17

18 - Pin 19 - Compensating Rod 20 - Compensating Piston


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly • Flow rate increase function (flow rate restoration)㩷 1. When self pump delivery pressure P1 and companion pump delivery pressure P2 (self pump delivery pressure P3 in case of the swing pump) decrease, compensating piston (20) moves with compensating rod (19) together leftward to the position where outer spring (15) force and inner spring (16) forces are balanced.㩷 2. Compensating rod (19) moves lever 1 (13) through pin (18). Lever 1 (13) turns clockwise about pin (12) which is fixed to the casing.㩷 3. Pin (4), which is attached to feedback lever (7), is inserted into the hole of lever 1 (13). Therefore, feedback lever (7) turns counterclockwise about pin (8) by turning lever 1 (13) and spool (11) moves to the left.㩷 4. When spool (11) moves, the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is connected to the hydraulic oil tank through spool (11). As self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the small diameter chamber side, servo piston (17) moves to the left.㩷 5. The pump displacement angle increases according to the movement of servo piston (17) and the pump delivery flow rate increases.㩷 6. When servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) moves through pin (8). As neither compensating rod (19) nor lever 1 (13) moves, feedback lever (7) turns clockwise about pin (4) and spool (11) moves, to the right. The cutouts of spool (11) and sleeve (10) are closed completely, so the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is not connected to the hydraulic oil tank, and the movement of servo piston (17) stops.㩷 7. These movements increase the pump delivery flow rate.㩷 㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

0

Pressure (P)㩷

P2 P1

20 11 7

13

17

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

㩷 T25N-03-01-025

㩷 NOTE: The figure shows the main pump.㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-1-18


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly 10

To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

11

12

13

4

15

16

P1

20

19

18

8

7

17

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

10

20

11

12

19

13

18

4

8

7

15

17

16

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

47810 -

Pin Feedback Lever Pin Sleeve

11 - Spool 12 - Pin 13 - Lever 1

15 - Outer Spring 16 - Inner Spring 17 - Servo Piston

T3-1-19

18 - Pin 19 - Compensating Rod 20 - Compensating Piston


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Control by Pilot Pressure of Power Increase Solenoid Valve (Main Pump Only)㩷 Power increase control pressure Pz from the power increase control solenoid valve acts and increases the pump delivery flow rate.㩷 㩷 1. When the power increase solenoid valve is excited by a signal from MC2/A, the pilot pressure acting on pin (21) returns to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 2. Compensating piston (20) is returned with compensating rod (19) together leftward to the position where outer spring (15) force and inner spring (16) force are balanced.㩷 3. Compensating rod (19) moves lever 1 (13) through pin (18). Lever 1 (13) turns clockwise about pin (12) which is fixed to the casing.㩷 4. Pin (4), which is attached to feedback lever (7), is inserted into the hole of lever 1 (13). Therefore, feedback lever (7) turns counterclockwise about pin (8) by turning lever 1 (13) and spool (11) moves to the left.㩷 5. When spool (11) moves, the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is connected to the hydraulic oil tank through spool (11). As self-pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the small diameter chamber side, servo piston (17) moves to the left.㩷 6. The pump displacement angle increases according to the movement of servo piston (17) and the pump delivery flow rate increases.㩷 7. When servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) moves through pin (8). As neither compensating rod (19) nor lever 1 (13) moves, feedback lever (7) turns clockwise about pin (4) and spool (11) moves to the right. The cutouts of spool (11) and sleeve (10) are closed completely, so the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is not connected to the hydraulic oil tank and the movement of servo piston (17) stops.㩷 8. These movements increase the pump delivery flow rate.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

0

Pump Control Pressure (Pi)㩷

Pz

P1

20 11 7

13

T3-1-20

17

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

㩷 T25N-03-01-027


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

10

11

12

To Hydraulic Oil Tank

Pz

13

4

15

16

21

P

20

19

18

8

7

17

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

10

11

12

13

4

15

16

21

20

19

18

8

7

17

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

47810 -

Pin Feedback Lever Pin Sleeve

11 12 13 15 -

Spool Pin Lever 1 Outer Spring

16 - Inner Spring 17 - Servo Piston 18 - Pin

T3-1-21

19 - Compensating Rod 20 - Compensating Piston 21 - Pin


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Control by Pilot Pressure from Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷 NOTE: As the axial plug positions are different between main pump and swing pump, operations of the regulators are reversed.㩷

• Main Pump㩷 1. When the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve is excited by a signal from MC2/A, pilot pressure acts on pilot piston (1).㩷 2. When pilot pressure increases, pilot piston (1) moves rightward to the position where pilot pressure is balanced with the pilot spring (6) force.㩷 3. Pilot piston (1) moves lever 2 (3) through pin (2). Lever 2 (3) turns counterclockwise about pin (5) which is fixed to the axial plug.㩷 4. Pin (4), which is attached to feedback lever (7), is inserted into the hole of lever 2 (3). Therefore, feedback lever (7) turns clockwise about pin (8) by turning lever 2 (3) and spool (11) moves to the right.㩷 5. When spool (11) moves, self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) through spool (11). Although self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the small diameter chamber side, servo piston (17) moves to the right due to the difference in area.㩷 6. The pump displacement angle is reduced according to the movement of servo piston (17) and the pump delivery flow rate decreases.㩷 7. When servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) moves through pin (8). As neither compensating rod (19) nor lever 1 (13) moves, feedback lever (7) turns counterclockwise about pin (4) and spool (11) moves to the left. The cutouts of spool (11) and sleeve (10) are closed completely, so self pump delivery pressure P1 does not act on the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17), and the movement of servo piston (17) stops.㩷 8. These movements decrease the pump delivery flow rate and reduce the load to the pump.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Flow Rate (Q)

T3-1-22

0

Pump Control Pressure (Pi)㩷

Pilot Pressure㩷

P1

11 7 17

1

3

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

㩷 T25N-03-01-028


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly 1

2

3

4

5

6

Pilot Pressure㩷

7 8

㩷 T25N-03-01-015

10

11

13

4

P

19

8

7

17

㩷 T25N-03-01-016

1234-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin

567-

Pin Pilot Spring Feedback Lever

8 - Pin 10 - Sleeve 11 - Spool

T3-1-23

13- Lever 1 17- Servo Piston 19- Compensating Rod


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly • Swing Pump㩷 1. When the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve is excited by a signal from MC2/A, pilot pressure acts on pilot piston (1).㩷 2. When pilot pressure increases, pilot piston (1) moves rightward to the position where pilot pressure is balanced with the pilot spring (6) force.㩷 3. Pilot piston (1) moves lever 2 (3) through pin (2). Lever 2 (3) turns counterclockwise about pin (5) which fixed to the axial plug.㩷 4. Pin (4), which is attached to feedback lever (7), is inserted into the hole of lever 2 (3). Therefore, feedback lever (7) turns counterclockwise about pin (8) by turning lever 2 (3) and spool (11) moves to the left.㩷 5. When spool (11) moves, the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is connected to the hydraulic oil tank through spool (11). As self pump delivery pressure P1 acts on the small diameter chamber side, servo piston (17) moves to the left.㩷 6. The pump displacement angle increases according to the movement of servo piston (17) and the pump delivery flow rate increases.㩷 7. When servo piston (17) moves, feedback lever (7) moves through pin (8). As neither pilot piston (1) nor lever 2 (3) moves, feedback lever (7) turns clockwise about pin (4) and spool (11) moves to the right. The cutouts of spool (11) and sleeve (10) are closed completely, so the large diameter chamber side of servo piston (17) is not connected to the hydraulic oil tank, and the movement of servo piston (17) stops.㩷 8. These movements increase the pump delivery flow rate.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Flow Rate (Q)㩷

T3-1-24

0

Pump Control Pressure (Pi)㩷

Pilot Pressure

P1

11 7 17

㩷 1

3

Increase Decrease Displacement Angle㩷

T25N-03-01-029


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly 1

2

3

4

5

6

Pilot Pressure㩷

7 8

㩷 T25N-03-01-017

10

11

To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

4

P

㩷 8

7

17

T25N-03-01-018

㩷 1234-

Pilot Piston Pin Lever 2 Pin

567-

Pin Pilot Spring Feedback Lever

8 - Pin 10 - Sleeve 11 - Spool

T3-1-25

13- Lever 1 17- Servo Piston 19- Compensating Rod


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly SOLENOID VALVE㩷 The pump 2 regulator and swing pump regulator provide a displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. The power increase solenoid valve is provided to the PTO gearbox between pump 1 and pump 2. (Refer to "Control Functions of Regulator".) Operation of Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷 1. In neutral state, port T and the output port are connected through the cutout of spool (4), and pressure oil from port P is blocked completely by spool (4).㩷 2. When electric current from MC2/A goes to solenoid (1), solenoid (1) is excited and pushes spool (4) to the right.㩷 3. The output port is connected to port P through the cutout of spool (4) and pressure oil from port P flows to the output port.㩷 4. Spring chamber (5) is connected to port T through hole (3) of spool (4). As left side diameter (A) of notch of spool (4) is larger than right side diameter (B), spool (4) returns to the left.㩷

Operation of Power Increase Solenoid Valve㩷 1. In neutral state, port P and the output port are connected through the cutout of spool (4).㩷 2. When electric current from MC2/A goes to solenoid (1), solenoid (1) is excited and pushes spool (4) to the right.㩷 3. The output port is connected to port T through the cutout of spool (4) and pressure in the output port begins to decrease.㩷 4. Spring chamber (5) is connected to port T through hole (3) of spool (4). As left side diameter (A) of notch of spool (4) is larger than right side diameter (B), spool (4) returns to the left.㩷

T3-1-26


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve

Power Increase Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

In Neutral State㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 1

2

3

5

T

4

Output Port㩷

1

P

2

㩷 5

3

T

4

P

Output Port㩷

T25N-03-01-019

T25N-03-01-021

In Operation㩷 1

2

5

3

T

A

Output Port㩷

B

4

P

1

2

5

T25N-03-01-020

T3-1-27

3

T

4

Output Port

A

P

B

T25N-03-01-022


COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Assembly PILOT PUMP, BOOM FOOT / LOWER CONTROL HYDRAULIC OIL SOURCE PUMP, REEVING WINCH DRIVING PUMP (OPTIONAL)㩷

Suction Port㩷

1

2

Drive gear (1) is driven through the PTO gearbox and driven gear (2) engaged with drive gear (1) is also rotated. 1 - Drive Gear

2 - Driven Gear

Delivery Port㩷

㩷 T137-02-03-005

T3-1-28


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit OUTLINE㩷 The swing reduction unit consists of the valve unit, the swing motors and the swing reduction gear.㩷 The valve unit prevents the cavitation in the swing circuit.㩷 The swing motor is a swash plate type axial plunger motor (with built-in swing parking brake), which is driven by pressure oil from the pump and provides the rotation the swing reduction gear.㩷

The swing reduction gear turns the swing motors with large torque at a low speed and slews the superstructure.

Valve Unit

Swing Motor

Swing Reduction Gear㩷

㩷 T2CD-03-02-001

T3-2-1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit SWING REDUCTION GEAR㩷 The swing reduction gear is a two-stage reduction gear comprised of one-stage spur gear and one-stage planetary gear. Swing motor output shaft (1) rotates pinion (7) and also rotates sun gear (5) through first stage gear (2). Sun gear (5) rotates planetary gear (3) and output shaft (carrier) (6). Output shaft (carrier) (6) engages with the internal gear of turntable bearing fixed to the undercarriage in order to slew the superstructure.㩷

1

2

3

4

7

5

6

㩷 T2CD-03-02-002

1 - Motor Output Shaft 2 - First Stage Gear

3 - Planetary Gear 4 - Ring Gear

5 - Sun Gear 6 - Output Shaft (Carrier)

T3-2-2

7 - Pinion


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit SWING MOTOR㩷 The swing motor consists of swash plate (6), rotor (11), plungers (10), valve plates (12), housing (8) and swing parking brake (spring (1), brake piston (2), plate (3) and friction plate (4)).㩷 Shaft (7) is splined to rotor (11) into which, plunger (10) is inserted.㩷

㩷 㩷 When pressure oil is supplied from the pump, plunger (10) is pushed. As shoe (9) at the top of plunger (10) slides over swash plate (6), rotor (11) rotates.㩷 The top of shaft (7) is splined to the pinion gear of swing reduction gear. Therefore, the rotation of shaft (7) is transmitted to the swing reduction gear.㩷

㩷 㩷

12 1

11

2 3 4 10 5 9

6

8

7

㩷 T2CD-03-02-004

1 - Spring 2 - Brake Piston 3 - Plate

4 - Friction Plate 5 - Retainer 6 - Swash Plate

7 - Shaft 8 - Housing 9 - Shoe

T3-2-3

10 - Plunger 11 - Rotor 12 - Valve Plate


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit SWING PARKING BRAKE㩷 The swing parking brake is a wet type multi-plate disc brake and a negative mechanism that releases the brake when the brake release pressure enters in the brake piston room. The brake release pressure is supplied from the pilot pump only when the swing brake switch is operated. In other cases (including engine stopping), the brake release pressure returns to the hydraulic oil tank, so that the brake is applied automatically by spring (1).

Swing Brake Switch

When Brake is Applied㩷 1. When the swing brake switch is set to the ON position, the swing brake solenoid valve returns to the neutral position, so that the pilot pressure, which is applied to port Pb, is returned to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 2. As a result, the force of spring (1) acts on friction plate (4), which is engaged with the external circumference of rotor (11), and on plate (3), which is engaged with the inside of housing (8) through brake piston (2). Thus, the external circumference of rotor (11) is secured with friction force.㩷 3. When the engine stops, the brake is applied automatically as pressure is not applied to port Pb.㩷

2 1

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 T25N-03-02-004

Swing Brake Switch

When Brake is Released㩷 1. When the swing brake switch is to set the OFF position, the swing brake solenoid valve is selected. Then, pilot pressure from the pilot pump is applied to port Pb.㩷 2. Pilot pressure applied to port Pb acts on the brake piston chamber.㩷 3. Brake piston (2) moves by compressing spring (1).㩷 4. As a result, plate (3) and friction plate (4) are freed and release the brake.㩷

2 Brake Piston Chamber

1 Swing Brake Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 T25N-03-02-005

T3-2-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit When Brake is Applied:㩷

To Hydraulic Oil Tank

When Brake is Released:㩷

1

1

2

2

3

Pb

From Pilot Pump

4

8 Brake Piston Chamber㩷

3

Pb

4

8 Brake Piston Chamber㩷

11

11

T25N-03-02-006

1 - Spring 2 - Brake Piston

3 - Plate 4 - Friction Plate

T25N-03-02-006

8-

T3-2-5

Housing

11 - Rotor


COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Reduction Unit VALVE UNIT㩷 The valve unit is provided with a make-up valve. The make-up valve prevents the cavitation in the circuit. Make-Up Valve㩷 In swing stopping operation, the swing motor is driven by the inertial force of superstructure. The swing motor is turned forcibly in excess of oil pressure from the pump so that the cavitation will be generated in the motor.㩷 In order to avoid this, the poppet opens and draws hydraulic oil when the pressure in the swing circuit becomes lower than that in the return circuit (port M) in order to compensate the lack of oil feed.㩷

Make-Up Valve㩷

Port M㩷

Control Valve㩷

㩷 T25N-03-02-007

Control Valve㩷

Poppet㩷

Make-Up Valve

Make-Up Valve㩷

Port M㩷

㩷 T2CD-03-02-003

T3-2-6


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly OUTLINE㩷 The front drum and rear drum are driven separately. When the crane is operated, the front drum uses boom hook and the rear drum uses jib hook in order to carry out hosting and lowering (power lowering and free fall) and stopping (holding) operation. (The front drum and rear drum consist of the same parts respectively. The following explanation is made in terms of the front drum.) The front drum consists of winch motor (2) and winch drum (1).

Winch motor (2) consists of the motor, counterbalance valve (3), regulator (4), the shuttle valve block, the drum brake release solenoid valve and the wet type multi plate brake. Regulator (4) is provided with the motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve and motor cutoff high pressure solenoid valve. Winch drum (1) consists of two-stage planetary reduction gear (5) and brake unit (6), which is built in the drum. 㩷

Front Drum㩷 Jib Hook㩷 Rear Drum㩷 Boom Hook㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

With lowering free mechanism (Optional)㩷

No lowering free mechanism is provided㩷 㩷

1㩷

2㩷

1

2

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷 㩷

5㩷

4

6

3

5㩷 㩷

4

6-

Brake Unit

3 㩷

㩷 1 - Winch Drum

3 - Counterbalance Valve

2 - Winch Motor

4 - Regulator

5 - Reduction Gear (Two-Stage Planetary) 㩷

T3-3-1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly MOTOR㩷 The motor is a swash plate type variable displacement axial piston motor capable of selecting high/low speeds. High/low speed selection of the motor is controlled by the regulator. The wet type multi plate brake is built in the rear case (9) side of motor. The motor has plungers (1)(9 used). In each plunger (1), shoe (3) is crimped into rotor (2).

Plunger (1) slides over the slope of shoe plate (4) in order to rotate rotor (2). Rotor (2) is splined to output shaft (7) in order to turn output shaft (7). Swash plate (5) is located between tilt pistons (8)(2 used). The displacement angle is changed by the operation of regulator.

㩷 㩷 㩷

8

Wet Type Multi plate Brake㩷

7

9

5

4

3 2 1 6

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 1 - Plunger 2 - Rotor 3 - Shoe

45-

Shoe Plate Swash Plate

67-

T3-3-2

Valve Plate Output Shaft

89-

Tilt Piston Rear Case


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly Operation㩷

㩷 㩷

1. Rotation speeds of the front and rear drums are changed according to oil flow rate from the pump.㩷 2. Pressure oil from port A of valve plate (6) flows to rotor (2) and pushes plunger (1).㩷 3. Then, shoe (3) slides over shoe plate (4) on swash plate (5) in order to rotate rotor (2).㩷 4. The turning torque of rotor (2) is transmitted to the reduction gear through output shaft (7). Return oil flows through delivery port B and returns to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 5. When high pressure oil comes in port B, the rotation is reversed.㩷

㩷 㩷 B

A

7 5

6

4

3

1

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪉㪐

2

㩷 1 - Plunger 2 - Rotor

3 - Shoe 4 - Shoe Plate

5 - Swash Plate 6 - Valve Plate

㩷 㩷

T3-3-3

7 - Output Shaft 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly (Blank)㩷

T3-3-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly REGULATOR㩷 The regulator has two control functions as follows. Speed

x High/low speed selection control Motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve (7) operates in proportion to operation of speed set dial for motor (1). The displacement angle of motor (1) is changed according to pilot pressure caused when moving the hoisting lever. (Front and rear motor speed control) (Refer to the Control System group.)㩷

0

Operation of Speed Set Dial㩷

x Maximum displacement angle lock control

Speed

When self pressure increases, pressure oil to the large diameter chamber in tilt piston (2) is reduced. When self pressure increases further, pressure oil in the large diameter chamber is returned to the hydraulic oil tank. As a result, the displacement angle is fixed to the maximum (minimum speed).㩷 In addition, motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3) controls the instructions for maximum displacement angle in order to select the set pressure to the maximum displacement angles for hoisting and lowering operations.㩷 㩷

7

8

9

0

㩷 Self Pressure㩷

10

11

1

6 2 5

4

3

T25N-03-03-013

㩷 1 - Motor

4 - Piston 1

2 - Tilt Piston 3 - Motor Cutoff High-Pressure Solenoid Valve

5 - Spool 1 6 - Spring 1

7 - Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve 8 - Piston 2 9 - Spool 2

T3-3-5

10 - Orifice 11 - Spring 2 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly High/Low Speed Selection Control㩷

• High speed selection㩷 1. When the speed set dial of front motor is operated, MC2/B sends a signal in proportion to operation of the speed set dial to front motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve (7).㩷 2. When the hoisting lever is moved, pilot pressure oil from front motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve (7) acts on piston 2 (8).㩷 3. When this pressure is larger than force of spring 2 (11), piston 2 (8) pushes spool 2 (9) to the position where pressure is balanced with force of spring 2 (11).㩷 4. Self pressure (pressure oil in the main circuit) flows to the large diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2) through orifice (10).㩷

5. Self pressure also acts on the small diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2).㩷 6. Self pressure, which flows through orifice (10), is lower than pressure in the small diameter chamber side.㩷 7. Pressure in the large diameter chamber side increases gradually and reaches that in the small diameter chamber side. At this time, tilt piston (2) moves to the right due to the difference in area.㩷 8. As a result, motor (1) is set to a small displacement angle and results in high speed rotation.㩷 9. Thus, motor (1) is protected from rapid changes in speed and over speed running.㩷 㩷

㩷 High speed selection (at small displacement angle)㩷 㩷

7

8

9

10

11

㩷 1 Pi1

Bv

Av

㩷 2

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Motor 2 - Tilt Piston

7-

Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve 8 - Piston 2

9-

Spool 2

10 - Orifice

T3-3-6

11 - Spring 2 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly • Low speed selection㩷 1. When the speed set dial of front motor is operated, MC2/B sends a signal in proportion to operation of the speed set dial to front motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve (7).㩷 2. When the hoisting lever is moved, pilot pressure oil from front motor displacement angle proportional solenoid valve (7) acts on piston 2 (8).㩷 3. When this pressure is lower than force of spring 2 (11), spool 2 (9) pushes piston 2 (8) to the position where pressure is balanced with force of spring 2 (11).㩷 4. Pressure oil acting on piston 2 (8) flows to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷

5. Self pressure slowly flows to the hydraulic oil tank through orifice (10).㩷 6. As self pressure acts on the small diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2), tilt piston (2) moves to the left.㩷 7. As a result, motor (1) is set to a large displacement angle and results in low speed rotation.㩷 8. Thus, motor (1) is protected from rapid changes in speed and overload.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 Low speed selection (at large displacement angle)㩷 㩷

7

8

9

10

11

㩷 1 Pi1

Bv

Av

㩷 2

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Motor 2 - Tilt Piston

7-

Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve 8 - Piston 2

9-

Spool 2

10 - Orifice

㩷 㩷

T3-3-7

11 - Spring 2 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly Maximum Displacement Angle Lock Control㩷

• In Hoisting Operation㩷 1. As no signal comes to motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3) during hoisting operation, motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3) is not selected.㩷 2. Pilot pressure acts on piston 1 (4) through motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3).㩷 3. Self pressure acts on piston 1 (4).㩷 4. When self pressure exceeds pilot pressure acting on piston 1 (4) and spring 1 (6) force, piston 1 (4) moves leftward to the position when self pressure is balanced with those pressures.㩷 5. As spool 1 (5) is pushed by piston 1 (4), the circuit to the large diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2) is restricted.㩷

6. When self pressure increases further, spool 1 (5) is pushed by piston 1 (4) and pressure oil at the large diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2) flows to the hydraulic oil tank through spool 1 (5).㩷 7. As a result, tilt piston (2) is pushed leftward and motor (1) is set to the maximum displacement angle.㩷 8. Thus, by setting pressure of spool 1 (5) at higher level than that in lowering operation, an instruction for maximum displacement angle of motor (1) is retarded in order to retain the horsepower for hoisting operation.㩷 In addition, during the self pressure increasing, the maximum displacement angle of motor (1) is retained.㩷 㩷 1

Self pressure: Low

Self pressure: High

1

6

6 2

2

5

5

Self Pressure

4 3

Self Pressure㩷

4

3

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪌㩷

㩷 1 - Motor 2 - Tilt Piston

3-

Motor Cutoff High-Pressure Solenoid Valve 4 - Piston 1

5㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-3-8

Spool 1

6㩷

Spring 1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly • In Lowering Operation㩷 1. During lowering operation, motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3) is selected by a signal from MC2/A.㩷 2. Pressure oil acting on piston 1 (4) flows to the hydraulic oil tank through motor cutoff high-pressure solenoid valve (3).㩷 3. Therefore, force against self pressure acting on piston 1 (4) is only force of spring 1 (6).㩷 4. When self pressure becomes higher than force of spring 1 (6), piston 1 (4) moves leftward to the position where self pressure is balanced with force of spring 1 (6).㩷 5. As spool 1 (5) is pushed by piston 1 (4), the circuit to the large diameter chamber side of tilt piston (2) is restricted.㩷

6. When self pressure increases further, spool 1 (5) is pushed by piston 1 (4) and pressure oil in the large diameter chamber of tilt piston (2) flows to the hydraulic oil tank through spool 1 (5).㩷 7. As a result, spool 1 (5) moves by self pressure lower than that in hoisting operation and motor (1) is set at the maximum displacement angle.㩷 8. Thus, by setting pressure for hoisting or lowering operation, horsepower is retained for hoisting operation, or the motor speed is controlled for lowering operation.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 1

Self pressure: Low

Self pressure: High

1

6

6 2

2

5

5

Self Pressure

4 3

Self Pressure

4

3

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪍㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪎㩷

㩷 1 - Motor 2 - Tilt Piston

3-

Motor Cutoff High-Pressure Solenoid Valve 4 - Piston 1

5㩷

T3-3-9

Spool 1

6㩷

Spring 1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly COUNTERBALANCE VALVE㩷

The counterbalance valve consists of counterbalance spool (4), spring (3), check valve (1) and relief valve (2).

Purpose of Counterbalance㩷 1. The counterbalance valve is provided in the lowering circuit.㩷 2. When a load is lifted, as its weight always works downward as an external force, the motor carries a load torque in the lowering direction.㩷 3. At this time, in the hoisting circuit, an internal pressure corresponding to this external force is generated.㩷 4. When the control valve is operated in the lowering direction under this loading condition, internal pressure of the hoisting circuit that holds the motor is released.㩷 5. The motor is turned by external force working in lowering direction regardless of oil flow rate from the pump so that coasting phenomenon may occur.㩷 6. The counterbalance valve prevents this coasting phenomenon.㩷

2

㩷 1

A

3

B㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪉

4

㩷 㩷

Lowering㩷

2

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Check Valve

2 - Relief Valve

3 - Spring

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-3-10

4 - Counterbalance Spool


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly In Hosting Operation㩷

1. During hoisting operation, pressure oil from the pump flows through port A, pushes up the poppet of check valve (1) and flows to the motor through port D. 2. Return oil returns to the hydraulic oil tank through ports C and B.㩷 3. During hoisting operation, only check valve (1) operates.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Hoisting㩷

Hoisting㩷

1

C C

D

B

A

D

A

B

4

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 1 - Check Valve

㩷 㩷

4 - Counterbalance Spool

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-3-11


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly In Lowering Operation㩷 1. During lowering operation, pressure oil from the pump flows to the motor through ports B and C.㩷 2. Pressure oil also flows to pilot passage (5) of counterbalance spool (4). As return oil is blocked by check valve (1), the motor does not turn and oil feed pressure increases.㩷 3. This pressure oil flows through pilot passage (5) and moves counterbalance spool (4) leftward (rightward in circuit diagram).㩷 4. Pressure oil opens ports D and A and return oil from the motor returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the control valve.㩷 5. As a result, the motor turns in the lowering direction.㩷 6. When increasing the oil feed amount to the motor, passage resistance in counterbalance spool (4) increases.㩷 7. Oil feed pressure increases so that counterbalance spool (4) moves further, the passage opens more and the motor speed increases.㩷

8. On the contrary, when oil flow rate decreases, passage resistance in counterbalance spool (4) decreases oil feed pressure is reduced.㩷 9. Counterbalance spool (4) is returned, the passage is narrowed and the motor speed decreases.㩷 10. When lowering a load, the motor is likely to be turned in excess of oil feed amount and oil feed pressure decreases.㩷 11. The motor speed is restricted not to be faster than oil feed amount by returning counterbalance spool (4) and narrowing the flow passage.㩷 12. Thus, the lowering speed changes according to oil feed amount.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Lowering㩷

Lowering㩷

C

1

C

4

㪛㩷

5 D

1 B A

A

B

4

㩷 㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Check Valve

4-

Counterbalance Spool

5 - Pilot Passage

T3-3-12


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly In Neutral State㩷

1. When the spool in control valve is set to the neutral position, the hydraulic oil tank pressure is applied in port B, counterbalance spool (4) is returned and the flow passage is closed.㩷 2. As check valve (1) is closed, internal pressure is generated corresponding to the lifting load in order to suspend the load in the position.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 4

1 B

A

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Check Valve

4 - Counterbalance Spool

T3-3-13


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly Overload Relief Valve㩷

㩷 2

6

Overload relief valve (2) that is provided in counterbalance valve body (6) absorbs shock pressure caused by inertial force when the motor stops.

㩷 1. Overload relief valve (2) is built in the lowering circuit.㩷 Poppet (3) in overload relief valve (2) closes the flow passage due to force of spring (5).㩷 2. When the control lever is set to the neutral position, the motor is likely to be turned in lowering direction by inertial force of the load.㩷 3. When pressure in port D increases instantly and reaches the set pressure, poppet (3) in overload relief valve (2) moves and releases pressure.㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪉

2

5

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪐

㩷 3

5

Port D

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪉㪊

㩷 㩷 1 - Overload Relief Valve

3 - Poppet

5 - Spring

T3-3-14

6 - Counterbalance Valve Body


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly BRAKE㩷

1

2

The brake is a wet type multi plate disc brake, and applied and released by the brake release solenoid valve. For releasing the brake, there are two ways: hydraulic and electric. (Winch brake mode control) (Refer to the Control System group.)

3

Operation㩷 1. Coupling (5) is splined to output shaft (4).㩷 coupling (5) is splined to friction plates (7).㩷 Disc plates (6) are splined to valve cover (1). Disc plates (6) and friction plates (7) are alternately installed.㩷 2. While the hoisting lever is set in the neutral position, pressure oil in port PR is routed to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 3. When spring (3) pushes brake piston (2), and frictions plate (7) and disc plates (6) closely contact to each other under pressure, the brake is applied.㩷 4. When hoisting or lowering with the front (rear) lever, a signal from MC2/A is sent to brake release solenoid valve (8).㩷 5. When, brake release solenoid valve (8) is selected, pressure oil from the pilot pump acts on brake piston (2) through port PR.㩷 6. Brake piston (2) compresses spring (3) so that disc plates (6) and friction plates (7) are freed.㩷 7. As a result, the brake is released.㩷

4

5

PR

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

7

6

2

8

Pilot Pump

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Valve Cover 2 - Brake Piston

34-

Spring Output Shaft

56-

T3-3-15

Coupling Disc Plate

78-

Friction Plate Brake Release Solenoid Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly WINCH DRUM㩷

The winch drum consists of the reduction gear and the brake unit (with free mechanism (optional)). The reduction gear is a two-stage planetary reduction gear and converts the rotation transmitted from the motor to a low-speed large torque so that the drum rotates. The brake unit is a wet type multi plate disc brake and applied with the brake pedal.

No free mechanism is provided

With free mechanism (Optional) Brake Unit㩷

Drum㩷

Reduction Gear㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

Reduction Gear㩷

Drum㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-3-16


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly REDUCTION GEAR㩷

1. The reduction gear is a two-stage planetary reduction gear. The motor rotates propeller shaft (6).㩷 2. This rotation is transmitted to ring gear (5) through first stage planetary gear (1), first stage carrier (2), sun gear (3), second stage planetary gear (4).㩷 3. Ring gear (5) is fixed to drum (8) with bolts (7).㩷 4. Therefore, while rotating ring gear (5), drum (8) is also rotated.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 3

8

1

2

5

6

7

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷 㩷

㩷 1 - First Stage Planetary Gear 2 - First Stage Carrier

34-

Sun Gear Second Stage Planetary Gear

56-

㩷 㩷

T3-3-17

Ring Gear Propeller Shaft

78-

Bolt Drum


COMPONENT OPERATION / Winch Assembly (Blank)

T3-3-18


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System OUTLINE㩷 The boom hoist system consists of boom hoist motor (5), reduction gear (3), brake valve (1) and boom hoist drum (4). Boom hoist motor (5) is an axial plunger motor that incorporates a parking brake (wet type multi plate brake). Boom hoist motor (5) is driven by pressure oil from the pump and transmits the rotation to reduction gear (3).

Reduction gear (3) is a three-stage planetary reduction gear that converts the rotation transmitted from boom hoist motor (5) to a low-speed large torque in order to rotate boom hoist drum (4). Brake valve (1) prevents overload and cavitation of the boom hoist circuit.

㩷 㩷 㩷

1

3

2

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷 㩷

5

㩷 㩷

㩷 1 - Brake Valve 2 - Regulator

3 - Reduction Gear 㩷

4㩷

Boom Hoist Drum

* This illustration represents the boom hoist system of Machine No.5 or earlier. 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-4-1

5㩷

Boom Hoist Motor


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System BOOM HOIST MOTOR㩷 The boom hoist motor is a swash plate type variable displacement axial plunger motor and consists of valve plate (1), swash plate (4), rotor (2), plunger (6) and shaft (3). Shaft (3) is splined to rotor (2). Plunger (6) is inserted into rotor (2).

Pressure oil supplied from the pump pushes plunger (6). Shoe (5) at the top of plunger (6) slides on swash plate (4) according to the inclination. Therefore, rotor (2) rotates.

㩷 㩷 Machine No.5 or earlier 1

2 3

㩷 6 12-

Valve Plate Rotor

34-

Shaft Swash Plate

5㩷

5

Shoe

4

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷 㩷

6㩷

Plunger

㩷 㩷 Machine No.6 or later 1

2 3

㩷 6

5

4

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷 㩷

㩷 1 - Valve Plate 2 - Rotor

34-

Shaft Swash Plate

5㩷

T3-4-2

Shoe

6㩷

Plunger


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System REDUCTION GEAR㩷 The reduction gear is a three-stage planetary reduction gear. The boom hoist motor rotates propeller shaft (7). This rotation is transmitted to ring gear (1) through first stage planetary gear (8), first stage carrier (6), second stage sun gear (5), second stage planetary gear (9), second stage carrier (4), third stage sun gear (3), third stage planetary gear (10) and third stage carrier (2).

Housing (11) in the boom hoist motor is fixed to the swing frame. Ring gear (1) is fixed to the boom hoist drum by using the bolts. Therefore, when ring gear (1) rotates, the boom hoist drum rotates. 㩷

㩷 Machine No.5 or earlier

11

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

8

㩷 T2CN-03-04-004

1 - Ring Gear 2 - Third Stage Carrier 3 - Third Stage Sun Gear

456-

Second Stage Carrier Second Stage Sun Gear First Stage Carrier

㩷 Machine No.6 or later

789-

1

Propeller Shaft First Stage Planetary Gear Second Stage Planetary Gear

2

3

4

10 - Third Stage Planetary Gear 11 - Housing 㩷

5 6 7

11

10

9

8 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷 㩷

1 - Ring Gear 2 - Third Stage Carrier 3 - Third Stage Sun Gear

456-

Second Stage Carrier Second Stage Sun Gear First Stage Carrier

789-

T3-4-3

Propeller Shaft First Stage Planetary Gear Second Stage Planetary Gear

10 - Third Stage Planetary Gear 11 - Housing


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System BOOM HOIST BRAKE㩷

The boom hoist brake is a wet type multi plate disc brake and a negative mechanism that releases the brake when brake release pressure enters the brake piston chamber. The wet type multi plate disc brake and the hoist drum lock are provided in the same circuit, and work at the same time. When Brake is Applied㩷 1. When the boom hoist lever is set in the neutral position, as the boom hoist drum unlocking solenoid valve is not selected, pilot pressure fed to the boom hoist drum lock returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the boom hoist drum lock solenoid valve.㩷 2. As a result, force of disc spring (1) acts on plates (3) engaged with the inside of housing (6) and on friction plates (4) engaged with the external circumference of brake coupling (5) through brake piston (2). Thus, the external circumference of brake coupling (5) is retained with friction force.㩷 3. In the boom hoist drum lock, pawl (9) is moved by torsion spring (8) and the boom hoist drum is locked.㩷 When Brake is Released㩷 1. When the boom hoist lever is moved, the boom hoist drum lock solenoid valve is selected by a signal from MC2/A.㩷 2. Then, pilot pressure from the pilot pump is supplied to the boom hoist drum lock through the boom hoist drum lock solenoid valve.㩷 3. Furthermore, pilot pressure acts on the brake piston chamber.㩷 4. Brake piston (2) moves by compressing disc spring (1).㩷 5. As a result, plate (3) and friction plate (4) are freed and the brake is released.㩷 6. The boom hoist drum lock retracts by pilot pressure and pawl (9) moves.㩷 7. As a result, pawl (9) is removed from the boom hoist drum and the lock is released.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 Pilot Pump

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

㩷 Boom Hoist Drum Lock㩷

㩷 㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 Pilot Pump

㩷 Boom Hoist Drum Lock㩷

㩷 㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-4-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System When Brake is Applied㩷 㩷

1

㩷 3

2

5

4

Boom Hoist Drum㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lock

9 Brake Piston Chamber㩷

8

7

To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

6

㩷 When Brake is Released㩷

1

2

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㩷 3

5

4

Boom Hoist Drum㩷

㩷 㩷

Brake Piston Chamber㩷

Boom Hoist Drum Lock

9 8

㩷 From Pilot Pump㩷

7

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

6

From Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Disc Spring 2 - Brake Piston 3 - Plate

4 - Friction Plate 5 - Brake Coupling 㩷

67㩷

Housing Pawl Joint

* This illustration represents the boom hoist brake of Machine No.5 or earlier. 㩷

T3-4-5

89㩷

Torsion Spring Pawl

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System COUNTERBALANCE VALVE㩷

The counterbalance valve consists of counterbalance spool (4), spring (3), check valve (1) and relief valve (2).

Purpose of Counterbalance㩷 1. The counterbalance valve is provided in the lowering circuit.㩷 2. When a load is lifted, as its weight always works downward as an external force, the motor carries a load torque in the lowering direction.㩷 3. At this time, in the hoisting circuit, an internal pressure corresponding to this external force is generated.㩷 4. When the control valve is operated in the lowering direction under this loading condition, internal pressure of the hoisting circuit that holds the motor is released.㩷 5. The motor is turned by external force working in lowering direction regardless of oil flow rate from the pump so that coasting phenomenon may occur.㩷 6. The counterbalance valve prevents this coasting phenomenon.㩷

㩷 2

1

㩷 3

4

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪎

㩷 㩷

Lowering

2

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Check Valve

2 - Relief Valve

3 - Spring

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-4-6

4 - Counterbalance Spool


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System In Hosting Operation㩷

1. During hoisting operation, pressure oil from the pump flows through port A, pushes up the poppet of check valve (1) and flows to the motor through port D.㩷 2. Return oil returns to the hydraulic oil tank through ports C and B.㩷 3. During hoisting operation, only check valve (1) operates.㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Hoisting㩷

㩷 Hoisting㩷

㩷 C

1

D D

C

A

4

A

B A

B

㩷 㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

㩷 1 - Check Valve

4 - Counterbalance Spool

㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-4-7


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System In Lowering Operation㩷 1. During lowering operation, pressure oil from the pump flows to the motor through ports B and C.㩷 2. Pressure oil also flows to pilot passage (5) of counterbalance spool (4). As return oil is blocked by check valve (1), the motor does not turn and oil feed pressure increases.㩷 3. This pressure oil flows through pilot passage (5) and moves counterbalance spool (4) leftward (rightward in circuit diagram).㩷 4. Pressure oil opens ports D and A and return oil from the motor returns to the hydraulic oil tank through the control valve.㩷 5. As a result, the motor turns in the lowering direction.㩷 6. When increasing the oil feed amount to the motor, passage resistance in counterbalance spool (4) increases.㩷 7. Oil feed pressure increases so that counterbalance spool (4) moves further, the passage opens more and the motor speed increases.㩷

8. On the contrary, when oil flow rate decreases, passage resistance in counterbalance spool (4) decreases oil feed pressure is reduced.㩷 9. Counterbalance spool (4) is returned, the passage is narrowed and the motor speed decreases.㩷 10. When lowering a load, the motor is likely to be turned in excess of oil feed amount and oil feed pressure decreases.㩷 11. The motor speed is restricted not to be faster than oil feed amount by returning counterbalance spool (4) and narrowing the flow passage.㩷 12. Thus, the lowering speed changes according to oil feed amount.㩷

Lowering㩷

Lowering㩷

C

1

5

4 C

D D

A A

4

B

B

A

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷

㩷 1 - Check Valve

4-

Counterbalance Spool

5 - Pilot Passage

T3-4-8


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System In Neutral State㩷

1. When the spool in control valve is set to the neutral position, the hydraulic oil tank pressure is applied in port B, counterbalance spool (4) is returned and the flow passage is closed.㩷 2. As check valve (1) is closed, internal pressure is generated corresponding to the lifting load in order to suspend the load in the position.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 4

B

A

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪊㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Check Valve

4 - Counterbalance Spool

T3-4-9


COMPONENT OPERATION / Boom Hoist System RELIEF VALVE㩷

㩷 㩷

Relief valve (2) that is provided in counterbalance valve body (6) absorbs shock pressure caused by inertial force when the motor stops.

6

2

1. Relief valve (2) is built in the lowering circuit.㩷 Poppet (3) in relief valve (2) closes the flow passage due to force of spring (5).㩷 2. When the control lever is set to the neutral position, the motor is likely to be turned in lowering direction by inertial force of the load.㩷 3. When pressure in port D increases instantly and reaches the set pressure, poppet (3) in relief valve (2) moves and releases pressure.㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪎

2

5

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

㩷 3

5

Port D

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪉㪊

㩷 㩷 2-

Relief Valve

3 - Poppet

5 - Spring

㩷 㩷

T3-4-10

6 - Counterbalance Valve Body


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves㩷 OUTLINE㩷

The control valve controls the pressure, flow rate, and flow direction in the hydraulic circuit.

The front and rear control valves are 4-spool type, which consist of the main relief valve, port relief valve, make-up valve, holding valve, pressure compensation valve, proportional solenoid valve, remote control pressure sensor and spools. The front control valve has the spools for travel (left), rear drum (high speed) and front drum (low speed). The rear control valve has the spools for travel (right), boom hoist, rear drum (low speed) and front drum (high speed). The spool is switched by pressure oil from the solenoid valve and delivers pressure oil from main pumps 1 and 2 to each actuator.

T3-5-1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves㩷 CONFIGURATION㩷

㩷 Front Control Valve㩷

2

3

4

5

6

7 1 8

㩷 T2CG-03-05-004

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

12 1

2

4

11

11

10

9

6

10

㩷 8

1-

Main Relief Valve

4-

2-

Left Travel Spool

5-

3-

Make-Up Valve

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

9 Rear Drum (High Speed) Spool

7-

Port Relief Valve (with Make-Up Function) 6 - Front Drum (Low Speed) Spool

8-

Pressure Compensation Valve

Front Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve 9 - Front Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor

T3-5-2

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

10 - Front Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor 11 - Front Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve 12 - Holding Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

7 1

11

5 3 2 12

6

4

8

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T3-5-3


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves㩷 Rear Control Valve㩷 㩷 㩷

2

3

4

5

6

4

7

8

1 9

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

17

1

2

5

17

7

16

13

15

14

8

13 12

11

10

12

16

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪊㪇㩷

14

10

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

11

15

㩷 1 - Main Relief Valve 2 - Right Travel Spool

6-

Port Relief Valve (with make-up function) 7 - Rear Drum (Low Speed) Spool

3 - Make-Up Valve

8-

Front Drum (High Speed) Spool

4 - Pressure Compensation Valve (2 Used) 5 - Boom Hoist Spool

9-

Holding Valve

10 - Rear Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve 11 - Rear Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor 12 - Rear Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor 13 - Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve

T3-5-4

14 - Boom Hoist Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve 15 - Boom Hoist Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor 16 - Boom Hoist Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Sensor 17 - Boom Hoist Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves 㩷

17 1

3

5

14

13

6

4

2

8 7 9

10

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T3-5-5


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves INTERNAL CIRCUIT㩷

Pilot Pressure Control Circuit㩷 Pilot Pressure oil from the remote control valve acts on a spool in the control valve and the spool moves. Front Control Valve㩷 9

㩷 㩷

10

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪎㩷

㩷 1

2

3

4

㩷 㩷

㩷 4

Rear Control Valve㩷

3

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪍㩷

5

6

7

9

8

10 㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Travel (Left Reverse) 2 - Travel (Left Forward) 3 - Front Drum (Low Speed) Hoisting

4-

Front Drum (Low Speed) Lowering 5 - Travel (Right Reverse) 6 - Travel (Right Forward)

7-

Boom Hoist Hoisting

89-

Boom Hoist Lowering Rear Drum (Low Speed) Hoisting

㩷 㩷

T3-5-6

10 - Rear Drum (Low Speed) Lowering


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves Main Circuit㩷 Internal circuit of the control valve is a series circuit. 1. Each section is connected by a passage.㩷 2. When the spool is set in neutral, oil from the pump flows to the next section through a passage.㩷 3. When the spool moves, pressure oil from port P flows to the actuator through port B or A.㩷 4. Return oil from the actuator flows to the downstream passage through the spool from port A or B.㩷 5. Therefore, all the oil through upstream section and the actuator flows to the downstream section.㩷

Passage㩷 A

B

P

T

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪉㪐㩷

㩷 㩷 Front Control Valve㩷 㩷

Rear Control Valve㩷 㩷

Port A㩷

Passage㩷

Port A㩷

Passage㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

Port P㩷

Port B㩷

Port P

T3-5-7

Port B


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves SPOOL㩷

A closed center type, open center type and semi-open center type spools are used.

P B

T A

x Closed Center Type Spool㩷

2

When the spool is set in neutral, oil in ports A and B is blocked by spool (2). Therefore, oil in ports A and B does not flow to port T. • Front drum (high speed)㩷 • Rear drum (high speed)㩷

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪉

㩷 㩷

x Open Center Type Spool㩷

㩷 T

When the spool is set in neutral, oil in port A or port B, and flows to the hydraulic oil tank through passage (1) in the spool and port T. • Travel (right)㩷 • Travel (left)㩷

B

A

1

T 1

2

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪊

x Semi-Open Center Type Spool㩷

Oil in port A flows to the hydraulic oil tank through passage (1) in the spool and port T. Oil in port B is blocked by spool (2). • Boom hoist㩷 • Rear drum (low speed)㩷 • Front drum (low speed)㩷

B

A

T 1

㩷 2

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪋

㩷 㩷 1 - Passage

㩷 㩷

T3-5-8

2-

Spool


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves Operation of Spool㩷 NOTE: The rear drum spool in rear control valve (low speed) is explained as an example. 1. When spool (2) moves to the right by compressing spring (1), pressure oil from port P flows to the actuator through passage (3) and port B.㩷 2. Return oil from the actuator flows to port T through port A and passage (5).㩷

Port T㩷

B

A

1

NOTE: For two upstream spools form a series circuit, when spools (2 and 4) are moved simultaneously, for instance, and if the actuator for upstream spool (4) stops due to overload, the actuator for downstream spool (2) also stops simultaneously.

2 5

3

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪌

2

Port P㩷

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

12-

Spring Spool (Rear Drum Low Speed)

3㩷

Passage

4 - Spool (Boom Hoist) 㩷

T3-5-9

5 - Passage 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves MAIN RELIEF VALVE㩷 The main relief valve prevents pressure in the main circuit from exceeding the set pressure while the actuators such as motor or cylinder are operated. Thus, oil leak from hose and pipe joints and breakage of the actuator are prevented. Relief Operation㩷 1. Pressure in port HP (main circuit) acts on pilot poppet (4) through orifice (6) in main poppet (1).㩷 2. When pressure in port HP reaches the set pressure of spring B (5), pilot poppet (4) opens a passage and pressure oil flows to port LP (hydraulic oil tank).㩷 3. At this time, a pressure difference is generated between port HP and spring chamber (2) due to orifice (6).㩷 4. When this pressure difference reaches the set pressure of spring A (3), main poppet (1) opens a passage and pressure oil from port HP flows to port LP.㩷 5. As a result, pressure in the main circuit decreases.㩷 6. When pressure in the main circuit decreases to the fixed level, main poppet (1) is closed by force of spring A (3).㩷

T3-5-10


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves Normal State㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

HP

LP

6

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 Relief State㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

HP

LP

6

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㩷 1

2

3

4

5

HP

6

LP

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

㩷 1 - Main Poppet 2 - Spring Chamber

3 - Spring A 4 - Pilot Poppet

5 - Spring B 㩷

T3-5-11

6㩷

Orifice


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves PORT RELIEF VALVE (with Make-Up Function)㩷 The port relief valve with make-up function is provided in the lowering circuit for front drum (low speed) and rear drum (low speed). The port relief function prevents pressure in each actuator circuit from increasing too high when an actuator is operated by external force while the control valve spool is set in neutral. In addition, the make-up function prevents cavitation by supplying oil from the hydraulic oil tank when pressure in an actuator circuit is reduced. Relief Operation㩷 1. Pressure in port HP (actuator circuit) flows to spring chamber (5) through orifice (10) in piston (1) and acts on pilot poppet (6).㩷 2. When pressure in port HP reaches the set pressure of spring B (7), pilot poppet (6) opens the passage and pressure oil from spring chamber (5) flows to port LP (hydraulic oil tank) through passage (8) and the external circumference of sleeve (3).㩷 3. At this time, a pressure difference is caused between port HP and spring room (5) due to orifice (10).㩷 4. When this pressure difference reaches the set pressure of spring A (4), main poppet (2) opens a passage and pressure oil from port HP flows to port LP.㩷 5. As a result, pressure in the actuator circuit decreases.㩷 6. When pressure in the actuator circuit decreases to the fixed level, pilot poppet (6) closes the passage by force of spring B (7) and pressure in spring chamber (5) increases. Then, main poppet (2) closes the passage by force of spring A (4).㩷

Make-Up Operation㩷 1. When pressure in port HP (actuator circuit) becomes lower than pressure in port LP (hydraulic oil tank), pressure of port LP pushes sleeve (3) rightward and opens the seat surface of sleeve (3).㩷 2. Hydraulic oil from port LP flows to port HP and prevents cavitation.㩷 3. When pressure in port HP rises to the fixed level, the seat surface of sleeve (3) is closed by force of spring A (4).㩷 㩷

T3-5-12


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves Normal State㩷 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

LP

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷

10

9

8

Relief State㩷 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

㩷 10

9

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷

8 3

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪊㩷

㩷 1 - Piston 2 - Main Poppet 3 - Sleeve

4 - Spring A 5 - Spring Chamber 6 - Pilot Poppet

7 - Spring B 8 - Passage 㩷

T3-5-13

9 - Spring C 10 - Orifice 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves MAKE-UP VALVE㩷

The lowering circuits of boom hoist, provides a make-up valve. The make-up valve prevents cavitation by supplying oil from port T when pressure in port B becomes negative.

Port T㩷

Port B

Operation㩷 1. When pressure in port B becomes negative, the poppet that is pushed rightward due to the pressure reeving area difference (Y > X) is moved leftward by pressure in port T.㩷 2. As a result, oil is fed from port T to port B in order to prevent cavitation.㩷

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷

Port B㩷

Port T㩷 㩷

Area Y

Poppet

Area X㩷

㩷 㪫㪊㪊㪈㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷

T3-5-14


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves HOLDING VALVE㩷

Holding valve (3) maintains the unidirectional flow and prevents reverse flow. The front and rear high speed circuits provides this valve.

㩷 㩷

Low Speed Hoisting㩷 During low speed hoisting, only low speed spool (1) works. High speed pool (2) is kept closed.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

2

High Speed Hoisting㩷 When shifting the hoisting lever from low speed to high speed position, pressure oil tends to flow backward from the motor side to the pump side as pressure at the pump side is lower than pressure at the motor side at the start of opening of higher speed spool (2).㩷 In order to avoid this, holding valve (3) is provided.㩷

1 3

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪉㩷

㩷 㩷

2

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪊㩷

3

㩷 㩷 1 - Spool (Low Speed Side) 2 - Spool (High Speed Side)

T3-5-15

3 - Holding Valve 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE㩷 The pressure compensation valves are pressure compensated flow rate control valves that are located in the boom hoist, rear drum (low speed), and front drum (low speed) circuits. The pressure compensation valve maintains desired flow rate to an actuator regardless of its carrying load. NOTE: Boom hoist operation is explained in this section as an example. Operation (with small lever stroke)㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P flows to chamber C through internal passage. Then, pressure oil flows to chamber E through the passage of compensation spool and acts on the compensation spool end.㩷 2. When the boom hoist lever is moved, pressure oil that flows through the spool acts on spring chamber B through passage A.㩷 3. If the lever is at small shift, as the spool severely narrows pressure oil acting on spring chamber B, differential pressure between chamber C (chamber E) and chamber B becomes larger.㩷 4. When a differential pressure between chamber A (chamber E) and chamber B increases, the compensation spool moves upward while pushing the spring in spring chamber.㩷 5. As a result, pressure oil from port P flows to the downstream section through chambers C to D.㩷 6. Thus, by releasing excess pressure, an optimum flow rate to the actuator is obtained.㩷

Spring㩷

To Actuator㩷 To Downstream Section㩷

Pressure Compensation Valve

Spool (Boom Hoist)㩷 From Port P

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪋㪈㩷

㩷 㩷

Spring Chamber

Spring㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

Compensation Spool㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪋㩷

T3-5-16


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves Operation (with Large Lever Stroke)㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P flows to chamber C through internal passage of control valve. Then, pressure oil flows to chamber B through the passage in compensation spool and acts on the compensation spool end.㩷 2. When the boom hoist lever is moved, pressure oil that flows through the spool acts on the spring chamber B through passage A.㩷 3. If the lever is at large shift, as the spool does not narrow oil flow rate so much, differential pressure between chamber C (chamber E) and chamber B becomes smaller.㩷 4. When a differential pressure between chamber C (chamber E) and chamber B becomes small, the compensation spool is pushed downward by force of spring in spring chamber B.㩷 5. As a result, as a passage between chamber C and D is blocked, large amount of oil flows through the actuator.㩷 6. Thus, oil flow rate is delivered to the actuator according to the lever stroke.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

Spring㩷

To Actuator㩷

Pressure Compensation Valve

Spool (Boom Hoist) From Port P

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪋㪇㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

Spring Chamber

Spring㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Compensation Spool㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪌㩷

T3-5-17


COMPONENT OPERATION / Front and Rear Control Valves (Blank) 㩷

T3-5-18


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Swing Control Valve㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The swing control valve consists of swing spool (5) (controlled by the hydraulic pilot pressure), 3-spool solenoid valve unit hydraulic oil source spool (2) (controlled by the solenoid) and relief valve (4). Swing spool (5) is selected by pressure oil from the swing remote control valve in order to deliver pressure oil from the swing pump to the swing motor. 3-spool solenoid valve unit hydraulic oil source spool (2) is switched by a signal transmitted to solenoid valve (1) and supplies pressure oil from the swing pump to the counterweight cylinder and the flip cylinder through the 3-spool solenoid valve unit.

NOTE: Refer to the Front/Rear Control Valve group as for operation of main relief valve (4) and the spools.

EXTERNAL VIEW㩷 1

2 1

5

4 3

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪈㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪉㪎㩷

INTERNAL CIRCUIT

2

5

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

1 1-

3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Hydraulic Oil Source Solenoid Valve 2 - 3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Hydraulic Oil Source Spool

3-

Swing Pilot Pressure Sensor

4-

T3-6-1

Relief Valve

5-

Swing Spool


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Swing Control Valve㩷 CONFIGURATION㩷 㩷

4 1

A A

B

B

5

2

1

1

Section: A-A

5

㩷 Section: B-B

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 1-

3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Hydraulic Oil Source Solenoid Valve

2-

3-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Hydraulic Oil Source Spool

4-

T3-6-2

Relief Valve

5-

Swing Spool


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The lower control valve provides the electromagnetic-hydraulic pilot type spool and direct-acting spool, which consists of the RGB block and function block. The RGB block provides the relief valve, pressure reducing valve and sequence valve. The function block provides the spool, holding valve and solenoid valve. The spool is switched by electric current from each control switch and delivers pressure oil from port P to the jack-up cylinder and the side frame connecting cylinder.

The function block consists of the jack-up (right front), jack-up (left front), jack-up (right rear), jack-up (left rear), side frame connecting (right) and side frame connecting (left) viewing from the RGB block.

㩷 Port P㩷

Solenoid Valve RGB Block

Jack-Up (Right Front)㩷

Jack-Up (Left Front)㩷

Jack-Up (Right Rear)㩷

Function Block

Jack-Up (Left Rear)㩷

Side Frame Connecting (Right)㩷 Side Frame Connecting (Left)㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

T3-7-1


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 1

CONFIGURATION㩷

2

3

4 5 18

6 7 8 9 10

18 11 12 13 14

18

15 16

㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

A

B

B

B

B

B

B

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

T3-7-2


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

Section A

㩷 㩷 6

5

8

2

3

1

7

10 9 12 11 14

13

16

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪉㪇㩷

15

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪈㪐㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

4

㩷 Section B㩷

18

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪉㪊㩷

㩷 17

㩷 1 - Pressure Reducing Valve

6 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

11 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)

2 - Relief Valve

7 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Front)

12 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)

3 - Orifice

8 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Front)

4 - Sequence Valve

9 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)

5 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

10 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)

13 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (Right) 14 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (Right) 㩷

T3-7-3

15 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (Left) 16 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (Left) 17 - Spool

18 - Holding Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 INTERNAL CIRCUIT㩷

Pressure oil through port P is divided into two in the RGB block. One flow flows to each solenoid valve through the filter, pressure reducing valve (1) and orifice (3). (Circuit A) The other flow flows to main spool (17) through sequence valve (4). (Circuit B) Circuit B provides relief valve (2) which prevents its pressure from exceeding the set level. In addition, circuit B consists of a parallel circuit and makes the combined operation capable. The parallel circuit provides holding valve (18) which prevents the back flow of pressure oil from the output port during fine-control operation.

Filter㩷 Circuit A

1

2

3

RGB Block P

4 5 6 7

Circuit B

8

Neutral Circuit Parallel Circuit

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

18

17

16 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

1 - Pressure Reducing Valve

6-

Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

11 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)

2 - Relief Valve

7-

Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Left Front)

12 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Rear)

3 - Orifice

8-

Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Left Front)

4 - Sequence Valve

9-

Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)

5 - Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

10 - Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Rear)

13 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (Right) 14 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (Right) 㩷

T3-7-4

15 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Extend Solenoid Valve (Left) 16 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder Retract Solenoid Valve (Left) 17 - Spool

18 - Holding Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 FUNCTION BLOCK㩷 NOTE: Jack retract (right front) operation is explained in this section as an example. 1. Pressure oil in circuit A flows through the internal passage and acts on jack retract solenoid valve (5) (right front) and jack extend solenoid valve (6) (right front).㩷 2. Pressure oil in circuit B flows through the internal passage and flows to the neutral circuit and parallel circuit.㩷 3. Pressure oil in the parallel circuit pushes and opens holding valve (18) and flows to the passage.㩷 4. When the jack-up switch (right front) is set to the retract position, jack retract solenoid valve (5) (right front) is selected and pressure oil in circuit A flows to chamber C of the piston.㩷 5. Chamber D of the piston is connected to port T (hydraulic oil tank) through jack extend solenoid valve (6) (right front).㩷

6. The piston and spool (17) are connected.㩷 7. Therefore, spool (17) is moved leftward by pressure of chamber C.㩷 8. When the notch of spool (17) reaches the passage, pressure oil in the passage flows to port B and increases pressure in port B.㩷 9. Port A is connected to the tank passage and pressure oil in port A returns to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 10. Thus, each actuator is operated.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

6

5

Parallel Circuit (Circuit B)㩷

18

Passage Circuit A㩷

A

B

D

17

Tank Passage

Neutral Circuit (Circuit B)

Port T (To Hydraulic Oil Tank)

Piston

C

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪍㩷

㩷 㩷 5-

Jack Retract Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

6-

Jack Extend Solenoid Valve (Right Front)

17 - Spool

T3-7-5

18 - Holding Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 RELIEF VALVE㩷 The main relief valve prevents that pressure in the lower control circuit exceeds the set pressure while operating an actuator such as motor or cylinder. Thus, oil leak from hose and pipe joints and breakage of the actuator are protected. Relief Operation㩷 1. Pressure in port HP (main circuit) acts on pilot poppet (2) through orifice (7) in main poppet (6) and orifice (4) in seat (3).㩷 2. When pressure in port HP reaches the set pressure of spring (1), pilot poppet (2) opens the passage and pressure oil flows to port LP (hydraulic oil tank) through passage (8).㩷 3. At this time, a differential pressure is generated between port HP and spring chamber (9) due to orifice (7).㩷 4. When the differential pressure reaches the set pressure of spring (5), main poppet (6) opens the passage and pressure oil from port HP flows to port LP.㩷 5. As a result, pressure in the lower control circuit decreases.㩷 6. When pressure in the main circuit decreases to the fixed level, force of spring (5) closes main poppet (6).㩷 㩷

T3-7-6


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 Normal State:㩷 㩷

LP 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

HP

8

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪊㩷

Relief State:㩷

9

LP 1

2

HP

8

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪋㩷

LP 5

6

7

HP

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪌㩷

9

㩷 1 - Spring 2 - Pilot Poppet 3 - Seat

4 - Orifice 5 - Spring 㩷

67㩷

T3-7-7

Main Poppet Orifice

89㩷

Passage Spring Chamber


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE㩷 The pressure reducing valve reduces oil pressure of port P to the fixed level and delivers pressure oil to the solenoid valve of function block. Thus, rapid movement of the spool is prevented. Operation㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P flows to the output port through the notch and inside of the spool.㩷 2. The spring chamber connects to port T (hydraulic oil tank) through the hole of retainer.㩷 3. When pressure in port P increases and exceeds spring force, the spool moves rightward until pressure is balanced with spring force.㩷 4. When the notch of spool reaches the hole in retainer, port P and port T are connected, and pressure in port P decreases.㩷 5. When pressure in port P becomes lower than spring force, the spool moves leftward until pressure is balanced with spring force.㩷 6. Thus, rapid movement of the spool is prevented by reducing pressure of oil from port P and controlling pressure of the output port constant.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-7-8


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 Normal State:㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Output Port㩷

Spool㩷

Hole

Retainer

㩷 Port P㩷

Port T㩷

Spring㩷

Spring Chamber㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪈㩷

㩷 㩷 Pressure Reducing State:㩷 㩷 㩷

Output Port㩷

Spool㩷

Notch

Hole㩷

Retainer

㩷 Port P㩷

Port T㩷

Spring㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-7-9

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪉㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 SEQUENCE VALVE㩷 The sequence valve blocks pressure oil from port P and controls the pressure reducing valve to move prior to the sequence valve in order to maintain operating pressure of the main spool. Operation㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P is divided into two. one flow acts on the sequence valve, and the other flow acts on the pressure reducing valve.㩷 2. Force of spring A and B push up the sequence valve.㩷 3. Therefore, when pressure in port P is smaller than forces of spring A and B, the sequence valve is not selected.㩷 4. Pressure oil from port P flows to the pressure reducing valve and is routed to each solenoid valve.㩷

5. When pressure in port P is larger than forces of springs A and B, the sequence valve moves downward while compressing springs A and B. 㩷 6. Pressure oil from port P flows to the main spool through the internal passage.㩷 7. Thus, primary pressure (output pressure) of the pressure reducing valve is maintained by setting a time lag in operation between pressure reducing valve and sequence valve.㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

To Main Spool㩷

㩷 T

To Solenoid Valve㩷

P

㩷 Spring B㩷

Spring A㩷

Sequence Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-7-10

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪎㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 SOLENOID VALVE㩷 Each solenoid valve is an ON/OFF solenoid valve. When operating the switch corresponding to each actuator, the solenoid valve is excited and switches the rod. As a result, pressure oil from the pressure reducing valve acts on the main spool and the spool is selected. Operation㩷 1. When the switch is set to the OFF position, pressure oil from port P (pressure reducing valve) is blocked by steel ball (7).㩷 2. The output port is connected to port T (hydraulic oil tank) through steel ball (6).㩷 3. When the switch is set to the ON position, solenoid (2) is excited.㩷 4. Plunger (1) moves downward and pushes rod (3).㩷

5. Rod (3) pushes steel ball (4) to make close contact with seat (5) and the passage between the output port and port T is blocked.㩷 6. Steel ball (4) pushes steel balls (6, 7) and port P is connected to the output port.㩷 7. Pressure oil from port P flows to the output port through the external circumference of steel ball (7).㩷 8. As a result, pressure in the output port increases and the main spool is selected.㩷

㩷 Neutral State:

Exciting State: 1

1

2

2

3

3

4

Port T

4

Port T

5 Output Port

5 Output Port

6

6

7

7

㩷 Port P

㩷 Port P㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪏㩷

㩷 㩷

㩷 1 - Plunger 2 - Solenoid

3 - Rod 4 - Steel Ball

5 - Seat 6 - Steel Ball

T3-7-11

7 - Steel Ball 㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪌㪐㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Lower Control Valve㩷 (Blank) 㩷 㩷

T3-7-12


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The remote control valve controls pilot pressure oil that is used to move the spools in control valve. There are three remote control valves: 3-spool hoisting valve, 3-spool travel valve and 1-spool swing valve (7). The hoisting remote control valve consists of boom hoist valve (1), rear drum valve (2) and front drum valve (3). The travel remote control valve consists of third drum (4) (optional), left travel (5), and right travel (6). The hoisting and travel remote control valves are made of three section for each, which are connected which the spring pins.

The hoisting and travel remote control valves provide detent plug (10) respectively. The travel remote control valve provides remote control pressure sensors (8, 9). NOTE: These remote control valves have the same structure except for detent plug (10) and the shuttle block. 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

㩷 10

Shuttle Valve Block㩷

9

8

㩷 Hoisting Remote Control Valve㩷

Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪏㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

Swing Remote Control Valve㩷

㩷 1 - Boom Hoist Remote Control Valve 2 - Rear Drum Remote Control Valve 3 - Front Drum Remote Control Valve

4 - Third Remote Control Valve (Optional) 5 - Left Travel Remote Control Valve 6 - Right Travel Remote Control Valve

7-

Swing Remote Control Valve 8 - Travel Remote Control Pressure Sensor (R) 㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-8-1

9-

Travel Remote Control Pressure Sensor (L) 10 - Detent Plug 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 x Hoisting Remote Control Valve㩷 Parts Name Boom Hoist

Port No. 1 2 7

Connected to Boom Raise Boom Lower Displacement Angle Control Signal Pressure

3 4 8

Hoisting Lowering Displacement Angle Control Signal Pressure

5 6 9

Hoisting Lowering Motor Displacement Angle Control Signal Pressure

Rear

Front 㩷 㩷

Boom Hoist㩷 2 1 7

4

Rear㩷 8

3

6

Front㩷 9

Boom Hoist㩷 Rear㩷 Front㩷

T P

4㩷

8 2

6㩷 9㩷

7

5㩷

5

1

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪏㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

3㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 P T

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪏㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

x Travel Remote Control Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

Parts Name Third (Optional) Travel (Left)

Port No. 1 2 3 4 7

Travel (Right)

5 6 8

Third (Optional)㩷 2

1

Connected to Hoisting Lowering Forward Reverse Remote Control Pressure Sensor

T P P

Forward Reverse Remote Control Pressure Sensor Travel (Left)㩷 4 7 3

Third Travel Travel (Optional) (Left)㩷 (Right)㩷

7

4㩷 6㩷

2

Travel (Right) 6 8 5

8㩷 1

5㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

P

P T

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

T3-8-2

3


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 x Swing Remote Control Valve㩷 Parts Name Swing

Port No. 1 2

Connected to Right Swing Left Swing

T

㩷 㩷

P 1

2

2 P T

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

1

㩷 㩷

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-8-3


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 CONFIGURATION㩷 The remote control valve consists of screw joint (1), cam (2), detent plug (3), pusher (4), balance spring (6), return spring (7) and spool (8). Remote control valves for hoisting and travel are each made of three sections combined though spring pins (10).The control lever is attached to screw joint (1) that is bolted to cam (2) so that they move together. The bottom surface of head of spool (8) is supported by the top surface of spring guide (5). The two surfaces contact through balance spring (6). Pusher (4) is lifted by return spring (7) through spring guide (5). Detent plug (3) maintains the control lever in the fixed position even when releasing the control lever and lets the actuator operate at a constant speed. Shuttle block (9) selects secondary pilot pressure on the control side and lets pressure oil flow to another output port.

T3-8-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Hoisting Remote Control Valve㩷 㩷 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9

1 2 3

4

5 6 7 8

9

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 1 - Screw Joint 2 - Cam 3 - Detent Plug

4 - Pusher 5 - Spring Guide 㩷

67㩷

T3-8-5

Balance Spring Return Spring

89㩷

Spool Shuttle Valve Block


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Travel Remote Control Valve㩷 㩷

1

2 3 4

5 6 7

8

9

1

2 3

4

5

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㩷 㩷 123-

Screw Joint Cam Detent Plug

45㩷

Pusher Spring Guide

67㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-8-6

Balance Spring Return Spring

89㩷

Spool Shuttle Valve Block


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Swing Remote Control Valve㩷

D

Section D㩷

1

2

4

5 6 7 8

9

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷

㩷 㩷

㩷 1 - Screw Joint 2 - Cam

4 - Pusher 5 - Spring Guide

67-

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-8-7

Balance Spring Return Spring

89-

Spool Shuttle Valve Block


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 DETENT FUNCTION㩷 The front and rear remote control valves for hoisting provide two detent plugs respectively. The boom hoist and travel remote control valves for hoisting provide one detent plug respectively. The detent plug keeps the control lever in the fixed position even when releasing the control lever and lets the actuator operate at a constant speed. Operation㩷 1. When control lever (1) is set in neutral, ball (3) and holder (4) are pushed to cam (2) due to spring (5).㩷 2. When control lever (1) is tilted and notch A of cam (2) reaches ball (3), ball (3) and holder (4) are pushed at a distance of notch A by force of spring (5).㩷 3. While control lever (1) is tilted, pusher (6) always pushes cam (2) upward due to return spring (7).㩷 4. However, as notch A of cam (2) is engaged with ball (3), cam (2) does not move.㩷 5. As a result, control lever (1) is held in the first detent position even if control lever (1) is released.㩷 6. When control lever (1) is tilted further from the first detent position and notch B of cam (2) reaches ball (3), ball (3) and holder (4) are pushed at a distance of notch B by force of spring (5).㩷 7. As a result, cam (2) is engaged with ball (3) again and control lever (1) is held in the second detent position even if control lever (1) is released in a manner similar to the first detent position.㩷 8. Thus, as control lever (1) is held in the fixed position, an actuator is operated at a constant speed and combined operations is made easily.㩷

NOTE: The first detent of front and rear remote control valves is provided for low-speed operation and its second detent is for high-speed operation.㩷 (Refer to the pages for Hoisting Circuit in Hydraulic System group). As the boom hoist, left travel and right travel provide a detent plug, combined operations is made easily. 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-8-8


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 㩷 When Operating the Control Lever㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

1

2 A (First Detent Position)㩷

3

B (Second Detent Position)㩷

3 4 4

5

5

6

7

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪍㪄㪇㪈㪌㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 1 - Control Lever 2 - Cam

3 - Ball 4 - Holder

5 - Spring 6 - Pusher

㩷 㩷

T3-8-9

7 - Return Spring 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 OPERATION㩷

㩷 㩷

When control lever (1) in the operator's cab is operated, secondary pilot pressure is delivered in response to stroke of the control lever in remote control valve (2). This delivered pilot pressure acts on spool (4) in control valve (3) so that spool (4) is moved until pilot pressure force balances with spring (5) force.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 1

2

3

4

5

Port T (To Hydraulic Oil Tank)㩷 Port P (From Pilot Pump)㩷

From Main Pump㩷

To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

Output Port㩷

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪈㪇

㩷 1 - Control Lever 2 - Remote Control Valve

3 - Control Valve 㩷 㩷

4 - Spool 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-8-10

5㩷

Spring


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Neutral Position㩷 1. When the control lever is set in the neutral position, as spool (2) is raised upward by force of return spring (1), primary pilot pressure from port P is blocked.㩷 2. The output port (secondary pilot pressure) is connected to port T (hydraulic oil tank).㩷 㩷

1

Port T (Hydraulic Oil Tank)㩷

2

Port P (Primary Pilot Pressure)㩷

㩷 Output Port (Secondary Pilot Pressure)㩷

㩷 1 - Return Spring

2-

Spool

T3-8-11

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪏


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Beginning to Deliver Secondary Pressure)㩷

Output

(Increasing

㩷 㩷

1. When control lever (3) is operated and cam (4) is tilted, pusher (5) moves downward according to tilt angle of cam (4) and a passage to port T is closed by spool (2).㩷 2. Pressure oil from port P (primary pilot pressure side) is routed to the output port (secondary pilot pressure side) through the clearance of spool (2).㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

3

4

5

2

Port T

Primary Pilot Pressure Port P

Output Port Clearance

㩷 㩷 㩷 2 - Spool

3 - Control Lever

Secondary Pilot Pressure

4 - Cam

T3-8-12

5 - Pusher

㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 Maintaining Secondary Pilot Pressure㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P (primary pilot pressure) acts on diameters d1 and d2 in spool (2).㩷 2. This pressure pushes spool (2) upward due to the difference of area (d1!d2).㩷 3. Spool (2) is pushed upward and the output port is connected to port T.㩷 4. As pressure in the output port decreases, spool (2) is pushed downward again by the reaction force of balance spring (6).㩷

5. After repeating these procedures, pressure according to stroke of control lever (3) is routed to the output port.㩷 6. As described above, balance spring (6) is compressed while the spool moves downward, until force of balance spring (6) and oil pressure are balanced out. This is pressure of the output port.㩷 㩷 3

6

Port T

2

Clearance Primary Pilot Pressure Port P

Output Port Secondary Pilot Pressure

㩷 㩷 㩷

2-

Spool

3 - Control Lever

6 - Balance Spring

T3-8-13

㩷 㪫㪊㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Remote Control Valve㩷 (Blank) 㩷

T3-8-14


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 5-SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE UNIT㩷 㩷㩷 Outline㩷 The 5-spool solenoid valve unit consists of the following valves.㩷

x Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve㩷 This valve is switched by a signal from MC2/A and delivers pressure oil to the boom hoist brake and boom hoist drum lock.㩷 x Third Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve (Optional)㩷 This valve is switched by a signal from MC2/A and delivers pressure oil to the third brake and third drum lock.㩷

x Pressure Reducing Valve㩷 This valve reduces pressure in the pilot circuit and delivers pressure oil.㩷 x Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve㩷 This valve is switched by a signal from MC2/B and blocks pressure oil flowing through front, rear, boom hoist and third (optional) remote control valves.㩷 x High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve㩷 This valve is switched by the high/low travel speed selection switch and delivers pressure oil to the travel motor displacement angle control valve.㩷 x Swing Brake Solenoid Valve㩷 This valve is switched by the swing brake switch and delivers pressure oil to the parking brake in swing motor.㩷

1 2 3 4

5

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪉

6

㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

To Front, Rear, Boom Hoist and Third Remote Control Valves㩷 To Travel Displacement Angle Control Valve 㩷 To Swing Parking Brake㩷 To Boom Hoist Drum Lock㩷 To Third Drum Lock㩷

㩷 1

1 - Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve 2 - High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve

2

3-

3

4

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve 4 - Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve

5

5-

T3-9-1

6

Third Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve (Optional)

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

6-

Pressure Reducing Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Internal Configuration㩷

1

2

3

4

A3

A2

6

5

T A5

A4

A1

P1

P

㩷 P2

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷 1-

Second Overhoist Solenoid Valve 2 - High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve

3-

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve 4 - Boom Hoist Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve

5-

T3-9-2

Third Drum Unlocking Solenoid Valve (Optional)

6-

Pressure Reducing Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Solenoid Valve㩷

The solenoid valve is a normal close type with ON/OFF operation. Operation㩷 1. When a valve is set in neutral state (unexcited state), port T and output port A connect through the notch of a spool. As the spool blocks pressure oil from port P, pressure oil is not supplied to output port A.㩷 2. When electric current flows through the solenoid, the solenoid is excited and pushes the spool.㩷 3. Port T is blocked by the spool and output port A and port P are connected through the notch of a spool.㩷 4. As a result, pressure oil from port P flows to the output port.㩷 5. When electric current flowing through the solenoid is cut, the spool moves back to the original position and output for the output port A is cut.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

In Neutral State㩷 Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

㩷 㩷

Unexcited State㩷

Excited State㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-9-3


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 (Blank) 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-9-4


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 4-SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE UNIT㩷 Outline㩷 The 4-spool solenoid valve unit is an electromagnetic-hydraulic pilot spool type, which consists of main relief valve, sequence valve, pressure reducing valve, holding valve, solenoid valve and spool.㩷 The spool is a parallel circuit and semi-open center type.㩷

NOTE: As for detailed information of the relief valve, holding valve and spool operation, refer to the Front and Rear Control Valves group. 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

1

2

3

5

4

6

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 㩷

7

10

7

7

9

8

㩷 1 - Pressure Reducing Valve 2 - Sequence Valve 3 - Relief Valve

4 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Retracting) 5 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Retracting) 6 - Lower Hydraulic Pressure Control SOL

7 - Holding Valve 8-

(Unused)

9 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Extending)

T3-9-5

10 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Extending)


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Configuration㩷 㩷 㩷

4

5

6

2 1

3

10

9

8

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Pressure Reducing Valve 2 - Sequence Valve 3 - Relief Valve

4 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Retracting) 5 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Retracting) 6 - Lower Hydraulic Pressure Control SOL

7 - Holding Valve 8 - (Unused)

10 - Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Extending)

9-

T3-9-6

Foot Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Extending)


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

2 1

7

3

2

7

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

T3-9-7


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

The pressure reducing valve reduces oil pressure of port P to the fixed level and delivers pressure oil to the solenoid valve.

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷 Sequence Valve

㩷 Spool (1) Spring (1)

x Operation㩷 1. Pressure oil from port P flows to chamber E through passage (C).㩷 2. Pressure oil flows to chamber G through notch (E) of spool (1) and acts on the solenoid valve.㩷 3. Pressure oil in chamber G acts on chamber D at spool (1) end through internal passage of spool (1). Then, pressure oil flows to spring chamber (A) of the sequence valve through passage (B) and pushes spool (2) downward with force of spring (2).㩷 4. When pressure acting on the bottom surface of spool (1) exceeds force of spring (1), spool (1) moves upward until pressure is balanced with force of spring (1).㩷 5. Spring chamber (J) is connected to the hydraulic oil tank. Pressure oil from chamber G flows to the hydraulic oil tank through notch (H) of spool (1) and pressure in chamber G is reduced.㩷 6. When pressure in chamber G decreases, pressure in chamber D that acts on the surface of spool (1) decreases.㩷 7. Spool (1) moves downward by force of spring (1) until force at the surface of spool (1) is balanced and pressure in chamber G increases again.㩷 8. Thus, pressure flowing to a solenoid valve is maintained constant by controlling pressure from port P as the set pressure or less.㩷

Spool (2)㩷 Spring (2)㩷

To Solenoid Valve

Spool (1) Spring (1) Spool (2)㩷

Spring (2)㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

To Solenoid Valve㩷 To Solenoid Valve

To Control Valve Spool㩷

Sequence Valve㩷

㩷 To Solenoid Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

T3-9-8


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Sequence Valve㩷

The sequence valve blocks pressure oil from port P so that the pressure reducing valve operates prior to the sequence valve and secures the operation of a solenoid valve by maintaining primary pilot pressure of the sequence valve (primary pilot pressure of the pressure reducing valve) even if the main circuit pressure suddenly drops.

Spring (2)㩷 Spool (2)㩷

1. Pressure in the pressure reducing valve circuit always flows to spring chamber (A) of the sequence valve through passage B.㩷 2. Spool (2) in the sequence valve is pushed downward by the pressure-reduced oil and force of spring (2). Thus, pressure at port P (primary pilot pressure of the sequence valve and the pressure reducing valve) is maintained at a pressure that is force of spring (2) adding the secondary pilot pressure of the pressure reducing valve. As a result, operation pressure of the solenoid valve is always maintained.㩷 3. Pressure oil from port P flows to chamber D in the sequence valve.㩷 4. Pressure oil in chamber D passes through spool (2) and acts on chamber E at the end spool (2).㩷 5. When pressure in chamber D exceeds pressure in spring chamber (A) and force of spring (2), spool (2) compresses spring (2) and moves upward.㩷 6. Pressure oil flows from chamber D to chamber K and flows to the control valve spool.㩷 7. In this manner, primary pilot pressure (output pressure) of pressure reducing valve is maintained by setting a time lag in operation between the pressure reducing valve and sequence valve.㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

Sequence Valve㩷

x Operation㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

To Solenoid Valve

Spring (2)㩷 Spool (2)㩷

To Solenoid Valve

To Solenoid Valve㩷

To Control Valve Spool

To Control Valve Spool

To Control Valve Spool㩷

Sequence Valve㩷

㩷 㩷 To Solenoid Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

T3-9-9


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 㩷 In Neutral State

Each solenoid valve in a 4-spool control valve is an ON/OFF solenoid valve. When a selection switch is turned ON, the solenoid valve is excited and switches the solenoid valve spool. As a result, pressure oil from the pressure reducing valve acts on the control valve spool and the spool is selected.

x Operation㩷 1. When the switch is set to the OFF position, pressure oil from port P (pressure reducing valve) is blocked by the spool.㩷 Furthermore, chambers A and C connects to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 2. When the control switch is set to the ON position, the solenoid is excited.㩷 3. The solenoid valve spool moves downward by compressing the spring.㩷 4. Chambers B and C are connected, and pressure oil from port P flows to chamber D in the control valve.㩷 5. As a result, the control valve spool switches.㩷

Solenoid

Control Valve Spool

Solenoid

Control Valve Spool

Spring Solenoid Valve Spool

Energized State

Spring Solenoid Valve Spool

㩷 㪫㪉㪙㪚㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

T3-9-10


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 3-SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE UNIT㩷 The 3-spool solenoid valve unit is an electromagnetic-hydraulic pilot spool type, which consists of main relief valve, sequence valve, pressure reducing valve, holding valve, port relief valve, solenoid valve and spool. The spool is a parallel circuit and semi-open center type.

㩷 NOTE:㩷As for detailed information of the relief valve, port relief valve and spool operation; refer to the Front/Rear Control Valves group.㩷 Also, refer to the 4-Spool Solenoid Valve group as for information of the pressure reducing valve, sequence valve and solenoid valve.㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

1

2

3

4

5

4

6

4

7

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

11

10

8

9

8

㩷 1 - Pressure Reducing Valve

4 - Holding Valve

2 - Sequence Valve

5 - Flip Cylinder (Extend)

7 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Retract) 8 - Port Relief Valve

3 - Relief Valve

6 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Retract)

9 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Extend)

T3-9-11

10 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Extend) 11 - Flip Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Retract) 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION / Solenoid Valve Unit㩷 Configuration㩷 5

6

7

11

10

9

2

1

3

4

4

8

㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㩷 1 - Pressure Reducing Valve

4 - Holding Valve

2 - Sequence Valve

5 - Flip Cylinder (Extend)

7 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Retract) 8 - Port Relief Valve

3 - Relief Valve

6 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Retract)

9 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Right/Extend)

T3-9-12

9 - Counterweight Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Left/Extend) 10 - Flip Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Retract) 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The travel mechanism consists of travel motor, travel reduction gear and travel brake valve. The travel motor is an axial plunger motor and incorporates the parking brake of negative type wet multi plate type. The travel motor is driven by pressure oil from the pump and transmits the rotation to the travel reduction gear.

The travel reduction gear is a 3-stage planetary reduction gear, converts the rotation transmitted from the travel motor to a low-speed high torque, and rotates the drive tumblers and crawler shoes. The travel brake valve prevents overload to the travel circuit as well as cavitation. 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Travel Brake Valve㩷

Travel Reduction Gear㩷

㩷 㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 㩷

Travel Motor㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-1


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 TRAVEL MOTOR㩷 The travel motor is a swash plate type variable displacement axial plunger motor and consists of valve plate (4), plunger (2), shoe (6), shaft (9), swash plate (7) and rotor (3). Shaft (9) is splined to rotor (3). Plunger (2) is inserted into rotor (3).

Four tilt pistons (1) are provided and switches displacement angle of swash plate (7) by using balls (8). Rotor (3) is pushed onto valve plate (4) by force of spring (5).

㩷 㩷 㩷

1

2

3

㩷 9

8

7

6

5

㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

4

㩷 㩷 1 - Tilt Piston 2 - Plunger 3 - Rotor

45㩷

Valve Plate Spring

67㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-10-2

Shoe Swash Plate

89㩷

Ball Shaft


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 Operation㩷

㩷 㩷

1. When pressure oil is delivered to port A of valve plate (4), it flows to one side of rotor (3) and pushes plunger (2).㩷 2. Due to this force and inclination of swash plate (7), shoe (6) slides over swash plate (7), and rotor (3) and shaft (9) rotate.㩷 3. When plunger (2) reaches port B while rotor (3) is rotating, oil returns back to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 4. Whether pressure oil flows to port A or B, determines switching operation of forward or reverse travel.㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 Port B㩷

Port B㩷 Port A㩷

Port A㩷

4 3㩷 2㩷

6 9㩷

7 Valve Plate㩷 㩷 㪫㪈㪏㪊㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪌㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㩷 㩷 23-

Plunger Rotor

46-

Valve Plate Shoe

7㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-10-3

Swash Plate

9㩷

Shaft


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 PARKING BRAKE㩷

The parking brake is a negative type that releases the brake when self pressure is applied to brake chamber M. The parking brake is always applied except when traveling. Friction plate (4) is splined to rotor (5) and plate (3) is splined to casing (6) respectively.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

When Brake is Applied㩷 1. When the travel lever is in neutral, brake chamber M is connected to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 2. Brake piston (2) is pushed down by force of spring (1).㩷 3. As a result, as plate (3) is pushed on to friction plate (4), rotor (5) does not rotate.㩷 4. Thus, the parking brake is applied.㩷

Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

1

㩷 㩷 When Brake is Released㩷 1. When the travel lever is shifted, self pressure in the main circuit acts on brake chamber M.㩷 2. Brake piston (2) moves up by compressing spring (1).㩷 3. As a result, plate (3) and friction plate (4) become free and the parking brake is released.㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪇㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

2

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

1

㩷 2

㩷 㩷

T3-10-4

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪇㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 When Brake is Applied㩷 1 To Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

M 2 3 4

5

6

㩷 㪫㪈㪈㪈㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㩷 When Brake is Released

㩷 㩷

1

M 2 3 4

6 㩷

5

㪫㪈㪈㪈㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Spring 2 - Brake Piston

3 - Plate 4 - Friction Plate

5 - Rotor 㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-10-5

6㩷

Casing


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 TRAVEL REDUCTION GEAR㩷 The travel reduction gear is a three-stage planetary reduction gear. The travel motor rotates shaft (10) and its turning torque is transmitted to third stage carrier (5) and ring gear (4) through first stage planetary gear (11), first stage carrier (9), second stage sun gear (8), second stage planetary gear (12), second stage carrier (7), third stage sun gear (6) and third stage planetary gear (13). 㩷 㩷1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 㩷 9

As third stage carrier (5) is fixed to housing (1) of the travel motor, it does not rotate. Ring gear (4) and travel drive sprocket (2) are both bolted to drum (3) and they rotates together.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

10

Third㩷

㪫㪈㪈㪈㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪋㪄㪇㪈㪈㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

13

First㩷

11

Second㩷

12

㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Housing (Travel Motor) 2 - Travel Drive Sprocket

56-

Third Stage Carrier Third Stage Sun Gear

89-

3 - Drum 4 - Ring Gear

7㩷

Second Stage Carrier

10 - Shaft 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-6

Second Stage Sun Gear First Stage Carrier

11 - First Stage Planetary Gear 12 - Second Stage Planetary Gear 13 - Third Stage Planetary Gear 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE㩷 The travel brake valve is located at the head of travel motor and consists of the following valves.

x Overload Relief Valve㩷

x Check Valve㩷

This valve prevents overload of the motor circuit and surge pressure.㩷 x Counterbalance Valve㩷 This valve smoothly starts and stops travel operation, and prevents coasting while traveling a descending slope.㩷 㩷

This valve assists the counterbalance valve in operation, and prevents cavitation in the motor circuit.㩷 x Travel Motor Displacement Angle Control Valve㩷 This valve controls the tilt piston by pilot pressure from the high speed selection solenoid valve.㩷 㩷

㩷 Travel Motor Displacement Angle Control Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

Overload Relief Valve

Overload Relief Valve㩷

Counterbalance Valve㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷

Check Valve㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-7


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 When Traveling㩷 1. When pressure oil from the control valve flows to port VA, check valve (2) opens and oil flows to motor port MA.㩷 2. On the other hand, return oil from the travel motor flows back to motor port MB, but oil is blocked by check valve (2).㩷 3. When pressure in port VA increases further, pressure oil flows through check valve (orifice) (3) and acts on the surface of spool (1). This moves spool (1) leftward.㩷 4. As a result, return oil from the travel motor flows through the notch of outer surface of spool (1) and flows to port VB. Now, pressure oil flows and the travel motor rotates.㩷 5. When the travel lever is shifted to the neutral position, spool (1) returns to the original position by the spring force; blocks the circuit and the travel motor stops rotating.㩷 When Descending Slope㩷 1. The travel motor forced rotates and acts like a pump while traveling downhill due to own weight.㩷 2. When the travel motor draws oil in, pressure at port VA and right end of spool (1) decrease. This moves spool (1) rightward and it limits the return oil from the travel motor.㩷 3. Therefore, pressure at the motor port MB side increases and the brake is applied to the travel motor.㩷 4. When the return circuit is reduced, pressure in port VA increases again and spool (1) moves leftward.㩷 By repeating these steps (hydraulic braking), coasting is prevented.㩷

Circuit Protection㩷 1. When internal pressure of the circuit exceeds the set pressure of overload relief valve (4), this valve opens and releases high pressure oil to the low pressure side. This protects the travel motor from overloading.㩷 2. In addition, the circuit protection releases serge pressure caused by the inertial force when stopping the travel motor.㩷 3. When the travel motor draws oil by pumping action, check valve (2) opens (by make-up function) and cavitation is prevented.㩷 㩷 Shuttle Function㩷 1. When spool (1) moves, port VA or VB connects to the parking brake release passage. Pressure oil is routed to the parking brake chamber and the parking brake is released.㩷 2. When the travel motor stops, spool (1) returns back to the neutral position and the parking brake release passage is closed.㩷 Pressure oil in the parking brake chamber flows to the drain port and the parking brake is applied.㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-8


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷

㩷 㩷

Control Valve㩷

㩷 1

2

2

VB

3

VA

4

4

MA MB㩷

Parking Brake Release Passage㩷

Travel High/Low Speed Selecting Passage㩷

㩷 Travel Motor

㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㩷 1 - Spool (Counterbalance Valve)

2-

Check Valve

3-

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-9

Check Valve

4-

Overload Relief Valve


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 TRAVEL SPEED SELECTION㩷 Piston (7) is located next to swash plate (4), which selects the travel speed by changing the displacement angle of swash plate (4) according to movement of piston (7).

3. Pressure oil from port VA on high pressure side is blocked by spool (1) and oil in piston (7) returns to the hydraulic oil tank through spool (1).㩷 4. Plunger (3) of the travel motor pushes swash plate (4) and the displacement angle of swash plate (4) becomes maximum.㩷 5. As a result, stroke of plunger (3) becomes larger, the travel motor runs at low speed.㩷

x Low Speed

㩷 1. When the high/low travel speed selection switch is set to the low speed position, as high travel speed selection solenoid valve is not selected, pressure oil from the pilot pump is not fed to port P.㩷 2. As a result, spool (1) is pushed by spring (2) leftward.㩷

㩷 㩷

Control Valve㩷

1

2

VA

VB

High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve㩷

P Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

3

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 7

6

5

4

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 1 - Spool 2 - Spring

3 - Plunger 4 - Swash Plate

5 - Steel Ball 6 - Steel Ball

T3-10-10

7 - Piston 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 x High Speed 1. When the high/low travel speed selection switch is set to the high speed position, the high travel speed selection solenoid valve is selected.㩷 2. As a result, pressure oil from the pilot pump is fed from port P and moves spool (1) rightward.㩷 3. Pressure oil in port VA on high pressure side acts on piston (7) through spool (1).㩷

4. Piston (7) pushes swash plate (4) and the displacement angle of swash plate (4) decreases.㩷 5. Plunger (3) stroke in the travel motor is reduced and the travel motor runs at high speed.㩷 㩷

㩷 Control Valve㩷

㩷 1

2

VB

VA

High Travel Speed Selection Solenoid Valve㩷

P Hydraulic Oil Tank㩷

3

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 7

㩷 1 - Spool 2 - Spring

3 - Plunger 4 - Swash Plate

5 - Steel Ball 6 - Steel Ball

㩷 㩷

T3-10-11

6

5

7 - Piston 㩷

4

㪫㪉㪚㪛㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪎㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Travel Mechanism㩷 (Blank) 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-10-12


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 GATE LOCK VALVE㩷

The gate lock valve consists of the gate lock solenoid valve and pilot relief valve. The gate lock solenoid valve switches the pilot circuit ON/OFF. The pilot relief valve secures the pilot circuit pressure.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve

㩷 Gate Lock Valve㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

Pilot Relief Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Relief Valve㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪈㪊㩷

T3-11-1


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷 The gate lock solenoid valve is activated by operating the gate lock lever, which controls flow rate of pressure oil flowing from the pilot pump to the pilot circuit. When the gate lock lever is set in "Lock" position, the spool of solenoid valve is in "Closed" position. Pressure oil from the pilot pump acts on the pilot relief valve and opens the relief valve. As a result, all of pressure oil from the pilot pump flow to the hydraulic oil tank through the relief valve. Thus, as no oil is fed to the pilot circuit, the operation system is inoperable.

When the gate lock lever is set to "Unlock" position, the gate lock solenoid valve activates and the solenoid valve spool switches to the "Open" position. As a result, all of pressure oil from the pilot pump flow to the pilot circuit through the spool of solenoid valve. Thus, as oil is fed to the pilot circuit, the operation system becomes operable.

㩷 㩷

Gate lock is in "Lock" state

Gate lock is in "Unlock" state Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

Pilot Pump㩷

㩷 To Pilot Circuit㩷

Pilot Relief Valve㩷

Pilot Relief Valve㩷

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪈㪋㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-11-2


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 Pilot Relief Valve㩷

The pilot relief valve is a relief valve which secures pressure in the pilot circuit. When pressure in the pilot circuit exceeds set pressure of the pilot relief valve, the pilot relief valve flows pressure oil from the pilot pump to port T and reduces pressure in the pilot circuit. On the other hand, if pressure in the pilot circuit is lower than set pressure of the pilot relief valve, the pilot relief valve closes and pressure oil from the pilot pump is routed to the pilot circuit.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

Pilot Pump

㩷 To Pilot Circuit

㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪈㪉㩷

To Pilot Relief Valve㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-11-3


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 (Blank) 㩷 㩷

T3-11-4


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 DRUM BRAKE RELEASE VALVE (OPTIONAL)㩷

SOLENOID

The drum unlocking solenoid valve is a normal close type with ON/OFF operation. The drum unlocking solenoid valves are located in the front, rear, and third (optional) drums. Depress the brake pedal and turn the free mode switch of a drum ON while the brake mode switch is set in the auto-brake position. The solenoid of drum unlocking solenoid valve receives a signal from MC2/A. As a result, the solenoid is excited and the drum unlocking solenoid valve is switched.

㩷 NOTE:㩷 As for operation of the drum unlocking solenoid valve, refer to Solenoid Valve Unit group.㩷

the

4-Spool

㩷 㩷 㩷

Port 3 (From Pilot Pump) Port 2 (Output Port)㩷

㩷 㩷

Port 1 (Hydraulic Oil Tank)

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-11-5

㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪏㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 COUNTERWEIGHT CYLINDER㩷

The counterweight cylinder is used to remove and install the counterweight which is extended and retracted by pressure oil from the 3-spool solenoid valve unit. The piping provides valve block (14) which includes a down safety valve. The down safety valve shuts down the circuit and prevents the counterweight from dropping when the hoses are damaged.

1

2

3

㩷 㩷 㩷

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12

13

14

15

16

17

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 12345-

Set Screw Ring Packing O-Ring O-Ring

6789㩷

Backup Ring Bushing Seal Packing

10 11 12 13 㩷

㩷 㩷

T3-11-6

Backup Ring Bushing Dust Seal Piston

14 15 16 17 㩷

Valve Block Cylinder Tube Piston Rod Cylinder Head


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 FLIP CYLINDER㩷

The flip cylinder is extended and retracted by pressure oil from the 3-spool solenoid valve unit in order to raise or lower the live mast. The piping provides valve block (12) which includes a down safety valve and a relief valve. The down safety valve shuts down the circuit and prevents the live mast from dropping when the hoses are damaged.

Down Safety Valve㩷

㩷 Relief Valve㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

Flip Cylinder㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

㩷 㩷

10

9

11

13

12

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

1234-

Wear Ring Packing Wear Ring O-Ring

567㩷

O-Ring Packing Backup Ring

8 - Dust Seal 9 - Piston 10 - Tube 㩷

T3-11-7

11 - Piston Rod 12 - Valve Block 13 - Cylinder Head 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 BOOM FOOT CYLINDER㩷 The boom foot cylinder is extended and retracted by pressure oil from the 4-spool solenoid valve unit in order to remove and install the boom foot pin.

㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷 12-

Piston Rod Cylinder Head

3㩷

Cylinder Tube

4㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-11-8

Piston

5㩷

Nut


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 ACCUMULATOR㩷 The accumulator is provided in the pilot circuit. The accumulator absorbs hydraulic surge and maintains pilot pressure (for a short time) immediately after the engine stop. The accumulator mainly consists of body (5), holder (4), poppet (1) and bladder (2) that contains nitrogen gas (N2) hermetically. The pilot pressure sensor attached with the accumulator sends pressure in the pilot circuit to MC2/A.

x Pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through port A, enters the accumulator and compresses bladder (2) until pressure oil is balanced with nitrogen gas in bladder (2).㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 Accumulator㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪈㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Pilot Pressure Sensor㩷

6

1

x If pressure oil is not obtained in circuit due to engine stalling or the like, compressed bladder (2) expands and delivers the accumulated oil to pilot circuit through port A.㩷

5

Nitrogen Gas (N2)㩷

2

4

Pilot Pressure Oil㩷

3

A

㩷 㪫㪈㪇㪌㪄㪇㪉㪄㪈㪇㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 1 - Poppet 2 - Bladder 3 - Oil Port

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-11-9

456-

Holder Body Gas Plug


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Crane Upper)㩷 (Blank)

T3-11-10


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 OUTLINE㩷 The undercarriage drives the machine and carries weight of the superstructure. The undercarriage mainly consists of lower frame (8), side frame (13), rotating joint (1), turntable bearing (17), track take-up idler (10), upper roller (12) lower roller (11), track shoe (4), travel mechanism (14), side frame connecting cylinder (3) and jack-up cylinders (5, 9, 15 and 18).

㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

1 2

㩷 18

3

6

4

17 15

16

5

6

6

14

7 8

13 12

9 6

11 10

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Rotating Joint

6-

Float

11 - Lower Roller

2 - Jack-Up/Side Frame Connecting Control Valve 3 - Side Frame Connecting Cylinder 4 - Track Shoe

7-

Lower Weight (Front)

12 - Upper Roller

15 - Jack-Up Cylinder (Right Rear) 16 - Lower Weight (Rear)

8-

Lower Frame

13 - Side Frame

17 - Turntable Bearing

14 - Travel Mechanism

18 - Jack-Up Cylinder (Left Rear) 㩷

5 - Jack-Up Cylinder (Left Front)

9-

Jack-Up Cylinder (Right Front) 10 - Track Take-Up Idler

T3-12-1


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 TURNTABLE BEARING㩷

The turntable bearing carries weight of the superstructure and swivels it smoothly. This bearing is a single row type ball bearing, and consists of outer race (1), inner race (3), ball (7), supports (5, 6) and seals (2, 4). Outer race (1) is bolted to the superstructure and inner race (3) is bolted to the undercarriage. The internal teeth of inner race (3) engage with the output shaft of swing reduction gear.

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷 1

2

5 3

6 7 4

㩷 㪫㪈㪊㪌㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪉㪄㪇㪇㪈㩷

㩷 㩷 1 - Outer Race 2 - Seal

3 - Inner Race 4 - Seal

5 - Support 6 - Support

㩷 㩷

T3-12-2

7㩷

Ball


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 ROTATING JOINT㩷 The rotating joint is a full 360q turn joint and delivers pressure oil to the travel motors while preventing the hoses from kinking when the superstructure slews. The spindle is fixed at the center of slew of the undercarriage.

Pressure oil from each port of the body passes through spindle and flows to the left and right travel motors, lower control valves, side frame connecting cylinder and jack-up cylinder. The seal is provided and prevents oil leakage between spindle and body. 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 Body H H A

Seal㩷 C

B

A

D E G

F

B C Seal

B

D

A

C G E

H

D E

F

F G

Seal

Spindle

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪌㩷

㩷 㩷 Port A -

Right Travel Forward

Port D -

Left Travel Forward

Port G -

Port B -

Right Travel Reverse

Port E -

Port C -

Left Travel Reverse

Port F -

Lower Control Hydraulic Oil Source Pilot Pressure Control Circuit Drain

T3-12-3

High/Low Travel Speed Selection Pilot Pressure Port H - Travel Mechanism Drain


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 SLIP RING㩷

The slip ring is provided at the top of spindle of rotating joint. The slip ring is a full 360q turn joint and sends electric current to the undercarriage while preventing the wiring from kinking when the superstructure slews. 㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

㩷 㩷

㩷 Slip Ring㩷

Brush

Ring

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪈㪇㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪐㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-12-4


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 SIDE FRAME CONNECTING CYLINDER㩷

Side Frame Connecting Cylinder

The side frame connecting cylinder is a hydraulic cylinder and the side frame can be removed and installed smoothly by extending and retracting the side frame connecting cylinder.

The side frame connecting extracting/retracting solenoid valve of lower control valve controls the side frame connecting cylinder. When the side frame connecting extract/retract solenoid valve switches, pressure oil flows to the side frame connecting cylinder through a spool of the lower control valve.

Side Frame㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷

㩷 Configuration㩷 㩷

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪞㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 1 - Piston Rod 2 - Dust Wiper 3 - U-Ring

4 - Cylinder Head 5 - Bushing 6 - Cylinder Tube

7 - Spacer 8 - Piston 9 - Piston Seal

T3-12-5

10 - Wear Ring 11 - Set Screw 12 - Steel Ball


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 JACK-UP CYLINDER㩷 The jack-up cylinder consists of cylinder and pilot check valve. In addition, the slow return valve is provided in the return circuit on jack-up cylinder retract side. The jack-up cylinders are used to disassemble and assemble the lower frame into upper and lower sections when transporting the machine. The jack up cylinder lifts up the lower frame in order to remove and install the side frame and load and unload the lower frame to the trailer. The jack extend/retract solenoid valves at lower control valves controls the jack-up cylinders. When selecting the jack extend/retract solenoid valves, pressure oil passes through a spool of the lower control valves and flows to the jack-up cylinder.

Jack-Up Cylinder㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪉㩷 㩷

Side Frame㩷

Lower Frame㩷

㩷 㩷 1

2

3

4

5

㩷 㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 1 - Pilot Check Valve Block 2 - Cylinder Tube

3 - Piston 㩷

4㩷

T3-12-6

Piston Rod

5 - Cylinder Head 㩷


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 Pilot Check Valve㩷

㩷 The pilot check valve maintains pressures on rod side and bottom side of the jack-up cylinder.㩷 Thus, even if the jack-up cylinders are subjected to external forces, extension and retraction of the jack-up cylinders are prevented.㩷

㩷 Jack-Up Cylinder㩷

㩷 Operation㩷 1. Pressure oil from port A (jack-up cylinder extend side) opens the check valve in slow return check valve and acts on the pilot check valve.㩷 2. Pressure oil opens the check valve on jack-up cylinder extend side, flows to the bottom side of jack-up cylinder and also acts on the check valve on jack-up cylinder retract side.㩷 3. As pressure oil also opens the check valve on rod side (return side), pressure oil on the rod side passes through the check valve and flows to the hydraulic oil tank.㩷 4. As a result, the jack-up cylinder extends.㩷 5. When setting the jack-up switch to the OFF position, the jack extend/retract solenoid valve returns to neutral.㩷 6. The main spool in lower control valve also returns to neutral and the extension/retraction of the jack-up cylinder stops.㩷 7. At this time, even if the jack-up cylinders are subjected to external forces, the jack-up cylinders are kept in position as return circuit is blocked by the check valve.㩷

Check Valve

Check Valve

Check Valve

B A

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪍㩷

㩷 Jack-Up Cylinder㩷

㩷 Check Valve㩷

Check Valve

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪏㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-12-7


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 Slow Return Valve㩷

The slow return valve is provided in the jack-up cylinder extend circuit. By reducing the return circuit on jack-up cylinder retract side in order to deliver pressure oil slowly, rapid lowering of the machine by self weight is prevented.

㩷 㩷

Jack-Up Cylinder㩷

Operation㩷 1. Pressure oil from port B flows to the rod side of jack-up cylinder.㩷 2. On the other hand, pressure oil in return circuit passes through the pilot check valve and acts on the check valve in slow return valve.㩷 3. As return oil is blocked by the check valve, return oil flows to port A through the orifice.㩷 4. As a result, as the jack-up cylinder retract speed is reduced, rapid lowering of the machine is prevented.㩷

Orifice㩷 Check Valve

B

A

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪎㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

Orifice

Check Valve

Slow Return Valve㩷

㩷 㩷

From Jack-Up Cylinder㩷

To Lower Control Valve㩷

㩷 㪫㪉㪌㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪇㪐㪄㪇㪇㪊㩷

㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷

T3-12-8


COMPONENT OPERATION/ Others (Base Carrier)㩷 TAKE-UP CYLINDER (OPTIONAL) The take-up cylinder pushes the left and right front idlers forward by using the travel circuit pressure in order to set at a specified tension on the track shoe. The travel circuit pressure is routed to the bottom side of the left and right take-up cylinders. Consequently, the front idler is pushed and a specified pressure acts on the left and right track shoes. When a strong force acts on the front idler, the return check valve is opened and the bottom side pressure oil in the take-up cylinder is released, so that shock is reduced.

1

2

3

4

5

6

From Travel Hydraulic Circuit

㪫㪉㪚㪥㪄㪇㪊㪄㪈㪉㪄㪇㪇㪋㩷

1 - Cylinder Head 2 - Dust Seal

34-

Dust Seal O-ring

T3-12-9

56-

Cylinder Tube Piston



SECTION 4

OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST —CONTENTS— Group 1 Introduction

Group 5 Component Test

Operational Performance Tests.................... T4-1-1 Preparation for Performance Tests............... T4-1-3 Precautions for Starting Engine.................... T4-1-4

Primary Pilot Pressure (Pilot Circuit) ............T4-5-1 Secondary Pilot Pressure .............................T4-5-2 Traveling Mode Control Pressure .................T4-5-4 Swing Brake Release Pressure ....................T4-5-5 Main Relief Valve Pressure...........................T4-5-6 Swing Control Valve......................................T4-5-8 3-Spool Solenoid Valve (Counter Weight, Live Mast Flip Cylinders)...........................T4-5-10 4-Spool Solenoid Valve (Boom Foot Pin, Lower Hydraulic Power Source) ...............T4-5-11 Lower Control Valve....................................T4-5-12 Overload Relief Valve Set Pressure ...........T4-5-13 Main / Swing Pump Flow Rate Measurement............................................T4-5-14 Regulator Adjustment (Main Pump)............T4-5-18 Regulator Adjustment (Swing Pump) ...........T4-5-21 Swing Motor Drainage ................................T4-5-24 Travel Motor Drainage ................................T4-5-26 Derricking Motor Drainage..........................T4-5-28

Group 2 Standard Performance Standards ............................... T4-2-1 Main Pump P-Q Diagram ............................. T4-2-4 Swing Pump P-Q Diagram ........................... T4-2-6

Group 3 Engine Test Engine Speed............................................... T4-3-1

Group 4 Crane Test Traveling Speed ........................................... T4-4-1 Mistrack Check............................................. T4-4-2 Travel Motor Leakage .................................. T4-4-3 Swing Speed ................................................ T4-4-4 Turntable Bearing Play................................. T4-4-5 Hoisting / Lowering Speed (Front / Rear Drums) .................................. T4-4-6 Regulator Adjustment................................... T4-4-7 Boom Derricking Speed .............................. T4-4-8 Jack-Up Speed............................................. T4-4-9 Load Lowering by Front / Rear Drums ....... T4-4-10 Control Lever Operating Control Force ...... T4-4-11 Control Lever Stroke .................................. T4-4-11

Group 6 Adjustment Power Increase Pressure Calibration ...........T4-6-1 Brake Pedal Unit Adjustment ........................T4-6-4

C-4-1


(Blank)

C-4-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS Use operational performance test procedures to quantitatively check all systems and functions on the machine. Kinds of Operational Performance Tests 1. System performance and function test each system such as engine, travel, slewing, and hydraulic cylinder is individually tested. 2. Component performance and function test each component such as hydraulic pump, motor, and various valves is individually tested. Purpose of Operational Performance Tests 1. To evaluate the performance and function of a system or component by comparing the test results to the standard specifications. 2. According to the evaluation above, repair, adjust, or replace the system or component as necessary to restore the systems and functions to the required performance level. 3. To ensure safety and high efficiency operation. Standard Specifications “Performance Standard” and “Allowable Limit” are shown in tables to evaluate the performance test data. Precautions for the Test Result Evaluation 1. Besides determining whether the test results meet the standard specifications or not, check which level of standards the test results correspond to. 2. In compliance with how long and under what type of work or conditions the machine has operated, or the machine maintenance condition, the extent of deterioration of the machine’s performance may differ. Decide the degree of repair, adjustment, and/or replacement corresponding to the machine operation hours. With the passage of time, the machine's operational performance deteriorates, so that the machine needs to be serviced periodically. Before servicing the machine, conduct performance tests to check the extent of deterioration and to decide what kind of service needs to be done referring to the standard specifications.

T4-1-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction Definition Definition of “Performance Standard” 1. Operation speed values and dimension of the new machine. 2. Operational performance of new components adjusted to specifications. Allowable errors will be indicated as necessary. Definition of “Allowable Limit” 1. Normal machine performance cannot be accomplished after exceeding this limit. 2. Repair or adjustment is impossible after exceeding this limit. 3. Therefore, in consideration of operation efficiency and maintenance expense. Proper maintenance shall be carried out before reaching the Allowable Limit

T4-1-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction PREPARATION TESTS

FOR

PERFORMANCE

Observe the following rules in order to carry out performance tests accurately and safely. The Machine 1. Before starting performance tests, perform a sight-inspection of the machine. Then, if any abnormalities such as oil or coolant leaks, loose bolts, or cracks are found, repair them. 2. Confirm the status of the implementation of daily and monthly checks before performing the measurement. Test Area and Measuring Instrument 1. Select a hard and level surface. 2. Secure enough space to allow the machine to run straight for more than 10 m. 3. Secure enough space to allow the machine to make a full swing with the front attachment extended. 4. Provide equipment and measuring instruments suitable to the test to be performed. 5. If required, rope off the test area and provide signboards to keep unauthorized personnel away. 6. Provide measuring weights or equivalent ones. 7. Coordinate work signals and procedures with co-workers.

T105-06-01-003

Precautions 1. Pay attention to the peripheral working environment at all times while measuring to ensure safety (foundation, space, high voltage power lines and etc.). 2. Always give first priority to safety. Be sure to adhere to work signals and operate the machine carefully. 3. Avoid contaminating the machine and the ground with leaking oil. When removing hydraulic pipings, use oil pans to catch escaping oil. 4. After completing the measurements, be sure to clean up to prevent contamination of the environment (bring back waste oils and other wastes). Precise Measurement 1. Accurately calibrate test instruments in advance to obtain correct data. 2. Carry out tests under the exact test conditions prescribed for each test item. 3. Repeat the same test and confirm that the test data obtained can be repeated. Use the average values of the measurements. 4. Make efforts to improve your measuring techinique.

T4-1-3

SA-331


LOCK Position OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction

PRECAUTIONS FOR STARTING ENGINE 1. Check that lock lever (1) is placed in the LOCK position.

1

2. Check that each control lever is in the NEUTRAL position. 3. Using free winch specification, verify that the front and rear brake pedals (4) and (5) locks are engaged, that the front and rear drum brake mode switches (2) and (3) are set to "Automatic Brake" mode.

M2CE-03-007

5

4

2

3

1 1

4. Check that swing brake switch (6) is in the ON (brake) position.

6

NOTE: If the front and rear drum mode switches (2) and (3) are not set to "Automatic Brake" mode, or the swing brake switch (8) is not in the ON (brake) position, the engine does not start. 5. Before operating the machine, thoroughly read and understand the operator’s manual. T25U-04-01-001

T4-1-4


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The performance standards show the required performance measurements. For details including measuring method, refer to T4-3 . Data in ( ) is given for reference.

Performance Test Designation

Measuring conditions: Engine speed : Fast Idle Hydraulic oil temperature : 50r5 qC (122r9qF)

Performance Standard min-1

Engine Speed Fast Idle Speed

2075 to 2125 775 to 825

Engine Compression Pressure

2,

MPa (kgf/cm , psi)

Valve Clearance

2.94 (30, 426) 0.04

EX

0.08

Traveling Speed

After warming up With the cold engine

mm

IN

T4-4-1

sec/10 m

Slow Speed

53 to 60

Fast Speed

26 to 30

Mistrack

60 or less

mm/10 m

Travel Motor Leakage turn

Motor Slippage When Parking

(0) T4-4-4

sec/3 turn

Min

158 to 180

Max

95 to 106

Turntable Bearing Wear

(5 to 6)

mm

sec/Drum 6 turns

T4-4-5 T4-4-6

Slow Speed Holding Speed 1

21 to 24

Slow Speed Holding Speed 2

10 to 12

Normal Speed 1

11 to 13

Normal Speed 2

5.6 to 6.4

Boom Derricking Speed

T4-4-2

(1/6 or less)

mm/5 min

Swing Speed

Hoisting and Lowering Speed

At fast travel speed

T4-4-3

Slippage Until Brake is Applied

Front / Rear

Reference Page T4-3-1

Slow Idle Speed

Dial

Remarks

T4-4-8

sec/Drum 6 turns

Fast

24 to 27

Slow

---

T4-2-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards Performance Standard

Performance Test Designation Jack-up Speed (When stroke : 450mm)

sec

Extend

28 to 31

Retract

15 to 17

Load Lowering by Front / Rear Drums Control Lever Operating Force Front / Rear Drum Lever

(0)

mm/2 min

1st. Detent

5.9 to 11.3 (0.6 to 1.2, 1.3 to 2.5)

2nd. Detent

11.3 to 18.6 (1.2 to 1.9, 2.5 to 4.2) 5.9 to 18.6 (0.6 to 1.9, 1.3 to 4.2)

Traveling Lever

7.6 to 15.7 (0.8 to 1.6, 1.7 to 3.5)

Swing Lever

10.9 to 23.3 (1.1 to 2.4, 2.5 to 5.2)

Front / Rear Drum Lever Boom Derricking Lever

Reference Page

Engine speed: Slow idle

T4-4-9

T4-4-10 T4-4-11

N (kgf, lbf)

Boom Derricking Lever

Control Lever Stroke

Remarks

T4-4-11

mm

1st. Detent

57 to 64

2nd. Detent

99 to 106 99 to 106

Traveling Lever

44 to 51

Swing Lever

93 to 103

T4-2-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards

Performance Test Designation

Performance Standard

Remarks

Reference Page

Hydraulic System Primary Pilot Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

T4-5-1

Gate lock valve (without free fall winches)

9.8 0.5 0 (100 5 0, 1421 73 0)

Gate lock valve (with free fall winches)

6.9 0.5 0 (70 5 0, 1000 73 0) 4.9 0.5 0 (50 5 0, 711 73 0)

Pilot Circuit Secondary Pilot Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

Front/Rear Lever

T4-5-2

1st. Detent

(2.0r0.2 (20.4r2, 290r29))

2nd. Detent

(3.4r0.2 (34.7r2, 493r29))

Boom Derricking

(3.4r0.2 (34.7r2, 493r29))

Traveling

(2.0r0.2 (20.4r2, 290r29))

Swing

(2.9 0.5 0 (29.6 0.5 0, 421 73 0))

Brake pedal (front and rear drum with free fall)

(5.88r0.2 (60.0r2, 853r29))

Traveling Mode Control Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

(2.45 to 5.88 (25 to 60, 356, to 853))

T4-5-4

Swing Brake Release Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

(4.9 0.5 0 (50 5 0, 711 73 0))

T4-5-5

Main Relief Valve Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

T4-5-6

Front / Rear Control Valve

28.3 to 31.4 (288 to 320, 4100 to 4550)

Swing Control Valve

28.7 to 31.4 (288 to 320, 4160 to 4550)

3-spool solenoid valve (Live mast, counter weight cylinder)

26.5 to 29.4 (270 to 300, 3840 to 4260)

4-spool solenoid valve (Boom foot pin, lower hydraulic)

18.5 to 20.6 (189 to 210, 2680 to 2990)

Hydraulic fluid cooling fan relief valve

8.8 to 9.8 (9 to 10, 1280 to 1420)

Leaving winch relief valve

18.5 to 20.6 (189 to 210, 2680 to 2990)

Lower Control Valve

18.5 to 20.6 (189 to 210, 189 to 210)

Overload Relief Valve Pressure

MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)

Front / Rear

T4-5-13 34.3 (350, 4970)

Boom Derricking

34.3 (350, 4973)

Traveling

32.4 (330, 4700)

Main / Swing Pump Flow Rate

-

T4-5-14

Swing Motor Drainage

L/min

-

T4-5-24

Travel Motor Drainage

L/min

-

T4-5-26

Boom Derricking Drainage

L/min

-

T4-5-28

T4-2-3


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards MAIN PUMP P-Q DIAGRAM x P-Q Control (Torque Control) (Reference: Bench measurement)

• Rated pump speed: 2000 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic oil temperature: 50r5 qC (122r9 qF) • Power increase proportional solenoid valve current: “I” mA

Flow Rate L/min

400

300

A

I=800 mA

B

C D

200

E

F

I=0 mA G

100

0

5

10

15

20

Delivery Pressure 2 MPa (kgf/cm )

Flow Rate L/min

A

7.8 (80)

275

B

12.4 (127)

274

C

22.3 (216)

270

E Data in (

25 30 Delivery Pressure MPa

35

T2CG-04-02-001

P-Q Point: I=0 mA

P-Q Point: I=800 mA

D

H

26.1 (266)

217

31.4 (320)

183

Delivery Pressure 2 MPa (kgf/cm )

Flow Rate L/min

F

3.9 (40)

200

G

26.3 (2.7)

57

31.4 (320)

54

H Data in (

) is given for reference.

T4-2-4

) is given for reference.


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards x P-Q Control by Pump Control Pilot Pressure Signal (Reference: Bench measurement)

• Rated pump speed: 2000 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic oil temperature: 50r5 qC (122r9 qF)

Flow Rate L/min 300

A

200

100 B

0

1

2

3

4

T2CG-04-02-002

Pilot Pressure MPa

P-Q Point Pilot Control Pressure 2

A

Flow Rate

MPa (kgf/cm )

L/min

0.86 (8.8)

276r1.5

B

2.92 (29.8)

Data in (

) is given for reference.

67r3

T4-2-5

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve Current mA 315

+10 0

+77

586

-33


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards SWING PUMP P-Q DIAGRAM x P-Q Control (Torque Control) (Reference: Bench measurement)

• Rated pump speed: 2000 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic oil temperature: 50r5 qC (122r9 qF)

Flow Rate L/min

200 A 150 B C

100

50

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

Delivery Pressure MPa

P-Q Point Delivery Pressure 2 MPa (kgf/cm )

Flow Rate L/min

A

25.8 (263)

154

B

28.0 (286)

137

31.9 (325)

123

C Data in (

) is given for reference.

T4-2-6

35

T2CG-04-02-003


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards x P-Q Control by Pump Control Pilot Pressure Signal (Reference: Bench measurement)

• Specified pump speed: 2000 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic oil temperature: 50r5 qC (122r9 qF)

B Flow Rate L/min

150

A

100

50

0

1

2

3

T2CG-04-02-004

Pilot Pressure MPa

P-Q point Pilot Control Pressure 2

Flow Rate

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve Current

MPa (kgf/cm )

L/min

A

1.11r0.2 (11.3r2)

94r3

340r30

B

1.96r0.2 (20r2)

158r3

457r30

Data in (

) is given for reference.

T4-2-7

mA


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standards (Blank)

T4-2-8


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test ENGINE SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the engine speed using the moment limiter speed indicator. NOTE: 1.If the engine speed is out of specification, all other measured performance data will also be out of specification. Accordingly, always measure the engine speed before performing any tests.

Preparation: Sufficiently warm up the machine until the engine coolant temperature reaches 50 qC (122 qF) or more, also, keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Measurement: Measure the slow and fast idle speeds.

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Remedy: Refer to the engine shop manual.

T4-3-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test (Blank)

T4-3-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test TRAVELING SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the time to travel 10 m to check the operational performance of the travel power system (from the hydraulic pump to the travel motor) comprehensively. 2m

Preparations: 1. Adjust both the right and left track sags equally. 2. Prepare a level and solid test track 10 m long, with an extra length of 3 to 5 m on both ends of the test track for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. The machine should be equipped with the basic boom and hook. Set the boom angle to 60q, and hoist the hook until it reaches 2 m below the height at which the hoisting limiter buzzer starts to operate. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 4. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF), let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test. Measurement: Measure in both fast and slow travel modes. 1. Run the engine at the fast idle speed. 2. Start driving the machine from the acceleration zone with both the right and left travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the time required to travel the 10 m test track. 4. After measuring forward travel time, turn the upper 180q. Then, measure the reverse travel time. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

(6.5ft) 60q

T25N-04-04-001

Deceleration Zone 3 to 5 m End

Acceleration Zone 3 to 5 m Start

10 m T324-06-03-002

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Notes Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting.

10m = 33ft 3 to 5m = 9.8 to 16ft 2m = 6.5ft

T4-4-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test MISTRACK CHECK Summary: 1. Measure the maximum distance from the 10 m straight line connecting the travel start and end points to the actual rut line to check the variation between the right and left travel power line (from the hydraulic pump to the travel motor) performance. 2. Mistrack is generally reduced when measured on a concrete surface. Preparations: 1. Adjust both the right and left track sags equally. 2. Prepare a level and solid test track 10 m long, with an extra length of 3 to 5 m on both ends of the test track for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. The machine should be equipped with the basic boom and hook. Hoist the hook to approx. 2 m below the height, which the hoisting limiter buzzer starts to operate. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 4. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF), let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test.

2m

(6.5ft) 60q

T25N-04-04-001

2m Maximum Distance

10 m Acceleration Zone 3 to 5 m T324-06-03-003

Measurement: Measure in both fast and slow travel modes. 1. Run the engine at the fast idle speed. 2. Start driving the machine from the acceleration zone with both the right and left travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the maximum distance from a straight 10 m line to the machine rut. 4. After measuring in forward travel, measure in reverse travel. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting.

T4-4-2

Notes 10m = 33ft 3 to 5m = 9.8 to 16ft 2m = 6.5ft


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test TRAVEL MOTOR LEAKAGE Summary: 1. Measure the travel parking brake drift on a specified angle slope. Preparations: 1. The test slope shall be smooth with a gradient of 20 % (11.31 q). 2. Put a mark on the travel reduction gear cover. 3. Use the basic boom with the hook. Set the boom angle to 60 q. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 4. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Measurement: Measure in both fast and slow travel speed modes.

x Track movement (sprocket rotation) until the park-

2m

(6.5ft) 60q

20 % T25N-04-04-006

Position where the machine stops. Position when the travel levers are in neutral. Movement (Rotation Angle)

ing brake is applied. 1. Climb the slope and place the travel levers in neutral. 2. Measure the travel reduction gear cover mark movement from the position when the lever is placed in neutral to the position when the machine stops (when the brake is applied).

Mark

T107-06-03-002

x Travel motor slip while parking 1. Climb the slope and place the travel levers in neutral. 2. Stop the engine. 3. After parking the machine, put the matching marks on the shoe and side frame. 4. After 5 minutes have passed, measure the difference (3) between mark (1) on the side frame and mark (2) on the shoe. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

2

T4-4-3

3

1

T324-06-03-005


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test SWING SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the time to swing three complete turns to check the operational performance of the swing system (from the hydraulic pump to the swing motor) comprehensively.

2m

(6.5ft)

Preparations: 1. Check the lubrication of the swing gear and turntable. 2. Place the machine on a level and solid ground with ample space for swing. Do not test on a slope. 3. Use the basic boom with the hook. Set the boom angle to 60q. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 4. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF), let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test. Measurement: Turn the swing brake switch at ON position and measure the swing speed under the following conditions: With the swing speed control dial in SLOW position or in FAST position. 1. Using accelerator dial (or accelerator grip), run the engine at the fast idle speed. IMPORTANT: Do not operate the control lever rapidly. Otherwise, a large swing of the hook may result, potentially causing the hook to come in contact with the boom.

60q

T25N-04-04-001

Accelerator Grip Swing Brake Switch Swing Lever

Left Swing

Right Swing

2. Operate the swing control lever fully. 3. After the swing speed becomes constant, measure the time required for the upper to rotate three turns in one direction. 4. Measure on the right and left swing. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting.

T4-4-4

Swing Speed Control Dial T25N-04-01-001


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test TURNTABLE BEARING PLAY Summary: 1. Measure the turntable bearing play using a dial gauge to check the wear of ring races and balls. Preparation: 1. Check the turntable bearing mounting bolts for looseness. 2. Check the lubrication of the swing ring. Check that the turntable bearing rotation is smooth and without noise. 3. Install the dial gauge onto the center on upper surface in carbody, at the counterweight side (position A). 4. Secure the dial gauge by using a magnetic base. 5. Position the upper in the same direction as traveling the carbody. 6. Position the dial gauge so that its needle point comes into contact with the bottom surface of turntable bearing outer race. 7. Perform the measurement on level and solid ground. Use the basic boom with the hook. Set the boom angle to 60q. Apply a maximum lifting load (100 %) to the hook.

Counterweight

NOTE: Refer to the GENERAL / SPECIFICATION section or the Operator’s Manual for the lifting load value equivalent to the 100% lifting load. 8. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

60q

T324-06-03-012

Position A

Needle Point

Detailed Position A T324-06-03-013

Measurement of (h1)

Measurement: 1. Before lifting a load, read the dial gauge indication (h1). 2. Lift up a weight (100 % load) until the bottom of the weight leaves the ground. Then, read the dial gauge indication (h2). 3. Obtain the turntable bearing play (H) by calculating the difference between (h1) and (h2). That is, H = h2-h1

T25N-04-04-007

Measurement of (h2)

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

T25N-04-04-008

T4-4-5


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test HOISTING / LOWERING SPEED (FRONT / REAR DRUMS) Summary: 1. Measure the time required for the front and rear drum to rotate six complete turns to comprehensively check the operational performance of the hydraulic pump and the front and rear drum motors in the front and rear drum drive system. Preparation: 1. Use the basic boom with the hook. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 2. Set the boom angle to 60q. Lower the hook until it comes close to the ground surface. 3. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF) by operating the drum motors, let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test. 4. Check that the weight of the hoisting limiter functions at the specified position. NOTE: Depending on the number of the wire rope falls, the hook travel for six turns of the hoist drum varies. Start the measurement from the position having enough margin in stroke.

60q

T25N-04-04-009

Front Drum Lever

Measurement: 1. Using accelerator dial (or accelerator grip), run the engine at the fast idle speed. 2. Operate the hoist lever (front and rear drum lever) corresponding to the drum to be measured. 3. After the drum rotation speed becomes constant, measure the time required to rotate six turns. 4. Repeat the measurements three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. 5. Measure the times in all operations. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

T4-4-6

Rear Drum Lever

x Speed 2 x Speed 1

Lowering

x Neutral x Speed 1

Hoisting

x Speed 2

M25N-04-008


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT x Displacement Angle Set Pressure and Power Set Pressure Adjustment. Motor speed can be adjusted with adjusting screws (1) and (2) at regulator.

1

2

3

4 T25N-03-03-024

Adjustment Item 1. Displacement angle pressure Flow Rate

Adjustment Procedure Remarks set Loosen nut (1), and adjust pressure 1) Other control characteristics are with adjusting screw (2). not influenced. One turn of adjusting screw (2) 2) Securely retighten lock nut (1) changes the pressure as follows: after adjustment. Front/Rear drum: 2 530 kPa (5.4 kgf/cm ) : 13 mm : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m)

Pilot Pressure

2. Power set pressure Pressure

Loosen lock nut (4), and adjust 1) Other control characteristics are not influenced. pressure with adjusting screw (3). One turn of adjusting screw (3) 2) Securely retighten lock nut (4) changes the pressure as follow: after adjustment. 2 21.5 MPa (219 kgf/cm ) : 13 mm : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m) Notes 530 kPa = 77 psi 21.5 MPa = 3130 psi 16 N m = 12 lbf ft

Torque

T4-4-7


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test BOOM DERRICKING SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the time required for the boom derricking drum to rotate six complete turns to comprehensively check the operational performance of the hydraulic pump and the boom derricking drum motors in the boom derricking drum drive system.

2m

(6.5ft)

Preparations: 1. Use the basic boom with the hook. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight) 2. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF), let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test. 3. Check that the boom derricking drum brake functions properly. 4. Check that the derricking limiter functions properly. Measurement: Measure the boom derricking speed under the following conditions: With the speed control dial in SLOW position and in FAST position. 1. Using accelerator dial (or accelerator grip), run the engine at the fast idle speed. 2. Operate the boom derricking lever. 3. After the boom derricking drum rotation speed becomes constant, measure the time required to rotate six turns. 4. Repeat the measurements three times in both hoisting and lowering directions. Calculate the average values.

60q

T25N-04-04-001

Boom Derricking Lever Accelerator Grip Lowering x Neutral Hoisting

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Boom Derricking Drum Speed Control Dial

Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting.

T25U-04-01-001

T4-4-8


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test JACK-UP SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the extension time of jack-up cylinder from minimum retraction length to maximum extension length in order to judge overall performance of drive system for jack-up cylinder ranging from pump for gantry raise/lower, jack-up and crawler frame joint to jack-up cylinders. Preparation: 1. Deliver oil into the measured hydraulic circuit for two minutes or longer while making jack-up operation at hydraulic oil temperature of 50±5qC (122±9 qF). 2. Carry out measurement after extending jack-up cylinder fully. Measurement: Make measurement at each measuring point. 1. Set the engine speed to the fast idle speed. 2. Set the jack-up switch to the extend position. 3. Measure the extension time of jack-up cylinder from fully retracted position (minimum length) to ground contact position. 4. With jack-up switch at the retract position, and jack-up cylinder resting on the ground, measure the retraction time of jack-up cylinder to the minimum retraction length. 5. Carry out measurement three times, and determine the average of measurements. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

T2CD-04-04-001

Jack-up Cylinder

T4-4-9


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test LOAD LOWERING BY FRONT / REAR DRUMS Summary: 1. To check front/rear motor performance, measure slippage at the drum flange for two minutes while idling the engine. 1

2

Preparations: 1. Use the basic boom with the hook. 2. Number of rope reeving at the boom hook is four or less. 3. Set the front/rear drum brake mode switches (1 and 2) to the “Auto Brake” position. 4. After raising the hydraulic oil temperature to the range of 50r5 qC (122r9 qF), let the hydraulic oil flow into the circuits to be measured for more than two minutes before starting the test. 5. Hoist the weight, stop it, and make measurement. Measurement: 1. Set boom angle to 60q. 2. Set the load to about 13.5 t when converted to line pull with a single wrap on the drum. (at boom hook, about 54 t at 4 rope reeving, and about 40.5 t at 3 rope reeving) 3. Lift and suspend the weight 0.5 m above the ground. 4. Set engine speed to slow idle. 5. Measure slippage length at outer surface of the drum flange. Measure for two minutes. 6. Restore number of rope reeving as it was.

T25U-04-01-001

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting. 60q

0.5 m

(20 in) T25N-04-04-010

T4-4-10


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test CONTROL LEVER OPERATING CONTROL FORCE Summary: 1. Check the operating function of each control lever and measure the operating force. 2. Measure the maximum operating force of the front attachment control lever. 3. Measure the operating force under the grip of each control lever. Preparations: 1. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Drum Lever

Swing Lever

Measurement: 2. Measure on each control lever. 3. Stop the engine. 4. Operate each lever full stroke to measure the maximum operating force. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Drum Lever Travel Lever T25U-04-01-001

CONTROL LEVER STROKE Main points: 1. Check for play in each of the operating levers and the operating condition, and measure the stroke. 2. Measure the stroke at the center of the grip for each of the operating levers. 3. Measure separately if there is rattling in neutral. Measurements: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Measure the stroke of each operating lever at the top center of the grip, while the lever is in the neutral position to the end of the stroke. 3. The measurement is performed in straight line. 4. Measure the stroke three times, and the calculated average is the measurement value. Judgment: Refer to the Performance Standards List in Chapter T4-2.

T4-4-11


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Crane Test (Blank)

T4-4-12


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PRIMARY CIRCUIT)

PILOT

PRESSURE

(PILOT

Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Detach adapter 1 from port P1(PF3/8) of the 5-spool solenoid valve block. : 22 mm 3. Attach a pressure gauge to port P1. 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Block

Port P1 (Adapter 1)

Measurement: 1. Run the engine at the fast idle speed. 2. Measure the pilot oil pressure under no load condition by using a pressure gauge. 3. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

M2CG-07-063

Adjustment of Primary Pilot Pressure (Pilot Circuit) Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of pressure reducing valve provided on the 5-spool solenoid valve block while checking the pressure gauge if necessary. 1. Loosen the lock nut. : 14 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 14 mm : 7.8 N m (0.8 kgf m) 4. Check the set pressure after adjustment.

Adjustment Screw

Lock Nut

Notes 7.8 N m = 5.8 lbf ft

T

T

P1

P

T4-5-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SECONDARY PILOT PRESSURE

Boom Derricking Drum

Rear Drum

Front Drum

Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Install a pressure gauge unit to the circuit to be measured. 2-1. Front / Rear / Boom Derricking Drums Circuit • Remove the hoses and adapters from port 8 (G1/4) in the front drum remote control valve, port 7 (G1/4) in the rear drum remote control valve and ports 1 and 2 (G1/4) in the boom derricking remote control valve. Install the tee and pressure gauge. : 19 mm 2-2. Third drum / Quick Draw Circuit • Remove the travel remote control pressure sensors from ports 8 and 9 (G1/4) in the right and left travel remote control valve. Install the tee and pressure gauge. : 24 mm : 16r1.6 N m (1.6 to 0.16 kgf m) • Remove the hose and adapter from the quick draw remote control valve port 7 (G1/4) and attach the tee and pressure gauge. : 19 mm

Port 2

Port 8

Port 1 Port 7 Third Drum / Quick Draw

Left Travel

Right Travel

T25N-03-06-005

2-3. Swing Circuit • Remove the plug from port 3 (G1/4) in the slewing remote control valve. Install the tee and pressure gauge. : 6 mm Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6932 3. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 4. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Port 9 Port 7

T25N-03-06-006

Port 8 Swing

Notes 16r1.6 N m = 12r1.2 lbf ft

Port 3

Plug

T25N-03-06-007

T4-5-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. In case of measurement in the front/rear and boom derricking circuits, engage the respective drum locks. In case of measurement in the swing circuit, turn the swing lock pedal in the LOCK position and turn the swing brake switch in ON.

STD lever Swing Lock Pedal

Lock Lever

CAUTION: When measuring in the travel circuit near the rotating parts, take care not to allow your hand, foot, and/or clothes to become entangled in the rotating parts. 2. Lower the lock lever to the UNLOCK position. Operate the control lever corresponding to the circuit in which the secondary pilot pressure is to be measured at each detent position. Then, measure the pilot pressure at each detent position by using a pressure gauge. 3. Repeat the measurement three times at each detent position. Calculate the average value.

Control Lever

T25U-04-01-001

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: In case the measured results are out of specifications, check the primary pilot pressure. When the primary pilot pressure is normal, the remote control valve may be faulty.

T4-5-3


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test TRAVELING MODE CONTROL PRESSURE Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the travel speed control hose. : 19 mm 3. Install adapter1 to the adapter. Install the removed hose and tee to the adapter 1. Install the pressure gauge unit to the tee. : 19 mm Adapter 1 : ST 6451 Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6932 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Traveling Speed Control Hose

Adapter

Measurement: 1. Measure the pressures by using a pressure gauge while the machine is traveling at both slow and fast speeds. 2. Repeat the measurement three times. Calculate the average value.

M2CG-07-058

NOTE: The illustration shows the right travel.

Pressure Gauge

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: In case the measured results are out of specifications, check the primary pilot pressure. When the primary pilot pressure is normal, the solenoid valve or electrical system may be faulty.

Tee

7/16-20UNF (For Hose)

7/16-20UNF (For Adapter)

Adapter 1

T324-06-04-025

T4-5-4


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SWING BRAKE RELEASE PRESSURE Swing Motor

Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the swing brake release hose from port PR in the slewing motor. : 22 mm 3. Install the adapter to the tee. Install the hose and tee to the adapter. Install the pressure gauge unit to the tee. : 22 mm, 19 mm Adapter : ST 6485 Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6932 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Measurement: 1. With the swing brake switch turned to both the ON and OFF positions, measure the swing brake release pilot pressure. 2. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

Tee

Hose T2CD-04-05-002

Pressure Gauge

Nipple

9/16-18UNF (For Tee)

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. Remedy: In case the measured results are out of specifications, check the primary pilot pressure. When the primary pilot pressure is normal, the solenoid valve or electrical system may be faulty.

T4-5-5

9/16-18UNF (For Hose)

Adapter

T324-06-04-025


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test MAIN RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE Front / Rear Control Valves Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the plug from pressure check ports (a1 and a2) (G1/4) at the main pump delivery port. : 6 mm 3. Install the tee and pressure gauge unit to check ports (a1 and a2). : 19 mm Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6934 4. Measurement of the main relief valve set pressure on the front control valve (connected to main pump 1): Remove the right travel motor forward hydraulic hose (3). Measurement of the main relief valve set pressure on the rear control valve (connected to main pump 2): Remove the left travel motor forward hydraulic hose (1). 5. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pipe connection part. 6. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Measurement: 1. Run the engine at high idle. 2. Measure the main relief valve set pressure on the front control valve (connected to main pump 1) with the right travel lever stroked in the FORWARD position. Measure the main relief valve set pressure on the rear control valve (connected to main pump 2) with the left travel lever stroked in the FORWARD position. Read the pressure when the relief valve relieves. 3. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

T4-5-6

Main Pump 1

Main Pump 2

T25N-04-05-001

Port a1

Port a2

4

3

2

1

4

3 M2CG-05-034

1-

Pipe for Left Travel Forward 2 - Pipe for Left Travel Reverse

3-

Pipe for Right Travel Forward 4 - Pipe for Right Travel Reverse


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Main Relief Valve

Remedy: Refer to T5-4 Troubleshooting. Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of main relief valve if necessary. 1. Loosen the lock nut. : 22 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 22 mm : 16.7 to 19.6 N m (1.7 to 2.0 kgf m) 4. Check the set pressure after adjustment. Front Control Valve

T25N-03-05-030

Notes Main Relief Valve

16.7 to 19.6 N m = 12 to 14 lbf ft

Lock Nut Adjusting Screw

Pressure Increase

Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129

Rear Control Valve T2CD-01-02-005

Lock Nut

Adjusting Screw

T326-06-04-002

T4-5-7


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SWING CONTROL VALVE

Swing Pump

Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the plug from pressure check port a4 (G1/4) at the swing pump delivery port. : 6 mm 3. Install the tee and pressure gauge unit to pressure check port a4. : 19 mm Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6934 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Port a4 T25N-04-05-001

STD lever

Swing Lock Pedal

Measurement: 1. Turn the swing lock pedal in the LOCK position and lock the swing function. 2. Run the engine at the fast idle speed. 3. Move the swing lever backward or forward slowly to relieve the oil pressure. Read the pressure at this time. 4. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

Swing Lever

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

T25U-04-01-001

T4-5-8


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of the main relief valve while checking the pressure gauge if necessary. 1. Loosen the lock nut. : 22mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 22 mm : 16.7 to 19.6 N m (1.7 to 2.0 kgf m) 4. Check the set pressure after adjustment. Relief Valve

Notes T2CG-01-02-027

16.7 to 19.6 N m = 12 to 14 lbf ft Adjusting Screw

Lock Nut

T326-06-04-002

Lock Nut Adjusting Screw

Pressure Increase

Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129

T4-5-9


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test 3-SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE (COUNTER WEIGHT, LIVE MAST FLIP CYLINDERS) Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the plug from pressure check port P (G 1/4) on the gantry raise / lower hydraulic source selection control valve. : 6 mm 3. Install the tee and pressure gauge unit to pressure check port P. : 19 mm Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6933 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Measurement: 1. Run the engine at high idle. 2. Turn the gantry raise/lower switch to the LOWER position and relieve the gantry raise/lower cylinder. Read the pressure at this time. 3. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

Port P

Relief Valve T2CG-01-02-028

Lock Nut

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Adjusting Screw

Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of main relief valve if necessary. Pressure Increase

1. 2. 3. 4.

Loosen the lock nut. Turn the adjusting screw. Tighten the lock nut. Check the set pressure after adjustment.

Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129

T4-5-10


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test 4-SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE (BOOM FOOT PIN CYLINDERS, LOWER HYDRAULIC POWER SOURCE) Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the plug from pressure check port P (G 1/4) on the gantry raise / lower hydraulic source selection control valve. : 6 mm 3. Install the tee and pressure gauge unit to pressure check port P. : 19 mm Tee : ST 6069 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6933 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Port P

Relief Valve T2CG-01-02-029

Measurement: 1. Run the engine at high idle. 2. Operate one arbitrary switch to relieve the pressure from the cylinder. Check the pressure at this time with the pressure gauge. 3. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Lock Nut Adjusting Screw

Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of main relief valve if necessary. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Loosen the lock nut. Turn the adjusting screw. Tighten the lock nut. Check the set pressure after adjustment.

Pressure Increase

Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129

T4-5-11


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test LOWER CONTROL VALVE

Lower Control Valve

Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove plug from the pressure check port PG (R3/8) on the lower control valve. : 6 mm 3. Install tee and pressure gauge unit to the removed plug port. : 17 mm Tee : ST 6068 Pressure Gauge Unit : ST 6933

Relief Valve

Port PG

A B

4. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF).

Measurement: 1. Run the engine at high idle. 2. While relieving the jack-up cylinder oil pressure by operating the remote control box to jack-up the cylinder, take a pressure gauge reading. 3. Repeat the measurement three times. Calculate the average value.

T25N-03-05-019

Section A

Plug

Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

Adjustment: Adjust the set pressure of the relief valve while checking the pressure gauge if necessary. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Loosen lock nut. Turn adjusting screw to adjust the set pressure. Tighten lock nut. Recheck the set pressure.

T25N-03-05-060

Section B Adjusting Screw

Lock Nut T25N-03-05-021

Lock Nut Adjusting Screw

Pressure Increase

Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129

T4-5-12


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE Summary: 1. No safe and reliable method to measure the overload relief valve set pressure is available, because the circuit oil pressure must be raised by blocking the return circuit of the control valve and applying an external load to a hydraulic actuator. Doing so would create a high potential to easily damage the machine. 2. Comparing the oil flow rate delivered from the main pump, the quantity of relieving oil flow from the overload relief valve is very small. Therefore, checking the overload relief pressure by letting the main pump deliver oil to the overload relief valve does not meet the test conditions. Accordingly, if the check is required, remove the overload relief valve from the machine, and perform the unit test of the overload relief valve on a specified test bench using the correct oil flow rate. 3. As explained above, checking the overload relief valve pressure setting on the machine is not recommended. Therefore, when the main circuit relief pressure is normal, the overload relief pressure setting is also considered to be normal.

T4-5-13


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test MAIN / SWING MEASUREMENT

PUMP

FLOW

RATE

x P-Q Control (Torque Control) Summary: Main / swing pump performance is checked by measuring the pump flow rate with a hydraulic tester installed at the main / swing pump delivery port (one side) to be measured. Use the moment limiter and a pressure gauge at the same time. IMPORTANT: This measurement procedure is a simple method. The measured data will be lower by approx. 5 % than the accurately measured value. To measure accurately, disconnect the return circuit from the control valve and connect it to the sump tank. Preparations: 1. Stop the engine. Push the air bleed valve to bleed air. Install a vacuum pump to the oil filler port. NOTE: Operate the vacuum pump while connecting the pump flow rate test line.

Measurement: 1. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). 2. Measure the maximum and minimum flow rates under no load. 3. Select each switch position as follows: Slewing Speed Accelerator Accelerator Grip Control Dial Holding Switch Fast Idle

Slow Idle

Fast Speed

ON

4. Adjust the main relief valve set-pressure in the front / rear / slewing control valve to each pressure point specified along the main / slewing pump P-Q curve. (Refer to T4-2-4, 6) Slowly close the loading valve of the hydraulic tester. Measure the flow rates and engine speeds at the pressure points specified in the P-Q curve. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values.

2. Remove the delivery hose from the main pump (one side) to be measured. Install pipe (1) to the pump delivery port by using the split flanges and bolts, which were used to connect the removed delivery hose. : 41 mm : 8 mm 3. Connect pipe (1) to hydraulic tester (4) with test hose (2) and adapter (3). Install adapter (5), test hose (6) and flange (7) to hydraulic tester (4). : 8 mm 4. Install the delivery hose to flange (7) with split flanges (8) and bolt (9). : 8 mm 5. Install a pressure gauge to the main pump to be measured. (Refer to T4-5-8 and 10.) : 6 mm : 19 mm 6. Remove the connector from displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. 7. Remove the vacuum pump. Loosen plug (10) on the top of pump casing. Bleed air from the pump casing until oil only comes out of the plug. 8. Fully open the loading valve of hydraulic tester. 9. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pressure gauge unit connector.

T4-5-14


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Evaluation: 1. Convert the measured flow rates to those at the specified pump speed using the following formulas:

2. Standard Flow Rate Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards. NOTE: When actually measuring, install pipe (1) only to the pump to be measured.

Qc = Ns × Q/Ne Qc: Converted Flow Rate Q: Measured Flow Rate -1 Ns: Specified Pump Speed: 2000 min Ne: Measured Engine Speed: Moment Limiter 1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

9

Delivery Hose (To Control Valve)

T1F3-04-05-010

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve

Power Increase Solenoid Valve

T25N-04-05-001

10 12-

Pipe (ST 6192) Test Hose (ST 6145)

3-

Adapter G1 u UNF1-7/8 (ST 6146)

45-

Hydraulic Tester (ST 6299) Adapter G1 u UNF1-7/8 (ST 6146) 6 - Test Hose (ST 6145)

78-

Flange (ST 6121) Split Flange (4506459)

9-

Bolt (J781030) (4 Used)

T4-5-15

10 - Plug


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test x Pilot Characteristics Summary: Main / slewing pump performance is checked by measuring the pump flow rate with a hydraulic tester installed at the main / slewing pump delivery port (one side) to be measured. Use the moment limiter and a pressure gauge at the same time. IMPORTANT: This measurement procedure is a simple method. The measured data will be lower by approx. 5 % than the accurately measured value. To measure accurately, disconnect the return circuit from the control valve and connect it to the hydraulic oil tank. Preparations: 1. Referring to steps 1 to 4 on page T4-5-16, connect a hydraulic tester to the main pump to be measured. 2. Remove the hose from displacement angle proportional solenoid valve port Pr1 of the main pump (displacement angle proportional solenoid valve port Psv3) to be measured. Install plug (4174545) (9/16 UNF) to the removed hose. : 19 mm 3. Install adapters (14) (3 used) to pressure reducing valve (15). Remove the hose from P1 (Refer to T4-5-1) port in pressure reducing valve of the 4-unit solenoid valve and install hose (13). Connect the other end of hose (13) to port P1 on pressure reducing valve (15). : 19 mm 4. Install tee (16) to port P2 in pressure reducing valve (15). Install pressure gauge (17) and hose (13) to tee (16). Install hose (13) to the displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. : 19 mm 5. Install hose (13) and adapter (14) to port T in pressure reducing valve (15). Remove plug L from the return pipe. Install hose (13). : 19 mm 6. Remove the connector from displacement angle proportional solenoid valve. 7. Remove the vacuum pump. Loosen plug (10) on the top of pump casing. Bleed air from the pump casing until oil only comes out of the plug. 8. Fully open the loading valve of hydraulic tester. 9. Start the engine. Check for oil leaks at the pipe connection part.

Measurement: 1. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). 2. The pump flow rate in response to the external command pilot pressure is measured. 3. Select each switch position as follows: Slewing Accelerator Holding Accelerator Grip Speed Control Dial Switch Fast Idle

Fast Speed

ON

4. Adjust the reducing valve set-pressure to each pressure point specified along the main / slewing pump P-Q curve. (Pilot Characteristics) (Refer to T4-2-5,7) Measure the flow rates and engine speeds at the pressure points specified in the P-Q curve. 5. Repeat the measurement three times in each direction. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: 1. Convert the measured flow rates to those at the specified pump speed using the following formulas: Qc = Ns u Q/Ne Qc: Converted Flow Rate Q: Measured Flow Rate -1 Ns: Specified Pump Speed: 2000 min Ne: Measured Engine Speed: Moment Limiter 2. Standard Flow Rate Refer to T4-2 Performance Standards.

T4-5-16

NOTE: When actually measuring, install pipe (1) only to the pump to be measured.


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test 1

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

9

Delivery Hose (To Control Valve)㩷

T1F3-04-05-010

Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷

Port Pr1㩷

View A

Port Psv3㩷

T25N-04-05-011

T25N-04-05-001

10

A

Pressure Reducing Valve Port Position㩷

Pressure Reducing Valve㩷

Return Pipe㩷

T L

P1

14

17

P2

13㩷 14

To Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve㩷 T25N-04-05-010

13㩷 1 - Pipe E (ST 6192) 2 - Test Hose (ST 6145) 3 - Adapter G1 u UNF1-7/8 (ST 6146) 4 - Hydraulic Tester (ST 6299)

16

15

14

5 - Adapter G1 u UNF1-7/8 (ST 6146) 6 - Test Hose (ST 6145) 7 - Flange (ST 6121) 8 - Split Flange (4506459)

14

9 - Bolt (J781030) (4 Used) 10 - Plug 13 - Hose 9/16 UNF (4304905) 14 - Adapter 9/16 UNF x G3/8 (A852133)

T4-5-17

13 15 - Pressure Reducing Valve (4325439) 16 - Tee 9/16 UNF x G1/4 (ST6450) 17 - Pressure Gauge (ST 6931)


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT (MAIN PUMP) x Minimum and Maximum Flow Rate Adjustment This regulator can adjust minimum and maximum flow rates with adjusting screws (1) and (2) at each main pump body. 3

4

4

2

3

1

1

Main Pump1

1 - Adjusting Screw (For Minimum Flow Adjustment)

2-

Adjustment Item 1. Minimum Flow Rate

Main Pump2

Adjusting Screw (For Maximum Flow Adjustment)

3-

Lock Nut (For Minimum Flow Adjustment)

T1F3-03-01-003

4-

Lock Nut (For Maximum Flow Adjustment)

Adjustment Procedure Remarks Loosen lock nut (3) and turn ad- • Other control characteristics remain justing screw (1). unchanged. Notice that the required Rotating adjusting screw (1) 1/4 a power is increased at maximum deturn clockwise increases the minilivery pressure if tightened excesmum pump flow rate by 5.0 L/min. sively. • Securely retighten lock nut (3) after : 24 mm the adjustment. : 130 N m (13.3 kgf m)

Q

I

Loosen lock nut (4) and turn ad- • Other control characteristics remain justing screw (2). unchanged, except that only maxiRotating adjusting screw (2) 1/4 a mum oil rate varies. turn clockwise decreases the • Securely retighten lock nut (4) after the adjustment. maximum pump flow rate by 6.2 L/min.

2. Maximum Flow Rate Q

: 30 mm : 240 N m (24.5 kgf m)

Notes 130 N m = 961 lbf ft 240 N m = 177 lbf ft

I

T4-5-18


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test x Torque Adjustment (P-Q Control) For torque adjustment, similarly adjust both the adjusting screws (5) and (6) at the main pumps 1 and 2. Pressure change due to adjustment is that when both the pumps are pressurized at the same time.

9

8 5 6

10 7

T1F3-03-01-008

Adjustment Item 1. Outer Spring Adjustment Q

P1+P2

Pd

2. Inner Spring Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure Remarks Loosen lock nut (7) and turn adjust- • When adjusting screw (5) is turned, ing screw (5). inner spring (8) set-force varies. Therefore, when adjusting screw Rotating adjusting screw (5) 1/4 a (5) is turned clockwise, turn adturn clockwise: justing screw (6) 2.17 times turns • Compensating Starting Pressure: of adjusting screw (5) counter2 + 1.74 MPa (17.8 kgf/cm ) clockwise to keep inner spring (8) • Torque: set-force unchanged. + 84.3 N m (8.6 kgf m) • Securely retighten lock nut (7) and : 46 mm: Lock Nut (7) nut (10) after the adjustment. : 160 N m (16.5 kgf m) Loosen lock nut (10) and turn ad- • Securely retighten lock nut (10) afjusting screw (6). ter the adjustment.

Q

Rotating adjusting screw (6) 1/4 a turn clockwise:

• Pump flow rate:

P1+P2

Pd

+ 10.2 L/min • Torque: + 56.9 N m (5.8 kgf m) : 13 mm: Lock Nut (10) : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m)

T4-5-19

Notes 1.74 MPa = 254 psi 84.3 N m = 62 lbf ft 160 N m = 118 lbf ft 10.2 L/min = 622 in3/min 56.9 N m = 42 lbf ft 16 N m = 12 lbf ft


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test x Pilot Pressure Characteristics

11 12

T25N-03-01-011

Adjustment Item Adjustment Procedure Remarks 1. Pilot Pressure Characteris- Loosen lock nut (11) and turn ad- • Securely retighten lock nut (11) tics justing screw (12). after the adjustment. Rotating adjusting screw (12) 1/4 a Q turn clockwise:

• Pump flow rate: 16.2 L/min

• Flow rate control starting pressure: 2 + 150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm ) : 13 mm: Lock Nut (11) : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m) Pi

Notes 16.2 L/min = 988 in3/min 150 kPa = 21 psi 16 N m = 12 lbf ft

T4-5-20


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test REGULATOR PUMP)

ADJUSTMENT

(SWING

x Minimum and Maximum Flow Rate Adjustment This regulator can adjust minimum and maximum flow rates with adjusting screws (1) and (2) at each main pump body. 4 3 2

1

T25N-03-01-005

1-

Adjusting Screw (For Minimum Flow Adjustment)

2-

Adjustment Item 1. Minimum Flow Rate

Adjusting Screw (For Maximum Flow Adjustment)

3-

Lock Nut (For Minimum Flow Adjustment)

4-

Lock Nut (For Maximum Flow Adjustment)

Adjustment Procedure Remarks Loosen lock nut (3) and turn ad- • Other control characteristics rejusting screw (1). main unchanged. Notice that the Rotating adjusting screw (1) 1/4 a required power is increased at turn clockwise increases the minimaximum delivery pressure if mum pump flow rate by 3.2 L/min. tightened excessively. • Securely retighten lock nut (3) after : 24 mm the adjustment. : 130 N m (13.3 kgf m)

Q

Pi

Loosen lock nut (4) and turn ad- • Other control characteristics rejusting screw (2). main unchanged, except that only Rotating adjusting screw (2) 1/4 a maximum oil rate varies. turn clockwise decreases the • Securely retighten lock nut (4) after the adjustment. maximum pump flow rate by 3.2 L/min.

2. Maximum Flow Rate Q

: 24 mm : 130 N m (13.3 kgf m) Notes 130 N m = 96 lbf ft Pi

T4-5-21


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test x Torque Adjustment (P-Q Control) 9

8 5 6

10 7

T25N-03-01-013

Adjustment Item 1. Outer Spring Adjustment

Q

P1+P2

Pd

Adjustment Procedure Remarks Loosen lock nut (7) and turn ad- • When adjusting screw (5) is justing screw (5). turned, inner spring (8) set-force varies. Therefore, when adjusting Rotating adjusting screw (5) 1/4 a screw (5) is turned clockwise, turn turn clockwise: adjusting screw (6) 1.61 times turns of adjusting screw (5) coun• Compensating Starting Pressure: 2 terclockwise to keep inner spring + 1.9 MPa (19 kgf/cm ) (8) set-force unchanged. • Torque: • Securely retighten lock nut (7) and + 26 N m (2.6 kgf m) nut (10) after the adjustment. : 46 mm:Lock Nut (7) : 160 N m (16.5 kgf m)

2. Inner Spring Adjustment

Loosen lock nut (10) and turn ad- • Securely retighten lock nut (10) justing screw (6). after the adjustment.

Q

Rotating adjusting screw (6) 1/4 a turn clockwise:

• Pump flow rate:

1.9 MPa = 276 psi

+ 5.8 L/min

• Torque: P1+P2

Pd

Notes

+ 16 N m (1.6 kgf m) : 13 mm:Lock Nut (10) : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m)

26 N m = 19 lbf ft 160 N m = 118 lbf ft 5.8 L/min = 354 in3/min 16 N m = 12 lbf ft

T4-5-22


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test x Pilot Pressure Characteristics

11 12

T25N-03-01-012

Adjustment Item 1. Pilot Pressure Characteristics Q

Adjustment Procedure Remarks Loosen lock nut (11) and turn ad- • Securely retighten lock nut (11) justing screw (12). after the adjustment. Rotating adjusting screw (12) 1/4 a turn clockwise:

• Pump flow rate: 14 L/min • Flow rate control starting pres2

sure: + 180 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm ) : 13 mm:Lock Nut (11) : 16 N m (1.6 kgf m)

Notes 14 L/min = 854 in3/min 180 kPa = 26 psi 16 N m = 12 lbf ft

Pi

T4-5-23


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SWING MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: Turn the swing lock pedal to the LOCK position and turn the swing brake switch in ON. Operate the swing lever and relieve the swing relief valve. Under this condition, measure the drain oil amount from the swing motor to check the swing motor performance. 1. Secure the inspectors’ safety during the measurement. Take care not to damage any surrounding buildings or vegetation. 2. The amount of drain oil from the swing motor will be greatly affected by the oil temperature. Keep the oil temperature in the proper range. Preparations: 1. Place the machine on a level and solid ground with ample space for slewing. Do not measure on a slope. 2. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Rotate the swing motor and warm the inside of motor. 3. Stop the engine. Remove drain hose (1) from the swing motor at the return oil port to the sump tank. Install plug (1-3/16-12UN) to the removed return oil ports to the sump tank. : 36 mm

T4-5-24

Drain Hose

Swing Motor

T2CD-04-05-002


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: Amount of Oil Drained While Relieving Swing 1. Attach the basic boom with the boom angle set at 60q. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight.) 2. Turn the swing lock pedal to the LOCK position and turn the swing brake switch in ON. 3. Start the engine and run it at high idle. While operating the swing lever full stroke, receive the hydraulic oil coming out of the drain hose and measure the time and the volume at the same time. 4. Repeat the measurement three times each in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions and calculate the average value. 5. Take the measurement for more than 45 seconds. Evaluation: *Conversion of the Measured Values Receive the drain oil with a measuring vessel such as a measuring cylinder or cup. Obtain the converted drain oil amount using the formula below:

2m

(6.5ft)

60q㩷

T25N-04-05-013

UQ= 60 u q / t Where UQ : Amount of drain oil per minute (L/min) t : Time measuring Time (seconds) q : Total amount of drain oil Amount (L)

T107-06-05-008

T4-5-25


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test TRAVEL MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. The travel motor performance is checked by measuring the drain oil amount from the travel motor while driving the machine straight on a level solid surface to rotate the travel motor. 2. Secure the inspectors’ safety during the measurement. Take care not to damage any surrounding buildings or vegetation. Be sure to use a guide to check the safety in the front of and the rear of the machine. 3. The travel motor performance should be judged comprehensively while referring to the check results of travel speeds, mistrack amount together with the drain oil amount. 4. Drain oil amount from the travel motor will be greatly affected by the oil temperature. Keep the oil temperature in the proper range. Preparations: 1. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Rotate the travel motor to warm the inside of the motor. 2. Stop the engine. Remove drain hose from the travel motor. Install plug (3/4-16UNF) to the removed hose end. Install drain measuring hose (3/4-16UNF) to the travel motor. : 27 mm

T4-5-26

Drain Hose

Travel Motor

M2CG-07-010

NOTE: The illustration shows the right travel.


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: CAUTION: When doing any work near the rotating parts, take care not to allow your hand, foot, and/or clothes to become entangled in the rotating parts. 1. Attach the basic boom with the boom angle set at 60q. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight.) 2. Insert a round bar (Dia.: 100 mm, Length: 200 mm) between drive tumbler and track link. 3. Start the engine. Run the engine at fast idle speed. Operate the travel lever to FORWARD according to the guide and relieve the travel. 4. Receive the hydraulic oil coming out of the drain hose and measure the time at the same time. 5. Repeat the measurement three times each side and calculate the average value. 6. Take the measurement for more than 45 seconds.

2m

(6.5ft)

60q㩷

T25N-04-05-013

Evaluation: *Conversion of the Measured Values Receive the drain oil with a measuring vessel such as a measuring cylinder or cup. Obtain the converted drain oil amount using the formula below: UQ= 60 u q / t Where UQ : Amount of drain oil per minute (L/min) t : Time measuring Time (seconds) q : Total amount of drain oil Amount (L)

T4-5-27


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test DERRICKING MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. Engage the boom derricking drum lock. Operate the boom derricking lever to LOWER slowly in order to relieve. Under this condition, measure the drain oil amount from the boom derricking motor and check the boom derricking motor performance. 2. Secure the inspectors’ safety during measurement. Take care not to damage any surrounding buildings or vegetation. 3. Drain oil amount from the boom derricking motor will be greatly affected by the oil temperature. Maintain the oil temperature in the proper range. Preparations: CAUTION: Check around the drum, the condition of boom and hook, and the safety around machine. 1. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50r5 qC (122r9 qF). Rotate the boom derricking motor and warm the inside of motor. 2. Stop the engine. Remove the drain hose from the boom derricking motor at the return oil port to the hydraulic oil tank. Install plug (1-3/16-12UN) to the removed return oil ports to the hydraulic oil tank. : 36 mm

T4-5-28

Drain Port Boom Derricking Motor㩷 M2CG-07-057


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. Attach the basic boom with the boom angle set at 60q. (Or dismount the front attachment and counterweight.) 2. Start the engine and engage the boom derricking drum lock. Run the engine at the fast idle speed. Operate the boom derricking lever to LOWER slowly in order to relieve. 3. Receive the hydraulic oil coming out of the drain hose and measure the time at the same time. 4. Repeat the measurements three times. Calculate the average values. 5. Take the measurement for more than 45 seconds. Evaluation: *Conversion of the Measured Values Receive the drain oil with a measuring vessel such as a measuring cylinder or cup. Obtain the converted drain oil amount using the formula below:

2m

(6.5ft)

60q㩷

T25N-04-05-013

UQ= 60 u q / t Where UQ : Amount of drain oil per minute (L/min) t : Time measuring Time (seconds) q : Total amount of drain oil Amount (L)

T4-5-29


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test (Blank)

T4-5-30


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment POWER INCREASE PRESSURE CALIBRATION MC2/A is used to store the adjusted value of the horsepower output. Adjust horsepower and pressure in the following cases:

x When MC2/A is replaced. x When the main pump or power shift solenoid valve is replaced.

x When the engine speed has changed.

T4-6-1


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment Preparation: 1. Install the pressure measuring hose (4622751) and pressure gauge (5 MPa) to quick coupler (1). Adjustment: 1. Turn drum rotation sensor switch (7) for front / rear / boom derricking drums to ON position. 2. Turn accelerator holding switch (6) to accelerator preset position (SET) (9) and turn key switch (3) to ON position under this condition.

1

Power Increase Solenoid Valve T25N-04-06-001

NOTE: After this, the pilot oil pressure indicator at monitor panel (2) blinks every 0.5 second. 3. After the pilot oil pressure indicator blinks, turn accelerator holding switch (6) to accelerator unlock position (OFF) (8).

2 3

7

M25N-03-344

4 5

6

T25U-04-01-001

6

8

M25N-03-084

9

T4-6-2


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment Calibration Starting 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn front / rear drum auto stop override switches (4, 5) to ON position. NOTE: Now, MC2/A blinks the pilot oil pressure indicator at monitor panel (2). (Refer to Control System.)

2 3

3. If the pilot oil pressure indicator blinks other than every 0.5 second, turn front / rear drum auto stop override switches (4 and 5) to OFF position. 4. Turn accelerator holding switch (6) to accelerator preset position (SET) (9) and turn accelerator unlock switch to OFF position (8). NOTE: Now, the power shift decreases gradually. The pilot oil pressure indicator blinks a cycle of 0.4 second ON and 0.1 second OFF during this time. 5. When the power shift pressure reaches the set pressure (0.3 MPa), turn accelerator holding switch (6) to accelerator preset position (SET) (9) and turn accelerator unlock switch to OFF position (8).

6 4 5

T25U-04-01-001

NOTE: Normal completion: Pilot oil pressure indicator: ON Abnormal completion: Pilot oil pressure indicator: Blinking every 0.1 second Normal completion condition: • Power shift electric current offset d Offset adjusting range (r150 mA) [Power shift electric current offset Output current - Adjustment point power shift electric current (608 mA)] • Output current d Upper limit electric current (800 mA)

6

8

M25N-03-084

9

IMPORTANT: When turning the key switch (3) to OFF position, record the completed calibration to EEPROM (MC2/A) for five seconds. Do not operate key switch (3) during this time. 6. Turn the key switch (3) to OFF position and wait for five seconds or longer. 7. Remove the pressure gauge.

Notes 5 MPa = 51 kgf/cm2 = 725 psi 0.3 MPa = 3 kgf/cm2 = 44 psi

T4-6-3


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment BRAKE PEDAL UNIT ADJUSTMENT IMPORTANT: After repairing or inspecting the brake pedal unit, adjust the brake pedal unit. If failing to make this adjustment, the brake is unlikely to work. Adjustment:

A

x Adjusting brake pedal position 1. Tighten locknut (1) so that dimension A becomes specification. Dimension A: 45 mm 2. Loosen lock nut (2). Tighten stopper bolt (3) until lever (4) is clear of stopper bolt (3). 3. At this time, check if rod (8) of the pressure reducing valve is pushed to its stroke end. 4. Check if height of floor plate (6) and pin (5) (dimension C) is set to specification. Dimension C: 72r2 mm 5. If dimension C is different from specification, adjust as follows. 5-1. Loosen lock nut (7). : 17 mm 5-2. Attach a spanner onto width across flats (9) of rod (8) and turn rod (8) in the adjusting direction. : 14 mm 5-3. When dimension C becomes specification, tighten lock nut (7). : 17 mm : 19.5r2.0 N m (2.0r0.2 kgf m) 6. Loosen stopper bolt (3) until stopper bolt (3) gets in contact with lever (4). 7. When stopper bolt (3) contacts lever (4), loosen stopper bolt (3) a half turn from that position and lock it with lock nut (2).

C

B

T25N-04-06-005

Brake Pedal

5

4

6

1

3

2 T25N-04-06-005

7

8

IMPORTANT: When if dimensions B and C are different from specification, return to step 2 for adjustment. 8. Check if dimensions B and C are specification. Dimension B: 27 to 28 mm 9

Notes

Pressure Reducing Valve

A: 45mm = 1.77 in

T25N-04-06-002

C: 72r2 mm = 2.83r0.08 in B: 27 to 28mm = 1.06 to 1.10 in 19.5r2.0 N m = 14.3r1.5 lbf ft

T4-6-4


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment 9. Loosen lock nut (10) and tighten stopper bolt (11) sufficiently. 10. Lower lever (4) until rod (8) of the pressure reducing valve reaches its stroke end. Hold it in position. 11. Loosen stopper bolt (11) until stopper bolt (11) gets in contact with lever (4). 12. When stopper bolt (11) contacts lever (4), loosen stopper bolt (11) a half turn from that position and lock it with lock nut (10).

Lock Pedal

4

8

14

13

x Adjusting pedal lock position

12

13. Loosen 2 bolts (13).

11

10

Pressure Reducing Valve T25N-04-06-006

IMPORTANT: If lock position is too low, unlocking is unlikely to be made. Adjust it with care. 14. By changing the thickness of shim (14) and by repositioning latch (12), make adjustment so that stroke required for unlocking the pedal is obtained and locking at stroke end is achieved. Thicknesses of shims (14): 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 12.0 mm 15. In pedal lock position, check if dimensions D is specification. Dimension D: 40 mm or more

Notes 4.5mm = 0.18 in 6.0mm = 0.24 in 9.0mm = 0.35 in 12.0mm = 0.47 in 40mm = 1.6 in

T4-6-5

D

T25N-04-06-006


OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment (Blank)

T4-6-6


SECTION 5

TROUBLESHOOTING

—CONTENTS— Group 1 Diagnosing Procedure

Group 3 Troubleshooting A

Introduction .................................................. T5-1-1 Diagnosing Procedure.................................. T5-1-2 Troubleshooting Monitor............................... T5-1-4

Troubleshooting A Procedure .......................T5-3-1 Failure of MC2/A or MC2/B Battery and Sensor System Power Supply ....................T5-3-2 Failure of Engine Control System ...............T5-3-17 Failure of Brake Control System.................T5-3-20 Failure of Main Pump Delivery Flow Control System .........................................T5-3-32 Failure of Main Pump Power Increase Control System .........................................T5-3-36 Failure of Swing Pump Discharge Rate Control System .........................................T5-3-38 Failure of Swing Alarm Control System ......T5-3-41 Failure of Drum Rotation Sensor Control System .........................................T5-3-44 Failure of Engine Start Interlock Control System .........................................T5-3-48 Failure of Pilot Oil Pressure Indicator Control System .........................................T5-3-52 Failure of Winch Motor Cutoff Pressure Control System .........................................T5-3-54 Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Automatic Stop Control system..................................T5-3-56 Failure of Front Drum Automatic Stop Control System .........................................T5-3-66 Failure of Rear Drum Automatic Stop Control System .........................................T5-3-70 Failure of Third Drum Automatic Stop Control System .......................................T5-3-74 Failure of Second Overhoist Automatic Stop Control System .........................................T5-3-78 Failure of Front and Rear Motor Speed Control System .........................................T5-3-82 Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Speed Control System .........................................T5-3-86 Failure of Tower Jib Derricking 2-Speed (Flow Combining) Restricting System......................................................T5-3-88 Failure of External Moment Limiter Indicator Control System ..........................T5-3-90 Failure of Oil Cooling Fan Rotation Control System .........................................T5-3-92

Group 2 Component Layout Main Components ........................................ T5-2-1

C-5-1


Group 4 Troubleshooting B Troubleshooting B Procedure....................... T5-4-1 Troubleshooting List ..................................... T5-4-2 Engine System Troubleshooting .................. T5-4-4 Actuator System Troubleshooting .............. T5-4-11 Hoisting Drum System Troubleshooting ..... T5-4-12 Boom Derricking Drum System Troubleshooting........................................ T5-4-15 Swing System Troubleshooting.................. T5-4-16 Travel System Troubleshooting.................. T5-4-18 Other Troubleshooting................................ T5-4-20

Group 5 Troubleshooting C Troubleshooting C Procedure (Troubleshooting For Monitor)...................... T5-5-1 Malfunction of Coolant Temperature Gauge ........................................................ T5-5-2 Malfunction of Fuel Gauge ........................... T5-5-3 Malfunction of Engine Oil Pressure Indicator ..................................................... T5-5-4 Malfunction of Glow Lamp............................ T5-5-5 Malfunction of Coolant Level Indicator ......... T5-5-6 Malfunction of Abnormal Controller Indicator ..................................................... T5-5-7 Malfunction of Air Filter Restriction Indicator ..................................................... T5-5-8 Malfunction of Overheat Indicator ................ T5-5-9 Malfunction of Alternator Indicator.............. T5-5-10 Malfunction of Brake Unapplied Indicator .. T5-5-11 Malfunction of Hour Meter.......................... T5-5-12 Malfunction of Pilot Oil Pressure Indicator ................................................... T5-5-12

Fault Code W48..........................................T5-6-27 Fault Code W49..........................................T5-6-28 Fault Code W90..........................................T5-6-30 Fault Code W91..........................................T5-6-31 Fault Code WA1 .........................................T5-6-32 Fault Code WA2 .........................................T5-6-32 Fault Code WA3 .........................................T5-6-32 Fault Code WB1 .........................................T5-6-33 Fault Code WB2 .........................................T5-6-33 Fault Code WB3 .........................................T5-6-34

Group 7 Troubleshooting E Troubleshooting E Procedure .......................T5-7-1

Group 8 Electrical System Inspection Precautions for Inspection and Maintenance ........................................T5-8-1 Battery Voltage Check ..................................T5-8-3 Fusible Link Inspection .................................T5-8-3 Fuse Inspection ............................................T5-8-4 Alternator Inspection.....................................T5-8-5 Continuity Check ..........................................T5-8-6

Group 6 Troubleshooting D Troubleshooting D Procedure ...................... T5-6-1 Fault Code Table .......................................... T5-6-2 Fault Code E20, E22.................................... T5-6-4 Fault Code E21, E26.................................... T5-6-6 Fault Code E30 ............................................ T5-6-8 Fault Code E31 .......................................... T5-6-10 Fault Code E40 .......................................... T5-6-13 Fault Code E43 .......................................... T5-6-13 Fault Code E44 .......................................... T5-6-13 Fault Code E45 .......................................... T5-6-14 Fault Code E50 .......................................... T5-6-16 Fault Code E51 .......................................... T5-6-18 Fault Code E52 .......................................... T5-6-20 Fault Code W47 ......................................... T5-6-24

C-5-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure INTRODUCTION Inspection procedures for troubleshooting are presented in an orderly fashion in this section so as to enable you locate the source of any problems that may arise. The troubleshooting section consists of 8 groups.

• Diagnosing procedure • Component layout • Troubleshooting A (Control System) Use this group when a controller failure indicator on the monitor panel is blinking. Example: Abnormal accelerator control.

• Troubleshooting B (Base Machine Operation System) Use this group when any trouble exists in the base machine operation system except the main controller and/or auto-stop controller system. Example: Hoist and/or lower function is inoperable.

• Troubleshooting C (Monitor System) Use this group when any trouble regarding monitors such as gauges and/or indicators occur. Example: Fuel gauge is inoperable.

• Troubleshooting D (IDU System) Use this group when auto-stop is performed although auto-stop is not required.

• Troubleshooting E (Engine Control System) Use this group when the ECU lamp blinks and displays the fault code. (ECU records the situation of faulty electrical signal system as the fault code according to the self-diagnosis function.)

• Electrical System Check Method Refer to this group when precautions and/or inspection data for the electrical system check is required.

T5-1-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure DIAGNOSING PROCEDURE These six basic steps are essential for efficient troubleshooting: 1. Study the system

• How is the machine configured • What types of devices are being used (Configuration, function and etc)

T107-07-01-001

2. Ask the operator Ask the operator how he/she perceives about the circumstances of the trouble to clarify the details, as the perception of troubles is different depending on the person.

• How is the machine being used? (Find out if the machine is being operated correctly)

• When was the trouble noticed, and what types of work the machine doing at that time?

• What are details of the trouble? Is the trouble getting worse, or did it appear suddenly for the first time? • Did the machine have any other troubles previously? If so, which parts were repaired before? T107-07-01-002

3. Inspect the machine Before starting the troubleshooting procedure, check the machine’s daily maintenance points, as shown in the operator’s manual. Also, check the electrical system, including the batteries, as troubles in the electrical system such as low battery voltage, loose connections and blown fuses will result in malfunction of the controllers, causing total operational failure of the machine. If troubleshooting is started without noticing a blown fuse, incorrect diagnosis may result along with a large amount of lost time. Be sure to check if any fuse has blown before starting troubleshooting. Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and such fine cracks are very hard to detect by visual inspection. Always check fuses using a tester.

T5-1-2

T107-07-01-003


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure 4. Operate the machine yourself Try to identify the trouble by operating the machine yourself. If the trouble cannot be confirmed, stop the engine and obtain further details of the malfunction from the operator. Also, check for any incomplete connections of the wire harnesses. 5. Perform troubleshooting CAUTION: Never

attempt

harnesses

or

to

disconnect

hydraulic

lines

while the engine is running. The machine

may

pressurized

malfunction

oil

may

T324-07-01-002

or

spout,

possibly resulting in personal injury. Be sure to stop the engine before disconnecting harnesses or hydraulic lines. First identify in which group the trouble is present. Then, perform the troubleshooting, system by system, in accordance with the classification of Troubleshooting A, B, C, D and E as described in this group. 6. Trace possible causes Before reaching a conclusion, check the most likely causes again. Try to identify the actual cause of the trouble. Based on your conclusion, make a plan for appropriate repairs to avoid consequent malfunctions.

T324-07-01-003

T5-1-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure TROUBLESHOOTING MONITOR Outputs the diagnostic results of analog inputs, digital inputs and digital outputs of MC2/A, MC2/B and the IDU. The diagnostic results are indicated on the display connected to the IDU.

Maintenance Key Switch

Indication 1. Turn ON the maintenance key switch, and press

T2CD-01-02-012

key on the ML window to indicate the maintenance menu.

T2CD-05-01-001

2. Select “Monitor” by pressing then press

or

key,

key to indicate the monitor

menu.

T2CD-05-01-002

3. Select the item you want to display in the monitor menu using press

or

key, then

key.

T2CD-05-01-003

T5-1-4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Analog Inputs Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor MC2/A AI1 THROT.GRIP THROT.FOOT DD_CTRL_SP THROL.M.P. SL_CTRL_SP THROT.3RD TR_RGT_PRS TR_LFT_PRS

x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx

V V V V V V V V

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

MC2/A AI2 DD HST PRS DD LWR PRS FD HST PRS FD LWR PRS RD HST PRS RD LWR PRS 3D HST PRS 3D LWR PRS

x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx

V V V V V V V V

MC2/A AI3 SL RGT PRS SL LFT PRS PILOT PRS FD BRK PRS RD BRK PRS 3D BRK PRS AN_IN22 DAN_IN23

1/6 x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V OFF

x. L N LO H N ** **

×Return

Item Item THROT.GRIP THROT.FOOT DD_CTRL_SP THROL.M.P. MC2/A_AI1 SL_CTRL_SP THROT.3RD TR_RGT_PRS TR_LFT_PRS DD HST PRS DD LWR PRS FD HST PRS FD LWR PRS MC2/A_AI2 RD HST PRS RD LWR PRS 3D HST PRS 3D LWR PRS SL RGT PRS SL LFT PRS PILOT PRS FD BRK PRS MC2/A_AI3 RD BRK PRS 3D BRK PRS AN_IN22 DAN_IN23

Signal name Accelerator grip signal Accelerator pedal signal Boom derricking speed dial No connection Slewing speed dial signal No connection Right travel remote control pressure Left travel remote control pressure Boom derricking drum hoisting remote control pressure Boom derricking drum lowering remote control pressure Front drum hoisting remote control pressure Front drum lowering remote control pressure Rear drum hoisting remote control pressure Rear drum lowering remote control pressure Third drum hoisting remote control pressure Third drum lowering remote control pressure Right slewing remote control pressure Left slewing remote control pressure Primary pilot pressure Front drum brake depressing pressure Rear drum brake depressing pressure No connection No connection No connection

Display x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V ON/OFF

Normal range 0.95 to1.05 0.05 to 0.70 0.64 to 0.93 0.64 to 0.93 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40

to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to

0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.72 0.72 0.72

* Option * Option

* Option * Option

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in theminimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-5


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Analog Inputs/Outputs Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor MC2/A_AI4

MC2/A_AI5

M_PMP_CUR

xxxx mA

MAIN_B

xx.xx V

INC._TQ._CUR

xxxx mA

24V_1

xx.xx V

RM_CUT_OFF

24V_2

xx.xx V

DM_CAP_CUR

xxxx mA

24V_3

xx.xx V

SL_PMP_CUR

xxxx mA

5V

x.xx V

FM_CUT_OFF

OFF

3M_CAP_CUR

xxxx mA

SL_ALAM_LP

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

2/6

MC2/A_AIO THROT.OUT

xx.xx V

ENG.TORQUE

xxxxx

×Return

Item Item

INC._TQ._CUR

Signal name Main pump displacement angle proportional solenoid valve: Control current Torque increase proportional solenoid valve: Control current

RM_CUT_OFF

No connection

DM_CAP_CUR

FM_CUT_OFF

Derricking motor absorption volume proportional solenoid valve: Control current Slewing pump displacement angle proportional solenoid valve: Control current No connection

M_PMP_CUR

MC2/A_AI4 SL_PMP_CUR

MC2/A_AI5

Display

Normal range

xxxx mA

680 to 720

xxxx mA

0 to 720

xxxx mA

630 to 670

xxxx mA

0 to 60

3M_CAP_CUR

No connection

SL_ALAM_LP

No connection

MAIN_B 24V_1

Main power supply voltage Sensor power supply voltage (for detection switches)

xx.xx V xx.xx V

24.00 to 32.00 21.60 to 26.40

24V_2

Throttle control switch power supply voltage

xx.xx V

21.60 to 26.40

24V_3

Emergency operation switch power supply voltage

xx.xx V

21.60 to 26.40

5V

Sensor power supply voltage

x.xx V

4.97 to 5.03

Accelerator output voltage Engine load

xx.xx V xxxxx

0.90 OFF

THROT.OUT MC2/A_AIO ENG.TORQUE

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-6


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Digital Inputs Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor

3/6 MC2/A DI1

MC2/A DI2

MC2/A DI3

3D_SEL.

OFF

GATE_LOCK

OFF

M_PMP_FIX.

OFF

AUX_SEL.

OFF

ATTACHMENT

*

S_PMP_FIX.

OFF

FREE_ALARM

OFF

DG_IN10

OFF

FREE_MD_SW OFF

DM_FIX_SW

OFF

OVERH2_SIG

ON

FD_FREE_SW

DG_IN4

OFF

ENG.START

OFF

RD_FREE_SW

OFF

DG_IN5

OFF

DG_IN13

ON

3D_FREE_SW

OFF

DG_IN6

OFF

THROT.FIX

OFF

SL_BRK_SW

OFF

D_R._IND.

OFF

THROT.PRE

OFF

DG_IN23

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

OFF

×Return

Item

MC2/A DI1

Item 3D_SEL. AUX_SEL. FREE_ALARM DM_FIX_SW DG_IN4 DG_IN5 DG_IN6 D_R._IND. GATE_LOCK

Signal name No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection Drum rotation sensing stop switch Gate lock lever position signal

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Normal range

ATTACHMENT

Attachment signal

CRANE/TOWER Tower operation: TOWER /ALLON/ALLOFF ALLON: Both contacts closed

DG_IN10 OVERH2_SIG ENG.START DG_IN13 THROT.FIX THROT.PRE M_PMP_FIX. S_PMP_FIX. FREE_MD_SW FD_FREE_SW RD_FREE_SW 3D_FREE_SW SL_BRK_SW DG_IN23

No connection Boom 2nd overhoist switch signal Engine start signal No connection Throttle lock switch Throttle preset switch No connection Slewing pump discharge rate lock switch Brake mode switch Front drum free mode switch Rear drum free mode switch No connection Slewing brake switch No connection

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

OFF OFF *Crane operation: CRANE,

ALLOFF: Both contacts open

MC2/A DI2

MC2/A DI3

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

* Option * Option * Option

OFF

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-7


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Digital Inputs

Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor MC2/A DI4

MC2/A DI5

4/6

MC2/A DPI

FD_BRK_SW

ON

DD_PLS

OFF

FD_PLS_CNT

RD_BRK_SW

ON

DG_IN33

OFF

RD_PLS_CNT

0

3D_BRK_SW

ON

ECU_ERR.

OFF

DD_PLS

0

SD_CAN.SW

OFF

ECU_WAR.

OFF

FD_PLS_A

OFF

DG_IN36

OFF

FD_PLS_B

OFF

DG_IN37

OFF

RD_PLS_A

OFF

RD_PLS_B

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

0

×Return

Item

MC2/A DI4

MC2/A DI5

MC2/A DPI

Item FD_BRK_SW RD_BRK_SW 3D_BRK_SW SD_CAN.SW FD_PLS_A FD_PLS_B RD_PLS_A RD_PLS_B DD_PLS DG_IN33 ECU_ERR. ECU_WAR. DG_IN36 DG_IN37 FD_PLS_CNT RD_PLS_CNT DD_PLS

Signal name Front drum brake pedal limit switch Rear drum brake pedal limit switch No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection ECU error signal ECU warning signal No connection No connection Front drum pulse counter Rear drum pulse counter Derricking drum pulse counter

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF -xxxx -xxxx 0/1

Normal range OFF OFF

* Option * Option

OFF OFF

0 (288/1rotation) 0 (288/1rotation) 0

0: when drum is stopped 0: when drum is stopped 0: when drum is stopped

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-8


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Digital Outputs Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor MC2/A DO1

5/6

MC2/A DO2

M_PMP_CUR

xxxx mA

FD_PLS_SOL

xxxx mA

INQ._TQ_CUR

xxxx mA

RD_PLS_SOL

xxxx mA

RM_CUT_OFF

ON

DD_PLS_SOL

xxxx mA

DM_CAP_CUR

xxxx mA

SL_BRK_REL

OFF

SL_PMP_CUR

xxxx mA

FM_CUT_OFF

ON

3M_CAP_CUR

xxxx mA

SL_ALAM_LP

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

×Return

Item Item M_PMP_CUR INQ._TQ_CUR

Torque increase proportional solenoid valve

Display xxxx mA xxxx mA

Normal range 680 to 720 0 to 720

RM_CUT_OFF

Rear motor cut-off

ON/OFF

ON

DM_CAP_CUR

xxxx mA

630 to 670

SL_PMP_CUR

Boom derricking motor absorption volume proportional solenoid valve: Control current Slewing pump displacement angle actual current

xxxx mA

0 to 60

FM_CUT_OFF

Front motor cut-off

ON/OFF

ON

xxxx mA

MC2/A DO1

MC2/A DO2

Signal name Main pump displacement angle actual current

3M_CAP_CUR

No connection

SL_ALAM_LP

Slewing alarm lamp relay

ON/OFF

OFF

FD_PLS_SOL RD_PLS_SOL

Front drum rotation indicator solenoid Rear drum rotation indicator solenoid

xxxx mA xxxx mA

0 0

0: when drum is stopped

DD_PLS_SOL

Derricking drum rotation indicator solenoid

xxxx mA

0

0: when drum is stopped

SL_BRK_REL

Slewing brake release solenoid valve

ON/OFF

OFF

0: when drum is stopped

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-9


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/A Digital Output/ECU Status Display

MC2/A Input/Output Monitor MC2/A DO3

MC2/A DO4

6/6

DD_LCK_REL

OFF

PILOT_LP

ON

MC2/A ECU ECU_ERROR0

FM_BRK_REL

OFF

FD_BRK_LP

OFF

ECU_ERROR1

----

RM_BRK_REL

OFF

RD_BRK_LP

OFF

ECU_ERROR2

----

3M_BRK_REL

OFF

INTLCK_LP

OFF

ECU_ERROR3

----

FD_BRK_REL

OFF

THROT.M.A

OFF

ECU_ERROR4

----

ENG._INTLCK

ON

THROT.M.NA

OFF

ECU_ERROR5

----

RD_BRK_REL

OFF

THROT.M.B

OFF

ECU_ERROR6

----

3D_BRK_REL

OFF

THROT.M.NB

OFF

ECU_ERROR7

----

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/---xxxx/----

Normal range OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

----

×Return

Item

MC2/A DO3

MC2/A DO4

MC2/A ECU

Item DD_LCK_REL FM_BRK_REL RM_BRK_REL 3M_BRK_REL FD_BRK_REL ENG._INTLCK RD_BRK_REL 3D_BRK_REL PILOT_LP FD_BRK_LP RD_BRK_LP INTLCK_LP THROT.M.A THROT.M.NA THROT.M.B THROT.M.NB ECU_ERROR0 ECU_ERROR1 ECU_ERROR2 ECU_ERROR3 ECU_ERROR4 ECU_ERROR5 ECU_ERROR6 ECU_ERROR7

Signal name Boom derricking drum unlocking solenoid valve Front motor brake release solenoid valve Rear motor brake release solenoid valve Third drum motor brake release solenoid valve Front drum brake release solenoid valve Engine start interlock Rear drum brake release solenoid valve No connection Pilot oil pressure indicator Front drum free mode lamp (red) Rear drum free mode lamp (red) Start interlock lamp No connection No connection No connection No connection ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number ECU error number

ON OFF OFF OFF

* Option * Option * Option

* Option * Option

-------------------------

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-10


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Analog Inputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor

1/6

MC2/B_AI1

MC2/B_AI2

MC2/B_AI3

FD_CTRL_SP x.xx V

TR_RGT_PRS x.xx V

3D_ROPE_ED ON

RD_CTRL_SP x.xx V

TR_LET_PRS x.xx V

DAN_IN17

OFF

DD_CTRL_SP x.xx V

MAST_ANGLE x.xx V

DAN_IN18

OFF

AN_IN3

x.xx V

AN_IN11

x.xx V

DAN_IN19

OFF

AN_IN4

x.xx V

AN_IN12

x.xx V

DAN_IN20

OFF

AN_IN5

x.xx V

AN_IN13

x.xx V

PENDANT

ALLOFF

DD_HST_PRS x.xx V

FD_ROPE_ED ON

DAN_IN22

OFF

DD_LWR_PRS x.xx V

RD_ROPE_ED ON

DAN_IN23

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

×Return

Item Item FD_CTRL_SP RD_CTRL_SP DD_CTRL_SP AN_IN3 MC2/B_AI1 AN_IN4 AN_IN5 DD_HST_PRS DD_LWR_PRS TR_RGT_PRS TR_LET_PRS MAST_ANGLE AN_IN11 AN_IN12 MC2/B_AI2 AN_IN13

Signal name Front dum speed control dial Rear drum speed control dial Derricking drum speed control dial No connection No connection No connection Derricking drum hoisting remote control pressure Derricking drum lowering remote control pressure Right travel remote control pressure Left travel remote control pressure Live mast angle sensor No connection No connection No connection

FD_ROPE_ED Front drum rope end (three-winding) detection RD_ROPE_ED Rear drum rope end (three-winding) detection 3D_ROPE_ED DAN_IN17 DAN_IN18 DAN_IN19 MC2/B_AI3 DAN_IN20

No connection No No No No

connection connection connection connection

PENDANT

Pendant rope tension detection switch

DAN_IN22 DAN_IN23

No connection No connection

Display x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V ON/OFF/ALLON/ ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Normal range 0.64 to 0.93 0.64 to 0.93 0.64 to 0.93

0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.98

to to to to to

0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 4.02

ON

*Option

ON

*Option

OFF

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Analog Inputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor MC2/B_AI4

2/6

MC2/B_AI5

DD_HST_CUR xxxx mA

MAIN_B

xx.xx V

DD_LWR_CUR xxxx mA

24V_1

xx.xx V

FD_HST_CUR xxxx mA

24V_2

xx.xx V

FD_LWR_CUR xxxx mA

24V_3

xx.xx V

RD_HST_CUR xxxx mA

5V

x.xx V

RD_LWR_CUR xxxx mA FM_CAP_CUR xxxx mA RM_CAP_CUR xxxx mA

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

×Return

Item

MC2/B_AI4

MC2/B_AI5

Item DD_HST_CUR DD_LWR_CUR FD_HST_CUR FD_LWR_CUR RD_HST_CUR RD_LWR_CUR

Signal name Derricking drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Derricking drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Front drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Front drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Rear drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Rear drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Front drum motor absorption volume proportional solenoid FM_CAP_CUR valve Rear drum motor absorption volume proportional solenoid RM_CAP_CUR valve MAIN_B Main power supply voltage 24V_1 Power supply for three-winding layer detector 24V_2 Power supply voltage for overhoist switch on machine 24V_3 Power supply voltage for overhoist switch with attachment 5V Sensor power supply voltage

Display xxxx mA xxxx mA xxxx mA xxxx mA xxxx mA xxxx mA

Normal range 739 to 779 739 to 779 702 to 742 702 to 742 702 to 742 702 to 742

xxxx

mA

649 to 689

xxxx

mA

649 to 689

xx.xx V xx.xx V xx.xx V xx.xx V x.xx V

24.00 to 32.00 21.60 to 26.40 21.60 to 26.40 21.60 to 26.40 4.97 to 5.03

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-12


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Digital Inputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor MC2/B_DI1

MC2/B_DI2

3/6

MC2/B_DI3

DD_REL_SW

OFF

DG_IN8

OFF

DG_IN16

OFF

FD_REL_SW

OFF

BM_OVERH

ON

JB_OVERH

ON

RD_REL_SW

OFF

DG_IN10

OFF

ATTACHMENT *

3D_REL_SW

OFF

TH_OVERH

ON

DG_IN19

OFF

REL_KEY_SW OFF

DG_IN12

OFF

HK_OVERH

ON

OH2_REL_SW OFF

BT_LOWER_L ON

JB_OVERH2

ON

DG_IN6

ON

DG_IN14

F.POST

ON

HM_FIX_SW

OFF

BT_OVERH2 ON

FLIP_CYL.

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

OFF

×Return

Item

MC2/B_DI1

MC2/B_DI2

MC2/B_DI3

Item DD_REL_SW FD_REL_SW RD_REL_SW 3D_REL_SW REL_KEY_SW OH2_REL_SW DG_IN6 HM_FIX_SW DG_IN8 BM_OVERH DG_IN10 TH_OVERH DG_IN12 BT_LOWER_L DG_IN14 BT_OVERH2 DG_IN16 JB_OVERH

Signal name Derricking drum auto stop release switch Front drum auto stop release switch Rear drum auto stop release switch Third drum auto stop release switch Auto stop release control key switch Boom 2nd over hoist stop release switch No connection Winch motor low speed locking switch No connection Boom over hoist switch No connection Tower over hoist switch No connection No connection No connection1 Boom second over hoist switch No connection Tower jib over hoist switch

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF

ATTACHMENT

Attachment detection signal

CRANE/TOWER/ ALLON/ALLOFF

DG_IN19 HK_OVERH JB_OVERH2 F.POST FLIP_CYL.

No connection Hook over hoist switch Jib second over hoist switch No connection Mast flip cylinder storing detection

ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF

Normal range OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

* Option

OFF ON ON

ON ON *Crane operation: CRANE, Tower operation: TOWER, Both signal Close: ALL_ON, Both signal Open: ALL_OFF

ON ON ON

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-13


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Digital Inputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor MC2/B_DI4

4/6

MC2/B_DI5

DG_IN24

OFF

RD_HST_STP ON

DG_IN25

OFF

RD_LWR_STP ON

SWL_OVERH ON

3D_HST_STP ON

JB_FOLD

3D_LWR_STP ON

OFF

DD_HST_STP ON

B/J_LOW_T.

ON

DD_LWR_STP ON

JB_OVER_T.

ON

FD_HST_STP ON FD_LWR_STP ON

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

×Return

Item

Signal name

Display

MC2/B_DI4

DG_IN24 DG_IN25 SWL_OVERH JB_FOLD DD_HST_STP DD_LWR_STP FD_HST_STP FD_LWR_STP

Item

No connection No connection No connection No connection Boom derricking drum hoisting stop signal Boom derricking drum lowering stop signal Front drum hoisting stop signal Front drum lowering stop signal

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF/ALLON/ALLOFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Normal range

ON ON ON ON

MC2/B_DI5

RD_HST_STP RD_LWR_STP 3D_HST_STP 3D_LWR_STP B/J_LOW_T. JB_OVER_T.

Rear drum hoisting stop signal Rear drum lowering stop signal Third drum hoisting stop signal Third drum lowering stop signal Boom/jib loading stop signal Tower breakage prevention signal

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON ON ON ON ON ON

* Option * Option

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-14


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Digital Outputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor MC2/B_DO1 DD_HST_CUR xxx mA

MC2/B_DO2 FLIP_EXT. OFF

DD_LWR_CUR xxx mA

FLIP_RET.

FD_HST_CUR xxx mA

PWM_OUT2

FD_LWR_CUR xxx mA

OVERH2_SOL ON

5/6

OFF

RD_HST_CUR xxx mA RD_LWR_CUR xxx mA FM_CAP_CUR xxx mA RM_CAP_CUR xxx mA

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

×Return

Item

Item

Signal name

MC2/B_DO1

DD_HST_CUR DD_LWR_CUR FD_HST_CUR FD_LWR_CUR RD_HST_CUR RD_LWR_CUR FM_CAP_CUR RM_CAP_CUR

Boom dericking drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Boom derricking drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Front drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Front drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Rear drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Rear drum lowering proportional solenoid valve Front drum motor absorption volume proportional solenoid valve Rear drum motor absorption volume proportional solenoid valve

xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Display

MC2/B_DO2

FLIP_EXT. FLIP_RET. PWM_OUT2 OVERH2_SOL

Mast flip cylinder extending solenoid valve Mast flip cylinder retracting solenoid valve No connection Boom second over hoist solenoid valve

ON/OFF ON/OFF

OFF OFF

ON/OFF

ON

mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA

Normal range 739 to 779 739 to 779 702 to 742 702 to 742 702 to 742 702 to 742 649 to 689 649 to 689

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-15


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure MC2/B Digital Outputs Display

MC2/B Input/Output Monitor MC2/B_DO3 SOL_OUT0 SHORT SOL_OUT1

OFF

ALARM_1

OFF

SOL_OUT2

OFF

ALARM_2

OFF

SOL_OUT3

OFF

ALARM_3

OFF

SOL_OUT4

OFF

ALARM_4

OFF

SOL_OUT5

OFF

ALARM_5

OFF

3D_HST_SOL ON

ALARM_6

OFF

3D_LWR_SOL ON

ALARM_7

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

6/6

MC2/B_DO4 ALARM_0 OFF

×Return

Item

Item

MC2/B_DO1

MC2/B_DO2

Signal name

Display

SOL_OUT0 SOL_OUT1 SOL_OUT2 SOL_OUT3 SOL_OUT4 SOL_OUT5 3D_HST_SOL 3D_LWR_SOL

No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection Third drum hoisting stop Thlrd drum lowering stop

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

ALARM_0 ALARM_1 ALARM_2 ALARM_3 ALARM_4 ALARM_5 ALARM_6

No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Normal range

ON ON

* Option * Option

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-16


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure IDU Analog Inputs Display

IDU Input/Output Monitor IDU_AI2

1/3

IDU_AI1 AN_IN120

x.xx V

AN_IN0

x.xx V

AN_IN8

x.xx V

AN_IN121

x.xx V

AN_IN1

x.xx V

AN_IN9

x.xx V

AN_IN122

x.xx V

AN_IN2

x.xx V

AN_IN10

x.xx V

BM_LOAD

x.xx V

AN_IN3

x.xx V

AN_IN11

x.xx V

JB_LOAD

x.xx V

HYD_THM

x.xx V

MAIN_B

xx.xx V

JB_ANGLE

x.xx V

AN_IN5

x.xx V

24V

xx.xx V

JB_ANGLE2

x.xx V

AN_IN6

x.xx V

5V

x.xx V

BM_ANGLE

x.xx V

AN_IN7

x.xx V

10V

xx.xx V

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

IDU_AI3

×Return

Item

IDU_AI1

IDU_AI2

IDU_AI3

Item AN_IN120 AN_IN121 AN_IN122 BM_LOAD JB_LOAD JB_ANGLE JB_ANGLE2 BM_ANGLE AN_IN0 AN_IN1 AN_IN2 AN_IN3 HYD_THM AN_IN5 AN_IN6 AN_IN7 AN_IN8 AN_IN9 AN_IN10 AN_IN11 MAIN_B 24V 5V 10V

Signal name No connection No connection No connection Boom derricking rope tension Jib derricking rope tension Tower jib angle (when working position) Tower jib angle (when assembling position) Boom angle No connection No connection No connection No connection Hydraulic oil temperature sensor No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection Main power supply voltage Power supply for switch Sensor power supply Load cell power supply

Display x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V x.xx V xx.xx V xx.xx V x.xx V xx.xx V

Normal range

0.46 to 4.58 0.46 to 4.58 0.64 to 4.82 0.64 to 4.82 0.64 to 4.82

0.24 to 4.34

24.00 to 32.00 21.60 to 26.40 4.97 to 5.03 9.98 to 10.02

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-17


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure IDU Digital Inputs Display

IDU Input/Output Monitor IDU_DI1 CLAMSHELL OFF

IDU_DI2 DEC_CH2

DRAGLINE

OFF

DEC_CH3

DG_IN2

ON

DEC_CH4

JB_CATCH

OFF

BM_OH_LINE ON

REAR

OFF

ADD_CH1

2/3

OFF

IDU_DI3 OVERHEAT

OFF

OFF

PLS_IN1

OFF

OFF

PLS_IN2

OFF

PLS_IN3

OFF

JB_OH_LINE ON

PLS_IN4

OFF

OFF

JB_OH2_L.

PLS_IN5

OFF

ADD_CH2

OFF

MAINTE.KEY ON

PLS_IN6

OFF

DEC_CH1

OFF

PLS_IN7

OFF

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

OFF

×Return

Item

IDU_DI1

IDU_DI2

IDU_DI3

Item CLAMSHELL DRAGLINE DG_IN2 JB_CATCH REAR ADD_CH1 ADD_CH2 DEC_CH1 DEC_CH2 DEC_CH3 DEC_CH4 BM_OH_LINE JB_OH_LINE JB_OH2_L. MAINTE.KEY OVERHEAT PLS_IN1 PLS_IN2 PLS_IN3 PLS_IN4 PLS_IN5 PLS_IN6 PLS_IN7

Signal name Clamshell mode switch, No connection Dragline mode switch, No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection Boom hook wiring detection (main hook) Jib hook wiring detection (sub hook) No connection Maintenance key switch Thermo switch No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF/ALLOFF/ALLON ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Normal range OFF OFF

ON ON ON OFF

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-18


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure IDU Digital Outputs Display

IDU Input/Output Monitor IDU_DO1 DD_HST_STP ON

IDU_DO2 B/J_LOW_T.

ON

IDU_DO3 DD_HST_SD% xxx %

DD_LWR_STP ON

JB_OVER_T.

ON

DD_LWR_SD% xxx %

FD_HST_STP ON

GREEN_LMP ON

FD_HST_SD% xxx %

FD_LWR_STP ON

YELLOW_LMP OFF

FD_LWR_SD% xxx %

RD_HST_STP ON

RED_LMP

OFF

RD_HST_SD% xxx %

RD_LWR_STP ON

OIL_CL.FAN

ON

RD_LWR_SD% xxx %

3D_HST_STP ON

LAMP_CHK

OFF

3D_HST_SD% xxx %

3D_LWR_STP ON

BUZZER

OFF

3D_LWR_SD% xxx %

Ĺ Ļ Page Selection

3/3

×Return

Item

IDU_DO1

IDU_DO2

IDU_DO3

Item DD_HST_STP DD_LWR_STP FD_HST_STP FD_LWR_STP RD_HST_STP RD_LWR_STP 3D_HST_STP 3D_LWR_STP B/J_LOW_T. JB_OVER_T. GREEN_LMP YELLOW_LMP RED_LMP OIL_CL.FAN LAMP_CHK BUZZER DD_HST_SD% DD_LWR_SD% FD_HST_SD% FD_LWR_SD% RD_HST_SD% RD_LWR_SD% 3D_HST_SD% 3D_LWR_SD%

Signal name Boom derricking drum hoisting stop Boom derricking drum lowering stop Front drum hoisting stop Front drum lowering stop Rear drum hoisting stop Rear drum lowering stop Third drum hoisting stop Thlrd drum lowering stop Boom/jib shouldering prevention Tower breakage prevention External moment limiter indicator: green External moment limiter indicator: yellow External moment limiter indicator: red Hydraulic oil cooling fan operating relay Lamp check relay Buzzer Boom derricking drum hoisting slowdown ratio Boom derricking drum lowering slowdown ratio Front drum hoisting slowdown ratio Front drum lowering slowdown ratio Rear drum hoisting slowdown ratio Rear drum lowering slowdown ratio Third drum hoisting slowdown ratio Third drum lowering slowdown ratio

Display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF xxx % xxx % xxx % xxx % xxx % xxx % xxx % xxx %

Normal range ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-1-19


TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure (Blank)

T5-1-20


TROUBLESHOOTING / Component Layout MAIN COMPONENTS Refer to T1-2 Operational Principles.

Crane Upper

7 8

6 5 4 3 2 1

9 10 11

20

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

123-

Gate Lock Solenoid Valve Sump Tank Pilot Filter

9 - Fuel Tank 10 - Rear Control Valve 11 - 3-Spool Solenoid Valve (under Rear Drum) (Counterweight, Flip)

17 - Hydraulic Oil Cooler 18 - Hydraulic Oil Cooler Solenoid Valve 19 - Rotating Joint

4-

Drain Filter

12 - 2-Spool Control Valve (under Rear Drum) (Swing, Counterweight, Flip)

20 - Foot Pin Removal/Installation Mechanism

56-

Flip Cylinder Pump Assembly

13 - Front Control Valve 14 - 4-Spool Solenoid Valve (under Rear Drum) (Foot Cylinder, Lower Hydraulic Source)

7-

Reserve Tank

8-

Radiator and Intercooler

15 - Accumulator and Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor 16 - 5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit

T5-2-1


GENERAL / Component Layout

T5-2-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A TROUBLESHOOTING A PROCEDURES x Use troubleshooting A when error is indicated as a result that IDU diagnoses MC2/A and MC2/B. x How to read troubleshooting flowchart YES(OK)

Perform inspection or measurement in box (1), and select YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) according to (1), and go to the next box (2) or (3).

(1) NO(NOT OK)

½ Key switch: ON

(2)

(3)

Under the box is inspection or measuring method or references. Be careful that if inspection or measuring method is incorrect, finding the cause of failure becomes difficult or the equipment may be damaged.

The bold line box shows a cause of failure. The bold line tells a location where possible cause of failure is present.

NOTE: All connector drawings show the connecting side of the harness end connector. (as seen from the arrows)

Harness

T6L4-05-03-001

T5-3-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF MC2/A OR MC2/B BATTERY AND SENSOR SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY Abnormality

x Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supplies of MC2/A and MC2/B are all normal. MC2/A, MC2/B Item MAIN_B 24V_1 24V_2

Description

Normal range (under the following conditions)

Countermeasure for abnormality

Main power supply voltage

xx.xx V

24.00 to 32.00

Harness check

Sensor power supply (for each detection switch)

xx.xx V

21.60 to 26.40

Harness check

Analog sensor power supply

x.xx V

4.97 to5.03

Harness check

Signal name

24V_3 5V

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Battery

Battery Relay 264

Key Switch

206

15A

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

E13

D5 D16 D2 D3 D4

Y13

PWM_GND E26 D12

MAIN_GND

X5

SENSOR_5V

X16

SENSOR_5V

X2

SENSOR_24V_1 SENSOR_24V_2

SENSOR_24V_3

D21

KEY_SW Y12

SOL_VB

PWM_VB

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW E12

D12

MC2/B X1

CAN

D10

SOL_VB

PWM_VB

PWM_GND Y26

MAIN_GND

SENSOR_5V IDU

SENSOR_5V SENSOR_24V_1

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

X21

X10

J1

J2

T25N-05-03-001

T5-3-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Battery System MC2/A side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for MCA/5A.) x Check the wiring connections first. In case where the fuse has blown

YES

Short circuit between D1 and machine

Disconnect connector MCA-1 of MC2/A. Check for continuity between terminal D1 of harness end and machine.

Faulty MC2/A NO

· Key switch: OFF

In case where the fuse has not blown YES

Disconnect connector MCA-1 of MC2/A. Check if voltage between terminal D1 of harness end and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/A YES

Disconnect harness from terminal (+) of battery and connect it to machine. NO Check for continuity between D1 of harness end of MCA-1 and machine.

· Key switch: OFF

Faulty battery

Broken harness between battery and ground, or NO faulty ground Broken harness between MC2/A and battery

NO

· Key switch: OFF

Connector

Disconnect harness from YES terminal (-) of battery. Check for continuity between terminal (-) and machine.

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

D1

X1

MC2/B side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for MCB/5A.) x Check the wiring connections first. In case where the fuse has blown

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-1 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminal X1 of harness end and machine.

Short circuit between X1 and machine Faulty MC2/B

NO

· Key switch: OFF

In case where the fuse has not blown Faulty MC2/B

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-1 of MC2/B. Check if voltage between terminal X1 of harness end and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Disconnect harness from terminal (+) of battery and connect it to machine. NO Check for continuity between X1 of harness end of MCB-1 and machine. · Key switch: OFF

Disconnect harness from terminal (-) of battery. YES Check for continuity between terminal (-) and machine. · Key switch: OFF NO

T5-3-4

YES Faulty battery

Broken harness between battery and ground, or NO faulty ground Broken harness between MC2/B and battery


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Key Switch MC2/A side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for the controller main power supply 5A.) x Check the wiring connections. · In cases the fuse has blown

YES

Short circuit between line M18 and machine

Disconnect connector MCA-1 of MC2/A. Check for continuity between terminal M18 of harness end and machine.

Faulty MC2/A NO

· Key switch: OFF · In cases the fuse has not blown YES

Disconnect connector MCA-1. Check if voltage between terminal M18 of harness end and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/A YES Faulty key switch YES Check if voltage between

key switch terminal B and machine is 24V.

Connect terminal ACC of key switch to machine. Check for continuity between NO M18 of harness end of MCA-1 and machine. · Key switch: OFF

Broken harness between NO key switch and battery

· Key switch: ON

Broken harness between MC2/A and key switch

NO

MC2/A Connector MCA-1

Connector Monitor Panel Connector 6P (Harness End) Key Switch Terminal B

(Harness End)

M18

201 204

MC2/B Connector MCB-1

Key Switch Terminal ACC

(Harness End) M18

MC2/B side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for the controller main power supply 5A.) x Check the wiring connections. · In cases the fuse has blown

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-1 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminal M18 of harness end and machine.

Short circuit between line M18 and machine Faulty MC2/B

NO

· Key switch: OFF · In cases the fuse has not blown YES

Disconnect connector MCB-1. Check if voltage between terminal M18 of harness end and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/B YES Faulty key switch

YES Check if voltage between key switch terminal B and Connect terminal ACC of key machine is 24V. switch to machine. · Key switch: ON Check for continuity between NO M18 of harness end of MCB-1 and machine.

· Key switch: OFF

NO

T5-3-5

Broken harness between NO key switch and battery

Broken harness between MC2/B and key switch


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Solenoid and PWM Power Supply MC2/A side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for SOL (MCA) 15A, PWM (MCA) 15A.) x Check the wiring connections. In case where the fude has blown YES

Short circuit between either lines E12 or E13 and machine

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. Check for continuity between terminal E12 (E13) of harness end connector and machine.

Faulty MC2/A

· Key switch: OFF

NO

In case where the fuse has not blown YES

Disconnect connector MCA-6. Check if voltage between terminal E12 (E13) of harness end connector and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/A

YES

Connect harness 206 to battery relay, and connect (-) YES terminal of battery relay to machine. Check if voltage between Disconnect harness 206 E12 (E13) of harness end of of battery relay and MCA-6 and machine is 24V. connect it to machine. · Key switch: ON Check for continuity NO between E12 (E13) of harness end of MCA-6 and machine.

Disconnect harness 264 of battery relay and connect it to machine. NO Check for continuity between key switch terminal ACC and machine.

A

· Key switch: OFF Broken harness E12 (E13) between battery relay and MCA-6

· Key switch: OFF NO

A

Broken harness between battery relay and ground, or faulty harness

Disconnect harness from (+) terminal of battery and connect it YES to machine. Check for continuity between 60sq red wire of primary terminal of battery relay and machine.

Broken harness between battery relay

NO and battery

Broken harness between key switch and battery relay

NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End) E12 E13

T5-3-6

YES Faulty battery relay


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A

MC2/B side

x Check the fuse. (Refer to the fuse list for SOL (MCB) 15A, PWM (MCB) 15A.) x Check the wiring connections. In case where the fuse has blown Short circuit between either lines Y12 or Y13 and machine

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-6 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminal Y12 (Y13) of harness end connector and machine.

Faulty MC2/B

· Key switch: OFF

NO

In case where the fuse has not blown YES

Disconnect connector MCB-6 of MC2/B. Check if voltage between terminal Y12 (Y13) of harness end connector and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/B

Connect harness 206 to battery relay, and connect (-) YES terminal of battery relay to machine. Check if voltage between Y12 (Y13) of harness end of Disconnect harness 206 MCB-6 and machine is 24V. of battery relay and connect it to machine. · Key switch: ON Check for continuity NO between Y12 (Y13) of harness end of MCB-6 and machine.

YES

Disconnect harness 264 of battery relay and connect it to machine. NO Check for continuity between key switch terminal ACC and machine.

A

· Key switch: OFF Broken harness Y12 (Y13) between battery relay and MCB-6

· Key switch: OFF NO

A

Broken harness between battery relay and ground, or faulty harness

Disconnect harness from (+) terminal of battery and connect it YES to machine. Check for continuity between 60sq red wire of primary terminal of battery relay and machine.

Broken harness between battery relay NO and battery Broken harness between key switch and battery relay

NO

Connector MC2/B Connector MCB-6 (Harness End)

Y12 Y13

T5-3-7

YES Faulty battery relay


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (5V system 1) of MC2/A YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect sensor connector. Check if voltage between terminal R (D5) of harness end connector and machine is 5V.

YES

· Key switch: ON

Check if voltage of terminal D5 of connector MCA-1 of MC2/A is 5V.

NO

· Key switch: ON · Connector MCA-1 is plugged into controller.

Sensor

Harness end connector

Accelerator grip

D5 B

W

R

Accelerator pedal

D5 W

R B

Swing speed control dial Left Stand Panel Connector

D5 R

Boom Derricking R

B

Speed Control Dial

W Speed Control Dial Connector

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End) D5

T5-3-8

Broken harness between MC2/A and sensor Faulty MC2/A

NO


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (5V system 2) on of MC2/A

YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect sensor connector. Check if voltage between terminal R (D16) of harness end connector and machine is 5V. · Key switch: ON

YES

Broken harness between MC2/A and sensor

Check if voltage of terminal D16 of connector MCA-1 of MC2/A is 5V.

NO

Faulty MC2/A

· Key switch: ON · Connector MCA-1 is plugged into controller.

NO

Connector Sensor

Harness end connector

Boom derricking drum hoisting remote control pressure Boom derricking drum lowering remote control pressure Front drum hoisting remote control pressure Front drum lowering remote control pressure Rear drum hoisting remote control pressure Rear drum lowering remote control pressure Third drum hoisting remote control pressure Third drum lowering remote control pressure Right swing remote control pressure

R

W

B

R

B

Left swing remote control pressure Primary pilot pressure Front drum brake depressing pressure Rear drum brake depressing pressure

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

D16

T5-3-9

W


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (5V system 1) on of MC2/B YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect sensor connector. Check if voltage between terminal R (X5) of harness end connector and machine is 5V.

YES

͊ Key switch: ON NO

Check if voltage of X5 of connector MCB-1 of MC2/B is 5V. ͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCB-1 is plugged into controller.

Broken harness between MC2/B and sensor Faulty MC2/B

NO

Connector Sensor

Harness end connector

Front drum speed control dial

X5

R

B

Rear drum speed control dial

Left Stand Panel Connector

W

Speed Control Dial Connector

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End) X5

Check of Sensor Power Supply (5V system 2) of MC2/B YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect sensor connector. Check if voltage between terminal R (X16) of harness end connector and machine is 5V.

YES Broken harness between

MC2/B and sensor

͊ Key switch: ON NO

Check if voltage of X16 of connector MCB-1 is 5V. ͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCB-1 is plugged into controller.

Faulty MC2/B NO

Connector Sensor

Harness end connector

Right travel remote control pressure R

W

B

Left travel remote control pressure MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

X16

T5-3-10


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 1) of MC2/A Brake mode key switch

YES

Faulty switch

Disconnect connector 16P of left control panel. Check if voltage between terminal D2 of harness end connector and machine is 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON

YES Broken harness between

Check if voltage of D2 of NO connector MCA-1 is 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCA-1 is plugged

MC2/A and switch Faulty MC2/A NO

into controller.

Front / rear drum free mode switches Front / rear pedal limit switches Disconnect connector of switch. Check if voltage between terminal D2 of harness end connector and machine is 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

Left control panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

D2 D2

Sensor

Harness end connector

Front drum free mode switch D2

Rear drum free mode switch Front drum pedal limit switch

D2

Rear drum pedal limit switch

T5-3-11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 2) of MC2/A Accelerator control switch

YES

Faulty accelerator control switch

Disconnect connector 12P of right control panel. Check if voltage between terminal D3 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES

Check if voltage of D3 of connector MCA-1 is 24V.

͊ Key switch: ON NO

͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCA-1 is plugged

Broken harness between MC2/A and switch Faulty MC2/A

NO

into controller.

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

Right control panel Connector 12P (Harness End)

D3

D3

Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 3) of MC2/A Emergency operation switch (insaide of rear stand) YES

Faulty emergency operation switch

Disconnect connector of emergency operation switch. Check if voltage between terminal D4 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES

Broken harness between MC2/A and switch

Check if voltage of D4 of

͊ Key switch: ON

NO connector MCA -1 is 24V.

͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCA-1 is plugged

Faulty MC2/A NO

into controller.

Connector emergency operation switch Connector of (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

D4 D4

T5-3-12


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 1) of MC2/B Front, Rear drum rope end detection switch Pendant angle detection switch YES

Faulty detection switch

Disconnect connector of detection switch. Check if voltage between terminal X2 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES

Broken harness between MC2/B and detection

Check if voltage of X2 of connector

͊ Key switch: ON

NO MCB-1 of MC2/B is 24V.

͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCB-1 is plugged into controller.

Connector Sensor Pendant Angle Detection Switch

Connector (Harness End) X2

Front Drum Rope End Detection Switch X2

Rear Drum Rope End Detection Switch

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

X2

T5-3-13

Faulty MC2/B NO


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 2) of MC2/B Boom / Tower overhoist switch Boom lowering limit switch YES

Faulty switch

Disconnect connector of switch. Check if voltage between terminal X3 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES Broken harness between

MC2/B and switch Check if voltage of X3 of NO connector MCB-1 is 24V.

͊ Key switch: ON

͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Connector MCB-1 is plugged into controller.

Boom / Tower second overhoist switch Disconnect connector of second overhoist switch. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON

Connector Sensor

Connector (Harness End)

Boom overhoist switch

X3

Tower overhoist switch

X3

X3

Boom lowering limit switch

Boom / tower second overhoist switch

Terminal (1) 㽲

㽶 㽵

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

X3

T5-3-14

Faulty MC2/B NO


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 3) of MC2/B Jib overhoist limit switch Jib second overhoist limit switch Jib back stop alignment switch

YES

Faulty limit switch

Disconnect connector of limit switch. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES

Check if voltage of terminal X4

· Key switch: ON

NO of connector MCB-1 is 24V.

Faulty MC2/B

· Key switch: ON · Connector MCB-1 is plugged

Hook overhoist switch Disconnect connector of limit switch. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Broken harness between MC2/B and limit switch

NO

into controller

· Key switch: ON

Live mast flip cylinder limit switch Disconnect connector of limit switch. Check if voltage between terminal X4 of harness end connector and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Connector Sensor

Connector (Harness End)

Jib overhoist switch 㽳

Jib second overhoist switch

Jib back stop alignment Switch

㽲 㽴

Hook overhoist switch 㽳 㽲 㽶 㽵 㽴 㽸 㽷

Junction box receptacle

Limit switch harness (Harness End)

Live mast flip cylinder limit switch

(1) (3)

R23 X4 B25

(2) (4)

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End) X4

T5-3-15


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of CAN communication between MC2/A and IDU

x x

Check the wiring connections. Check the continuity between terminal D10 of connector MCA-1 of MC2/A and terminal J1 of connector IDU-4 of IDU. x Check the continuity between terminal D21 of connector MCA-1 of MC2/A and terminal J2 of connector IDU-4 of IDU.

Check of CAN communication between MC2/B and IDU

x x

Check the wiring connections. Check the continuity between terminal X10 of connector MCB-1 of MC2/B and terminal J1 of connector IDU-4 of IDU. x Check the continuity between terminal X21 of connector MCB-1 of MC2/B and terminal J2 of connector IDU-4 of IDU.

Connector IDU Connector IDU-4 (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

D10

J1

J2

D21

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

X10 X21

T5-3-16


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Abnormality • Using the power supply monitor, check if the battery and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor signal. Item

Signal name

Description

THROT._GRIP

Accelerator grip signal

x.xx V

Normal range (under the following conditions) 0.95 to 1.05

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check Sensor check Harness check Sensor check

THROT._FOOT

Accelerator pedal signal

x.xx V

0.50 to 0.70

THROT._3RD

Third accelerator signal

x.xx V

0.50 to 0.70

Harness check Sensor check

THROT._FIX

Throttle holding switch

ON/OFF

OFF

Harness check Sensor check

THROT._PRE

Throttle preset switch

ON/OFF

OFF

Harness check Sensor check

THROT._OUT

Accelerator output voltage

x.xx V

0.90

Harness check MC2/A hard check Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

+24V

MAIN_GND E26

PWM_GND

D5

SENSOR_5V

D14

SENS_GND_5

Accelerator 㨻㩂㩈㩣 Grip 㩂㩨㩢㨹㩖㩩

B5

AN_IN0

Accelerator 㨻㩂㩈㩣 Pedal㩗㩩㩊㩨㩣

B13

AN_IN1

D3

SENSOR_24V_2

Accelerator 䍏䍖䍜䍷࿕ቯ Holding

A6

DG_IN14

Accelerator 䍏䍖䍜䍷䍪䍽䍶䍜䍍䍢 Preset

A19

DG_IN15

DA_OUT

B6

DA_GND

B14

T5-3-17

ECU


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Accelerator Sensor Grip / Pedal

x x

Check the wiring connections first. If voltage from the accelerator sensor is 4.9 V or more, the cause of trouble may be failure of sensor, or broken harness between terminal D14 of MC2/A and D14 (ground) of accelerator sensor connector. x If voltage from the accelerator sensor is 0.1V or less, the cause of the trouble may be a broken harness between sensor and MC2/A, or a short circuit between line D5 (SENSOR_5V) and ground line.

Normal range of accelerator sensor output voltage Grip sensor

min. max.

0.95 to 1.05 v 2.4 to 3.1 v

Pedal sensor

min. max.

0.5 to 0.7 v 4.3 to 4.5 v

Connect disconnected YES Faulty MC2/A connector. YES Check if voltage between SIG of MCA-3 Disconnect connector Faulty sensor and machine is in the MCA-3 of MC2/A. NO normal range. YES Check for continuity between terminal SIG ½ Insert a test bar into the rear of harness end face of the connector. connector of sensor ½ Turn key switch ON. Broken harness and B5 of MCA-3. SIG between Check if voltage NO MC2/A and sensor Key switch: OFF YES between D5 and D14 of harness YES Faulty MC2/A end connector of Check for continuity sensor is 5±0.5V. YES between D14 of harness end Key switch: ON. Disconnect connector Broken harness connector of sensor Check if voltage of accelerator sensor. D14 between and machine. between D5 of harness Check for continuity NO MC2/A and sensor Key switch: OFF between terminals D5 NO end connector of sensor and machine is 5±0.5V. and D14 of sensor Broken harness D5 side connector. between MC2/A Keep key switch ON. NO and sensor Key switch: OFF Faulty sensor NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

Accelerator Grip Sensor (Harness End)

+24v D14 B5

D5

D5 D14

SIG

GND

MC2/A Connector MCA-3 (Harness End)

Accelerator Pedal Sensor (Harness End)

SIG (Grip)

SIG B13

D5

SIG (Pedal) B5

D14

B13

T5-3-18


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Accelerator Holding Switch

x

Check the wiring connections first.

Accelerator Holding Switch: Check for continuity between terminal A6 holding side

YES Disconnect

connector MCA-4 of MC2/A.

of harness end connector and A6 of connector 12P. ͊ Key switch: OFF

Check for continuity Disconnect connector ͊ Key switch: OFF between terminal 12P of right stand panel. A19 of harness end YES Check if voltage Accelerator connector and A19 between D3 of harness Holding Switch: of connector 12P. end connector and Check if voltage preset side ͊ Key switch: OFF machine is 24V. between terminal D3 of connector ͊ Key switch: ON MCA-1 of MC2/A and machine is NO 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON ͊ Insert test bar into rear NO

YES Faulty switch

Broken A6 harness between switch and NO MC2/A YES Faulty switch

Broken A19 harness between switch and NO MC2/A Broken D3 harness between switch and MC2/A Faulty MC2/A

face of connector.

Connector Right Stand Control Panel Connector 12P (Harness End) A19 D3

A6

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

A6 A19

D3

T5-3-19


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Abnormality

x x x

Using the power supply monitor, check if the battery and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor signals. Item

Signal name

Description

Normal range (under the following Countermeasure for abnormality conditions) 0.40 to 0.84 Harness check Sensor check

Remote Control Pressure Boom derricking drum hoisting Boom derricking drum lowering Front drum hoisting Front drum lowering Rear drum hoisting Rear drum lowering Third drum hoisting Third drum lowering Primary pilot pressure

x.xx V

DD_HST_PRS DD_LWR_PRS FD_HST_PRS FD_LWR_PRS RD_HST_PRS RD_LWR_PRS 3D_HST_PRS 3D_LWR_PRS PILOT_PRS

x.xx V

0.40 to 0.72

FD_BRK_PRS RD_BRK_PRS FREE_MD_SW

Front brake depressing pressure Rear brake depressing pressure Brake mode key switch

x.xx V

0.40 to 0.72

ON/OFF

OFF

FD_FREE_SW RD_FREE_SW FD_BRK_SW RD_BRK_SW FD_BREK_REL RD_BRK_REL

Front drum mode switch Rear drum mode switch Front brake pedal limit switch Rear brake pedal limit switch Front drum brake release solenoid valve Rear drum brake release solenoid valve Solenoid valve Boom derricking drum lock release Front motor brake release Rear motor brake release Third drum motor brake release Front free mode lamp Rear free mode lamp

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

DD_LCK_REL FM_BRK_REL RM_BRK_REL 3M_BRK_REL FD_BRK_LP RD_BRK_LP

x

Harness check Sensor check Harness check Sensor check Harness check Switch check Harness check Switch check Harness check Solenoid valve check Harness check Solenoid valve check

ON/OFF

For checks of the harness between MC2/A and IDU, refer to "Check of CAN communication between MC2/A and IDU" in the chapter on "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply".

T5-3-20

OFF

Harness check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Brake Control System

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

SOL_OUT4

E6

Front Drum Brake Release 㩖㩥㩧㩎㩎㩨㩡㩛㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁 Solenoid ⸃㒰㔚⏛ᑯ

SOL_OUT6

E7

Rear Drum Brake Release Solenoid

E4

Derricking drum lock release ⿠ફ㩎㩨㩡㩛㩥㨹㩂 Solenoid ⸃㒰㔚⏛ᑯ

+24V

MAIN_GN E26

PWM_GND

D16

SENSOR_5V SOL_OUT0 SENS_GND_5

D15

Pressure sensor Boom derricking hoisting ⿠ફᏎ਄ remote control pressure 㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Boom derricking lowering ⿠ફᏎਅ remote control pressure

㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Front hoisting remote control 㩖㩥㩧㩎Ꮞ਄ pressure 㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Front lowering remote control 㩖㩥㩧㩎Ꮞਅ pressure 㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Rear hoisting remote control 㩢㩞Ꮞ਄ pressure 㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Rear lowering remote control 㩢㩞Ꮞਅ pressure 㩢㩝㩄㩧࿶ Third drum hoisting remote 㩆㩨㩖㩨⿠ફᏎ control pressure ਄ Third drum lowering remote 㩆㩨㩖㩨⿠ફᏎ control pressure ਅ Primary pilot pressure 㩔㩩㨼㩥㨹㩎 㧝ᰴ࿶ Front brake pedal㩖㩥㩧㩎㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁 depressing detection 〯ㄟᬌ಴ Rear brake pedal 㩢㩞㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁 depressing detection 〯ㄟᬌ಴

224

Front auto brake mode indicator

B1

AN_IN8

B9

AN_IN9

C6

AN_IN10

C12

AN_IN11

C5

AN_IN12

C11

AN_IN13

C4

AN_IN14

C10

AN_IN15

C2

AN_IN18

SOL_OUT1

E18

SOL OUT2

E5

SOL OUT3

E19

㩢㩞㩝㨺㩊㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁 Rear motor brake release Solenoid ⸃㒰㔚⏛ᑯ Third drum motor brake 㩆㩨㩖㩨⿠ફ㩝㨺㩊㩖㩨 release Solenoid 㩤㨺㩁⸃㒰㔚⏛ᑯ

224

OC_OUT1

E22

Front drum free mode indicator RED

OC_OUT2

E9

Rear drum free mode indicator RED

C8

AN_IN19

C1

AN_IN20

D2

SENSOR_24V_1

A8

DG_IN18

Brake mode key switchSW 㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁㩝㨺㩎㩨ಾᦧ߃㩁㨺 293

Green A21

DG_IN19

Front mode switch SW 㩖㩥㩧㩎㩝㨺㩎㩨ಾᦧ߃ Rear auto brake mode indicator

Front motor brake release 㩖㩥㩧㩎㩝㨺㩊㩖㩨㩤㨺㩁 Solenoid ⸃㒰㔚⏛ᑯ

294

Green A9

DG_IN20

Rear mode switch SW 㩢㩞㩝㨺㩎㩨ಾᦧ߃

Front pedal limit switch A11

DG_IN24

Rear pedal limit switch A24

DG_IN25

T5-3-21


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Remote Control Pressure Sensor System (Boom Derricking drum)

x x

Check the wiring connections first. If voltage from the pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, pressure sensor may be faulty, or harness may be broken between terminal D15 of MC2/A and terminal D15 (ground) of pressure sensor. x If voltage from the pressure sensor is 0.4V or less, harness D16 (SENSOR_5V) may be a broken between MC2/A and pressure sensor, or a short circuit between line D16 and ground.

Note “sensor” shows “remote control pressure sensor”

YES

YES

Disconnect connector of pressure sensor. Check for continuity between terminals D16 and D15 of sensor side connector.

Check if voltage YES between D16 and D15 of harness end connector of sensor is 5±0.5V. ͊ Key switch: ON

͊ Key switch: OFF

Disconnect connector MCA-3 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity between terminal SIG of harness end connector of sensor and SIG of MCA-3.

Connect disconnected Faulty MC2/A connector. Check if voltage between SIG of MCA-3 and Faulty sensor machine is 0.5 to 4.5V. NO ½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert a test bar into rear face of connector.

Broken harness SIG between MC2/A and sensor

NO

͊ Key switch: OFF

YES Faulty MC2/A Check for continuity YES between D15 of harness end connector Broken D15 Check if voltage of sensor and machine. harness between between D16 of harness NO ͊ Key switch: OFF MC2/A and sensor end connector of sensor NO and machine is 5±0.5V. Broken D16 ͊ Key switch: ON harness between NO MC2/A and sensor

Faulty sensor NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

Boom Derricking Drum Remote Control Pressure Sensor (Harness End)

D15 D16 D16 SIG D15

+5V

GND Hoist : B1 Lower : B9

MC2/A Connector MCA-3 (Harness End) Hoist : B1 B1 B9 Lower : B9

T5-3-22


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Remote Control Pressure Sensor System (Front, Rear, Third drum)

x x

Check the wiring connections first. If voltage from the pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, pressure sensor may be faulty of, or harness may be broken between terminal D15 of MC2/A and terminal D15 (ground) of pressure sensor. x If voltage from the pressure sensor is 0.4V or less, harness D16 (SENSOR_5V) may be broken between MC2/A and the pressure sensor, or a short circuit between line D16 and ground. Note “sensor” shows “remote control pressure sensor”

YES Faulty MC2/A

Connect disconnected YES connector.

Disconnect connector MCA-2 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity between terminal SIG of harness end connector of sensor and SIG of MCA-2. Check if voltage YES between D16 and D15 of harness end connector of sensor is 5±0.5V. Disconnect connector of pressure sensor. Check for continuity between terminals D16 and D15 of sensor side connector.

͊ Key switch: OFF

Check if voltage between SIG of MCA-2 and machine is 0.5 to 4.5V.

Faulty sensor NO

½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert a test bar into rear face of connector.

Broken harness SIG between MC2/A and sensor

NO

YES Faulty MC2/A

͊ Key switch: ON Check if voltage between D16 of harness NO end connector of sensor and machine is 5±0.5V. ͊ Key switch: ON

͊ Key switch: OFF

Check for continuity YES between D15 of harness end connector of sensor and machine. ͊ Key switch: OFF

Broken harness D15 between NO MC2/A and sensor Broken harness D16 between MC2/A and sensor

NO

Faulty sensor NO

Connector Drum Hoisting / Lowering Remote Control Pressure Sensor (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

D15 D16

D16 SIG D15 +5V

GND Drum Hoist Lower Front

C6

C12

Rear

C5

C11

Third

C4

C10

MC2/A Connector MCA-2 (Harness End) C4

C5

C6

C10 C11 C12

T5-3-23


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Pressure Sensor: Primary Pilot Pressure

x Check the wiring connections first. x If voltage from pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, cause of trouble may be failure of pressure sensor, or broken harness of D15 (ground) line between MC2/A and sensor. x If voltage from pressure sensor is less than 0.4V, cause of trouble may be a broken harness of D16 (SENSOR_5V) line between MC2/A and sensor, or a short circuit between D16 and ground.

Note “sensor” means “primary pilot pressure sensor “.

YES Faulty MC2/A Connect disconnected connector. YES Check if voltage between Disconnect connector C2 of MCA-2 and Faulty sensor MCA-2 of MC2/A. machine is 0.5 to 4.5V. NO YES Check for continuity of ½ Key switch: ON C2 line between MCA-2 ½ Insert test bar into the rear and harness end face of the connector Broken harness C2 connector of sensor. between MC2/A and NO Check if voltage ͊ Key switch: OFF terminal of sensor YES between D16 and D15 of harness YES Faulty MC2/A end connector of Check for continuity sensor is 5±0.5V. YES between D15 of Disconnect connector ͊ Key switch: ON harness end connector Broken harness D15 of pressure sensor. of sensor and machine. Check if voltage between MC2/A and Check for continuity NO sensor between D16 of harness ͊ Key switch: OFF between terminals NO end connector of sensor D16 and D15 of and machine is 5±0.5V. pressure sensor side Broken harness D16 ͊ Key switch: ON connector. between MC2/A and NO sensor ͊ Key switch: OFF

Faulty sensor NO

Connector Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor (Harness End) +5V

GND D16 D15 C2

Primary Pilot Pressure Sensor

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End) Accumulator

D15 D16

MC2/A Connector MCA-2 (Harness End) C2 Left Bed

T5-3-24


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Pressure Sensor: Front / Rear Drum brake depressing pressure (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first. x If voltage from pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, cause of trouble may be failure of pressure sensor, or broken harness of D15 (ground) line between MC2/A and sensor. x If voltage from pressure sensor is less than 0.4V, cause of trouble may be a broken harness of D16 (SENSOR_5V) line between MC2/A and sensor, or a short circuit between D16 and ground.

Note “sensor” means “drum brake depressing pressure sensor “

Connect disconnected

YES Faulty MC2/A

YES connector.

Disconnect connector MCA-2 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity of SIG line between MCA-2 and harness end connector of sensor. YES

Disconnect connector of brake depressing pressure sensor. Check for continuity between terminals D16 and D15 of pressure sensor side connector.

Check if voltage between D16 and D15 of harness end connector of sensor is 5±0.5V. ͊ Key switch: ON

͊ Key switch: OFF

Check if voltage between SIG of MCA-2 and Faulty sensor machine is 0.5 to 4.5V. NO ½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert test bar into rear face of connector Broken harness SIG between NO MC2/A and sensor

Check for continuity YES between D15 of harness end of sensor connector Check if voltage between and machine. D16 of harness end of ͊ Key switch: OFF NO sensor connector and machine is 5±0.5V. ͊ Key switch: ON

NO

͊ Key switch: OFF

YES Faulty MC2/A

Broken harness D15 between NO MC2/A and sensor Broken harness D16 between MC2/A and sensor Faulty sensor

NO

Connector Brake Depressing Pressure Sensor (Harness End) +5V

GND D16 D15 SIG

Front brake : C8

MC2/A Connector MCA-2 (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

Rear brake : C1

Rear SIG C1 C8

D15 D16

Front SIG

T5-3-25


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Motor Brake Release Solenoid Valve (Boom derricking, Front, Rear, Third drum)

x Check the wiring connections first. x Cause of trouble may be failure of hoisting or lowering remote control pressure sensor system.

x At first, check drum hoisting and lowering remote control pressure sensor.

YES

Disconnect connector of motor brake release solenoid valve. Check if voltage between terminals SIG and GND of harness end connector is 24V. ½ Operate winch hoisting or lowering.

Faulty brake release solenoid valve

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. Check for continuity of SIG line NO between MCA-6 and harness end connector of solenoid. ͊ Key switch: OFF

Faulty harness between YES Connect MCA-6. solenoid and ground, or faulty ground YES Check if voltage between SIG of harness end connector of solenoid Faulty MC2/A and machine is 24V. ½ Operate winch hoisting or lowering.

NO

Faulty harness between MC2/A and solenoid

NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

Boom Derricking

SIG E26

Boom derricking Front Rear Third

E4 E18 E5 E19

Rear

GND E4

E5 E18 E19

Front

T5-3-26

Third


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Brake Mode Key Switch (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first.

Faulty MC2/A

YES

Disconnect connector MCA-4 of MC2/A. Check if voltage of terminal A8 of harness end connector is 24V. ͊ Key switch: ON

Disconnect MCA-4 and connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of A8 line between NO MCA-4 and harness end of connector 16P of left stand panel. ͊ Key switch: OFF

Connector Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

A8

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

A8

T5-3-27

Trouble of power supply of brake mode key switch. YES Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V System 1) of MC2/A."

NO

Faulty harness between MC2/A and brake mode key switch


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Brake Mode Switch (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first. YES

Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect connector MCA-4 of MC2/A. Check if voltage of terminal A21 (A9) of harness end connector is 24V.

Trouble of power supply YES of brake mode switch.

Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V System 1) of

Disconnect MCA-4 and brake mode switch connector 06P. NO Check for continuity of A21 (A9) line between MCA-4 and harness end of connector 06P.

½ Key switch ON, Free switch ON

Terminal ½ A21: front ½ A9 : rear

͊ Key switch: OFF

NO

Faulty harness between MC2/A and brake mode switch

In case brake mode indicator lamp (green) does not blink by switching drum brake mode switch. Terminal ½ 293 : front ½ 294 : rear Check for continuity between terminals 224 and 293 (294) of connector 06P of switch side.

YES

Check if voltage between terminal 224 of harness end of brake mode switch connector 06P and machine is 24V.

Check for continuity of YES harness end terminals 293 (294) between connector 06P and brake indicator connector. ͊ Key switch: OFF

͊ Key switch: OFF

YES Blown bulb of auto brake

indicator (green) Broken harness between right stand panel and NO brake mode indicator Faulty drum brake mode switch

NO

Broken harness between fuse and brake mode switch, or blown fuse

͊ Key switch: ON NO

Connector Right stand Brake mode switch connector 06P Rear drum (Harness End)

Front drum (Harness End) SIG2 224

Brake Indicator Lamp Connector (Harness End) SIG2

224

293

293 294

294

A9

A21 SIG1

Front drum SIG2

SIG1

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

Rear drum SIG1

Front drum SIG1

A9 A21

T5-3-28

Rear drum SIG2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Brake Pedal Limit Switch, Front / Rear Drum (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first

YES

Disconnect connector MCA-4 of MC2/A. Check if voltage of terminal A11 (A24) of harness end is 24V. ½ Key switch ON. ½ Depress drum brake pedal.

Faulty MC2/A

YES

Disconnect MCA-4 and connector of brake pedal limit switch. Check for continuity of A11 (A24) NO between MCA-4 and harness end connector of brake pedal limit switch. ½ Key switch OFF. ½ Keep MCA-4 disconnected.

Terminal ½ A11 : front ½ A24 : rear

NO

Trouble of power supply of brake pedal limit switch. Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 1) of MC2/A." Faulty harness between MC2/A and brake pedal limit switch

Connector

Brake pedal limit switch connector (Harness End) Front drum

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

Front: A11

Rear drum A11

A11

A12

A24

Rear: A24

T5-3-29


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Brake Release Solenoid Valve (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first. YES

Faulty solenoid valve

Disconnect connector of drum brake release solenoid. Check if voltage between terminals E6 (E7) and GND of harness end connector is 24V. Key switch ON, Brake mode key switch ON. Depress brake pedal. Free mode switch ON

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of terminal E6 NO (E7) between MCA-6 and harness end of solenoid connector.

Terminal E6: front drum E7: rear drum

Connect MCA-6. YES Check if voltage of E6 (E7) of harness end connector of solenoid is 24V.

YES Faulty harness between

solenoid and ground, or faulty ground Faulty MC2/A

NO

Key switch: ON Brake mode key switch ON. Depress brake pedal. Free mode switch ON

͊ Key switch: OFF

Faulty harness between MC2/A and solenoid

NO

Connector Front / Rear Drum Brake Release Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End) E6

SIG (B) Front : E6 Rear : E7

E7

GND

Check of Drum Brake Mode Indicator Lamp (free fall winch)

x Check the wiring connections first. Terminal E22 : Front drum brake E9 : Rear drum brake

Free mode indicator (red) does not blink by switching free mode switch. Key switch ON, Brake mode key switch ON. Brake pedal depressed. Free mode switch ON.

YES Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect connector of brake mode indicator. Check if voltage between terminal 224 of harness end connector of indicator and machine is 24V. ½ Key switch ON

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity of E22 (E9) between harness end connector of indicator and MCA-6. ͊ Key switch: OFF

NO

Faulty harness between MC2/A and free mode indicator Broken harness between fuse and brake mode indicator, or blown fuse

NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Brake Mode Indicator Lamp Connector (Harness End)

E9

E22 224

E22

E9

T5-3-30


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Harness between IDU and MC2/B

x Check the wiring connections first.

Connector

x Check the continuity between terminal R13 of the harness end connector of connector IDU-4 of IDU and terminal R13 of the harness end connector of connector MCB-4 of MC2/B. (Boom derricking drum hoisting stop signal)

IDU Connector IDU-4 (Harness End)

x Check the continuity between terminal R26 of the

R13 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z4

harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal R26 of the harness end connector of MCB-4. (Boom derricking drum lowering stop signal)

R26 Z1

Z2

Z3

Z15

x Check the continuity between terminal Z12 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z12 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Front drum hoisting stop signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z1 of the

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End)

harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z1 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Front drum lowering stop signal)

R13 R26

x Check the continuity between terminal Z13 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z13 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Rear drum hoisting stop signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z2 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z2 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Rear drum lowering stop signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z14 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z14 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Third drum hoisting stop signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z3 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z3 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Third drum lowering stop signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z4 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z4 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Boom shouldering prevention signal)

x Check the continuity between terminal Z15 of the harness end connector of IDU-4 and terminal Z15 of the harness end connector of MCB-5. (Tower breakage prevention signal)

T5-3-31

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF MAIN PUMP DELIVERY FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM Abnormality

x Using the power supply monitor, check if the battery and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal.

x If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply".

x Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signals.

THROT._GRIP

Accelerator grip signal

x.xx V

Normal range (under the following conditions) 0.95 to 1.05

Remote control pressure Boom derricking drum hoisting Boom derricking drum lowering Front drum hoisting Front drum lowering Rear drum hoisting Rear drum lowering Third drum hoisting Third drum lowering Main pump displacement angle proportional solenoid valve

x.xx V

0.40 to 0.84

DD_HST_PRS DD_LWR_PRS FD_HST_PRS FD_LWR_PRS RD_HST_PRS RD_LWR_PRS 3D_HST_PRS 3D_LWR_PRS M_PMP_CUR

xxxx mA

680 to 720

Item

Signal name

Description

x For check of remote control pressure sensors, refer to Section "Failure of Brake Control System." x For check of the accelerator grip, refer to Section “Failure of Engine Control System”.

T5-3-32

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check Sensor check Harness check Sensor check

Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Main Pump Delivery Flow Control System MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

+24V

MAIN_GND

Accelerator Grip

Boom Derricking Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure

E26

PWM_GND

D5

SENSOR_5V

D14

SENS_GND_5

B5

AN_IN0

D16

SENSOR_5V

D15

SENS_GND_5

B1

AN_IN8

B9

AN_IN9

Front Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure

C6

AN_IN10

Front Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure

C12

AN_IN11

C5

AN_IN12

C11

AN_IN13

C4

AN_IN14

C10

AN_IN15

Boom Derricking Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure

Rear Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Rear Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure Third Drum Hoisting Remote Control Pressure Third Drum Lowering Remote Control Pressure

T5-3-33

PWMOUT0+

F9

PWMOUT0-

F5

Main Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Main Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve • Check the wiring connections first.

Note “solenoid” means “main pump displacement angle proportional solenoid”

YES

Disconnect connector of main pump displacement angle proportional solenoid and Insert an ammeter. Check if electric current is 700 to 0mA with turning accelerator grip from 0 to 100%. Key switch: ON.

Faulty solenoid

Check for continuity Disconnect connector MCA-5 of YES between F5 and F9 of harness end of MC2/A and solenoid connector. MCB-5 or solenoid Check for continuity between connector. terminal F9 of solenoid connector and F9 of MCA-5. NO Check for continuity between terminal F5 of solenoid connector NO and F5 of MCA-5.

YES Harness short circuit between

solenoid and MC2/A Faulty MC2/A NO

Broken harness F9 or F5 between MC2/A and solenoid

½ Key switch OFF ½ Remove the ammeter

Connector Main Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-5 (Harness End)

F5 F9 F5

T5-3-34

F9


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Remote Control Pressure Sensor System Traveling) • Check the wiring connections first. • If voltage from pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, pressure sensor may be faulty, or harness may be broken between terminal X15 of MC2/B and terminal X15 (ground) of pressure sensor. • If voltage from the pressure sensor is 0.4V or less, harness X16 (SENSOR_5V) may be broken between MC2/B and the pressure sensor, or a short circuit between line X16 and ground.

Note “sensor” means “traveling right or left remote control pressure sensor”

Terminal Right : S1 Left : S9

Check if voltage YES between X15 and

Connect disconnected

Disconnect connector MCB-3 of MC2/B. Check for continuity YES between terminal S1 (S9) of harness end connector of sensor and terminal S1 (S9) of MCB-3.

Check if voltage between terminal S1 (S9) of MCB-3 Faulty sensor and machine is 0.5 to 4.5V. NO ½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert test bar into rear face of connector.

Broken harness S1 (S9) between MC2/B and sensor

NO

Key switch: OFF.

X16 of harness end connector of sensor is 5 ± 0.5V.

Disconnect connector of pressure sensor. Check for continuity between terminals X15 and X16 of sensor side connector.

YES Faulty MC2/B

YES connector.

Key switch: ON.

Check if voltage between X16 of harness NO end connector of sensor and machine is 5 ± 0.5V.

Check for continuity YES between X15 of harness end connector of sensor and machine. Key switch: OFF.

Broken harness X15 between MC2/B and NO sensor Broken harness X16 between MC2/B and sensor

Key switch: ON. NO

Key switch: OFF.

YES Faulty MC2/B

Faulty sensor NO

Connector Traveling Remote Control Pressure Sensor (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

X15 X16 D5 SIG D14 X16 (D5)

GND X15 (D14) S1: right S9 : left

+5V

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End) S1 S9

T5-3-35


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF MAIN PUMP INCREASE CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER

When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses. Item INC._TQ_CUR

Signal name Power shift proportional solenoid valve

Description xxxx mA

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0 to 720 Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

+24V

PWMOUT1+

F21

PWMOUT1-

F17

Main pump power shift proportional solenoid valve

MAIN_GND E26

PWM_GND

ECU DA_OUT

B6

ACCEL2 SIG

DA_GND

B14

ACCEL1 SIG

T5-3-36


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Main Pump Power Shift Proportional Solenoid Valve • Check the wiring connections first.

Note “solenoid” means “main pump power shift proportional solenoid”.

YES

Disconnect connector of main pump power shift proportional solenoid and Insert an ammeter. Operate throttle. Check if electric current changes as engine speed. Engine: Start.

Faulty solenoid

Disconnect connector MCA-5 of MC2/A, and solenoid connector. Check for continuity between terminal F21 of solenoid connector and F21 of MCA-5. NO Check for continuity between terminal F17 of solenoid connector and F17 of MCA-5.

YES Harness short circuit

Check for continuity YES between terminals F21 and F17 of harness end of MCB-5 or solenoid connector.

between MC2/A and solenoid Faulty MC2/A

NO

Key switch: OFF.

Broken harness F21 or F17 between MC2/A and solenoid

NO

½ Key switch OFF ½ Remove the ammeter

Connector Main Pump Power Shift Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-5 (Harness End)

F21 F17

F17

T5-3-37

F21


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF SWING PUMP DISCHARGE RATE CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses. Item

Signal name

Description

SL_CTRL_SP

Swing speed control dial

x.xx V

SL_PMP_CUR

Swing pump displacement angle proportional solenoid valve

xxxx mA

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0.64 to 0.93 Harness check Sensor check 0 to 60 Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

+24V

PWMOUT4+

F11

PWMOUT4-

F7

MAIN_GND E26

D5 D14

Swing Speed Control Dial

B3

PWM_GND

SENSOR_5V SENS_GND_5

AN_IN4

T5-3-38

Swing Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Swing Speed Control Dial • Check the wiring connections first. • If voltage from the speed control dial is 4.1V or more, the speed control dial may be faulty, or there may be a broken harness between terminal D14 of MC2/A and the speed control dial. • If voltage from the speed control dial is 0.1V or less, there may be a broken harness between MC2/A and the speed control dial, or a short circuit between ground and D5 (Sensor 5V).

Connect disconnected

YES Faulty MC2/A

YES connector.

Disconnect connector MCA-3 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity between B3 of harness end connector of dial and B3 of MCA-3.

Disconnect connector of swing speed control dial. Check for continuity between terminals D5 and D14 of dial side connector.

Check if voltage YES between D14 and D5 of harness end connector of dial is 5 ± 0.5V.

Key switch: OFF

Key switch: ON

Check if voltage between D5 of harness NO end connector of dial and machine is 5 ± 0.5V.

Check if voltage between B3 of MCA-3 and machine is 1.0 to 4.0V.

Faulty dial NO

½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert test bar into rear face of connector.

Broken harness between MC2/A and dial

NO

Check for continuity YES between D14 of harness end connector of dial and machine. Key switch: OFF

YES Faulty MC2/A

Broken harness between MC2/A and NO dial Broken harness between MC2/A and dial

Key switch: ON NO

Key switch: OFF

Faulty dial NO

Connector Swing Speed Control Dial (Harness End)

D14 D5 B3

MC2/A Connector MCA-3 (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

B3

D5 D14

T5-3-39


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Swing Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve • Check the wiring connections first.

Note “solenoid” means “swing pump displacement angle proportional solenoid”

YES

Disconnect connector of swing pump displacement angle proportional solenoid, and insert an ammeter. Check if electric current changes from 0 to 700mA, as swing speed control dial is turned from 0 to 100%. Engine: Start

Faulty solenoid

YES Harness short circuit

Disconnect connector MCA-5 of MC2/A and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of F11 between NO MCA-5 and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of F7 between MCA-5 and solenoid connector.

between MC2/A and solenoid

Check for continuity YES between F11 and F7 of harness end of MCA-5 or solenoid connector. Key switch: OFF

Faulty MC2/A NO

Broken harness F11 or F7 between MC2/A and solenoid

NO

½ Key switch OFF ½ Remove the ammeter

Connector

Swing Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-5 (Harness End)

F7

F11 F7

T5-3-40

F11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF SWING ALARM CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and relay signal statuses. Item

Signal name

SL_RGT_PRS SL_LFT_PRS SL_ALAM_LP

Description

Right swing remote control pressure Left swing remote control pressure Swing alarm lamp relay

x.xx V ON/OFF

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0.40 to 0.84 Harness check Sensor check OFF Harness check Relay check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

PWMOUT7+ +24V

MAIN_GND

Right Swing Remote Control Pressure Left Swing Remote Control Pressure

E26

PWM_GND

D16

SENSOR_5V

D15

SENS_GND_5

C3

AN_IN16

C9

AN_IN17

T5-3-41

E15

Swing Alarm Relay


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Remote Control Pressure Sensor System (Swing) • Check the wiring connections first. • If voltage from the pressure sensor is 4.6V or more, the pressure sensor may be faulty, or there may be a broken harness between terminal D15 of MC2/A and the ground of the pressure sensor. • If voltage from the pressure sensor is 0.4V or less, there may be a broken harness between MC2/A and the pressure sensor, or a short circuit between ground line and line D16 (SENSOR_5V).

Note “sensor” means “swing remote control pressure sensor”

Terminal Right: C3 Left : C9

Connect disconnected YES Faulty MC2/A connector. YES Check if voltage between C3 (C9) of Disconnect connector Faulty sensor MCA-2 and machine is MCA-2 of MC2/A. NO 0.5 to 4.5V. YES Check for continuity ½ Key switch: ON between C3 (C9) of ½ Insert a test bar into rear face harness end connector of the connector. of sensor and C3 (C9) Broken C3 (C9) of MCA-2. harness between Check if voltage NO Key switch: OFF MC2/A and sensor YES between D15 and D16 of harness YES Faulty MC2/A end connector of Check for continuity sensor is 5 ± 0.5V. YES between D15 of harness end Key switch: ON Disconnect connector Broken D15 harness connector of sensor Check if voltage between of pressure sensor. between MC2/A and and machine. D16 of harness end NO sensor Check for continuity Key switch: OFF NO connector of sensor and between terminals D15 machine is 5 ± 0.5V. and D16 of sensor. Broken D16 harness Key switch: ON between MC2/A and Key switch: OFF NO sensor Faulty sensor NO

Connector Swing Remote Control Pressure Sensor (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

D15 D16

+5V D16

D15 GND

Right : C3 Left : C9

MC2/A Connector MCA-2 (Harness End) C3 C9

T5-3-42


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Swing Alarm Relay System • Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Faulty relay

NO

Broken GND harness between relay and machine, or faulty ground

YES

Faulty MC2/A

NO

Broken E15 harness between MC2/A and relay

Check for continuity between terminal YES GND of swing alarm relay socket and machine. Key switch: OFF

Disconnect swing alarm relay from socket. Check if voltage of terminal E15 of relay socket is +24V. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Operate swing lever right or left.

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. Check for continuity between E15 of NO relay socket and E15 of MCA-6. Key switch: OFF

Connector

Swing Alarm Relay Socket (R24) (Harness End)

(B) GND

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

E15 E15

T5-3-43


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF DRUM ROTATION SENSOR CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid signal statuses.

Item

Signal name

Description

FD_PLS_A FD_PLS_B RD_PLS_A RD_PLS_B DD_PLS FD_PLS_CNT RD_PLS_CNT DD_PLS D_R._IND.

Front drum rotation sensor A Front drum rotation sensor B Rear drum rotation sensor A Rear drum rotation sensor B Boom derricking drum rotation sensor Front drum pulse counter Rear drum pulse counter Boom derricking drum pulse counter Drum rotation sensor cancel switch

ON/OFF

FD_PLS_SOL RD_PLS_SOL DD_PLS_SOL

Front drum rotation indicating solenoid Rear drum rotation indicating solenoid Boom derricking drum rotation indicating solenoid

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) ON/OFF (*1) Harness check Sensor check

-xxxxx

0 (*2)

ON/OFF

OFF

xxxx mA

0

Harness check Sensor check MC2/A hardware check Harness check Switch check Harness check Solenoid check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions. *1Depends on the position of the sensor and the fin of the drum. *2 288/hoisting 1rotation

T5-3-44


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Drum Rotation Sensor Control System

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

PWMOUT0

E2 E26

+24V E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

PWMOUT1

MAIN_GND E26

E16 E26

E3 E26

Front Drum Rotation Sensor A Rear Drum Rotation Sensor B Rear Drum Rotation Sensor A Boom Derricking Drum Rotation Sensor

A13

DG_IN28

A26

DG_IN29

F12

DG_IN30

F1

DG_IN31

F13

Rear Drum Rotation Indicator Solenoid

PWM_GND PWMOUT2

Front Drum Rotation Sensor B

Front Drum Rotation Indicator Solenoid

DG_IN32

F16

DG_GND

A15

DG_IN7

㩎㩨㩡㩛࿁ォᗵ⍮㩁㨶㩧㩈㩣㩇㨼㨹㩋 Drum Speed Feedback Cancel Switch

T5-3-45

PWMGND

Boom Derricking Drum Rotation Indicator Solenoid


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Rotation Indicating Solenoid System • Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect front drum lever connector. Check if voltage between terminals E26 and E2 (E16, E3) of harness end connector is +24V. ½ Key switch ON. ½ Operate drum hoisting or lowering.

Faulty drum rotation indicating solenoid

Disconnect connector MCA-6. Check for continuity of E2 (E16, E3) between MCA-6 and connector of NO drum lever. Check for continuity of E26 between MCA-6 and connector of drum lever.

Check for continuity YES between E2 (E16, E3) and E26 of harness end of MCA-6 or drum lever connector.

Harness short circuit between MC2/A and drum lever Faulty MC2/A

NO

Key switch: OFF

Broken harness E2 (E16, E3) or E26 between MC2/A and drum lever

NO

Key switch: OFF

Terminal Front : E2 Rear : E16 Derricking: E3

YES

Connector Front Drum Lever (Harness End)

Rear Drum Lever (Harness End)

E26 E2 GND

E26 E16 SIG

GND

Derricking drum SIG

E2 E3 E16

E3 E26 SIG

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End) Front drum SIG

Boom Derricking Drum Lever (Harness End)

E26

Rear drum SIG

T5-3-46

SIG

GND


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Rotation Sensor System • Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect connector of drum rotation sensor. Connect terminals F16 and SIG of harness end connector. Check if monitor indicator comes ON.

Faulty sensor or faulty adjustment

Disconnect connectors MCA-4 and MCA-5. Check for continuity of SIG between MCA-4 (or MCA-5) and harness end connector of NO rotation sensor. Check for continuity of F16 between MCA-5 and harness end connector of rotation sensor.

½ Key switch: ON

YES

Faulty MC2/A

NO

Broken harness of SIG or F16 between MC2/A and sensor

Key switch: OFF

Check of Drum Rotation Sensor Cancel Switch System • Check the wiring connections first. YES

Disconnect connectors MCA-5 and MCA-4. Check for continuity between terminals F16 and A15 of harness end connector.

Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect connector 16F-W of side overhead panel. Check for continuity of A15 between MCA-4 and side overhead panel connector. NO Check for continuity of F16 between MCA-4 and side overhead panel connector.

½ Key switch ON ½ Drum rotation sensor cancel switch: ON

YES

NO

Faulty cancel switch

Broken harness A15 or F16 between MC2/A and side overhead panel

Key switch: OFF MCA-4 and MCA-5 are disconnected.

Connector Drum Speed Feedback Sensor (Harness End)

Side Overhead Panel Connector 16F-W (Harness End) Front

F16 SIG

GND

SIG

Rear Derricking

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

A B A B A

Connector

A26 A13 F1 F12 F13

MCA-4 MCA-4 MCA-5 MCA-5 MCA-5

Front B SIG

A15

Cancel switch

SIG

Front A SIG

F16 A15 Cancel switch

Rear A SIG

A13

F1

A26

F12 F13 Rear B SIG

T5-3-47

MC2/A Connector MCA-5 (Harness End)

F16 Derricking SIG


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF ENGINE START INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the relay signal status. Item

Signal name

Description

FD_FREE_SW RD_FREE_SW SL_BRK_SW

Front drum free switch Rear drum free switch Swing brake switch

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ENG._START ENG._INTLCK

Engine start signal Engine start interlock

ON/OFF ON/OFF

INTLCK_LMP

Start interlock lamp

ON/OFF

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) OFF Harness check Switch check OFF Harness check Switch check OFF Harness check ON Harness check Relay check OFF Harness check Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position.

MC2/A

+24V

D1

MAIN_B

4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions.

M18

KEY_SW

6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB MAIN_GND

E26

PWM_GND

D2

SENSOR_24V_1

Green

224

A21

DG_IN19

Front Drum Free Mode Switch Green A9

DG_IN20

Rear Drum Free Mode Switch

A18

SOL_OUT5

E20

OC_OUT3

E23

DG_IN22

Swing Brake Switch 203

10A

A5

Engine Start Relay

Red 224

Engine Start Interlock Indicator

DG_IN12

Start Key Switch

T5-3-48


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Engine Start Relay System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES Faulty engine start relay YES

Disconnect engine start relay from socket. Check if voltage of terminal E20 of relay socket is +24V. ½ Key switch: ON Swing brake switch: Brake applied Front drum brake mode switch: Auto Brake Rear drum brake mode switch: Auto Brake

Check for continuity between GND terminal of harness end of engine start relay and machine. Key switch: OFF

NO

Broken GND harness between engine start relay and machine, or faulty ground

YES Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. Check for continuity of E20 line between NO engine start relay and MCA-6. Key switch: OFF

NO

Broken harness E20 between MC2/A and engine start relay

Connector

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Engine Start Relay (R3) (Harness End)

(B)

E20 E20

GND

T5-3-49


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Swing Brake Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Faulty MC2/A

Broken harness 301

Disconnect connector MCA-4. Check if voltage of terminal A18 of harness end connector is +24V.

YES between fuse and

swing lever, or blown fuse

Check for continuity

YES between 301 and A18 of

½ Key switch: ON

Disconnect MCA-4. Check for continuity of A18 line Swing brake switch: Brake released between harness end connector NO of swing lever and MCA-4. Key switch: OFF

switch side connector of swing lever. ½ Key switch: OFF

Faulty swing brake NO switch

Swing brake switch: Brake release

Broken harness A18 between MC2/A and swing lever

NO

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

Swing Lever Connector (Harness End)

A18

301 A18

T5-3-50


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Drum Brake Free Mode Switch System (free fall winch)

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect connector MCA-4. Check if voltage of terminal A21 (A9) of harness end connector is +24V. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Brake mode switch: Free mode

Terminal ½ Front drum : A21 ½ Rear drum : A9

Check for continuity

YES between D2 and A21 (A9)

Disconnect MCA-4. Check for continuity of A21 (A9) line between harness NO end connector of front (rear) drum lever and MCA-4. Key switch: OFF

of switch side connector of brake mode switch. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Brake mode switch: Free mode

Connector Rear Drum Lever (Harness End)

A9 D2

A21 D2

+24V

+24V

MC2/A Connector MCA-4 (Harness End)

A9 A21

T5-3-51

Faulty brake mode NO switch

Broken harness A21 (A9) between MC2/A and brake mode switch

NO

Front Drum Lever (Harness End)

Trouble in the power supply to brake mode YES switch o Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 1) of MC2/A".


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF PILOT OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the sensor signal status. Item

Signal name

Description

PILOT_PRS

Primary pilot pressure

x.xx V

PILOT_LP

Pilot oil pressure indicator

ON/OFF

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0.40 to 0.72 Harness check Sensor check ON Harness check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

+24V

RED

MAIN_GND OC_OUT0 E26

E8

224

PWM_GND Pilot Oil Pressure Indicator

Primary Pilot Oil Pressure Sensor

D16

SENSOR_5V

D15

SENS_GND_5

C2

AN_IN18

For checks of the primary pilot oil pressure sensor, refer to "Check of Primary Pilot Oil Pressure Sensor" in the chapter on "Failure of Brake Control System".

T5-3-52


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Pilot Oil Pressure Indicator

• Check the wiring connections first. The indicator does not illuminate, even when the pilot oil pressure is below the set pressure.

YES Faulty MC2/A

Disconnect monitor panel connector. Check if voltage of terminal 224 of harness end connector is +24V. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Engine start ½ Gate lock lever: Lock position

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A. YES Check for continuity of E8 line between terminals of harness end connector of monitor panel and MCA-6.

Broken harness E8 between NO MC2/A and monitor panel

Key switch: OFF

Broken harness between fuse and monitor panel, or blown fuse

NO

The indicator does not go off, even though the pilot oil pressure reaches the set pressure. YES

Disconnect monitor panel connector. Check for continuity between terminal E8 of harness end connector and machine. Key switch: OFF

NO

Short circuit line E8 and ground between MC2/A and monitor panel Short circuit line E8 and ground inside monitor panel

Connector

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Monitor Panel (Harness End)

E8

E8 GD1

224

GND

T5-3-53


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF WINCH MOTOR CUTOFF PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/A are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/A Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A input/output monitor, confirm the relay signal status. Item

Signal name

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0.40 to 0.84 Harness check Sensor check

Description

FD_LWR_PRS Front drum lowering remote control pressure RD_LWR_PRS Rear drum lowering remote control pressure FM_CUT_OFF Front motor cutoff RM_CUT_OFF Rear motor cutoff

x.xx V

ON/OFF

ON

• Refer to the chapter on the "Failure of Brake

Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of the normal range

Control System" to check pressure sensors.

1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/A D1 M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB

PWMOUT2+

F10

PWMOUT5+

E14

Rear motor cutoff solenoid valve

+24V

MAIN_GND E26

Front drum lowering remote control pressure sensor Rear drum lowering remote control pressure sensor

PWM_GND

D16

SENSOR_5V

D15

SENS_GND_5

C12

C11

AN_IN11

AN_IN13

T5-3-54

Front motor cutoff solenoid valve


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Front Motor Cut off Solenoid Valve System

• Check the wiring connections first. YES

Check for continuity between terminal GND of harness end connector of the solenoid and machine.

YES

Key switch: OFF

Disconnect connector of front motor cut off solenoid. Check if voltage of terminal E14 of harness end connector is 24V.

NO

Disconnect connector MCA-6. Check for continuity of E14 line between MCA-6 and harness end connector of the solenoid.

½ Key switch: ON. ½ Front drum lowering operation NO

Key switch: OFF

Connector

(B)

Broken harness GND between harness end connector of the solenoid and machine, or faulty ground

YES

Faulty MC2/A

NO

Broken harness E14 between MC2/A and the solenoid

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Front motor cut off solenoid valve (Harness End) E14

Faulty solenoid

E14 GND

Check of Rear Motor Cutoff Solenoid Valve System

• Check the wiring connections first. YES

Check for continuity between terminal GND of harness end connector of the solenoid and machine.

YES

Disconnect connector of rear motor cut off solenoid. Check if voltage of terminal F10 of harness end is 24V.

Key switch: OFF

NO

Key switch: OFF

Broken harness GND between harness end connector of the solenoid and machine, or faulty ground

YES

Faulty MC2/A

NO

Broken harness F10 between MC2/A and the solenoid

Disconnect connector MCA-5. Check for continuity of F10 line NO between MCA-5 and harness end connector of the solenoid.

½ Key switch: ON. ½ Rear drum lowering operation

Faulty solenoid

Connector Rear motor cut off solenoid valve (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-5 (Harness End)

F10 F10

(B) GND

T5-3-55


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF BOOM DERRICKING DRUM AUTOMATIC STOP CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the switch and solenoid signal statuses. Item DD_REL_SW

Signal name

Description ON/OFF

REL_KEY_SW

Boom derricking drum automatic stop override switch Automatic stop override key switch

BM_OVERH BM_OVERH2 TH_OVERH BT_LOWER_L JB_OVERH JB_OVERH2 HK_OVERH ATTACHMENT

Boom overhoist Boom/tower second overhoist Tower overhoist Boom/tower lower limit Jib overhoist Jib second overhoist Hook overhoist Attachment detection signal

ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON

DD_HST_CUR DD_LWR_CUR DD_HST_STP DD_LWR_STP B/J_LOW_T. JB_OVER_T.

Proportional solenoid valve Boom derricking drum hoisting Boom derricking drum lowering Boom derricking drum hoisting stop signal ON/OFF Boom derricking drum lowering stop signal Boom/jib shouldering prevention signal Tower damage prevention signal

ON/OFF

CRANE TOWER ALLOFF ALLON xxxx mA

• For checks of the harness between the IDU and MC2/B, refer to "Check of harness between IDU and MC2/B" in the chapter on "Failure of Brake Control System".

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) OFF Harness check Switch check OFF Harness check Switch check Harness check For non-overhoist Switch check operations: ON When overhoisting: OFF

For crane operation: Harness check Junction box check CRANE For tower operation: TOWER 739 to 779 Harness check Solenoid valve check MC2/B hardware check ON Harness check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-56


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Auto Stop Control System MC2/B D1

+24V

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

E12

SOL_VB

E13

PWM_VB MAIN_GND

E26

PWMOUT0+

Z9

PWMOUT0-

Z5

PWMOUT1+

Z21

PWMOUT1-

Z17

Boom Derricking Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Boom Derricking Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

PWM_GND

Resistance

Boom Derricking Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch Automatic Stop Override Key Switch

Boom Overhoist

Tower Overhoist

Clamshell: Lower Limit

Boom/Tower Second Overhoist

S7

DG_IN0

R1

DG_IN4

Z16

DG_GND

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

R3

DG_IN8

R16

DG_IN9

R4

DG_IN10

R17

DG_IN11

R18

DG_IN13

R7

DG_IN16

R5

DG_IN12

R19

DG_IN15

Resistance

SOL_OUT0

Y4

329

SOL_OUT1

Y18

330

X4 R8

Jib Overhoist

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

R8

DG_IN18

R21

DG_IN19

R6

DG_IN14

R21

With Crane

Jib Backstop Alignment

Main Hook Overhoist

IDU

R20

DG_IN17

R11

DG_IN24

R13

OC_OUT0

DG_IN29

R26

OC_OUT1

Boom Derricking Drum Lowering Stop

DG_IN36

Z4

OC_OUT8

Shouldering Prevention

DG_IN37

Z15

OC_OUT9

Tower Damage Prevention

CAN_0H

X10

CAN_0H

CAN_0L

X21

CAN_0L

Aux. Hook Overhoist R9

Jib Second Overhoist

DG_IN20

R24

DG_IN25

R22

DG_IN21

Boom Derricking Drum Hoisting Stop

DG_IN28

Tower Junction Box Resistance

T5-3-57

Resistance


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Wiring Detection Signal System

• Check the wiring connections first. When the error indication is "ALL_ON" YES

Disconnect connector of front structure harness from boom top junction box. Check for continuity between terminals R8 and R21 of junction box receptacle.

Faulty junction box

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-4 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminals NO R8 and R21 of MCB-4.

Key switch: OFF

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Leave front structure harness connector of

Short circuit in lines R8 and R21 between boom top and MC2/B Faulty MC2/B

NO

boom top end disconnected.

When the error indication is "ALL_OFF"

Terminal ½ Crane: R8 ½ Tower: R21 YES Faulty MC2/B

Check if voltage of YES terminal X4 of front structure harness Disconnect connector of connector of boom front structure harness from top end is 24V. boom top junction box. Check for continuity Key switch: ON between terminals X4 and R8 of receptacle of boom top junction box.

Disconnect MCB-4. YES Check for continuity of R8 (R21) line between MCB-4 and boom top junction box. Key switch: OFF

Broken harness R8 (R21) between boom top and NO MC2/B Broken harness X4 between boom top and MC2/B

NO

Faulty junction box

NO

Key switch: OFF

Connector Cable Reel Harness (Harness End Connector)

A (R8)

U (X4)

#2 R8

(24P)

(32P)

24P

32P T (R21)

Cable Reel Harness (Receptacle of Boom (Tower) Top Junction Box)

#3 R21

A (R8)

T (R21)

#2(R8) #3(R21)

U (X4)

#1 X4 ԘԙԚԛ Ԝ ԝ Ԟ ԟ Ԡ ԡ Ԣ ԣ Ԥ ԥ Ԧ ԧԨԩԪԫ 㪉㪈㩷 㪉㪉㩷 㪉㪊㩷 㪉㪋㩷

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End) R8

X4

R21

T5-3-58

#㧝(X4)


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Boom / Tower Overhoist Switch System (Boom overhoist, Tower overhoist, Boom/Tower second overhoist)

• Check the wiring connections first.

When the error indication is "ALL OFF"

Check if voltage of X3

YES of machine end

Broken harness between NO MC2/B and switch

Key switch: OFF

connector of overhoist switch is 24V.

Disconnect connector of overhoist switch. Check for continuity between terminals X3 and S(b) of switch end connector.

YES Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect connector MCB-4. YES Check for continuity of line S(b) between MCB-4and machine side connector of switch.

Trouble of power supply to the switch o Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 2)" of MC2/B.

½ Key switch: ON NO

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Overhoist switch: Neutral

Faulty switch NO

When the error indication is "ALL ON" YES

Faulty switch

Disconnect connector of boom switch. Check for continuity between terminals S(a) and S(b) of switch side connector.

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-4. Check for continuity between NO S(a) and S(b) of MCB-4.

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Overhoist switch: Neutral

Key switch: OFF

Boom overhoist Tower overhoist Boom / Tower second overhoist

Harness short circuit S(a) and S(b) between MC2/B and the switch Faulty MC2/B

NO

S(a) S(b) R3 R16 R4 R17 R5 R19

Connector Boom Overhoist Switch (Machine Harness End)

Tower Overhoist Switch (Machine Harness End)

#2(R19)

S(b)

R3 R16 X3

S(a) R17 X3

S(a)

R4

S(b)

Boom/Tower Second Overhoist (Receptacle of Junction Box)

#3(R5)

S(b)

S(a) 㽴

㽶 㽵

#1(X3)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End) R3

R4

R16 R17

R5 R19

T5-3-59


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Jib Overhoist Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first. When the error indication is "ALL OFF"

Disconnect connector of switch. Check for continuity between terminals #1 and #3 of switch side connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Jib overhoist switch: Neutral

YES Faulty MC2/B Disconnect connector MCB-4 . YES Check for continuity between terminal S(b) of MCB-4 and Harness open circuit terminal #3 of machine side Check if voltage of terminal NO between switch and MC2/B connector of switch. YES #1 of machine side Key switch: OFF connector of switch is 24V. Trouble of power supply to ½ Key switch: ON the switch o Refer to "Check of Sensor Power NO Supply (24V system 3)" of MC2/B.

Faulty switch NO

When the error indication is "ALL ON" YES

Disconnect connector of switch. Check for continuity between terminals #2 and #3 of switch end connector.

Faulty switch

YES

Disconnect connector MCB-4. Check for continuity between terminals NO S(a) and S(b) of MCB-4.

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Jib overhoist switch: Neutral

Faulty MC2/B NO

Key switch: OFF

Jib overhoist Jib second overhoist

S(a) R6 R24

Harness short circuit between switch and MC2/B

S(b) R20 R22

Connector Jib Overhoist Switch (Junction Box Receptacle)

Jib Second Overhoist Switch (Junction Box Receptacle) #2(R24)

#2(R6)

#1(X4)

#1(X4) ԙ

Ԙ

ԙ

Ԙ

ԛ

Ԛ

Ԛ

#3(R22)

#3(R20)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End) R6 R20

T5-3-60

R22

R24


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Hook Overhoist Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first. When the error indication is "ALL OFF"

Disconnect connector of hook overhoist switch. Check for continuity between terminals #2 and #4 of switch end connector.

Disconnect connector MCB-4. YES Check for continuity between terminal #4 of machine side connector of switch and Check if voltage of terminal R9 of MCB-4. YES terminal #2 of machine Key switch: OFF side connector of switch is 24V. ½ Key switch: ON

YES Faulty MC2/B

Harness open circuit NO between MC2/B and switch

Trouble of power supply of switcho Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V system 3)" of MC2/B.

NO

Faulty switch

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Hook overhoist switch:

NO

Non-overhoist position

When the error indication is "ALL ON" Faulty switch

YES

Disconnect connector of hook overhoist switch. Check for continuity between terminals #3 and #4 of switch side connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Hook overhoist switch: Non-overhoist position

YES Harness short circuit

between MC2/B and switch

Disconnect connector MCB-4. Check for continuity between NO terminals R9 and R11 MCB-4.

Faulty MC2/B NO

Key switch: OFF

Connector Hook Overhoist Switch Connector (Junction Box Receptacle) #2(X4)

#1(X4)

㽳 㽲 㽵 㽴 㽸 㽷

Hook Overhoist Switch Connector (Machine side Connector) #2 X4

#1 X4 Ԙ

ԙ

Ԛ

ԛ

#3(R11)

#4(X9) #3 R11

#4 R9

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End)

R9

T5-3-61

R11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Tower Jib Limit Switch System (Swing Lever overhoist, Jib folded detection)

• Check the wiring connections first. With error indicators "ALL_OFF"

Check if voltage of YES terminal #1 of machine side connector of switch is 24V.

Disconnect connector of limit switch. Check for continuity between terminal #1 and terminal #3 of switch side connector.

Disconnect connector MCB-4. YES Check for continuity between terminal #3 of machine side connector of switch and terminal R10 of MCB-4.

YES Faulty MC2/B

Broken harness between NO switch and MC2/B

Key switch: OFF

Trouble of power supply of switch o Refer to "Check of Sensor Power Supply (24V System 3) of MC2/B."

Key switch: ON NO

Faulty switch

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Limit switch: Neutral

NO

With error indicators "ALL_ON" YES

Disconnect limit switch connector. Check for continuity between terminals #2 and #3 of switch side connector.

Faulty switch (short)

YES

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Limit switch: Neutral

NO

Disconnect MCB-4. Check for continuity between terminal S(a) and S(b) of MCB-4.

Faulty MC2/B

Key switch: OFF

Swing lever overhoist Jib folded detection

S(a) R12 R25

Harness short between switch and MC2/B

NO

S(b) R10 R23

Jib Folded Detection Switch Connector (Junction Box Receptacle)

Connector

#2 (R25)

#3(R23)

Swing Lever overhoist Detection Switch Connector (Junction Box Receptacle) #2(R12)

ԙ Ԛ Ԝ

#1(X4) 㽳㩷

Ԙ ԛ

#1(X4)

㽲㩷 㽴㩷

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness side)

#3(R10)

R10 R23

T5-3-62

R12 R25


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Boom Derricking Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Insert an ammeter between harness end connector and connector of boom derricking drum hoisting (or lowering) proportional solenoid. Check if electric current is 739 to 779mA. ½ Key switch: ON ½ All overhoist switches: Non-overhoist position

Faulty solenoid

YES Harness short circuit

Disconnect connector MCB-5 and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of SIG(+) line between MCB-5 and solenoid NO connector. And check for continuity of SIG(-) line between MCB-5 and solenoid connector.

between MC2/B and solenoid

YES Check for continuity

between SIG(+) and SIG(-) of MCB-5.

½ Key switch: OFF

Faulty MC2/B NO

Broken harness SIG(+) or SIG(-) between MC2/B and solenoid

NO

½ Key switch: OFF ½ Remove the ammeter.

Connector

Boom Derricking Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

Z5

SIG(+) SIG(-)

Z9 Z17

Hoisting Lowering

Z9 Z21

Z5 Z17

T5-3-63

Z21


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Auto Stop Override Select Key Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first. YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-4 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals Z16 and R1 of harness end connector. NO ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Auto stop override select key switch: ON

Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect connector 16P of left stand panel, MCB-4 and MCB-5. Check for continuity of R1 line between MCB-4 and connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P of left stand panel.

YES

NO

Faulty auto stop override select key switch Broken harness R1 or Z16 between MC2/B and left stand panel

Key switch: OFF

Check of Boom Derricking Drum Auto Stop Override Switch System

• Check wiring connections first. YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-3 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals Z16 and S7 of harness end connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Boom derricking drum auto stop

NO

override switch: ON

Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect connector 16P of left stand panel, MCB-3 and MCB-5. Check for continuity of S7 line between MCB-3 and connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P of left stand panel.

YES

NO

Faulty boom derricking drum auto stop override switch Broken harness S7 or Z16 between MC2/B and left stand panel

Key switch: OFF

Connector

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End)

Left stand panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

S7 R1

S7

Z16

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End)

R1 Z16

T5-3-64


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A (Blank)

T5-3-65


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF FRONT DRUM AUTOMATIC STOP CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the switch and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Item FD_REL_SW REL_KEY_SW BM_OVERH2

Signal name

Description

Front drum automatic stop override switch Automatic stop override key switch Boom/tower second overhoist

FD_ROPE_END Front drum rope end detector

ATTACHMENT

Attachment detection signal

JB_OVERH2 HK_OVERH

Jib second overhoist Hook overhoist

FD_HST_CUR FD_LWR_CUR FD_HST_STP FD_LWR_STP B/J_LOW_T.

Proportional solenoid valve Front drum hoisting Front drum lowering Front drum hoisting stop signal Front drum lowering stop signal Boom/jib shouldering prevention signal

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON CRANE TOWER SHORT OPEN ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON xxxx mA ON/OFF

• For checks of the harness between the IDU and MC2/B, refer to "Check of harness between IDU and MC2/B" in the chapter on "Failure of Brake Control System".

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) OFF Harness check OFF Switch check For non-overhoist operations: ON When overhoisting: OFF 3 windings or less: ON More than 3windings: OFF For crane operation: CRANE For tower operation: TOWER For non-overhoist operations: ON When overhoisting: OFF 702 to 742 ON

Harness check Junction box check Harness check Switch check Harness check Solenoid valve check MC2/B hardware check Harness check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-66


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Front Drum Auto Stop Control System

MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

Y12

SOL_VB

+24V Y13

Z10

PWMOUT2-

Z6

PWMOUT3+

Z22

PWMOUT3-

Z18

Front Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Drum Lock Switch

PWM_VB

383

MAIN_GND Y26

PWMOUT2+

Front Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

PWM_GND Resistance

Front Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch Automatic Stop Override Key Switch

Boom/Tower Second Overhoist Switch Front Drum Rope End Detection Switch

Jib Overhoist Prevention

Hook Overhoist

Jib Second Overhoist

S15

DG_IN1

R1

DG_IN4

Z16

DG_GND

Resistance

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

R5

DG_IN12

R19

DG_IN15

X2

SENSOR_24V_1

T9

AN_IN17

T4

AN_IN14

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

(Crane)

R8

DG_IN18

(Tower)

R21

DG_IN19

R6

DG_IN14

R20

DG_IN17

R11

DG_IN24

R9

DG_IN20

R24

DG_IN25

R22

DG_IN21

SOL_OUT2

Y5

331

SOL_OUT3

Y19

332

IDU

DG_IN30

Z12

OC_OUT2

DG_IN31

Z1

OC_OUT3

DG_IN36

Z4

OC_OUT8

CAN_0H

X10

CAN_0H

CAN_0L

X21

CAN_0L

Tower Junction Box

Resistance

T5-3-67

Resistance

Front Drum Hoisting Stop Front Drum Lowering Stop Shouldering Prevention


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Front Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Insert an ammeter to the connector of front drum hoisting (or lowering) proportional solenoid. Check if electric current is 702 - 742mA. ½ Key switch: ON ½ All overhoist switches: Non-overhoist position

Faulty solenoid

YES Harness short circuit between

MC2/B and solenoid

YES Check for continuity

between SIG(+) and SIG(-) of MCB-5.

Disconnect connector MCB-5 and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of SIG(+) line NO between MCB-5 and solenoid. Check for continuity of SIG(-) line between MCB-5 and solenoid. Key switch: OFF

Faulty MC2/B NO

NO

Broken harness SIG(+) or SIG(-) between MC2/B and solenoid

Connector

Front Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

Z10

Z6

SIG(+) SIG(-)

Z18

Hoisting Lowering

Z10 Z22 (383)

Z6 Z18

T5-3-68

Z22


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Front Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-3 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals Z16 and S15 of harness end connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Front drum automatic stop override switch: ON

NO

Faulty MC2/B

YES Faulty switch

Disconnect connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of S15 line between MCB-3 and connector 16P. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P.

Broken harness S15 or S16 between MC2/B and left NO stand panel

Key switch: OFF MCB-3 and MCB-5 are disconnected.

Connector Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

S15

Z16

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End)

Z16

S15

T5-3-69


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF REAR DRUM AUTOMATIC STOP CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal

• Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the switch and solenoid valve signal statuses. Item

Signal name

Description

RD_REL_SW Rear drum automatic stop override switch ON/OFF REL_KEY_SW Automatic stop override key switch ON/OFF RD_ROPE_END Rear drum rope end detector (for EN) ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON ATTACHMENT Attachment detection signal CRANE TOWER ALLOFF ALLON ON Tower over-hoist TH_OVERH OFF Boom/tower second over-hoist BM_OVERH2 ALLOFF Jib over-hoist JB_OVERH ALLON Jib second over-hoist JB_OVERH2 Hook over-hoist HK_OVERH Proportional solenoid valve xxxx mA Rear drum hoisting RD_HST_CUR RD_LWR_CUR Rear drum lowering ON/OFF Rear drum hoisting stop signal RD_HST_STP RD_LWR_STP Rear drum lowering stop signal Boom/jib shouldering prevention signal B/J_LOW_T. Tower damage prevention signal JB_OVER_T.

• For checks of the limit switch, the attachment wiring and the auto stop override select key switch, refer to the chapter on "Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Auto Stop Control System".

Normal range (under the Countermeasure for following conditions) abnormality Harness check OFF Switch check OFF 3 windings or less: ON More than 3 windings: OFF For crane operation: CRANE For tower operation: TOWER For non-over-hoist operations: ON When over-hoisting: OFF

Harness check Junction box check

702 to 742

Harness check Solenoid valve check MC2/B hardware check Harness check

ON

Harness check Switch check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-70


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Rear Drum Automatic Stop Control System MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

PWMOUT4+

Z11

M18

KEY_SW

PWMOUT4-

Z7

Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWM_VB

+24V

Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Drum Lock Switch

PWMOUT5+

Y14

PWMOUT5-

Z19

Rear Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

384

MAIN_GND Y26

PWM_GND

Resistance

Resistance

Rear Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch Automatic Stop Override Key Switch

Tower Overhoist

Boom/Tower Second Overhoist

Rear Drum Rope End Detector (for EN)

Jib Over-hoist

S8

DG_IN2 SOL_OUT4

Y6

333

SOL_OUT5

Y20

334

R1

DG_IN4

Z16

DG_GND

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

R4

DG_IN10

R17

DG_IN11

R5

DG_IN12

R19

DG_IN15

X2

SENSOR_24V_1

T2

AN_IN18

T10

AN_IN15

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

R8

DG_IN18

R21

DG_IN19

R6

DG_IN14

Jib Backstop Alignment

IDU R20

R11

DG_IN17 DG_IN32

Z13

OC_OUT4

DG_IN33

Z2

OC_OUT5

DG_IN36

Z4

OC_OUT8

DG_IN37

Z15

OC_OUT9

DG_IN24

Main Hook Over-hoist Aux. Hook Over-hoist R9

Jib Second Over-hoist

Shouldering Prevention Tower Damage Prevention

DG_IN20

R24

DG_IN25

R22

DG_IN21

Tower Junction Box

Rear Drum Hoisting Stop Rear Drum Lowering Stop

CAN_0H

X10

CAN_0H

CAN_0L

X21

CAN_0L

Resistance

T5-3-71

Resistance


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Rear Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Insert an ammeter to the connector of rear drum hoisting (or lowering) proportional solenoid. Check if electric current is 702 - 742mA. ½ Key switch: ON ½ All over-hoist switches: Non-over-hoist position

Failure solenoid

YES Harness short circuit between YES Check for continuity

Disconnect connector MCB-5 (and MCB-6) and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of SIG(+) line between MCB-5 (MCB-6, Y14: in NO case of lowering) and solenoid. And check for continuity of SIG(-) line between MCB-5 and solenoid.

MC2/B and solenoid

between SIG(+) and SIG(-) of MCB-5 (and MCB-6).

Faulty MC2/B NO

NO

Key switch: OFF

Broken harness SIG(+) or SIG(-) between MC2/B and solenoid

Connector Rear Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

SIG(+) SIG(-)

Hoisting Lowering

Z11 Y14 (384)

Z7 Z19

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-6 (Harness End)

Z11

Z7 Z19

Y14

T5-3-72


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Rear Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-3 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals Z16 and S8 of harness end connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Rear drum automatic stop override switch: ON

NO

Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect MCB-3, MCB-5 and connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of S8 line between MCB-3 and connector 16P. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P.

YES Faulty rear drum auto

stop override switch

NO

Broken harness S8 or Z16 between MC2/B and left stand panel

Key switch: OFF

Connector Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

S8

Z16

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End)

S8 Z16

T5-3-73


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF THIRD DRUM AUTOMATIC STOP CONTROL SYSTEM (OPTIONAL) When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply." • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the switch and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Item

Signal name

Description

3D_REL_SW Third drum automatic stop override switch REL_KEY_SW Automatic stop override key switch ATTACHMENT Attachment detection signal

BT_OVERH2 JB_OVERH2 HK_OVERH TW_OVERH JB_OVERH 3D_HST_SOL 3D_LWR_SOL

Boom/tower second overhoist Jib second overhoist Hook overhoist Tower overhoist Jib overhoist switch Third drum hoisting stop solenoid Third drum lowering stop solenoid

3D_HST_STP 3D_LWR_STP B/J_LOW_T.

Third drum hoisting stop signal Third drum lowering stop signal Boom/jib shouldering prevention signal

ON/OFF ON/OFF CRANE TOWER ALLOFF ALLON ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON

Normal range (under the following conditions) OFF OFF For crane operation: CRANE For tower operation: TOWER For non-overhoist operations: ON When overhoisting: OFF

ON OFF

ON

ON/OFF

ON

• For check of the limit switch, the attachment wiring and the automatic stop override select key switch, refer to the chapter on "Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Automatic Stop Control System."

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check Switch check Harness check Junction box check Harness check Switch check

Harness check Solenoid check MC2/B hardware check Harness check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-74


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Third Drum Automatic Stop Control System (Optional)

MC2/B

+24V

X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWM_VB MAIN_GND

SOL_OUT6

Y7

SOL_OUT7

Y21

Third Drum Hoisting Solenoid Valve

Third Drum Hoisting Solenoid Valve

GD2

Boom/Tower Second Overhoist

DG_IN3

R1

DG_IN4

Z16

DG_GND

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

R5

DG_IN12

R19

DG_IN15

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

(Crane)

R8

DG_IN18

(Tower)

R21

DG_IN19

R6

DG_IN14

R20

DG_IN17

R11

DG_IN24

R9

DG_IN20

Jib Second Overhoist

R24

DG_IN25

R22

DG_IN21

Tower Junction Box

IDU

CAN_0H

Hook Overhoist

CAN_0L

Jib Overhoist

X21

X10

DG_IN34

Z14

OC_OUT6

Third Drum Hoisting Stop

DG_IN35

Z3

OC_OUT7

Third Drum Lowering Stop

DG_IN36

Z4

OC_OUT8

Shouldering Prevention

J2

CAN_0H

Automatic Stop Override Key Switch

S16

CAN_0L

Third Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch

J1

Resistance

Resistance

T5-3-75


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Third Drum Hoisting / Lowering Solenoid Valve

• Check the wiring connections first.

Faulty solenoid

YES

Disconnect connector of third drum hoisting (or lowering) solenoid valve. Check if voltage between terminals SIG(+) and GND of harness end connector is 24V.

Disconnect connector MCB-6 and connector of solenoid. Check for continuity of SIG(+) line between MCB-6 and NO connector of solenoid. Check for continuity of GND line between connector of solenoid and machine.

½ Key switch: ON ½ Over-hoist switches: Non-over-hoist position

Check for continuity YES between SIG(+) and GND of MCB-6 or harness end of solenoid connector.

YES Harness short between

solenoid and MC2/B Faulty MC2/B NO

Key switch: OFF In case of no continuity at SIG(+) Broken harness SIG(+)

between MC2/B and solenoid

NO

Key switch: OFF

In case of no continuity at GND

Broken harness GND between solenoid and machine

Connector Rear Drum Hoisting / Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

SIG(+)

Hoisting Lowering

Y7 Y21

MC2/B Connector MCB-6 (Harness End)

(B)

Y7

GND GND

Y21

T5-3-76


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Third Drum Automatic Stop Override Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-3 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals S16 and Z16 of harness end connector. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Third Drum automatic stop release switch: ON

NO

Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect MCB-3, MCB-5 and connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of S16 line between MCB-3 and connector 16P. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P.

YES

NO

Faulty third drum auto stop override switch Broken harness S16 or Z16 between MC2/B and left stand panel

Key switch: OFF

Connector Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

S16 Z16

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

S16

Z16

T5-3-77


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF SECOND OVERHOIST AUTOMATIC STOP CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the switch and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Item

Signal name

Description

OH2_REL_SW

Second over-hoist recovery switch

ON/OFF

ATTACHMENT

Attachment detection signal

BM_OVERH2 JB_OVERH2

Boom/tower second over-hoist Jib second over-hoist

OVERH2_SOL

Second over-hoist solenoid valve

CRANE TOWER ALLOFF ALLON ON OFF ALLOFF ALLON ON/OFF

• For checks of the limit switch, the attachment wiring and the auto stop override select key switch, refer to the chapter on "Failure of Boom Derricking Drum Automatic Stop Control System".

Normal range (under the following conditions) OFF For crane operation: CRANE For tower operation: TOWER For non-over-hoist operations: ON When over-hoisting: OFF ON

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check Switch check Harness check Junction box check Harness check Switch check Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-78


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Second Over-hoist Auto Stop Control System MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWM_VB

+24V

MC2/A DG_IN11

PWM_OUT3

Y17

PWM_GND

Y26

Second Over-hoist Solenoid Valve

MAIN_GND

GND

R14

DG_IN5

Z16

DG_GND

X3

SENSOR_24V_2

R5

DG_IN12

R19

DG_IN15

X4

SENSOR_24V_3

(Crane)

R8

DG_IN18

(Tower)

R21

DG_IN19

R24

DG_IN25

R22

DG_IN21

X21

X10

CAN_0H

CAN_0H

Jib Second Over-hoist

IDU

CAN_0L

Boom/Tower Second Over-hoist

CAN_0L

Second Over-hoist Recovery Switch

Tower Junction Box

Resistance

J2

J1

Resistance

T5-3-79


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Second Over-hoist Solenoid Valve System

• Check the wiring connections first.

Faulty solenoid

YES

Disconnect second over-hoist solenoid connector. Check if voltage between terminals Y26 and Y17 of harness end connector is +24V. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Second over-hoist limit switch: Non-over-hoist position

YES Short circuit in

Disconnect MCB-6. Check for continuity of Y17 line between MCB-6 and harness end of solenoid connector. NO Check for continuity of Y26 line between harness end of solenoid connector and machine. ½ Key switch: OFF

harness between MC2/B and solenoid

Check for continuity YES between Y17 and Y26 of harness end of MCB-6 or solenoid connector.

Faulty MC2/B NO

½ Key switch: OFF

In case of no continuity at Y17

NO In case of no continuity at Y26

Broken harness Y17 between MC2/B and solenoid Broken harness Y26 between solenoid and machine

Connector

Second over-hoist solenoid valve (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-6 (Harness End)

Y17 Y26

Y17

T5-3-80

Y26


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Second Over-hoist Recovery Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Faulty MC2/B

Disconnect connectors MCB-4 and MCB-5. Check for continuity between terminals Z16 and R14 of harness end connector. ½ Second over-hoist

YES

Disconnect connector 16P of left stand panel. Check for continuity of R14 line between MCB-4 and connector 16P. Check for continuity of Z16 line between MCB-5 and connector 16P.

NO

recovery switch: ON

NO

½ Key switch: OFF ½ MCB-4 and MCB-5 are disconnected.

Faulty second over-hoist recovery switch Broken harness R14 or Z16 between MC2/B and left stand panel

Connector Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

R14

Z16

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End)

Z16

R14

T5-3-81


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF FRONT AND REAR MOTOR SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses.

HM_FIX_SW

Slow speed fix switch

ON/OFF

FD_CTRL_SP RD_CTRL_SP FM_CAP_CUR

Front speed control dial Rear speed control dial Front motor displacement angle control proportional solenoid valve Rear motor displacement angle control proportional solenoid valve

x.xx V

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) OFF Harness check Switch check 0.64 to 0.93 Harness check

xxxx mA

649 to 689

Item

RM_CAP_CUR

Signal name

Description

Harness check Solenoid valve check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWM_VB

6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

+24V

MAIN_GND Y26

Y1

PWMOUT6-

Z8

PWMOUT7+

Y15

PWMOUT7-

Z20

Front Motor Displacement Angle Control Proportional Solenoid Valve

PWM_GND

X5

SENSOR_5V

X14

SENSOR_GND_5

Front Speed Control Dial

S5

AN_IN0

Rear Speed Control Dial

S13

AN_IN1

IDU

CAN_0H

DG_GND

CAN_0L

Z16

CAN_0H

DG_IN7

Rear Motor Displacement Angle Control Proportional Solenoid Valve

CAN_0L

R15

Slow Speed Fix Switch

PWMOUT6+

X21

X10

J2

J1

Resistance

Resistance

T5-3-82


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Front / Rear Drum Speed Control Dial

• Check the wiring connections first.

Connect disconnected YES connector.

Disconnect connector MCB-3. YES Check for continuity of S5 line between MCB-3 and harness end connector of the dial. ½ Key switch: OFF

Check if voltage between terminal S5 of MCB-3 and machine is 0.64 to 0.93V.

½ Key switch: ON NO

Check if voltage between X14 and YES X5 of harness Check for continuity end connector of the dial is 5±0.5V. YES between terminal Disconnect connector X14 of harness end of front (or rear) drum ½ Key switch: ON connector of the dial Check if voltage between speed control dial. and machine. X5 of harness end Check for continuity ½ Key switch: OFF connector of the dial and between terminals NO machine is 5±0.5V. X14 and X5 of speed control dial connector ½ Key switch: ON of dial side. NO

YES Faulty MC2/B

Faulty dial NO

Broken harness S5 between MC2/B and dial YES Faulty MC2/B

Broken harness X14 between MC2/B and NO dial Broken harness X5 between MC2/B and dial

½ Key switch: OFF Faulty dial NO

Connector Front / Rear Drum Speed Control Dial (Harness End) GND

+5V X14 X5 S5

Front Rear

S5 S13

MC2/B Connector MCB-3 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-1 (Harness End)

S5

X5 X14

S13

T5-3-83


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Front / Rear Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Insert an ammeter to front (or rear) motor proportional solenoid connector. Check if electric current is 649 to 689mA. ½ Key switch: ON

Faulty solenoid

YES

Disconnect MCB-5, MCB-6 and solenoid connector. Check for continuity of SIG(+) line between MCB-6 and connector of solenoid. NO Check for continuity of SIG(-) line between MCB-5 and connector of solenoid. ½ Key switch: OFF ½ Remove the ammeter.

Check for continuity of YES SIG(+) and SIG(-) of harness end connector of solenoid. ½ Key switch: OFF

Faulty MC2/B NO

NO

Connector Winch Motor Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

SIG(+) SIG(-)

Front Rear

SIG(+) Y1 Y15

SIG(-) Z8 Z20

MC2/B Connector MCB-6 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

Y1

Z8 Z20

Y15

T5-3-84

Harness short circuit between MC2/B and solenoid

Broken harness SIG(+) or SIG(-) between MC2/B and solenoid


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Slow Speed Fix Switch System

• Check the wiring connections first.

Faulty MC2/B

YES

Disconnect connectors MCB-4 and MCB-5 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminals R15 and Z16 of harness end connector. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Slow speed fix switch: ON

Disconnect side overhead panel connector. Check for continuity of R15 line between side overhead panel and MCB-4. NO Check for continuity of Z16 line between side overhead panel and MCB-5.

YES Faulty switch

NO

Broken harness R15 or Z16 between MC2/B and side overhead panel

½ Key switch: OFF ½ MCB-4 and MCB-5 are disconnected.

Connector Side Overhead Panel Connector 16F-W (Harness End)

Z16 R15

MC2/B Connector MCB-5 (Harness End)

MC2/B Connector MCB-4 (Harness End)

Z16

R15

T5-3-85


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF BOOM DERRICKING DRUM SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/A, MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Boom derricking drum speed control dial

x.xx V

Normal range Countermeasure for (under the following abnormality conditions) 0.64 to 0.93 Harness check

Boom derricking drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Boom derricking drum lowering proportional solenoid valve

xxxx mA

739 to 779

Item

Signal name

DD_CTRL_SP (MC 2/A) DD_HST_CUR DD_LWR_CUR

Description

• Refer to the chapter "Failure of Boom Derricking

Harness check Solenoid valve check MC2/B hardware check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running.

Drum Automatic Stop Control System" to check the boom derricking drum hoisting / lowering proportional solenoid valves.

2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWMOUT0+

Z9

PWMOUT0-

Z5

PWM_VB

PWMOUT1+

Z21

MAIN_GND

PWMOUT1-

Z17

+24V

Y26

Derricking Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Derricking Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

PWM_GND Resistance

Resistance

MC2/A

Derricking Speed Control Dial

D5

SENSOR_5V

B4

AN_IN12

D14

SOL_OUT0

Y4

329

SOL_OUT1

Y18

330

SENSOR_GND_5

X10

CAN_0H

CAN_0H

X21

CAN_0L

CAN_0L

D21

CAN_0H

CAN_0L

IDU

D10

Resistance

J2

J1

Resistance

T5-3-86


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Boom Derricking Drum Speed Control Dial Note The “dial” means “boom derricking drum speed control dial”.

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES Faulty MC2/A Connect disconnected YES connector. Check if voltage between Disconnect connector Faulty dial B4 of MCA-3 and MCA-3. machine is 0.64 to 0.93V. NO YES Check for continuity of ½ Key switch: ON B4 line between ½ Insert a test bar into the rear MCA-3 and harness face of the connector. end connector of dial. Broken harness B4 between MC2/A and ½ Key switch: OFF NO Check if voltage dial YES between D14 and D5 of harness end connector of YES Faulty MC2/A Check for continuity dial is 5±0.5V. YES between D14 of ½ Key switch: ON Disconnect harness end connector connector of boom Broken harness D14 Check if voltage of dial and machine. derricking drum between MC2/A and between D5 of harness NO dial speed control dial. ½ Key switch: OFF end connector of dial NO Check for continuity and machine is 5±0.5V. between terminals Broken harness D5 ½ Key switch: ON D14 and D5 of dial. between MC2/A and NO dial ½ Key switch: OFF

Faulty dial NO

Connector Boom Derricking Drum Speed Control Dial (Harness End) +5V

GND D14 D5 B4

MC2/A Connector MCA-3 (Harness End)

MC2/A Connector MCA-1 (Harness End)

B4

D5 D14

T5-3-87


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF TOWER JIB DERRICKING 2-SPEED (FLOW COMBINING) RESTRICTING SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of MC2/B are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of MC2/B Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the MC2/B input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Item

Signal name

ATTACHMENT

Attachment detection signal

RD_HST_CUR

Rear drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve Rear drum lowering proportional solenoid valve

RD_LWR_CUR

Description CRANE TOWER ALLOFF ALLON xxxx mA

Normal range (under the following conditions) For crane operation: CRANE For tower operation: TOWER 702 to 742

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check Junction box check Harness check Solenoid valve check MC2/B hardware check

• For checks of the rear drum hoisting proportional solenoid valve and the rear drum lowering proportional solenoid valve, refer to the chapter on "Failure of Rear Drum Automatic Stop Control System".

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

T5-3-88


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Failure of Tower Jib Derricking 2-Speed (Flow Combining) Restricting System

MC2/B X1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

+24V Y12

SOL_VB

Y13

PWM_VB

PWMOUT4+

Z11

PWMOUT4-

Z7

Rear Drum Hoisting Proportional Solenoid Valve Drum Lock Switch

PWMOUT5+

Y14

PWMOUT5-

Z19

384

MAIN_GND Y26

Rear Drum Lowering Proportional Solenoid Valve

PWM_GND

Resistance

Resistance

SENSOR_24V_3

R8

DG_IN18

R21

DG_IN19

SOL_OUT5

Y20

334

IDU

X21

X10

J2

CAN_0H

CAN_0L

Tower Junction Box

333

CAN_0L

(Tower)

X4

Y6

CAN_0H

(Crane)

SOL_OUT4

J1

Resistance

Resistance

T5-3-89


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF EXTERNAL MOMENT LIMITER INDICATOR CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the batteries and sensor power supply of the IDU are all normal. • If any errors are indicated, refer to "Failure of IDU Batteries and Sensor Power Supply". • Using the IDU input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses.

Item

Signal name

Description

External moment limiter indicator Green Yellow Red Auto stop override key switch

GREEN_LMP YELLOW_LMP RED_LMP REL_KEY_SW (MC2 / B)

Normal range (under the following conditions)

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Countermeasure for abnormality Harness check

ON OFF OFF OFF

Harness check Switch check

Conditions of the normal range 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions. 390

IDU M1

MAIN_B

M18

KEY_SW

DC_OUT10

N1

External Moment Limiter Indicator Relay External 3-color indicator

Green

+24V 391

MAIN_GND1 MAIN_GND2

Green DC_OUT11

N14

Yellow 392

Yellow DC_OUT12

N2

Red 393

Red

T5-3-90


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of External Moment Limiter Indicator System

• Check the wiring connections first.

YES

Disconnect connector YES IDU-5.

Disconnect relay of external indicator. Check if voltage of terminal 390 of relay socket is +24V.

Check for continuity of line N( ) between relay socket and IDU-5.

Connect relay. YES Connect terminal N( ) of relay to machine. Check if external indicator illuminates. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Insert test bar into rear face of the connector.

Faulty IDU

YES

A

Check if voltage of terminal SIG NO of relay is 24V. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Connect terminal

Faulty relay NO

N( ) to ground.

½ Key switch: OFF

Broken harness between IDU and relay

NO

Broken harness between fuse and relay, or blown fuse

½ Key switch: ON NO

YES Faulty external indicator

A

Check for continuity of line SIG between external indicator and relay. ½ Key switch: OFF

(blown bulb) Broken harness between external NO indicator and relay

Connector IDU Connector IDU-5 (Harness End)

External Moment Limiter Indicator Relay Socket (Harness End) N( )

390 SIG 390

Green Yellow Red

N( ) N N14 N2

N1 N2 N14

SIG 391 392 393

T5-3-91


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A FAILURE OF OIL COOLING FAN ROTATION CONTROL SYSTEM When abnormal • Using the power supply monitor, check if the IDU batteries and sensor power supply are all normal. • Using the IDU input/output monitor, confirm the sensor and solenoid valve signal statuses. IDU Item MAIN_B 24V 5V 10V HYD_THM OIL_CL_FAN

Signal Name

Normal range Countermeasure (under the following for abnormality conditions) Harness check 24.00 to 32.00 21.60 to 26.40 4.97 to 5.03 9.98 to 10.02 0.24 to 4.34 Harness check ON Harness check

Description xx.xx V xx.xx V x.xx V xx.xx V x.xx V ON / OFF

Main battery voltage Switch power supply Analog sensor power supply Load cell power supply Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Oil cooling fan operating relay

Normal signal states Oil temperature Over 40°C Up to 40°C

IDU input temperature sensor Under 1.7V Over 1.7V

IDU output fan stop

Solenoid power supply

Fan

OFF ON

OFF ON

Rotating Stopped

(NOTE) The conditions may not match the above table between 35°C (95 qF) and 40°C (104 qF).

Normal range conditions 1. The engine is running. 2. The auto stop is not operating. 3. The gate lock is in the lock position. 4. All the levers are in the neutral positions. 5. All the dials and pedals are in the minimum positions. 6. All the switches are in the normal or OFF positions.

IDU

Hydraulic oil temperature sensor

M15

SENS_GND_5

N10

ANL_IN4

OC_OUT13

210

N15

309

+24V Fuse (#34) 394 Oil cooling fan relay (R10)

T5-3-92

Oil cooling fan solenoid


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A Check of Oil Cooling Fan Operating System If the oil cooling fan does not rotate: • Check the wiring connections first. • Check fuse (31). • Check temperature of hydraulic oil. Cooling fan rotates over about 40 degrees C.

Check if oil cooling

Connect cooling fan solenoid connector. YES Swap oil cooling fan relay (R10) and mast Check if voltage lowering relay (R4). Check if fan rotates. YES between terminal N15 of harness end of ½ Engine: start solenoid connector and machine is 24V. Disconnect oil Faulty solenoid YES cooling fan solenoid ½ Key switch: ON ½ Fan solenoid connector is NO connector. disconnected. Check if fan rotates. ½ Engine: started

YES fan relay signal on

Check if oil temperature sensor output is 1.7V or less. ½ Key switch: ON ½ Read IDU input monitor.

the IDU output monitor is OFF.

A

Faulty cooling fan motor, pump or solenoid valve

NO

Faulty IDU

½ Key switch: ON NO

Faulty sensor or harness NO

YES

Faulty relay

YES Short circuit harness YES Check for continuity

Disconnect cooling fan relay. Check for continuity NO between terminal N15 of relay socket and machine. ½ Key switch: OFF

Connector Oil cooling fan relay (R10) (Harness End) (2) N15

N15 and ground between relay and IDU.

Disconnect IDU-5.

A

between N15 of relay socket and machine. ½ Key switch: OFF Disconnect cooling fan solenoid connector. Check if voltage NO between 394 of relay socket is 24V. ½ Key switch: ON

Faulty IDU NO YES Short circuit harness 394

with 24V between relay and solenoid.

Faulty relay NO

Oil cooling fan solenoid valve connector (Harness End)

309 (1)

394 (B)

394 (5) 309 (3)

(1)

(2)

GND

Oil temperature sensor output Temperature 120°C (248qF) 70°C (158qF) 40°C (104qF) 20°C (68qF) -30°C (-22qF)

Output voltage 0.25V 0.8V 1.7V 2.5V 4.3V

IDU Connector IDU-5 (Harness End)

N15

T5-3-93


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A (Blank)

T5-3-94


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TROUBLESHOOTING B PROCEDURE Troubleshooting B procedures are used for failure diagnosis based on trouble phenomena.

x How to read troubleshooting flowchart YES (OK)

According to the result of inspection or measurement in (1), select YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK), and go to the next step (2) or (3).

(1)

NO (NOT OK)

࡮ · Key switch: ON

(2)

(3)

Under the box, inspection or measurement method, or reference may be added. Be careful that if incorrect inspection or measuring method will make it difficult to find the cause of failure, or may damage the equipment.

A bold line box shows a cause of failure. The description in the bold-lined box helps you locate a possible cause of failure.

NOTE: All connector drawings show the connecting side of the harness end connector. (as seen from the arrow)

Harness

T6L4-05-03-001

T5-4-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TROUBLESHOOTING LIST Failure sections

Failure phenomena E-1 Starter does not run.

Engine system

E-2 Poor engine starting ability at low temperature. (no preheating) E-3 Engine continues to idle, and the accelerator cannot be operated. E-4 Engine does not stop.

Actuator system

A-1 Two or more actuators do not work. A-2 An actuator does not stop, even when the control lever is moved to neutral. M-1 Drum does not rotate.

Hoisting drum system

M-2 When the hoisting lever is neutral, the load lowers (in automatic brake mode). M-3 Unable to perform free-fall when setting brake mode switch to the Free Mode position. (free fall winch)

Boom derricking drum system

B-1 Drum does not rotate.

Swing system

S-1 The swing speed is too slow, or swing is does not move.

Traveling system

T-1 One of the tracks does not move, the traveling speed is too slow, or the path of traveling is not straight. T-2 Travel speed cannot be shifted. O-1 Drum lock does not work. O-2 Live mast cylinder cannot be extended or retracted.

Others

O-3 Counterweight cylinder cannot be extended or retracted. O-4 Jack cylinder or side frame connecting cylinder cannot be extended or retracted. O-5 Boom foot pin cylinder cannot be extended or retracted.

T5-4-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)

T5-4-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ENGINE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING E-1 Starter does not run.

• The engine will not start unless the following conditions are met for the sake of safety when starting the engine. Please verify these conditions. • Turning the key with brake (2) or (3) released will cause the brake caution lamp to light up. 1) Emergency engine stop switch: released 2) Swing brake switch: brake position 3) Front drum and rear drum brake mode switch: auto brake (with free fall winch). • The engine can be started when a start allowance signal (E20) to the starter relay from MC2/A. • Check wiring connections first. • Controller signals can be checked at the input monitor: Front drum mode switch FD_FREE_SW Rear drum mode switch RD_FREE_SW Swing brake switch SL_BRK_SW Engine-start interlock ENG.INTLCK Start interlock lamp INTLCK_LP Go to engine system troubleshooting.

YES

YES

YES Check if ECU error is displayed.

YES Check if voltage of

Check if voltage of second end of NO battery relay is 24V.

Check if fusible link 65A, 45A and fuses (17), (20), (21), and (40) are normal.

· Key switch: ON

key switch C terminal is 24V.

½ Key switch: START

½ Key switch: start ½ Insert a test bar into the

Check if voltage of starter motor terminal B is 24V.

Faulty key switch NO

rear of connector

½ Key switch: ON NO

Go to power source system troubleshooting. Blown fuse

NO

Connector Key switch connector (Harness End) Key switch terminal C 203

T5-4-4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Connector

Safety relay (R17) (Harness End)

Starter relay 206

Engine start relay (R3) (Harness End)

215 72

212

88

E

E20 143

E (L)

212 (SW)

A5

143 (B)

(S)

YES

Check if voltage

Faulty starter relay, or faulty ground (terminal L)

YES of starter relay

terminal SW is over 24V.

Check if voltage

YES of starter relay

Check if voltage YES of starter relay terminal S is over 24V. · Key switch: START

terminal B is over 24V. Check if voltage

· Key switch: START

Check if voltage of safety relay terminal NO 212 is over 24V. · Key switch: START

NO

· Key switch: ON

Broken harness between starter relay and starter motor Broken harness between battery relay and starter motor

YES of starter motor

terminal S is over 24V.

A

NO

· Key switch: START

Faulty starter motor, faulty connection of cables, or faulty ground

NO

Broken harness of starter main cable, or faulty connection

NO

Broken harness line 212

YES

YES

A Check if voltage of terminal 143 of safety NO relay is over 24V. · Key switch: START

T5-4-5

Faulty safety relay

YES Go to faulty engine

Check if voltage of terminal 143 of NO engine start relay is over 24V. · Key switch: START

start interlock control system.

· Key switch: START Broken harness line NO 143


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Power Supply System Failure

Broken harness between battery relay and starter motor

YES

Broken harness between battery and ground

YES

Disconnect harness 206 of battery relay Check if voltage of relay terminal is 24V or more.

Connect harness 206. Connect (-) terminal of YES battery to machine. Check if voltage between machine and terminal B of starter motor is 24V or more.

· Key switch: ON

· Key switch: ON

Check if battery fluid and voltage NO are normal.

Disconnect harness YES 264 of battery relay.

Disconnect harness from (+) terminal of battery, and connect it to machine. Disconnect connector NO of key switch. Check for continuity between terminal B of harness end connector and machine.

Connect it to machine. Check for continuity between terminal ACC of harness end of key switch connector and machine.

A

Broken harness between battery and key switch

NO

Faulty battery NO

Connector Key Switch (Harness End) Terminal B YES

203 201 204

Terminal ACC

A

Connect disconnected connector. YES Check if voltage between machine and terminal ACC of key switch is 24V or more. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the

Connect ground terminal of YES battery relay to machine. Check if voltage between machine and terminal B of starter motor is 24V or more. · Key switch: ON

Broken harness between battery relay and ground Faulty battery relay

NO

Faulty key switch NO

back side of connector. NO

T5-4-6

Broken harness between key switch and battery relay, or blown fuse


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Check of key switch and battery system

Broken harness between battery and ground or faulty ground.

YES

YES Broken harness between

Connect (-) terminal of battery to machine. YES Check if voltage between terminal 206 of harness end of battery relay and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

Connect ground terminal of battery relay to YES machine. Check if voltage between terminal 206 of harness end of battery relay and machine is 24V. Check if voltage between terminal of line 200 harness end NO of battery relay and machine is 24V.

Check if battery voltage and specific gravity of battery fluid are normal.

· Key switch: ON

battery relay and ground.

Disconnect line 264 harness of battery relay. Check if voltage NO between terminal of harness end and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON

A

· Key switch: ON NO

Broken harness between battery and battery relay Faulty battery

NO

Faulty battery relay

YES

A

Broken harness between key switch and battery relay

YES

Check if voltage between ACC NO terminal of key switch and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON · Insert test bar into rear of connector

YES Faulty key switch

Check if voltage between terminal B of NO key switch and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON · Insert test bar into rear of connector

Connector Key switch connector (Harness End) Terminal B 203 201

Terminal ACC

204

T5-4-7

Broken harness between NO key switch and battery


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B E-2 Poor engine starting ability at low temperature (no preheating)

• Turning key switch to ON when coolant is under 0°C will automatically start preheating.

• If coolant is warmer than 0°C, it will not preheat. • Preheating time changes with coolant temperature.

• The preheat lamp will light up 5 to 20 seconds after turning the key switch to ON.

• If an abnormality is indicated by the ECU lamp, proceed to engine system troubleshooting.

• Check wiring connections first. • Check heater relay fuses. Faulty heater, faulty ground or broken harness between heater relay and heater

YES

YES Check if voltage of

Check if voltage of heater relay signal terminal is 24V.

YES

· Heater lamp lit. Check if voltage of input terminal of NO heater relay is 24V.

Check if coolant temperature is below 0°C.

Faulty heater relay, faulty relay ground or faulty heater fuse

YES

heater relay output terminal is 24V.

· Key switch: ON

Check if voltage of heater relay drive NO relay output terminal (216) is 24V.

A

· Heater lamp lit

· Key switch: ON Broken heater power source line

NO

Check again with coolant below 0°C.

NO

YES

Broken harness line 216

A Check if voltage of heater relay drive relay NO input terminal (208) is 24V.

Connector Heater relay drive relay (R26) (Harness End)

· Key switch: ON

(4) (2)

18

96

(1)

216 (5) 208 (3)

T5-4-8

YES

NO

Faulty heater relay drive relay Broken harness line 208


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B E-3 Engine continues to idle, and the accelerator cannot be operated.

• If there is no signal from the accelerator MC2/A does not output the accelerator signal to ECU and ECU error 16 and 24 are displayed. • If the controller abnormality warning lamp is lit, errors other than "accelerator signal" may also be problems. Check ECU error codes. • If the ECU error code is "Accelerator Sensor Abnormality," operating the accelerator setting switch will save the internal engine speed. (This function only operates when abnormality present.) • Check wiring connections first.

Over 4.9V

Disconnect ECU

Harness is shorting with power supply

From 0.9V to 4.1V

Refer to engine troubleshooting.

YES connector and

check accelerator signal voltage of harness end.

Check if ECU error lamp indicates YES accelerator sensor abnormality (code 16, 24).

· Key switch: ON · Turn accelerator grip or depress pedal.

YES Disconnect connector MCA-3 of MC2/A. Check for continuity of Under B6 line between MCA-3 0.2V and ECU2 connector. NO

Check if ECU error lamp is lit.

Broken harness between ECU and MC2/A

Go to engine troubleshooting.

NO

· Key Switch: ON

Faulty MC2/A

Check accelerator grip (and pedal), and MC2/A. Go to engine control system troubleshooting.

NO

Connector Connector ECU2 (Harness End) Pedal (115)

MC2/A Connector MCA-3 (Harness End) Grip Grip (101) B6 B14

B14 B6 B14 B6 (144)

(158) Pedal

Grip

T5-4-9

Pedal


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B E-4 Engine does not stop

• Turning off the rotation allowance circuit (line 158) to the ECU with the key switch stops the engine. • To emergency stop the engine, disconnecting the connector connected to ECU will stop fuel injection stopping the engine. • Check wiring connections first.

Go to engine troubleshooting.

YES

Reset emergency engine

YES

Faulty key switch

NO

Harness short of line 204 and +24V.

YES stop switch.

Check if ECU error lamp is lit.

Turn key switch OFF. Check if engine stopped.

· Key switch: OFF Press emergency engine stop switch. NO Check if engine stopped. · Key switch: OFF

· Key switch: OFF YES

Reset emergency engine stopNO switch. Remove fuse (20). NO Check if engine stopped. · Key switch: OFF

Harness short of line 208 and +24V.

YES

Remove fuse (19). NO Check if engine stopped. · Key switch: OFF

YES Harness short of

Remove fuse (17). NO Check if engine stopped. · Key switch: OFF

T5-4-10

Harness short of line 224 or following harness, and +24V line.

line 202 and +24V. Harness short of NO line 158 and +24V.


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ACTUATOR SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING A-1 Two or more actuators do not work. • The pilot circuit (pilot pump, gate lock valve, etc.) or relief valves may be faulty. • If the hoisting, lowering and boom derricking (lowering) drums do not work, refer to “Troubleshooting A” and “Troubleshooting D”.

YES

YES

Faulty main pump

NO

Incorrect main relief valve pressure setting

Check if main relief pressure of valve for abnormal operation is normal.

· Refer to "Performance Measurement". YES Check if primary pilot

circuit pressure is normal. YES

· Refer to "Performance Measurement".

Check if gate lock valve, pressure reducing valve and NO second over hoist solenoid valve of the solenoid unit is normal.

Check if gate lock lever on and emergency stop switches are in unlock positions.

· Disassemble.

· Gate lock lever: Pulled · Emergency stop switch: OFF

Faulty gate lock valve, faulty pressure reducing valve or second over hoist solenoid valve of solenoid unit Faulty pilot pump

NO

Turn gate lock lever and emergency stop switches to unlocked positions.

NO

A-2 An actuator does not stop, even when the control lever is moved to neutral. • The spool in the remote control valve or the control valve may be stuck.

YES

Faulty remote control valve · Although control lever is in neutral, pilot oil pressure

Check if the actuator stops when the gate lock lever is moved to the locked position.

is being transmitted to control valve (spool).

Faulty control valve NO

· Although pilot oil pressure is not being transmitted to control valve (spool), oil passage is open, due to sticking, etc.

T5-4-11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B HOISTING DRUM SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING M-1 Drum does not rotate. • Check the wiring connections first. • If the pilot pump, the pressure-reducing valve of the 5-spool solenoid valve unit, or the gate lock valve are faulty, not only drum rotation, but also travel and swing, are deactivated. • When the safety device or the drum lock motor is operating, the drum stops.

Notes 28.3MPa = 4100psi 31.4MPa = 4550psi 4.9MPa = 711psi

Refer to "Troubleshooting A” and “Troubleshooting D". YES Faulty hoisting motor YES Check if pressure of port PR of hoisting motor is 4.9MPa. YES Check if output pressure

from control valve is 28.3 to 31.4MPa.

· Attach a pressure gauge to YES Check if secondary

Remove piping from solenoid unit port A5, and attach pressure gauge. Check if output pressure is 4.9MPa.

pilot pressure is normal. · Refer to

port a or b of the counter balance valve of the hoisting motor. Port a: During hoisting Port b: During lowering

Faulty motor brake NO release valve

NO

"Performance Measurement".

Stuck spool in control valve or proportional solenoid valve

Faulty remote control valve

NO

Faulty second over-hoist solenoid valve

NO

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Port PR (G1/4)

Second over-hoist solenoid valve

Port a (G3/8)

Port A5

Port b (G3/8) M2CG-07-063 T2CG-05-04-001

T5-4-12


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B M-2 When the hoisting lever is neutral, the load lowers. (When in automatic brake mode) • The hoisting drum brake or the hoisting motor multi-disc brake may not be engaged. • Refer to "Troubleshooting A".

Winch with free fall

Faulty drum brake release solenoid valve

YES

YES

Check if output pressure of drum brake release solenoid valve is 0MPa.

· Attach a pressure gauge to port A of the drum brake release solenoid valve.

Depress brake pedal. Check if load lowers.

YES

Check if pressure of port PR of hoisting NO motor is 0MPa. NO

Faulty hoisting motor multi-disc brake Faulty hoisting motor brake release solenoid valve

Faulty drum brake NO

Winch without free fall

Port PR (G1/4)

Drum Brake Release Solenoid Valve

Port P (G3/8) Port A (G3/8)

3 2

1 Hoisting Motor T

3

T2CG-05-04-001

2

1

T5-4-13


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B M-3 Unable to perform free-fall when setting brake mode switch to the Free Mode position (free fall winch) • Check wiring connections first. • Cannot switch into free mode when tower derricking drum or secondary hoist solenoid valve are stopped. • Check troubleshooting A as well.

Notes 6.9MPa = 1000psi

YES Faulty drum brake YES Check if pressure of A port

of brake release solenoid valve is 6.9MPa.

· Disconnect piping from drum brake YES Check if primary pressure

of brake circuit is normal (6.9MPa). · Refer to property

· · · ·

release solenoid valve A port and attach a pressure gauge. Engine on Brake mode switch: ON (free position) Brake pedal: not depressed Drum free mode switch: ON

NO

Faulty brake release solenoid valve

measurement guide

Check if brake mode switch procedure is correct. · Engine on · Gate lock lever: pulled

Check pilot pump or gate lock valve.

NO

(operating position)

Try again using the correct free mode setting procedure.

· Brake mode key switch: ON (free position) · Brake pedal depressed · Brake mode switch: ON

NO

Drum brake solenoid valve

Port P (G3/8) Port A (G3/8)

3 2

1

3 2

T

1

T5-4-14


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B BOOM DERRICKING DRUM SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Boom Derricking Drum Lock

B-1 Drum does not rotate. • Check the wiring connections first. • If the pilot pump, the pressure-reducing valve of the 5-spool solenoid valve unit, or the gate lock valve are faulty, not only drum rotation, but also travel and swing, are deactivated. • When the safety device is operating, the drum stops. Refer to "Troubleshooting A” and “Troubleshooting D".

Ball Joint Torsion Spring

YES Faulty boom

Notes 28.3MPa = 4100psi 34.5MPa = 5000psi 4.9MPa = 711psi

Check if primary circuit pressure is normal.

YES Check if

derricking motor

derricking drum Remove piping from lock is normal. solenoid unit port A2, Faulty boom YES and attach pressure NO derricking drum lock gauge. Check if pressure is Faulty derricking drum 4.9MPa. Check if pressure YES of derricking release solenoid valve NO motor is 28.3 to Remove piping 34.5MPa. Faulty proportional from solenoid unit · Attach pressure solenoid valve of YES port A5, and attach gauge to boom remote control line, or NO pressure gauge. derricking motor. faulty boom derricking Check if pressure Port AM: hoisting remote control valve is 4.9MPa. Port BM: lowering Faulty second overhoist solenoid

NO

· Refer to "Performance Measurement".

M2CG-07-062

From Port A5 of 5-spool Solenoid Valve Unit

Faulty pressure reducing valve of solenoid unit

NO

Boom Derricking Drum

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Port A2

Port A5 Pressure reducing valve

Port b (G3/8)

M2CG-07-063

Port a (G3/8)

T5-4-15

M2CG-07-057


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Port a (G1/4)

Port b (G1/4)

SWING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Port b (G1/4)

S-1 The swing speed is too slow, or swing is does not move.

Port a (G1/4)

• Check the wiring connections first. • If the pilot pump, the pressure-reducing valve of the 5-spool solenoid valve unit, or the gate lock valve are faulty, not only swing, but also travel and drum rotation, are deactivated. Notes 28.7MPa = 5610psi 31.9MPa = 4630psi 4.9MPa = 711psi

M2CG-07-059

YES Faulty swing motor YES

Check if pressure of 5-spool solenoid unit port A3 is 4.9MPa.

Check if voltage between terminal #2 of NO swing lever connector to port A3 of 5-spool and machine is 24V. solenoid valve unit. · Insert a test bar into rear of · Swing brake switch: ON · Attach a pressure gauge

YES Check if motor input

pressure is 28.7 to 31.9MPa.

the connector.

· Key switch: ON

· Attach a pressure gauge to swing motor.

Check if relief

· Port b: right swing · Port a: left swing

YES pressure of swing

control valve is 28.7 to 31.9MPa.

Faulty swing control valve

NO

· Attach a pressure gauge Check if secondary pilot pressure of swing remote control valve is normal.

to pressure gauge port of swing control valve.

YES

Check if the swing pump displacement angle proportional NO solenoid valve is normal. Refer to the chapter on "Failure of Swing Pump Control System".

· Refer to

NO

"Performance Measurement".

Faulty swing pump

Faulty MC2/A, or harness between MC2/A and swing pump proportional solenoid valve Faulty swing remote control valve

NO

Swing Control Valve

b2 (Right Swing)

5-Spool Solenoid Valve Unit Swing Brake Solenoid Valve

Pressure Gauge Port G 1/4

a2 (Left Swing)

T2CG-01-02-027

Port A3 M2CG-07-063

T5-4-16


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B

YES

Disconnect connector of swing lever. YES Connect terminals #2 and #8 of harness end connector. Check if pressure of solenoid unit port A2 is 4.9MPa. · Key switch: ON

Faulty swing brake switch

YES Faulty swing brake Check for continuity solenoid valve YES between terminal #2 of harness end connector of swing brake solenoid Broken harness Connect disconnected connector. and machine. between swing brake Disconnect connector of swing NO solenoid and ground, or brake solenoid. faulty ground NO Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V. Broken harness between swing brake · Key switch: ON solenoid and swing · Swing brake switch: ON NO brake switch

Broken harness between swing brake switch and battery

NO

Connector Swing Lever (Harness End)

Swing Brake Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

+24V 1 )

GND 4)

301

A18

E11 F7

E17 䋨 B 䋩 (1)

(1)

(2)

MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

(1) (14)

Swing Pump Displacement Angle Proportional Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

(13) E17

(26)

T5-4-17

(2)


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TRAVELING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING T-1 One of the tracks does not move, the traveling speed is too slow, or the path of traveling is not straight. • If the pilot pump, the pressure reducing valve of the 5-spool solenoid valve unit, or the gate lock valve are faulty, not only travel, but also swing and drum rotation, are deactivated. • If one of the tracks does not move, the remote control valve, the control valve, the travel motor, the rotating joint or the pump may be faulty. YES

Swap left and right travel hoses YES on rotating joint. Check if failure phenomenon is reversed. Check if secondary travel pilot pressure is normal. · Refer to "Performance Measurement".

Stuck spool in the control valve

Disassemble and YES Faulty travel motor or travel speed clean servo piston reduction gear YES of travel motor. Disassemble and Check if failure clean counterbalance Faulty travel motor phenomenon YES valve of travel motor. NO servo piston occurs again. Check if failure phenomenon occurs Faulty again. Check if travel counterbalance NO relief pressure valve NO of slower track is normal. YES Faulty relief valve Swap left and right travel relief valves. NO Check if failure phenomenon Faulty rotating joint is reversed. NO

Faulty remote control valve

NO

Rotating Joint

Left Travel (Reverse)

A D

Left Travel (Forward)

Right Travel (Forward)

B

C

Right Travel (Reverse)

T25N-05-04-006

T5-4-18


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B T-2 Travel speed cannot be shifted.

Notes 4.9MPa = 711psi

• Check wiring and hose connections first. YES YES Check if input pressure

of travel motor port PS is 4.9MPa.

Loose quick coupling

· Attach tee and pressure Check if output YES pressure of port A4 gauge to travel motor port PS. of solenoid unit is · Travel speed switch: 4.9MPa. Check for continuity high speed · Attach pressure gauge YES between terminal #2 of to solenoid unit port A4. harness end connector NO · Travel speed switch: of travel high speed high speed solenoid and machine. Disconnect connector of travel high speed solenoid of solenoid unit. Check if voltage of terminal #1 of harness end connector is 24V.

NO of hydraulic hose

Faulty travel high speed solenoid valve Broken harness between travel high speed solenoid and ground.

NO

Broken harness YES between travel speed

Check for continuity between YES terminals 265 and 266 of

· Travel speed switch: high Disconnect connector 16P of side overhead panel. Check if voltage between NO terminal 265 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

speed

Faulty travel motor turn switch composition

harness end of connector 16P of side overhead panel. · 7UDYHO VSHHG VZLWFK KLJK VSHHG

switch and battery, or blown fuse. Faulty travel speed NO switch

Broken harness line 265

NO

Connector

Side overhead panel connector 16P (Harness End)

Travel high speed solenoid valve (Harness End) GND 266 䋨B䋩 (1)

(2)

(1) 265

(7)

266

(8)

(16)

5-spool solenoid valve unit Travel motor

M2CG-07-010

High speed switch port (G 1/4)

T5-4-19

Port A4 M2CG-07-063


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING 0-1 Drum lock does not work (front drum, rear drum) • Check the wiring connections first. Check power supply for drum lock motor. YES

A

Check for continuity between terminal YES #4 of harness end connector of drum lock motor and machine. Check if voltage between terminal #6 of drum lock motor and machine is 24V. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the rear of the connector.

· Key switch: OFF

Faulty ground of drum lock motor

NO

Broken harness between drum lock motor and battery, or blown fuse (front: #22, rear: #2)

NO

In case Drum Lock cannot be activated. YES Faulty drum lock

Disconnect connector 12P of right stand panel. Check for continuity between terminals of machine end connector.

A · · · ·

Drum lock switch: ON Measure following terminals. Front drum: between terminals 274 and 272. Rear drum: between terminals 278 and 276.

Connect disconnected connector. YES Disconnect connector of drum lock motor. Check for continuity between terminals #1 and #3 of harness end connector. · Key switch: OFF · Drum lock switch: Lock

motor. Broken harness between drum lock NO switch and drum lock motor Faulty drum lock switch

NO

In case Drum Lock cannot be released. YES Faulty drum lock

Disconnect connector 12P of right stand panel. Check for continuity between terminals of machine end connector.

A · · · ·

Drum lock switch: OFF Measure following terminals. Front drum: between terminals 274 and 273. Rear drum: between terminals 278 and 276.

Connect disconnected connector. YES Disconnect connector of drum lock motor. Check for continuity between terminals #2 and #3 of harness end connector. · Key switch: OFF · Drum lock switch: Unlock

motor Broken harness between drum lock NO switch and drum lock motor Faulty drum lock switch

NO

Connector Drum Rock Motor (Harness End)

Right Stand Panel (Harness End)

Front

273 272 278 277 276 274

Rear

(2)

(2)

(1) 272 273 274 (3) (4) (B) 271 (6)

(1) 276 277 278 (3) 275 (6) (4) (B)

GND

T5-4-20

GND


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B

T5-4-21


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B 0-2 Live mast flip cylinder cannot be extended or retracted

• Check wiring connections first. • Check fuse (39) (mast / jack). • When measuring voltage, turn key switch to ON

Left Stand Panel Connector 12P (Harness End) 283

and put gate lever in the lock position. Connector

Left Stand Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 285 284

Disconnect connector 12P of left stand panel. Check if voltage between terminal #5 (283) of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Left Stand Panel Connector 12P (Panel Side) 283

Check for continuity Connect disconnected YES between terminal #2 connector. of harness end of Disconnect live mast solenoid valve YES flip solenoid connector. connector. Check if voltage Check for continuity between terminal #1 of between terminal #5 Broken harness YES (283) of harness end harness end connector between live mast flip and machine is 24V. NO switch and solenoid connector 12P and terminal #2 (285) of · Live mast flip switch: Check for continuity connector 16P. extend or retract between terminal #5 YES (283) of harness end · Live mast flip switch: retract connector 12P and terminal #1 (284) of NO connector 16P.

· Key switch ON

· Live mast flip switch: Faulty live mast flip switch

extend NO

Broken harness between fuse #39 and connector 12P

NO

Live Mast Flip Cylinder Extend (Live Mast Hoisting) (284,GND)

Connector Live Mast Flip Cylinder Retract (Live Mast Lowering) (285,GND)

3-spool Solenoid Valve (Harness End) Live Mast Hoisting : 284 Lowering: 285

GND PC Port (G1/4)

(B) (1)

(2)

3-spool Solenoid Valve

T5-4-22

T2CG-01-02-028


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B

Connect disconnected connector. Disconnect quick coupling YES of hydraulic hose of counterweight cylinder retracting line. Check for Operate cylinder to retract. continuity YES between terminal Check if relief pressure is 26.5 to 32.3MPa. #2 of harness end connector Connect disconnected · Attach pressure gauge to and machine. connector.Disconnect PG port of 3-spool solenoid hydraulic source valve. (G1/4) solenoid connector of YES swing control valve. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Disconnect and plug hydraulic hose connected to live mast flip port of YES 3-spool solenoid valve. Operate live mast switch. Check if pressure is 26.5 to 32.3MPa. · Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 3-spool solenoid valve. (G1/4) YES Faulty live mast flip

cylinder Faulty 3-spool solenoid NO valve

Set swing lock and operate swing lever. Check if relief pressure of NO swing control valve is 28.7 to 35.1MPa. · Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 3-spool solenoid valve. (G1/4)

· Live mast flip switch: extend or retract

A

NO

Broken harness of ground line between solenoid and ground Broken harness between live mast flip switch and solenoid

NO

Broken harness of ground line between solenoid valve and ground

NO

Plug hydraulic source port of swing control YES valve and operate flip. Check if relief pressure of swing control valve is 28.3 to 34.5MPa.

A

· Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 3-Spool solenoid valve. (G1/4)

YES

Faulty 3-spool solenoid valve

Check if the pilot YES Faulty hydraulic source port pressure of the of swing control valve hydraulic pressure NO source port is Faulty pilot pressure of 1.5MPa or more. NO 4-spool solenoid valve · Attach pressure gauge to a1 port of swing control valve.

NO

Faulty swing control valve or pump

Swing control valve PG Port (G1/4)

Connector Hydraulic Source Solenoid Valve (Harness End) GND A20 (1)

(B) (2)

Hydraulic Source (A20,GND) T2CG-01-02-027

T5-4-23

Notes 26.5MPa = 3840psi 32.3MPa = 4680psi 28.7MPa = 4160psi 35.1MPa = 5100psi 28.3MPa = 4100psi 34.5MPa = 5000psi 1.5MPa = 218psi


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B 0-3 Counterweight cylinder cannot be extended or retracted

• Check wiring connections first. • Check fuse (39) (mast / jack). • Connect control box.

YES

Faulty Lower hydraulic source relay

Swap lower hydraulic source relay (R5) and mast lowering relay (R4). Check if counterweight cylinder moves.

Check for continuity

Connect lower hydraulic source relay. Disconnect control YES box joint connector. switch: extend or retract Check if voltage between machine end Disconnect lower connector terminal #1 hydraulic source and machine is 24V. relay from socket. Check if voltage NO of terminal #3 of socket and machine is 24V.

· Key switch: ON · Lock lever: lock · Counterweight cylinder

YES of terminals of control

Refer to control box continuity check

Control box power switch: ON

Broken harness in control box or faulty NO power switch

box end connector between #1(490) and #2(388).

Broken harness between lower hydraulic source relay and control box joint connector

NO

Broken harness between lower hydraulic source relay and battery

NO

Connector Lower Hydraulic Relay (R5) Socket (Harness End)

Control Box Joint Connector (Machine End) (3)375 (4)376

(2) (B)

(4) 490

(2)388 (1)490

(1) A3

OP12 (5)

GND

225 (3)

Check if continuity of YES all pair of terminals are normal, when another switches of control box are operated.

(5)373 (13)367 (6)374 (15)GND

T5-4-24


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Notes 26.5MPa = 3840psi 32.3MPa = 4680psi Disconnect quick coupling of hydraulic hose connected to YES counterweight cylinder. Operate counterweight cylinder switch, and check if relief pressure is 26.5 to 32.3MPa.

Check for continuity YES between · Attach pressure gauge to terminal #2 of PG port of 3-spool solenoid Connect disconnected harness end valve (G1/4) connector. Disconnect connector and · Engine on connector of solenoid machine. YES of swing control valve. Check if voltage Broken harness Check for continuity between terminal #1 of between solenoid and YES between terminal #2 harness end connector NO ground, or faulty ground of harness end of Connect disconnected and machine is 24V. counterweight connector. Disconnect Counterweight cylinder solenoid connector counterweight solenoid Broken harness switch: extend or retract and machine. of 3-spool solenoid between control box YES NO valve. connector and solenoid Check if voltage between terminal #1 of Broken harness harness end connector between solenoid and and machine is 24V. NO ground, or faulty ground Counterweight cylinder switch: extend or retract.

Broken harness between control box joint connector and solenoid valve

NO

Faulty wiring inside control box

NO

Connector Live Mast Flip Cylinder Extend (284,GND)

3-Spool Solenoid Valve (Harness End)

Counterweight Cylinder Left Retract (376,GND)

GND (B) (1)

PG Port (G1/4)

(2)

Counterweight Cylinder Right Retract (374,GND) Live Mast Flip Cylinder Retract (285,GND)

Counterweight Cylinder Left Extend (375,GND)

Counterweight Cylinder Right Extend (373,GND)

3-Spool Solenoid Valve

T5-4-25

T2CG-01-02-028


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Faulty counterweight cylinder

YES

YES

Faulty 3-spool solenoid valve YES

Plug hydraulic source port of swing control YES valve and operate counterweight cylinder. Check if relief pressure of swing control valve is 28.7 to 35.1MPa.

Operate live mast flip cylinder. Check if relief NO pressure is 26.5 to 32.3MPa. Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 3-spool solenoid valve. (G1/4)

Set swing lock pin and operate swing. Check if relief NO pressure of swing control valve is 28.7 to 35.1MPa.

Attach pressure gauge to PG port of swing control valve. (G1/4)

YES Faulty hydraulic

source port of swing control valve

Check if pilot pressure for hydraulic source solenoid of NO swing control valve is 1.5MPa or more.

Pilot pressure of 4-spool solenoid Attach pressure gauge to NO valve is low. a1 port of swing control valve.

Attach pressure gauge to PG port of swing control valve. (G1/4)

Faulty swing control valve or pump

NO

Notes 26.5MPa = 3840psi 32.3MPa = 4680psi 28.7MPa = 4160psi 35.1MPa = 5100psi 1.5MPa = 218psi

PG Port (G1/4)

Connector

Solenoid Valve Connector (Harness End)

Hydraulic Source (A20,E)

GND A20 (1)

(B) (2)

a1 Port (G1/4)

Swing Control Valve T2CG-01-02-027

T5-4-26


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B 0-4 Jack cylinder or side frame connecting cylinder cannot be extended or retracted.

• Check wiring connections first. • Check fuse (39) (mast / jack). • Check if quick couplings of hydraulic hoses are correctly connected.

• Connect control box wiring to machine connector.

YES

Swap lower hydraulic source relay (R5) and mast lowering relay (R4). Check if cylinder moves. · Lock lever: lock · Engine is running. · Jack switch: extend or retract

Faulty lower hydraulic source relay (R5)

Check for continuity between terminal YES #15 of machine end of control box Check if voltage connecting socket between terminal #1 and machine is YES (490) of machine end connector of control Connect lower hydraulic box joint connector Broken harness source relay. Disconnect and machine is 24V. between rotating joint upper side connector of and control box joint YES rotating joint. NO connector, or faulty Check if voltage between rotating joint terminal #4 of upper Disconnect lower harness end connector hydraulic source and machine is 24V. relay from socket. Broken harness between Check if voltage lower hydraulic source NO NO of terminal #3 of relay and rotating joint socket and machine is 24V. Broken harness between lower hydraulic source NO relay and battery

Control Box Joint Connector (Machine End)

Connector

Lower Hydraulic Relay (R5) (Socket) (2) (B)

(4) 490

A3

(4)495

(3)496

(2)429 (1)490

(8)428

(6)493

(9)425

(1)

OP12 (5)

GND

Rotating Joint Upper Connector (Upper Harness End) 1

)

429 490

(5)494

(7)427

(10)426

4) (13)421 (12)424

225 (3)

(11)423 (15)GND

T5-4-27

(14)422


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B

Disconnect solenoid connector of lower control valve. YES Check if voltage between terminal #3 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Check for continuity Connect disconnected connector. Disconnect lower hydraulic source YES solenoid connector. Check if voltage YES Check if control between harness end box power connector terminal #1 lamp is lit. Check if and machine is 24V. YES control box is Control box power switch: normal. ON

YES between harness

Refer to control box continuity check

end connector terminal #2 and machine.

Switch: extend

Broken harness between lower hydraulic source NO solenoid and ground, or faulty ground Broken harness between

Disconnect rotating joint upper connector. Check for continuity NO between rotating joint connector terminals #2 and #3. Control box power switch: ON

YES lower hydraulic source

solenoid and rotating joint Broken harness between rotating joint and control NO box power switch, or faulty rotating joint Broken lamp line of control box or blown bulb

NO

Faulty control box NO

Broken ground line or faulty ground

NO

Check for broken line in lower junction box.

Lower Control Valve PG Port (G3/8)

Connector Solenoid Valve Distribution

Lower Control Valve (Harness End)

xJack Right Front Extend/Retract 427/428 xJack Left Front Extend/Retract 425/426

Retract

Retract GND

Extend GND

1

2

3

4

xJack Right Rear Extend/Retract 423/424 xJack Left Rear Extend/Retract 421/422 xSide Frame Connecting Cylinder Right Extend/Retract 495/496 xSide Frame Connecting Cylinder Left Extend/Retract 493/494

Extend T25N-03-05-019

T5-4-28


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Check if another YES jack or side frame

Check for continuity YES between terminal #2 of harness end connector of solenoid valve and machine.

Check if voltage YES between terminal #1 of

harness end connector of solenoid valve and machine is 24V.

Check for continuity YES between terminal #4

of harness end connector of solenoid valve and machine.

connecting cylinder moves.

NO

A

Broken harness between solenoid and ground Broken harness between switch and solenoid

Switch: extend NO

Broken harness between solenoid and ground

NO

Broken harness between switch and solenoid

NO

YES

Disconnect quick coupling of hydraulic hose YES connected to the cylinder and operate switch. Check if relief pressure is 18.5 to 22.7MPa.

Connect disconnected quick coupling. Operate boom foot pin cylinder. NO Check if relief pressure is 18.5 to 22.7MPa.

Attach the pressure gauge to PG port of lower control valve.

A

Faulty jack cylinder

Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 4-spool solenoid valve.

YES Faulty lower control

valve Faulty pump or 4-spool NO solenoid YES Faulty lower control

valve

Check if boom foot pin NO cylinder move normally.

Faulty pump or 4-spool NO solenoid valve

Connector Lower Hydraulic Source Solenoid Valve (Harness End) GND 429 (1)

(B)

Lower Hydraulic Source (429,GND)

Notes 18.5MPa = 2680psi 22.7MPa = 3290psi

(2)

b1

PG (G1/4)

P

a1

4-Spool Solenoid Valve T2CG-01-02-029

T5-4-29


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B 0-5 Boom foot pin cylinder cannot be extended or retracted.

• Check wiring connections first. • Check fuse (39) (mast/jack). Upper cab side pin cylinder cannot be moved.

YES

Faulty lower hydraulic source relay (R5) Connect removed relay. Disconnect connector 16P YES of left side overhead panel. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end Check for continuity connector and machine is YES between terminal 24V. #2 of relay socket (R5) and machine.

Swap lower hydraulic source relay (R5) and mast lowering relay (R4). Check if boom foot pin cylinder moves.

Broken ground line or faulty ground

NO

Check if voltage of YES terminal #1 of relay

· Engine on · Lock lever: released · Boom foot pin switch:

socket (R5) and machine is 24V.

Broken harness between YES terminal #1 of l relay (R5)

on or off

and battery (through the lock lever switch)

Remove relay (R5) from socket. Check if voltage of NO terminal #3 of relay socket and machine is 24V. · Engine off · Key switch ON · Lock lever: released

Check if lock lever is release NO position.

Check lock lever, relay (R2), and fuse (15).

Release lock lever and NO check again Broken harness between relay (R5) and battery

NO

Connector Left Side Overhead Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

Lower Hydraulic Source Relay (R5) Socket (Harness End)

(2) (B)

(4) 490

(1) A3

OP12 (5)

GND

1

OP12 OP13 OP14

8

225 (3)

T5-4-30

OP15

OP16


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B

Check for continuity YES between terminals #1

Connect disconnected connector. Disconnect connector of boom foot pin YES right insert solenoid. Check if voltage between terminal #1 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Boom foot pin (upper cab side) release switch: ON

NO

Boom foot pin (upper cab side) switch insert: ON

and #3 of connector 16P of panel end.

Check for continuity YES between terminals #1 and #2 of connector 16P of panel end.

Check for continuity between terminal #2 of YES harness end connector of solenoid and machine.

A

Broken harness between switch and solenoid

NO

Faulty switch contact

Boom foot pin (upper cab side) insert switch: ON

NO

Broken harness between fuse (39) and connector

NO

Notes 18.5MPa = 2680psi 22.7MPa = 3290psi

Connect harness end of YES Faulty boom foot pin solenoid connector of left solenoid valve YES boom foot pin to solenoid of cab side foot pin. Faulty cylinder or Check if cab side cylinder Operate boom foot pin left. YES hydraulic piping NO moves. Check if relief pressure is 18.5 to 22.7MPa. Turn opposite side pin switch: Attach pressure gauge to PG port of 4-spool solenoid valve. (G1/4)

A

ON

Faulty 4-spool solenoid valve or pump

NO

Broken harness of ground line

NO

Boom Foot Pin Upper Cab Side Release (OP14,GND)

Connector Boom Foot Pin Cylinder Solenoid Valve (Harness End) GND (B) (1)

(2)

Boom Foot Pin Opposite Side Release (OP16,GND)

Boom Foot Pin Upper Cab Side Insert (OP13,GND)

b1

PG Port (G1/4)

P

OP13 – OP16 Boom Foot Pin Opposite side Insert (OP15,GND)

a1

4-Spool Solenoid Valve

T2CG-01-02-029

T5-4-31


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)

T5-4-32


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C TROUBLESHOOTING C PROCEDURE (TROUBLESHOOTING FOR MONITOR) Use troubleshooting C when any monitors, such as gauges or indicators malfunction.

• Monitor Panel 4

x How to Read Troubleshooting Flow Charts YES (OK)

(2)

(1) NO (NOT OK)

(3) 3

5

After checking or measuring item (1), select either YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3), as appropriate.

6 7

2

8

࡮ · Key switch: ON

9

Special instructions or reference item are indicated in the spaces under the box. Incorrect measuring or checking methods will render troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components as well.

10 11 1

12 13

࡮ Causes are stated in a thick-line box. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible causes can be seen without going through the flow chart.

14

NOTE: All connector drawings illustrated in this group are connection ends of harness end connector. (Seen from arrow direction.)

Harness

T5-5-1

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 -

15

Hour Meter Fuel Level Gauge Engine Water Temperature Gauge Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Hydraulic Oil Pressure Engine Start Protocol Violation Indicator Engine Coolant Level Indicator Low Battery Indicator Engine Oil Filter Restriction Indicator Engine Preheating Indicator Air Filter Restriction Indicator Controller Malfunction Indicator Engine Overheat Indicator Cigarette Lighter Engine Starter Key Switch


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE Check the wiring connections first. Gauge needle does not swing YES

Check if coolant temperature sensor connector is correctly connected.

Disconnect connector of coolant temperature sensor YES and connect to machine. Check if needle swings to (H) side. · Key switch: ON

Faulty sensor

Disconnect connector of sensor and connector 16P of monitor panel. NO Check for continuity of terminal 230 between 16P connector and temperature sensor connector.

YES Faulty monitor panel

Broken harness between monitor panel NO and sensor Faulty connection

NO

Gauge needle swings over scale YES

Check if needle returns when coolant temperature sensor connector is disconnected. · Key switch: ON

Faulty sensor

YES

NO

Disconnect connector of the sensor and connector 16P from monitor panel. Check for continuity between terminal 230 of harness end connector and machine.

Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and sensor. Faulty monitor panel

NO

Gauge needle swings unstably

YES

Check if coolant temperature sensor is correctly connected.

YES

Disconnect connector of the sensor. Connect terminal #1(230) of harness end connector to machine. Check if needle swings to (H) side and stays in that position.

Faulty sensor

Faulty monitor panel NO

· Key switch: ON Faulty connection NO Monitor panel Coolant Temperature Sensor 224

Meter

230

Connector Coolant Temperature Sensor (Harness End) 230 GND

Coolant Temperature and Electrical Resistance Coolant Temperature Electrical Resistance qC : 50 (122qF) (153.9) 80 (176qF) 51.9±4.0 100 (212qF) 27.4±1.9 120 (248qF) (16.1)

(1)

(B) (2)

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 1 8

230

NOTE: Values in ( ) are reference only.

T5-5-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF FUEL GAUGE Check the wiring connections first. Gauge pointer does not move at all.

Check if fuel sensor is correctly connected.

Disconnect connector of fuel sensor. Connect YES terminals #1 and #2 of harness end connector. Check if gauge pointer swings to (F) side. · Key switch: ON · Connect by using a clip.

YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect connector of fuel sensor and connector 16P of monitor panel. NO Check for continuity of terminal 232 between connector 16P and fuel sensor connector.

YES Faulty monitor panel

NO

Broken harness between monitor panel and sensor Faulty connection

NO

Gauge pointer swings over scale.

YES

Faulty sensor

Disconnect fuel sensor connector. Check if pointer swings back to zero. · Key switch: ON

Disconnect connector of fuel sensor, and connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity between terminal 232 of harness end connector of fuel sensor and machine.

NO

YES

Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and sensor Faulty monitor panel

NO

Gauge pointer swings unstably. YES

Check if fuel sensor is connected correctly.

Disconnect connector of fuel sensor. Connect terminals #1 and #2 of harness end connector. Check if gauge pointer swings to (F) side and stays in that position.

YES

Faulty sensor Faulty monitor panel

NO

· Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into rear face of connector.

Faulty connection

NO Monitor panel Fuel Sensor 224

232

Meter

Float FULL

Fuel Sensor (Harness End)

Connector

257 mm

GND

3/4

(B) 232

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

1

138.5 mm 1

Fuel Sensor

2

232

22q R370

8

33q

70.5 mm

Float Position and Electrical Resistance Float Position Full 3/4 1/2 1/4 Empty

Resistance (:) 10 +1.0 - 0.5 (19.5) 32r3 (49.5) 80r2

1/2 228 mm 338 mm

27q 28q

1/4

Electrical Resistor

EMPTY T107-04-03-020

T5-5-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR • Check wiring connections first. Check key switch: ON Engine stop Engine has insufficient hydraulic pressure but warning lamp does not light up. · Key switch: ON · Engine stop

Disconnect connector of engine oil pressure switch. YES Connect terminal 223 of harness end connector to machine. Check if warning lamp lights up.

Leaving monitor panel connector 16P connected, connect terminal 223 to machine. Check if warning lamp lights up. · Key switch: ON · Insert test bar into rear face of NO

connector to connect.

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check if voltage between terminal 224 of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

YES Faulty pressure switch

Broken harness between NO pressure switch and monitor

YES Faulty monitor panel or

blown warning lamp bulb Broken power supply line of NO monitor panel or blown fuse

Connector Engine Oil Pressure Switch (Harness End)

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 1

223

Monitor panel 224

202

223 224

8

Engine Oil Pressure Switch 223

Fuse

The monitor warning lamp lights up when the pressure switch㵭s contact point connects at 0.05 MPa or less.

T5-5-4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF GLOW LAMP • Check wiring connections first. Key switch during the check: ON During engine preheating warning lamp does not turn ON.

YES

Disconnect ECU connector. Connect terminal 70 of harness end connector to machine. Check if the warning lamp turns ON.

Faulty ECU

YES

Connect ECU connector. Swap preheating lamp relay and mast NO lowering relay. Check if warning lamp turns ON.

· Key switch: ON

· Any relay can be used instead of mast lowering relay.

Faulty relay

YES Check for Faulty monitor panel continuity between or blown bulb of lamp YES ground terminal (GD1) of harness Broken ground line or end connector and NO faulty ground machine.

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check if voltage between terminal 236 NO of harness end connector and machine is 24V.

Broken line 236 or blown fuse

NO

Connector Connector ECU1 (Harness End)

Preheating Lamp Relay (Harness End)

214

70 236

70

214

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 210

214

1

70

ECU

Fuse 8 GD1

236 Monitor panel

Preheating Lamp Relay

GND

236

T5-5-5


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF COOLANT LEVEL INDICATOR • Check the wiring connections first. Indicator is not turned ON. · Check if water level is above Low level. Disconnect connector of coolant level switch. YES Connect terminals 226 and GE1 of harness end connector. Check if indicator is turned ON. Turn key switch ON. Check if indicator is · Key switch: ON turned ON.

YES

Faulty level switch

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. NO Check for continuity between machine and 226 of harness end connector. · Keep terminals 226 and GE1 connected. YES

· Key switch: OFF ļ ON Check for continuity between machine and NO terminal N3 of connector 16P of monitor panel. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the rear face of connector. · Check within 3 seconds after turning key switch ON.

Indicator is turned ON although water level is below the specified level.

YES Faulty monitor panel

Broken harness between level switch NO and monitor panel Blown indicator bulb

Disconnect connector IDU-5 of IDU and 16P connector of monitor panel. Connect terminal N3 of harness end connector to machine. NO Check for continuity between machine and terminal N3 of harness end of IDU-5.

YES Faulty IDU

Broken harness between monitor panel NO and IDU

Short-circuited harness between level switch and monitor panel

YES

Disconnect coolant level switch connector and connector 16P of Connect YES monitor panel. YES Short-circuited harness disconnected between monitor panel Check for continuity YES connector. and IDU between machine and Disconnect IDU-5. Check for continuity terminal 226 of harness Check if indicator between machine Disconnect connector Faulty IDU end connector. is turned ON. and terminal N3 of of coolant level switch. NO · Key switch: ON Check if indicator is NO harness end of 16P Faulty monitor panel connector. turned ON. NO

· Key switch: ON Faulty level switch NO

Coolant Level Switch (Harness End)

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

GND 1 N3 226

8

IDU

226 䋨B䋩

Connector IDU-5 (Harness End)

Reserve Tank

N3

ON FULL

Monitor panel 224

LOW

Coolant level switch Radiator

226

OFF N3

Coolant Level Switch

IDU

T107-04-03-012

T5-5-6


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ABNORMAL CONTROLLER INDICATOR • Check wiring connections first. • If a malfunction occurs in the ECU system, the controller malfunction indicator illuminates. Indicator is not turned ON even if abnormality is indicated by troubleshooting monitor or ECU lamp. Disconnect ECU2 connector,

YES and connect terminal 114 or

Turn key switch ON. Check if indicator is turned ON. · Key switch: OFFlON

115 of harness end of ECU-2 to machine. Check if warning lamp turns ON.

Faulty ECU

YES

NO

· Key switch: ON

Disconnect monitor panel connector. Connect terminal 229 of harness end connector to machine. Check for continuity between terminals 114 or 115 of harness end connector of ECU and machine.

YES Faulty monitor panel

Broken harness between NO monitor panel and ECU

YES

Check for continuity between machine and terminal N3 of NO connector 16P of monitor panel. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the rear face of connector. · Check within 3 seconds after turning key switch ON.

Indicator bulb is burned out

Disconnect connector IDU-5 of IDU. Connect N3 of harness end connector to machine. NO Check for continuity between N3 of harness end connector of monitor panel and machine.

YES

Faulty IDU

Broken harness between NO monitor panel and IDU

Indicator is turned ON even if failure is not indicated by troubleshooting monitor or ECU lamp. Faulty ECU

YES

Disconnect ECU2 connector. Check if indicator is turned OFF. · Key switch: ON

Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and ECU

YES

Disconnect monitor panel connector 16P. Check for continuity between machine and NO terminal 229 of harness end connector. · Keep ECU2 connector disconnected.

Connect YES Short-circuited harness disconnected between monitor and IDU YES connector. Disconnect IDU-5. Check for continuity Faulty IDU Check if indicator between terminal is turned ON. N3 of harness end NO NO connector and · Key switch: ON machine. Faulty monitor panel NO

114

Monitor panel

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

224

229 N3

1 N3

115

IDU

229

8

ECU2 Connector (Harness End)

IDU Connector IDU-5 (Harness End)

115 114 N3

T5-5-7

ECU


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR • Check the wiring connections first. Indicator is not turned ON although air filter is clogged. YES

Disconnect terminals of air filter restriction switch. Connect YES terminal 228 of harness end connector to machine. Check if indicator is turned ON. Turn key switch ON. Check if indicator is turned ON

· Key switch: ON

Faulty air filter restriction switch.

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity between NO machine and 228 of harness end connector. · Keep terminal of air filter restriction

YES Faulty monitor panel

Broken harness between monitor panel and air NO filter restriction switch.

switch connected to machine.

· Key switch: OFFlON

YES

Blown indicator bulb

Check for continuity between machine and terminal N3 of NO connector 16P of monitor panel.

Disconnect connector IDU-5 of IDU YES Faulty IDU and connector 16P of monitor panel. Connect terminal N3 of harness end · Key switch: ON to machine. · Insert a test bar into the rear face of NO Check for continuity between N3 of Broken harness between connector. harness end connector and NO monitor panel and IDU. · Check within 3 seconds after turning machine. key switch ON.

Indicator is turned ON although air filter is not clogged. · Disassembly and visual check · Confirm that air filter is not dampened. Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and air filter switch.

YES

Disconnect terminals of air filter restriction switch. Check if indicator is turned OFF. · Key switch: ON

Faulty air filter restriction switch.

YES

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity NO between machine and terminal 228 of harness end. · Keep air filter restriction switch disconnected.

YES Short-circuited harness Connect between monitor panel disconnected and IDU. YES connector. Check for continuity Disconnect IDU-5. between machine Faulty IDU Check if indicator and terminal N3 of NO is turned ON. NO harness end · Key switch: ON Faulty monitor panel connector. NO

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 1

IDU Connector IDU-5 (Harness End) N3

N3

8

Air filter restriction switch Pressure 6.25r0.5kPa or less (635r58 mm H2O or less) (0.91r0.07psi or less) 6.25r0.5kPa or more (635r58 mm H2O or more) (0.91r0.07psi or more)

228

Indicator operation OFF

Monitor panel +24V

224

Air filter restriction switch 228

Fuse N3

ON

T5-5-8

IDU


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF OVERHEAT INDICATOR • Check the wiring connections first. Indicator is not turned ON when overheating. Disconnect terminal 335 of YES overheat switch. Connect harness end terminal 335 to machine. Check if indicator is turned ON. · Key switch: ON Turn key switch ON. Check if indicator is turned ON.

YES

Faulty overheat switch

With terminal of overheat switch connected to machine, disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. NO Check for continuity between machine and 335 of harness end connector.

YES Faulty monitor panel

Broken harness between monitor panel NO and overheat switch

YES

· Key switch: OFFlON Check for continuity between machine and terminal N3 of NO connector 16P of monitor panel. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the rear face of connector. · Check within 3 seconds after turning key switch ON.

Blown indicator bulb

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel, and connector IDU-5 of IDU. Connect N3 of harness end of IDU-5 to NO machine. Check for continuity between machine and N3 of harness end of connector 16P.

YES Faulty IDU

Broken harness between monitor panel NO and IDU

Indicator is turned ON although coolant temperature is low. YES

Disconnect terminal of overheat switch. Check if indicator is turned OFF. · Key switch: ON

Faulty overheat switch Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and overheat switch

YES

Disconnect terminal 335 of overheat switch and connector 16P of monitor panel. NO Check for continuity between machine and 335 of harness end connector.

Connect disconnected YES connector. Disconnect IDU-5. Check for continuity Check if indicator is between machine turned ON. NO and N3 of harness · Key switch: ON end connector.

8

between monitor panel and IDU Faulty IDU NO

Faulty monitor panel

NO

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 1

YES Short-circuited harness

Overheat Switch Terminal (Harness End)

N3 335

GE4 (GND)

335

IDU Connector IDU-5 (Harness End) N3

Monitor panel +24V

Overheat switch Coolant temperature

Indicator operation

Lower than 101 qC (214 qF)

OFF

101 qC (214 qF) or higher

ON

224

Overheat switch 335

Fuse N3

IDU K5

T5-5-9


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ALTERNATOR INDICATOR • Check the wiring connections first. Alternator indicator is not turned ON although charging is insufficient.

Broken harness between charge relay and ground, or faulty ground

YES

· Key switch: ON

Broken harness between charge relay and monitor panel

YES

Disconnect charge relay. Connect terminal 219 of harness end connector to machine. Check if alternator indicator illuminates. Connect 219 of monitor panel connector to NO machine. Check if alternator indicator illuminates. · Key switch: ON · Insert a test bar into the rear of connector.

Disconnect charge relay and alternator connector. YES Check for continuity between 213 of both harness end connectors. Connect charge relay. Connect terminal 213 YES of harness end connector of charge relay to machine. Check if alternator indicator illuminates. Check if voltage of terminal 206 of · Key switch: ON harness end of · Insert a test bar into the NO charge relay rear of connector. connector is 24V.

· Key switch: OFF YES Faulty alternator

Broken harness between alternator NO and charge relay Faulty charge relay NO

· Key switch: ON Broken harness between charge relay and battery relay

NO

Alternator indicator is not turned OFF even when engine runs.

Short-circuited harness to ground between charge relay and monitor panel

YES

Disconnect charge relay and connector of monitor panel. Check for continuity between terminal 219 of harness end connector of monitor panel and machine.

Check for continuity between 219 of YES harness end connector of charge relay and machine.

Disconnect alternator connector. Check for continuity between terminal NO 213 of harness end connector and machine. · Key switch: ON

Short-circuited harness to ground between alternator and charge relay

YES

Disconnect charge YES Faulty charge relay relay. Check for continuity NO between terminal Faulty alternator GND and 219 of NO relay connector.

· Key switch: ON

NO

Alternator Charge relay

Connector

Monitor panel

Charge Relay (Harness End)

Alternator (Harness End)

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End)

224

GND 206 219 (B) 213

218

213 206

1

219

8

T5-5-10

206 219

213


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF BRAKE UNAPPLIED INDICATOR • Check the wiring connections first. Indicator lighting conditions If key switch is set to “START” position under one or more conditions mentioned below, engine does not start and indicator is turned ON. • Slewing brake switch: OFF With "free mount winch specification" (optional) the following as well: • Front drum brake mode switch: Free mode • Rear drum brake mode switch: Free mode

• Turn the swing brake switch ON. Then set the front/rear/third brake mode switches to "Auto brake mode", and confirm that the engine starts.

Indicator does not turn ON under indicator lighting conditions. x Key switch: START YES

Connect terminal E23 of connector 16P of monitor panel to machine. Check if indicator is turned ON. · Key switch: ON · Connect to machine from rear

Disconnect connector MCA-6 of MC2/A and connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity between terminals E23 of both harness end connectors.

YES

Faulty MC2/A

NO

Broken harness between monitor panel and MC2/A Faulty monitor panel or burnt indicator bulb

NO

face of connector.

Indicator is not turned OFF even when engine runs. · Engine: Running · Key switch: ON

YES

Disconnect connector MCA-6. Check if indicator is turned OFF.

Faulty MC2/A

YES

· Key switch: ON NO

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity between machine and terminal E23 of harness end connector.

Short-circuited harness between monitor panel and MC2/A Faulty monitor panel

NO

Monitor panel 224

E23

MC2/A

Connector MC2/A Connector MCA-6 (Harness End)

Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) 1 8

E23

E23

T5-5-11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF HOUR METER • Check the wiring connections first. Hour meter does not work. YES

· Key switch: ON

Faulty monitor panel (hour meter)

Disconnect connector 16P of monitor panel. Check for continuity between machine and terminal GD1 of harness end connector.

NO

Broken harness between monitor panel and ground, or faulty ground

Connector Monitor Panel Connector 16P (Harness End) Monitor panel 1

224

8 GD1

GND

MALFUNCTION OF PILOT OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR x If pilot oil pressure indicator is faulty, refer to “Check of Pilot Oil Pressure Indicator” in Troubleshooting A.

T5-5-12

Meter

GD1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D TROUBLESHOOTING D PROCEDURE If IDU itself or sensors connected to IDU fail, failure codes will be displayed on the monitor window of IDU. If error code is indicated, find a page showing troubleshooting procedures corresponding to an error code from table on the next page and follow the flowchart for inspection. Troubleshooting precautions: • Turn OFF machine key switch and turn OFF IDU power, before disconnecting connector. • Use a digital voltmeter for measurement of voltage or resistance. • “Measure XX between A and B” described in the flowchart implies that red tester stick of digital voltmeter is connected to A and black tester stick to B. • When measuring, be careful to make connection to connector side and receptacle side correctly.

Connector

Receptacle

T331-05-07-001

T331-05-07-002

Note:

All connector drawings illustrated in this group are connection ends of harness end connector. (Seen from arrow direction.)

Harness

T6L4-05-03-001

T5-6-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE TABLE Function

Failure

Auto stop

Boom angle Tower angle Jib angle Specification selection

Loads

Fault code E20 E21 E22 E26 E30 E31 E40 E43 E44 E45 E50 E51 E52 E52 E53

Failure explanation Boom angle upper limit failure Boom angle lower limit failure Tower angle upper limit failure Tower angle lower limit failure Jib angle upper limit failure Jib angle lower limit failure No ML data available Mode selection failure (tower) Mode selection failure (crane) Attachment wiring short circuit Boom / jib derricking force upper limit failure Boom / jib no-load derricking force failure Boom / jib derricking force lower limit failure Jib derricking force lower limit failure Load cell power supply upper limit failure

Judgment and conditions Boom angle > Upper limit Boom angle < Lower limit Tower angle > Upper limit Tower angle < Lower limit Jib angle > Upper limit Jib angle < Lower limit No data available corresponding to auto specification selection Crane is selected with tower attachment. Tower is selected with crane attachment. Wiring short circuit in non-disassembly position Boom / jib derricking force > Upper limit Boom / jib derricking force < No-load criterion Boom / jib derricking force < Lower limit

Jib derricking force < Lower limit 10 V power supply monitoring voltage > Upper limit E54 Load cell power supply lower limit failure 10 V power supply monitoring voltage < Lower limit 1 E55 Load cell power supply short circuit 10 V power supply monitoring voltage < Lower failure limit 2 Monitorling Communication W90 Control A communication failure MC2/A communication status only W91 Control B communication failure MC2/B communication status Specification W47 Attachment wiring failure (open circuit) Wiring failure (open circuit) in non-disassembly selection position W48 Counterweight detection failure Abnormal counterweight detection W49 Hook overhoist wiring failure No hook overhoist wiring available on selection side W10 Main power supply upper limit failure Monitoring voltage > Upper limit Power supply W11 Main power supply lower limit failure Monitoring voltage < Lower limit W14 Switch power supply short circuit failure 24V power supply monitoring voltage < lower limit 2 WA1 Switch power supply 1 short circuit (Control A) 24V1 power supply monitoring (control A) voltage < Lower limit 2 WA2 Switch power supply 2 short circuit (control A) 24V2 power supply monitoring (control A) voltage < Lower limit 2 WA3 Switch power supply 3 short circuit (Control A) 24V3 power supply monitoring (control A) voltage < Lower limit 2 WA5 Sensor power supply short circuit (Control A) 5V power supply monitoring voltage (control A) < Lower limit 2 WB1 Switch power supply 1 short circuit (Control B) 24V1 power supply monitoring (control B) voltage < Lower limit 2 WB2 Switch power supply 2 short circuit (Control B) 24V2 power supply monitoring (control B) voltage < Lower limit 2 WB3 Switch power supply 3 short circuit (Control B) 24V3 power supply monitoring (control B) voltage < Lower limit 2 WB5 Sensor power supply short circuit (Control B) 5V power supply monitoring voltage (control B) < Lower limit 2

T5-6-2

Reference page T5-6-4 T5-6-6 T5-6-4 T5-6-6 T5-6-8 T5-6-10 T5-6-13 T5-6-13 T5-6-13 T5-6-14 T5-6-16 T5-6-18 T5-6-20 T5-6-22 T5-6-30 T5-6-31 T5-6-24 T5-6-27 T5-6-28 T5-6-32 T5-6-32 T5-6-32 T5-6-33 T5-6-33 T5-6-34 -


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D Failure Indication (Title Bar) Function

Failure

Auto stop

Boom angle Angle Tower angle Jib angle

Specification selection

Loads

Monitoring Communication only Angle wiring Specification selection Power supply

Fault code E20 E21 E27 E22 E26 E30 E31 E37 E40 E43 E44 E45 E50 E51 E52 E53 E54 E55 W90 W91 W38 W47 W48 W49 W10 W11 W14 WA1 WA2 WA3 WA5 WB1 WB2 WB3 WB5

Failure indication (title bar) Red: Auto stop, Orange: Monitoring and warning E20: Boom angle is abnormal E21: Boom angle is abnormal E27: Angle failure (open circuit) E22: Tower angle is abnormal E26: Tower angle is abnormal E30: Jib angle is abnormal E31: Jib angle is abnormal E37: Jib angle wiring failure (open circuit) E40: No data available E43: Tower selection E44: Crane selection E45: Cable reel short circuit E50: Load cell failure E51: Rope tension failure E52: Load cell failure E53: Load cell power supply failure E54: Load cell power supply drop E55: Load cell power supply short circuit W90: Communication A failure W91: Communication B failure W38: Jib angle wiring failure (open circuit) W47: Cable reel failure (open circuit) W48: Counterweight detection failure W49: Hook overhoist wiring failure W10: Power supply voltage failure W11: Power supply voltage drop W14: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V) WA1: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V1A) WA2: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V2A) WA3: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V3A) WA5: Sensor power supply short circuit (5VA) WB1: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V1B) WB2: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V2B) WB3: Sensor power supply short circuit (24V3B) WB5: Sensor power supply short circuit (5VB)

T5-6-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E20, E22

E22

Connector (IDU-1)

E20

M6

Check if attachment of machine is crane.

NO

YES

Disconnect connector “1” (5P) of boom angle detector from machine junction box.

On the operation setting window, select tower attachment.

Controller (IDU) IDU-1

YES (E21 or E26 indicated)

Check if E20 disappears.

Machine Harness

“2”16P ( black)

NO

Boom B

Boom angle detector failure

With connector “1” (5P) disconnected, measure voltage between terminals N20 and M6 of connector "2" (16P).

“1” 5P

N20: Angle detection sensor output M6: GND

Between N20 and M6 = 0.2V

YES

Boom Angle Detector

NO (over 4V)

Machine junction box failure

Connector "2" (16P Black)

Disconnect connector IDU-1 of IDU. Measure resistance between terminals N20 and M4 of connector "2" (16P).

N20

M4: Sensor power supply, 5V

Resistance ?

Check for continuity between terminal M6 of IDU-1 and terminal M6 of connector “2” (16P).

Machine Junction Box

0: to1M:

No continuity

Continuity ? Continuity

Machine harness failure IDU failure

T5-6-4

Boom B M6 M4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D (Blank)

T5-6-5


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E21, E26

E21, E26 Controller (IDU)

Check if connector “1” (5P) of boom angle detector is correctly connected.

Check if connection is correct.

“2” 5P

YES “1” 5P

NO

Connect connector of boom angle detector correctly.

Boom Angle Detector

Machine Junction Box T25N-05-06-004

Measure voltage between terminals #1 and #4 of receptacle "2" (5P) of machine junction box.

Receptacle “2” (5P) M6

1

2

3 4

N20

Between #1 and #4 = 4.4V

NO

YES

Boom angle detector failure

T5-6-6

A

5

M4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D

Connector (IDU-1) E21, E26

A

M4

M6

Measure voltage between terminals N20 and M4 of connector "3" (16P).

N20

N20: Angle detection sensor output M4: Sensor power supply

Connector (IDU-5)

YES

Between N20 and M4 = 4.4V

Controller (IDU) IDU-5

NO

IDU-1

Machine junction box failure

Disconnect connectors IDU-1 and IDU-5 of IDU. Measure resistance between terminal M6 of IDU-1 and terminal N20 of IDU-5. “3” 16P (black) Boom B

M6: GND

Resistance ?

0: to Several M:

Boom Angle Detector

Machine Junction Box

Make a short circuit between terminals N20 and M4 of connector “3” (16P).

Check for continuity between terminal M4 of IDU-1 and terminal N20 of IDU-5.

Connector "3" (16P Black)

Boom B

N20

No continuity

Continuity ?

Continuity

IDU failure

Machine harness failure

T5-6-7

M4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E30

Receptacle “2” (5P)

E30

M6

1

2

3 4

Disconnect connector “1” (5P) of jib angle detector from tower top junction box. Measure voltage between terminals #2 and #4 of receptacle "2" (5P).

N19

M4

5

#2: M6:GND #4: N19 Angle detection sensor output

Between #2 and #4 0.2 V

YES

NO (over 4V)

Jib angle detector failure

Cable reel wiring “3”

Disconnect connector “3” of cable reel wiring of tower top junction box side. Measure voltage between terminals #17(K) and #19(Y).

“5”

“4”

#17(K): M6 GND #19(Y): N19 Angle detector output Machine Junction Box “1” 5P “2” 5P

Between #17(K) and #19(Y) 0.2 V

Boom top junction box failure

NO (over 4V)

Tower Top Junction Box

YES

Connector “3” (32P)

Disconnect connector “4” of cable reel wiring of machine junction box. Measure voltage between terminals #17(K) and #19(Y) of receptacle "5".

Connector “3” (24P) A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 Y

Between #17(K) and #19(Y) 0.2 V

K

YES

Receptacle “5” (32P)

Receptacle “5” (24P)

A NO (over 4V)

Cable reel wiring failure

B Y

T5-6-8

K


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D B

Connector "6" (12P)

E30

Boom C M6 M4

N19

Controller (IDU)

Connect connector “4” to machine junction box. Measure voltage between terminals N19 and M6 of connector "6" (12P).

Between N19 and M6 = 0.2V

IDU-1

IDU-5

YES Boom C “6” 12P (black)

NO (over 4V)

Machine junction box failure

Disconnect connector IDU-1 and IDU-5 of IDU. Measure resistance between terminal M4 of IDU-1 and N19 of IDU-5.

“4” Machine Junction Box

Tower Top Junction Box

Resistance ?

0: to Several M:

T25N-05-06-009

Connector (IDU-1)

Measure resistance between terminal M6 of connector "6" (12P) and terminal M6 of IDU-1.

M4

M6

Connector (IDU-5)

Continuity ?

No continuity

N19

Continuity

IDU failure

Machine harness failure

T5-6-9


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E31

E31

Check if connector “1” (5P) of jib angle detector is correctly connected.

Check if connection is correct.

YES

“1” 5P

NO

Connect connector of jib angle detector correctly.

Jib Angle Detector “2” 5P

Tower Top Junction Box

T25N-05-06-007

Receptacle “2” (5P)

Disconnect connector “1” (5P). Measure voltage between terminals #1 and #4 of receptacle "2" (5P).

M4

M6 1

2

3

4

N19

Between #1 and #4 4.8 V

YES

NO

Jib angle detector failure

C

T5-6-10

5


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D

E31

C

Controller (IDU)

Disconnect connector “3” of cable reel wiring of tower top junction box. #16( f ) : M4, Sensor power supply Measure voltage between terminals #19(Y) : N19, Angle detector output #16( f ) and #19(Y).

Cab rear harness

Between #16( f ) and #19(Y) = 4.8 V

YES Boom C “6” 12P (black)

“3” Cable Reel Wiring NO

Tower top junction box failure “5”

“4”

Disconnect connector “4” of cable reel wiring from machine junction box. Measure voltage between terminals #16( f ) and #19(Y) of receptacle “5”.

Machine Junction Box

Tower Top Junction Box

Between #16( f ) and #19(Y) 4.8 V

Connector "6" (12P)

Cable reel wiring failure Measure voltage between terminals N19 and M4 of connector "6" (12P).

Connector “3” (32P)

f

Connector “3” (24P) A

Boom C M4

N19

NO

T25N-05-06-010

YES

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Between N19 and M4 4.8 V

21 22 23 24

YES

Y

Receptacle “5” (32P) NO

Receptacle “5” (24P)

A

Machine junction box failure

f

D Y

T5-6-11


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D

Connector (IDU-1) E31

D

M4

M6

Connector (IDU-5)

With connector “6” (12P) disconnected, disconnect connector IDU-1 of IDU. Measure voltage between terminals M4 and M6 of IDU-1.

N19

Controller (IDU) IDU-5

Resistance ?

IDU-1

0: to Several M:

Machine harness failure

Boom C “6” 12P (black)

Disconnect Disconnectconnector connectorIDU-5 IDU-5ofofIDU. IDU. Check Measure for continuity continuitybetween betweenterminal N19 terminal of IDI-5 N19 and and terminal terminal N19 N19 of of connector connector"6" "6"(12P). (12P).

Tower Top Junction Box

Continuity ?

No continuity

Connector "6" (12P)

Boom C

N19

Continuity

Machine harness failure

IDU failure

T5-6-12


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E40 E40

IDU failure.

FAULT CODE E43, 44

E44

E43

Check if

Check if

attachment of

attachment of

NO

NO

field machine is “crane”.

field machine is “tower”.

YES

YES

IDU failure

IDU failure On the operation setting window, check the selected attachment.

heck if “tower” C is selected.

On the operation setting window, check the selected attachment.

NO

Check if “crane”

YES

IDU failure

NO

is selected.

YES

On the operation setting window, select “tower”.

IDU failure

T5-6-13

On the operation setting window, select “crane”.


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E45

Connector “1" (32P)

E45

Connector “1" (24P)

T

A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

U

Disconnect connector “1” of cable reel wiring from machine junction box. Check for continuity between terminals #1 (U) and #2(A) of connector “1”. Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #3(T) of connector “1”.

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

#1 (U) : X4 #2 (A) : R8 #3 (T) : R21

Controller (MC2/B) MCB-4

Crane Between #1(U) and #2(A) = closed Between #1(U) and #3(T) = open

NO

Tower Between #1(U) and #2(A) = open Between #1(U) and #3(T) = closed

“3” 16P (white) Boom A

E

“2” 16P (white)

Cable Reel Wiring

YES

Connect connector “1” of cable reel wiring. Check for continuity between terminals R8 and X4 of connector "2" (16P). Check for continuity between terminals R21 and X4 of connector "2" (16P).

“1” Machine Junction Box

Boom Top Junction Box (Tower Top Junction Box)

T25N-05-06-013

Crane Between R8 and X4 = closed Between R21 and X4 = open Tower Between R8 and X4 = open Between R21 and X4 = closed

Connector "3" (16P White)

With connector “2” (16P) disconnected, disconnect connector MCB-4 of MC2/B. Measure resistance at connector "3" (16P).

Connector "2" (16P White) X4 R8 R21

NO

Resistance between either terminals R21 and X4, or R8 and X4

(open circuit)

Resistance: over 500 k:

Machine junction box failure

Boom A R21 R8 X4

YES

Machine harness failure

T5-6-14

MC2/B failure

Boom A


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D

E

Receptacle “5” (32P)

E45

Receptacle “5” (24P)

T

A

U

Disconnect connector “4” of cable reel wiring from boom top junction box. Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #2(A) of receptacle "5". Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #3(T) of receptacle "5".

#1 (U) : X4 #2 (A) : R8 #3 (T) : R21

Crane Between #1(U) and #2(A) =closed Between #1(U) and #3(T) = open

NO

Tower Between #1(U) and #2(A) = open Between #1(U) and #3(T) = closed

Controller (MC2/B)

Boom top junction box failure YES

Cable reel wiring failure

“5” “4”

Cable Reel Wiring Machine Junction Box

Boom Top Junction Box (Tower Top Junction Box)

T5-6-15

T25N-05-06-013


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E50 E50

Controller (IDU) IDU-5

Disconnect connector “1” (7P) from the load cell.

Check if E50 disappears.

YES (E52 indicated) Load Cell

NO

Load cell failure

Machine Junction Box “2” 4P

Connect connector “1” (7P) to the load cell. Disconnect connector “2”.

Load Cell Harness

“1” 7P T25N-05-06-015

Check if E50 disappears.

Connector “2" (4P)

YES (E52 indicated)

M14 M3 NO

N18 Load cell harness failure

Connect connector “2”. Disconnect connector IDU-5 of IDU.

Check if E50 disappears.

YES (E52 indicated)

NO

Machine harness failure IDU failure

T5-6-16


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D (Blank)

T5-6-17


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E51

E51

Check the setting of boom (tower) length, jib length, number of hoist rope reeved and hook capacity.

NO

Check if the setting is correct.

YES

On the operation setting window, make the setting depending on field machine.

Check the difference between actual load and indication load at boom upper and boom lower.

Check if the difference is large (1t or more).

YES

NO

Release derricking rope tension to remove load cell tension completely.

Select the IDU monitor window. Operation: 1. Turn ON maintenance key switch. 2. Press “‫ ޚ‬key” on the ML window. 3. Select the monitor in the maintenance menu window. 4. Select the IDU monitor in the monitor menu window.

Grease derricking mechanism: boom foot pin, live mast foot pin, boom stop inner etc.

IDU Monitor Window

Load Cell Output (Crane)

Check “BM LOAD” value in the IDU monitor window. Check “JB LOAD” in case of tower. Load Cell Output (Tower Jib)

0.5 Vr0.04 V

YES

NO

F

IDU failure

T5-6-18


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D F

E51

Load Cell Zero Point Correction Window Load cell zero point correction Load factor Load cell output voltage Corrected output voltage

Select the load cell zero point correction window. Operation: 1. Turn ON maintenance key switch. 2. Press “ż key” on the ML window. 3. Select the adjustment menu in the maintenance menu window. 4. Select the load cell zero point correction in the adjustment menu window. In case of tower, select the jib load cell zero point correction.

Standard correction voltage Correctable voltage range

30%

8 8 8 8

Detach the load cell from the hoist rope to completely eliminate the load ratio from the load cell. After detaching the load cell, press <START> key. Pay attention. Don̉t disconnect the connector from the load cell. Cancel

Start

Load Cell Zero Point Correction Completion Window Press ż key once. Load cell zero point correction is completed.

Select the IDU monitor window. Operation: 1. Turn ON maintenance key switch 2. Press “ż key” in the ML window. 3. Select the monitor in the maintenance menu window. 4. Select the IDU monitor in the monitor menu window. IDU Monitor Window

Check “BM LOAD” in the IDU monitor window. In case of tower, check “JB LOAD”.

Load Cell Output (Crane)

Load Cell Output (Tower Jib)

Vr0.04 V ? 0.5

NO

YES

Load cell failure

Check if E51 disappears.

YES

NO

IDU failure

Completion

T5-6-19


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE E52 Crane

E52 Controller (IDU)

Check if connector “1” (7P) is correctly connected to the load cell.

Check if connection is correct.

YES Load cell

Machine Junction Box NO Load Cell Harness “1” 7P

Connect correctly connector “1” (7P) to the load cell.

T25N-05-06-016

Connector “1” (7P)

C

Between #A and #D = 9.8 V

YES

NO

Load cell failure

G

T5-6-20

G

B

#A : M3, 10V #D : N18, Load Cell Output

F

A

Disconnect connector “1” from the load cell. Measure voltage between terminals #A and #D of connector “1” (7P).

E D


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D E52 (crane)

G

Controller (IDU)

Disconnect connector “2” (4P) of the load cell harness. Measure voltage between terminals M3 and N18 of connector "3" (4P).

Between #1 and #3 = 9.8 V

IDU-1

IDU-5

YES

“3” 4P

Machine Junction Box

NO

Disconnect connectors IDU-1 and IDU-5 of IDU. Measure resistance between terminal M14 of IDU-1 and terminal N18 of IDU-5.

Load cell harness failure

“2” 4P “1” 7P

T25N-05-06-017

Load Cell Harness

M14: Sensor Ground N18: Load Cell Output

Resistance ?

Load Cell

0: to several M:

Connector "3" (4P)

M3

(no resistance)

N18 Make a short circuit between terminal M3 and terminal N18 of connector "3" (4P).

Connector (IDU-1) M3 M14

Check for continuity between terminal M3 of IDU-1 and terminal N18 of IDU-5.

Connector (IDU-5)

N18 No continuity

Continuity ?

Continuity

Machine harness failure IDU failure

T5-6-21


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D Tower

E52

Controller (IDU)

Check if connector “1” (7P) is correctly connected to the load cell.

Check if connector “2” (7P) is correctly connected to the machine junction box.

Check if connection is correct.

YES

“1” 7P “2” 7P

NO

Connect correctly connector “1” and connector “2”.

Machine Junction Box Jib Load Cell T25N-05-06-018

Disconnect connector “1” from jib load cell. Measure voltage between terminals #A and #D of connector “1” (7P).

Connector “1” (7P)

#A: M3, 10V #D: N6, Load Cell Output

G C

Between #A and #D 9.8 V

YES

NO

Load cell failure

H

T5-6-22

F

A B

E D


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D Receptacle “3” (7P)

E52 (tower)

H

F

A G

B

Disconnect connector “2” (4P) from machine junction box. Measure voltage between terminals #A and #D of receptacle “3” (7P) of machine junction box.

C

E Controller (IDU)

D

IDU-1

IDU-5

#A: M3, 10V #D: N6, Load Cell Output

Between #A and #D = 9.8V

“4” 16P (black)

YES

Boom B

Load cell harness failure

NO

Measure voltage between terminals M3 and N6 of connector "4" (16P).

“2” 7P “3” 7P

Between M3 and N6 = 9.8V

YES Machine Junction Box Jib Load Cell T25N-05-06-019

NO

Disconnect connectors IDU-1 and IDU-5 of IDU. Measure resistance between terminal M14 of IDU-1 and terminal N6 of IDU-5.

Resistance ?

Load cell harness failure

0: to several M:

Load Cell Harness

Connector "4" (16P)

Boom B

M3 N6

Make a short circuit between terminal M3 and terminal N6 of connector "4" (16P).

Connector (IDU-1) M3 M14

Check for continuity between terminal M3 of IDU-1 and terminal N6 of IDU-5.

Connector (IDU-5)

Continuity ?

N6

No continuity

Continuity

IDU failure

Machine harness failure

T5-6-23


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE W47 Connector “1” (32P)

W47

T

Connector “1” (24P)

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

U

Check connection of connector “1” and connector “2” of cable reel wiring.

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Check if connected.

NO

A

YES

Disconnect connector "1" of cable reel wiring from machine junction box. Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #2(A) of connector "1". Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #3(T) of connector "1".

#1 (U): X4 #2 (A): R8 #3 (T): R21 Controller (MC2/B)

Crane Between #1(U) and #2(A) = closed Between #1(U) and #3(T) = open

NO

“3” 16P (white) Boom A

Tower Between #1(U) and #2(A) = open Between #1(U) and #3(T) = closed

B

“4”

“1”

“2”

YES

Connect connector “1” of cable reel wiring. Check for continuity between terminals R8 and X4 of connector “3” (16P). Check for continuity between terminals R21 and X4 of connector “3” (16P).

Cable Reel Wiring Machine Junction Box Boom Top Junction Box (Tower Top Junction Box)

T25N-05-06-024

Crane

Between R8 and X4 = closed Between R21 and X4 = open

YES

Tower Between R8 and X4 = open Between R21 and X4 = closed

Connector "3" (16P White) X4 R8 R21

C NO

Machine junction box failure

T5-6-24

Boom A


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D

A

W47

Disassembly position (for transport) ?

YES

NO

30q or more

Boom angle ?

Connect cable reel wiring correctly

Less than 30q or no signal from angle detector

Set boom angle at less than 30q.

IDU failure

B

W47

T A

Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #2(A) of receptacle "4". Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #3(T) of receptacle "4".

Crane Between #1(U) and #2(A) = closed Between #1(U) and #3(T) = open

#1 (U): X4 #2 (A): R8 #3 (T): R21

NO

Tower Between #1(U) and #2(A) = open Between #1(U) and #3(T) = closed

YES

Receptacle “4” (24P)

Receptacle “4” (32P)

Disconnect connector "2" of cable reel wiring from boom top junction box.

Boom top junction box failure

Cable reel wiring failure

T5-6-25

U

T25N-05-03-028


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D C

W47

Connector (MCB-1) X4

Connect connector "3" (16P). Disconnect connectors MCB-1 and MCB-4 of MC2/B. Connector (MCB-4) Check for continuity between terminal X4 of MCB-1 and terminal R8 of MCB-4. Check for continuity between terminal X4 of MCB-1 and terminal R21 of MCB-4.

Crane Between X4 and R8 = closed Between X4 and R21 = open

R8 R21

YES

Tower Between X4 and R8 = open Between X4 and R21 = closed

MC2/B failure Controller (MC2/B) NO MCB-1

MCB-4

Machine harness failure

Cable Reel Wiring

“3” 16P (white) Boom A

Machine Junction Box Boom Top Junction Box (Tower Top Junction Box)

T5-6-26

T25N-05-06-033


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE W48 W48

Check limit switch and wiring are set in counterweight mounted position.

Normal ?

NO

YES

Wiring failure

IDU failure

T5-6-27


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE W49 W49

Check Check connection connection of connector of connector “1” (7P) of hook “1” (7P) overhoist of hook switch overhoist harness withwith boom boom top top junction junction box.box.

Check if connected.

Controller (IDU)

NO

Connect correctly

YES

“2” “3”

Disconnect connector “1” (7P) of hook overhoist switch harness. Check for continuity between terminals #5 and #6 of connector “1” (7P). “1” 7P Machine Junction Box

Continuity ?

No continuity

Boom Top Junction Box

T25N-05-06-026

Hook overhoist switch connector failure

Continuity

Connector “1” (7P)

1

Connect connector "1" (7P). Disconnect connector “3”. Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #14(W) of receptacle "2" of boom top junction box. Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #15(d) of receptacle "2".

3 #1 (U): X4 #14 (W): K10 #15 (d): K3

7

Without short jib, no need to check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #15(d).

A

Continuity

5

4 6

Receptacle “2” (24P)

Receptacle “2” (32P)

Continuity ?

2

No continuity

d

W

Boom top junction box failure T25N-05-03-028

D

T5-6-28


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D Connector (MCB-1)

D

W49

X4

Connector (IDU-3)

Connect connector “3” to the boom top #1 (U): X4 #14 (W): K10 junction box. #15 (d): K3 Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #14(W) of connector "4". Check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #15(d) of connector "4".

K3 K10

Without short jib, no need to check for continuity between terminals #1(U) and #15(d).

Continuity ?

Controller (IDU)

Controller (MC2/B)

IDU-3

MCB-1

No continuity

Continuity

Cable reel wiring failure “2”

Connect connector “4” of machine junction box. Disconnect connector "5" (16P). Check for continuity between terminals X4 and K10 of connector "5" (16P). Check for continuity between terminalsX4 and K3 of connector "5" (16P).

“5” 16P (white) Boom A

“3”

“4”

Without short jib, no need to check for continuity between terminals X4 and K3.

Cable Reel Wiring

Machine Junction Box

Boom Top Junction Box

T25N-05-06-027

No continuity

Continuity ? Continuity

Connect connector “5” (16P). Disconnect connector IDU-3 of IDU and connector MCB-1 of MC2/B. Check for continuity between terminal K10 of IDU-3 and terminal X4 of MCB-1. Check for continuity between terminal K3 of IDU-3 and terminal X4 of MCB-1.

Machine junction box failure Connector "5" (16P White)

Boom A

X4 K10 K3

Without short jib, no need to check for continuity between terminals X4 and K3 of IDU-3.

Connector “4” (32P)

Connector “4” (24P)

A

No continuity

Continuity ?

1 2 3 4 d

Continuity

W

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

IDU failure

Machine harness failure

T5-6-29

21 22 23 24


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE W90 W90

Controller (IDU)

Controller (MC2/A)

Disconnect CAN connectors ("1" and "2"). Check for continuity between terminal #A of connector “1” and #A of connector “2”. Check for continuity between terminal #B of connector “1” and #B of connector "2". MCA-1 “1” 3P

Continuity ?

IDU-4

Machine Harness “2” 3P

No continuity

CAN connector

Continuity

CAN Cable (Connected to All Controllers) T25N-05-06-028

Connect CAN connectors ("1" and "2"). Disconnect connectors IDU-4 of IDU and MCA-1 of MC2/A.

CAN cable failure

View A

T25N-05-06-029

CAN connector

Check for continuity between terminal J1 of connector IDU-4 and terminal D10 of connector MCA-1.

No continuity

Continuity ?

View B

IDU-4

J1 J2

Continuity

Check for continuity between terminal J2 of IDU-4 and terminal D21 of MCA-1.

View C

MCA-1 D10 D21

No continuity

Continuity ?

Continuity

IDU or MC2/A failure

Machine harness failure

T5-6-30


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE W91 W91

Controller (MC2/B)

Controller (IDU)

Disconnect CAN connectors ("1" and "2"). Check for continuity between terminal #A of connector “1” and #A of connector “2”. Check for continuity between terminal #B of connector “1” and #B of connector "2". MCB-1 “1” 3P

Machine Harness

IDU-4

“2” 3P No continuity

Continuity ? CAN connector

CAN Cable (Connected to All Controllers) T25N-05-06-028

Continuity

Connect CAN connectors ("1" and "2"). Disconnect connectors IDU-4 of IDU and MCB-1 of MC2/B.

CAN cable failure

View A

Check for continuity between terminal J1 of connector IDU-4 and terminal X10 of connector MCB-1.

T25N-05-06-029

CAN connector

No continuity

Continuity ? View B

IDU-4

Continuity

J1 J2 Check for continuity between terminal J2 of IDU-4 and terminal X21 of MCB-1. View C

MCB-1 X10 X21

Continuity ?

No continuity

Continuity

Machine harness failure IDU or MC2/B failure

T5-6-31


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE WA1 WA1

Disconnect connector of brake mode selection switch.

Check if WA1 disappears.

YES

NO

Brake mode selection switch wiring failure

MC2/A failure

FAULT CODE WA2 WA2

Disconnect connector of accelerator control switch.

Check if WA2 disappears.

YES

NO

Accelerator control switch wiring failure

MC2/A failure

FAULT CODE WA3 WA3 Disconnect connector of emergency operation switch.

Check if WA3 disappears.

NO

MC2/A failure

YES

Emergency operation switch wiring failure

T5-6-32


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE WB1 WB1

Disconnect the connectors for the three winding detection limit switches.

Check if WB1 disappears.

YES

NO

Failure of wiring for three winding detection limit switches MC2/B failure

FAULT CODE WB2 WB2

Disconnect all connectors connected to the following switches. boom overhoist tower overhoist clamshell lower limit boom second overhoist (short circuit connectors)

Check if WB2 disappears.

YES

NO

MC2/B failure

Failure of wiring to following switches. boom overhoist tower overhoist clamshell lower limit boom second overhoist

T5-6-33


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting D FAULT CODE WB3 WB3

Disconnect connector “1” from boom top junction box. Controller (MC2/B)

Check if WB3 disappears.

YES “3” 16P (white) Boom A

Boom top junction box failure

NO

“2” “1”

Disconnect connector “2” from machine junction box.

Cable Reel Wiring Machine Junction Junction Box Box Machine Boom Top Junction Box

Check if WB3 disappears.

YES

NO

T25N-05-06-030

Cable reel wiring failure

Disconnect connector “3” (16P).

Check if WB3 disappears.

NO

YES

Machine junction box failure

MC2/B failure

T5-6-34


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting E TROUBLESHOOTING E PROCEDURE Use troubleshooting E when the ECU lamp in the cab illuminates or blinks after the activation of the ECU troubleshooting control (refer to the chapter on "Operating Principle/System"). Refer to T2-1-1 operating principles.

Error Codes㩷 Error Codes 07 08 11 12 14 15 16 19 21 22 23 24 26 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 41 44 46 47 48 58 63 67 68 69 81 82 84 89 95

Error Item Engine overrun Injector #6 Common rail pressure sensor Segment sensor Speed sensor Increment sensor Accelerator sensor 2 Atmospheric pressure sensor Coolant temperature sensor㩷 Injection pump no-pressure feeding Injection pump over-pressure feeding Accelerator sensor 1 Air heater relay Boost pressure sensor ECU Q resistance Faulty injection pump pressure feeding, Limiter valve open Injector #1 Injector #5 Injector #3 Fuel temperature sensor Intake-air temperature sensor Injector #2 Injector #4 Starter relay 2 Accelerator interdependent diagnosis Fuel supply pump EGR M/V1 EGR M/V2 EGR M/V3 Sensor supply voltage Injector Bank 1, 2 EDU relay Air heater lamp CAN 2 communication

T5-7-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting E (Blank)

T5-7-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 1. Disconnect the power source. Be sure to remove the ground earth terminals from the batteries first when taking wire harnesses and connectors off for repair or replacement work. Failure to do so can result in damage to the wire harnesses, fuses, and fusible links and, in some cases, cause fire due to short circuiting. 2. Color coding of wire harnesses. The color codes of the wire harnesses in the electrical system are shown in the table below. In cases on the design sheet where two colors are indicated for one wire, the left initial stands for the base color, while the right initial stands for the marking color. Code R L Or Y Br Gr

Color Red Blue Orange Yellow Brown Gray

Code W G Lg B P V

Color White Green Light green Black Pink Violet

NOTE: 1) Code BW indicates a black base wire with white fine-line marking. 2) Initials “O” and “Or” both stand for the color orange. 3) Wires with longitudinal stripes printed on them are not color coded. Be sure not to confuse them with color coded wires.

T5-8-1


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection 3. Precautions for connecting and disconnecting terminal connectors. 1) When disconnecting harnesses, grasp them by their connectors. Do not pull on the wire itself. 2) Water-resistant connectors keep water out so that if water enters them, water will not easily drain from them. When checking water-resistant connectors, take extra care not to allow water to enter the connectors. In case water should enter the connectors, reconnect only after the connectors are thoroughly dried. 3) Before connecting terminal connectors, check that no terminals are bent or coming off. In addition, as most connectors are made of brass, check that no terminals are rusting. 4) Be sure to release the lock first before attempting to separate connectors, if a lock is provided. 5) When connecting terminal connectors provided with a lock, be sure to insert them together until the lock “clicks” 6) If the connector is secured with a screw, remove the screw. Tighten a screw until the torque mark (protruded mark) appears. 4. Precautions for using a circuit tester. 1) Before using a circuit tester, refer to the instructions in the circuit tester manual. Then, set the circuit tester to meet the object to be measured, voltage range and current polarity. 2) Before starting the connector test, always check the connector terminal numbers, referring to the circuit diagram. When the connector size is very small, and the standard probe size is too large to be used for testing, wind a fine piece of sharpened wire or a pin around the probe to make the test easier. 3) When checking the connector using a teater, insert the tester probe from the harness side of the connector wherever possible, to protect the terminal inside the connector from damage.

Right

Wrong

T107-07-06-001

Right Rust Deformation Separation

T107-07-06-002

Protruded Mark

Wind a Piece of Wire

Tester Probe

Sharpen the end of the Wire T107-07-06-003

T5-8-2


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection BATTERY VOLTAGE CHECK 1. Turn the key switch OFF. Check voltage between the battery positive terminal and the vehicle frame (ground earth). Normal Voltage: 24 V or more NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, recharge or replace the battery. 2. Start the engine. Check voltage between the battery positive terminal and the vehicle frame (ground earth). Normal Voltage: 26 to 28.5 V NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, check the charging system.

T107-04-05-006 T105-07-01-006

FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Open the cap of the fusible link (slow blow fuse) to disconnect the fuse, and visually inspect it.

Number

Capacity

(1)

45A

(2)

65A

Connected to Key Switch Fuse Box1 (#5 to 10) Fuse Box1 (#1 to 4, #11, #16) Fuse Box2 (#22 to 30)

T324-04-05-002

T5-8-3


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection FUSE INSPECTION Cracks in a fuse are so fine that it is very difficult or impossible to find by visual inspection. Use a tester to correctly inspect fuse continuity by following the instructions described below. 1. Turn Key Switch ON When the key switch is turned ON, current from key switch terminal M activates the battery relay so that electric power is supplied to all circuits. (Refer to the circuit diagram.) 2. Remove the fuse box cover. Set the tester voltage to meet the circuit specification to be measured. (Measurement Range: 0 to 30 V) 3. Ground the negative probe of the tester to the vehicle frame. Touch the terminals located away from the center of the fuse box with the positive probe of the tester one at a time. When normal continuity of a fuse is intact, the tester will indicate 20 to 25 V (battery voltage). NOTE: In both fuse boxes 1 and 2, all terminals located along the lengthwise centerline are connected to the power source (primary), while terminals located away from the center are connected to loads (accessories) (secondary).

Power Source Side( )

Accessory side ( )

T105-07-01-008

T5-8-4


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection ALTERNATOR INSPECTION In general, the alternator indicator remains off when the alternator is generating power. If the alternator indicator comes on while the engine is running, the alternator might be defective.

How to check the alternator 1. Turn the key switch to the ON position. Confirm that the alternator indicator comes on. 2. Measure the voltage between teminals B and E terminals of the alternator. If the measured voltage is around 24 V, the alternator circuit can be considered normal. If the measured voltage is low, a shortage in battery capacity or looseness of the wire connectors of the alternator circuit might be the cause of the malfunction. When the voltage is 0 V, the wiring between the battery relay and alternator might be disconnected, or the ground line of the alternator might be disconnected. 3. Next, start the engine and measure the voltage generated as the alternator operates. As described above, measure the voltage between terminals B and E on the side of the alternator. If the voltage is around 28 V (voltage generated by alternator), the alternator is operating normally. If the measured voltage remains at around 24V (voltage of battery), there is some trouble with the alternator or the regulator.

T5-8-5

Terminal E

Terminal B

T333-05-07-001


TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection CONTINUITY CHECK

Harness A

Single-line continuity check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness (open) and check continuity (measure resistance) between both ends: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 : Continuity f : Discontinuity NOTE: When the one end connector is far apart from the other, connect one end of connector (A) to the machine chassis using a clip. Then, check continuity of the harness through the vehicle frame. If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 : f:

Continuity Discontinuity

a

:

Connect to the vehicle frame.

a

A

Connect to the vehicle frame.

:

Single-line short-circuit check (Short-circuit with vehicle frame) Disconnect both end connectors of the harness and check continuity between one end connector of the harness and the vehicle frame: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 : Short circuit is present. f : No short circuit is present.

a

A u

Short-circuit between the harness and the vehicle frame.

:

T107-07-05-003

Multi-line continuity check Disconnect connectors at both ends of the harness and connect terminals (A) and (B) at one end with a clip, etc., and check for continuity between terminals (a) and (b) at the other end of the connector. f : means that either (A)-(a) or (B)-(b) is broken. To find out which line is broken, either check each line individually or change the connected terminals and test again.

First connection (clip)

a b c

A B C Second connection (clip)

NOTE: By conducting the multi-line continuity check twice, it is possible to find out which line is broken. Check continuity between terminals (a) and (c) with terminals (A) and (C) connected. If the ohm-meter reading is: 0ȍ means (B)-(b) is broken. f : means that (A)-(a) is broken. Multi-line short-circuit check (Short-circuit in harness) Disconnect both end connectors of the harness, and check continuity between terminals (A) and (B) or (C). If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 : Short-circuit exists between the harnesses. f : No short-circuit exists between the harnesses.

:

T107-07-05-004

Short-circuit between harnesses. A B C

u

a b c

:

T107-07-05-005

T5-8-6


Mitsubishi 6M70 Workshop Manual diesel engine

GROUP INDEX GENERAL ............................................. ENGINE ................................................. LUBRICATION ...................................... FUEL AND ENGINE CONTROL ........... COOLING .............................................. INTAKE AND EXHAUST....................... EMISSION CONTROL ..........................

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts Contact: Email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 2696731638

Applicable models Mitsubishi 6M70

00 11 12 13 14 15 17


DIAGNOSIS CODES 1. Diagnosis Codes • Diagnosis codes indicate the faulty sections of the vehicle. • A fault can be repaired by reading out the diagnosis code(s) stored in the control unit and performing the remedy for that code(s). • Diagnosis codes can be displayed in the following two methods. Select either of them according to the system to be diagnosed. • Using a Multi-Use Tester • Using flashing of a warning lamp on meter cluster • The table below indicates the systems for which diagnosis codes can be displayed and the methods usable for individual systems.

1.1 Systems and diagnosis code displaying methods Warning lamp

Diagnosis codes displaying methods

System

Multi-Use Tester

Flashing of warning lamp

Common rail

13

Turbocharger

O

Exhaust gas recirculation

O

Starter continuous energizing preventing function

15 17 54

Vehicle speed limiting (SLD) Auto cruise –

Reference Gr

Full auto air conditioner

O

O

54

O

O

55

1.2 Types of diagnosis codes • There are two types of diagnosis code output method depending on the system: one has a distinction of present and past codes, and the other does not have such a distinction. System

Diagnosis code With distinction of present and past

Without distinction

Except below

O

Full auto air conditioner

O

(1) The system that has a distinction of present and past diagnosis codes (1.1) Present diagnosis code • Fault developed in the vehicle after the starter switch is set to ON is indicated by corresponding diagnosis code. • The fault warning lamp is lit at the same time. (1.2) Past diagnosis code • Past fault developed in the vehicle is indicated by corresponding diagnosis code stored in the memory of the electronic control unit. • With the vehicle restored to its normal condition or the starter switch turned from OFF to ON after inspection or repair against present diagnosis codes, the present diagnosis code is stored as past diagnosis codes in the memory of the electronic control unit. • When reading out the past diagnosis codes, the warning lamp does not illuminate as such codes do not indicate the current fault. (2) The system that does not have a distinction of present and past diagnosis codes • The present and past diagnosis codes are displayed together without distinction.

00-22


00 2. Reading and Erasing the Diagnosis Code 2.1 Using a Multi-Use Tester (1) Connecting a Multi-Use Tester

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

SOFTWARE DISC

Multi-Use Tester III SOFTWARE DISC

V.C.I.

Multi-Use Tester test Harness E A: Harness for inspection and drive recorder B: Harness for drive recorder C: Drive recorder harness D: Cigarette lighter plug harness

Part No.

Application

FMS-E07-3* (Multi-Use Tester-III version)

Installation of the Muti-Use-Tester-III or version-up of the current version into Multi-Use Tester-III SOFTWARE DISC (Pub. No. SG0705A)

MH062927

Data transmission between electronic control unit and PC

MH063659 A: MH063661 B: MH063663 C: MH063665 D: MH063666

Power supply to V.C.I. and communication with electronic control unit

Multi-Use Tester test harness D (used for extension)

MH062951

Multi-Use Tester test harness B extension

USB cable

MH063668

Communication between V.C.I. and PC

00-23


DIAGNOSIS CODES (1.1) To perform system inspection • Move the starter switch to the LOCK position. • Connect PC installed , , -A and as shown. -A connector to the Multi-Use Tester connector on • Connect the vehicle.

(1.2) To use drive recorder function • Move the starter switch to the LOCK position. • Connect PC installed , , -A, -C, -D and as shown. • Connect -C connector to the Multi-Use Tester connector on the vehicle. • Connect the cigarette lighter plug of -D to the cigarette lighter socket on the vehicle.

(1.3) To extend the Multi-Use Tester test harness • Connect to -A to extend the test harness to use the Multi-Use Tester outside the vehicle.

00-24


00 (2) Access of diagnosis code • Set the starter switch to ON. • Operate the Multi-Use Tester for a display of necessary diagnosis code stored in the memory of the electronic control unit and identify the location of the fault. (3) Clearing of diagnosis code • Set the starter switch to ON (the engine not to be started). • Operate the Multi-Use Tester to delete all the diagnosis codes stored in the memory of the electronic control unit.

2.2 Using flashing of a warning lamp on meter cluster (1) Engine control, vehicle speed limiting (SLD), auto cruise

• Using the diagnosis and memory clear switches, display diagnosis codes.

CAUTION • Opening the memory clear switch followed by its reconnection will erase the stored diagnosis codes from the memory. To avoid inadvertently erasing necessary codes, be sure to read well the procedure described below before handling diagnosis codes.

00-25


DIAGNOSIS CODES (1.1) Reading diagnosis codes • To read a diagnosis code, observe how may times the warning lamp flashes and how long each illumination lasts. • The duration of illumination differs between the first and second digits. • Second digit: 1.2 sec. • First digit: 0.4 sec. • A diagnosis code consists of the flashing of second digit and the flashing of first digit in that order. If a diagnosis code has “0” in the second digit, only the first digit will be displayed. • The diagnosis code 01 will be displayed if the system is normal. • The same diagnosis code will be displayed 3 times in a row before moving to the display of the next code. • After the last diagnosis code is displayed, the first code will be displayed again 3 times in a row and then the subsequent codes. This will be repeated.

(1.2) Present diagnosis codes • Turn the starter switch ON. • Remove the diagnosis switch. • Present diagnosis codes will be displayed by flashing of the warning lamp. • When the diagnosis switch is connected, electronic control unit will stop (terminate) displaying diagnosis codes.

(1.3) Present and past diagnosis codes • Turn the starter switch to the ON position. • Open the diagnosis switch. • Present diagnosis codes will be displayed by flashing of the warning lamp. • Open the memory clear switch. • Present and past diagnosis codes will be displayed by flashing of the warning lamp. • Turn the starter switch to the OFF position and connect the memory clear switch and diagnosis switch to terminate the diagnosis code displaying mode. (1.4) Erasing diagnosis codes • Turn the starter switch to the ON position (do not start the engine). • Open the memory clear switch and reconnect it; all diagnosis codes stored in electronic control unit memory will be erased. To cancel diagnosis code erasure after opening the memory clear switch, turn the starter switch to the OFF position and then reconnect the memory clear switch.

00-26


00 (2) Full automatic air conditioner (2.1) Connection of LED for inspection • Move the starter switch to the LOCK position. • Connect the LED for inspection to the Multi-Use Tester connector.

CAUTION • Air conditioner electronic control unit and control panel has a backup power supply to keep diagnostic check results in memory. If this power supply is cut off, with battery cables disconnected, for example, stored data are erased. • Air conditioner electronic control unit and control panel enters into the mode of control during fault immediately a fault occurs. In this mode, control is effected to minimize trouble arising from the fault.

(2.2) Reading and erasing diagnosis codes • To read a diagnosis code, observe how may times the LED for inspection flashes and how long each illumination lasts. • The duration of illumination differs between the first and second digits. • Second digit: 1.5 sec. • First digit: 0.5 sec. • A diagnosis code consists of the flashing of second digit and the flashing of first digit in that order. If a diagnosis code has “0” in the second digit, only the first digit will be displayed. • When two or more faults occur at a time, relevant diagnosis codes are displayed repeatedly starting from the first Code. • To erase a diagnosis code from the memory after inspection, disconnect negative (–) battery cable and leave it disconnected for more than 30 seconds.

00-27


TABLE OF STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES • Use specified bolts and nuts. Tighten them to the torques shown below as appropriate, unless otherwise specified. • Threads and bearing surfaces shall be dry. • If the mating nut and bolt (or stud bolt) are different in level of strength, tighten them to the torque specified for the bolt.

Hexagon Head Bolts and Stud Bolts (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Strength 4T 7T

8T

Identification symbol Nominal diameter

(stud)

(stud)

(stud)

M5

2 to 3 {0.2 to 0.3}

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

5 to 7 {0.5 to 0.7}

M6

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

7 to 10 {0.7 to 1.0}

8 to 12 {0.8 to 1.2}

M8

9 to 13 {0.9 to 1.3}

16 to 24 {1.7 to 2.5}

19 to 28 {2.0 to 2.9}

M10

18 to 27 {1.8 to 2.7}

17 to 25 {1.8 to 2.6}

34 to 50 {3.5 to 5.1}

32 to 48 {3.3 to 4.9}

45 to 60 {4.5 to 6.0}

37 to 55 {3.8 to 5.7}

M12

34 to 50 {3.4 to 5.1}

31 to 45 {3.1 to 4.6}

70 to 90 {7.0 to 9.5}

65 to 85 {6.5 to 8.5}

80 to 105 {8.5 to 11}

75 to 95 {7.5 to 10}

M14

60 to 80 {6.0 to 8.0}

55 to 75 {5.5 to 7.5}

110 to 150 {11 to 15}

100 to 140 {11 to 14}

130 to 170 {13 to 17}

120 to 160 {12 to 16}

M16

90 to 120 {9 to 12}

90 to 110 {9 to 11}

170 to 220 {17 to 23}

160 to 210 {16 to 21}

200 to 260 {20 to 27}

190 to 240 {19 to 25}

M18

130 to 170 {14 to 18}

120 to 150 {12 to 16}

250 to 330 {25 to 33}

220 to 290 {23 to 30}

290 to 380 {30 to 39}

250 to 340 {26 to 35}

M20

180 to 240 {19 to 25}

170 to 220 {17 to 22}

340 to 460 {35 to 47}

310 to 410 {32 to 42}

400 to 530 {41 to 55}

360 to 480 {37 to 49}

M22

250 to 330 {25 to 33}

230 to 300 {23 to 30}

460 to 620 {47 to 63}

420 to 560 {43 to 57}

540 to 720 {55 to 73}

490 to 650 {50 to 67}

M24

320 to 430 {33 to 44}

290 to 380 {29 to 39}

600 to 810 {62 to 83}

540 to 720 {55 to 73}

700 to 940 {72 to 96}

620 to 830 {63 to 85}

Hexagon Head Flange Bolts (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Strength 4T

7T

8T

Identification symbol Nominal diameter

M6

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

8 to 12 {0.8 to 1.2}

10 to 14 {1.0 to 1.4}

M8

10 to 15 {1.0 to 1.5}

19 to 28 {2.0 to 2.9}

22 to 33 {2.3 to 3.3}

M10

21 to 31 {2.1 to 3.1}

20 to 29 {2.0 to 3.0}

45 to 55 {4.5 to 5.5}

37 to 54 {3.8 to 5.6}

50 to 65 {5.0 to 6.5}

50 to 60 {5.0 to 6.5}

M12

38 to 56 {3.8 to 5.5}

35 to 51 {3.5 to 5.2}

80 to 105 {8.0 to 10.5}

70 to 95 {7.5 to 9.5}

90 to 120 {9 to 12}

85 to 110 {8.5 to 11}

00-28


00 Hexagon Nuts (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Strength 4T

6T

Identification symbol

Nominal diameter

Standard screw thread

Coarse screw thread

Standard screw thread

Coarse screw thread

M5

2 to 3 {0.2 to 0.3}

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

M6

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

7 to 10 {0.7 to 1.0}

M8

9 to 13 {0.9 to 1.3}

16 to 24 {1.7 to 2.5}

M10

18 to 27 {1.8 to 2.7}

17 to 25 {1.8 to 2.6}

34 to 50 {3.5 to 5.1}

32 to 48 {3.3 to 4.9}

M12

34 to 50 {3.4 to 5.1}

31 to 45 {3.1 to 4.6}

70 to 90 {7.0 to 9.5}

65 to 85 {6.5 to 8.5}

M14

60 to 80 {6.0 to 8.0}

55 to 75 {5.5 to 7.5}

110 to 150 {11 to 15}

100 to 140 {11 to 14}

M16

90 to 120 {9 to 12}

90 to 110 {9 to 11}

170 to 220 {17 to 23}

160 to 210 {16 to 21}

M18

130 to 170 {14 to 18}

120 to 150 {12 to 16}

250 to 330 {25 to 33}

220 to 290 {23 to 30}

M20

180 to 240 {19 to 25}

170 to 220 {17 to 22}

340 to 460 {35 to 47}

310 to 410 {32 to 42}

M22

250 to 330 {25 to 33}

230 to 300 {23 to 30}

460 to 620 {47 to 63}

420 to 560 {43 to 57}

M24

320 to 430 {33 to 44}

290 to 380 {29 to 39}

600 to 810 {62 to 83}

540 to 720 {55 to 73}

Hexagon Flange Nuts (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Strength 4T Identification symbol

Nominal diameter

Standard screw thread

Coarse screw thread

M6

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

M8

10 to 15 {1.0 to 1.5}

M10

21 to 31 {2.1 to 3.1}

20 to 29 {2.0 to 3.0}

M12

38 to 56 {3.8 to 5.6}

35 to 51 {3.5 to 5.2}

00-29


TABLE OF STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES Tightening Torque for General-Purpose Flare Nut (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Pipe diameter Tightening torque

φ4.76 mm

φ6.35 mm

φ8 mm

φ10 mm

φ12 mm

φ15 mm

17 {1.7}

25 {2.6}

39 {4.0}

59 {6.0}

88 {9.0}

98 {10}

Tightening Torque for General-Purpose Air Piping Nylon Tube (DIN Type) (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Nominal diameter × wall thickness Tightening torque

6 × 1 mm 20

+6 0

{2.0

+0.6 0

10 × 1.25 mm }

34

+10 0

{3.5

+1.0 0

}

12 × 1.5 mm +10 0

49

+1.0 0

{5.0

15 × 1.5 mm }

54

+5 0

{5.5

+0.5 0

}

Tightening Torque for General-Purpose Air Piping Nylon Tube (SAE Type) (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Nominal diameter Tightening torque

00-30

1/4 in. 13

+4 0

{1.3

+0.4 0

3/8 in. }

29

+5 0

{3.0

+0.5 0

1/2 in. }

49

+5 0

{5.0

+0.5 0

5/8 in. }

64

+5 0

{6.5

+0.5 0

}


GROUP 11 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 11-2 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Engine Proper .................................................................................... 2. Rocker and Shaft, Camshaft, Rocker Case and Cylinder Head Gasket ....................................................................... 3. Valve Mechanism ............................................................................... 4. Connecting Rod ................................................................................. 5. Piston .................................................................................................. 6. Timing Gears ...................................................................................... 7. Flywheel ............................................................................................. 8. Flywheel PTO ..................................................................................... 9. Powertard Brake System ..................................................................

11-3 11-4 11-4 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-8

TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................... 11-12 ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Measuring Compression Pressure ................................................ 11-14 2. Inspection and Adjustment of Valve Clearances .......................... 11-16 3. Inspection and Adjustment of Powertard Clearances ................. 11-20

ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...................................... 11-22 ROCKER COVER, ROCKER AND SHAFT ..................................... 11-26 CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER CASE ................................................. 11-30 CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM ................................ 11-38 PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER ................. 11-54 FLYWHEEL PTO <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO> ................................... 11-68 FLYWHEEL ...................................................................................... 11-72 TIMING GEARS <WITHOUT FLYWHEEL PTO>...................................................... 11-78 <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO> ............................................................ 11-82 CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE ................................................. 11-88

11-1


SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Engine type

6M70T2

Type

6M70T4

6-cylinder, in-line, water-cooled, 4-cycle diesel engine

Combustion chamber

Direct injection type

Valve mechanism

Overhead camshaft (OHC) system

Maximum output

kW {PS} /rpm

257 {350} / 2000

309 {420} / 2000

Maximum torque

N·m {kgf·m} /rpm

1620 {165} / 1100

1810 {185} / 1100

Cylinder bore × stroke Total displacement

mm 3

cm {L}

Compression ratio

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-2

φ135 × 150 12882 {12.882} 17.5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION

11

1. Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Proper

• The 6M70 engine employs an overhead camshaft (OHC) system, with the valve mechanism and the timing gears arranged as shown above.

11-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 2. Rocker and Shaft, Camshaft, Rocker Case and Cylinder Head Gasket • The camshaft journals are directly supported by the rocker case and the camshaft cap, without using any camshaft bearings. The rocker case and camshaft caps have been machined together, meaning that they all need to be replaced for a new set when one of them becomes defective.

3. Valve Mechanism

• Each valve has a valve stem seal, which regulates the flow of lubricating oil to the contact surface between the valve and the valve guide. • The valve springs have a variable pitch to prevent abnormal vibration at high engine speed. The exhaust valves use a double spring, with the inner and outer springs coiled in different directions to prevent them from jamming each other.

11-4


11 4. Mitsubishi 6M60 Connecting Rod • Weight mark: “A” to “H”, “J” to “M” • “A” indicates the greatest connecting rod mass.

5. Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston

11-5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 6. Mitsubishi 6M70 Timing Gears • The timing gears are provided with timing marks to help ensure correct assembly. • Timing marks are provided on the following gears. • Camshaft gear: stamped line • Crankshaft gear: “A” • Idler gear A, B: “A”, “B” • Idler gear C: “B”, “C” • Supply pump gear: “C”

7. Flywheel

11-6


11 8. Flywheel PTO

• The flywheel PTO is located in the upper part of the flywheel housing and is driven by the PTO drive gear.

11-7


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 9. Powertard Brake System

• The Powertard is activated when all of the following conditions are met with the combination switch placed in the first stage or second stage. • Engine speed: 800 to 2400 rpm • Clutch pedal released (clutch pedal switch: OFF) • Accelerator pedal released (accelerator pedal switch: ON) • Transmission in gear (transmission neutral switch: ON) • Anti-lock brake system not activated (ABS) (Control unit: OFF) (See Gr35E.) • If any of the above conditions are not met, operation of the Powertard system will be temporarily canceled. If the engine speed is less than 700 rpm or higher than 2500 rpm although all the other conditions (clutch pedal, accelerator pedal, and transmission conditions) are met, operation of the Powertard system will be canceled. • When the vehicle speed exceeds the auto cruise set vehicle speed during driving with the auto cruise engaged, the Powertard is activated by the control of the engine electronic control unit even if the Powertard switch (combination switch) is not turned ON. (See Gr13.) • When the Powertard switch is placed in the first stage, the Powertard is activated to enhance the engine braking power. • When the Powertard switch is placed in the second stage, the turbocharger magnetic valve is activated to control the turbocharger and generate stronger braking power than the first stage.

11-8


11 9.1 Operation of Powertard brake system

• The Powertard brake system is a device to enhance the engine brake performance. It opens and closes the exhaust valve (one side only) to control the volume of compressed air in the combustion chamber in accordance with the movement of the piston, thereby providing a boosted braking force. Powertard components are located in the cylinder head. • The valve bridge is provided with an adjusting screw and a pin that allow the exhaust valve to be opened and closed under the control of the Powertard, in addition to ordinary valve control. • The pin is free to move in the adjusting screw. Its movement is controlled by the control valve. • The adjusting screw is used to adjust the timing (Powertard clearance) for the control valve to press the pin. (1) Operating principle • In the ordinary engine brake, the piston is forced up during its compression stroke when compressed air A develops a counter force B to press the piston. This force works as a braking force. However, the piston is forced down during its expansion stroke to let compressed air expand. This causes an accelerating force C to work on the piston downward, resulting in the braking force obtained during the compression period being lost largely.

11-9


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • When the Powertard system is activated, the piston pressing force works as a braking force during the compression stroke as when the Powertard system is not activated. During the expansion period, the exhaust valve is opened by the working of the system to let some of the compressed air out through the exhaust port. • This causes the piston pressing force to be no longer generated. As a result, the braking force obtained during the compression period is maintained for effective use.

• After letting out more compressed air, the exhaust valve is closed, which causes the combustion chamber to be closed up. As a result, during the expansion period, a new force is generated which hinders the movement of piston when it goes down. This force, following the braking force obtained during the previous compression period, also acts as a braking force, enhancing greatly the vehicle’s engine brake capacity. The operation of the system which causes the valve to be opened and closed in agreement with the successive piston strokes is called synchronized operation. • As shown above, when the Powertard system is activated, the engine brake provides more power than the ordinary engine brake. (2) Hydraulic pressure control • When the solenoid valve is activated, engine oil (oil pressure produced by ordinary engine oil pump) is let in from A to flow through the oil passage and forces open the check valve in the control valve. • Oil pressure proceeds through the oil passage to move the master piston into contact with the dedicated Powertard cam. • This allows the rotation of the dedicated Powertard cam to be transmitted to the master piston. As the cam lobe top is reached, oil pressure in the oil passage further builds up, forcing the check valve in the control valve to close and working on the slave piston at the same time. • The slave piston pushes the pin, which in turn forces the exhaust valve to open. As a result, the pressure in the combustion chamber is released to maintain effective braking force.

11-10


11 • As the Powertard cam further rotates and the cam lobe top leaves the master piston, the oil pressure in the oil passage is reduced. • As a result, the exhaust valve is closed by its spring force, which allows the valve to open and close according to ordinary valve timing. At the same time, the check valve in the control valve opens to let engine oil (oil pressure produced by ordinary engine oil pump) work through the oil passages and, allowing the exhaust valve to be forced open again through the movement of the Powertard cam.

• When the Powertard release conditions are met, the following sequence of operation is followed. • When the solenoid valve is de-energized, the control valve shuts the incoming path (A) for engine oil from the rocker case and opens the outgoing path (B) to the cylinder head. • Engine oil in the oil passage is let out through B, relieving the control valve of oil pressure. • The control valve opens the path (C) that has been closed by oil pressure to let out engine oil in the chamber of the slave piston and oil passage. • As the oil pressure is removed, the master piston is lowered to leave the Powertard cam. • At the same time, the slave piston is forced up by the spring force. As a result, the exhaust valve is closed and the Powertard is turned off. (3) Powertard brake control (Powertard: Switch is placed in the second stage) • The turbocharger magnetic valve feeds air A to the air cylinder, narrowing turbine vane B. • The number of revolutions of the turbocharger increases, taking more air into the combustion chamber. • Compressed air C increases and the braking force of the Powertard becomes stronger.

11-11


TROUBLESHOOTING

Low power output

Abnormal engine noise

Symptoms

Valve clearance incorrect

O

O

Defective cylinder head gasket

O

O

Valve and valve seat worn and carbon deposits

O

O

Valve spring fatigued

O

Possible causes

Cylinder head and valve mechanism

Timing gears Camshaft Pistons and connecting rods

Crankshaft

Fuel system

Cooling system

O

Defective rocker shaft and bracket

O

Poor lubrication of rocker shaft and bracket assembly

O

Defective backlash between gears

O

Poor lubrication of gearts and idler shaft

O

Camshaft end play excessive

O

Camshaft worn

O

Piston ring groove(s) worn and damaged

O

Piston ring(s) worn and damaged

O

Reference Gr

O O

Piston pin and connecting rod small end worn

O

Crankshaft end play excessive

O

Fan pulley improperly mounted

O

Crankshaft pins and connecting rod bearings worn or damaged

O

Crankshaft journals and main bearings worn or damaged

O

Defective supply pump

O

O

Defective injector

O

O Gr13

Air trapped in fuel system

O

Cooling system malfunction

O

Belts loose/damaged

O

Gr14

Air cleaner colgged

O

O

Turbocharger malfunction

O

O

Diesel particulate filter colgged

O

O Gr15

Oil viscosity unsuitable

O

Gr12

Improper fuel

O

Intake and exhaust system

Gr15

Incorrectly fitted piping and hoses

O

Defective/incorrectly fitted alternator and other auxiliaries

O Gr54

11-12


11 Powertard Brake System

Possible causes

Powertard brake fails to operate

Turning Powertard switch OFF does not cancel Powertard braking

Symptoms

Lubrication oil is cold and too viscous

O

O

Powertard clearance too large

O

Electrical system

Blown fuse

O

Improper connection of harnesses and connectors

O

Defective clutch switch

O

O

Defective accelerator switch

O

O

Defective transmission neutral switch

O

O

Defective powertard switch (combination switch)

O

O

Defective meter cluster

O

O

Defective engine speed sensor

O

O

Defective powertard solenoid valve

O

O

Defective engine control unit

O

O

Defective ABS exhaust brake cut relay <ABS/ASR>

O

O

O

O

Defective Powertard Broken or weak exhaust valve springs Valve mechanism

Gr13

Gr35

O

Exhaust valve sticky or not smooth in operation

O

Improperly adjusted powertard clearance

O

Oil leakage in Powertard system

O

Engine oil pressure too low

O Air present in engine oil

O

Oil leakage from around cylinder head and rocker case

O

Insufficient engine oil flow Oil passage leading to powertard assembly clogged

Reference Gr

O

Oil leakage from powertard brake system

O

Defective control valve

O

Gr12

11-13


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Measuring Compression Pressure Service standards Location

Maintenance item Each cylinder (at 200 rpm)

Mitsubishi 6M70 Compression pressure

Pressure difference between each cylinder

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

2,940 kPa {30 kgf/cm2}

1,960 kPa {20 kgf/cm2}

Inspect

390 kPa {4 kgf/cm2} or less

Inspect

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Compression gauge adapter

MH062180

Application

Measuring of compression pressure

A M14 × 1.5

• A drop in compression pressure can be used as a guide to determine when the engine should be overhauled. • Measure the compression pressure at regular intervals. Keeping track of its transitions can provide a useful tool for troubleshooting. On new vehicles and vehicles with newly replaced parts, the compression pressure will be somewhat higher depending on the break-in condition of piston rings, valve seats, etc., but this will return to normal as the parts wear down. • Before the compression measurement, confirm that the engine oil, starter, and battery are in normal condition. • Place the vehicle in the following conditions. • Warm up the engine until the coolant temperature reaches approximately 75 to 85°C. • Turn off the lights and accessories. • Place the transmission in N range. • Turn the steering wheel in neutral position. • Remove the fuse (M25) from the fuse box in the cab to prevent fuel from being injected while the engine is cranked using the starter.

CAUTION • When cranking the engine, never shut off the power supplied to the engine electronic control unit by disconnecting the engine electronic control unit connector or other similar methods. If the engine is cranked with the power to the engine electronic control unit shut off, the supply pump will not be controlled by the electronic control unit, causing the supply pump to be malfunctioned.

11-14


11 • Remove all the injectors. (See Gr13.)

• Cover the injector mounting holes with shop towels or other similar cloth. Crank the engine using the starter. Ensure that no foreign matter is attached on the shop towels.

CAUTION • If cracks or any other damage are evident in the cylinders, this means that the coolant, engine oil or fuel, or other substances, has entered the cylinders. If this is the case, it is extremely dangerous to crank the engine as these substances will gush out at high temperature from the injector mounting holes. Stay away from the engine when cranking it. • Attach the nozzle gasket and to one of the mounting holes. Then, connect a compression gauge to . • Crank the engine and measure the compression pressure. • Measure the compression pressure for all the cylinders one after another. Determine the compression pressure difference between the cylinders. • If the compression pressure is below the limit or the pressure difference between each cylinder is not within the limit, pour a small amount of engine oil into the corresponding mounting hole and measure the compression pressure again. • If the compression pressure increases, the piston rings and inner surfaces of cylinder may be badly worn or otherwise damaged. • If the compression pressure remains unchanged, there may be seizure in the valves, the valves may be incorrectly seated or the cylinder head gasket may be defective.

• Install the injector. (See Gr13.) • Install the rocker cover and the gasket. (See “ROCKER COVER, ROCKER AND SHAFT”.)

11-15


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 2. Mitsubishi 6M70 Inspection and Adjustment of Valve Clearances Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve clearance (when engine is cold)

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Intake side

0.4

Adjust

Exhaust side

0.6

Adjust

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Lock nut ( 6M70 valve bridge adjusting screw tightening)

68 {7}

Lock nut ( 6M70 rocker arm adjusting screw tightening)

60 {6}

• Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve clearances should be checked and adjusted as follows while the engine is still cold.

10

5

16

[Inspection] • Remove the rocker cover. • Bring the No. 1 or No. 6 cylinder piston to the top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke according to the following procedure: • Crank the engine until the pointer is aligned with the “1 6” mark on the flywheel. • This will place either the No. 1 or No. 6 cylinder piston at TDC on the compression stroke. The cylinder in which the rocker arms for both the intake and exhaust valves can be pushed down by hand by the valve clearance amounts has its piston at TDC. Rotate the engine by one full turn to switch the TDCs of the No. 1 and No. 6 cylinder pistons. • With the No. 1 or No. 6 cylinder piston at TDC, measure the clearance of the valves (clearance between valve bridge and pad) marked with a circle in the table below. Cylinder No. Valve

1

2

3

4

5

6

IN EX IN EX IN EX IN EX IN EX IN EX

No. 1 cylinder piston at TDC on O compression stroke

O

O

O

O

O

No. 6 cylinder piston at TDC on compression stroke

O

O

O

O

O

O

• Any attempt to insert a feeler gauge without first securing sufficient space, as described above, between the pad and the valve bridge will fail, as the pad will tilt as shown in the illustration, thus blocking the entry of a feeler gauge.

11-16


11 • Before inserting a feeler gauge, push the adjusting screw pad on the side opposite from where a feeler gauge is to be inserted, as shown in the illustration, using a flat-blade screwdriver or other similar tool. This will create space necessary for the gauge to be inserted. • The measurement is correct when the feeler gauge feels slightly resisted as it is inserted. • The measurement is not yet correct if the feeler gauge can still be inserted smoothly. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, adjust as follows. [Adjustment] • Loosen the lock nuts and adjusting screws on the valve bridge and rocker arm.

• While holding the valve bridge by hand, screw in the adjusting screw until it lightly contacts the valve stem end. • Then, further screw in the adjusting screw by 45°.

• While holding the adjusting screw in this position, tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque.

CAUTION • After adjusting the adjusting screw, be sure to tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. Insufficient torquing will compromise the parallelism of the valve bridge, damaging the valve mechanism.

11-17


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT • Screw in or out the adjusting screw on the rocker arm until the correct feeler gauge can be inserted with a slight resistance. • After adjustment, while holding the adjusting screw in this position with a screwdriver, tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque. • Recheck the valve clearance using the correct feeler gauge.

CAUTION • If the valve clearance has been adjusted, be sure to check and adjust the Powertard clearance. (See later section.) • After the adjustment is complete, install the rocker cover and the gasket. (See “ROCKER COVER, ROCKER AND SHAFT”.)

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-18


11 M E M O

11-19


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 3. Inspection and Adjustment of Powertard Clearances Service standards (Unit: mm) Location –

Maintenance item Powertard clearance (when engine is cold)

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

1.0 ± 0.05

Adjust

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

25 {2.6}

Lock nut (for locking Powertard assembly adjusting screw)

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Feeler gauge

Part No.

Application

MH063474

Adjustment of Powertard Clearances

P11605

Inspection and adjustment of the Powertard clearance must be carried out after the inspection and adjustment of the valve clearance while the engine is cold. Inspection and adjustment of valve clearances (See 2. “Inspection and Adjustment of Valve Clearances”.)

10

11-20

5

16

[Inspection] • Remove the rocker cover. • Bring the No. 1 or No. 6 cylinder piston to the top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke according to the following procedure: • Crank the engine until the pointer is aligned with the “1 6” mark on the flywheel. • This will place either the No. 1 or No. 6 cylinder piston at TDC on the compression stroke. The cylinder in which the rocker arms for both the intake and exhaust valves can be pushed down by hand by the valve clearance amounts has its piston at TDC. Rotate the engine by one full turn to switch the TDCs of the No. 1 and No. 6 cylinder pistons.


11 • When the No. 1 or No. 6 piston is at the TDC position of its compression stroke, measure Powertard clearance for the valve marked O in the following table. Powertard clearance measuring point

Cylinder No.

No. 1 piston at TDC of compression stroke No. 6 piston at TDC of compression stroke

1

2

O

3

4

O O

5

6

O O

O

• For proper measurement, some resistance must be felt when inin the clearance. serting the • Accurate measurements cannot be expected if the gauge moves loosely in the clearance. • If any measurement is out of specification, make adjustment as follows.

[Adjustment] • To adjust Powertard clearance, loosen the lock nut, then tighten the adjusting screw until the moves somewhat stiffly in the gap. • Holding the adjusting screw in that position with a screwdriver, tighten the lock nut to lock the adjusting screw. Recheck the Powertard clearance using the .

11-21


ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal sequence 1 Engine 2 Rear mounting 3 Front mounting

: Locating pin

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

11-22

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Nut (front mounting installation)

300 to 400 {30 to 40}

Nut (rear mounting installation)

120 to 160 {12 to 16}

Bolt (rear mounting installation)

70 to 95 {7.0 to 9.5}


11 Removal procedure Removal: Engine • Hook a lifting device onto front hanger, rear hanger RH and rear hanger LH, and lift the device with a crane until it is taut.

WARNING • Use a lifting device that can comfortably withstand the mass of the engine (approx. 1000 kg). • Ensure that the harnesses, piping and other relevant parts have been disconnected.

• Remove the bolts and nuts from the engine mounts. Slowly lift the engine, taking care not to hit the engine against the frame or cab. • Once the bottom of the engine is out of the frame, turn the engine by 90° and remove it out of the vehicle.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Mounting • Check the entire circumference of the rubber cushion of the mountings for a crack, breakage and adhesion of oil. • If there is any abnormality, replace the mounting.

11-23


ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Installation procedure Installation: Rear mounting • Install the rear mounting on the engine in the illustrated direction.

Installation: Engine • Loosen cross member and support mounting bolts and nuts.

• Hook a lifting device onto front hanger, rear hanger RH and rear hanger LH, and lift the device with a crane to install the engine.

• Make sure that the stud of the rear mounting is placed at the illustrated position (lowermost part of the slot on the support side). • The slot on the cross member side needs not necessarily be on the lowermost part. • If the stud is not placed at the illustrated position, adjust the position with the cross member and support. • Tighten cross member and support mounting bolts and nuts to the torque of 120 to 160 N·m {12 to 16 kgf·m}. • Tighten front and rear mounting nuts to the specified torque.

11-24


11 M E M O

11-25


MITSUBISHI 6M70 ROCKER COVER, ROCKER AND SHAFT

11-26


11 Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

12 O-ring

7 8 9 10

Harness Slave piston housing Rocker shaft cap Rocker and shaft (See later section.) 11 Bushing connector

Oil filler cap Rubber Rocker cover Rocker cover gasket Packing Oil pipe

*a::

Rocker case Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (rocker cover mounting)

8.8 {0.9} 6.5 Ft Lbs

Oil pipe

44 {4.5}

M10 bolt (slave piston housing mounting)

55 {5.5}

Bolt (rocker shaft mounting)

98 {10}

M12 bolt (slave piston housing mounting)

80 {8.0}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

ThreeBond 1211

As required

Rubber portion of oil filler cap O-ring Rocker cover gasket Periphery and top surface of packing

Work before removal Releasing valve spring force • Before loosening the rocker and shaft mounting bolts, check whether the valve springs are compressed by the rockers. If so, loosen the adjusting screws on the rockers to relieve the spring force. This will eliminate the possibility of compressed springs damaging parts when they are released.

Installation procedure Installation: Packing • Apply sealant over the periphery of the packing and immediately install it on the rocker case. • After installing it on the rocker case, apply sealant over the top of the packing. • Install the rocker gasket and rocker cover on it immediately after applying sealant.

CAUTION • Never run the engine for one hour after installation. • If the rocker cover is removed after installation, never fail to replace the packing and apply the sealant again.

11-27


ROCKER COVER, ROCKER AND SHAFT Rocker and Shaft

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Adjusting screw Rocker bushing Intake rocker Rocker shaft spring Adjusting screw Rocker bushing Exhaust rocker Rocker shaft

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 2, 6, 8 3, 7

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Clearance between rocker shaft and bushing

Maintenance item

0.027 to 0.088

0.2

Replace

Radial clearance of rocker (roller)

0.068 to 0.112

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

60 {6}

Lock nut (adjusting screw tightening)

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Inside surface of rocker bushing

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Rocker bushing puller A

B

φ 27.6 φ 30.5

11-28

C φ 28

Part No.

ME350053

Application

Removal and installation of rocker bushing


11 Inspection procedure Inspection: Radial clearance of rocker (roller) • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Clearance between rocker shaft and bushing • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replace of rocker bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Assemble the bushing onto the rocker such that the oil holes are aligned as shown in the illustration. • After assembly, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

11-29


MITSUBISHI 6M70 CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER CASE

11-30


11 Disassembly sequence 1 Camshaft cap 2 Camshaft (See later section.) 3 Master piston 4 Master piston housing 5 Powertard solenoid valve

6 7 8 9 10

a: *b: * *c::

O-ring Connector Rocker case O-ring Rocker case gasket

Cylinder head Idler gear D Timing gear case Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

CAUTION • The rocker case and the camshaft caps have been machined together, which means that they all must be replaced together. The removed camshaft caps must be identified by attaching tags with their cylinder numbers because they must be reinstalled to their original positions on the rocker case. • Do not remove the Powertard solenoid valve unless necessary for replacement.

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Camshaft end play

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

Replace

*

Backlash between idler gear D and camshaft gear

0.112 to 0.165

0.35

Replace

Powertard solenoid valve resistance (at temperature 25°C)

32.6 to 39.8 Ω

Replace

2, b 5

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Bolt (camshaft cap mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

80 {8}

Nut (connector mounting)

49 {5.0}

Bolt (rocker case mounting)

19 {1.9}

Bolt (master piston housing mounting)

54 {5.5}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

ThreeBond 1211

As required

Camshaft journals and cams Outer periphery of master piston O-ring Camshaft journal supports on rocker case Camshaft journal supports on camshaft cap Rocker case gasket Top mating surfaces of cylinder head and timing gear case

11-31


CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER CASE Work before removal Inspection: Backlash between idler gear D and camshaft gear • Measure the backlash at least at three different locations. If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Camshaft end play • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Resistance in Powertard solenoid valve • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the Powertard solenoid valve.

Removal procedure Removal: Rocker case gasket

CAUTION • Be careful not to scratch the cylinder head and timing gear case when removing the rocker case gasket.

Cleaning procedure Cleaning: Powertard solenoid valve • Brush the oil screen clean and dry it with compressed air.

CAUTION • Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. It could damage the oil screen.

11-32


11 Installation procedure Installation: Rocker case • Remove oil or any other contamination from the surfaces where sealant is to be applied. • Apply sealant onto the areas (shown in the illustration) on the top surfaces of the cylinder head and timing gear case. Take care not to spread the sealant beyond the application areas during installation. • Within three minutes following the application, install the rocker case together with the rocker case gasket on the cylinder head.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine for at least an hour after installation. • Whenever the rocker case mounting bolts are subsequently loosened or removed, the rocker case gasket must be replaced and sealant reapplied upon reassembly. Installation: Camshaft • Make sure that each alignment mark is aligned. • Install the camshaft such that the stamped line on the camshaft gear is level with the top surface of the rocker case.

11-33


CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER CASE Camshaft

Disassembly sequence 1 Camshaft gear 2 Key 3 Camshaft : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 1, 3

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.017 to 0.058

Replace

8.233

7.74

Exhaust side

Lobe diameter : 61.367 Base circle diameter : 53.133

8.234

7.72

Powertard

Lobe diameter : 60.147 Base circle diameter : 53.130

7.017

6.52

0.05

0.08

Replace

0.082 to 0.127

0.28

Replace

Interference between camshaft gear and camshaft Lobe diameter : 61.233 Intake side

3

Camshaft

Difference of cam lobe diameter and base circle diameter

Base circle diameter : 53.000

Bend Oil clearance at journal

Replace

Removal procedure Removal: Camshaft gear • Remove the camshaft gear by pushing on the end of the camshaft with a press or other similar tool.

CAUTION • Do not attempt to remove the camshaft gear with a hammer as damage will result. Use a press or other similar tool.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-34


11 Inspection procedure Inspection: Interference between camshaft gear and camshaft • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Camshaft (1) Difference of cam lobe diameter and base circle diameter • If the measurement is less than the limit, replace the camshaft.

(2) Bend • Measure the camshaft at the center journal for bend while supporting the shaft at the end journals. • A half of the dial gauge reading obtained as the camshaft is rotated by a full turn represents the bend of the camshaft. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft.

(3) Oil clearance at journal • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

CAUTION • The camshaft cap and rocker case have been machined together, which means that they all must be replaced together.

11-35


CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER CASE Installation procedure Installation: Camshaft gear • Heat the camshaft gear to approximately 150°C using a gas burner. • While facing the camshaft gear as shown in the illustration, press it onto the camshaft until it seats snugly on the camshaft.

WARNING • You may burn yourself if you touch the heated camshaft gear.

CAUTION • When installing the camshaft gear, be sure to apply the load with the press at the center of the gear. Apply the load on the gear may damage the gear.

11-36


11 M E M O

11-37


MITSUBISHI 6M70 CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM

11-38


11 Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

Nozzle bridge Injector (See Gr13.) O-ring Nozzle tip gasket Cylinder head bolt Plate O-ring

14 6M70 Cylinder head gasket

Timing gear case Idler shaft Idler gear bushing Idler gear D Thrust plate Cylinder head (See later section.)

a: *b: * *c::

Idler gear C Flywheel housing Crankcase Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • The cylinder head bolt is tightened within the plastic region. The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened. If there are 3 punch marks (tightened 3 times in the past), replace the bolt.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 9, 10 11

*

11, a

Maintenance item Clearance between idler shaft and idler gear bushing Idler gear D end play Backlash between idler gear D and idler gear C

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.03 to 0.068

0.2

Replace

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

Replace

0.094 to 0.181

0.35

Replace

Mitsubishi 6M70 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Bolt (nozzle bridge mounting) Mitsubishi 6M70 Cylinder head bolt Bolt (idler shaft mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

54 {5.5}

180 NM {18 kgfm} 133 Ft Lbs Plus + 90°

• Wet • Can be reusable up to 3 times

55 {5.5}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

ThreeBond 1211

As required

ThreeBond 1207C

As required

O-ring Threaded of bolt Outer periphery of idler shaft Inside surface of idler gear bushing Top mating surfaces of flywheel housing and crankcase Mating surfaces of cylinder head on cylinder head gasket top surface and timing gear case Mating surfaces of cylinder head and timing gear case

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-39


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Socket wrench

Idler gear bushing-puller A

B

C

φ 56

φ 62

φ 57

Part No.

Application

MH063388

Installation of cylinder head

ME350196

Removal and installation of idler gear bushing

Work before removal Inspection: Idler gear D end play • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Backlash between idler gear D and idler gear C • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Removal procedure Removal: Cylinder head • Remove the bolts (× 4). • Progressively loosen the cylinder head bolts in the order shown in the illustration, going over them several times, before eventually removing them.

11-40


11 Removal: Idler shaft • Remove the idler shaft together with idler gear D as a unit with a slide hammer.

Removal: Cylinder head gasket

CAUTION • Be careful not to scratch the cylinder head, crankcase and flywheel housing when removing the cylinder head gasket.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Clearance between idler shaft and idler gear bushing • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of idler gear bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Press in the bushing until contacts the end face of idler gear D. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the specified value, ream the bushing.

11-41


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Installation procedure Installation: Timing gear case • Remove oil or any other contamination from the surfaces where sealant is to be applied. • Apply a sealant to the illustrated section of the timing gear case. • Install the timing gear case to the cylinder head within 3 minutes following the application of the sealant. Take care not to spread the sealant beyond the application areas during installation.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine for at least an hour after installation. • After reassembly, if the timing gear case mounting bolts are subsequently loosened or removed, be sure to apply sealant again upon reassembly.

Installation: Cylinder head

CAUTION • Before installing the Mitsubishi 6M70 cylinder head bolt, check the number of punch marks on the bolt head. (Bolts with up to two punch marks can be reused.) The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened in the past within the plastic region. If there are three punch marks (tightened three times in the past), replace the bolt. • Remove oil or any other contamination from the surfaces where sealant is to be applied. • Apply sealant onto the areas (shown in the illustration) on the top surfaces of the flywheel housing and crankcase. • Within three minutes following the application, install the cylinder head gasket onto the crankcase. Take care not to spread the sealant beyond the application areas during installation.

CAUTION • Be careful not to scratch the cylinder head gasket when installing the cylinder head gasket. • Do not start the engine for at least an hour after installation. • After reassembly, if the cylinder head bolts are subsequently loosened or removed, be sure to replace the cylinder head gasket and apply sealant again upon reassembly.

11-42


11 • Remove oil or any other contamination from the surfaces where sealant is to be applied. • Install the cylinder head gasket onto the crankcase and apply sealant to the illustrated section of the cylinder head gasket. • Within three minutes following the application, install the cylinder head onto the cylinder head gasket. Take care not to spread the sealant beyond the application areas during installation.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine for at least an hour after installation. • Whenever the cylinder head bolts are subsequently loosened or removed, the cylinder head gasket must be replaced and sealant reapplied upon reassembly. • If pistons, connecting rods or other relevant parts are replaced, measure to check the pistons for any change in protrusion. (See “PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER”.)

• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to a torque of 180 N·m {18 kgf·m} in the order shown in the illustration. • Install the bolts. • Further tighten the bolts, in the order shown and as follows.

• Turn the holder of nal spring.

counterclockwise to pretension the inter-

• Set the tool such that the rod (extension) is pressed against the rocker shaft bracket by the force of the spring. • Align any line on the holder scale with any line on the socket scale. (This will be used as the reference point = 0°.) • From the reference point, turn the socket by 90° in the direction shown. Each division on the holder scale represents 5°. • After tightening the cylinder head bolt within the plastic region, make a punch mark on the bolt head to record the number of times that they have been tightened.

CAUTION • The bolts should be tightened within the plastic region. Never tighten them further than the specified angle.

11-43


MITSUBISHI 6M70 CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Cylinder Head

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

Adjusting screw Valve bridge Pin Valve cotter Upper retainer Valve spring <Intake> Outer valve spring <Exhaust>

7 Inner valve spring <Exhaust> 8 Valve stem seal 9 Exhaust valve 10 Intake valve 11 Valve bridge guide 12 Exhaust valve guide 13 Intake valve guide 14 Exhaust valve seat

15 16 17 18

Intake valve seat Nozzle tube O-ring Cylinder head

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • When an exhaust valve or intake valve has been removed, make sure to replace the valve stem seal.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-44


11 Mitsubishi 6M70 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 2, 11

6

7

Maintenance item 6M70 Valve bridge-to-valve bridge guide clearance 6M70 Valve springFree length <Intake>, Installed load 6M70 outer valve (Installed length 61.325) spring <Exhaust> Squareness Free length 6M70 Inner valve Installed load spring (Installed length 54.325) <Exhaust> Squareness Stem outer diameter

9

6M70 Exhaust valve

Sinkage from cylinder head bottom surface Valve margin Seat angle

9, 12

6M70 Exhaust valve stem-to-valve guide clearance Stem outer diameter

10

6M70 Intake valve

Sinkage from cylinder head bottom surface Valve margin Seat angle

10, 13

6M70 Intake valve stem-to-valve guide clearance

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.01 to 0.048

0.1

Replace

89.3

87.9

Replace

490.4 ± 24.5 N {50.0 ± 2.5 kgf}

Replace

2.0

Replace

76.0

74.9

Replace

98.1 ± 4.9 N {10.0 ± 0.5 kgf}

Replace

2.0

Replace

9.925 to 9.940

9.85

Replace

0.2 ± 0.25

0.7

Replace

2.5

2.0

Replace

45° ± 15°

Rectify

0.07 to 0.10

0.2

Replace

9.96 to 9.975

9.85

Replace

0.5 ± 0.25

1.0

Replace

2.83

2.33

Replace

60° ± 15°

Rectify

0.035 to 0.065

0.2

Replace

10.989 to 11

10.988

Replace

11

6M70 Outer diameter of valve bridge guide

14

6M70 Exhaust valve seat width

3.5 ± 0.2

4.2

Rectify or replace

15

6M70 Intake valve seat width

2.8 ± 0.2

3.5

Rectify or replace

Bottom surface distortion

0.07

0.2

Rectify or replace

Height from top surface to bottom surface

130 ± 0.05

129.5

Replace

Valve seat hole diameter

φ 49 +0.025 0

Replace

18

6M70 Cylinder head

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Lock nut (valve bridge adjusting screw tightening)

68 {7.0}

Stud bolt

20 {2.0}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Lip of valve stem seal Stem and end of valve Nozzle tube end

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

ThreeBond 1211

As required

11-45


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Application

Valve lifter A

MH061668

φ 42

Removal and installation of valve cotters

Valve lifter hook

MH061679

Valve stem seal installer A

B

φ 22

φ 11

Valve lapper

Valve bridge guide installer A

B

φ 11

56

Valve guide remover

MH062806

Installation of valve stem seals

30091-07500

Lapping valves and valve seats

ME350051

Installation of valve bridge guides

MH062177

Removal of valve guides

ME350052

Installation of Mitsubishi 6M70 valve guides

Valve guide installer A

B

C

φ 25

φ 15

16.8

Caulking tool body

MH062174

Installer ring

11-46

MH062175 A

B

φ 10

φ 51

Installation of Mitsubishi 6M70 intake valve seats , exhaust valve seats ,


11 Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Nozzle tube remover A

B

φ 8.7

φ 12.5

Nozzle tube installer bolt A

B

φ 8.5

M18 × 1.5

Nozzle tube installer body A

Part No.

MH061232

Application

Removal of nozzle tube

MH061231

ME350195

Installation of Mitsubishi 6M70 nozzle tube

M18 × 1.5

Nozzle tube stamp A

MH061229

φ8

Removal procedure Removal: Valve cotter • Using and , evenly compress the valve cotter to remove so that the valve spring does not lean to one side.

Removal: Nozzle tube

11-47


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Inspection procedure Inspection: Valve bridge and valve bridge guide (1) Valve bridge-to-guide clearance • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s). (2) Outer diameter of valve bridge guide • If the measurement is less than the limit or if the parts are unevenly worn, replace the valve bridge guide.

Replacement of valve bridge guide [Installation] • Before installation, ensure that no water, oil or other foreign matter is in the installation hole. • Using , install the valve bridge guide until it securely contacts the cylinder head.

CAUTION • The valve bridge guide must be installed to the specified depth of the cylinder head. Correct installation can only be possible by using . Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Intake and exhaust valve (1) Valve stem outer diameter • If the measurement is less than the limit or the valve is worn extremely unevenly, replace the valve. • When the valve has been replaced with a new one, make sure to lap the valve and valve seat.

(2) Valve seat angle • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, rectify the valve. (3) Valve margin • If the measurement is less than the limit, replace the valve.

Refacing valve • Limit grinding to a necessary minimum. • If the valve margin is below the limit after grinding, replace the valve. • After grinding, make sure to lap the valve and valve seat.

11-48


11 Inspection: Valve-to-valve guide clearance • If the clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the defective part(s).

Replacement of valve guides [Removal]

[Installation] • Using , install the valve guide until it securely contacts the cylinder head.

CAUTION • The valve guide must protrude from the cylinder head by the specified amount. Correct installation can only be possible by using . • The valve guides for the exhaust valves are longer than the valve guides for the inlet valves. Inspection: Contact between valve and valve seat • Before starting inspection, check that the valve and valve guide are intact. • Apply an even coat of red lead to the valve contact surface of the valve seat. • Strike the valve once against the valve seat. Do not rotate the valve during this operation.

• If the red lead deposited on the valve indicates a poor contact pattern, take either of the following corrective actions. Contact pattern

Corrective action

Minor defect

Lapping valve

Serious defect

Reface or replace valve and valve seat

11-49


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Lapping valve • Lap the valve in the following sequence. • Apply a thin coat of lapping compound to the contact surface of the valve seat. Adding a small amount of engine oil to the lapping compound can facilitate even application. • Start with an intermediate-grit compound (120 to 150 grit) and finish with a fine-grit compound (200 grit or more).

CAUTION • Do not put any compound on the stem. • Strike the valve several times against the valve seat while rotating the valve a little at a time. • Wash away the compound with diesel fuel. • Apply engine oil to the contact surface of the valve seat and rub in the valve and seat well. • Inspect the contact pattern between valve and valve seat again. • If the contact pattern is still defective, replace the valve seat.

Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve seats • If the valve seat is refaced or replaced after performing the following inspection, make sure to lap the valve and valve seat. (1) Valve seat width • If the measurement exceeds the limit, reface or replace the valve seat.

(2) Valve sinkage from cylinder head bottom surface • Perform measurement keeping the valve in close contact with the valve seat. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, reface or replace the defective part(s).

Refacing the valve seat • Grind the valve seat using a valve seat cutter or valve seat grinder. • Place a piece of sandpaper of approximately #400 between the cutter and valve seat and grind the valve seat lightly. • Use a 15° or 75° cutter to cut the valve seat width within the standard range. Replace the valve seat if it cannot be refaced within the standard range.

CAUTION • Make sure that the valve seat refacing does not cause the valve sinkage to exceed the limit.

11-50


11 • After refacing, make sure to lap the valve and valve seat. Replacement of valve seat [Removal] • The valve seats are installed by expansion fitting. To remove a valve seat, grind inside the metal stock to reduce the wall thickness, then remove the valve seat at room temperature.

[Installation] • Measure the diameter of the valve seat hole in the cylinder head. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the cylinder head.

• Chill the valve seat thoroughly by immersing in it in liquid nitrogen. • Drive in the valve seat using with the chamfered side of facing the cylinder head. • After driving in, reverse the direction of and crimp the valve seat. • After reassembly, make sure to lap the valve and valve seat.

Inspection: Cylinder head bottom surface distortion • If the distortion exceeds the limit, rectify it using a surface grinder.

CAUTION • Make sure that the height of the cylinder head from the top surface to the bottom surface is not reduced to a value below the limit.

11-51


CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE MECHANISM Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Nozzle tube • Apply a sealant to the perimeter A of the tip of the nozzle tube. • Push in the nozzle tube by hand until it contacts surface B of the cylinder head. • Tighten with the bolt and press the nozzle tube onto surface B of the cylinder head. • Apply engine oil to section C of . • Screw in until can be pulled out from the bottom of the cylinder head. • After installing the nozzle tube, be sure to perform a leak test to check for airtightness.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve stem seal • Apply engine oil to the lip of the valve stem seal. • Install the valve stem seal until sits snugly on the cylinder head. • After assembly, check that its spring is not deformed or damaged.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve spring • Install the outer and inner valve springs onto the cylinder head while facing them as shown in the illustration.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve cotter • Using and , install the valve cotter while compressing the valve spring(s) evenly.

CAUTION • Do not compress the valve spring(s) too much, or the upper retainer will contact the valve stem seal and damage will result.

11-52


11 M E M O

11-53


MITSUBISHI 6M70 PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4

Lower connecting rod bearing Connecting rod cap Upper connecting rod bearing Piston and connecting rod (See later section.) 5 Cylinder liner

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Piston protrusion from crankcase top surface

End play of connecting rod Oil clearance

1, 3

Connecting rod bearing

4, 5

Piston and cylinder liner clearance

Span when free Flange protrusion

Cylinder liner

Limit

Remedy

–0.321 to –0.111

Replace Replace

0.2 to 0.5

1.0

0.06 to 0.122

0.25

90.5

0.247 to 0.277

0.01 to 0.07

φ135 to 135.03

φ135.25

Cylindricity

0.03 or less

Difference in protrusion of adjacent flange

0.04 or less

Inner diameter 5

Standard value

Replace Replace

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Nut (connecting rod cap mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

49 {5} + 120°

Wet

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Nut thread Inside surface of connecting rod bearing Outside periphery of cylinder liner Outer periphery of piston

11-54


11 Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Piston guide clamp

MH061667

Piston guide lever

MH061658

Application

Installation of piston and connecting rod

Socket wrench

MH061560

Cylinder liner extractor A

MH062194

Removal of cylinder liner

φ134.5

Adapter

ME350054

Bolt

MF130651

Washer

A

B

40

M16 × 2

Measurement of cylinder liner flange protrusion and step height between adjacent cylinder liners

MF450009

Work before removal Retaining of cylinder liners • The cylinder liners may move up when the crankcase is turned over, or the crankshaft is rotated after the pistons are installed. To prevent this, retain the cylinder liners by holding their flanges with bolts and washers.

11-55


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Inspection: Piston protrusion from crankcase top surface • The amount of piston protrusion affects engine performance and must therefore be inspected without fail. • Set the piston at the top dead center. • Make the measurement at the two measurement points on the top face of the piston and calculate the average value. • If the average value deviates from the standard value, check the clearances between all relevant parts.

Inspection: Connecting rod end play • Measure the end play for every connecting rod. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Cylinder liner flange protrusion and step height between adjacent cylinder liners • Install so that it does not run onto the cylinder liner flange and tighten and to the torque of 49 N·m {5 kgf·m}.

• Measure the cylinder liner flange protrusion. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, inspect the installation and replace the defective part(s). • If the difference in the adjacent flange protrusion deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s) upon checking the installed condition.

CAUTION • If the cylinder liner flange protrusion is not within the specified value, the contact pressure of the cylinder head gasket against the bore of the cylinder will not be high enough to prevent gas leakage.

11-56


11 Inspection procedure Inspection: Connecting rod bearing span when free

CAUTION • Do not attempt to manually expand the bearings. • If the measurement is less than the limit, replace the upper and lower connecting rod bearings.

Inspection: Connecting rod bearing-to-crankshaft clearance (oil clearance) • Fit the lower bearing to the connecting rod cap and the upper bearing to the connecting rod, then tighten the nut to a torque of 115 N·m {12 kgf·m}. • Measure the inner diameter of the bearing and the outer diameter of the crankshaft pin. • If the clearance exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s). • If a bearing has to be replaced with an undersized one, machine the crankshaft pin to the specified undersize diameter. (See “CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE”.)

Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston and cylinder liner clearance • If the value calculated from the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s). A: Measuring point on the crankcase (in direction of the crankcase axis). B: Measuring point on the crankcase (vertical to the crankcase axis). C: Measuring point on the piston (vertical to the piston pin hole).

CAUTION • Because the cylinder liner is a thin-walled liner, the boring process cannot be preformed on an oversized liner. Do not remove the cylinder liner except for replacement to prevent deformation.

11-57


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Replacement of cylinder liner [Removal]

CAUTION • If the cylinder liners will need to be reused for some reason or other, make alignment marks to ensure correct reassembly.

[Installation] • When replacing the cylinder liner, use the size mark on the crankcase and the size mark on the piston to select the appropriate size of the cylinder liner. Size mark on crankcase “1”

Size mark on cylinder liner “1A” “1B”

“2”

“2A” “2B”

“3”

“3A” “3B”

Size mark on piston “A”

“B”

CAUTION • Using a piston with the size mark different from the size mark of cylinder liner can lead to engine seizure.

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil onto the outer periphery (hatched area) of the cylinder liner.

• While pushing the cylinder liner evenly with hands, gently insert the cylinder liner into the crankcase.

CAUTION • Cylinder liners are thinly structured. Therefore, they must be handled with extreme care.

11-58


11 Installation procedure Installation: Connecting rod bearings

CAUTION • Do not reverse the positions of the lower bearing and the upper bearing (with oil hole) when installing, as this may cause seizure in the engine.

Installation: Piston and connecting rod • Check that the piston ring end gaps are in their correct positions. A: 1st compression ring gap B: 2nd compression ring gap C: Oil ring gap D: Oil ring expander spring gap “

”: Front mark on piston

• Ensure that the size mark (“A”, “B”) on the piston is the same as that on the cylinder liner.

• Face the front mark “ ” of the piston toward the front of the engine. • With and installed around the piston skirt, tighten the adjusting bolt of until the inside diameter of matches the outside diameter of the piston skirt. • After adjustment, remove and from the piston. Apply engine oil to the following areas. Then, install and over the rings of the piston. • Outer periphery of piston • Inner periphery of • Inner periphery of cylinder liner

CAUTION • Cover the connecting rod bolt with a vinyl hose to prevent the connecting rod bolt from damaging the inside surface of the cylinder and crankshaft.

11-59


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER CAUTION • Be careful not to scratch or damage head of the piston (a part of the combustion chamber). • Make sure that the connecting rod does not hit oil jet.

• After installing the piston and connecting rod, install the connecting rod cap onto the connecting rod, ensuring that the their alignment marks (projection) are aligned with the weight mark. Then, tighten the nut to the torque of 49 N·m {5 kgf·m}. • Further tighten the bolts in the following procedure.

• Turn the holder of nal spring.

counterclockwise to pretension the inter-

• Set the tool such that the rod (extension) is pressed against the crankshaft by the force of the spring. • Align any line on the holder scale with any line on the socket scale. (This will be used as the reference point = 0°.) • From the reference point, turn the socket by 120° in the direction shown. Each division on the socket scale represents 5°. • After assembly of the connecting rod cap, perform the following test. • End play of connecting rod • Piston protrusion

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-60


11 M E M O

11-61


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston and Connecting Rod

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1st compression ring 2nd compression ring Oil ring Snap ring Piston pin Connecting rod bushing Connecting rod bolt Connecting rod Piston

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 1 to 3

Maintenance item Piston ring end gap

Clearance between 1 to 3, 9 piston ring and piston ring groove

Standard value

1st compression ring

0.4 to 0.55

2nd compression ring

0.5 to 0.65

Oil ring

0.4 to 0.6

1.5

Replace

0.015 to 0.06

0.15

2nd compression ring

0.085 to 0.125

0.25

Oil ring

0.025 to 0.065

0.15 0.1

Replace Replace

Clearance between piston pin and connecting rod bushing

0.02 to 0.055

5, 9

Clearance between piston pin and piston Connecting rod

Remedy

1st compression ring

5, 6

8

Limit

0.004 to 0.022

0.1

Bend

0.05

Twist

0.1

Replace

Replace

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Outer periphery of piston pin Outer periphery of connecting rod bushing Connecting rod bushing mounting surface of connecting rod Connecting rod bolt mounting hole

11-62


11 Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Piston ring tool

Connecting rod bushing puller kit

Part No.

31191-02900

MH062185

Application

Removal and installation of piston rings

Removal and installation of connecting rod bushings

Removal procedure Removal: Piston ring

Removal: Piston pin • Remove the piston pin by striking it with a rod and hammer. • If the piston pin is difficult to remove, first heat the piston in hot water or with a piston heater.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston ring end gap • Using the crown of a piston, push the piston ring horizontally into a cylinder in the crankcase until it reaches the lower part of the cylinder liner, where there is relatively small wear. • Taking care not to move the piston ring, measure the end gap. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace all the piston rings as a set.

11-63


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Clearance between piston ring and piston ring groove • Remove any carbon deposits from the ring groove in the piston. • Measure the side clearance of each ring around the piston’s entire periphery of the ring groove. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s). If any of the piston rings is defective, replace all the piston rings as a set. • The clearance of the 1st compression ring must be measured using a thickness gauge while holding the ring against the piston ring groove with a straight edge.

Inspection: Clearance between piston pin and piston • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Mitsubishi 6M70 Clearance between piston pin and connecting rod bushing • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of connecting rod bushing • Replace the connecting rod bushing using

11-64

.


11 [Removal] • If the upper connecting rod bearing is installed on the big end of the connecting rod, remove the bearing. • Secure the connecting rod to the base with a bracket and plate. • Set collar A on the puller in the direction shown in the illustration and gradually remove the bushing with a press load of approximately 49 kN {5000 kgf}.

[Installation] • Apply engine oil to the outer periphery of the connecting rod bushing and the bushing fitting surface of the connecting rod. • Fit collar B, the bushing, and collar A over the puller in the direction shown in the illustration and lock this arrangement together with the nut. • Align the oil holes in the bushing and the connecting rod. Then, use a press to slowly apply a pressure of approximately 49 kN {5,000 kgf} to the puller until the bushing is forced into place. • After assembly, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing. Inspection: Connecting rod bend and twist • Mount the connecting rod on the connecting rod aligner. Also mount the connecting rod bearings, piston pin, and connecting rod cap to create the same conditions as are expected when the connecting rod is mounted on a crankshaft. Tighten the nuts of the connecting rod cap to a torque of 115 N·m {12 kgf·m}. • Measure the extent of bend and twist in the connecting rod. • If either measurement exceeds the limit, replace the connecting rod.

Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Connecting rod bolt • Make sure that bolt holes of the connecting rod are free of flaws and burrs. • Apply engine oil to the knurled portion of the connecting rod bolt and press fit it in the illustrated direction with the maximum press load of 5880 N {600 kgf}.

11-65


PISTON, CONNECTING ROD AND CYLINDER LINER Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston and connecting rod • When the piston and connecting rods are replaced, install each part as follows; • Select all the connecting rods with the same weight mark on the same engine (‘‘A to H’’, ‘‘J to M’’). • Apply engine oil to the piston pin, and assemble the piston and connecting rod with their marks facing in the illustrated directions. “ ”:Front mark • If the piston pin is difficult to insert, first heat the piston in hot water or with a piston heater. Then, install the piston.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Piston rings • With the manufacturer’s marks (found near the piston ring end gaps) facing up, install the piston rings so that the end gap of each ring is positioned as shown in the illustration. A: 1st compression ring end gap B: 2nd compression ring end gap C: Oil ring end gap D: Oil ring expander spring end gap “ ”: Front mark on piston The manufacturer’s marks are present only on the 1st and 2nd compression rings.

11-66


11 M E M O

11-67


FLYWHEEL PTO <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

Eyebolt Oil pipe PTO bracket Washer PTO gear Washer

Flange Oil seal Cover Gasket Roller bearing PTO shaft

13 Ball bearing 14 PTO head 15 O-ring

*a:

Flywheel housing : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location –

Maintenance item Total backlash of gears

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.19 to 0.62

0.8

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Eyebolt

21 {2.1}

Nut (PTO gear installation)

220 {22}

178 {17.8}

Nut (flange installation)

11-68


11 Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Sliding contact surfaces of flange and oil seal

Multipurpose grease [NLGI No.2 (Ca soap)]

As required

Fitting surfaces of flange and PTO shaft

Multipurpose grease [NLGI No.2 (Ca soap)]

As required

O-ring Oil seal lip

Inspection before removal Inspection: Total backlash of gears • “Total backlash of gears” is the gear backlash produced when the PTO gear, PTO idler gear A, PTO idler gear B and drive gear are all in mesh with each other. • Measure the total backlash of gears by inserting a lever type dial gauge into the threaded holes A in the flange of the PTO head assembly. • If the measurement is out of specification, check each gear for wear and replace if necessary. • Check the PTO idler gear A, PTO idler gear B and drive gear for wear. (See TIMING GEARS <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO>.)

Removal procedure Removal: Roller bearing and PTO shaft • Remove the roller bearing and PTO shaft in the direction shown in the illustration.

11-69


FLYWHEEL PTO <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO> Removal: Ball bearing • Remove the ball bearing in the direction shown in the illustration.

Installation procedure Installation: Oil seal • Fit the oil seal oriented as shown in the illustration.

Installation: Split pin • After fitting, bend the split pin in the illustrated direction.

Installation: PTO head • Make sure that the PTO shaft turns lightly by hand before installing the PTO head onto the flywheel housing.

11-70


11 M E M O

11-71


FLYWHEEL

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Snap ring Pilot bearing Ring gear Flywheel Rear oil seal Power steering oil hose O-ring Suction hose Power steering oil pump (See Gr37.) 10 O-ring

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

O-ring Collar Engine speed sensor Stiffener Air suction hose Eyebolt Air suction pipe Eyebolt Air outlet pipe Eyebolt Water outlet pipe

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Eyebolt Water inlet pipe Eyebolt Oil pipe Air compressor O-ring Flywheel housing

: Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • The flywheel mounting bolt is tightened within the plastic region. The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened. If there are 3 punch marks (tightened 3 times in the past), replace the bolt.

11-72


11 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Standard value

Friction surface distortion Friction surface height 4

Flywheel

Friction surface runout (when fitted) Friction surface parallelism

28

Eccentricity of flywheel housing measured at spigot joint section (when fitted)

Limit

Remedy

0.05

0.2

Rectify or replace

48 ± 0.2

49.5

Replace

0.2

Rectify or replace

0.1 or less

Rectify or replace

0.2

Inspect or replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Without PTO

100 {10} + 90°

With PTO

100 {10} + 150°

• Wet • Can be reused up to 3 times

68 {7.0}

Bolt (flywheel mounting) Power steering oil hose Bolt (power steering oil pump mounting)

74 {7.5}

Nut (collar mounting)

100 {10}

Engine speed sensor

25 {2.5}

Bolt (rear oil seal mounting)

12 {1.2}

Bolt (flywheel housing mounting)

80 {8.0}

Eyebolt (oil pipe mounting)

21 {2.1}

Eyebolt (air outlet pipe mounting)

100 {10}

50 {5.1}

155 {16}

Eyebolt (water inlet pipe mounting) Eyebolt (water outlet pipe mounting) Eyebolt (air suction pipe mounting)

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

ThreeBond 1207C

As required

Thread of bolts O-ring Rear oil seal lip Rear oil seal surface to be mated with flywheel housing Engine mounting surface of flywheel housing

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Socket wrench

Part No.

Application

ME350193

Installation of flywheel

Magnet base

MH062356

11-73


FLYWHEEL Inspection before removal Inspection: Flywheel friction surface runout when fitted • If the measurement exceeds the limit, check if the bolts are correctly tightened as well as the crankshaft mounting surface. Correct or replace the flywheel as required.

Removal procedure Removal: Flywheel • To remove the flywheel, use bolts inserted into the dedicated holes in the flywheel.

Removal: Ring gear • Heat the ring gear evenly with a gas burner or the like until it reaches approximately 200°C, then remove it from the flywheel.

WARNING • You may burn yourself if you touch the heated ring gear. Removal: Collar • Install bolts (M4 x 0.7 mm) into the dedicated holes in the collar, and pull the bolts to remove the collar.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Flywheel (1) Friction surface height • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel.

11-74


11 (2) Friction surface distortion • If the measurement exceeds the limit, rectify or replace the flywheel. • If the ring gear is evidently defective, replace the ring gear before inspecting the friction surface for distortion.

Rectification of friction surface • Rectify the friction surface so that its height is not above the specified limit, and it is parallel with surface A within specification.

Installation procedure Installation: Flywheel housing [Installation] • Clean the flywheel housing surface where sealant is to be applied. • Apply an even and continuous bead of sealant onto the flywheel housing surface where the crankcase is to be mounted. • Within three minutes following the application, install the flywheel housing onto the crankcase. When installing the flywheel housing, take care not to spread the sealant beyond the application area.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine at least for an hour after the flywheel housing has been installed. • If the flywheel housing mounting bolts are subsequently loosened, be sure to apply sealant again upon reassembly.

[Inspection] • While turning the crankshaft, measure the flywheel housing for any eccentricity at the location indicated in the illustration. • If the eccentricity exceeds the limit, reassemble the flywheel. • If the eccentricity still exceeds the limit after reassembly, replace the defective part(s).

11-75


FLYWHEEL Installation: Air compressor • Set the No. 1 cylinder piston at the top dead center of the compression stroke. • Align the stamped mark “1” on the air compressor gear with the projection on the air compressor. • While keeping this condition, align the stamped mark “1” with the scribed line on the rear plate and install the air compressor to the flywheel housing.

Installation: Rear oil seal • Clean the rear oil seal surface where sealant is to be applied. • Apply an even and continuous bead of sealant on the rear oil seal as shown in the illustration. • Install the rear oil seal onto the flywheel housing within 3 minutes following the application of the sealant. Be careful not to dislodge the sealant.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine at least for an hour after the rear oil seal has been installed. • If the rear oil seal mounting bolts are subsequently loosened, be sure to apply sealant again upon reassembly. Installation: Ring gear • Heat the ring gear evenly with a gas burner or the like until it reaches approximately 200°C.

WARNING • You may burn yourself if you touch the heated ring gear. • Fit the ring gear with the side having non-chamfered portions toward the flywheel.

Installation: Flywheel

CAUTION • Before installing a bolt, check the number of punch marks on the bolt head. (Bolts with up to two punch marks can be reused.) The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened in the past within the plastic region. If there are three punch marks (tightened three times in the past), replace the bolt.

11-76


11 • Tighten the flywheel mounting bolts to a torque of 100 N·m {10 kgf·m}. • Further tighten the bolts in the following procedure. • Turn the holder of counterclockwise to preload the builtin spring. • Set the tool such that the rod (extension) is pressed against by the force of the spring. • Align any line on the holder scale with any line on the socket scale. (This will be used as the reference point = 0°.) • From the reference point, turn the socket by 90° <Without flywheel PTO>, 150° <With flywheel PTO> clockwise. Each division on the socket scale represents 5°. • After tightening the bolt within the plastic region, make a punch mark on the bolt head for subsequent identification.

CAUTION • The bolts should be tightened within the plastic region. Never tighten them further than the specified angle.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-77


MITSUBISHI 6M70 TIMING GEARS <WITHOUT FLYWHEEL PTO>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

Idler shaft C Idler gear bushing Idler gear C Thrust plate C O-ring

a: *b: *

Idler shaft bolt Thrust plate A, B Idler gear bushing Idler gear A, B Idler shaft A, B

Supply pump gear Crankshaft gear : Non-reusable parts : Locating pin

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Backlash between gears

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Idler gear C and supply pump gear

0.096 to 0.198

0.35

Replace

Idler gear C and idler gear A, B

0.089 to 0.181

0.35

Replace

Idler gear A, B and crankshaft gear

0.076 to 0.196

0.35

Replace

0.036 to 0.08

0.2

Replace

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

Replace

0.025 to 0.066

0.2

Replace

1, 2

Clearance between idler shaft C and idler gear bushing

3, 9

Idler gear end play

8, 10

Clearance between idler shaft A, B and idler gear bushing

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

11-78

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (idler gear C mounting)

80 {8.0}

Idler shaft bolt (idler gear A, B mounting)

155 {16}


11 Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring Inside surface of bushing of gears

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Idler gear bushing puller A

B

φ 105

φ 100

Idler gear bushing installer

Part No.

Application

ME350197

Removal of idler gear bushing

ME350198

Installation of idler gear bushing

MH062046

Removal and installation of idler gear bushing

A φ 99.3

Idler gear bushing puller A

B

C

φ 45.5

φ 50

φ 46

Inspection before removal Inspection: Backlash between gears • For each pair of gears, measure the backlash at more than three teeth. • If any of the measurements exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Idler gear end play • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

11-79


TIMING GEARS <WITHOUT FLYWHEEL PTO> Inspection procedure Inspection: Clearance between idler shaft C and idler gear bushing [Inspection] • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of idler gear bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Install until it contacts the idler gear with idler gear C facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

Inspection: Clearance between idler shaft A, B and idler gear bushing [Inspection] • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of idler gear bushing [Removal]

11-80


11 [Installation] • Install until it contacts the idler gear with idler gear A, B facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

Installation procedure Installation: idler gear • Install idler gear A, B such that the alignment mark “A” on the gear is aligned with the alignment mark “A” on the crankshaft gear. • When installing idler gear C, ensure that the alignment mark “B” on the gear is aligned with the alignment mark “B” on idler gear A, B and that the alignment mark “C” on idler gear C is aligned with the alignment mark “C” on the supply pump gear.

11-81


MITSUBISHI 6M70 TIMING GEARS <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

O-ring Idler shaft bolt Thrust plate A, B PTO idler gear bushing PTO idler gear A Idler shaft B Thrust plate C PTO idler gear bushing

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PTO idler gear B Idler shaft C Idler gear bushing Idler gear C Thrust plate C Idler gear bushing Idler gear A, B Idler shaft A

17 PTO drive gear

*a: *b: c: *d: *

Supply pump gear Rear plate Crankcase Crankshaft gear : Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-82


11 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

4, 6

Gear backlash

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Between idler gear C and supply pump gear

0.096 to 0.198

0.35

Replace

Between idler gear C and idler gear A, B

0.089 to 0.181

0.35

Replace

Between idler gear A, B and crankshaft gear

0.076 to 0.196

0.35

Replace

Between PTO idler gear A and PTO idler gear B

0.07 to 0.2

0.35

Replace

Between PTO idler gear A and drive gear

0.07 to 0.2

0.35

Replace

0.03 to 0.068

0.2

Replace

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

Replace

PTO idler gear bushing-to-idler shaft B clearance

5, 9, 12, Idler gear end play 15 8, 10

PTO idler gear bushing-to-idler shaft C clearance

0.036 to 0.08

0.2

Replace

10, 11

Idler gear bushing-to-idler shaft C clearance

0.04 to 0.08

0.2

Replace

14, 16

Idler gear bushing-to-idler shaft A clearance

0.03 to 0.06

0.2

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Idler shaft bolt (for installing PTO idler gear A, idler gear A, B)

155 {16}

Bolt (for installing PTO idler gear B, idler gear C assembly)

80 {8.0}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring Gear bushing inner surface

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Idler gear bushing puller A

B

φ 105

φ 100

Idler gear bushing installer

Part No.

Application

ME350197

Removal of idler gear bushing

ME350198

Installation of idler gear bushing

MH062046

Removal and installation of idler gear bushing

A φ 99.3

Idler gear bushing puller A

B

C

φ 45.5

φ 50

φ 46

11-83


TIMING GEARS <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO> Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Idler gear bushing puller

MH061256

A

B

C

φ 57.3

φ 62

φ 58

Application

Removal and installation idler gear bushings

Inspection before removal Inspection: Backlash between gears • For each pair of gears, measure the backlash at more than three teeth. • If any of the measurements exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection: Idler gear end play • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection procedure Inspection: Clearance between PTO idler gear bushing and idler shaft B [Inspection] • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of PTO idler gear bushing [Removal]

11-84


11 [Installation] • Install until it contacts the PTO idler gear A with PTO idler gear A facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

Inspection: Clearance between PTO idler gear bushing and idler shaft C [Inspection] • If the clearance exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of PTO idler gear bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Install until it contacts the PTO idler gear B with PTO idler gear B facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

Inspection: Clearance between idler shaft C and idler gear bushing [Inspection] • If the clearance exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

11-85


TIMING GEARS <WITH FLYWHEEL PTO> Replacement of idler gear bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Install until it contacts the idler gear with idler gear C facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

Inspection: Clearance between idler gear bushing and idler shaft A [Inspection] • If the clearance exceeds the limit, replace the bushing.

Replacement of idler gear bushing [Removal]

[Installation] • Install until it contacts the idler gear with idler gear A, B facing in the illustrated direction. • After installation, measure the clearance again. • If the measurement is less than the standard value, ream the bushing.

11-86


11 Installation procedure Installation: Idler gear • Install idler gear A, B such that the alignment mark “A” on the gear is aligned with the alignment mark “A” on the crankshaft gear. • When installing idler gear C, ensure that the alignment mark “B” on the gear is aligned with the alignment mark “B” on idler gear A, B and that the alignment mark “C” on idler gear C is aligned with the alignment mark “C” on the supply pump gear.

11-87


MITSUBISHI 6M70 CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE

11-88


11 Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Crankshaft pulley Front oil seal Front cover Front cover gasket Thrust plate Lower main bearing Main bearing cap Front oil seal slinger

17 Oil jet 18 Oil spray plug 19 Crankcase

Ring Rear oil seal slinger Crankshaft gear Crankshaft Rear plate Gasket Upper main bearing Check valve

: Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

CAUTION • The check valve has been tightened using thread-locking compound and so, may deform during removal. Once removed, the check valve must not be reused. Therefore, do not remove the check valve unless any fault is found.

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • If overtightened, the check valve will not operate properly, leading to engine seizure. Be sure to tighten the check valve to the specified torque. • The main cap bolt is tightened within the plastic region. The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened. If there are 3 punch marks (tightened 3 times in the past), replace the bolt.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 6, 15

Maintenance item Main bearing

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.06 to 0.122

0.25

Replace

106.5

Replace

End play

0.09 to 0.23

0.4

Replace thrust plate

Bend

0.04 or less

0.1

Replace

Roundness

0.01 or less

0.03

Rectify or replace

Cylindricity

0.006 or less

Rectify or replace

75 ± 0.07

Replace

Journal width

42 ± 0.3

Replace

Pin width

54

+0.2 0

Replace

R5

Replace

0.07 or less

0.2

Rectify or replace

Oil clearance Span when free

Pins and journals 12

Crankshaft

Center-to-center distance between the journal and pin

Fillet Distortion of top surface 19

Crankcase

Cylinder block

Roundness

0.005 or less

Cylindricity

0.015 or less

Replace

Mitsubishi 6M70 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (crankshaft pulley installation)

Parts to be tightened

240 {24}

Bolt (front cover installation)

45 {4.6}

100 {10} + 130 ± 2°

• Wet • Can be reused up to 3 times

34 {3.5}

Bolt (main bearing cap installation) Check valve

11-89


CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Front oil seal lip Thread of bolts Inside surface of main bearing

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Socket wrench

Front oil seal slinger installer A

Part No.

Application

MH063365

Installation of main bearing cap

MH061817

Installation of front oil seal slinger

MH061652

Installation of ring

MH061061

Removal of crankshaft gear

φ 108

Rear oil seal slinger installer A φ 123

Gear puller

Inspection before disassembly Inspection: Crankshaft end play • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the oversized thrust plates. Oversizes available: 0.15, 0.30, 0.45 mm • Replace the crankshaft if the end play cannot be adjusted within the standard range.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-90


11 Removal procedure Removal: Main bearing caps • The main bearing cap on the rearmost part is located by locating pins. Use a slide hammer to remove it.

Removal: Front oil seal slinger • Taking care not to damage the crankshaft, split the slinger using a chisel or a similar tool. Removal: Ring • Taking care not to damage the crankshaft, split the slinger using a chisel or a similar tool. Removal: Crankshaft gear

CAUTION • Do not tap off the crankshaft gear as this can damage it.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Main bearing (1) Main bearing span when free • If the measurement less than the limit, replace the upper and lower bearings as a set.

CAUTION • Do not attempt to manually expand the bearings.

11-91


CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE (2) Main bearing oil clearance • Fit the upper main bearing into the crankcase and the lower main bearing into the main bearing cap. • Tighten the bolts to a torque of 100 N·m {10 kgf·m}. • Measure the inner diameter of the main bearing and the outer diameter of the corresponding crankshaft journal. • If the difference between the measurements exceeds the specified limit, machine the crankshaft journal to one of the specified undersize dimensions.

Inspection: Crankshaft (1) Bend • Measure the crankshaft at the center journal for bend while supporting the shaft at the end journals. • A half of the dial gauge reading obtained as the crankshaft is rotated by a full turn represents the bend of the crankshaft. • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft.

(2) Roundness and cylindricity of crankshaft journals and pins • If any of the measurements exceeds the limits, grind the crankshaft journal(s) and/or pin(s) to undersize(s) or replace the crankshaft.

11-92


11 Grinding of crankshaft

CAUTION • If the crankshaft pins and journals are ground to undersizes, be sure to use bearings of corresponding undersizes. • Check the measurement in the table of service standards and correct the crankshaft as follows. • Do not change the center-to-center distance A between the journal and pin. • Do not change the journal width B and the pin width C. • Finish the fillets D smoothly. • Carry out a magnetic inspection to check for cracks possibly caused by grinding. Also, check that the hardness of the surface has not dropped below Shore hardness number (Hs) 75. • If there is any abnormality, replace the crankshaft.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Crankshaft undersize dimensions (Unit: mm) Undersizes 0.25 Finished journal outside diameter

99.75

Finished pin outer diameter

83.75

0.50

-0.08 -0.10 -0.06 -0.09

99.50 83.50

0.75

-0.08 -0.10 -0.06 -0.09

99.25 83.25

Roundness

0.01 or less

Cylindricity

0.006 or less

-0.08 -0.10 -0.06 -0.09

1.00 99.00 83.00

-0.08 -0.10 -0.06 -0.09

• When grinding, turn both the crankshaft and the grinder counterclockwise as viewed from the crankshaft front end. • When finishing the crankshaft with whestone or sandpaper, rotate the crankshaft clockwise.

Inspection: Distortion of crankcase top surface • If the measurement exceeds the limit, correct the crankcase top surface with a surface grinder.

CAUTION • Do not grind the crankcase top surface so much as to compromise the correct piston protrusion.

11-93


CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE Installation procedure Installation: Oil spray plug • Install the oil spray plug in the illustrated direction.

CAUTION • Be careful that if the direction of the oil spray plug is not appropriate, oil supply to the timing gear becomes insufficient, causing seizure.

Installation: Gasket • Lower parts of the gasket (oil pan mounting surface) protrude after installation. Cut the protruding parts after installing the flywheel housing.

Installation: Crankshaft gear • Heat the crankshaft gear to approximately 100°C with a burner or the like.

WARNING • You may burn yourself if you touch the heated crankshaft gear. • Align the locating pin fitted in the crankshaft with the notch in the crankshaft gear. Drive the gear into position by lightly striking its end face with a plastic hammer. Installation: Rear oil seal slinger • Install the rear oil seal slinger so that it is in close contact with the crankshaft gear. Installation: Ring • To install the ring, push it in with contact with the slinger end face.

11-94

until it comes into positive


11 Installation: Front oil seal slinger • Install the front oil seal slinger onto the crankshaft until the end of face of securely contacts the guide.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Main bearing • Install the main bearings with their lugs aligned as shown in the illustration. When the crankshaft journals have been ground to an undersize, use undersized main bearings. Undersizes available: 0.25 mm, 0.50 mm, 0.75 mm, 1.00 mm

CAUTION • The upper main bearing has an oil hole. The lower main bearing has no oil hole. Do not confuse the upper and lower bearings, as this can cause seizure in the engine. Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Thrust plate • Install thrust plates on both sides of the main bearing cap and the rear end of the crankcase, ensuring that the oil grooves face outside. • If oversized thrust plates are to be used, those with and marks must be the same in size. Oversizes available: 0.15 mm, 0.30 mm and 0.45 mm.

CAUTION • If thrust plates are installed with the oil grooves facing inside, the engine may seize. Installation: Main bearing cap

CAUTION • Before installing bolts, check the number of punch marks on the bolt head. (Bolt with up to two punch marks can be reused.) • The number of punch marks indicates the number of times the bolt has been tightened in the past within the plastic region. If there are three punch marks (tightened three times in the past), replace the bolt. • Install locating pins in the illustrated direction for the main bearing cap on the rearmost part.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

11-95


CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKCASE • Starting at the front of the engine, fit the main bearing caps in the order of the embossed numbers with the embossed numbers and front marks facing in the illustrated direction.

• Tighten all the bolts to 100 N·m {10 kgf·m}, then additionally tighten them according in the following procedure. • Turn the holder of counterclockwise to pretension the internal spring.

• Set the tool such that the rod (extension) is pressed against the crankcase by the force of the spring. • Align any line on the holder scale with any line on the socket scale. (This will be used as the reference point = 0°.) • From the reference point, turn the socket by 130° in the direction shown. Each division on the socket scale represents 5°. • After tightening the bolt within the plastic region, make a punch mark on the bolt head to record the number of times that they have been tightened

CAUTION • The bolts should be tightened within the plastic region. Never tighten them further than the specified angle. • After tightening the bolt, rotate the crankshaft by hand. If it cannot be rotated smoothly, inspect the main bearing cap for mounting surface. Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Front oil seal • Install the front oil seal onto the front cover while pressing the seal’s entire periphery evenly to prevent it from tilting. • Install the front oil seal until its flange comes into positive contact with the front cover.

11-96


GROUP 12 LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. 12-2 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Lubrication System ........................................................................... 12-3 Oil Pump ............................................................................................. 12-4 Oil Cooler ........................................................................................... 12-5 Full-flow Oil Filter ........................................................................ 12-6 Bypass Oil Filter ........................................................................... 12-7 Engine Oil Pressure Switch .............................................................. 12-7 Regulator Valve .................................................................................. 12-7 Lubrication of Engine Components ................................................. 12-8

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................... 12-11 ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Oil Filter Replacement ..................................................................... 12-12 2. Engine Oil Replacement ................................................................. 12-14 3. Oil Pressure Measurement ............................................................. 12-15

OIL PAN, OIL JETS ......................................................................... 12-16 OIL PUMP, OIL STRAINER ............................................................. 12-18 OIL FILTER ...................................................................................... 12-22 OIL COOLER ................................................................................... 12-24 REGULATOR VALVE ....................................................................... 12-26

12-1


SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Method of lubrication

Oil pump type

Oil filter

Filter paper element center bolt type

Oil cooler

Shell and plate type (multiple-plate type) API classification CD, CD/SF, CE, CE/SF, CF-4 or JASO classification DH-1, DH-2

Grade Engine oil Quantity

12-2

dm3 {L}

Oil pan

Approx. 31.5 {31.5}

Oil filter

4 to 4.5 {4 to 4.5}


12

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Lurication System

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Rocker shaft Camshaft journal (No.2 to 7) Camshaft journal (No.1) Rocker case (No.1) Slave piston (No.1 to 5) Camshaft cap (No.2 to 6) Rocker case (No.2 to 6) Cylinder head sub oil gallery Master piston (No.1 to 5) Slave piston (No.6) Camshaft cap (No.7) Rocker case (No.7) Master piston (No.6)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Powertard solenoid valve Main oil gallery Regulator valve Check valve for oil jet Piston Air compressor Turbocharger Main bearing Connecting rod bearing Connecting rod bushing Idler gear A, B Oil spray plug Oil spray plug

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Bypass oil filter Oil cooler bypass valve Oil cooler Full-flow oil filter Engine oil bypass alarm switch Relief valve Oil pump Oil strainer Supply pump Idler gear C Idler gear D Flywheel PTO Oil pan

12-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 2. Mitsubishi 6M70 Oil Pump • This engine uses a gear-type oil pump driven by the rotation of the crankshaft transmitted through the engagement of the crankshaft gear and the oil pump gear. The oil pump has a relief valve, which prevents excessive pressure from building up inside the lubricating system by allowing part of the engine oil to escape to the oil pan when the oil pressure exceeds a specified level.

12-4


12 3. Mitsubishi 6M70 Oil Cooler

3.1 Mitsubishi 6M70 Bypass valve • When the engine oil is cool and its viscosity is high, or when the oil cooler element becomes clogged and restricts the flow of the engine oil, the bypass valve opens to let the engine oil bypass the oil cooler and flow directly to the main oil gallery.

12-5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 4. Full-flow Oil Filter • The filter elements use elements made of filter paper.

4.1 Engine oil bypass alarm switch • If the full-flow oil filter elements clog up, this will restrict the flow of engine oil, causing various parts of the engine to seize. To prevent this, the engine oil bypass alarm switch is installed. • If the full-flow oil filter clogs up, the engine oil bypass alarm switch trips in such a way as to direct the engine oil straight on to the oil cooler, bypassing the filter elements. When the engine oil bypass alarm switch trips, the relevant warning lamp illuminates to alert the operator to the clogged full-flow oil filter elements.

12-6


12 5. Bypass Oil Filter • The oil filter elements use elements made of filter paper.

6. Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Oil Pressure Switch • If the oil pressure of the engine oil fed to the main oil gallery drops below the specified value, the engine oil pressure switch trips and illuminates the relevant warning lamp to alert the operator to the abnormal oil pressure.

7. Mitsubishi 6M70 Regulator Valve • If the oil pressure in the main oil gallery exceeds the specified value, the regulator valve opens and returns a portion of the engine oil to the oil pan to adjust the oil pressure.

12-7


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 8. Lubrication of Engine Components • The engine oil in the main oil gallery lubricates the engine components in the following ways.

8.1 Mitsubishi 6M70 Main bearing and connecting rod bearing

• Engine oil supplied through an oil passage in the crankshaft lubricates the big end (connecting rod bearing) of each connecting rod. Simultaneously, engine oil supplied through an oil passage in the connecting rod lubricates the connecting rod’s small end (connecting rod bushing). Beside, engine oil is sprayed out of the oil jet in the head of the connecting rod into the piston to cool the piston.

8.2 Mitsubishi 6M70 Timing gears

• Engine oil in the main oil gallery is directed through the oil passages in the crankcase and cylinder head and is used to lubricate the various gear shafts. After lubricating the gear shafts, the oil is used to lubricate the gears before returning the oil pan. Engine oil also lubricates the gears by the oil spray plugs. The oil spray plug has an arrow showing the installed direction on its head.

12-8


12 8.3 Mitsubishi 6M70 Valve mechanism

• Engine oil in the main oil gallery is directed through the oil passages in the cylinder head, rocker case and camshaft cap, and lubricates the No. 1 journal of the camshaft before being fed to the rocker shaft. The oil flowing through the oil passages in the rocker shaft lubricates No. 2 to No. 7 journals of the camshaft and also lubricates the rockers. The oil flowing to the adjusting screws on the rockers lubricates the valve bridges. After lubricating the various parts, the oil returns to the oil pan.

8.4 Mitsubishi 6M70 Check valves and oil jets • An oil jet is fitted in the lower part of the main oil gallery for each cylinder. • Engine oil is sprayed out of the oil jet into the piston to cool the piston. • Each oil jet is fitted with a check valve that opens and closes at predetermined oil pressure levels. At low engine speeds, the check valve closes to maintain the required volume of oil in the lubrication system and prevent reductions in oil pressure.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

12-9


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 8.5 Mitsubishi 6M70 Turbocharger • Engine oil in the main oil gallery is directed through a pipe to the bearing housing to lubricate the inner components. • A piston ring is provided on each end of the turbine wheel shaft. The rings function as oil sealing.

8.6 Mitsubishi 6M70 Supply pump • The engine oil supplied to the supply pump lubricates the inside of the pump and supply pump gear. • After lubricating the inside of the pump, the oil is directed through the timing gear train from the rear of the pump and returns to the oil pan.

8.7 Mitsubishi 6M70 Air compressor • The engine oil in the main oil gallery lubricates the inside of the air compressor, is directed through the timing gear train from the air compressor gear side, and returns to the oil pan.

12-10


12

TROUBLESHOOTING

Low oil pressure

Excessive oil consumption (oil leakage)

Incorrectly mounted element

O

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

O

Defective O-ring

O

O

O

Clogged element

O

O

Damaged element

O

O

Weakened bypass valve spring

O

Malfunctioning oil pump

O

Engine is difficult to start

Overheating

Symptoms

Possible causes

Oil cooler

Oil pump

Interference between oil pump gear and oil pump case and/or cover

O

O

Incorrectly connected oil pipe

O

Clogged oil strainer

O

O O O

Incorrect installation

O

Clogged element

O

Defective O-ring Front cover Flywheel housing

O

O

Weakened relief valve spring Oil filter

O O

Defective front oil seal

O

Incorrectly mounted front cover

O

Defective rear oil seal

O

Incorrectly mounted flywheel housing O

Defective piston cooling oil jet(s)

O

O

Oil working its way up into combustion chamber(s) through piston rings

O

Oil working its way down into combustion chamber(s) through valves

O

Gr11

O

Poor oil quality

O

Deterioration of oil

O

Excess of oil Fuel mixed with oil

Gr11

O

Weakened regulator valve spring

Too high oil viscosity

Reference Gr

O O

12-11


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Oil Filter Replacement Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain plug (oil filter)

24.5 ± 4.9 {2.5 ± 0.5}

Center bolt

63.7 ± 4.9 {6.5 ± 0.5}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark –

Points of application Oil filter

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil API classification CD, CD/SF, CE, CE/SF, CF-4 or JASO classification DH-1, DH-2

4 to 4.5 dm3 {4 to 4.5 L}

WARNING • Wipe up any spilled engine oil, as it can cause fires. • To avoid any risk of burns, take care not to touch the engine oil when the engine is hot.

CAUTION • Make sure not to put any engine oil on the belt when working on the oil filter. Belts soiled with oil or grease may easily slip, resulting in deteriorated performance of the cooling system. • Do not reuse the oil filter elements by washing. • Install the gasket, taking care not to twist it. [Removal] • Remove the drain plug and drain the oil out of the oil filter.

12-12


12 • Clean other parts than the element, O-ring and gasket to be replaced with washing oil.

[Installation] • Replace the element, O-ring and gasket with new ones, respectively. • Install the oil filter case so that the drain plug is positioned as shown in the illustration. • With the oil filter installed, start the engine and ensure that there is no oil leakage through the gasket. • If oil is leaking, remove and reinstall the oil filter. • Stop the engine and check the engine oil level. • Add engine oil if the engine oil level is low.

12-13


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 2. Engine Oil Replacement Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain plug (oil filter)

24.5 ± 4.9 {2.5 ± 0.5}

Drain plug (oil pan)

68 {7}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Oil filter

Oil pan

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil API classification CD, CD/SF, CE, CE/SF, CF-4 or JASO classification DH-1, DH-2

4 to 4.5 dm3 {4 to 4.5L} Approx. 31.5 dm3 {31.5L}

WARNING • Wipe up any spilled engine oil, as it can cause fires. • To avoid any risk of burns, take care not to touch the engine oil when the engine is hot.

CAUTION • Make sure not to put any engine oil on the belt when working on the oil filter. Belts soiled with oil or grease may easily slip, resulting in deteriorated performance of the cooling system. [Draining] • Remove the filler cap. • Remove the drain plugs of the oil filter or oil pan to drain out the engine oil. [Refilling] • Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque, then pour a specified amount of new engine oil into the engine. • Wait at least for 6 minutes after installing the filler cap and check the engine oil level. • Start the engine and ensure that there is no oil leakage. • Stop the engine, wait at least for 30 minutes and check the engine oil level. • Add engine oil if the engine oil level is low.

CAUTION • Do not add engine oil too much. An excessive oil level can only lead to increased oil consumption or make the positive crankcase ventilation system less efficient.

12-14


12 3. Oil Pressure Measurement Service standards Location

Maintenance item Oil pressure (oil temperature at 70 to 90°C)

Standard value

No-load minimum speed

135 to 295 kPa {1.4 to 3 kgf/cm2}

No-load maximum speed

295 to 490 kPa {3 to 5 kgf/cm2}

Limit

Remedy

49 kPa {0.5 kgf/ cm2}

Inspect

195 kPa {2 kgf/cm2}

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened Engine oil pressure switch

Tightening torque

Remarks

24.5 ± 4.9 {2.5 ± 0.5}

With cold engine

• Remove the Mitsubishi 6M70 engine oil pressure switch.

• Using an adapter, connect an oil pressure gauge to the engine oil pressure switch mounting hole. • Warm up the engine until the oil temperature reaches 70 to 90°C. • Measure the oil pressure while running the engine at a minimum speed and then at maximum speed, both under no load. • If the measurements are below the specified limits, overhaul the lubrication system.

CAUTION • Reinstall the oil pressure switch only when the engine is cold.

12-15


MITSUBISHI 6M70 OIL JETS, OIL PAN, Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4

Drain plug Oil pan Check valve Oil jet

: Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

CAUTION • The check valve has been tightened using thread-locking compound and so, may deform during removal. Once removed, the check valve must not be reused. Do not remove the check valve unless defects are evident.

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • If overtightened, the check valve will not operate properly, leading to engine seizure. Be sure to tighten the check valve to the specified torque.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Drain plug Check valve

Tightening torque

Remarks

68 {7}

34 {3.5}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Crankcase mounting surface of oil pan

12-16

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

ThreeBond 1207C

As required


12 Installation procedure Installation: Oil pan • Clean the mating surfaces of each part. • Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the oil pan evenly and without any breaks. Change the amount of application to A and B at four locations shown in the illustration. • Mount the oil pan within three minutes of applying the sealant. Make sure that the sealant stays in place.

CAUTION • Do not start the engine less than an hour after installation. If the oil pan mounting bolts were loosened or removed, be sure to reapply sealant.

12-17


MITSUBISHI 6M70 OIL PUMP, OIL STRAINER

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

Oil strainer Gasket Oil pipe Gasket Cover Driven gear Ring

a: *b: *

Relief valve spring Relief valve Idler shaft Idler gear Gear and case Gasket

Crankshaft gear Oil pump gear : Locating pin : Non-reusable parts

• The oil strainer, the oil pipe and the oil pump must all be removed together as an assembly. • Do not disassemble the oil pump unless defects are evident. • The gear and case assembly is not serviceable. If the gear and case assembly appears defective, replace it.

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly procedure in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Clearance between drive gear shaft and cover

0.04 to 0.07

0.15

Replace

Clearance between driven gear shaft and case, and that between the shaft and cover

0.04 to 0.07

0.15

Replace

Clearance between case and tooth tips of each gear

0.2 to 0.29

0.35

Difference between case depth and height of each gear

0.05 to 0.12

0.15

8

Relief valve spring installed load (installed length 47.7)

190 ± 11 N {19.4 ± 1.1 kgf}

179 N {18.3 kgf}

Replace

9

Relief valve opening pressure

0.9 +0.1 MPa 0 {9 +10 kgf/cm2}

0.9 MPa {9 kgf/cm2}

Replace

5, 12 5, 6, 12 6, 12

Maintenance item

Replace

10, 11

Clearance between idler shaft and idler gear

0.03 to 0.06

0.15

Replace

* 11, *b

Backlash between idler gear and crankshaft gear

0.08 to 0.2

0.35

Replace

0.076 to 0.196

0.35

Replace

11, a

12-18

Backlash between idler gear and oil pump gear


12 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Bolt (oil pump cover mounting) Nut (idler shaft mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

44 ± 4.9 {4.5 ± 0.5}

69 ± 10 {7 ± 1}

Thread-locking compound

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Nut thread

Loctite 262

As required

Sliding parts of oil pump

Engine oil

As required

Inspection before removal Inspection: Backlash of each gear • If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the defective part(s).

Inspection procedure Inspection: Driven gear, Gear and case assembly • Perform the following inspections. Replace the defective part(s) as required. (1) Difference between case depth and height of each gear

(2) Clearance between case and tooth tips of each gear

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

12-19


OIL PUMP, OIL STRAINER (3) Clearance between drive gear shaft and cover (4) Clearance between driven gear shaft and case, and that between the shaft and cover

Installation procedure Installation: Idler shaft • Install the idler shaft so that “↑” is positioned within the area shown in the illustration.

12-20


12 M E M O

12-21


OIL FILTER Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

*a::

Drain plug Center bolt Washer O-ring Oil filter case Gasket Oil filter element Spring Engine oil bypass alarm switch Oil filter head O-ring Oil cooler Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

WARNING • Wipe up any spilled engine oil, as it can cause fires. • To avoid any risk of burns, take care not to touch the engine oil when the engine is hot.

CAUTION • When adding engine oil, be careful not to allow engine oil to smear the belt. A belt smeared with oil will slip, resulting in reduced cooling efficiency. • Do not reuse the oil filter elements by washing. • Install the gasket, taking care not to twist it.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain plug

24.5 ± 4.9 {2.5 ± 0.5}

Center bolt

63.7 ± 4.9 {6.5 ± 0.5}

49 ± 4.9 {5.0 ± 0.5}

Engine oil bypass alarm switch

12-22


12 M E M O

12-23


MITSUBISHI 6M70 OIL COOLER Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Bypass valve O-ring Water pipe O-ring Oil cooler element O-ring Oil cooler cover Oil cooler plug O-ring O-ring Gasket Regulator valve (See later section.) 13 O-ring : Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

1

Bypass valve opening pressure

5

Air leakage from oil cooler element (air pressure: 1.47 MPa {15 kgf/cm2}, 15 seconds)

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

294 ± 50 kPa {3.0 ± 0.5 kgf/cm2}

244 kPa {2.5 kgf/ cm2}

Replace

0 cm3 {0 mL}

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Bypass valve Bolt (oil cooler cover mounting) Regulator valve Nut (oil cooler element mounting) Oil cooler plug

Tightening torque

Remarks

15 to 20 {1.5 to 2.0}

54 {5.5}

98 to 118 {10 to 12}

24.5 to 32.3 {2.5 to 3.3}

21 {2.1}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

O-ring

12-24

Lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required


12 Inspection procedure Inspection: Oil cooler element • Plug the outlet of the oil cooler element and connect a hose to the engine oil inlet port. Then, immerse the oil cooler element in a tank of water. • Apply a specified air pressure for 15 seconds through the hose, and check for any air leaks. • Replace the element if it leaks air.

12-25


MITSUBISHI 6M70 REGULATOR VALVE Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4

Snap ring Valve Spring Body

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Regulator valve opening pressure

3

Spring installed load (installed length 48.3)

12-26

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.49 ± 0.03 MPa {5.0 ± 0.3 kgf/cm2}

Replace

78 ± 2 N {8.0 ± 0.2 kgf}

Replace


GROUP 13 FUEL AND ENGINE CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS................................. 13-2

SUPPLY PUMP.................................... 13-66

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION

INJECTOR........................................... 13-70

1. 2. 3. 4.

Common Rail System ....................... 13-4 Engine Control ................................ 13-20 Fuel Filter ......................................... 13-21 Water Separator............................... 13-22

TROUBLESHOOTING <FUEL SYSTEM> ............................... 13-24 <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 1. Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 13-26 2. Diagnostic Precautions .................. 13-27 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes ............................. 13-28 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data ........ 13-50 5. Actuator Tests Performed Using Multi-Use Tester.................... 13-52 6. Inspections Performed at Electronic Control Unit Connectors ................ 13-54

FUEL TANK ......................................... 13-74 FUEL FILTER ...................................... 13-76 WATER SEPARATOR ......................... 13-80 ENGINE CONTROL ............................ 13-84 INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 13-88 INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF PARTS ................................................. 13-94 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....... 13-102

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Inspecting No-load Minimum and Maximum Speeds.................... 13-58 2. Inspection of Fuel Leakage ............ 13-59 3. Inspection of Injection Pipe and Fuel Pipe Mounting Clamp ............. 13-59 4. Draining of Deposit in Fuel Tank .... 13-59 5. Air-bleeding of Fuel System........... 13-60 6. Fuel Filter Replacement ................. 13-61 7. Cleaning of Gauze Filter ................ 13-62 8. Water Separator Element Replacement.................................... 13-63

COMMON RAIL................................... 13-65

13-1


MITSUBISHI 6M70 FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Manufacturer

Bosch

Model

CP2L4

Control method

Electronic

Type Supply pump

In-Line 4 barrel type

Feed pump type Rail pressure control valve

External gear Model

MPROP

Rated voltage

V

24

Max. common rail pressure MPa {kgf/cm2}

160 {1631}

Manufacturer Common rail volume Common rail

Bosch 3

cm {mL}

Pressure limiting valve opening pressure MPa {kgf/cm2} Common rail pressure sensor supply voltage

20 {20} 185 to 195 {1886 to 1988}

V

Manufacturer

Bosch

Control method Injectors

Max. operating pressure Min. operating pressure

Common rail electronic control unit

Electronic MPa {kgf/cm2}

160 {1631}

MPa {kgf/cm2}

25 {255}

Manufacturer Rated voltage

Bosch V

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-2

5

24


13 M E M O

13-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Mitsubishi 6M70 Common Rail System • In the common rail system, an electronic control unit monitors various aspects of the engine (engine speed, accelerator position coolant temperature, etc.) using information from sensors. In accordance with these data, the electronic control unit effects control over the fuel injection quantity, fuel injection timing, and fuel injection pressure in order to optimize the engine’s operation. • The electronic control unit has a diagnosis function that enables it to recognize abnormalities in the common rail system’s major components and alert the driver to them. • The common rail system consists mainly of an electronically controlled supply pump; injectors; a common rail; and the electronic control unit and sensors that are used to control the other components.

13-4


13 • When the engine is cranked by means of the starter switch, the feed pump (this is located inside the supply pump) simultaneously draws fuel from the fuel tank and feeds it via the water separator, gauze filter and fuel filter to the MPROP (rail pressure control valve). A quantity of fuel metered by the MPROP is supplied via the inlet valves to the plunger chambers. • The fuel in the plunger chambers is pressurized. The outlet valves are then opened, and the fuel is fed under pressure to the common rail. • The pressurized fuel is held in the common rail and then uniformly fed to the injectors. • In response to signals from the engine electronic control unit, a magnetic valve in each injector causes the injector to inject fuel into the relevant combustion chamber at the optimal timing and in the optimal quantity. • If fuel leakage occurs through any of the fuel line connections between the common rail and injectors, the relevant flow limiter(s) will close, shutting off fuel supply and thus preventing any further fuel leakage out of the system. • If the pressure of fuel in the common rail rises above the specified level, the pressure limiting valve opens to allow fuel to return to the fuel tank. • If the pressure of fuel in the supply pump rises above the specified level, the overflow valve opens to allow fuel to return to the fuel tank. • Excess fuel in the injector returns to the fuel tank through passages in the cylinder head.

13-5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1.1 Mitsubishi 6M70 Supply pump

13-6


13

• The supply pump pressurizes fuel and supplies it in a highly pressurized state. • Fuel drawn from the fuel tank by the feed pump is not supplied directly to the plungers. It is supplied first to the MPROP (rail pressure control valve), which controls the amount of fuel reaching the plungers. • If the fuel pressure exceeds a certain level, the overflow valve returns fuel to fuel tank. This operation keeps the pressure of the fuel constant. • Rotation of the camshaft causes (via the tappets) up-down movement of the plungers. Fuel in the plunger chambers is thus highly pressurized.

13-7


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION (1) MPROP (rail pressure control valve)

CAUTION • Be sure to connect the MPROP (rail pressure control valve) connector to the engine harness before starting the engine. If the engine were started with the MPROP connector not connected, control of the supply pump by the engine electronic control unit would not be possible and a fault would ensue. • The MPROP receives fuel from the feed pump and feeds fuel toward the plungers of the supply pump in such a quantity that the fuel pressure (target common rail pressure) corresponds to that required by the engine electronic control unit. • When the MPROP is not operating, i.e., when current is not flowing, fuel flows at its maximum rate. When current flows, the piston in the MPROP is pressed down such that fuel is not fed toward the plungers. • The engine electronic control unit controls the ratio of current-off time (duty ratio).

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-8


13 1.2 Mitsubishi 6M70 Common rail

• The common rail distributes to the injectors high-pressure fuel that has been fed from the supply pump. • Each flow limiter prevents an abnormal outflow of fuel. It does so by blocking the fuel passage in the event of fuel leakage from the injection pipe or excessive injection of fuel from the injector. • The common rail pressure sensor is used in feedback control. It senses the fuel pressure (actual common rail pressure) inside the common rail and feeds a corresponding signal to the electronic control unit. • If the fuel pressure in the common rail exceeds a certain, set level, the piston in the pressure limiting valve pushes and compresses the spring such that fuel is able to escape. The pressure limiting valve thus prevents the fuel pressure from becoming higher than the set pressure. When the pressure limiting valve is activated, the common rail system is faulty and needs an inspection of fuel supply system. (1) Flow limiter • During normal operation, the piston moves (thus pushing and compressing the spring) to the extent necessary for one injection quantity to pass through. The piston does not make contact with the seat at this time. When injection is complete, the piston is returned to its initial position by the spring. • If the amount of fuel passing through the flow limiter becomes excessively great, the piston presses against the seat, thereby closing the fuel passage and preventing an abnormal outflow of fuel. When the piston has pressed against the seat, it does not return to its original position until the engine has been stopped and the pressure in the common rail has come down.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-9


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1.3 Mitsubishi 6M70 Injector

• In accordance with electrical signals from the engine electronic control unit, each injector supplies high-pressure fuel from the common rail to the relevant combustion chamber of the engine at the optimal timing and in the optimal quantity. • The Mitsubishi 6M70 injector is divided into the control section and the injector section. • The control section consists of the control chamber, magnet, valve spring, armature plate, valve ball, valve body, valve piston, orifice A, and orifice Z. The valve piston is located between the control section and the injection section. • The injection section consists of the nozzle body, nozzle needle, nozzle spring, and nozzle nut.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638 13-10


13 (1) Operation (1.1) Injection not taking place • With the magnet not energized, the armature plate is pushed down by the valve spring such that the ball seat is closed. • The high-pressure fuel acts upon the control chamber via orifice Z. The same pressure acts upon the nozzle needle. • The fuel pressure acting on the nozzle needle cannot overcome the valve piston and nozzle spring, so the nozzle needle stays in its downward-pushed position and injection does not take place.

(1.2) Start of injection • When the magnet is energized, the resulting electromagnetic force draws the armature plate upward, causing the ball seat to open. • Fuel in the control chamber passes through the orifice A and ball seat and flows to the fuel tank. • With the pressure in the control chamber reduced, the fuel acting on the nozzle needle overcomes the valve piston and nozzle spring, pushing up the nozzle needle such that injection starts. • If the magnet remains energized, the injection reaches its maximum level.

13-11


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION (1.3) End of injection • When energization of the magnet is stopped, the armature plate is pushed downward by the valve spring such that the ball seat closes. At this time, fuel flows into the control chamber via orifice Z, pushing down the valve piston and nozzle needle such that injection finishes.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-12


13 1.4 Electronic control system (1) System block diagram

Vehicle

Engine

Input signals

Engine speed sensor Cylinder recognition sensor Water temperature sensor Boost pressure sensor Common rail pressure sensor Fuel temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor

Starter switch Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal switch Pulse converter (vehicle speed sensor) Idling speed adjustment potentiometer Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor Clutch switch Transmission neutral switch Powertard switch Memory clear switch Diagnosis switch Governor control switch Power take-off resistor Power take-off load sensor Pulse converter & Turbine speed sensor

Engine electronic control unit

Output signals

Fuel injection control

Injector magnetic valve MPROP1, 2 (rail pressure control valve)

Warm-up acceleration function

Fuel injection pressure control

Auxiliary brake function

Fuel injection quantity control

Idle-up function

Fuel injection timing control

Turbocharger control function (See Gr15.)

Engine warning lamp Tachometer

Exhaust gas recirculation valve control function (See Gr17.) Starter continuous energization prevention function (See Gr54.) Fault diagnosis function

Safety relay Powertard solenoid valve Turbocharger magnetic valve Electronic drive unit relay

Multi-Use Tester connector

MVCU (See Gr54.)

: Electrical signal : CAN signal

EGR EDU (See Gr17.)

EGR magnetic valve (See Gr17.)

ABS: Anti-lock brake system ASR: Anti spin regulator CAN: Controller area network ECU: Electronic control unit EDU: Electronic drive unit EGR:Exhaust gas recirculation MVCU: Multifunction vehicle control unit

13-13


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Mitsubishi 6M70 Parts

Main function/operation

Engine speed sensor

Sensing of engine speed

Cylinder recognition sensor

Cylinder recognition

Water temperature sensor

Sensing of coolant temperature

Boost pressure sensor

Sensing of boost pressure

Common rail pressure sensor

Sensing of common rail pressure

Fuel temperature sensor

Sensing of fuel temperature

Intake air temperature sensor

Sensing of intake air temperature

Starter switch

Senses that the engine is in starting condition with the starter switch in START position.

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Sensing of extent of accelerator pedal depression

Accelerator pedal switch

Sensing of released/pressed condition of accelerator pedal (ON with pedal released)

Pulse converter (vehicle speed sensor)

Sensing of vehicle speed

Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Acceleration of warm-up

Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

Correction of fuel injection rate

Clutch switch

Sensing of released/Pressed condition of clutch pedal (OFF with pedal released)

Transmission neutral switch

Detection of transmission neutral condition

Powertard switch

Operation of auxiliary brake

Diagnosis switch

Output of diagnosis codes

Memory clear switch

Deletion of diagnosis codes; output of past diagnosis codes

Governor control switch

Idle up when power take-off is in operation

Power take-off resistor

Selection of power take-off map

Power take-off load sensor

Sensing of extent of accelerator pedal depression

Pulse converter & Turbine speed sensor

Sensing of turbine wheel speed

Injector magnetic valve

Control of fuel injection rate, fuel injection quantity, and fuel injection timing

MPROP1, 2 (rail pressure control valve)

Control of fuel injection pressure

Engine warning lamp

Indication of system abnormalities

Tachometer

Indication of engine speed (in meter cluster)

Powertard solenoid valve

ON/OFF control of Powertard magnetic valve

Turbocharger magnetic valve

Selection of turbocharger control

Safety relay

Control of starter continuous energization prevention function

Electronic drive unit relay

Supply of power to exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit

CAN communication (MVCU)

Engine data recognized by the engine electronic control unit are outputted to the CAN bus to enable systems to obtain data that they need for control. Multifunction Vehicle Control Unit system issues signals to the engine electronic control unit via the CAN bus to enable it to effect engine control appropriate for type of system control.

Multi-Use Tester connector

Communication between Multi-Use Tester and common rail system

CAN communication (EGR EDU)

Engine data recognized by the engine electronic control unit are outputted to the CAN bus to enable systems to obtain data that they need for control. Exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit issues signals to the engine electronic control unit via the CAN bus to enable it to effect engine control appropriate for type of system control.

EGR: Exhaust gas recirculation EDU: Electronic drive unit MVCU: Multifunction vehicle control unit

13-14

Mitsubishi 6M70 engine parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com phone: 269 673 1638


13 (2) Fuel injection control (2.1) Pilot injection • Pilot injection entails the injection of an extremely small amount of fuel ahead of the main injection. • This suppresses hasty heat generation early in the injection cycle and thus suppresses NOx generation and noise at the start of combustion. • The post injection added after the main injection reduces particulate matter (PM) generation in the exhaust gas. (3) Fuel injection quantity control (3.1) Fuel injection quantity during engine startup • During engine startup, the fuel injection quantity is determined in accordance with the engine speed and coolant temperature.

(3.2) Basic fuel injection quantity • The basic fuel injection quantity is determined in accordance with the engine speed and throttle opening.

(3.3) Maximum injection quantity • The maximum injection quantity is calculated from the engine speed and boost pressure.

(3.4) Fuel injection amount

rate

adjustment

resistor

correction

• To limit inconsistency in the injection quantity, the injection quantity is corrected by the fuel injection rate adjustment resistor.

13-15


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION (4) Fuel injection timing control (4.1) Main injection timing • The main injection timing is calculated from the fuel injection quantity and engine speed.

(4.2) Pilot injection timing (pilot interval) • The pilot injection timing is calculated from the fuel injection quantity and engine speed.

(5) Fuel injection pressure control • The fuel injection pressure is calculated from the fuel injection quantity and engine speed.

(6) Warm-up acceleration function Engine electronic control unit Input signals Water temperature sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Comparison operations

Output signals Idling speed control

Target injection quantity

• The warm-up acceleration function increases engine warm-up by varying the engine’s idling speed in accordance with the engine’s coolant temperature. It can operate either automatically or manually. Selection is made using the idling speed adjustment potentiometer.

13-16


13 (7) Auxiliary brake function Input signals Accelerator pedal position sensor Clutch switch Transmission neutral switch Powertard switch

Engine electronic control unit Auxiliary brake function

Output signals

Powetard solenoid valve

• The auxiliary brake function activates or deactivates the Powertard solenoid valve according to the vehicle condition to control the auxiliary brake. (8) Idle-up function • The idle-up function increases the engine idling speed when a load is applied to the engine by other system or when the warm-up acceleration function is activated. (9) Fault diagnosis function • When the starter switch is in the ON position, the system continuously monitors the sensors and other system components. If any fault is detected, the system warns the driver of this by displaying the relevant fault information on the meter cluster. At the same time, the system also stores a relevant diagnosis code in the memory and starts operation in the fault mode. • While the control during fault is taking place, the system’s functionality is limited to ensure vehicle and driver safety. It is possible to read the memorized diagnosis code using a Multi-Use Tester or from flashing of the warning lamp. • Diagnosis codes shown by the Multi-Use Tester and those indicated by flashing of the warning lamp are different. • The Multi-Use Tester is capable of showing more detailed diagnosis codes.

13-17


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION (10)Electronic control unit connection diagram

13-18


13

13-19


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 2. Engine Control

2.1 Accelerator pedal switch • The accelerator pedal switch is used to monitor whether or not the accelerator pedal is pressed.

2.2 Accelerator pedal position sensor • The accelerator pedal position sensor monitors for change in the position of the accelerator pedal and sends relevant electric signals to the common rail electronic control unit. The lever is constantly pulled towards the idling position by a return spring.

13-20


13 3. Fuel Filter

• The fuel filter removes foreign matter from fuel via the filter element. The fuel filter also incorporates a water separator which separates any water from fuel. • Water separated from fuel accumulates at the bottom of the fuel filter assembly. • The water which has collected can be drained through the drain hole by loosening the drain plug. • To bleed air from the fuel system, a manually operated pump and plug are provided on the fuel filter head.

13-21


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 4. Water Separator • A water separator is installed between the fuel tank and the feed pump. It is designed to remove impurities from fuel and also separates water from fuel. • Water separated from fuel is collected at the bottom of the water separator and is drained when the float reaches the level line. • To drain water collected, loosen the drain cock. This allows the water to be discharged through the drain hole.

13-22


13 M E M O

13-23


TROUBLESHOOTING <MITSUBISHI 6M70 FUEL SYSTEM>

Defective electronic control fuel system

Supply pump

Common rail

O

O

O

O

Defective sealing of supply pump overflow valve

O

O

O

O

Defective MPROP

O

O

O

O

Defective base supply pump

O

O

O

O

O O

O O

O

Pressure limiting valve malfunction Incorrect injector fuel injection

O

O

Defective injector magnetic valve

O O

O

Defective injector

O O

O

O

O

O

O O

Water separator clogged

O

O

O O

O

O O

O O

Air or water in fuel system

O

O

Poor quality fuel is used

O O

Fuel leak from high-pressure joint

O O O O

Incorrectly adjusted accelerator pedal stopper bolt

Engine speed sensor and cylinder recognition sensor open-circuited, short, or intermittent connection

O O O

O O

O

13-24

O

O O

O

*

O O

Idling speed adjustment knob intermittent connection Fuel pipe and hose cracked

O

O O

Defective fuel injection volume adjusting resistor

MPROP: Rail pressure control valve : Contact Bosch Service Station for repair.

O O

O

O

O O

O O

* *

O

O

O

Boost pressure sensor open-circuited, short, or intermittent connection Water temperature sensor open-circuited, short, or intermittent connection

O O

O

Defective accelerator position sensor

O

O

Fuel filter clogged

Fuel pipe clogged and fuel leak from joint

* O

O O

No fuel in fuel tank

O

* *

O

Gauze filter clogged

Engine control

Reference Gr

O

Defective feed pump

Common rail pressure sensor open-circuited, short or intermittent connection; defective sensor

Engine control warning lamp illuminates

Fuel supply insufficient

Engine does not stop

Engine does not reach maximum speed

Engine stalls immediately after start

Engine idling unstable

Engine maximum speed too high

Engine output not sufficient

Engine output inconsistent

Engine knocks

Possible causes

Engine hard to start

Engine does not start

Symptoms


13

Oil viscosity unsuitable

O

O

Valve clearance incorrect

O

O

Defective cylinder head gasket

O

O

Valve and valve seat worn and carbon deposits

O

O

Valve spring fatigued

O

O

Piston ring worn and damaged

O

O

Piston ring groove worn and damaged

O

Piston and cylinder liner worn

O

O

Cooling system malfunction

O

O

Defective starter switch

O O

Blown fuse

O O

Engine control warning lamp illuminates

Fuel supply insufficient

Engine does not stop

Engine does not reach maximum speed

Engine stalls immediately after start

Engine idling unstable

Engine maximum speed too high

Engine output not sufficient

Engine output inconsistent

Engine knocks

Engine hard to start

Possible causes

Engine does not start

Symptoms

Reference Gr

Gr12

Gr11

Gr14 Gr54 O

O Gr54

13-25


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 1. Diagnosis Procedure • Perform the inspection in accordance with the following flowchart.

Warning lamp lit

Vehicle in service shop

Read all (past and present) diagnosis codes by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.)

Perform inspection based on diagnosis codes. (See later section.)

Was able to identify the fault?

NO

YES Rectify or replace with new parts.

Clear stored diagnosis code. (See Gr00.)

Test drive

Code issued

Read diagnosis code(s) by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.) No code issued End of inspection

13-26

Response to transient fault (See Gr00.)


13 2. Diagnostic Precautions • Before measuring voltage, check the battery for charged condition and specific gravity. If system inspection is performed with the battery uncharged or reduced in specific gravity, accurate measurements cannot be achieved. • Before disconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors, set the starter switch to LOCK or OFF, then allow at least 20 seconds. • To avoid having electrical parts damaged, set the starter switch and lighting switch to LOCK or OFF before reconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors. • When performing measurement with the tester, handle the test bar carefully so that it does not damage internal circuit and other electrical parts of the electronic control unit to result in a short-circuit failure between terminals in connector or between connector and car body. • Resistance is affected by temperature. Determine the necessity of resistance measurement following given temperature specification as a guide. Otherwise, use normal temperature (10 to 35°C) as the measuring condition. • To start the engine, be sure to connect the connector of the MPROP (rail pressure control valve) to the engine harness. If the engine is started without connecting the MPROP connector, the engine electronic control unit cannot control the supply pump and the fault of the engine may result.

13-27


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes 3.1 Diagnosis code list • Diagnosis codes shown by the Multi-Use Tester and those indicated by warning lamp display are different. • The Multi-Use Tester is capable of showing more detailed diagnosis codes.

Code

Message

Warning lamp indication Flashes

Red

Orange

P0107

Atmospheric Pressure Sensor

19

O

P0108

Atmospheric Pressure Sensor

19

O

P0112

INT Air Temp SNSR (Low)

44

O

P0113

INT Air Temp SNSR (High)

44

O

P0117

Water Temp SNSR (Low)

21

O

P0118

Water Temp SNSR (High)

21

O

P0121

Accel Pedal Check (Plausibility)

58

O

P0122

Accel Pedal Sensor 1

24

O

P0123

Accel Pedal Sensor 1

24

O

P0182

Fuel Temp Sensor (inlet) Low

41

O

P0183

Fuel Temp Sensor (inlet) High

41

O

P0192

CRS Pressure SNSR (Low)

11

O

P0193

CRS Pressure SNSR (High)

11

O

P0200

Injector Circuit 1

82

O

P0201

Injector M/V-Cylinder 1 (Load)

37

O

P0202

Injector M/V-Cylinder 2 (Load)

38

O

P0203

Injector M/V-Cylinder 3 (Load)

39

O

P0204

Injector M/V-Cylinder 4 (Load)

8

O

P0205

Injector M/V-Cylinder 5 (Load)

46

O

P0206

Injector M/V-Cylinder 6 (Load)

47

O

P0219

Engine Overrunning

7

O

P0222

Accel Pedal Sensor 2

16

O

P0223

Accel Pedal Sensor 2

16

O

P0227

PTO Accel Sensor

61

O

Remarks

P0228

PTO Accel Sensor

61

O

P0234

Over Boost

54

O

P0237

Boost Press SNSR (Low)

32

O

P0238

Boost Press SNSR (High)

32

O

P0251

Common Rail Pressure Defect

36

O

P0253

Common Rail Pressure Defect

22

O

P0254

Common Rail Pressure Defect

23

O

O

P0335

Engine Revolution SNSR

15

O

P0340

Camshaft Position SNSR

12

O

P0500

Vehicle Speed Sensor

25

O

P0506

Idle Volume

31

P0507

Idle Volume

31

P0510

Accel SW

65

P0560

M/V Supply Voltage

79

O

P0600

CAN Communication

O

P0605

ECU System (Hardware)

33

O

O

P0615

Starter Safety Relay (Over Load)

48

O

Gr54

P0616

Starter Safety Relay (Low)

48

O

Gr54

13-28

Gr15


13 Code

Message

Warning lamp indication Flashes

Red

Orange

Remarks

P0617

Starter Safety Relay (High)

48

O

Gr54

P1130

VGT 1

51

O

Gr15

P1132

VGT 1

51

O

Gr15

P1133

VGT 1

51

O

Gr15

P1135

VGT 2

52

O

Gr15

P1137

VGT 2

52

O

Gr15

P1138

VGT 2

52

O

Gr15

P1140

VGT 3

53

O

Gr15

P1142

VGT 3

53

O

Gr15

P1143

VGT 3

53

O

Gr15

P1171

Q Adjustment Resistor (Low)

34

O

P1172

Q Adjustment Resistor (High)

34

O

P1176

PTO Adjustment Resistor (Low)

62

O

P1177

PTO Adjustment Resistor (High)

62

O

P1200

Injector Circuit 2

82

O

P1236

Turbine Revolution SNSR (Low)

57

O

Gr15

P1237

Turbine Revolution SNSR (High)

57

O

Gr15

P1238

Turbine Overrunning

59

O

Gr15

P1251

Common Rail Pressure M/V 1

63

O

P1253

Common Rail Pressure M/V 2

63

O

P1254

PRV Opening

36

O

P1255

Common Rail Pressure M/V 1

63

O

P1256

Common Rail Pressure M/V 1

63

O

P1258

Common Rail Pressure M/V 2

63

O

P1259

Common Rail Pressure M/V 2

63

O

P125A

Rail Pressure M/V 1 (Over Load)

63

O

P125B

Rail Pressure M/V 1 (Long Short)

63

O

P125C

Rail Pressure M/V 2 (Over Load)

63

O

P125D

Rail Pressure M/V 2 (Long Short)

63

O

P1267

EGR 1

67

O

Gr17

P1268

EGR 1

67

O

Gr17

P1272

EGR 2

68

O

Gr17

P1273

EGR 2

68

O

Gr17

P1277

EGR 3

69

O

Gr17

P1278

EGR 3

69

O

Gr17

P1335

Revolution & Position Sensor

14

O

P1460

Auxiliary Brake M/V 1

93

O

P1462

Auxiliary Brake M/V 1

93

O

P1463

Auxiliary Brake M/V 1

93

O

P1562

Sensor Supply Voltage 1

81

P1563

Sensor Supply Voltage 1

81

P1567

Sensor Supply Voltage 2

81

P1568

Sensor Supply Voltage 2

81

P1572

Sensor Supply Voltage 3

81

O

P1573

Sensor Supply Voltage 3

81

O

P1605

ECU System (EEPROM)

33

O

P1606

ECU System (Software)

33

O

P1625

EDU Relay

84

O

Gr17

13-29


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> Code P1630

Warning lamp indication

Message

Flashes

Red

Orange

95

O

CAN (EGR 1)

Remarks Gr17

3.2 Diagnosis code generation conditions and inspection items P0107: Atmospheric Pressure Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 19) Generation condition

Atmospheric pressure sensor (incorporated into engine electronic control unit) voltage remains less than 2 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when atmospheric pressure sensor (incorporated into engine electronic control unit) remains 2 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value of 101.3 kPa {1.03 kgf/cm2}. (Exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

30: Atmospheric Pressure

Other

Replace engine electronic control unit.

P0108: Atmospheric Pressure Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 19) Generation condition

Atmospheric pressure sensor (incorporated into engine electronic control unit) voltage remains higher than 4.7 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when atmospheric pressure sensor (incorporated into engine electronic control unit) voltage remains 4.7 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value of 101.3 kPa {1.03 kgf/cm2}. (Exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

30: Atmospheric Pressure

Other

Replace engine electronic control unit.

P0112: INT Air Temp SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 44) Generation condition

Intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains less than 0.15 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains 0.15 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (25°C).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2B: Intake Air Temperature 01

: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electrical equipment

#305: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electric circuit diagram

Intake air temperature sensor 1 system

P0113: INT Air Temp SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 44) Generation condition

Intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains higher than 4.85 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains 4.85 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (25°C).

Service data Inspection

13-30

Electronic control unit connector

2B: Intake Air Temperature 01

: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electrical equipment

#305: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electric circuit diagram

Intake air temperature sensor 1 system


13 P0117: Water Temp SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 21) Generation condition

Water temperature sensor voltage remains less than 0.2 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when water temperature sensor voltage remains 0.2 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value (at engine startup: –20°C; when engine is running: 80°C). • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2E: Water Temperature 02

: Water temperature sensor

Electrical equipment

#262: Water temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Water temperature sensor system

P0118: Water Temp SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 21) Generation condition

Water temperature sensor voltage remains higher than 4.85 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when water temperature sensor voltage remains 4.85 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value (at engine startup: –20°C; when engine is running: 80°C). • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2E: Water Temperature 02

: Water temperature sensor

Electrical equipment

#262: Water temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Water temperature sensor system

P0121: Accel Pedal Check (Plausibility) (warning lamp flashes: 58) Generation condition

The difference in output voltage between accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 remains 70% or more for 6 seconds when the sensors are normal.

Recoverability

System recovers if difference in output voltage between accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 remains less than 70% for 3 seconds when the sensors are normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

– (Low output)

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

22: Accel Pedal Position (unfiltered), 23: Accel Pedal Position (filtered) 24: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1, 25: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 2 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electrical equipment

#324: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor system

P0122: Accel Pedal Sensor 1 (warning lamp flashes: 24) Generation condition

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 voltage remains less than 0.5 V for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when accelerator pedal position sensor 1 voltage remains 0.5 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• If accelerator pedal position sensor 1 alone is faulty Control is effected using accelerator pedal position sensor 2. • If both accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 are faulty • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Control is effected using backup value (when accelerator pedal switch is ON: accelerator pedal is not pressed (0%); when the switch is OFF: the pedal is pressed 30%).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

22: Accel Pedal Position (unfiltered), 23: Accel Pedal Position (filtered) 24: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electrical equipment

#324: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 system

13-31


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0123: Accel Pedal Sensor 1 (warning lamp flashes: 24) Generation condition

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 voltage remains higher than 4.5 V for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when accelerator pedal position sensor 1 voltage remains 4.5 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• If accelerator pedal position sensor 1 alone is faulty Control is effected using accelerator pedal position sensor 2. • If both accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 are faulty • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Control is effected using backup value (when accelerator pedal switch is ON: accelerator pedal is not pressed (0%); when the switch is OFF: the pedal is pressed 30%).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

22: Accel Pedal Position (unfiltered), 23: Accel Pedal Position (filtered) 24: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electrical equipment

#324: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 system

P0182: Fuel Temp Sensor (inlet) Low (warning lamp flashes: 41) Generation condition

Fuel temperature sensor voltage remains less than 0.15 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when fuel temperature sensor voltage remains 0.15 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (40°C).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2F: Fuel Temperature (Inlet) 04

: Fuel temperature sensor

Electrical equipment

#323: Fuel temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Fuel temperature sensor system

P0183: Fuel Temp Sensor (inlet) High (warning lamp flashes: 41) Generation condition

Fuel temperature sensor voltage remains higher than 4.8 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when fuel temperature sensor voltage remains 4.8 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (40°C).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2F: Fuel Temperature (Inlet) 04

: Fuel temperature sensor

Electrical equipment

#323: Fuel temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Fuel temperature sensor system

P0192: CRS Pressure SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 11) Generation condition

Common rail pressure sensor voltage remains less than 0.2 V for 0.25 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Common rail pressure open loop control is effected. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator tests “B9: Fuel Leak Check, BB to C0: Injector Test, BA: VGT Test” are stopped.

Inspection

13-32

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Electrical equipment

#319: Common rail pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Common rail pressure sensor system


13 P0193: CRS Pressure SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 11) Generation condition

Common rail pressure sensor voltage remains higher than 4.8 V for 0.25 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Common rail pressure open loop control is effected. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator tests “B9: Fuel Leak Check, BB to C0: Injector Test, BA: VGT Test” are stopped.

Inspection

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Electrical equipment

#319: Common rail pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Common rail pressure sensor system

P0200: Injector Circuit 1 (warning lamp flashes: 82) Generation condition

Injector circuit (No. 1, 2 or 3 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited, or overloaded.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injector magnetic valve (No. 1, 2 or 3 cylinder) control is stopped. (Output is reduced due to three-cylinder operation, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Actuator tests “B9: Fuel Leak Check, BB to C0: Injector Test, BA: VGT Test” are stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

BB: Injector Test 1, BC: Injector Test 2, BD: Injector Test 3, 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 1, 2 or 3 cylinder) system

P0201: Injector M/V-Cylinder 1 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 37) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 1 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 1, 2 and 3 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

BB: Injector Test 1 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 1 cylinder) system

13-33


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0202: Injector M/V-Cylinder 2 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 38) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 5 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 4, 5 and 6 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

BF: Injector Test 5 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 5 cylinder) system

P0203: Injector M/V-Cylinder 3 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 39) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 3 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 1, 2 and 3 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

BD: Injector Test 3 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 3 cylinder) system

P0204: Injector M/V-Cylinder 4 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 08) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 6 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 4, 5 and 6 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

13-34

Electronic control unit connector

C0: Injector Test 6 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 6 cylinder) system


13 P0205: Injector M/V-Cylinder 5 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 46) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 2 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 1, 2 and 3 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

BC: Injector Test 2

Electronic control unit connector

05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 2 cylinder) system

P0206: Injector M/V-Cylinder 6 (Load) (warning lamp flashes: 47) Generation condition

Injector magnetic valve (No. 4 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited or overloaded.

Recoverability

• When short-circuited or overloaded • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • When open-circuited • System recovers if signal becomes normal with starter switch in ON position.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Injector magnetic valves (No. 4, 5 and 6 cylinder) are stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

BE: Injector Test 4

Electronic control unit connector

05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 4 cylinder) system

P0219: Engine Overrunning (warning lamp flashes: 07) Generation condition

Engine speed is 2900 rpm or higher.

Recoverability

System recovers if engine speed is 2500 rpm or less.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• • • •

Inspection

• Check for occurrences of diagnosis code "P0335: Engine Revolution SNSR". • If the diagnosis code is redisplayed with the pointer of the tachometer not reaching the red zone, replace the engine electronic control unit.

Other

No feed from MPROP (rail pressure control valve) Exhaust gas recirculation control Auto cruise control is stopped. Turbocharger control is stopped.

13-35


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0222: Accel Pedal Sensor 2 (warning lamp flashes: 16) Generation condition

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 voltage remains less than 0.5 V for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when accelerator pedal position sensor 2 voltage remains 0.5 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• If accelerator pedal position sensor 2 alone is faulty Control is effected using accelerator pedal position sensor 1. • If both accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 are faulty • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Control is effected using backup value (when accelerator pedal switch is ON: accelerator pedal is not pressed (0%); when the switch is OFF: the pedal is pressed 30%).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

22: Accel Pedal Position (unfiltered), 23: Accel Pedal Position (filtered) 25: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 2 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electrical equipment

#324: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 system

P0223: Accel Pedal Sensor 2 (warning lamp flashes: 16) Generation condition

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 voltage remains higher than 4.5 V for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when accelerator pedal position sensor 2 voltage remains 4.5 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• If accelerator pedal position sensor 2 alone is faulty Control is effected using accelerator pedal position sensor 1. • If both accelerator pedal position sensors 1 and 2 are faulty • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Control is effected using backup value (when accelerator pedal switch is ON: accelerator pedal is not pressed (0%); when the switch is OFF: the pedal is pressed 30%).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

22: Accel Pedal Position (unfiltered), 23: Accel Pedal Position (filtered) 25: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 2 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electrical equipment

#324: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 system

P0227: PTO Accel Pedal Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 61) Generation condition

Voltage of power take-off load sensor remains less than 0.5 V for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Recoverability

System recovers when voltage of power take-off load sensor remains 0.5 V or more for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• When governor control switch is ON • Engine warning lamp (orange) display • Control is effected using backup value (output: 0%).

Service data Inspection

13-36

Electronic control unit connector

34: PTO Accel Position, 35: PTO Accel Sensor Voltage 06

: Power take-off load sensor

Electrical equipment

#317: Power take-off load sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off load sensor system


13 P0228: PTO Accel Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 61) Generation condition

Voltage of power take-off load sensor remains higher than 3.5 V for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Recoverability

System recovers when voltage of power take-off load sensor remains 3.5 V or less for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• When governor control switch is ON • Engine warning lamp (orange) display • Control is effected using backup value (output: 0%).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

34: PTO Accel Position, 35: PTO Accel Sensor Voltage 06

: Power take-off load sensor

Electrical equipment

#317: Power take-off load sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off load sensor system

P0237: Boost Press SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 32) Generation condition

Boost pressure sensor voltage remains less than 0.3 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when boost pressure sensor voltage remains 0.3 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value of 101.3 kPa {1.03 kgf/cm2}. (Output is reduced, and fuel economy worsens.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

26: Boost Pressure

Electrical equipment

#318: Boost pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Boost pressure sensor system

P0238: Boost Press SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 32) Generation condition

Boost pressure sensor voltage remains higher than 4.7 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when boost pressure sensor voltage remains 4.7 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using backup value of 101.3 kPa {1.03 kgf/cm2}. (Output is reduced, and fuel economy worsens.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

26: Boost Pressure

Electrical equipment

#318: Boost pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Boost pressure sensor system

13-37


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0251: Common Rail Pressure Defect (warning lamp flashes: 36) Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) MPROP (rail pressure control valve) power supply remains low for 1 second. (2) The difference between target common rail pressure and actual common rail pressure remains 30% or more for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem (1) • No specific control is effected. • In the case of above problem (2) • Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Other

• Air-bleeding of fuel system (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Inspection of fuel piping (See “COMMON RAIL”.) • Fuel filter (See “FUEL FILTER”.) • Gauze filter (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Supply pump (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Pressure limiting valve (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Injectors (Have work performed by Bosch.)

Inspection

P0253: Common Rail Pressure Defect (warning lamp flashes: 22)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) Common rail pressure sensor voltage remains less than 0.74 V for 30 seconds. (2) The difference between target common rail pressure and actual common rail pressure is 30% or more, and MPROP (rail pressure control valve) discharge rate remains above the specified value for 60 seconds.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers when common rail pressure sensor voltage remains 0.74 V or more for 5 seconds. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers when the difference between target rail pressure and actual rail pressure is 30% or less, or MPROP (rail pressure control valve) discharge rate remains less than the specified value for 5 seconds.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Engine is stopped.

Service data

C0: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Other

• Air-bleeding of fuel system (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Inspection of fuel piping (See “COMMON RAIL”.) • Fuel filter (See “FUEL FILTER”.) • Gauze filter (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Supply pump (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Pressure limiting valve (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Injectors (Have work performed by Bosch.)

Inspection

13-38


13 P0254: Common Rail Pressure Defect (warning lamp flashes: 23)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) Common rail pressure sensor voltage remains 4.4 V or more for 10 seconds when common rail pressure is controlled without feedback value. (2) When above problem (1) is not occurred, common rail pressure sensor voltage remains 2.96 V or more for 10 seconds when common rail pressure is controlled without feedback value. (3) Common rail pressure sensor voltage remains 4.4 V or more for 5 seconds. (4) The difference between target common rail pressure and actual common rail pressure is 30% or more, and MPROP (rail pressure control valve) discharge rate remains above the specified value for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problems (1) and (2) • Engine warning lamp (red) display • Engine is stopped. • In the case of above problems (3) and (4) • Engine warning lamp (orange) display • Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

C0: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Other

Supply pump (Have work performed by Bosch.)

P0335: Engine Revolution SNSR (warning lamp flashes: 15)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) Signals from engine speed sensor are not input while signals from cylinder recognition sensor are recognized. (2) Engine speed recognized by engine speed sensor is higher than 6000 rpm when engine speed is higher than 450 rpm.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers if signals from engine speed sensor are input while signals from cylinder recognition sensor are recognized. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers if engine speed recognized by engine speed sensor is 6000 rpm or less when engine speed is higher than 450 rpm.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected using cylinder recognition sensor. (Output decreases owing to reduced control accuracy.) • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

01: Engine Revolution 07

: Engine speed sensor

Electrical equipment

#263: Engine speed sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Engine speed sensor system

13-39


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0340: Camshaft Position SNSR (warning lamp flashes: 12)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) Phase difference between cylinder recognition sensor and engine speed sensor deviates from the standard value when engine speed is 20 rpm or more. (2) No signal from the cylinder recognition sensor during the 132-pulse inputs of the engine speed sensor signal after recognition of the gap of the engine speed sensor. (3) Abnormal signal (timing) of cylinder recognition sensor signal during the 240pulse inputs of the engine speed sensor signal.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers when phase difference between cylinder recognition sensor and engine speed sensor is within the standard value when engine speed is 20 rpm or more. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers when signals from cylinder recognition sensor are input. • In the case of above problem (3) • System recovers when the signal (timing) of cylinder recognition sensor signal during the 240-pulse inputs of the engine speed sensor signal becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem (1) • Control is effected using engine speed sensor. • In the case of above problems (2) and (3) • Control is effected using engine speed sensor. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

01: Engine Revolution 08

: Cylinder recognition sensor

Electrical equipment

#320: Cylinder recognition sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Cylinder recognition sensor system

P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 25) Generation condition

Vehicle speed remains 2 km/h or less for 20 seconds when engine speed is 1000 rpm or more, clutch pedal is released and transmission neutral signal indicates that transmission is in gear.

Recoverability

System recovers when vehicle speed remains 2 km/h or more for 3 seconds when engine speed is 1000 rpm or more, clutch pedal is released and transmission neutral signal indicates that transmission is in gear.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Auto cruise control is stopped. • Vehicle speed limiting control is stopped. (Engine speed is also limited.)

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

29: Vehicle Speed 09

: Vehicle speed sensor

Electrical equipment

#265: Vehicle speed sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Vehicle speed sensor system

P0506: Idle Volume (warning lamp flashes: 31) Generation condition

Idling speed adjustment potentiometer voltage remains less than 0.7 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when idling speed adjustment potentiometer voltage remains 0.7 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected with auto idle permanently selected. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data Inspection

13-40

Electronic control unit connector

28: Idle Volume Voltage 10

: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electrical equipment

#157: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electric circuit diagram

Idling speed adjustment potentiometer system


13 P0507: Idle Volume (warning lamp flashes: 31) Generation condition

Idling speed adjustment potentiometer voltage remains higher than 4.6 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when idling speed adjustment potentiometer voltage remains 4.6 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Control is effected with auto idle permanently selected. • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data Inspection

28: Idle Volume Voltage

Electronic control unit connector

10

: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electrical equipment

#157: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electric circuit diagram

Idling speed adjustment potentiometer system

P0510: Accel SW (warning lamp flashes: 65) Generation condition

Accelerator pedal switch remains ON for 1 second when accelerator pedal position is higher than 30%.

Recoverability

System recovers if accelerator pedal switch is turned OFF when accelerator pedal position is 30% or lower.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected.

Service data Inspection

73: Accel SW

Electronic control unit connector

11

: Accelerator pedal switch

Electrical equipment

#029: Accelerator pedal switch

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal switch system

P0560: M/V Supply Voltage (warning lamp flashes: 79) Generation condition

Magnetic valve power supply remains low for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

Other

• • • • •

Turbocharger magnetic valve control is stopped. Safety relay control is stopped. Powertard magnetic valve control is stopped. Electronic drive unit relay control is stopped. Following controls are stopped by stopping electronic drive unit relay control. • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Replace engine electronic control unit. (See “6. Registration or Change of the Engine Electronic Control Unit Information”.)

P0600: CAN Communication (warning lamp flashes: –)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. • No controller area network signals from multi function vehicle control unit are received for 1.8 seconds. • Controller area network signal from MVCU indicating “vehicle speed limitation device (SLD) is abnormal” is received.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Engine speed is limited. • Vehicle speed limiting control is stopped.

Electric circuit diagram

Controller area network communication system between engine electronic control unit and multi function vehicle control unit

Other

Check the combination of engine electronic control unit and multi function vehicle control unit

Inspection

13-41


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P0605: ECU System (Hardware) (warning lamp flashes: 33) Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) Power supply circuit or power supply in electronic control unit is abnormal. (2) Devices (analog-digital converter, IC for driving injector or timer IC) in electronic control unit or CPU gate array communication are abnormal.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers if power supply circuit or power supply in electronic control unit becomes normal. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem (1) • Engine warning lamp (orange) display • In the case of above problem (2) • Engine warning lamp (red) display • Engine is stopped.

Inspection

Replace the engine electronic control unit.

Other

P1171: Q Adjustment Resistor (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 34) Generation condition

Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor voltage remains less than 0.2 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when fuel injection rate adjustment resistor voltage remains 0.2 V or more for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (No. 1). (Output is slightly reduced.)

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

33: Q Adjustment Resistor No. 12

: Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

Electrical equipment

#828: Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

Electric circuit diagram

Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor system

P1172: Q Adjustment Resistor (High) (warning lamp flashes: 34) Generation condition

Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor voltage remains higher than 4.8 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when fuel injection rate adjustment resistor voltage remains 4.8 V or less for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (No. 1). (Output is slightly reduced.)

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

33: Q Adjustment Resistor No. 12

: Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

Electrical equipment

#828: Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

Electric circuit diagram

Fuel injection rate adjustment resistor system

P1176: PTO Adjustment Resistor (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 62) Generation condition

Power take-off resistor voltage remains less than 0.2 V for 3 seconds when governor control switch is ON.

Recoverability

System recovers when power take-off resistor voltage remains 0.2 V or more for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (not resistor).

Service data Inspection

13-42

Electronic control unit connector

36: PTO Adjustment Resistor No. 13

: Power take-off resistor

Electrical equipment

#828: Power take-off resistor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off resistor system


13 P1177: PTO Adjustment Resistor (High) (warning lamp flashes: 62) Generation condition

Power take-off resistor voltage remains higher than 4.8 V for 3 seconds when governor control switch is ON.

Recoverability

System recovers when power take-off resistor voltage remains 4.8 V or less for 1 second when governor control switch is ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Control is effected using backup value (not resistor).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

36: PTO Adjustment Resistor No. 13

: Power take-off resistor

Electrical equipment

#828: Power take-off resistor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off resistor system

P1200: Injector Circuit 2 (warning lamp flashes: 82) Generation condition

Injector circuit 2 (No. 4, 5 or 6 cylinder) is short-circuited, open-circuited, or overloaded.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injector magnetic valve (No. 4, 5 or 6 cylinder) control is stopped. (Output is reduced due to three-cylinder operation, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • Turbocharger control is stopped. • Actuator tests “B9: Fuel Leak Check, BB to C0: Injector Test, BA: VGT Test” are stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

BE: Injector Test 4, BF: Injector Test 5 C0: Injector Test 6 05

: Injector magnetic valve

Electrical equipment

#582: Injector magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Injector magnetic valve (No. 4, 5 or 6 cylinder) system

P1251: Common Rail Pressure M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

Current flowing to MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) remains above the specified value for 0.3 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) system

P1253: Common Rail Pressure M/V 2 (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

Current flowing to MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) remains above the specified value for 0.3 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) system

13-43


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P1254: PRV Opening (warning lamp flashes: 36)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions • Common rail pressure is abnormally large. (except forced opening of pressure limiting valve by electronic control unit control) • Pressure limiting valve is faulty. (Limiting valve opens even though the common rail pressure is normal.) • Abnormal common rail pressure due to leakage or clogging of fuel system

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Electronic control unit connector

14

: MPROP (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP (rail pressure control valve) system

Other

• Air-bleeding of fuel system (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Inspection of fuel piping (See “COMMON RAIL”.) • Fuel filter (See “FUEL FILTER”.) • Gauze filter (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Supply pump (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Pressure limiting valve (Have work performed by Bosch.) • Injectors (Have work performed by Bosch.)

Inspection

P1255: Common Rail Pressure M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (low level when turned OFF) as detected for 0.3 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

13-44

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) system


13 P1256: Common Rail Pressure M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 63)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) circuit shorted to battery (high level when turned ON) as detected for 0.3 second. (2) MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) driving voltage remains abnormal for 1 second.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • In the case of above problem (2) • MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) driving voltage remains normal for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem (1) • Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • In the case of above problem (2) • No specific control is effected.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) system

P1258: Common Rail Pressure M/V 2 (warning lamp flashes: 63)

Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. (1) MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) circuit shorted to battery (high level when turned ON) as detected for 0.3 second. (2) MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) driving voltage remains abnormal for 1 second.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON. • In the case of above problem (2) • MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) driving voltage remains normal for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem (1) • Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped. • In the case of above problem (2) • No specific control is effected.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) system

13-45


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P1259: Common Rail Pressure M/V 2 (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (low level when turned OFF) as detected for 0.3 second.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Actuator test Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

B9: Fuel Leak Check 14

: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) system

P125A: Rail Pressure M/V 1 (Over load) (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) driving current value remains higher than 2A for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Electronic control unit connector

14

: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) system

P125B: Rail Pressure M/V 1 (Long Short) (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) circuit remains shorted to ground as detected for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Engine is stopped 50 seconds after the diagnosis code is generated.

Inspection

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Electronic control unit connector

14

: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP1 (rail pressure control valve) system

P125C: Rail Pressure M/V 2 (Over Load) (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) driving current value remains higher than 2A for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

13-46

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Electronic control unit connector

14

: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) system


13 P125D: Rail Pressure M/V 2 (Long Short) (warning lamp flashes: 63) Generation condition

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) circuit remains shorted to ground as detected for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Engine is stopped 50 seconds after the diagnosis code is generated.

Inspection

Service data

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure

Actuator test

B9: Fuel Leak Check

Electronic control unit connector

14

: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electrical equipment

#574: MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve)

Electric circuit diagram

MPROP2 (rail pressure control valve) system

P1335: Revolution & Position Sensor (warning lamp flashes: 14) Generation condition

No signal from engine speed sensor and cylinder recognition sensor while starter switch (S signal) is input for 10.2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when signals are input from engine speed sensor or cylinder recognition sensor.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

01: Engine Revolution 07

: Engine speed sensor,

08

: Cylinder recognition sensor

Electrical equipment

#263: Engine speed sensor, #320: Cylinder recognition sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Engine speed sensor and cylinder recognition sensor systems

P1460: Auxiliary Brake M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 93) Generation condition

Current flowing to Powertard solenoid valve remains above the specified value for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when the current flowing to Powertard solenoid valve remains below the specified value for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Operation of auxiliary brake is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

80: Powertard M/V

Actuator test

AC: Powertard M/V

Electronic control unit connector

15

: Powertard solenoid valve

Electrical equipment

#571: Powertard solenoid valve

Electric circuit diagram

Powertard solenoid valve system

P1462: Auxiliary Brake M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 93) Generation condition

Powertard solenoid valve circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (driving terminal is at low level when turned OFF) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when Powertard solenoid valve circuit remains normal (driving terminal is at high level when turned OFF) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Operation of auxiliary brake is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

80: Powertard M/V

Actuator test

AC: Powertard M/V

Electronic control unit connector

15

: Powertard solenoid valve

Electrical equipment

#571: Powertard solenoid valve

Electric circuit diagram

Powertard solenoid valve system

13-47


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> P1463: Auxiliary Brake M/V 1 (warning lamp flashes: 93) Generation condition

Powertard solenoid valve circuit shorted to battery (driving terminal is at high level when turned ON) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when Powertard solenoid valve circuit remains normal (driving terminal is at low level when turned ON) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Operation of auxiliary brake is stopped. • Auto cruise control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

80: Powertard M/V

Actuator test

AC: Powertard M/V

Electronic control unit connector

15

: Powertard solenoid valve

Electrical equipment

#571: Powertard solenoid valve

Electric circuit diagram

Powertard solenoid valve system

P1562: Sensor Supply Voltage 1 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 1) in electronic control unit remains abnormally low for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 1) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit Service data Electronic control unit connector Inspection

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality. 24: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1, 28: Idle Volume Voltage 03 10

: Accelerator pedal position sensor 1, : Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electrical equipment

#157: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer, #324: Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and idling speed adjustment potentiometer systems

P1563: Sensor Supply Voltage 1 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 1) in electronic control unit remains abnormally high for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 1) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Service data Electronic control unit connector Inspection

24: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1, 28: Idle Volume Voltage 03 10

: Accelerator pedal position sensor 1, : Idling speed adjustment potentiometer

Electrical equipment

#157: Idling speed adjustment potentiometer, #324: Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

Electric circuit diagram

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and idling speed adjustment potentiometer systems

P1567: Sensor Supply Voltage 2 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 2) in electronic control unit remains abnormally low for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 2) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Service data Inspection

13-48

Electronic control unit connector

25: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 2, 26: Boost Pressure 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

Electrical equipment

#318: Boost pressure sensor, #324: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

Electric circuit diagram

Boost pressure sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor 2 systems


13 P1568: Sensor Supply Voltage 2 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 2) in electronic control unit remains abnormally high for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 2) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

25: Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 2, 26: Boost Pressure 03

: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

Electrical equipment

#318: Boost pressure sensor, #324: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

Electric circuit diagram

Boost pressure sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor 2 systems

P1572: Sensor Supply Voltage 3 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 3) in electronic control unit remains abnormally low for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 3) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure, 35: PTO Accel Sensor Voltage 06

: Power take-off load sensor

Electrical equipment

#317: Power take-off load sensor, #319: Common rail pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off load sensor and common rail pressure sensor systems

P1573: Sensor Supply Voltage 3 (warning lamp flashes: 81) Generation condition

Circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 3) in electronic control unit remains abnormally high for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when circuit voltage (sensor supply voltage 3) in electronic control unit becomes normal.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

0C: Difference Common Rail Pressure, 35: PTO Accel Sensor Voltage 06

: Power take-off load sensor

Electrical equipment

#317: Power take-off load sensor, #319: Common rail pressure sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Power take-off load sensor and common rail pressure sensor systems

P1605: ECU System (EEPROM) (warning lamp flashes: 33) Generation condition

Reading or writing error occurs during access.

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected. Failure occurs only to circuit abnormality.

Inspection

Replace engine electronic control unit.

Other

P1606: ECU System (Software) (warning lamp flashes: 33) Generation condition

Diagnosis code is generated under either of the following conditions. • System overload occurs. • Data processing time of engine electronic control unit has exceeded time-out period (0.0655 second).

Recoverability

System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Engine is stopped.

Inspection

Replace engine electronic control unit.

Other

13-49


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data • It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No.

Item

Data

01 Engine Revolution

.rpm

Inspection condition Racing (engine running)

Requirement Engine speed after engine warm-up: 500 ± 25 rpm

02 Reference Injection Quantity

.

%

Engine idling

5 to 20%

Difference Common Rail Pressure

.

%

Engine idling

Fuel injection quantity after engine warm-up: Less than 30%

0C

20 Actual EGR Position 1

.

21 VGT Position

.

%

Accel Pedal Position 22 (unfiltered)

.

%

Accel Pedal Position (filtered)

.

%

23

Accel Pedal Sensor Voltage 1 Accel Pedal Sensor 25 Voltage 2 24

.

V

.

V

See Gr17.

See Gr15.

Accelerator pedal not pressed Accelerator pedal gradually pressed Accelerator pedal fully pressed Accelerator pedal not pressed Accelerator pedal gradually pressed Accelerator pedal fully pressed Accelerator pedal gradually pressed from released position Accelerator pedal gradually pressed from released position Starter switch ON (engine is stopped)

26 Boost Pressure

27

Boost Pressure Sensor Voltage

28 Idle Volume Voltage

.

kPa

.

V

.

V

Value matches speedometer indication.

2A Turbine Revolution

.rpm

See Gr15.

°C

Engine cold

Engine cold .

°C

2F Fuel Temperature (Inlet)

.

°C

30 Atmospheric Pressure

.

kPa

Engine in process of warming up Engine stopped after warming up Engine cold

33 Q Adjustment Resistor No.

35 PTO Accel Sensor Voltage 36 PTO Adjustment Resistor No. 37 Power Supply Voltage

13-50

Engine in process of warming up Engine stopped after warming up Altitude: 0 m Altitude: 600 m

1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/ 11/NON

34 PTO Accel Position

. .

% V

– When power take-off is used (MIN to MAX) When power take-off is used (MIN to MAX)

1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/NON Governor control switch ON .

V

Value matches atmospheric pressure indication.

3 to 1 V

Vehicle in motion

2E Water Temperature

0.85 to 4.15 V

SLOW to FAST

.km/h

.

0.85 to 4.15 V

Accelerator pedal pressed after engine Value gradually increases. has started 1 V <altitude: 0 m> Starter switch ON (engine is stopped) 0.92 V <altitude: 600 m> Accelerator pedal pressed after engine Value gradually increases. has started

29 Vehicle Speed

2B Intake Air Temperature

0% Value gradually increases. 100% 0% Value gradually increases. 100%

Starter switch ON

Value matches ambient temperature indication. Value matches ambient temperature indication. Value gradually increases. Value gradually decreases. Value matches ambient temperature indication. Value gradually increases. Value gradually decreases. 101 kPa 95 kPa Number matches number marked on fuel injection rate adjustment resistor. 0 to 100% 1 to 3.0 V Number matches number marked on power take-off resistor. Value matches battery voltage.


13 No.

Item

71 Starter SW (S)

Data ON/OFF

72 Starter SW (M)

ON/OFF

73 Accel SW

ON/OFF

74 Powertard SW 1

ON/OFF

75 Powertard SW 2

ON/OFF

76 Clutch SW

ON/OFF

77 Neutral SW

ON/OFF

78 Idle Up Cancel SW

ON/OFF

7C PTO SW

ON/OFF

7D Diagnosis SW

ON/OFF

7E Memory Clear SW

ON/OFF

7F Auxiliary Brake SW 1

ON/OFF

80 Powertard M/V

ON/OFF

82 VGT M/V 1 83 VGT M/V 2 84 VGT M/V 3

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

Inspection condition Engine cranked by means of starter switch Starter switch in position except START Starter switch in ON position Starter switch in position except ON Accelerator pedal not pressed Accelerator pedal pressed Powertard switch (1st step): ON Powertard switch (1st step): OFF Powertard switch (2nd step): ON Powertard switch (2nd step): OFF Clutch pedal pressed Clutch pedal not pressed Transmission not in neutral Transmission in neutral Actuator test is performed

85 Auxiliary Brake Indicator Lamp ON/OFF 88 Starter Safety Relay 89 EDU Power Relay

ON/OFF ON/OFF

8A MIL LAMP

ON/OFF

8B Diagnosis Lamp

ON/OFF

Requirement ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON (5 times, for 1.5 sec. each) OFF

Actuator test is not performed [Actuator test] B8: Idle Up Cancel SW Governor control switch ON ON Governor control switch OFF OFF Diagnosis switch OFF ON (with connector connected) Diagnosis switch ON OFF (with connector disconnected) Memory clear switch OFF ON (with connector connected) Memory clear switch ON OFF (with connector disconnected) Operated under following conditions • Accelerator and clutch pedals are ON pressed • Transmission in neutral position Other than above conditions OFF Powertard operating ON Powertard not operating OFF [Actuator test] A6: Powertard M/V See Gr15. See Gr15. See Gr15. Auxiliary brake operating ON Auxiliary brake not operating OFF [Actuator test] AE: Auxiliary Brake Indicator Lamp See Gr54. See Gr17. Starter switch ON (engine not started) ON No error after engine startup OFF [Actuator test] B3: MIL Lamp Starter switch ON (engine not started) ON No error after engine startup OFF [Actuator test] B4: Diagnosis Lamp

– – –

– –

13-51


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 5. Actuator Tests Performed Using Multi-Use Tester •

It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No.

Item

A1

EGR 1

A2

EGR 2

A3

EGR 3

A9

VGT M/V 1

AA

VGT M/V 2

AB

VGT M/V 3

Explanation

Confirmation method

See Gr17.

See Gr15.

Powertard M/V

Repeatedly turn each valve ON and OFF (5 times, for 1.5 sec. each). [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Starter switch: ON • Engine: stopped

Check by the operating sound when Powertard solenoid valve is turned ON/ OFF. [Service data] 80: Powertard M/V

AE

Auxiliary Brake Indicator Lamp

Repeatedly turn Auxiliary brake indicator lamp ON and OFF (5 times, for 1.5 sec. each). [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Starter switch: ON • Engine: stopped

Check that the indicator lamp surely illuminates or goes out as commanded. [Service data] 85: Auxiliary Brake Indicator Lamp

B1

Starter Safety Relay

See Gr54.

B2

EDU Relay

See Gr17.

AC

– –

Repeatedly turn the engine control warning lamp ON and OFF (5 times, for 1.5 sec. each). [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Starter switch: ON • Engine: stopped

ON/OFF condition of warning lamp (orange) [Service data] 8A: MIL LAMP

Idle Up Cancel SW

Repeatedly turn idle up cancel switch ON and OFF (5 times, for 1.5 sec. each). [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Transmission: Neutral

Check that the engine idling speed remains at low idling. [Service data] 78: Idle Up Cancel SW

B9

Fuel Leak Check

Increase rail pressure for a certain period of time [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Transmission: Neutral • Engine: idling

Check that no fuel leaks from fuel system (pipe and hose).

BA

VGT Test

See Gr15.

BB

Injector Test 1

BC

Injector Test 2

BD

Injector Test 3

Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 3 cylinder stops operating.

BE

Injector Test 4

Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 4 cylinder stops operating.

BF

Injector Test 5

Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 5 cylinder stops operating.

C0

Injector Test 6

Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 6 cylinder stops operating.

B3

B4

B8

13-52

MIL LAMP

Diagnosis Lamp

Selected injector magnetic valve forcibly deactivated [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Engine speed: Below 1500 rpm • Transmission: Neutral • No active diagnosis code generated

ON/OFF condition of warning lamp (red) [Service data] 8B: Diagnosis Lamp

– Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 1 cylinder stops operating. Check that injector magnetic valve for No. 2 cylinder stops operating.


13 M E M O

13-53


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 6. Inspections Performed at Electronic Control Unit Connectors • These inspections aid troubleshooting by enabling you to check whether electronic control unit signals are being correctly transmitted via the vehicle harness and connectors. The white-on-black numbers ( 01 , 02 , and so on) correspond to the similarly printed reference numbers in section “3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes”.

6.1 Electronic control unit connector terminal layout

6.2 Inspection instructions • Some inspections are performed with the connectors removed. Others are performed with the connectors fitted. Observe the following caution:

CAUTION • Do not touch any terminal except those specified for the inspection. Be particularly careful not to cause short circuits between terminals using the tester probes.

Check item 01 Resistance of intake air temperature sensor 1

Measurement method [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A63-A32 • 0°C: 15 +3.78 –2.94 kΩ • 20°C: 6.514 +1.437 –1.147 kΩ • 80°C: 0.874 +0.136 –0.115 kΩ

13-54


13 Check item 02 Resistance of water temperature sensor

03 Output voltage of accelerator pedal position sensor

04 Resistance of fuel temperature sensor

05 Resistance of injector magnetic valve

06 Output voltage of Power take-off load sensor

07 Resistance of engine speed sensor

08 Resistance of cylinder recognition sensor

09 Output voltage of vehicle speed sensor

Measurement method [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A40-A41 • 20°C: 2.45 ± 0.14 kΩ • 80°C: 0.32 kΩ (reference value) • 110°C: 147.1 ± 2 kΩ [Conditions] • Starter switch ON • Vehicle-side harness connected (Perform inspection on back of connector.) [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): B34-B33 (accelerator pedal position sensor 1) B46-B45 (accelerator pedal position sensor 2) • With accelerator pedal not pressed: 0.85 ± 0.1 V • With accelerator pedal pressed: 4.15 ± 0.1 V [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A89-A65 • 20°C: 2.5 ± 0.25 kΩ • 80°C: 0.32 ± 0.02 kΩ • 110°C: 0.144 ± 0.01 kΩ [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A72-A23 (injector magnetic valve: No. 1 cylinder) A70-A22 (injector magnetic valve: No. 2 cylinder) A71-A46 (injector magnetic valve: No. 3 cylinder) A94-A47 (injector magnetic valve: No. 4 cylinder) A96-A24 (injector magnetic valve: No. 5 cylinder) A95-A48 (injector magnetic valve: No. 6 cylinder) • 0.21 to 0.295 Ω [Conditions] • Starter switch ON • Vehicle-side harness connected (Perform inspection on back of connector.) [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): A15-A16 • Idling: 0.85 ± 0.1 V • Full-load: 3.0 ± 0.1 V [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A10-A9 • 2.2 ± 0.2 Ω (25°C) [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A59-A83 • 860 ± 86 Ω [Conditions] • Starter switch ON • Vehicle-side harness connected (Perform inspection on back of connector.) • Turn wheels slowly using chassis dynamometer. [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): A67-chassis ground • High pulse voltage: 8 ± 1 V • Low pulse voltage: 0.5 V or lower

13-55


TROUBLESHOOTING <DIAGNOSIS USING Multi-Use Tester> 10 Output voltage of idling speed adjustment potentiometer

11 Operating voltage of accelerator pedal switch

12 Resistance of fuel injection rate adjustment resistor

13 Resistance of Power take-off resistor

14 Resistance of MPROP (rail pressure control valve)

[Conditions] • Starter switch ON • Vehicle-side harness connected (Perform inspection on back of connector.) [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): A12-A36 • AUTO position: 4.0 ± 0.1 V • SLOW position: 3.0 ± 0.2 V • FAST position: 1.0 ± 0.1 V [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): A20-chassis ground • With accelerator pedal pressed: There is no continuity. • With accelerator pedal not pressed: There is continuity. [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A35-A88 • No. 1 resistor: 270 ± 13.5 Ω • No. 2 resistor: 510 ± 25.5 Ω • No. 3 resistor: 820 ± 41 Ω • No. 4 resistor: 1300 ± 65 Ω • No. 5 resistor: 2000 ± 100 Ω • No. 6 resistor: 3300 ± 165 Ω • No. 7 resistor: 5600 ± 280 Ω • No. 8 resistor: 15000 ± 750 Ω • No. 9 resistor: 390 ± 19.5 Ω • No. 10 resistor: 4300 ± 215 Ω • No. 11 resistor: 9100 ± 455 Ω [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A43-A19 • No. 1 resistor: 270 ± 13.5 Ω • No. 2 resistor: 510 ± 25.5 Ω • No. 3 resistor: 820 ± 41 Ω • No. 4 resistor: 1300 ± 65 Ω • No. 5 resistor: 2000 ± 100 Ω • No. 6 resistor: 3300 ± 165 Ω • No. 7 resistor: 5600 ± 280 Ω • No. 8 resistor: 15000 ± 750 Ω [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: • A69-A21, A69-A2, A3-A21, A3-A2 (MPROP1) • A27-A4, A27-B38, B52-A4, B52-B38 (MPROP2) • 2.6 to 3.15 Ω

15 Voltage of Powertard solenoid valve

[Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A74-A5 • 32.6 to 39.8 Ω (engine oil temperature: 25°C)

16 Resistance of controller area network resistor

[Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: B11-B12, B5-B6 • 120 ± 6 Ω

13-56


13 M E M O

13-57


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Inspecting No-load Minimum and Maximum Speeds Service standards Location

Maintenance item

No-load minimum speed (idling speed)

No-load maximum speed

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

450 to 500 rpm

Inspect

2330 to 2370 rpm

Inspect

1.1 Work before inspection • Before starting the inspection and adjustment, carry out the following preparatory steps. • Put the transmission in neutral. • Turn the steering wheel in neutral position. • Turn off all lamps and accessories. • Attach a Multi-Use Tester. • Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature is approximately 80 to 95°C. (Verify from Service Data “2E: Water Temperature”)

1.2 No-load minimum speed [Inspection] • With the accelerator pedal released, measure the engine speed. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, check for an installed condition of the accelerator control cable and accelerator link. (See “ENGINE CONTROL”.) • If the cable and link are found to be normal, check for the accelerator pedal switch*a, accelerator pedal position sensor*a, supply pump*b and engine electronic control unit*b. (*a: See “ENGINE CONTROL”, *b: Contact Bosch Service Station for repair.)

1.3 No-load maximum speed [Inspection] • Measure the engine speed with the accelerator pedal pressed against the stopper bolt. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, check for an installed condition of the accelerator control cable and accelerator link. (See “ENGINE CONTROL”.) • If the cable and link are found to be normal, check for the accelerator pedal switch*a, accelerator pedal position sensor*a, supply pump*b and engine electronic control unit*b. (*a: See “ENGINE CONTROL”, *b: Contact Bosch Service Station for repair.) [Adjustment] • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, adjust the stopper bolt to change the accelerator pedal travel until the optimum engine speed is reached with the pedal pressed. • If it cannot be adjusted within the standard value by using the stopper bolt, check for an installed condition of the accelerator control cable and accelerator link. (See “ENGINE CONTROL”.) • If the cable and link are found to be normal, check for the accelerator pedal switch*a, accelerator pedal position sensor*a, supply pump*b and engine electronic control unit*b. (*a: See “ENGINE CONTROL”, *b: Contact Bosch Service Station for repair.) • After the adjustment, make sure that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly by firmly pressing the pedal 10 to 15 times until it contacts the stopper bolt.

13-58


13 • If it does not move smoothly, check for an installed condition of the accelerator control cable and accelerator link. (See “ENGINE CONTROL”.)

2. Inspection of Fuel Leakage • Check if there is no fuel leakage from the fuel tank, fuel filter, supply pump, common rail, injector and fuel piping. If there is a fuel leakage, replace the pipe or hose and tighten to the specified torque. If fuel leaks from joint, retighten the bolts, nuts and clamps to the specified torque. (See later section.)

3. Inspection of Injection Pipe and Fuel Pipe Mounting Clamp Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened Bolt or nut (clamp mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

17.6 to 21.6 {1.8 to 2.2}

• Visually check the clamp appearance and make sure there is no cracks or damages at the rubber part of the clamps. • If there is any abnormality, replace the clamp. • Check for looseness in the clamp mounting bolt or nuts. If there is looseness, tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque.

4. Draining of Deposit in Fuel Tank DANGER • Do not allow any flames or sources of heat near the fuel tank, as it may explode.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel, otherwise it may catch fire.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened Drain plug

Tightening torque

Remarks

127 {13}

Sealant

Lubricant and/or sealant Location –

Points of application Seat surface of drain plug

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Seal end No. 22

As required

[Removal] • Drain the deposit in the fuel tank by removing the drain plug, gasket and strainer from the fuel tank. [Installation] • Install the strainer and gasket to the fuel tank. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque.

13-59


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 5. Air-bleeding of Fuel System Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened Plug

Tightening torque

Remarks

9.8 ± 2.0 {1.0 ± 0.2}

• Loosen one of the plugs on the fuel filter. • Turn the knob of the manually operated pump counterclockwise. When the knob jumps out, push the knob to feed fuel. • Continue pumping until fuel with no bubbles of air comes out of the plug. • With no air bubbles coming out with fuel, tighten the plug to the specified torque. • Continue operating the pump until there is strong pumping resistance.

• While pushing the knob of the manually operated pump, screw it in to the right to fix. • Wipe up all spilled fuel, then start the engine. • Check that no fuel leakage occurs.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Be sure to wipe up all spilled fuel. Unless it is wiped up, it could catch fire.

13-60


13 6. Fuel Filter Replacement Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain plug

2 ± 0.5 {0.2 ± 0.05}

Case

18 to 20 {1.8 to 2.0}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark –

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Filter wrench

MH063201

Application

Removal and installation of case

[Removal] • Drain fuel from the case by loosening the drain plug. • Using , remove the case.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel. Otherwise, it may catch fire.

CAUTION • Be careful not to damage the case. [Installation] • Clean the surface of the fuel filter head and case where the Oring is to be mounted.

13-61


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT • Replace the filter element and O-rings with new parts. • Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-rings. Install the O-rings onto the case.

CAUTION • The use of non-genuine filter elements will lead to engine problems. Be sure to use only genuine parts. • To help prevent fuel injection problems, keep the fuel filter and hoses free from contamination.

• Install a torque wrench to and tighten the case to the specified torque. • Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. With the plug correctly installed, bleed air from the fuel system. • Start the engine and ensure that there is no fuel leakage. • If there is fuel leakage, remove and install the fuel filter correctly.

7. Cleaning of Gauze Filter Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark –

Parts to be tightened Eyebolt

• • • • • •

Tightening torque

Remarks

25 to 29 {2.5 to 3.0}

Remove the eyebolt in the middle of fuel piping. Pull out the gauze filter from the removed eyebolt. Wash the gauze filter with light oil. After washing, install the gauze filter in the reverse order. Bleed air from the fuel system. Start the engine and check for fuel leakage.

WARNING • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel, otherwise it may catch fire. • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat.

13-62


13 8. Water Separator Element Replacement Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

1.47 ± 0.3 {0.15 ± 0.03}

Drain plug

Cover

19.6 ± 2.5 {2.0 ± 0.3}

Plug A

12.3 ± 2.5 {1.25 ± 0.3}

Plug B

17.2 ± 2.5 {1.75 ± 0.3}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark –

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Filter wrench

MH063201

Application

Removal and installation of cover

[Removal] • Loosen plugs A and B and then loosen the drain plug. Next, discharge fuel from the water separator. • Using , remove the cover.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel. Otherwise, it may catch fire.

CAUTION • Use care not to damage the cover.

13-63


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT [Installation] • Clean the surface of the water separator body, against which Oring abuts, and the O-ring groove in the cover.

• Replace the filter element and O-ring with new parts. • Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-ring. Install the O-ring onto the case.

CAUTION • The use of non-genuine filter elements will lead to engine problems. Be sure to use only genuine parts. • To help prevent fuel injection problems, keep the water separator and fuel hoses free from contamination.

• Install torque wrench to and tighten the case to the specified torque. • Tighten the drain plug and plugs A, B to the specified torque. With the plug correctly installed, bleed air from the fuel system. • Start the engine and ensure that there is no fuel leakage. • If there is fuel leakage, remove and install the water separator correctly.

13-64


MITSUBISHI 6M70 COMMON RAIL

13 Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5

Eyebolt Fuel return pipe Fuel pipe Injection pipe Common rail

*a:

Crankcase : Non-reusable parts : Locating pin

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Do not handle it near flames or heat. • Spilled fuel may catch fire and therefore, must be wiped off completely.

CAUTION • Any contamination of the common rail, even if it is minor, will greatly affect the performance of the engine. After removing pipes or other parts, plug the openings with covers. Wash eyebolts and gaskets in light oil and keep them away from contaminants. • Contact Bosch Service Station for any service needs of the common rail.

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Fuel pipe Injection pipe Bolt (common rail mounting) Eyebolt (fuel return pipe mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

29 to 34 {3.0 to 3.5}

54 {5.5}

30 to 35 {3.1 to 3.6}

Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Fuel pipe and injection pipe • Ensure that the pipe and mounting surfaces of the connector are flat and free from damage. • Bring the pipe into intimate contact with mounting surfaces of the connector evenly, and temporarily tighten it without applying an excessive force. • Tighten it to the specified torque after temporary tightening.

13-65


MITSUBISHI 6M70 FUEL SUPPLY PUMP

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

Fuel pipe Eyebolt Fuel suction pipe Eyebolt Fuel feed pipe Eyebolt

7 8 9 10 11 12

Fuel feed pipe Over flow valve Fuel return pipe Eyebolt Oil pipe Supply pump

13 O-ring a: *b: *

Flywheel housing Rear plate : Non-reusable parts

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Do not handle it near flames or heat. • Spilled fuel may catch fire and therefore, must be wiped off completely.

CAUTION • Any contamination of the supply pump, even if it is minor, will greatly affect the performance of the engine. After removing pipes, hoses, or other parts, plug the openings with covers. Wash eyebolts and new gaskets in light oil and keep them away from contaminants. • Contact Bosch Service Station for any service needs of the supply pump.

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • Make sure that the harness (marked with “ ”) of MPROP (rail pressure control valve) is connected to the supply pump before starting the engine. Starting the engine without connection causes a malfunction.

13-66


13 Service standards Location 8

Maintenance item Overflow valve

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0.23 ± 0.07 MPa {2.3 ± 0.7 kgf/cm2}

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

54 {5.5}

25 to 29 {2.6 to 3.0}

Bolt (supply pump mounting) Eyebolt (fuel suction pipe mounting) Eyebolt (fuel feed pipe mounting) Eyebolt (oil pipe mounting)

21 {2.1}

Overflow valve mounting

30 to 40 {3.1 to 4.1}

Fuel pipe

29 to 35 {3.0 to 3.6}

125 {12.7}

Bolt (supply pump mounting)

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Application

Timing bolt A φ10

ME350296

Installation of supply pump

ME355665

Removal and installation of fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe

Open end spanner A 15

B 24

Removal procedure Removal: Fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe • Apply (width across flats: 24 mm) to the connector of the supply pump as a stopper, and then loosen the eyebolt to remove the fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe.

CAUTION • Do not use except for a stopper of the fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe, otherwise the open end section may be broken.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-67


SUPPLY PUMP Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Fuel Supply pump • Position the No. 1 piston to the top dead center in the compression stroke in the following manner. • Crank the engine to align the pointer with the “1 6” mark on the flywheel. • This will bring either the No. 1 piston or the No. 6 piston to the top dead center in the compression stroke. If both the inlet and exhaust rockers can be moved by hand by the amount of valve clearance, that cylinder is at the top dead center in the compression stroke. From that position, every turn of the crankshaft will alternately bring the No.1 and No. 6 pistons to the top dead center in the compression stroke. (See Gr11.) • Install the supply pump while ensuring that the stamped line on the supply pump gear is aligned with the stamped line on rear plate.

• Insert into the timing checking hole of the flywheel housing. • If the seat surface of is securely fitted, the timing is aligned. If the seat surface lifts, the gears are not properly engaged. Reinstall the supply pump.

CAUTION • Remember to remove

after it is used.

• Install bolt A from the supply pump side and bolt B from the flywheel housing side.

Installation: Fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe • Apply (width across flats: 24 mm) to the connector of the supply pump as a stopper, and then tighten the eyebolt to install the fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe.

CAUTION • Do not use except for a stopper of the fuel suction pipe and fuel feed pipe, otherwise the open end section may be broken.

13-68


13 Installation: Fuel pipe • Ensure that the pipe and mounting surfaces of the connector are flat and free from damage. • Bring the pipe into intimate contact with mounting surfaces of the connector evenly, and temporarily tighten it without applying an excessive force. • Tighten it to the specified torque after temporary tightening.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-69


MITSUBISHI 6M70 INJECTOR Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Injection pipe Injection pipe seal Nozzle bridge O-ring Injector O-ring O-ring Nozzle tip gasket Eyebolt Fuel return pipe Fuel return pipe

: Non-reusable parts

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Do not handle it near flames or heat. • Spilled fuel may catch fire and therefore, must be wiped off completely.

CAUTION • The harnesses and connectors between the injectors and common rail electronic control unit are under high voltage. Be careful not to receive an electric shock. Before attempting to remove the injectors, turn the starter switch to the LOCK position. • Carefully handle the injector, taking care not to damage the threaded portion and nozzle as high pressure is applied to the injector. • To eliminate fuel injection and other problems, protect the injectors and pipes, that have been removed, from the ingress of contaminants. • Contact Bosch Service Station for any service needs of the injector.

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • Do not attempt to clean the nozzle hole with a wire brush or other similar tools, or the hole can be damaged. • Be sure to tighten the nozzle bridge bolts to the specified torque. Overtightening the bolts can deform the injectors, resulting in incorrect fuel injection.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Bolt (nozzle bridge mounting) Mitsubishi 6M70 Injection pipe

Tightening torque 54 nm {5.5 kgfm} 40 Ft Lbs

29 to 34 {3.0 to 3.5}

40 {4}

Eyebolt (fuel return pipe mounting)

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638 13-70

Remarks


13 Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Application

Injector extractor adapter

ME165088

Removing injector (use with MH061071)

Nozzle extractor A

MH061071

Removing injector

ME355665

Removal and installation of injection pipe

M8 × 1.25

Open end spanner A B 15 24

Removal procedure Removal: Mitsubishi 6M70 Injection pipe (width across flats: 15 mm) to the connector of the • Apply injector as a stopper, and then loosen the union nut to remove the injection pipe.

CAUTION • Do not use except for a stopper of the injection pipe, otherwise the open end section may be broken.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

13-71


INJECTOR Removal: Mitsubishi 6M70 Injector • Tighten the nut so that a hook of can be hung on section A of the injector. • Attach to and remove the injector.

Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Injection pipe (width across flats: 24 mm) to the connector of the • Apply injector as a stopper.

CAUTION • Do not use except for a stopper of the injection pipe, otherwise the open end section may be broken.

• Ensure that the pipe and mounting surfaces of the connector are flat and free from damage. • Bring the pipe into intimate contact with mounting surfaces of the connector evenly, and temporarily tighten it without applying an excessive force. • Tighten it to the specified torque after temporary tightening.

13-72


13 M E M O

13-73


FUEL TANK

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5

Drain plug Strainer Connecting plug Suction hose Return hose

6 Fuel level sensor 7 Fuel tank strap 8 Fuel tank strap <Except FV51> 9 Fuel tank strap

10 Fuel tank 11 Fuel tank bracket 12 Fuel tank bracket <Except FV51> 13 Fuel tank bracket

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

DANGER • Do not allow any flames or sources of heat near the fuel tank, as it may explode.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel, otherwise it may catch fire.

13-74


13 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain plug

Parts to be tightened

127 {13}

Connecting plug

20 {2.0}

11.7 to 12.7 {1.2 to 1.3}

54 to 72 {5.5 to 7.3}

Wet

Nut (fuel tank strap mounting) Bolt (fuel tank bracket mounting) Bolt (fuel tank bracket mounting)

FV51

54 to 72 {5.5 to 7.3}

Except FV51

150 to 204 {15 to 21}

Wet

Lubricant and/or sealant Location

Points of application Seat surface of drain plug Contact area between fuel tank strap and fuel tank Thread area of bolt

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Seal end No. 22

As required

Soapy water

As required

Engine oil

As required

13-75


FUEL FILTER Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Cap Fuel return pipe Overflow valve Fuel feed pipe Eyebolt Fuel feed pipe Plug Drain plug O-ring Case Float O-ring Element Fuel filter head

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel. Otherwise, it may catch fire.

CAUTION • Be careful not to damage the case.

Service standards Location 3

Maintenance item Overflow valve

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

1.14 ± 0.03 MPa {12 ± 0.3 kgf/cm2}

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

30 {3.0}

Drain plug

2 ± 0.5 {0.2 ± 0.05}

Case

18 to 20 {1.8 to 2.0}

Plug

9.8 ± 2.0 {1.0 ± 0.2}

20 to 29 {2.0 to 3.0}

Eyebolt

Overflow valve Cap

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring

13-76

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required


13 Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Filter wrench

MH063201

Application

Removal and installation of case

Removal procedure Removal: Case • Drain fuel from the case by loosening the drain plug. • Using , remove the case.

Installation procedure Installation: Case • Clean the surface of the fuel filter head and case where the Oring is to be mounted.

13-77


FUEL FILTER • Replace the filter element and O-rings with new parts. • Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-rings. Install the O-rings onto the case.

CAUTION • The use of non-genuine filter elements will lead to engine problems. Be sure to use only genuine parts. • To help prevent fuel injection problems, keep the fuel filter and hoses free from contamination.

• Install a torque wrench to and tighten the case to the specified torque. • Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. With the plug correctly installed, bleed air from the fuel system. • Start the engine and check that there is no fuel leakage. • If there is fuel leakage, remove and install the fuel filter correctly.

13-78


13 M E M O

13-79


WATER SEPARATOR Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Fuel hose Fuel cut valve Connector Plug A O-ring Plug B O-ring Drain plug O-ring Cover O-ring Float Element Body

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

WARNING • Fuel is highly flammable. Keep it away from flames and sources of heat. • Thoroughly wipe up any spilled fuel. Otherwise, it may catch fire.

CAUTION • Be careful not to damage the case.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

35 {3.6}

Plug A

12.3 ± 2.5 {1.3 ± 0.3}

Plug B

17.2 ± 2.5 {1.8 ± 0.3}

Drain plug

1.47 ± 0.3 {0.15 ± 0.03}

Cover

19.6 ± 2.5 {2.0 ± 0.25}

40 {4.0}

Fuel cut valve

Connector

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Filter wrench

13-80

Part No.

MH063201

Application

Removal and installation of cover


13 Removal procedure Removal: Cover • Loosen plugs A and B and then loosen the drain plug. Next, discharge fuel from the water separator. • Using , remove the cover.

WARNING • Do not bring an open flame or heat near to fuel, which can catch fire easily. • Thoroughly wipe the surface clean of spilled fuel that could otherwise lead to a fire.

CAUTION • Use care not to damage the cover.

Installation procedure Installation: Cover • Clean the surface of the water separator body, against which Oring abuts, and the O-ring groove in the cover.

• Replace the filter element and O-ring with new parts. • Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-ring. Install the O-ring onto the case.

CAUTION • The use of non-genuine filter elements will lead to engine problems. Be sure to use only genuine parts. • To help prevent fuel injection problems, keep the water separator and fuel hoses free from contamination.

13-81


WATER SEPARATOR • Install torque wrench to and tighten the case to the specified torque. • Tighten the drain plug and plugs A, B to the specified torque. With the plug correctly installed, bleed air from the fuel system. • Start the engine and ensure that there is no fuel leakage. • If there is fuel leakage, remove and install the water separator correctly.

13-82


13 M E M O

13-83


ENGINE CONTROL

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5

Cover Accelerator pedal control cable Accelerator pedal pin Accelerator pedal Stopper bolt

6 Accelerator pedal bracket 7 Accelerator link (See later section.) 8 Accelerator pedal position sensor : Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse. • After the installation, check the no-load minimum speed and no-load maximum speed for normal state and adjust them if required. (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT”.) • Make sure that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly.

Installation procedure Installation: Accelerator pedal control cable • Connect the accelerator pedal control cable to the accelerator link.

13-84


13 • Install the other end of the accelerator pedal control cable onto the accelerator position sensor control lever.

• Adjust tension of the accelerator pedal control cable with the accelerator link stopper bolt so that accelerator link B contacts the stopper.

• Press the accelerator pedal until the control lever of the accelerator pedal position sensor contacts the full load stopper bolt. • Adjust the stopper bolt so that clearance between the accelerator pedal and stopper bolt is to the dimension shown in the illustration.

13-85


ENGINE CONTROL Accelerator Link

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Accelerator pedal switch Bushing Accelerator link A Bushing Accelerator link B Collar Return spring Bushing Accelerator link bracket

: Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Sliding surfaces of bushing and accelerator link bracket Sliding surfaces of collar and return spring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Chassis grease [NLGI No. 1 (Li soap)]

As required

Installation procedure Installation: Accelerator pedal switch • Place accelerator link B against the stopper. • Place the push rod of the accelerator pedal switch against accelerator link B and install the accelerator pedal switch so that the stroke of the push rod is to the dimension shown in the illustration.

13-86


13 M E M O

13-87


INSPECTION OF MITSUBISHI 6M70 ELECTRICAL PARTS #001 Inspection of combination switch DD15B connector connection table Switch position Powertard switch

Terminals with continuity

OFF

1st step

6 – 11

2nd step

6 – 11, 3 – 9

• For other inspections than shown above, see Gr54. • If there is any abnormality, replace the switch.

#029 Inspection of accelerator pedal switch Switch position

Terminals with continuity

OFF

ON

1–2

• If there is any abnormality, replace the switch.

#031 Inspection of clutch switch Switch position

Terminals with continuity

OFF

ON

1–2

• If there is any abnormality, replace the switch.

#157 Inspection of idling speed adjustment potentiometer • Apply 5 volts DC to terminals 1 and 2 of the idling speed adjustment potentiometer. • Turn the knob fully counterclockwise. Then, measure the output voltage across terminals 2 and 3 (see the diagrams on the left) while slowly turning the knob clockwise.

Standard value

Knob position

Output voltage

AUTO (0°)

4.0 ± 0.1 V

SLOW (30°)

3.0 ± 0.2 V

FAST (300°)

1.0 ± 0.1 V

• If any measurement is out of specification, replace the idling speed adjustment potentiometer.

13-88


13 #201 Inspection of relay (normally open 5-pin) • Check continuity and operating condition of the relay. Replace the relay if necessary.

#262 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 water temperature sensor • Place the water temperature sensor in a container filled with engine oil. • Heat the oil to each of the specified temperatures. Stir the oil well while doing so. • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value

20°C

2.45 ± 0.14 kΩ

80°C

0.32 kΩ (reference value)

110°C

147.1 ± 2 Ω

• If either measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor. #263 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 engine speed sensor • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value (at 25°C)

2.2 ± 0.2 kΩ

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor.

CAUTION • The signal may not output if the sensor tightening torque is insufficient. Check if the sensor is tightened with the correct tightening torque. (See Gr11.)

#265 Inspection of vehicle speed sensor • With the 24 volts DC applied to terminals 1 and 2, slowly turn the shaft of the vehicle speed sensor. • Measure the maximum voltage (high pulse voltage) and minimum voltage (low pulse voltage) occurring at each specified pair of terminals. Standard value

Low pulse voltage

0.5 V or lower

High pulse voltage

8±1V

• If any measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor.

13-89


INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT #305 Inspection of Misubishi 6M70 intake air temperature sensor • The intake air temperature sensor 1 may output false signals if its tip is contaminated. Clean it if necessary. (See Gr15.) • Place the sensor in a container filled with engine oil. • Heat the oil to each of the specified temperatures. Stir the oil well while doing so. • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value

0°C

15 +3.78 –2.94 kΩ

20°C

6.514 +1.437 –1.147 kΩ

80°C

0.874 +0.136 –0.115 kΩ

• If either measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor. #317 Inspection of power take-off load sensor • Apply 5 volts DC to terminals 4 and 6. • Measure the output voltage across terminals 5 and 6 with the lever at idling position A and at full-load position B. Standard value

Lever position

Output voltage

Idling position A

0.85 ± 0.1 V

Full-load position B

3.0 ± 0.1 V

• If measurement of full-load position B deviates from standard value, adjust with full load stopper bolt. • If measurement of idling position A deviates from standard value, replace the sensor.

#318 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 boost pressure sensor • Apply 5 volts DC to terminals 3 and 1. • Apply air pressure. Gradually increase it and, while doing so, measure the output voltage occurring at terminals 2 and 1. Standard value

Air pressure (gauge pressure)

Voltage

99 kPa {1.0 kg/cm2}

Approx. 2.5 V

232.2 kPa {2.3 kg/cm2}

Approx. 4.5 V

• If any measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor.

#319 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 common rail pressure sensor • The sensor cannot easily be inspected in isolation, so you must evaluate it indirectly by inspection of system harnesses and related parts. • If there is no abnormality in any related part but the system is abnormal, replace the common rail.

13-90


13 #320 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 cylinder recognition sensor • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. 860 ± 86 Ω

Standard value

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor.

#323 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 fuel temperature sensor • Place the fuel temperature sensor in a container filled with engine oil. • Heat the oil to each of the specified temperatures. Stir the oil well while doing so. • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value

20°C

2.5 ± 0.25 kΩ

80°C

0.32 ± 0.02 kΩ

110°C

0.144 ± 0.01 kΩ

• If any measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor. #324 Inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor • Apply 5 volts DC to terminals 4 and 6 and terminals 1 and 3 of the accelerator pedal position sensor connector. • Measure the output voltage at terminals 5 and 6 (sensor 1) and the output voltage at terminals 2 and 3 (sensor 2) with the lever in each specified position. Lever position Standard value

Output voltage

Idling position A

0.85 ± 0.1 V

Full load position B

4.15 ± 0.1 V

A: Position in which accelerator pedal switch is fully pushed in by lever B: Position in which lever is touching stopper bolt • If any output voltage is out of specification, make an adjustment. • If any output voltage is still out of specification when you have made an adjustment, replace the sensor.

#571 Inspection of Powertard solenoid valve • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value

Engine oil temperature: 25°C

32.6 to 39.8 Ω

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the Powertard solenoid valve.

13-91


INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT #574 Inspection of MPROP (rail pressure control valve) • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Identify MPROP1 and 2 by “M/P-1” and “M/P-2” labeled on the harness. Standard value (at 20°C)

2.6 to 3.15 Ω

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the supply pump.

#582 Inspection of Mitsubishi 6M70 injector magnetic valve • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. 0.21 to 0.295 Ω

Standard value (at 20 to 70°C)

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the injector.

#828 Inspection of fuel injection rate adjustment resistor • Measure the resistance of the resistor number marked on the fuel injection rate adjustment resistor.

Standard value (at 20°C)

Resistor No.

1

270 ± 13.5 Ω

2

510 ± 25.5 Ω

3

820 ± 41 Ω

4

1300 ± 65 Ω

5

2000 ± 100 Ω

6

3300 ± 165 Ω

7

5600 ± 280 Ω

8

15000 ± 750 Ω

9

390 ± 19.5 Ω

10

4300 ± 215 Ω

11

9100 ± 455 Ω

• If the measurement is out of specification, replace the fuel injection rate adjustment resistor with one that has the same resistor number and same specified resistance.

CAUTION • The fuel injection rate adjustment resistor is matched to the engine. If you replace it, be sure to replace it with one that has the same resistor number.

13-92


13 M E M O

13-93


INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF PARTS

13-94


13

13-95


INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF PARTS

13-96


13

13-97


INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF PARTS

13-98


13

13-99


MITSUBISHI 6M70 INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF PARTS

13-100


13

13-101


ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

13-102


13

13-103


ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

13-104


13

13-105


ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

13-106


GROUP 14 COOLING SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 14-2 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Cooling System (Flow of Coolant) ................................................... 14-3 2. Thermostat ......................................................................................... 14-4 3. Water Pump ........................................................................................ 14-4

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................... 14-5 ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Inspection and Adjustment of Belt Tension ................................. 14-6 2. Inspection of Belts ....................................................................... 14-8 3. Coolant Replacement and Cleaning of Cooling System ................ 14-9 4. Air Bleeding of Cooling System ..................................................... 14-11 5. Gas Leakage Test ............................................................................ 14-11 6. Coolant Leakage Test....................................................................... 14-11 DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES .................................................................. 14-12 RADIATOR AND FAN SHROUD ..................................................... 14-16 SURGE TANK .................................................................................. 14-24 COOLING FAN AND BELT............................................................... 14-26 WATER PUMP................................................................................... 14-28 THERMOSTAT .................................................................................. 14-34

14-1


SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Cooling system

Forced water circulation system

Water pump

Belt-driven type

Thermostat

Wax pellet, bottom bypass type (with jiggle valve)

Automatic cooling fan coupling

Continuous control type

Radiator Coolant capacity

14-2

Tube and corrugated fin type dm3 {L}

41 {41}


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION

14

1. Mitsubishi 6M70 Cooling System (Flow of Coolant)

14-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 2. Mitsubishi 6M70 Thermostat • The thermostat is a bottom bypass type that uses a wax-filled pellet as its flow-regulating element. When the wax is heated, it melts from solid to liquid, changing its total volume. This allows the valve to open or close in accordance with the coolant temperature, regulating and adjusting the flow of coolant to the radiator and to the water pump (bypassing the radiator).

3. Mitsubishi 6M70 Water Pump • The water pump has a drain hole to prevent coolant from entering the unit bearing in case of a defect in the unit seal.

14-4


14

TROUBLESHOOTING

Loose or damaged Belt

Water pump

Thermostat

O

Automatic cooling fan coupling

Oil cooler Cylinder head

Oil on belt

O

Incorrectly mounted water pump

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

Defective bearing unit

O

Defective impeller

O

O

Defective unit seal

O

Fit of bearing unit on flange and impeller too loose

O

Incorrectly mounted case

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

Valve opening temperature too high (valve remains closed)

O

O O

O

Leakage from coolant temperature sensor

O

Clogged core

O

Cracked core and/or separation in welds

O

Defective bearing

O

O O O

Damaged bimetal

O

Contaminated bimetal

O

Silicon oil leakage

O

Incorrectly mounted oil cooler

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

Incorrectly mounted cylinder head

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

O

Insufficient coolant amount, contaminated coolant

O

Clogged or scaled coolant passage

O

Incorrectly connected hoses

O

Excessively low exterior temperature

Air compressor

Excessive coolant loss

O

Poorly airtight pressure cap

Exhaust gas recirculation related

Reference Gr

O

Excessive tension

Valve opening temperature too low (valve remains open)

Radiator

Abnormal noise

Possible causes

Overcooling

Overheating (poor cooling)

Symptoms

O O Gr12 Gr11

O O

Defective gasket

O

O

Incorrectly mounted exhaust gas recirculation piping

O

O

Defective gasket

O

O

Incorrectly mounted water pipe

O

O

Gr17 Gr11

14-5


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Inspection and Adjustment of Belt Tension CAUTION • Be careful not to allow engine oil to smear the belt. A belt smeared with oil slips, resulting in reduced cooling efficiency. • When replacing the belts, replace them as a set to prevent differences in tension between the two belts.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location –

Belt tension

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

For air conditioner

15 to 20

Adjust

Adjust

For alternator

When new

19 to 24

When reused

25 to 30

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Nut (for alternator retention)

Bolt (for cooler compressor retention)

Tightening torque

Remarks

82 {8.4}

19.6 to 24.5 {2.0 to 2.5}

Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Belt tension gauge

Part No.

MH062345

Application

Measurement of tension of belt

Inspection after installation Inspection: Tension of belts • Press each belt at a central portion between pulleys with a force of approximately 98 N {10 kgf} as shown in the illustration and measure the amount of deflection of the belt. A: Alternator pulley B: Compressor pulley (for air conditioner) C: Water pump pulley D: Crankshaft pulley

• Place the small O-ring on at the scale mark corresponding to 98 N {10 kgf} (press force). • Place the large O-ring on at the scale mark corresponding to the maximum permissible deflection value specified for the belt.

14-6


14 • Place at a central portion between pulleys of the V-belt and push the handle (indicated by the arrow in the illustration) until indicated by arrow touches the O-ring.

• Measure the amount of deflection of the V-belt. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, adjust as follows.

Adjustment of belt (1) Belt for alternator • Loosen the alternator mounting nuts (2 locations) and adjust the tension of the belt with the adjusting bolt. • When the adjustment is completed, tighten the bolts and nuts securely.

CAUTION • Excessive tension in belts may damage the belts and related bearings. (2) Belts for air conditioner • Loosen the cooler compressor mounting bolts (4 places) and adjust the tension of the belt with the adjusting bolt. • When the adjustment is completed, tighten the bolts securely.

CAUTION • Excessive tension in belts may damage the belts and related bearings.

14-7


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 2. Inspection of Belts • Visually check the belt for a crack or damage. • If there is any abnormality, replace the belt. Belt condition

Remaining service life (reference) • The driving distance over the which the belt can still be used is at least as long as that over which the belt has been used since the vehicle was new or since the belt was replaced (whichever is more recent).

• The driving distance over the which the belt can still be used is about half of that over which the belt has been used since the vehicle was new or since the belt was replaced (whichever is more recent).

• The driving distance over the which the belt can still be used is about a quarter of that over which the belt has been used since the vehicle was new or since the belt was replaced (whichever is more recent).

• The belt has reached the end of its service life and must be replaced.

14-8


14 3. Coolant Replacement and Cleaning of Cooling System Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Radiator drain cock

2.0 {0.2}

Crankcase drain cock

37 {3.8}

• Using the radiator for extended periods of time without cleaning can increase chance of rust and scale formation, which may cause engine overheating. The cooling system must be cleaned periodically. Use a coolant containing the FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT additive and soft water in the specified proportions. (See the Owner’s Handbook for instructions on the use of the additive.)

3.1 Draining of coolant

• Before draining the coolant, loosen the pressure cap to reduce the pressure in the cooling system. Remember to drain the coolant out of the reservoir tank as well.

WARNING • Drain the coolant only after it has cooled sufficiently to avoid getting scalded. • Opening the pressure cap while the coolant temperature is still high can cause hot coolant to spray out. Cover the pressure cap with a cloth, and loosen it slowly to let the pressure out before opening it fully.

3.2 Cleaning procedure

CAUTION • Water used for flushing the cooling system must be soft water that has a property meeting the requirements indicated below. Using hard water will cause scale and rust to form in the system. Required properties of soft water Total hardness .......................... 300 ppm or less Sulfate SO 4 .............................. 100 ppm or less Chloride CI ............................. 100 ppm or less Total dissolved solids .............. 500 ppm or less pH .............................................. 6 to 8 • Keep the coolant temperature at approximately 90°C so that the thermostat valve remains open and coolant continues to circulate in the radiator. • For the sake of convenience you can raise the coolant temperature quickly by covering the front of the radiator with corrugated cardboard or something similar. • In cases where a great amount of rust has accumulated it is common for the radiator to leak as a result of cleaning. Conduct a through check for leakage after cleaning. • Select an appropriate cleaning method according to the condition of the cooling system as shown below.

14-9


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT •

Ordinary condition

Coolant extremely dirty

Radiator clogged

Cleaning using FUSO RADIATOR CLEANER (RADIPET-7) Flushing with water Drain out coolant Make water solution of FUSO RADIATOR CLEANER (RADIPET-7) at 5 to 10% concentration in volume. Pour solution into surge tank. Let the engine idle for 30 minutes with the water at approximately 90°C.

CAUTION •

Limit the engine idling period to one hour. Operating an engine containing the cleaning solution for longer time may lead to damage of the cooling system.

Drain out coolant Pour tap water (preferably hot) into the surge tank. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes with the water at approximately 90°C. Drain out water Cleaning is complete if drained water is clear Repeat procedure if drained water is not clear • After cleaning the cooling system using cleaning solution, fill it with coolant containing the specified additive as soon as possible. • To prevent freezing of the coolant and corrosion of the cooling system, add the specified portion of FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT to the coolant. (See the Owner’s Handbook for instructions on the use of the additive.)

WARNING • FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT is flammable. Keep it away from heat and flames.

CAUTION • If you accidentally splash FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT in your eyes, wash it out immediately with water and seek medical attention.

14-10


14 4. Air Bleeding of Cooling System • If the engine is started with the coolant filled up to the neck of the surge tank, the coolant temperature rises and the expanded coolant overflows from the neck little by little. To avoid this, fill the surge tank with a slightly smaller quantity of the coolant. • With the pressure cap removed and the coolant temperature at 90°C, let the engine idle in order to bleed air completely out of the cooling system. • After air bleeding is completed, refill the reservoir tank with coolant as needed.

5. Gas Leakage Test • Presence of air or exhaust gas in coolant accelerates corrosion of the cooling system components. To prevent this, carry out air/ gas leakage tests in accordance with the following procedure. • Remove the pressure cap.

WARNING • If the engine is hot, boiling coolant may spurt out from the filler port when the pressure cap is loosened. To avoid burning yourself, make sure to remove the pressure cap only when the coolant is cold. • Run the engine until the coolant temperature rises to approximately 90°C. • If air bubbles appear continuously through the filler port, there is air or exhaust gas penetrating into the cooling system. • Presence of air in coolant can be an indication of loose cylinder head bolts, loose water pump mounting bolts, loose hose connections, and/or a damaged hose. • Presence of exhaust gas in coolant can be an indication of a damaged cylinder head gasket and/or cracks in the cylinder head.

6. Coolant Leakage Test • Ensure that there is no coolant leakage from coolant system during idling. • If any leakage is found, check for the mounting condition. If there is looseness, tighten the part to the specified torque. If there are cracks or damages, replace the defective part with a new one. (See later section.)

14-11


DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES Periphery of Radiator

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5

Supply hose Inlet hose Overflow hose Heater hose Heater hose

6 7 8 9 10

Water hose Hose Water hose Water pipe Outlet hose

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse. • Install each hose clamp to the angle indicated in the illustration so that sufficient clearance is assured between the hose clamp and its surrounding parts.

14-12


14 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Hose clamp

Parts to be tightened

4.0 ± 0.5 {0.4 ± 0.05}

Hose clamp

5.0 ± 0.5 {0.5 ± 0.05}

Hose clamp

3.5 to 4.5 {0.35 to 0.45}

Hose clamp

4.4 {0.45}

Hose clamp

6.5 ± 0.5 {0.7 ± 0.05}

Installation procedure Installation: Outlet hose • Install the outlet hose so that its marking faces the stopper of the water pipe.

Installation: Hose • Install the hose marked with a white line so that this white line is placed in the center of the clamp.

14-13


DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES Periphery of Engine

14-14


14

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Air pipe Water pipe Water hose Water hose Eyebolt Eyebolt Water pipe Water hose Water pipe

Eyebolt Eyebolt Water pipe Eyebolt Eyebolt Water pipe Water hose Water hose Water hose

19 20 21 a:

Water pipe Water pipe Water hose Exhaust gas recirculation cooler b: Exhaust gas recirculation valve c: Water pump

* *

*

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse. • Install each hose clamp to the angle indicated in the illustration so that sufficient clearance is assured between the hose clamp and its surrounding parts.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Clamp

Parts to be tightened

3.9 {0.4}

Eyebolt (water pipe mounting)

39 {4.0}

14-15


RADIATOR AND FAN SHROUD

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5

Cushion rubber Front thrust rod bracket Cushion rubber Cushion rubber Thrust rod

6 Cushion rubber 7 Radiator (See later section.) 8 Radiator bracket 9 Cushion rubber

10 Radiator support 11 Shroud seal 12 Fan shroud

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse. • Refer to the previous section “DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES” for the correct insertion depth of radiator hoses into the pump as well as the correct tightening torque of clamps.

14-16


14 Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Tip clearance spacer A B 50

Part No.

ME294842

Application

Adjusting clearance between fan shroud and cooling fan blades

7

Installation procedure Installation: Thrust rod • Tighten nuts so that the thickness of cushion rubbers on both ends of the thrust rod is to the dimension shown in the illustration.

Installation: Fan shroud • Using , adjust the clearance between the fan shroud and cooling fan blades to the dimension shown in the illustration over the entire circumference.

Installation: Shroud seal and fan shroud • Install the shroud seal and fan shroud while aligning the section A as shown in the illustration.

14-17


RADIATOR AND FAN SHROUD Radiator

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Thrust rod bracket Radiator shroud Cross stay Drain cock

9 Packing 10 Core

Side member Upper tank Packing Lower tank

: Non-reusable parts

CAUTION • Gently handle upper tank and lower tank, since they are made of a resin that can break on impact. • If there are two paint marks on the joint between the core and upper tank or on the joint between the core and lower tank (which indicates that the tank retaining tabs have been crimped twice before), replace the core with a new part. • Do not disassemble radiator unless there is an abnormality.

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards Location –

Maintenance item Air leakage from radiator (air pressure: 177 kPa {1.8 kgf/cm2})

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0 cm3 {0 mL}

Rectify or replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

14-18

Tightening torque

Remarks

Drain cock

Parts to be tightened

2 {0.2}

Bolt (side member mounting)

13 {1.3}


14 Special tools Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No. J94-Z013 -10000

Lock-and-break tool

Application Removal of upper and lower tanks

The indicated part number is T.RAD’s part number.

Inspection before removal Inspection: Air leakage from radiator • Install hose and radiator cap tester and plug to upper tank. • Insert plug in lower tank, and immerse the entire body of the radiator in water. • Apply a specified air pressure using radiator cap tester, and check for any air leakage. • If any leakage is found, repair or replace radiator.

• Replace the following parts according to the leakage location. Area of leakage Upper tank Lower tank

Cause

Tank

Cracked tank

Tank joint

Defective crimping Defective packing Cracked tank

Tube; Tube joint

Cracked tube

• If there are two paint marks on the joint between the core and upper tank or on the joint between the core and lower tank (which indicates that the tank retaining tabs have been crimped twice before), replace the core with a new part. • Paint a mark for each core replacement. The upper and lower core replacement should be counted and marked separately.

Removal procedure Removal: Upper tank and lower tank • Use

, for removal and reinstallation of the tanks.

14-19


RADIATOR AND FAN SHROUD • Adjust the stopper bolt until the gap dimension shown in the illustration is obtained on the attachment of .

CAUTION • Before using , be sure to set the gap to the specified dimension by adjusting the stopper bolt. Otherwise, damaged will result.

• Use to bend open tabs of retain tank in place. • After tabs are bent open, squeeze the handle of to straighten tabs as illustrated. • After straightening all tabs in the perimeter, hold the pipes connected to the inlet/outlet, and remove tank.

• If it is difficult to remove tank lightly hit with rubber hammer (or plastic hammer) to remove.

CAUTION • Gently handle tanks, since they are made of a resin that can break on impact.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Tank surface where core is to be mounted • Check and clean the tank surface where the core is to be mounted for cleanliness, damage, etc. • If any abnormality is found, replace the tank.

CAUTION • To prevent adhesion of foreign substances on mounting surface, conduct work with bare hands.

14-20


14 Inspection: Core groove where tank is to be mounted • Check the groove on the core where the tank is to be mounted for adhesion of foreign substances or cracks. • If foreign substances are found, rub the area with #1000 sandpaper or the like gently so as to avoid scratching the surface, or use compressed air to remove them. • If there are cracks in the groove, repair or replace.

CAUTION • If the packing and tank are installed onto the core without removing foreign substances from the groove, coolant leakage will result. Be sure to inspect and clean the tank mounting groove along the entire periphery (even a hair can cause leakage). Repairing core

CAUTION • The core is repaired by means of tungsten inert-gas arc welding (TIG welding), which should only be performed by a skilled welder. • It is extremely dangerous to weld on a wet core. Before welding, ensure that the core is completely dry. • Using a stainless wire brush, brush both ends A of the leaky tube and the areas B around the tube ends until the base aluminum is exposed. • Before closing the tube at both ends by welding, drill a small breather hole in the tube.

CAUTION • If a breather hole is not provided, the tube may develop small pinholes due to escaping air.

• Ground the core at the support.

CAUTION • If welding is performed without the core properly grounded, this can lead to short-circuit where the base metal may melt.

14-21


RADIATOR AND FAN SHROUD • Close both end of the tube by tungsten inert-gas arc welding (TIG welding). Welding conditions • Welding rod: A4043 (approx. φ2 mm) • Welding current: AC80A • After welding, check for the following problems. If any of them exist, repair again or replace the core. • Undercut • Bead crack • Base metal crack

CAUTION • Improper weld can lead to recurrence of coolant leakage.

Installation procedure Installation: Upper tank, Lower tank • With the tank installed, eliminate any clearance between the tank and core plate by tapping with a rubber (or plastic) hammer.

CAUTION • To prevent adhesion of foreign substances, use bare hands to install the packing and tank.

• Adjust the stopper bolt until the gap dimension shown in the illustration is obtained on the attachment of .

• Follow the sequence shown in the diagram, bend tabs for crimping tank. 1 to 4: Bend two tabs at the center. 5 to 8: Bend other tabs following the direction of the arrow.

CAUTION • Since cannot be used to crimp sides 1 and 2, use pliers with the tips wrapped in vinyl tape. • After crimping the tabs onto the tank, check for coolant leakage.

14-22


14 • Paint a mark on the core where it can be easily noticed to indicate that the core has been crimped.

CAUTION • Paint a mark on the core where it can be easily noticed to indicate that the core has been crimped.

14-23


SURGE TANK Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Supply hose Air bleeder hose Overflow hose Supply pipe Supply hose Pressure cap Water level sensor O-ring Surge tank

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 6

Maintenance item Pressure valve opening pressure

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

49 ± 9.8 kPa {0.5 ± 0.1 kgf/cm2)

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Clamp

Parts to be tightened

3 to 5 {0.3 to 0.5}

Water level sensor

3 to 4 {0.3 to 0.4}

Inspection procedure Inspection: Pressure cap (1) Pressure valve opening pressure • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the pressure cap.

14-24


14 (2) Inspection of vent valve • Check the water level of the reservoir tank in advance. • Run the engine at high rpm. When the engine coolant overflows to the reservoir tank to some extent, stop the engine. • Leave the engine in this condition for a while. When the engine coolant temperature becomes the atmospheric temperature, check that the water level in the reservoir tank returns to the water level before the engine start. • If the water level does not lower, the vent valve is defective. Replace the pressure cap.

CAUTION • Do not remove the pressure cap before the engine coolant temperature drops to the atmospheric temperature. Otherwise, vacuum in the radiator is lost and the engine coolant cannot return to the reservoir tank.

Installation procedure Installation: Hose • The insertion depth of each hose is as shown in the illustration.

14-25


MITSUBISHI 6M70 COOLING FAN AND BELT

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

Belt (for air conditioner) Belt (for alternator) Automatic cooling fan coupling Cooling fan Fan coupling Torsional damper

a: *b: *

Alternator Cooler compressor (for air conditioner) c: Water pump d: Crankshaft pulley

* *

• The automatic cooling fan coupling cannot be disassembled. If it is found faulty, replace the whole assembly.

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • Be careful not to allow engine oil to smear the belt. A belt smeared with oil slips, resulting in reduced cooling efficiency. • When replacing the belts, replace them as a set to prevent differences in tension between the two belts. • After installation, perform the inspection and adjustment of belt tension. (See “ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT.”)

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

14-26


14 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (fan coupling mounting)

Parts to be tightened

115 {12}

Nut (automatic cooling fan coupling mounting)

50 {5.0}

Inspection and cleaning procedure Inspection: Automatic cooling fan coupling • Perform the following inspection. If any abnormality is found, replace the automatic cooling fan coupling. • Check for leakage of oil from the coupling body. • Rotate the automatic cooling fan coupling by hand and check for irregular movement or abnormal noise caused by a defect in the bearing. • Check for excessive axial play in the automatic cooling fan coupling when the engine is cool.

Cleaning: Automatic cooling fan coupling • If any foreign particles have adhered to the bimetal, remove them carefully without applying excessive force.

14-27


MITSUBISHI 6M70 WATER PUMP Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Snap ring Water pump cover O-ring Water pump pulley Flange Impeller Wire Bearing unit Unit seal Connector Water pump case O-ring

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse except for the following. 11 → 8 → 7 → 9 → 6 • See the previous section “DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES” for the correct insertion depth of water pump hoses into the pump as well as the correct tightening torque of clamps.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

5, 8

Interference between flange and bearing unit

0.05 to 0.08

Reassembly allowed only twice

6, 8

Interference between impeller and bearing unit

0.03 to 0.06

Reassembly allowed only twice

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Connector

Tightening torque

Remarks

39 {4.0}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Thread of connector O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Threebond Sealock 2310

As required

Engine oil

As required

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

14-28


14 Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Application

Bolt A

B

M6 × 1

60

MH001102

Removal and installation of snap ring Nut A

MF434103

M6 × 1

Water pump pully puller A B 60

MH062411

13 Removal of flange

Bolt A

B

C

26

35

M10 × 1.5

Impeller puller A B

φ 10

48

Unit seal installer A B C 9.6 ± φ 12.5± φ 28 0.1 0.03

MH000715

MH062192

Removal of impeller

MH062195

Installation of unit seal

Removal procedure Removal: Snap ring • Install the and into bolt hole of snap ring, then tighten and remove the snap ring.

14-29


WATER PUMP Removal: Flange

Removal: Impeller

Removal: Bearing unit • Remove the bearing unit using a press. Heating the water pump case to approximately 80°C will facilitate the removal.

CAUTION • The ram load applied to remove the bearing unit should not exceed 9800 N {1000 kgf}. • When the bearing unit is replaced, always replace the unit seal.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Interference between flange and bearing unit • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s).

CAUTION • Even if the measurement complies with the standard value, reassembly must not be carried out more than twice.

Inspection: Interference between impeller and bearing unit • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part(s).

CAUTION • Even if the measurement complies with the standard value, reassembly must not be carried out more than twice.

14-30


14 Installation procedure Installation: Bearing unit • Install the bearing unit by ramming down its outer race with the press until the end face A of the outer race and the end face B of water pump case meet flush.

CAUTION • Before installing, check the rotating condition of the bearing unit. • When installing, do not press the shaft end of the bearing unit. Installation: Wire • Align the groove on the water pump case side with the groove on the bearing side at the wire inlet before inserting the wire into the water pump case.

Installation: Unit seal • Using , install the unit seal until it securely contacts the water pump case.

Installation: Impeller

CAUTION • Before installing an impeller, make sure that there is no or only one punch mark in the shown location on the impeller. Make an additional punch mark on the flange to indicate that it undergoes the disassembly and reassembly process you are doing now. • Punch mark(s) indicate the number of times the impeller was disassembled and reassembled in the past. If there are two marks, the impeller must be replaced. • With a press installed against the impeller end face, press fit the impeller onto the bearing unit until the impeller end face is flush with the shaft end face of the bearing unit.

14-31


WATER PUMP Installation: Flange

CAUTION • Before installing a flange, make sure that there is no or only one punch mark in the shown location on the flange. Make an additional punch mark on the flange to indicate that it undergoes the disassembly and reassembly process you are doing now. • Punch mark(s) indicate the number of times the flange was disassembled and reassembled in the past. If there are two marks, the flange must be replaced. • Stand the shaft of the bearing unit on a block as illustrated. • Place a fixture on the flange and apply the load of a press to it. • Press the fixture down until the shaft of the bearing unit contacts the fixture.

CAUTION • If the flange is installed without the fixture, the water pump case will be damaged.

Inspection after assembly Inspection: Flange rotation • Rotate the flange by hand. The flange should rotate smoothly without any binding. • If the flange does not rotate freely, disassemble and check.

14-32


14 M E M O

14-33


MITSUBISHI 6M70 THERMOSTAT

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Water hose Bypass pipe O-ring Eyebolt Air bleeding pipe Thermostat cover Rubber ring

8 Thermostat (Valve opening temperature 82°C) 9 Thermostat (Valve opening temperature 88°C) 10 Water temperature sensor (for engine control)

11 Water temperature sensor <for thermometer> 12 Overheat switch 13 Water joint 14 Thermostat case 15 Gasket : Non-reusable parts

• Do not remove the thermostat case unless it has a water leak or any other defect.

Installation sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse. • Refer to the previous section “DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF HOSES AND PIPES” for the correct insertion depth of thermostat cover and case hoses into the pump as well as the correct tightening torque of clamps.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

14-34


14 Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 8

Maintenance item Thermostat

Valve opening temperature

Thermostat

Valve opening temperature

Valve lift/temperature 9

Valve lift/temperature

Standard value

Limit

82 ± 2°C

10 or more/95°C

88 ± 2°C

10 or more/100°C

Remedy

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

39 {40}

27 to 41 {2.8 to 4.2}

Water joint

34 {3.5}

Sealant

Eyebolt

25 {2.6}

Water temperature sensor

For engine control For thermometer

Overheat switch

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

O-ring

Engine oil

As required

Winding around threaded portion of water joint

Teflon tape

3.5 turns

Inspection procedure Inspection: Thermostat • Stir the water using a stirring rod to maintain an even water temperature in the container, then conduct the tests indicated below. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the thermostat. (1) Valve opening temperature • Hold the thermostat with wire to keep it away from the heat source. • Heat the water gradually to the valve opening temperature. • Maintain this temperature for five minutes and make sure that the valve is completely open. • Make sure that the valve closes completely when the water temperature drops below 65°C. (2) Valve lift • Maintain the coolant temperature at the specified temperature for five minutes to keep the valve fully open. • Measure the valve lift.

14-35


GROUP 15 MITSUBISHI 6M70 INTAKE AND EXHAUST SPECIFICATIONS ................................ 15-2

AIR CLEANER ................................... 15-34

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Air Cleaner ...................................... 15-3 2. Turbocharger .................................. 15-4 3. Turbocharger Control System ......... 15-5 4. Diesel Particulate Filter .................... 15-8

TURBOCHARGER ............................... 15-36

TROUBLESHOOTING ......................... 15-9

EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................ 15-52

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

EXHAUST PIPE

1. Measurement and Adjustment of Turbocharger Boost Pressure ....... 15-10 2. Cleaning and Inspection of Air Cleaner Element ...................... 15-12 3. Check for Looseness in Intake Manifold Mounting Bolts and Nuts .............................................. 15-12 4. Check for Cracks and Gas Leakage in Exhaust Manifold ........ 15-12 5. Check for Cracks and Gas Leakage in Turbocharger .............. 15-12

INTERCOOLER ................................... 15-48 INTAKE MANIFOLD ............................ 15-50

<FS> ...................................................... 15-54 <EXCEPT FS>....................................... 15-56

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER <FS>................................................... 15-58 <EXCEPT FS> .................................... 15-60

TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM 1. Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 15-14 2. Diagnostic Precautions ................. 15-14 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes .......................... 15-15 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data ................................. 15-20 5. Actuator Tests by Multi-Use Tester ............................ 15-20 6. Inspection of Electrical Equipment ..................... 15-21 7. Installed Locations of Parts .......... 15-22 8. Electric Circuit Diagram ................ 15-30

15-1


SPECIFICATIONS /

Item

Specifications

Air cleaner element

Cyclone filter paper type

Dust indicator type

Mechanical

Turbocharger

Model Manufacturer

Intercooler type DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)

15-2

TF08 (VG (Variable Geometry: Variable nozzle vane type) Turbocharger) Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Tube and corrugated fin (air cooled) Continuous regeneration type


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION

15

1. Air Cleaner • The air cleaner is a single element type. • The air cleaner is provided with an unloader valve and a vacuator valve. • When the engine speed drops below a specified level, the vacuator and unloader valves are shaken by a consequent change in internal vacuum to automatically force out accumulated water and dust.

15-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 2. Mitsubishi 6M70 Turbocharger

• TF08 model is equipped with turbocharger, which is a variable nozzle vane type turbocharger with adjustable, heat-resistive alloy turbine vanes provided at the turbine exhaust gas inlet port.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

15-4


15 3. Turbocharger Control System 3.1 General description • The turbocharger control system uses various sensors to detect the status of the engine and controls the turbocharger magnetic valves according to sensor output data by means of the engine electronic control unit. • The turbocharger magnetic valves control the air cylinder movement to optimize the opening of the turbine vanes according to operating conditions. • When powertard brake (2nd step) is activated, the turbine vanes are closed, the turbocharger speed is increased and more air is supplied to the combustion chamber.

15-5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 3.2 Electronic Control System (1) System block diagram Input signals Starter switch (S)

Engine-electronic control unit

Water temperature sensor

Turbocharger control function

Vehicle speed sensor

Diagnosis function

Accelerator pedal position sensor Clutch switch Engine speed sensor Boost pressure sensor Turbine speed sensor Powertard switch (2nd stage) Memory clear switch Diagnosis switch

15-6

Output signals Engine warning lamp Turbocharger magnetic valve


15 (2) Diagnosis function • While the starter switch is on, the diagnosis function is constantly activated to find faults in various sensors. Upon any sensor being found faulty, the driver is informed of the fault through the display in the meter cluster. At the same time, the fault is memorized in the form of a diagnosis code and the system starts to effect necessary atfault control(s). • During at-fault control(s), the system is limited in the workings to ensure the safety of the vehicle and driver. The memorized diagnosis code can be accessed on the Multi-Use Tester screen or through blinking of warning lamp. • Diagnosis codes are different in the way of indication between the Multi-Use Tester and blinking of the warning lamp. • The Multi-Use Tester provides more specific diagnosis codes.

3.3 Electronic control unit connection diagram

15-7


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 4. Diesel Particulate Filter • Diesel particulate filter is a large-capacity system consisting of an ultra-efficient oxidation catalyst and a filter. Diesel particulate filter is designed to efficiently break and capture PM emitted by engines running on low-sulfur fuel, and the filter is continuously regenerated. • The new environmentally-friendly engine has drastically-reduced PM emission levels. In addition, the ultraefficient oxidation catalyst breaks and treats most of PM emitted from the engine, minimizing PM loading/deposit onto the subsequent filter. As a result, the filter is unlikely to clog up even under the driving conditions that require long hours of drive with relatively low exhaust gas temperature. Also, active regeneration, which increases fuel consumption, is not required. • The size of the filtration openings has been optimized to eliminate the deposit of ash (product of combustion) generated in the engine. The filter requires no maintenance, including periodical cleaning.

15-8


15

Clogged air cleaner element

Cartridge assembly

Air cleaner

Turbocharger

O

O

O

O

Carbon deposits on shaft and turbine wheel unit

O

O

Interference between shaft and turbine wheel unit and turbine back plate

O

O

O

Interference between shaft and turbine wheel unit and turbine housing

O

O

O

Bent shaft and turbine wheel unit

O

O

O

Damaged shaft and turbine wheel unit

O

O

O

Interference between compressor wheel and compressor cover

O

O

O

O

Seized thrust sleeve and/or thrust bearing

O

O

O

Damaged compressor wheel

O

O

O

Oil leakage due to worn piston ring and/or insert

O

Defective sliding action between parts due to clogged lubrication oil pipe and eyebolt

O

O O

O

Oil seals damaged due to clogged oil return pipe Compressor cover fitted poorly

O O

O

O O

O

Turbine housing fitted poorly

O

Foreign substances deposited on intercooler front core

O

O

O O

Front pipe/DPF/tail pipe deformed

O

O

Front pipe/DPF/tail pipe fitted poorly

O

O

Incorrect valve clearances

O

Head gasket defective

O

Wear/carbon deposits on valves and valve seats

O

Valve spring weakened

O

Piston rings worn/damaged Piston ring grooves worn/damaged Cooling system malfunctioning

Reference Gr

O

Defective bearing

Piston ring fitted poorly

Intercooler

Excess oil consumption

O

Poor engine power

White exhaust gas

Possible causes

Black exhaust gas

Engine hard to start

Symptoms

Abnormal noise or vibration in intake/exhaust system

TROUBLESHOOTING

Gr11 O

O

O

O

O

Engine oil quantity excessive

Gr14 O

Major moving parts seized

O

Uneven or excessive fuel injection

O

Gr12 O

Gr11 Gr13

15-9


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Measurement and Adjustment of Turbocharger Boost Pressure Service standards Location

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Boost pressure (when VGT test performed with ambient temperature at 25°C and atmospheric pressure at 101.5 kPa)

157 ± 7 kPa

Adjust

(1) Preparation • • • • •

Put the transmission in N range. Turn the steering wheel in neutral position. Turn off all lamps and accessories. Connect the Multi-Use Tester. Check diagnosis code of each electronic control system. If any fault exists, rectify it. • Warm up the engine until the engine coolant has been heated to more than 60°C. (verify from Service Data “2E: Water Temperature”) • Check that the non-load minimum speed (idling speed) is as specified. (See Gr13.) (2) Measurement and correction of boost pressure • Turn the idle adjust dial to any position within the illustrated range of Mode 1. • Select [Engine Control] on the system select screen of the MultiUse Tester, then execute [BA: VGT Test] from [Actuator Tests]. • When [BA: VGT Test] is executed, the engine speed should be automatically increased to 1600 rpm (No. 2 magnetic valve activated). • Maintain the state of [BA: VGT Test] having been executed (for 5 to 15 minutes) until boost pressure is stabilized. • Measure the following items from among [Service Data]. 26: Boost pressure (actual boost pressure) 2B: Intake air temperature (actual intake air temperature) 30: Atmospheric pressure (actual atmospheric pressure) • Obtain corrected boost pressure by calculating above Service Data. [Correction with intake air temperature] Corrected boost pressure [kPa] = Measured boost pressure + 0.43 (measured intake air temperature - 25) [Correction with boost temperature (Exhaust gas recirculation temperature)] Corrected boost pressure [kPa] = Measured boost pressure + 0.02 (measured boost temperature - 33) [Correction with atmospheric pressure] Corrected boost pressure [kPa] = Measured boost pressure (measured atmospheric pressure - 101.5) • If corrected boost pressure in any case above deviates from the standard value, adjust the turbocharger.

CAUTION • If the adjusting range of the air cylinder shaft exceeds ±1.5 turns, check the turbocharger.

15-10


15 (3) Adjustment of turbocharger

WARNING • The turbocharger is hot for a while after the engine is stopped. Take care not to burn yourself during adjustment work. • To adjust the turbocharger, turn the joint. • Make sure that the air cylinder is in the state of zero stroke when the engine is stopped. • Loosen the position bolts A and B. • Remove the connecting levers from the air cylinder joint. • With a wrench put on the flats of the air cylinder shaft, loosen the nut. • Turning the joint part of the air cylinder, adjust the length of the shaft. Adjusting guide: One turn (with engine speed at 1600 rpm)

Direction A

Decreased by approx. 17 kPa

Direction B

Increased by approx. 17 kPa

CAUTION • If boost pressure exceeds the standard value, the engine may malfunction or break down. Boost pressure must be within the specified range. • After adjustment, secure the shaft with nut and refit the levers to the joint. • Measure boost pressure again. • If the boost pressure deviates from the standard value, readjust it. • Make sure that the air cylinder is in the state of zero stroke when the engine is stopped. • Tighten the position bolt A for the illustrated clearance between the bolt and lever. • After adjustment, secure the bolt with the lock nut.

• Introduce specified pressure in the air cylinder from the port A, B, C to bring the air cylinder into the state of full stroke. • Tighten the position bolt B for the illustrated clearance between the bolt and lever. • After adjustment, secure the bolt with the lock nut.

15-11


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 2. Cleaning and Inspection of Air Cleaner Element [Cleaning: Element] • Blow a jet of compressed air at a pressure not higher than 685 kPa {7 kgf/cm2} against the inside surfaces of the element.

CAUTION • For the frequency and timing of cleaning, refer to the relevant instruction manual. More frequent cleaning than necessary could damage the element or cause dust and foreign matter to be sucked into the engine. • Do not strike the element or hit it against another object to remove dust. • Do not blow compressed air against outside surfaces of the element. [Inspection: Element] • Shine some electric light inside the element. • Replace the element if thin spots or broken parts are evident in the filter paper, or if the packing at the top of the element is damaged. Also replace the element if the dust on the element is damp with oily smoke or soot, regardless of the replacement schedule.

3. Check for Looseness in Intake Manifold Mounting Bolts and Nuts • Check for looseness in the intake manifold and air inlet pipe mounting bolts and nuts. If there is looseness, tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. (See “INTAKE MANIFOLD”.)

4. Check for Cracks and Gas Leakage in Exhaust Manifold • Inspect the exhaust manifold visually. If there is any trace of gas leakage or cracks, replace the exhaust manifold. (See “EXHAUST MANIFOLD”.) • Check for looseness in the exhaust manifold mounting nuts. If there is looseness, tighten the nuts to the specified torque. (See “EXHAUST MANIFOLD”.)

5. Check for Cracks and Gas Leakage in Turbocharger • Inspect the turbocharger visually. If there is any trace of gas leakage or cracks, replace the turbocharger. (See “TURBOCHARGER”.) • Check for looseness in the turbocharger mounting bolts and nuts. If there is looseness, tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. (See “TURBOCHARGER”.)

15-12


15 M E M O

15-13


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM 1. Diagnosis Procedure • Perform the inspection in accordance with the following flowchart.

Warning lamp lit

Vehicle in service shop

Read all (past and present) diagnosis codes by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.)

Perform inspection based on diagnosis codes. (See later section.)

Was able to identify the fault?

NO

Response to transient fault (See Gr00.)

YES Rectify or replace with new parts.

Clear stored diagnosis code. (See Gr00.)

Test drive

Code issued

Read diagnosis code(s) by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.) No code issued End of inspection

2. Diagnostic Precautions • Before measuring voltage, check the battery for charged condition and specific gravity. If system inspection is performed with the battery uncharged or reduced in specific gravity, accurate measurements cannot be achieved. • Before disconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors, set the starter switch to LOCK or OFF, then allow at least 20 seconds. • To avoid having electrical parts damaged, set the starter switch and lighting switch to LOCK or OFF before reconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors. • When performing measurement with the tester, handle the test bar carefully so that it does not damage internal circuit and other electrical parts of the electronic control unit to result in a short-circuit failure between terminals in connector or between connector and car body. • Resistance is affected by temperature. Determine the necessity of resistance measurement following given temperature specification as a guide. Otherwise, use normal temperature (10 to 35°C) as the measuring condition.

15-14


15 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes 3.1 Diagnosis code list • Diagnosis codes shown by the Multi-Use Tester and those indicated by flashing of the warning lamp are different. • The Multi-Use Tester is capable of showing more detailed diagnosis codes. Code

Message

Warning lamp indication Flashes

Red

Orange

P0234

Over Boost

54

O

P1130

VGT1

51

O

P1132

VGT1

51

O

P1133

VGT1

51

O

P1135

VGT2

52

O

P1137

VGT2

52

O

P1138

VGT2

52

O

P1140

VGT3

53

O

P1142

VGT3

53

O

P1143

VGT3

53

O

P1236

Turbine Revolution SNSR (Low)

57

O

P1237

Turbine Revolution SNSR (High)

57

O

P1238

Turbine Overrunning

59

O

3.2 Diagnosis code generation conditions and inspection items P0234: Over Boost (warning lamp flashes: 54) Generation condition

Boost pressure remaining above the specified value for 10 seconds is repeated five times when engine speed is at 600 rpm up to 2300 rpm.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem • System recovers if boost pressure is below the specified value when engine speed is at 600 rpm up to 2300 rpm. • In the case where above problem is repeated five more times • System recovers (power is re-supplied to electronic control unit) if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned OFF (2 minutes or more) → ON.

Control effected by electronic control unit

• In the case of above problem • No specific control is effected. • In the case where above problem is repeated five more times • Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.)

Inspection

Service data

26: Boost Pressure

Other

Turbocharger

15-15


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM P1130: VGT1 (warning lamp flashes: 51) Generation condition

Current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) remains above the specified value for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) becomes normal for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 82: VGT M/V1

Actuator test

A9: VGT1

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) system

P1132: VGT1 (warning lamp flashes: 51) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (low level when turned OFF) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) becomes normal (high level when turned OFF) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 82: VGT M/V1

Actuator test

A9: VGT1

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) system

P1133: VGT1 (warning lamp flashes: 51) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to battery (high level when turned ON) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) becomes normal (low level when turned ON) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Service data Inspection

15-16

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped. 21: VGT position, 82: VGT M/V1

Actuator test

A9: VGT1

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 1 magnetic valve) system


15 P1135: VGT2 (warning lamp flashes: 52) Generation condition

Current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) remains above the specified value for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) becomes normal for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 83: VGT M/V2

Actuator test

AA: VGT2

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) system

P1137: VGT2 (warning lamp flashes: 52) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (low level when turned OFF) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) becomes normal (high level when turned OFF) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 83: VGT M/V2

Actuator test

AA: VGT2

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) system

P1138: VGT2 (warning lamp flashes: 52) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to battery (high level when turned ON) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) becomes normal (low level when turned ON) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Service data Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped. 21: VGT position, 83: VGT M/V2

Actuator test

AA: VGT2

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 2 magnetic valve) system

15-17


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM P1140: VGT3 (warning lamp flashes: 53) Generation condition

Current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) remains above the specified value for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) becomes normal for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 84: VGT M/V3

Actuator test

AB: VGT3

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) system

P1142: VGT3 (warning lamp flashes: 53) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to ground or open-circuited (low level when turned OFF) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) becomes normal (high level when turned OFF) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped.

Service data

21: VGT position, 84: VGT M/V3

Actuator test

AB: VGT3

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) system

P1143: VGT3 (warning lamp flashes: 53) Generation condition

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) circuit shorted to battery (high level when turned ON) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers when current flowing in the turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) becomes normal (low level when turned ON) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Service data Inspection

15-18

• • • •

Turbocharger control is stopped. Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped. Auto cruise control is stopped. Injection quantity is limited. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Actuator test “BA: VGT Test” is stopped. 21: VGT position, 84: VGT M/V3

Actuator test

AB: VGT3

Electrical equipment

#566: Turbocharger magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Turbocharger magnetic valve (No. 3 magnetic valve) system


15 P1236: Turbine Revolution SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 57) Generation condition

Turbine speed remains 3000 rpm or less for 10 seconds when engine speed is 1000 rpm or more.

Recoverability

System recovers if turbine speed remains higher than 3000 rpm for 1 second when engine speed is 1000 rpm or more.

Control effected by electronic control unit

No specific control is effected.

Service data Inspection Electrical equipment Electric circuit diagram

2A: Turbine Revolution #835: Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter system

P1237: Turbine Revolution SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 57) Generation condition

Turbine speed remains 125000 rpm or more for 10 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers when turbine speed remains less than 125000 rpm for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Turbocharger control is stopped.

Service data Inspection Electrical equipment Electric circuit diagram

2A: Turbine Revolution #835: Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter system

P1238: Turbine Overrunning (warning lamp flashes: 59) Generation condition

Turbine speed remains 105000 rpm or more for 1 second.

Recoverability

System recovers if signal becomes normal when starter switch is turned from OFF (2 minutes or more) to ON (power supply resumed to electronic control unit).

Control effected by electronic control unit

• Injection quantity is stopped. (Output is reduced, and exhaust emissions worsen.) • Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

2A: Turbine Revolution

Electrical equipment

#835: Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter

Electric circuit diagram

Turbine speed sensor and pulse converter system

Other

Turbocharger unit

15-19


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data • It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No. 21

26

Item

Data

VGT Position

.

.

Boost Pressure

2A

Turbine Revolution

82

VGT M/V1

Inspection condition

Requirement

VGT opening degrees displayed according to VGT M/V operations shown below.

%

kPa

.rpm ON/OFF

Starter switch ON (engine is stopped)

Value matches atmospheric pressure indication.

Accelerator pedal pressed after engine has started

Value gradually increases.

Engine speed: 2280 to 2320 rpm

50000 to 80000 rpm

No. 1 magnetic valve ON

ON

No. 1 magnetic valve OFF

OFF

[Actuator test] A9: VGT1 83

VGT M/V2

ON/OFF

No. 2 magnetic valve ON

ON

No. 2 magnetic valve OFF

OFF

[Actuator test] AA: VGT2 84

VGT M/V3

ON/OFF

No. 3 magnetic valve ON

ON

No. 3 magnetic valve OFF

OFF

[Actuator test] AB: VGT3 VGT opening (%)

0 to 12.5

to 25

to 37.5

to 50

to 62.5

to 75

to 87.5

to 100

M/V1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

M/V2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

M/V3

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

5. Actuator Tests by Multi-Use Tester • It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No. A9

Item VGTM/V1

Description No. 1 magnetic valve activated

Check method Magnetic valve operating sound [Service data] 82: VGT M/V1

AA

VGTM/V2

No. 2 magnetic valve activated

Magnetic valve operating sound [Service data] 83: VGT M/V2

AB

VGTM/V3

No. 3 magnetic valve activated

Magnetic valve operating sound [Service data] 84: VGT M/V3

BA

15-20

VGT Test

Used for turbo boost pressure measurement/adjustment

See On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment.


15 6. Inspection of Electrical Equipment #566 Inspection of turbocharger magnetic valve • Perform the following tests on the turbocharger magnetic valve. Replace the valve if found faulty. (1) Valve activation test • Gradually increasing from 0 V, apply voltage to the turbocharger magnetic valve between the following terminals. Terminals

4-pin connector 2-pin connector

1-3

No. 1 magnetic valve

2-4

No. 2 magnetic valve

1-2

No. 3 magnetic valve

• Measure voltage when turbocharger magnetic valve is activated. (Listen to the operating sound for ON/OFF of the magnet valve.) Reference value (minimum activation voltage)

18 V or less

(2) Continuity and air tight test • Test air pressure: 981 kPa {10 kgf/cm2}

#835 Inspection of turbine speed sensor and pulse converter unit • Test the turbine speed sensor and pulse converter unit as connected to the turbocharger. • Disconnect the turbine speed sensor and pulse converter unit from the electronic control unit harness at connectors. Then, prepare and fit the test harness in place. • The sensor does not respond to manual rotation of the turbocharger compressor wheel. To make the sensor responsive, start the engine to be idling. • Measure the maximum level (high-pulse voltage) and minimum level (low-pulse voltage) of voltage appearing between test connector terminals 4 and 1. Standard value

Low-pulse voltage

0V

High-pulse voltage

5V

• If the measurement deviates the standard value, replace the turbine speed sensor and pulse converter unit.

15-21


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM 7. Installed Locations of Parts

15-22


15

15-23


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM

15-24


15

15-25


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM

15-26


15

15-27


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM

15-28


15 M E M O

15-29


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM 8. Electric Circuit Diagram

15-30


15

15-31


TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYSTEM

15-32


15 M E M O

15-33


AIR CLEANER

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Dust indicator Air tube Vacuator valve Lower air duct

9 Safety element 10 Body

Duct joint hose Air intake hose Cover Outer element

CAUTION • Do not remove the safty element except for replacement. • Never clean the safty element.

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Service standards Location 1

Maintenance item Dust indicator activating negative pressure

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

9.12 ± 0.69 kPa {930 ± 70 mmH2O}

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Clamp

15-34

Tightening torque

Remarks

3.0 to 3.5 {0.3 to 0.35}


15 Cleaning procedure Cleaning: Element • Blow a jet of compressed air at a pressure not higher than 685 kPa {7 kgf/cm2} against the inside surfaces of the element.

CAUTION • For the frequency and timing of cleaning, refer to the relevant instruction manual. More frequent cleaning than necessary could damage the element or cause dust and foreign matter to be sucked into the engine. • Do not strike the element or hit it against another object to remove dust. • Do not blow compressed air against outside surfaces of the element.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Element • Shine some electric light inside the element. • Replace the element if thin spots or broken parts are evident in the filter paper, or if the packing at the top of the element is damaged. Also replace the element if the dust on the element is damp with oily smoke or soot, regardless of the replacement schedule.

Inspection: Operation of dust indicator under specified negative pressure • Apply negative pressure to the dust indicator, and take the reading when the red signal appears in the dust indicator window. • Replace the dust indicator if found faulty.

15-35


MITSUBISHI 6M70 TURBOCHARGER ATTACHING PARTS

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Air inlet pipe Air hose Air pipe Air hose Turbocharger coupler bracket Turbocharger coupler Seal ring Eyebolt Oil feed pipe Oil return pipe

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Gasket Turbine speed sensor O-ring Eyebolt Eyebolt Air pipe Air hose Connector Turbocharger magnetic valve

20 Turbocharger magnetic valve bracket 21 Bracket 22 Turbocharger (See later section.) 23 Gasket

*a:

Exhaust manifold : Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

15-36


15 Mitsubishi 6M70 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Clamp

Tightening torque

Remarks

7.0 to 8.0 {0.7 to 0.8}

21 {2.1}

Eyebolt (oil pipe mounting) Eyebolt (air pipe mounting) Eyebolt (air pipe mounting)

25 {2.5}

Nut (turbocharger mounting)

36 {3.7}

Nut (turbocharger mounting)

45 {4.6}

Nut (turbocharger coupler bracket mounting)

90 {9.0}

Bolt (turbocharger magnetic valve bracket mounting)

75 {7.6}

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Turbocharger (to be filled with engine oil)

Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Turbocharger • Before installing the turbocharger assembly, pour engine oil into the oil hole of the bearing housing to ensure smooth operation of the internal parts.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Seal ring • Fit the seal rings onto the turbocharger coupler, with their end gaps positioned 180 degrees apart from each other.

Installation: Bracket • Temporarily tighten the bracket on the air pipe and exhaust manifold. • Tighten the bolts after temporary tightening while ensuring that there is no clearance at the joints between the bracket and air pipe, and bracket and exhaust manifold. • After installing the bracket, ensure that there is no gas leakage from the joint of turbocharger with exhaust manifold.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

15-37


TURBOCHARGER Mitsubishi 6M70 Turbocharger

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

Connecting lever Spacer Joint Air cylinder Bracket Clamp bolt

13 Turbine housing 14 Cartridge assembly (See later section.)

Nozzle Flange Snap ring Compressor cover O-ring Clamp plate

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

Maintenance item

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

2

Spacer outside diameter

φ11.5

Replace

3

Joint inside diameter

φ12.5

Replace

Port A Stroke (operating air pressure: Port B 390 to 785 kPa {4 to 8 kgf/ 2} when compressed air cm Port C introduced)

12

6

3

Airtight test (390 to 785 kPa {4 to 8 kgf/cm2})

No air leakage of 25 cm2 {25 mL} for 1 minute

Play between nozzle lever plate and link

0.05 to 0.40

1.0

Replace

Clearance between compressor cover and compressor wheel

0.08 to 0.28

Check parts

0.075 to 0.155

Check parts

0.48 to 0.92

Check parts

4

7 10, 14

14

15-38

Air cylinder

Cartridge assembly

Play in axial direction of shaft and turbine wheel Shaft and turbine wheel-to-turbine back plate clearance

Replace


15 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

34 to 38 {3.5 to 3.9}

Wet

Clamp bolt

6.4 to 7.4 {0.65 to 0.75}

Wet

Bolt (clamp plate mounting)

25.5 to 27.4 {2.6 to 2.8}

Wet

Bolt (bracket mounting)

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Threads of clamp bolt Threads of mounting bolt

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Seizure preventive compound (FEL-PRO CA-5)

As required

Engine oil

As required

O-ring

Work before removal Alignment mark • Put alignment marks on the coupling, turbine housing, compressor cover and cartridge assembly.

Removal procedure Removal: Nozzle • Remove the flange and nozzle in one unit from the turbine housing.

• Remove the clamp bolt, then remove the nozzle from the flange.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

15-39


TURBOCHARGER Removal: Snap ring • Tighten the bolt to contract the snap ring and remove the ring.

Removal: Compressor cover • Lightly tap around the entire periphery of the compressor cover with a rubber-faced hammer, taking care not to cause damage.

CAUTION • The blades on the cartridge assembly are easily bent. Make sure that they do not strike the compressor cover.

Removal: Turbine housing • Lightly tap around the entire periphery of the turbine housing with a rubber-faced hammer, taking care not to cause damage.

CAUTION • The blades of the turbine wheel on the cartridge assembly are easily bent. Make sure that they do not strike the turbine housing.

Work after disassembly Cleaning • Before cleaning, visually check the disassembled parts for scorches, abrasion and other marks that may be difficult to see after cleaning. Replace any part that appears defective. • Immerse the disassembled parts in a non-flammable solvent (a 5 to 10 aqueous solution of Oil Clean from New Hope Co., Ltd.). Take out the parts and blow them dry with compressed air. Remove any hard deposits with a stiff brush or plastic scraper. • Again, immerse the parts in the solvent. • Blow them dry using compressed air.

Inspection procedure Inspection: Spacer outside diameter • If the measurement is less than the specified limit, replace the spacer.

15-40


15 Inspection: Joint inside diameter • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the joint.

Inspection: Air cylinder (1) Stroke • Apply specified air pressure to the ports (A to C) in the air cylinder, one at a time, and measure the corresponding strokes of the air cylinder. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the air cylinder.

(2) Airtight test • Apply specified air pressure to the ports (A to C) in the air cylinder, one at a time, and measure air leakage per minute using an air breather. • If the measurement exceeds the standard value, replace the air cylinder.

Inspection: Nozzle • Move the ring assembly of the nozzle all the way by hand from “full opening” to “full closing” and measure its travel with a dial gauge A. • Position the ring assembly roughly in the middle of measured length of its travel. • To center and hold the ring assembly and mount in place, use appropriate shims equally spaced at 3 places between them. Type of shim • Width × length: 5 mm × 10 mm • Thickness: 0.1 mm to 0.4 mm • Measure the play between each lever plate and ring with the dial gauge B. If any of the measurements exceeds the specified limit, replace the nozzle. Inspection: Clearance between compressor cover and compressor wheel • Measure the maximum runout A of the compressor wheel when the wheel is moved in vertical direction. • Measure the outside diameter B of the compressor wheel.

CAUTION • Do not rotate the compressor wheel for axial play measurement.

15-41


TURBOCHARGER • Measure the inside diameter C of the compressor cover. • Calculate the clearance between compressor wheel and compressor cover as follows. C-B-A Clearance= 2

• If the clearance deviates from the specified standard value range, disassemble and correct.

Inspection: Cartridge assembly (1) Play in axial direction of shaft and turbine wheel • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, disassemble and check the parts.

(2) Shaft and turbine wheel-to-turbine back plate clearance • Measure the clearance between the turbine back plate and shaft and turbine wheel unit. • Be sure to measure the clearance at the periphery of the blades using two feeler gauges. • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, disassemble the cartridge assembly, inspect and check the parts.

Installation procedure Installation: Turbine housing • Install the cartridge assembly into the turbine, then perform the following test. (1) Rotating condition of cartridge assembly • Turn the wheels of the cartridge assembly. They should turn smoothly. • If not, disassemble the cartridge assembly, inspect and check the parts.

Installation: Nozzle • Fit the nozzle in the flange. • In fitting, turn the nozzle and flange so that the control crank and ring properly engage each other

15-42


15 Installation: Snap ring • Turn the snap ring in its mounting groove to confirm proper seating of the ring. After confirmation, loosen the bolt and fit the ring securely.

Work after installation Adjustment: Positioning of air cylinder (1) Full closing position • Remove the position bolt B, then move the lever all the way in the illustrated direction.

(2) Temporary tightening of position bolt • Reinstall the position bolt B, and drive it in until it contacts the lever. • Mark the position bolt B at that position, give it 5 and half turns, then tighten the lock nut to secure the position bolt B.

(3) Readjustment for full closing position • Introduce specified pressure in the air cylinder from the port A, B, C and bring the air cylinder into the state of full stroke, then connect the lever to the joint. • Make sure that the lever is in slight contact with the position bolt B. If there is an open space between the lever and position bolt B or the lever is pushing the position bolt B, loosen the lock nut and make necessary adjustment by turning the shaft. Then, tighten the lock nut. • Back up the position bolt B a half turn for a clearance of approximately 0.5 mm between the bolt and lever, then tighten the lock nut to secure the position bolt B in that position. (4) Full opening position • Release compressed air to bring the air cylinder into the sate of zero stroke. Adjust the position bolt A for a clearance of 0.5 mm between the bolt and lever, then tighten the lock nut to secure the bolt in that position.

15-43


MITSUBISHI 6M70 TURBOCHARGER PARTS Cartridge Assembly

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Lock nut Compressor wheel Snap ring Insert Piston ring Thrust sleeve Oil deflector

15 Snap ring 16 O-ring 17 Bearing housing

Thrust ring Thrust bearing Thrust ring Shaft and turbine wheel Piston ring Turbine back plate Bearing

: Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location

11

14

17

Maintenance item Shaft and turbine wheel

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Turbine housing-to-shaft and turbine wheel clearance

0.39 to 1.0

Replace

Bearing journal outside diameter

11.996

Replace

Shaft bend

0.015

Replace

Outside diameter

20.382

Replace

Inside diameter

12.042

Replace

Length

11.94

Replace

Inside diameter of bearing insertion bore in bearing housing

20.506

Replace

Bearing

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638 15-44


15 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Lock nut

Tightening torque

Remarks

20 {2.0}

Thread-locking compound

Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application Thread of lock nut

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Molykote BR-2 Plus

As required

Engine oil

As required

O-ring Piston ring Bearing

Removal procedure Removal: Compressor wheel • Secure the turbine housing in a vise. • Fit the turbine wheel side of the cartridge assembly into the turbine housing.

• Hold the boss on the shaft and turbine wheel unit to prevent the cartridge assembly from turning. • Loosen and remove the lock nut.

Inspection: Turbine housing-to-shaft and turbine wheel clearance • If the measurement deviates from the standard value, replace the defective part.

Removal: Snap ring • Remove the snap ring.

CAUTION • Remove the snap ring while holding it with your hand to prevent it from springing off.

15-45


TURBOCHARGER Removal: Insert

Inspection procedure Inspection: Shaft and turbine wheel [Inspection] (1) Journal outside diameter • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit or uneven wear is excessive, replace the shaft and turbine wheel unit. • Inspect the journal visually and recondition it if roughened.

(2) Shaft bend • Set a dial gauge at the illustrated position on the shaft. Turning the shaft slowly, measure the extent of bending. • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the shaft and turbine wheel unit.

[Reconditioning] • Attach the shaft and turbine wheel unit to a lathe, supporting it at both centers. • With the shaft and turbine wheel unit turning at 300 to 600 rpm, smooth the journal using sandpaper (#400) and engine oil. • Measure the outside diameter of the bearing contact portion. If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the shaft and turbine wheel unit. Inspection: Bearing • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the bearing.

15-46


15 Inspection: Bearing housing • If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the bearing housing.

Installation procedure Installation: Thrust bearing • Install the shaft and turbine wheel unit, fitted in the bearing housing, in the turbine housing. Fasten it in place temporarily with the coupling.

CAUTION • When installing the shaft and turbine wheel unit, make sure that its blades are not damaged by striking the turbine housing because they are easily bent. • Fit the thrust bearing onto the shaft and turbine wheel unit.

CAUTION • Before installing the thrust bearing, wipe off dirt and oily substance completely from the stepped area of the shaft and both sides of the thrust ring using dry tissue paper or the like. Installation: Insert • Fit the piston ring onto the thrust sleeve, then fit it into the insert, its end gap first, taking care that it is not damaged.

CAUTION • When fitting the piston ring, use care not to open it excessively or twist its end gap portion. • Fit necessary parts in the insert first, then fit the insert into the bearing housing.

CAUTION • Before installing the insert, wipe off dirt and oily substance completely from both end faces of the thrust sleeve using dry tissue paper or the like. Installation: Snap ring • Place the snap ring in the bearing housing in the illustrated direction using a pair of snap ring pliers. • Then, using a screwdriver, tap the snap ring at its break ends into place in the mating groove of the bearing housing.

CAUTION • Fit the snap ring while holding it with your hand to prevent it from springing off.

15-47


INTERCOOLER Removal sequence 1 Air inlet hose 2 Air outlet hose 3 Intercooler

*a: *b:

Turbocharger Intake throttle

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

CAUTION • When removing the air inlet hose, do not try to pry it off with strong force using a screwdriver or other similar tools. Doing that can damage the fluorolayer on the inner surface of the hose, possibly compromising the oil resistance of the hose.

Service standards Location 3

Maintenance item Intercooler air leakage (at air pressure of 147 kPa {1.5 kgf/cm2})

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

0 cm3 {0 mL}

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Clamp

Tightening torque

Remarks

7 to 8 {0.7 to 0.8}

Inspection procedure Inspection: Intercooler • Plug one of the air ports of the intercooler and immerse it in a tank of water. Apply the specified air pressure to the intercooler through the other air port. • If leakage is apparent, replace the intercooler.

15-48


15 Installation procedure Installation: Air inlet hose • Fit the air inlet hose to the intercooler and air inlet pipe to the illustrated dimension.

Installation: Air outlet hose • Fit the air outlet hose to the intercooler and air inlet pipe to the illustrated dimension.

15-49


MITSUBISHI 6M70 INTAKE MANIFOLD

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4

Eyebolt Boost pressure sensor Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor (dummy)

5 6 7 8 9

Bracket Air inlet pipe Gasket Spacer Gasket

10 Intake manifold 11 Gasket

*a::

Cylinder head (See Gr11.) Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

54 {5.5}

21 {2.1}

Bolt (intake manifold mounting) Bolt (air inlet pipe mounting) Bolt (bracket mounting) Nut (air inlet pipe mounting) Eyebolt Bolt (boost pressure sensor mounting)

15-50

4 to 6 {0.4 to 0.6}

Intake air temperature sensor 1

20 {2.0}

Intake air temperature sensor 2

25 ± 5 {2.5 ± 0.5}


15 Inspection procedure Inspection: Intake air temperature sensor • Check that the sensor portion is free of soot, oily substance, etc. • If not, clean the sensor portion as follows. • Spray a cleaner on the sensor portion from 2 or 3 cm away. Recommended cleaners: Wako Chemical brake and parts cleaner from Wako Chemical Trusco Nakayama brake and parts cleaner ALP-BP Chemsearch Lexite LO • In 20 to 30 seconds after spraying, wipe the sensor portion clear of the sprayed cleaner using a soft waste cloth or the like.

CAUTION • Be sure to wait for 20 or 30 seconds before wiping. It takes the cleaner that long to dissolve foreign matter. • If the sensor portion is fouled excessively, the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) may be faulty. Inspect the PCV valve and filter to locate the cause and remove it.

15-51


MITSUBISHI 6M70 EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Disassembly sequence 1 Insulator 2 Front exhaust manifold 3 Seal ring 4 Exhaust Manifold Expansion rings

5 6 7 8

9 Exhaust Manifold Gaskets

Rear exhaust manifold Seal ring Expansion ring Center exhaust manifold

*a::

Cylinder head (See Gr11.) Non-reusable parts

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Mitsubishi 6M70 Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

42 {4.2}

Nut (exhaust manifold mounting)

Special tools (Unit: mm) Mark

Tool name and shape

Part No.

Application

Torque wrench A

MH063080

Installation of exhaust manifold

Double flat surfaced 14

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

15-52


15 Installation procedure Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Expansion rings and seal rings • Fit the seal rings with their end gaps positioned 120 degrees apart from each other. • Fit the expansion rings so that their crests do not meet the end gaps of the seal rings. • Fit the seal rings with their chamfered sides facing the center exhaust manifold.

Installation: Mitsubishi 6M70 Exhaust manifold

15-53


EXHAUST PIPE <FS>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

Lower front pipe Gasket Gasket Rubber cushion Exhaust pipe hanger Stay

Clamp Exhaust pipe cover Clamp Center front pipe Gasket Rubber cushion

13 Clamp 14 Upper front pipe

*a::

Diesel Particulate Filter Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

85 to 110 {8.7 to 11.0}

20 ± 3 {2.1 ± 0.3}

Nut (upper front pipe mounting) Nut (center front pipe mounting) Nut (lower front pipe mounting) Bolt (clamp mounting)

15-54


15 Installation procedure Installation: Rubber cushions • Tighten the rubber cushions until they are compressed to the thickness A. Location of rubber cushion

Compressed thickness

Upper front pipe

10 mm

Lower front pipe

23 mm

15-55


EXHAUST PIPE <EXCEPT FS>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

Spring Washer Clamp Lower front pipe Washer

Seal ring Gasket Upper front pipe Gasket Rubber cushion

11 Exhaust pipe clamp bracket

*a: *b::

Diesel Particulate Filter Turbocharger coupler Non-reusable parts

Installation sequence Follow the removal sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (lower front pipe mounting)

44 ± 10 {4.5 ± 1.0}

Nut (upper front pipe mounting)

85 to 110 {8.7 to 11.0}

Installation procedure Installation: Rubber cushions • Tighten the rubber cushions until they are compressed to the illustrated dimension.

15-56


15 M E M O

15-57


DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER <FS>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

Clamp Tail pipe Stay Rubber cushion Collar

Gasket DPF band Stay Rubber cushion Collar

11 DPF

*a::

Front pipe Non-reusable parts DPF: Diesel Particulate Filter

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Nut (clamp tightening) Nut (front pipe mounting) Bolt (clamp tightening)

15-58

Tightening torque

Remarks

54 ± 10 {5.5 ± 1.0}

85 to 110 {8.6 to 11.0}

20 ± 3 {2.1 ± 0.3}


15 Inspection procedure Inspection: DPF • Check the inner exhaust channel of DPF for clogging with foreign material. • If clogged, the inner exhaust channel must be cleaned with compressed air or DPF must be replaced. • If DPF is clogged, this may be due to problems with the engine. Check the engine and adjust as required. Also check the engine oil and fuel.

Installation procedure Installation: DPF • Insert the DPF pipe into the tail pipe until the DPF pipe bottoms out against the expanded portion of the tail pipe.

Installation: Rubber cushions • Compress the rubber cushions until the dimensions shown in the illustration are achieved.

Installation: Clamps • Tighten the nuts just enough to loosely retain the clamps so that they can easily be moved. • Tighten the nut at A until the ends of the clamps at A contact with each other. • Completely tighten the nut at B.

CAUTION • Do not overtighten the nut at B, or the clamps and DPF may become damaged.

15-59


DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER <EXCEPT FS>

Disassembly sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11

Spring Washer Seal ring Clamp Tail pipe Muffler plate

Muffler plate DPF cover DPF insulator DPF Bracket

*a:

Front pipe : Non-reusable parts

DPF: Diesel Particulate Filter

Assembly sequence Follow the disassembly sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

15-60

Tightening torque

Remarks

Bolt (front pipe mounting)

Parts to be tightened

34 to 54 {3.5 to 5.5}

Nut (DPF mounting)

70 to 95 {7.1 to 9.7}

Nut (bracket mounting)

306 to 360 {31 to 37}

Nut (bracket mounting)

20 ± 3 {2.1 ± 0.3}


15 Inspection procedure Inspection: DPF • Check the inner exhaust channel of DPF for clogging with foreign material. • If clogged, the inner exhaust channel must be cleaned with compressed air or DPF must be replaced. • If DPF is clogged, this may be due to problems with the engine. Check the engine and adjust as required. Also check the engine oil and fuel.

Installation: Clamps and rubber cushions • Tighten the nuts just enough to loosely retain the clamps so that they can easily be moved. • Tighten the nut at A until the ends of the clamps at A contact with each other. • Completely tighten the nut at B.

CAUTION • Do not overtighten the nut at B, or the clamps and DPF may become damaged.

15-61


GROUP 17 MITSUISHI 6M70 EMISSION CONTROL STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System ............................................... 17-2 2. Blowby Gas Return System .......................................................... 17-7

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Replacement of Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve Element ..... 17-8 2. Check for Cracks and Damages in Piping of Blowby Gas Return System .............................................................................. 17-8 3. Check for Cracks, Damages and Looseness in Piping of Exhaust Gas Recirculation System ............................................... 17-8

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1. Diagnosis Procedure .................................................................. 17-10 2. Diagnostic Precautions .............................................................. 17-10 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes ......................................17-11 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data ..................................................... 17-14 5. Actuator Tests Performed Using Multi-Use Tester....................... 17-14 6. Inspections Performed at Electronic Control Unit Connectors.... 17-14 7. Inspection of Electrical Equipment ............................................. 17-16 8. Installed Locations of Parts ........................................................ 17-18 9. Electric Circuit Diagram .............................................................. 17-24 EGR VALVE, EGR MAGNETIC VALVE, EGR PIPE AND EGR COOLER................................................................................... 17-26 BLOWBY GAS RETURN SYSTEM .................................................. 17-29

17-1


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System 1.1 Overview • In the exhaust gas recirculation system, various engine-related information (engine speed, water temperature, accelerator position) is collected by the relevant sensors and is sent to the engine electronic control unit and EGR EDU which then control the EGR magnetic valves based on the information received. • EGR achieves lower combustion temperatures by reintroducing combusted exhaust gas (which contains inert gases) into the intake manifold. This has the effect of reducing the amount of harmful NOx (nitrogen oxides) formed in the engine. The EGR cooler enhances the NOx (nitrogen oxides) reducing performance of the EGR system by cooling the mixed exhaust gas to lower maximum combustion temperature.

17-2


17 (1) EGR magnetic valves

• The EGR magnetic valves are each turned ON/OFF by drive signals from the engine electronic control unit to realize a 7-stage supply of air to the EGR valve. (2) Mitsubishi 6M70 EGR valve

• The EGR valve realizes 7 stages of valve lift in accordance with the supply of air to its input ports from the EGR magnetic valves.

17-3


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1.2 Electronic control system (1) System block diagram

Input signals

Engine electronic control unit

Engine speed sensor Water temperature sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor

Output signals Engine warning lamp

Exhaust gas recirculation control function Fault diagnosis function

Intake air temperature sensor Electronic drive unit relay

Memory clear switch Diagnosis switch Multi-Use Tester connector

EGR EDU EGR: Exhaust gas recirculation EDU: Electronic drive unit EGR magnetic valve

: Electrical signal : Controller area network signal

17-4


17 (2) Exhaust gas recirculation valve control function • Based on inputs from various sensors, the engine electronic control unit determines the degree of opening of the exhaust gas recirculation valve and sends corresponding control signals to the exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit to activate the exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve. In the case of black smoke emission or engine speed instability, which may occur when the engine is heavily loaded or lightly loaded, or when the auxiliary brake is operating, the engine electronic control unit stops exhaust gas recirculation valve control. (3) Fault diagnosis function • While the starter switch is in the ON position, the engine electronic control unit continuously monitors exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit, the sensors and other control elements for faults. In the event that the engine electronic control unit finds a component faulty, it causes an indication to be made in the meter cluster to alert the driver. At the same time, it memorizes the fault location in the form of a diagnosis code. • While the engine is running, the exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit continuously monitors the status of communication with the exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve and engine electronic control unit. When the exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit detects a fault, it sends the information to the engine electronic control unit. • While the control during fault is taking place, the system’s functionality is limited to ensure vehicle and driver safety. It is possible to read the memorized diagnosis code using a Multi-Use Tester or from flashing of the warning lamp. • Diagnosis codes shown by the Multi-Use Tester and those indicated by flashing of the warning lamp are different. • The Multi-Use Tester is capable of showing more detailed diagnosis codes.

17-5


STRUCTURE AND OPERATION 1.3 Electronic control unit connection diagram

17-6


17 2. Blowby Gas Return System

• The blowby gas return system is designed to introduce blowby gases into the intake air duct for reburning, thus preventing the gases from being released to the atmosphere. • The positive crankcase ventilation valve keeps constant the pressure inside the crankcase. • The oil in the blowby gas is separated by the wire mesh and the element in the oil separator and the positive crankcase ventilation valve and is returned to the oil pan. • When the element is clogged, the regulator valve opens and the blowby gas flows to the positive crankcase ventilation hose without passing through the element.

17-7


ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. Replacement of Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve Element Lubricant and/or sealant Mark –

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

CAUTION • For information on the element replacement interval, refer to the element instruction manual. If the element is used beyond its replacement interval, it may become clogged, causing the pressure inside the engine to increase such that oil leakage occurs. [Removal] • Loosen the cap by hand.

CAUTION • Do not use any tools to loosen the cap. Otherwise, the cap may become damaged.

[Installation] • Clean the thread on the cap. • Lightly smear the O-ring with engine oil and fit it on the cap. • Securely tighten the cap until it stops slightly above the positive crankcase ventilation body.

CAUTION • Be sure to use a genuine Mitsubishi Fuso element. Using an inappropriate element could result in engine trouble. • When replacing the element, be sure to replace the O-ring also.

2. Check for Cracks and Damages in Piping of Blowby Gas Return System • Inspect the piping of blowby gas return system visually. If there is any cracks or damages, replace the piping. (See “BLOWBY GAS RETURN SYSTEM”.)

3. Check for Cracks, Damages and Looseness in Piping of Exhaust Gas Recirculation System • Inspect the exhaust gas recirculation pipe visually. If there is any cracks or damages, replace the pipe. (See “EGR VALVE, EGR PIPE AND EGR COOLER”.) • Check for looseness in the exhaust gas recirculation pipe mounting bolts and nuts. If there is looseness, tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. (See “EGR VALVE, EGR PIPE AND EGR COOLER”.)

17-8


17 M E M O

17-9


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1. Diagnosis Procedure • Perform the inspection in accordance with the following flowchart.

Warning lamp lit

Vehicle in service shop

Read all (past and present) diagnosis codes by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.)

Perform inspection based on diagnosis codes. (See later section.)

Was able to identify the fault?

NO

Response to transient fault (See Gr00.)

YES Rectify or replace with new parts.

Clear stored diagnosis code. (See Gr00.)

Test drive

Code issued

Read diagnosis code(s) by Multi-Use Tester. (See Gr00.) No code issued End of inspection

2. Diagnostic Precautions • Before measuring voltage, check the battery for charged condition and specific gravity. If system inspection is performed with the battery uncharged or reduced in specific gravity, accurate measurements cannot be achieved. • Before disconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors, set the starter switch to LOCK or OFF, then allow at least 20 seconds. • To avoid having electrical parts damaged, set the starter switch and lighting switch to LOCK or OFF before reconnecting battery cables, harnesses and connectors. • When performing measurement with the tester, handle the test bar carefully so that it does not damage internal circuit and other electrical parts of the electronic control unit to result in a short-circuit failure between terminals in connector or between connector and car body. • Resistance is affected by temperature. Determine the necessity of resistance measurement following given temperature specification as a guide. Otherwise, use normal temperature (10 to 35°C) as the measuring condition.

17-10


17 3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes 3.1 Diagnosis code list • Diagnosis codes shown by the Multi-Use Tester and those indicated by warning lamp display are different. • The Multi-Use Tester is capable of showing more detailed diagnosis codes. Code P0112

Warning lamp indication

Message INT Air Temp SNSR (Low)

Flashes

Red

Orange

44

O

P0113

INT Air Temp SNSR (High)

44

O

P1267

EGR 1

67

O

P1268

EGR 1

67

O

P1272

EGR 2

68

O

P1273

EGR 2

68

O

P1277

EGR 3

69

O

P1278

EGR 3

69

O

P1625

EDU Relay

84

O

P1630

CAN (EGR 1)

95

O

3.2 Diagnosis code generation conditions and inspection items P0112: INT Air Temp SNSR (Low) (warning lamp flashes: 44) Generation condition

Intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains lower than 0.15 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains higher than 0.15 V for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

Carries out control using a backup value (25°C). 2B: Intake Air Temperature 01

: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electrical equipment

#305: Intake air temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Intake air temperature sensor 1 system

P0113: INT Air Temp SNSR (High) (warning lamp flashes: 44) Generation condition

Intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains higher than 4.85 V for 3 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if intake air temperature sensor 1 voltage remains lower than 4.85 V for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Carries out control using a backup value (25°C).

Service data Inspection

Electronic control unit connector

2B: Intake Air Temperature 01

: Intake air temperature sensor 1

Electrical equipment

#305: Intake air temperature sensor

Electric circuit diagram

Intake air temperature sensor 1 system

P1267: EGR1 (warning lamp: 67) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-1) circuit shorted to ground or open” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-1) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A1: EGR1

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system

17-11


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM P1268: EGR1 (warning lamp: 67) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-1) circuit shorted to power source” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-1) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A1: EGR1

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system

P1272: EGR2 (warning lamp: 68) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-2) circuit shorted to ground or open” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-2) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A2: EGR2

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system

P1273: EGR2 (warning lamp: 68) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-2) circuit shorted to power source” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-2) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data Inspection

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A2: EGR2

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system

P1277: EGR3 (warning lamp: 69) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-3) circuit shorted to ground or open” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-3) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

17-12

Service data

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A3: EGR3

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system


17 P1278: EGR3 (warning lamp: 69) Generation condition

Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-3) circuit shorted to power source” remains being received for 2 seconds.

Recoverability

System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit indicating “magnetic valve (M/V-3) is normal” remains being received for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Inspection

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Service data

20: Actual EGR Position

Actuator test

A3: EGR3

Electrical equipment

#530: Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve

Electric circuit diagram

Exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve system

P1625: EDU Relay (warning lamp flashes: 84)

Generation condition

Either of the following occurs. (1) Current flowing in the electronic drive unit relay remains exceeds the specified value for 1 second. (2) Electronic drive unit relay circuit remains shorted to ground or open (driving terminal low level when turned OFF) as detected for 1 second. (3) Electronic drive unit relay circuit remains shorted to power supply (high level when turned ON) as detected for 1 second.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers if current flowing in the electronic drive unit relay remains lower than the specified value. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers if current flowing in the electronic drive unit relay remains normal (driving terminal high level when turned OFF) for 1 second. • In the case of above problem (3) • System recovers if current flowing in the electronic drive unit relay remains normal (driving terminal low level when turned ON) for 1 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

89: EDU Power Relay

Actuator test

B2: EDU Relay

Electronic control unit connector

02

: Electronic drive unit relay

Electrical equipment

#201: Inspection of relay

Electric circuit diagram

Electronic drive unit relay system

P1630: CAN (EGR 1) (warning lamp flashes: 95)

Generation condition

Any of the following occurs. (1) Controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit 1 indicating “target exhaust gas recirculation opening received from engine electronic control unit is wrong” remains being received for 2 seconds. (2) No controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit is received for 1 second. (3) Engine controller area network signal abnormal state lasts for 0.5 second.

Recoverability

• In the case of above problem (1) • System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit 1 indicating “target exhaust gas recirculation opening received from engine electronic control unit is normal” remains being received for 1 second. • In the case of above problem (2) • System recovers if controller area network signal from exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit remains being received for 0.5 second. • In the case of above problem (3) • System recovers if normal engine controller area network signal lasts for 0.5 second.

Control effected by electronic control unit

Exhaust gas recirculation control is stopped.

Inspection

Service data

20: Actual EGR Position 1

Actuator test

A1: EGR 1

Electrical equipment

Exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit and engine electronic control unit

Electric circuit diagram

Controller area network communication system between engine electronic control unit and exhaust gas recirculation electronic drive unit

17-13


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 4. Multi-Use Tester Service Data • It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No.

Item

Data

20 Actual EGR Position

Inspection condition Perform actuator test

.

Requirement Position as commanded by actuator test

[Actuator test] A1: EGR 1 2B Intake Air Temperature 89 EDU Power Relay

. ON/OFF

°C

On a cold engine Starter switch ON Starter switch OFF [Actuator test] B2: EDU relay

Equal to ambient temperature ON OFF

5. Actuator Tests Performed Using Multi-Use Tester • It is possible to see service data and actuator tests simultaneously. No. A0 EGR 1 A1 EGR 2 A3 EGR 3

AC EDU Relay

Item

Explanation

Confirmation method

Maintain exhaust gas recirculation valve 1 opening indicated by Multi-Use Tester. [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Starter switch: ON • Engine: stopped

Actual position of service data matches target value commanded by actuator test [Service data] 20: Actual EGR Position

ON/OFF switchover of electronic drive unit relay (automatically reset after 15 seconds) [Can be executed when the following conditions are satisfied] • Vehicle: stationary (vehicle speed 0 km/h) • Starter switch: ON • Engine: stopped

Operating sound of electronic drive unit relay [Service data] 89: EDU Power Relay

6. Inspections Performed at Electronic Control Unit Connectors • These inspections aid troubleshooting by enabling you to check whether electronic control unit signals are being correctly transmitted via the vehicle harness and connectors. The white-on-black numbers ( 01 , 02 , and so on) correspond to the similarly printed reference numbers in section “3. Inspections Based on Diagnosis Codes”.

17-14


17 6.1 Electronic control unit connector terminal layout

6.2 Inspection instructions • Some inspections are performed with the connectors removed. Others are performed with the connectors fitted. Observe the following caution:

CAUTION • Do not touch any terminal except those specified for the inspection. Be particularly careful not to cause short circuits between terminals using the tester probes.

Check item 01 Resistance of intake air temperature sensor 1

Measurement method [Conditions] • Starter switch OFF • Disconnect connector. Perform inspection on vehicle-side connector. [Requirements] Terminals: A63-A32 • 0°C: 15 +3.78 –2.94 kΩ • 20°C: 6.514 +1.437 –1.147 kΩ • 80°C: 0.874 +0.136 –0.115 kΩ

02 Voltage of electronic drive unit relay

[Conditions] • Starter switch ON • Vehicle-side harness connected (Perform inspection on back of connector.) [Requirements] Terminals (+)-(–): B14-ground • With relay operating: 0 V • With relay not operating: Corresponding to battery voltage

17-15


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 7. Inspection of Electrical Equipment #201 Inspection of relay (normally open, 5 pins) • Perform a continuity check and an operation check. If there is any abnormality, replace the relay.

#305 Inspection of intake air temperature sensor • Place the sensor in a container filled with engine oil. • Heat the oil to each of the specified temperatures. Stir the oil well while doing so. • Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard value

0°C

15 +3.78 –2.94 kΩ

20°C

6.514 +1.437 –1.147 kΩ

80°C

0.874 +0.136 –0.115 kΩ

• If either measurement is out of specification, replace the sensor. #530 Inspection of exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve • Perform the following checks. If there is any abnormality, replace the exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve. (1) Check of operation • Gradually increase from zero the voltage applied to terminals 3 and 6 (magnetic valve 1), 2 and 5 (magnetic valve 2) and 1 and 4 (magnetic valve 3). • Observe the voltage when the exhaust gas recirculation magnetic valve operates. (Determine the magnetic valve’s OFF-ON operation from the operating sound.) Standard value (min. operating voltage)

18 V or lower

(2) Check of continuity and airtightness • Air pressure applied during check: 930 kPa {9.5 kgf/cm2}

17-16


17 M E M O

17-17


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 8. Installed Locations of Parts

17-18


17

17-19


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM

17-20


17

17-21


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM

17-22


17

17-23


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 9. Electric Circuit Diagram

17-24


17

17-25


MITSUBISHI 6M70 EGR VALVE, EGR MAGNETIC VALVE, EGR PIPE AND EGR COOLER

17-26


17 Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Upper EGR pipe clamp Lower EGR pipe clamp Spacer EGR pipe Gasket Gasket Rubber hose EGR cooler Gasket Eyebolt

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24

EGR water pipe Eyebolt EGR water pipe Eyebolt EGR air pipe EGR valve Gasket EGR pipe Gasket Plate

Gasket Air pipe Connector EGR magnetic valve

*a::

Air inlet pipe (see Gr15.) Non-reusable parts Arrows A to C indicate points to or from which pipes are connected.

Installation sequence Perform installation by following the removal sequence in reverse.

Service standards (Unit: mm) Location 8

16

Maintenance item Air leakage of EGR cooler

Standard value

Limit

Remedy

Exhaust gas passage side (Air pressure: 400 kPa {4 kgf/ cm2})

0 cm3 {0mL}

Replace

Coolant passage side (Air pressure: 300 kPa {3 kgf/ cm2})

0 cm3 {0mL}

Replace

1

0

2

1.3 ± 0.3

3

2.6 ± 0.3

4

4.6 ± 0.3

5

5.7 ± 0.4

6

7.7 ± 0.4

7

9.0 ± 0.3

8

11.0 ± 0.3

EGR valve lift Operating (Air pressure: 637 to 932 kPa {6.5 stage 2 to 9.5 kgf/ cm })

Replace

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened

Tightening torque

Remarks

54 {5.5}

Nut (EGR pipe mounting)

42 {4.2}

Clamp (water hose mounting)

3.9 {0.4}

Bolt (EGR pipe clamp mounting) Bolt (EGR pipe mounting) Bolt (Bracket mounting) Bolt (EGR cooler mounting)

Eyebolt (EGR water pipe mounting) Connector (air pipe mounting)

40 {4.1}

Bolt (EGR magnetic valve mounting)

24 {2.4}

Eyebolt (EGR air pipe mounting)

25 {2.6}

Bolt (EGR pipe mounting)

59 {6.0}

17-27


EGR VALVE, EGR MAGNETIC VALVE, EGR PIPE AND EGR COOLER Inspection procedures Inspection: EGR valve lift • While applying specified air pressure to the ports in accordance with the table below, measure the valve lift in operating steps 1 to 8 on each valve. • Replace the EGR valve if it does not conform to the standard value. Operating step

Input port M/V-1

M/V-2

M/V-3

1

2

O

3

O

4

O

O

5

O

6

O

O

7

O

O

8

O

O

O

O: Air applied –: Air not applied

Inspection: EGR cooler (1) Exhaust gas passage side • Fit a cover over the exhaust gas outlet of the EGR cooler, and connect a hose to the exhaust gas inlet. Then, submerge the EGR cooler in a container of water. Make sure the coolant passage is full of water. • Apply specified air pressure through the hose. Check that air does not leak from any part. • If there is any leakage, replace the EGR cooler.

(2) Coolant passage side • Fit covers over the EGR cooler’s exhaust gas inlet, exhaust gas outlet, and coolant outlet, and connect a hose to the coolant inlet. Then, submerge the EGR cooler in a container of water. • Apply specified air pressure through the hose. Check that air does not leak from any part. • If there is any leakage, replace the EGR cooler.

17-28


17

BLOWBY GAS RETURN SYSTEM

Removal sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

PCV hose PCV pipe PCV hose PCV hose PCV pipe O-ring

PCV hose Oil hose Oil separator Oil hose Cap O-ring

13 14 a: : PCV:

*

Element PCV body Rocker cover Non-reusable parts Positive crankcase ventilation

CAUTION • For information on the element replacement interval, refer to the element instruction manual. If the element is used beyond its replacement interval, it may become clogged, causing the pressure inside the engine to increase such that oil leakage occurs.

Installation sequence Perform installation by following the removal sequence in reverse.

Tightening torque (Unit: N·m {kgf·m}) Mark

Parts to be tightened Clamp Bolt (PCV pipe mounting) Bolt (oil separator mounting) Bolt (PCV valve mounting)

Tightening torque

Remarks

4.0 {0.4}

54 {5.5}

24 {2.4}

17-29


BLOWBY GAS RETURN SYSTEM Lubricant and/or sealant Mark

Points of application O-ring

Specified lubricant and/or sealant

Quantity

Engine oil

As required

Mitsubishi 6M70 Engine Parts contact: email: EngineParts@HeavyEquipmentRestorationParts.com Phone: 269 673 1638

LAST PAGE


Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.